ANCIENT

INDIAN

TRADITION S E R I E S

AND

M Y T H O L O G Y [PURNAS

IN TRANSLATION] VOLUMES IVA 1-4 7-11

L I G A 5-6 BHGAVATA NRADA G A R U D A 12-14 15-19 22-26 K R M A 20-21 BRAHMNPA A G N I 27-30 V A R H A 31-32 BRAHMA PADMA 33-36 39-48 V Y U 37-38 S K A N D A , P A R T S I-VIII 49-56 VOLUMES UNDER PREPARATION

SKANDA, PARTS IX-XXIV BHAVISYA BRAHMAVAIVARTA DEVB HGA V ATA KLIK MRKANDEYA MATSYA VMANA VISNU VISNUDHARMOTTARA

THE

GARUDA-PURNA
Translated and Annotated by

A BOARD OF SCHOLARS

PART I

MOTILAL BANARSIDASS PUBLISHERS PRIVATE LIMITED DELHI

First Edition: Delhi. 1978 Reprint: Delhi, 1990, 1995 MOTILAL BANARSIDASS PUBLISHERS PRIVATE LIMITED All Rights Reserved ISBN: 81-208-0344-2

Also available at: MOTILAL BANARSIDASS

41 U.A. Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar, Delhi 110 007 120 Royapcllah High Road, Mylapore, Madras 600 (X)4 16 St. Mark's Road, Bangalore 560 001 Ashok Rajpalh, Patna 800 004 Chowk, Varanasi 221 001

UNESCO COLLECTION OF REPRESENTATIVE WORKSIndian Series This book has been accepted in the Indian Translation Series of the UNESCO Collection of Representative Works, jointly sponsored by the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) and the Government of India

PRINTED IN INDIA BY JAINENDRA PRAKASH JAIN AT SHRIJAINENDRA PRESS, A-45 NARAINA, PHASE I, NEW DELHI 110 028 AND PUBLISHED BY NARENDRA PRAKASH JAIN FOR MOTILAL BANARSIDASS PUBLISHERS PRIVATE LIMITED, BUNGALOW ROAD, DELHI 110 007

PUBLISHER'S

NOTE the ocean or

T h e p u r e s t g e m s lie h i d d e n i n the b o t t o m o f i n t h e d e p t h o f r o c k s . O n e has' t o d i v e i n t o t h e in the l a n g u a g e that truth. B u t h e h a s neither the m e a n s nor the that course. We have, therefore, Ancient Indian Tradition and which with the passage

ocean or delve

i n t o t h e r o c k s t o f i n d t h e m o u t . S i m i l a r l y , t r u t h lies c o n c e a l e d of time has become before he discovers leisure to e m b a r k on the series o f obsolete. M a n has to learn that language

planned to help him acquire in The English Translation. publication of the

knowledge by an easier course. We have started Mythology

O u r goal is to universalize knowledge through the most p o p u l a r international medium of expression. P u r n a s in English translation is a step towards that goal.

PREFACE T h e present V o l u m e contains the Garuda Purana P a r t I I t i s t h e twelfth i n t h e Mythology.

( c h a p t e r s 1-146) i n E n g l i s h t r a n s l a t i o n . The 1970 by project late

s e r i e s of fifty V o l u m e s on Ancient Indian Tradition and

o f t h e series w a s e n v i s a g e d a n d f i n a n c e d i n

L a l a Sunderlal J a i n , the Veteran enterprizer in of the Series,

the field of Oriental Publication a n d the leading partner M e s s r s M o t i l a l B a n a r s i d a s s . H i t h e r t o twelve V o l u m e s including the present one, a n d o n e V o l . o f the r e l e a s e d for s a l e . The in Garuda Purna is n o r m a l l y classified as a Vaisnava treatP u r n a , b u t , i n fact, this P u r n a i s n o n - s e c t a r i a n a n d c o s m o p o l i t a n , character.- I t s e n c y c l o p e d i c n a t u r e i s r e f l e c t e d i n the Metrics, in addition to the m e n t of multifarious or miscellaneous subjects such as M e d i c i n e , Astrology, Palmistry, legitimate translation. topics of a P u r n a . T h i s variety of topics needed a task which could not be a c c o m p l i s h e d by a m e r e elucidation ( t h a t is, four V o l s , of t h e t w o V o l s , of t h e Liga Purna, five V o l s , Garuda Purna) of the iva Purna, Bhgavata Purna published a n d

have been

H e n c e t h e p r o v i s i o n h a s b e e n m a d e for t h e f o o t n o t e s . F u r t h e r , t o help the r e a d e r u n d e r s t a n d the b a c k g r o u n d of the subject matter, an introduction has been added to this V o l u m e . A list o f A b b r e v i a t i o n s i s a l s o p r e f i x e d for t h e c o n v e n i e n c e o f t h e r e a d e r . Acknowledgment of Obligations

It is o u r p l e a s a n t d u t y to p u t on record our sincere gratitude t o Dr. S . K . Chatterjee, D r . V . R a g h a v a n , D r . R . N . D a n dekar, Shri K . R . K r i p a l a n i a n d the authorities o f the U N E S C O for t h e i r k i n d e n c o u r a g e m e n t and valuable help which render hisin this w o r k m o r e useful t o s c h o l a r s t h a n it would otherwise h a v e especially

b e e n . W e m u s t a l s o t h a n k S h r i T . V . P a r a m e s w a r I y e r for v a l u a b l e spade-work which lightened our l a b o u r the initial stage.

Editor

CONTENTS
ABBREVIATIONS INTRODUCTION PART I Chapters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 I n c a r n a t i o n s of V i s n u T r a d i t i o n of G a r u d a P u r n a S t a t e m e n t of C o n t e n t s B e g i n n i n g of C r e a t i o n C r e a t i o n of P r o g e n i t o r s D e s c r i p t i o n of f a m i l i e s W o r s h i p o f t h e sun, e t c . Worship of Visnu and V a j r a n b h a m a n d a l a Visnu-diks Worship of Laksm Nava-vyha worship of Visnu O r d e r of worship Visnupajarastotra Meditation Visnu-sahasra-nma-stotra Contemplation of H a r i and Sun-worship Sun-Worship Worship of Amrtea M r t y u j a y a Prnevar Vidy M a n t r a s for r e m o v i n g p o i s o n Worship of Paca-vaktra iva Worship of T r i p u r Adoration of Asana A s s i g n m e n t of limbs over the body M a n t r a s to cure snake-bite Worship of G o p l a Trailokya-mohini Worship of rdhara Worship of Visnu Worship of Paca-tattvas Pages 1 6 " 15 19 23 29 31 33 34 35 39 41 42 44 72 74 75 78 81 83 84-86 93 94 95 97 97 100 101 104 108 xiii xv-xxxv

22-23Worship of iva

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 58

Worship of S u d a r a n a Worship of Hayagrva Worship of G y a t r M e t h o d of performing S a n d h y Gyatr kalpa Worship of D u r g Worship of the S u n Worship of M a h e v a r a M a n t r a s to obtain W o m e n Pavitrropana of iva Pavitrropana of V i s n u C o n t e m p l a t i o n of B r a h m a n or V i s n u ' s form Characteristics of l a g r m a Vstu-pj Characteristics of Palaces Installation of idols Four Varnas and ramas D a i l y r o u t i n e for t h e a s p i r a n t Charity Pryacitta Eight nidhis D e s c r i p t i o n of the planets

112 114 119 120 122 123 126 129 132 133 136 140 142 146 150 153 163 167 175 178 181 182-190 191 194-201 203-205 218 220 224 228 232 236 238 240 242 242 243 244 245 246

54-57Bhuvana-koa 59-62Astrology 63-65Physiognomy 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 Astrology Svarodaya or Pavana-vijaya O n t h e test o f G e m s D i a m o n d O n t h e test o f G e m s P e a r l s O n t h e test o f G e m s R u b y O n the test o f G e m s E m e r a l d O n t h e test o f G e m s S a p p h i r e O n t h e test o f G e m s L a p i s L a z u l i O n t h e test o f G e m s T o p a z O n t h e test o f G e m s K a r k e t a n a O n t h e test o f G e m s B h s m a m a n i O n t h e test o f G e m s P u l a k a O n t h e test o f G e m s B l o o d s t o n e O n t h e test o f G e m s C r y s t a l

xi 80 81 87 91 92 107 O n t h e test o f G e m s C o r a l Sacred Places Fourteen Manus Worship of Hari Meditation on Visnu of Yjavalkya Teachings of Parara 246 247 251-265 268 272, 275, 282 282 284 286 323 327-365 365-397 398 402 407 409 410 413 416 417 421

82-86Greatness of G a y 88-90Story of R u c i

93-106Teachings

108-115Brhaspati-nti-Sra 116-137Sacred Rites (Vratas) 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 T h e Solar Dynasty T h e Lunar Dynasty G e n e a l o g y of the P a u r a v a s G e n e a l o g y o f the P a u r a v a s a n d o t h e r s Greatness of St T h e Story of R m a Incarnation of K r s n a T h e S t o r y o f the M a h b h r a t a Description of Diseases

INTRODUCTION THE As a class of Indian politics religion, a n d other Purna PURNADEFINITION literature philosophy, subjects has the and Purna supplies as deals with ancient sociology,

history,

geography,

t h e m a t e r i a l for t h e Pacalakjana a n d (sarga), primal Genealogy

1

study of various branches of knowledge a n d ancient wisdom. The lution (iv) and been defined (i) Manu (iii) as is s u p p o s e d to contain five t o p i c s : Periods of time with (iv) Creation the (ii) D i s s o ( vama), ancestor

a n d R e - c r e a t i o n {pratisarga), History But

(manvantara) a n d F o r , the

of R o y a l dynasties both solar this definition i s less inadequate. than the five u n d e r t h e title ' P u r n a '

l u n a r (vamnucarita). texts that have

come to us

c o n t a i n either something m o r e or something characteristics. themselves w h o later on a d o p t e d

T h i s fact was noticed by the P u r n i c r e d a c t o r s a daalakfana2 d e f i n i t i o n t h a t

suited the P u r n i c text. B u t this t o o i s n o t a s t a n d a r d d e f i n i t i o n . F o r , t h e P u r n a s contain aspects that are not covered by any of the teristics. Besides, some of the definition a r e not found in certain P u r n a s . I n fact, t h e P u r n a a s a c l a s s r e p r e s e n t s or aspects of composition
1 1. 1. For,

ten

charac-

characteristics covered by this different phases

Indian that
details 1.

life

in

diverse

ages.

It is not possible, or
also

t h e r e f o r e , t o a d o p t a s t a n d a r d d e f i n i t i o n for t h e c l a s s o f l i t e r a r y contains
see Kirfel

heterogeneous phases
: Das Purna Pacalaksana;

aspects.
Brahmnda 14;

3 7 - 3 8 ; Vyu 4 . 1 0 - 1 1 ; Matsya 5 3 , 65;Krma 1 . 1 . 1 2 ; Garuda 1 . 2 2 3 . 1 . 4 1 ; Bhavisya 1. 2. 4 - 5 . (600 the famous lexicographer

Vrha 2 . 4 . ; Vmana Amarasirhha, Amarakoia. 2

A. D . ) , also includes the known 7.9-10). as

p a c a l a k s a n a d e f i n i t i o n i n h i s l e x i c o n NmalignuSsana, p o p u l a r l y F o r the d a a l a k s a n a definition, s e e Bhgavala Purna (xii

ABBREVIATIONS CDHM A Classical Dictionary of H i n d u : John Dawson to 1968) Literature : Mythoand

logy CSL A

(Routledge

K e g a n Paul L t d , L o n d o n : Companion Sanskrit

S . C . Banerji (Motilal Banarasidass, Delhi, 1971) GPEA Garuda PurnaEka Adhyayana Avasthi 1968) GVDB Glossary tray MBHK of Vegetable Drugs 1972) I, II) : Ram in Brhat : K.C. Chamekar Varanasi, (Chawkhamba (Kailash Prakashan : A.B. Lucknow,

Sanskrit Series, Kumar Rai MS PE Maitryan

M a h b h r a t a K o a (Parts V a r a n a s i 1964, 1966)

( C h a w k h a m b a Sanskrit Series Sarhhit Delhi (Gyan Monier

Purnic Encyclopedia : (English Version) V e t t a m M a n i (Motilal Banarsidass, 1975)

PK SED SKD SSED

Paurnika

Koa :

R.P.

Sharma :

mandala Ltd. Varanasi, Sariivat2028) A Sanskrit-English abdakalpadruma Delhi, 1964) T h e Students' V.S. 1973) VC VINS VN A Vedic Concordance : Maurice Bloomf i e l d ( M o t i l a l B a n a r s i d a s s , D e l h i , 1964) Vedic Index of N a m e s and Subjects (Vols. I, I I ) Macdonell & K e i t h , 1967) Nidarik Schan : R. S. Sinha Vibhga, LuckVanausadhi now 1969) Apte Sanskrit-English Dictionary Banarsidass, Delhi (Motilal Dictionary Williams (Motilal Banarsidass, Delhi, 1974) (Motilal Banarsidass,

(Hindi Samiti,

xvi

Garuia

Purna of points

M o r e o v e r , a definition formed on the n u m e r i c a l basis c a n n o t be perfect.1 We can, however, times, describe contains the Purna as a

class of in arts, astrology and theism,

literature that deals with the legends of gods, a s u r a s , sages a n d kings of ancient sciences, aspects abstracts into of works music, medicine, grammar, dramaturgy,

a n d other subjects, pantheism, love ceremonies.2 lopedia of religious, political.3

affords insight

different

phases

of Hinduismits of G o d , and

mythology,

idol-worship,

p h i l o s o p h y , s u p e r s t i t i o n , festivals a n d medieval Hinduism historical, i n all its t r a i t s social and

I n brief, t h e P u r n a s c o n s t i t u t e a p o p u l a r e n c y c personal,

ancient

philosophical,

ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT The or the t e r m a s (i) term of TO Purna old (ii) connotes
5

simply

an

old
8

narrative4 derived the to or

record

events. TO

Ancient

writers

Hfar^ (Hi) <TTT *prfir. A c c o r d i n g of literature called P u r n a

S k a n d a 7 a n d M a t s y a 8 P u r n a s a n d the M a h b h s y a 9 o f Patajali, there w a s at first a single work Purna-Samhit. ed with the around the rise o f a massive form. underwent But when the process of interpolation sectarianism in I n d i a , the P u r n a sect b u i l t and Each start-

assumed

u p a s t r u c t u r e o f its d o c t r i n e s T h e original P u r n a itself i n t o V a i s n a v a , shaped

nucleus of ancient material. different forms

aiva and Brahma Purnas. CLASSIFICATION T h e P u r n a is d i v i d e d into two classes : ( i ) M a h - P u r n a

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Dr.

Pusalker

Studies in

the Epics and Purnas, X.,

Intro.

W i n t e r n i t z : HIL. I. 5 2 9 . Encyclopaedia of Religion V y u 1. 1 2 3 . M a t s y a 53-63. Ibid. 1. 2 0 3 ; 53.4. KD u n d e r P u r n a . TOuiiHi^m'kfctH Ahnika I. W l ^ *R S k a n d a . R e v M h t m y a 1. 23, 30. Matsya Patajali and Ethics,. V o l p, 4 4 8 .

: Mahbhsya,

Introduction (ii) Upa-Purna.1 The E a c h class consists classified

xvii of eighteen P u r n a s . 2 mainly into three a s they The

T h u s the numbei of

the P u r n a s i s thirtysix.

Mah-Purnas are

c a t e g o r i e s V a i s n a v a , B r a h m a and a i v a in proportion P u r n a s glorifying V i s n u a r e styled as S t t v i k a , those Brahma Tmasa.

3

a c c o r d preferential treatment t o V i s n u , B r a h m a a n d iva. as Rjasa be and to those this glorifying Agni and

glorifying iva as

According

description the

eighteen M a h -

purnas can as under: Sttvika: Rjasa: Tmasa:

classified

into S t t v i k a ,

Rjasa and T m a s a Vyu.

Bhgavata, Visnu, Garuda, Brahmnda, Liga,

Matsya, Krma,

Skanda, P a d m a , V m a n a , V r h a , Agni, Brahmavaivarta, Brahma, Aditya.

Bhavisya.

Mrkandeya,

I t i s r e m a r k a b l e t o n o t e t h a t i n the list o f T m a s a P u r n a s the Garuda

4

Purna

mentions not

Aditya on

Purna this

instead

of For

Nrada.

T h e Purnas are Matsya, Krma and

unanimous which only

division.

i n s t a n c e , a m o n g the t t v i k a P u r n a s , t h e P a d m a P u r n a 5 o m i t s Vyu retains list. are the replaced by N r a d a , Bhgavata, Visnu and the R j a s a Purnas the out Padma and Vrha,

G a r u d a o f the

Garuda

Among

P a d m a P u r n a retains only the V m a n a P u r n a b u t leaves

1 2 3 F o r d e t a i l s s e e R. G. H a z r a M r k a n d e y a P. 53. 68-69. : Studies i n the Upapurnas, 2 V o l s . 223, 15-20.

B h g a v a t a X I I . 7. 22-24; G a r u d a I.

. d j < ^ w TT^RiR ^T^PJ

ftrerF

^ I II

^fW"*
4 5

S T W f J I T : PfiTTt ^

fTOt

G P I I I . 1. 5 5 P a d m a P. U t t a r a k h a n d a 263. 81-84.

rr% ^ *rf?rrPT aTwrfa forte *t u

T R = 5 T cTTT TO' mTJi w s r e s f t OlfH+lfa TOTTf^ fafqTfr ipufa t II

r^rro w^rt^f TFf

cpfcr ^ i

xviii Skanda, Padma, Vrha are replaced by and Mrkandeya mnda; of the

Garuda a n d A g n i f r o m t h e R j a s a list Brahma, Among the Brahma Tmas

Purna which

Brahmnda, Bhavisya.

vaivarta, Purnas and Aditya this

P a d m a P u r n a retains only the Brahma-Vaivarta, Garuda

L i g a Purna but omits BrahMrkandeya

Brahma,

list. I n s t e a d , i t i n c l u d e s M a t s y a , K r m a , i v a , which b e c o m e s m o r e c o m p l i c a t e d by the

S k a n d a a n d A g n i . T h u s w e f i n d t h a t t h e r e i s confusion i n k i n d o f classification

s t a t e m e n t o f S k a n d a P u r n a 1 w h i c h a s s i g n s ten P u r n a s t o i v a , four t o B r a h m a , t w o e a c h t o D e v i a n d V i s n u . Y e t another kind of classification is r e c o r d e d in b h g a v a t a 2 which names the mah-Purnas by the Devi initial their

l e t t e r s e x c e p t t h e G a r u d a w h i c h i t m e n t i o n s b y t h e full n a m e . N U M B E R OF T H E PURNAS According pyana ancient harsana. a m o n g his Vysa The to the and Visnupurna,3 a imparted it the sage K r s n a D v a i the various Romaand and disciple

compiled

P u r n a s a m h i t from to his his o w n

episodes

latter c o m p o s e d

Purnasamhit Svarni

disciples K y a p a

( = Akrtavrana),

m a p y a n a c o m p o s e d their o w n . nal Purnasarhhits. ten. T h e V y u p u r n a specifies

T h e s e four w e r e t h e o r i g i the Purnas as

T h i s was the first s t a g e . the n u m b e r o f

T h i s r e p r e s e n t s t h e s e c o n d s t a g e i n the d e v e l o p m e n t o f t h e

P u r n a s . T h e traditional n u m b e r eighteen is the final stage.

1. Skanda P. Kedra Khanda 1: W O T 2. TO^

wrfWht

ftra: I

S^rr fFHTf swt < P T T %\x: II Devi B h g a v a t a 1. 3.

3.

Visnu P. I I I . 6.15.

Introduction The (1) .iva), (12) traditional Brahma, (5) Vrha, list as given by most of the Visnu, (7)

xix Purnas

comprises t h e following : (2) Padma, (6) (10) (3) (4) V y u (or Mrkandeya, (11) Liga, (15) K r m a , authenticity there is a for i v a . 1 Bhgavata, (13) Nradya, (14)

(8) Agni, ( 9 ) Bhavisya,

Brahma-vaivarta, Vmana, the or

Skanda, are regard

( 1 6 ) Matsya, (17) Garuda, T h e Purnic scholars of the Purnas. But in difference of opinion.

(18) Brahmnda. agreed upon to of Vyu iva

Majority

the P u r n a s include i v a

P u r n a i n t h e list w h i l e a few o t h e r s s u b s t i t u t e V y u GARUDA PURNA :

THE NOMENCLATURE discuss their n o m e n c l a t u r e . 2 S o

T h e Purnas themselves far as the G a r u d a O n the Purna

is concerned it is so called because P u r n a 3 the G a r u d a Purna calls it the author of D n a Sauparna are

t h e s p e a k e r o f this P u r n a i s G a r u d a himself. evidence of the B h g a v a t a P u r n a was also called S a u p a r n a . sgara, m e n t i o n s T r k s y a nibandha-granthas, are often used synonyms the which The Vyu

V a i n a t e y a , Alberuni* as T r k h y a . Ballla, terms Trksya, according made to under

i n the list o f M a h - P u r n a s . I n t h e Vainateya, Sanskrit the lexicons

of Garuda. quotations names Trksya, It

B u t the is not certain of the Garuda

V a i n a t e y a or S a u p a r n a a r e not found in the extant G a r u d a . whether these

q u o t a t i o n s e x i s t e d i n t h e o l d text Purna that

P u r n a w h i c h , l a t e r o n , suffered c h a n g e i n t h e

h a n d s of redactors or whether they b e l o n g e d to a

w a s q u i t e different f r o m t h e e x t a n t t e x t c a l l e d G a r u d a . T h e P u r n a is called G a r u d a because the original speaker is G a r u d a who narrates it to K a y a p a . T h e to Vysa and Vysa to iva. ARRANGEMENT The Garuda
1. 2. 3. 4.

latter narrates

it

Purna

in Vekatesvara Edition, on which

F o r details, see introduction to i v a P u r n a , P a r t I E n g . T r a n s . iva Purna, U m Sarhhit 44. 125-135. B h g a v a t a P u r n a X I I . 13. 8 . Alberuni : I n d i c a I. p. 130.

XX

Garuda

Purna

the present translation is b a s e d , consists of three p a r t s ( k n d a s ) : (i) cra or karma, ( i i ) preta or dharma Acra K n d a is knda (Section I I I ) . T h e c r a k n d a is called with K a r m a n , it concerns religion. 1. 2. 3. karma knda b e c a u s e it Moksa deals knda T h e p r e t a k n d a i s c a l l e d dharma T h e B r a h m a k n d a is called knda b e c a u s e known as (iii) Brahma or moksa. (Section I ) , prva khanda

Preta as uttara khanda (Section I I ) , Brahma knda as Moksa-

because it leads to salvation. T h u s cra ( = karma) knda1 preta (= dharma) knda2 Brahma (= moksa) knda3 T h e t h r e e S e c t i o n s (khandas) chapters in the Sections is not Prvakhanda Uttarakhanda Uttarakhanda a r e d i s t i n c t a n d differ w i d e l y The number of uniform. For instance, the

from one another in form as also in content.

c r a - k n d a c o n s i s t s o f c h a p t e r s 1 - 2 4 0 , p r e t a k n d a o f 1 -49 a n d B * " i h m a k n d a o f 1-29. B u t i n s p i t e o f this d i f f e r e n c e , the t h r e e Garuda Purna. T h i s threefold Sections together constitute the

d i v i s i o n is r e c o g n i z e d in t h e Garuda Purna* itself. GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE cra-knda A s previously r e m a r k e d , the G P . consists o f three k n d a s : (i) Acra (ii) Of Dharma and (iiij Brahma. cra {karma) charathe
^pwt

KNPAS

knda c o n s i s t s o f 2 4 0 c h a p t e r s , i s t h e b i g g e s t o f t h e t h r e e k n d a s in dimension. cteristics of

1.

these 14 d e a l with the five principal 48 with the

:

the

Purnas,

m e d i c i n e , 53 with
^fgf irret I^TyCFI The

Colophon of c r a k n d a Ch I reads +*?+(<i3 Hd^luiH^rrl^H^Mui

SWrrerreJf

*m STspftssiTFT: I

colophons I : ^% of

o f t h e o t h e r c h a p t e r s o f this k h a n d a r e a d T R T X W r i n s t e a d o f 2. Colophon of the p r e t a k n d a fefkmret K h a n d a read (Uttara snl+|u2 sfcnT'i?

r

+^+("5 I reads

Khanda)

Ch. I The

s f r r r e i TfTJ^ror

Colophons 5RT^?<fr |

the other C h a p t e r s of this 3 4. C o l o p h o n of

5M+|v

or

the B r a h m a k n d a

(Uttara Khanda) w^mof :

Chapter I reads smtsarw: i

fftf s f t T r e t * T f i w < J f

^d iVi*tHi2

'dTKyf ^ftoisr

Vide B r a h m a k n d a Ch. I Verses 47-48

ftfftrs m*\4 ?r*rrg: i

Introduction worship of deities, morals, 13 61 with the Dharmastra with

xxd
matter, 8 with miscellaneous with lapidary science, a n d 43

topics, such as astrology, physiognomy, etc. Dharma-[Preta-) knda with the subject of death, karman. It throws and release from

D h a r m a - (Preta-) k n d a deals metempsychosis, karman light on the o m e n s and dreams. death, causes for t h e S a t .

of d e a t h , the p a t h to Y a m a , the fate of the as causes of omens rites to be performed at the time of of the pretas, d e s c r i b i n g the

pretas, the torments of hells a n d the p r e t a s It describes There are funeral of their

rites, a n c e s t o r w o r s h i p a n d s p e c i a l f u n e r a l r i t e s legends wretched existence which recall the Buddhist

legends recorded in Petavatthu. Brahma-knda Available contains a only in the the Vekatesvara lord edition, this section dialogue between at Krsna and a n d G a r u d a on the other Trthas (chs

supremacy of Visnu, of Vekatevara 23-27). It criticises

n a t u r e a n d forms o f g o d s , description Tirupati doctrines of U p d h i , M y , Avidy,

shrine

a n d upholds the doctrine of M a d h v a ' s d v a i t a school.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PURANA

APPLIED TO T H E GARUDA PURANA T h e G a r u d a P u r n a gives m o r e attention to extraneous

s u b j e c t s t h a n t o s u b j e c t s t h a t fall u n d e r t h e l e g i t i m a t e l a k s a n a o f P u r n a . F o r instance, of the 240 chapters in the P r v a - K h a n d a , 14 chapters deal deal sarga). with the Section I, with primary the Pacalaksana. secondary Section I, creation Chs 4-5 gods and of and (sarga-prati-

ch. 6 d e a l s with the genealogies of 138-141 deal with the

s a g e s (vama). S e c t i o n I , c h s 8 7 - 9 0 w i t h t h e a g e s o f M a n u s (manvantard). S e c t i o n I , c h s . kings {Rja-varha). genealogy T h e history of R o y a l dynasties is treated in of creachapters

a very condensed form a n d interspersed with the genealogies of R o y a l dynasties ( S e c t i o n I , chs 1 3 8 - 1 4 1 ) . T h e subject tion a n d dissolution is taken up 54-58
1. Kashirj

again

in

section

and

224 respectively.
1-109All I n d i a

For detail G P . A S t u d y by N. G a g d h a r a n , p p . Trust, Varanasi.

xxii (i) Creation (sarga)1 god Visnu assumes the

Garuda

Purna

T h e supreme

form

of Brahma, he

a n d as B r a h m a , he begins the process of creation. T h o u g h devoid which manifests Rajas and of attributes, he are

As Visnu,

protects the world. As R u d r a , he destroys the universe.2 has an inherent E n e r g y for creation, m a i n of B r a h m a The cosmic the form of itself in the form of three principlesSattva, responsible lord in the

T a m a s which

tenance a n d dissolution of the universe. Accordingly, the egg is insentient at supreme but the form lord in creates the cosmic e g g consisting of 24 principles. first when B r a h m a p e r v a d e s it, i t g o e s i n m o t i o n . c r e a t i o n a r e e v o l v e d o u t o f it. C r e a t i o n is classified i n t o 3 c a t e g o r i e s : Secondary and Primary-Secondary. a r r a n g e d a s follows: P r i m a r y sri^cr (1) = fkm S e c o n d a r y ffcr ( 4 ) Tg&m insentient o b j e c t s (**TRT)
(2) jcrePT = M <id'mdi

T h u s different k i n d s o f (i) Primary, (ii) categories are

The

three

(Vide G P . I. 4) Primary-Secondary *fifrrPC mind-born sons of Brahma

(Intellect a n d E g o )

( 5 ) f t p J ^ r sRra animals (6)

(Five subtle elements)

(3) ^P -sW+ SPT

&m

Five organs of action Manas

Divine Beings

F i v e o r g a n s o f k n o w l e d g e ( 7 ) snrfo ?ftcTCr human T h i s threefold creation is ( 8 ) called prkrta. beings

m
T h i s single creati o n is called Prkrta-Vaikrta.

sentient beings T h i s five-fold creation is called Vaikrta.

2 . " G P . 1.124.3, 6 ^

cf. G P . I . 4 .

11-12.

Introduction

xxiii

A c c o r d i n g t o t h e P u r n a s , t h e n i n e f o l d c r e a t i o n refused t o proceed on the work of creation. t w o O n e half in the form the form of a man. of B r a h m a divided himself into a w o m a n a n d the o t h e r h a l f i n Satarp who began the

In that h a l f form of a w o m a n he c r e a t e d

a coupleSvyambhuva Mann and work of creation. (ii) Re-creation after Dissolution

(pratisarga)1 permanent feature,

T h e c r e a t i o n o f the u n i v e r s e i s n o t a for a l l c r e a t i o n s e n d

in dissolution which in turn

give p l a c e to

r e - c r e a t i o n . T h e d e s c r i p t i o n o f this p r o c e s s c o n s t i t u t e s o n e o f t h e five m a i n features of a m a h - P u r n a . T h e process dissolutions As the Purnas of dissolution is c o m p l i c a t e d . a creation lasts for a For, several o c c u r before relate, the u n i v e r s e i s c o m p l e t e l y manvantaras. dissolved.

d a y of B r a h m a

e q u a l to the a g e of fourteen contains

At the end of each

m a n v a n t a r a , there occurs a dissolution. fourteen dissolutions. during the life

T h u s a d a y of B r a h m a

I n like m a n n e r , dissolution when

of

the

creator, several complete The

creations a n d dissolutions take p l a c e .

T h e n occurs a

the c r e a t o r h a s c o m p l e t e d his life-time.

elements a r e dissolved a n d m e r g e d into the b o d y of the creator. T h e c r e a t o r t a k e s rest for s o m e t i m e a n d t h e n s t a r t s the of re-creating the universe. In this way, we dissolutions a n d re-creations succeeding each (iii) Genealogies (yatha) T h e G a r u d a P u r n a deals with in c r a knda (chapters 138-141). as regards several Vyu tradition dynasties. the Genealogies of kings P u r n a follows t h e other other. process h a v e a series o f

The

the solar dynasty, from V a i v a s v a t a historical dynasties which the other

M a n u onwards a n d the c o m m o n tradition r e g a r d i n g the It omits Purnas describe.

1.

B h g a v a t a P u r n a X I I . 7.12.

Introduction The Garuda K and Vaili. son of Iksvku. Ayodhy and Purna The deals

XXV

with the dynasties o f K o a l a , confuses t h e d y n a s t i e s o f line of

V i d e h a dynasty descended from N i m i , certain kings from the

The

Garuda Purna

Videha, omitting

V i d e h a a n d a d d i n g these to o f A y o d h y line. c o n t e x t , the tions B r h a d r a t h a s 1 who Purna

t h e line o f V i k u k s i , t h e o r i g i n a t o r Purna menI n this will be in that pre-Bimbisra age. the Brhadrathas

A m o n g the M a g a d h a kings the lived records

succeeded by impious a n d d r a kings.2 T h e B r h a d r a t h a s o f M a g a d h a were the successors o f the Brhadbala Iksvku.3 dynasty father which the of descended from the Solar race of uddhodana of and the son He of was According to Garuda Purna, Buddha,

Kapilavastu,

Gautama

k y a was A i k s v k a v a . 4 T h i s is confirmed by M a h v a s t u which states that u d d h o d a n a belonged to Iksvku dynasty. ( = S e n a j i t ) a n d his s o n K s u d r a k a . 6 1.

G P . 1. 1 4 1 . 9ff.

succeeded by B a h u l a ( = R h u l a ) . 5 R h u l a ' s son w a s Prasenajit

s r a ^ w ^rfV^ ^ftHN 5rf=ror*rf i

STUPT^ gg^ft Epf: $ w ? t ?QRT^p: II

2.

I b i d . 1. 1 4 1 . 1 2 . *raifa<>6i!M njaiiM Mfawfo ^m^f: I

3.

I b i d . 1. 1 4 1 . 5-8.

^56 ii*3

^>t%

^m%5crT5^?r3rr: u

< * c ^ M d : ^ p : H t ^ 5 K I ? T 3 r : II ^ ? ^ t l i r o i : HCI H M srtc^: i f ^ K ^ n g^TSM: f + H t i M M f e w . II : fretfsfst? f f ^ S T R T T a i f a + : I >d=-WT ER 3P: S ^ P T : H I M ^ ^ II

g l w : f^TSTTcT: g r H d M H I H I o - t t " ! II 4. 5. 6. Visnu Purna 4. Ibid. 22.8. G P . 1. 141. 8; Visnu Purna 4. 22.8.

S o n s o f V a i v a s v a t a M a n u a n d their S u c c e s s o r s 1 M a n u Vaivasvata Iksvku Vikuksi-ada I Ayodhy dynasty Nimi Videha dynasty Nbhnedista aryti Il

Vaial dynasty

Anarta

dynasty

I
Pururavas Aila

Ayu

Amvasu

Nahusa

Ksatravrddha

Rambha

Raji

Anenas

Knyakubja dynasty

Yati

Yayti K i dynasty Rjeya Ksatriyas Ksatradharmans

Yadu

Turvasu

Druhyu Gandhra dynasty Unara

Anu

Puru

I
Sahasrajit

I
Anavas Titksu Eastern dynasty

Turvasu

Pauravas

II I

atajit Haihaya Haihayas

1.

Turvasu line

Panjab

dynasty

G P . I . 1 3 8 . 1 ff.

xxvi Vaili Dynasty

Garuda

Purnar

Vaili dynasty descended from M a n u ' s son N b h n e d i s t a . T h i s dynasty is recorded in seven P u r n a s , but of this Purna are complete : those The dynasty in the Bhgavata and Garuda. only four lists Visnu, n a m e from Vyu,

d e r i v e d its

k i n g V i l a w h o f o u n d e d V i l o r V a i l a s his c a p i t a l . (iv) History of Royal Dynasties (vamnucarita) history o f form..

T h e G a r u d a P u r n a i s n o t b o t h e r e d a b o u t the royal dynasties. It treats the F o r instance, it does not history of P a r a u r m a , the in two verses.2 is taken up The again take up

subject in a very condensed

the narrative of king a d a recorded only

though it mentions w h y the king was called by that n a m e . 1 T h e son o f J a m a d a g n i i s of R m a , the entire history but the son of D a a r a t h a ,

w h i c h i s longer, i s r e c o r d e d i n e i g h t v e r s e s . 3 T h e story o f R m a account is condensed in context of f i f t y - o n e verses.* T h e h i s t o r y o f V r s n i v a r h a i n t h e in thirtynine;6 We find that the caritam) in still useful for older accounts. ( v ) The Ages of Manus (manvantaras) the comparison and historical sometimes

lord K r s n a is treated in eleven verses8 a n d t h a t of the P n d a v a s account (vamnufor e l u c i d a t i n g t h e G a r u d a P u r n a (is m e a g r e a n d s u c c i n c t b u t is-

T h e time durations b e c o m e manifest a s m a n v a n t a r a , y u g a , sarhvatsara a n d other relatively b i g g e r a n d smaller units in rotating wheel 1 3 5 7 of time. The vantaras in order. Svyambhuva Uttama Raivata Vaivasvata 2 4 6 8 Svrocisa Tmasa Cksusa Svarni the P u r n a s m e n t i o n fourteen m a n -

1. GP. I. 138. 19. srsrrc: srspTSTTffi I 2. Ibid. I. 142. 8-9. 3. Ibid. I. 142. 10-17. 4. Ibid. I. 143. 1-51. 5. Ibid. I. 144. 1-11. 6. Ibid. I. 145. 1-39.

Introduction 9 11 13 teen Daksa Bhautya Svarnj 10 12 Dharmaputra Raucya

xxvii

Rudraputra

T h e fourteen m a n v a n t a r a s derive their n a m e s from successive progenitors is M a n u who he and the sovereigns first and of is the Svyambhuva manvantara Svyambhuva Brahman. so called because

fourearth. is

k n o w n after

p r o d u c e d the ten p r a j p a t i s a n d

s p r a n g f r o m S v a y a m b h u , t h e self-existent

E a c h m a n v a n t a r a comprises 4,3200 h u m a n years or l/14th d a y of B r a h m a . taras is presided A c o m p l e t e set o f f o u r t e e n m a n v a n t a r a s of Brahma. over Each b y its o w n M a n u , g o d , makes up one whole d a y o f the fourteen m a n v a n seers a n d k i n g s . one

T h i s s c h e m e of creation a n d dissolution repeats itself from The Garuda Purna is no exception to the rule.

a g e o f M a n u t o a n o t h e r a n d i s d e s c r i b e d i n all t h e m a h - P u r n a s . Garuda P u r n a 1 m e n t i o n s t h e f o u r t e e n M a n u s , their sons, seers, d e i t i e s , lords of deities a n d asuras slain by Visnu who incarnates himself in e a c h of the fourteen m a n v a n t a r a s . DATE OF COMPOSITION

T h e G a r u d a Purna is a compilation of an encyclopaedic nature. duction.2 The In study view o f t h e t e x t r e v e a l s different s t a g e s o f p r o of the it additions is and to redactions fix t h e external during difficult d a t e of t h e evidence,

different p e r i o d s

of time

P u r n a as a whole.3 However, on the basis of internal a n d w e c a n s u g g e s t o n l y p r o b a b l e d a t e s for e a c h s e c t i o n s e p a r a t e l y . (i) Dharma section T h e earliest yudha in his reference to this P u r n a i s m a d e b y H a l According to P. V. K a n e , A.D.

Brhmana-sarvasva.

H a l y u d h a l i v e d i n t h e l a t t e r h a l f o f t h e 12th c e n t u r y
1. Purna G a r u d a P . 1 . 8 7 . 1-62; B h g a v a t a P . X I I . 7 . 15. in the enumeration of contents topics of dealt the

2. For example, (GP. Uttara-khanda. 3. R. G. H a z r a : Customs, pp. 141-145.

Garuda in the and

1.3.1-9) there is no mention of the Studies in the P u r n i c

with

Records on

Hindu Rites

xxviii Hemdri (1260-1270 pandits A.D.) quotes from

Garuda the

Purna Garuda

P u r n a i n his Caturvarga-cintmani, D a n a a n d V r a t a T h e Mithil Garuda Purna. Vidypati upon pati M i r a (1425-1490 A . D . ) They draw recognize it in the

khandas. of the

(1360-1448) a n d V c a s authority their works G a g Purna ; i n his

vkyvali a n d T r t h a c i n t m a n i respectively. G o v i n d n a n d a quotes rddhakaumudi, n a n d a n a in his G o p l a b h a t t a in Smrtitattva, from the and Garuda in his Varsakriykaumudi uddhikaumudi Raghuhis

Kamalkara

Nirnayasindhu,

his Haribhaktivilsa a n d the Garuda

R p a g o s v m i n in

Haribhaktirasmrtasindhu. T h e citations from Garuda Purna. Dr. Hazra on Prvakhanda. D r . K a n e holds the s a m e view. O n the strength o f verses conclusion A.D. that borrowed from Y j a v a l k y a a n d P a r a r a smrtis i n the D h a r m a section of the G a r u d a P u r n a he c o m e s to the this s e c t i o n c a n n o t b e e a r l i e r t h a n t h e s i x t h c e n t u r y Grammar I n the chapters o n G r a m m a r the G a r u d a reference to Pnini. of Pnini was discontinued in Purna omits A the P u r n a in the N i b a n d h a in in the the proposed by t e x t s p r o v i d e a further c l u e t o d a t e t h e D h a r m a s e c t i o n tenth basis century date has been of the Smrti chapters

We know from other sources that the study the early p a r t of the Christian and

era a n d the place o f Pnini w a s taken over b y K t y y a n a other g r a m m a r i a n s . in the G a r u d a third century A . D . Alamkra T h e portion on not refer to any the alakras on the in Purna were most probably

T h e Grammatical chapters of K t y y a n a c o m p o s e d in the

the G a r u d a P u r n a i s does

o l d e r t h a n the f i f t h c e n t u r y A . D . , for t h e G a r u d a P u r n a work writer, Medicine T h e preliminary bhata agree with the chapters of t h e As}gahrdaya o f medicine

alakras by n a m e or to any

t h o u g h there were works on rhetorics in that period.

Vg-

chapters on

in the G a r u d a

Introduction Purna. V g b h a t a flourished between the 7th and 9th the

xxix 8th

century A . D . T h u s the m e d i c i n a l chapters i n the G a r u d a P u r n a c o u l d not h a v e been written before the 8th or the A.D. Polity, Ethics A verse of the B r h a s p a t i Sarhhit of the occurs a m o n g the introductory verses B n a lived in the seventh century A . D . Garuda Purna
1

century

of Bna's K d a m b a r . A considerable Thus than the

period the the

o f t i m e b e a l l o w e d for t h e v e r s e t o 8th or the 9th century A . D . rule.

2

gain popularity.

Nti portion of the G a r u d a P u r n a cannot be earlier d e p i c t the helpless condition of the country d u r i n g T h i s i n itself i s sufficient to establish for this s e c t i o n o f the P u r n a . Geography The Garuda Purna (1.55.6) reads
i

M o r e o v e r , a n u m b e r of references foreign date a very late

< fwum

T ^ m ^ r T f i r ^ r I T ^ R F : fpqcrr:

A n d the G a r u d a P u r n a ( 1 . 5 5 . 1 7 )
q f t ^ r * NPTT *-<H-tai

reads the Turuskas and Andhras Turkish Muslim the

^fapfrr Jr^TT^rr i

According mentioned in

to

D.G.

Sircar,

the a b o v e

verse are no other t h a n the respectively. S i n d h by the

M u s a l m a n s a n d the conquerors. country was This

Kkatyas portion

T h e Mlecchas of

S i n d h u d e a refer t o t h e o c c u p a t i o n o f might overrun by Muslim

have been a d d e d when invaders from

Central Asia.

1 . G P . I . 1 1 2 . 1 6 ; cf. K d a m b a r , I n t r o d u c t o r y V e r s e 1 1 M+1 <WTf%^?p?rtq'U , l r<u|: fire T ^ r | f % O T F T 2. G P . I. 108. 7: ^T5ft f | 7 ; f i p W I b i d . I. 115. 3 I ^r.

I b i d . I. 115. 4 $ < i ^ i r r f e r sfrfircm fira<r fire^: i I b i d . I. 108. 6 ^ r a ^ r Tv^ *rf'sr: ^ z f ^ F K T m f i r e T ^ i ? fsrcfir T f l ^ T : I I

xxx T h u s the sections on

Garuda

Purna

G e o g r a p h y in the G a r u d a P u r n a could

n o t h a v e b e e n w r i t t e n e a r l i e r t h a n t h e 13th c e n t u r y A . D . Lapidary section V a r h a m i h i r a in his Brhatsamhit m e n t i o n s "22 g e m s b u t therefore the the Agni latter. of

the G a r u d a P u r n a t r e a t s o f o n l y 12. T h i s p o r t i o n i s not later than V a r h a m i h i r a (550 A . D ) . A c o m p a r i s o n b e t w e e n the G a r u d a P u r n a a n d P u r n a s h o w s t h a t t h e former w a s modelled upon

T h e G a r u d a P u r n a can b e dated i n the tenth century A . D . T h e G a r u d a P u r n a q u o t e s verses from t h o s e the K r m a P u r n a which ween 700-800 A . D . V g b h a t a , the author of the a^tga-hrdaya-sarhhit lived between the 8th a n d the 9th century A . D . T h e G a r u d a P u r n a cannot b e earlier t h a n a b o u t the m i d d l e o f the 9 t h century A . D . It is highly probable that the extant Garuda Purna was compiled between 850-1000 A . D . LOCALITY T h e three K n d a s into is divided are distinct ning a n d might have later on p u t together. craknia The Nibandha writers of that Mithil the quote verses from On works. been w h i c h the e x t a n t G a r u d a Each Knda produced Purna were portions a d d e d by the P u p a t a s bet-

h a s a fresh b e g i n -

a t different l o c a l i t y a n d

t h e c r a k n d a o f G a r u d a P u r n a i n their d h a r m a s t r a s . this b a s i s D r H a z r a r e m a r k s been produced in Mithila. Pretaknda craknda

might have

T h e K n d a , as previously stated, is a later addition. T h e internal evidence does n o t h e l p u s t o a s s i g n this k n d a t o a n y particular locality. Brahmaknia This K n d a deals with the greatness of Tirupati and

other V a i s n a v i t e sacred places, r r a g a , K c , etc., a n d s a c r e d

.Introduction

xxxi

r i v e r s s u c h a s K v e r l , B h m , N a r m a d , S v a r n a m u k h a n d hills such as r i m u s t a , raila, etc. a n d describes waterfalls hills. A s these s a c r e d p l a c e s , r i v e r s a n d hills a r e i n t h e this K n d a m i g h t h a v e b e e n w r i t t e n i n S o u t h I n d i a . B u t the foregoing d a t a is conjectural. adequate evidence it is origin o r c o m p i l a t i o n o f the w h o l e P u r n a . AUTHENTICITY T h e r e have time and been OF THE PRESENT to the TEXT In the absence of n o t possible, t o d e c l a r e t h e p l a c e o f in the South,

additions

P u r n a s from time to

Garuda Purna and in

is no exception. T a k i n g the Prva141-145 d e a l w i t h t h e i n c a r with and them narrate the Harivama, n o n e of named in replaced in ch. connection Mahbhrata

K h a n d a a t first, we find that chs nations stories of of Visnu the Rmyana,

w h i c h h a s b e e n referred t o i n t h e s y n o p s i s o f c o n t e n t s s t a t e d i n the G a r u d a Purna I. 3. T h e number of incarnations t h e c h a p t e r s 141-145 i s o n l y ten a n d h e r e V m a n a i s by Dhanvantari. This number is

not in agreement with that

given i n c h . I where 21 incarnations are n a m e d . Again t h e m t h e r e a r e four n a m e s , v i z . , R m a , vaja and N g a which are not lists o f i n c a r n a t i o n s cannot be ascribed

202 the n u m b e r of V i s n u ' s incarnations is seventeen1 a n d a m o n g Hayagrva, MakaradhT 1 ^se v a r y i n g Hence to one hand. found in ch. I.

these c h a p t e r s c a n n o t b u t b e s p u r i o u s . S o far a b o u t t h e P r v a k h a n d a . B u t t h e d e c i d e d l y a later a d d i t i o n . from the and these GP. verses in vilsa, G a r u d a h a s been are Madanaprijta, addressed found not Smrtitattva as "khaga" U t t a r a k h a n d a is are cited and Haribhakti F o r , in the verses which

"paksndra"

i n this k h a n d a . H e n c e , t h e

s p u r i o u s c h a r a c t e r o f this k h a n d a i s u n d e n i a b l e . GARUDA The Garuda PURANAA Purna is VAISNAVA ranked PURANA the Vaisnava his his speak

among

P u r n a s , for i t glorifies V i s n u v a r i o u s forms.

b y his v a r i o u s n a m e s a n d i n by

I n this r e s p e c t , i t follows t h e P a c a r t r a S c h o o l gamas

Edition.

of Vaisnava sampradya w h i c h e u l o g i s e s V i s n u f r e q u e n t l y n a m e s H a r i a n d N r y a n a . B u t the P a c a r t r a

1. Hazra: P u r n i c R e c o r d s P . 144, refers t o V a g a

xxxii

Garuda

Purna The

o f four V y h a s w h i l e t h e G a r u d a P u r n a m e n t i o n s n i n e . 1 nine (4) forms of Visnu: (1) Sudarana, ( 2 ) Hari, (6) Pradyumna, (ii)

G a r u d a P u r n a ( S e c t i o n 1 , C h a p t e r 12, V e r s e s 1 3 - 1 4 ) i n t r o d u c e s (3)Acyuta, (7) Sam(iii) Trivikrama, five (5) Vsudeva,

k a r s a n a , (8) A n i r u d d h a a n d ( 9 ) A n a n t a k a . B u t e l s e w h e r e 2 , i t mentions forms: (i) (iv) Vsudeva, Samkarsana, Pradyumna, place to Aniruddha and (v) Nryana. prominent describing his various forms which V i s n u

As a V a i s n a v a P u r n a , the G a r u d a P u r n a gives Visnu, assumed ions viz. for t h e p r o t e c t i o n (1) Matsya, Vrha, (9) (2) (6)

of the V e d i c d h a r m a a n d the desKrma, (3) (7) Dhanvantari4, (4) Paraurma, ( 8 ) (10) Krsna

truction of d a i t y a cult.3 T h i s section mentions twelve incarnatM o h i n (5) Rma Narasimha, Balarma (12)

Darathi, 10-12, t h e It viz. (5) omits (1) The

Vsudeva,

Vsudeva, (11) In I. 86. of Visnu. Vmana. avatras, Narasimha, K r s n a , (9)

Buddha,

K a l k i . T h i s list o m i t s V m a n a . and Mohin (3) (7) but includes ten (4) (8)

G a r u d a Purna mentions 11 incarnations Dhanvantari Purna (2) (6) Matsya, (1.86.10-11) Krma, Paraurma, mentions Varha, Rma,

Garuda Vmana,

Buddha

and (10) Kalki. T h e Garuda

Purna ( 1 . (1) Kumra (6) (10) Prthu,

3. 14-34) mentions 22 incarnations of V i s n u , viz. Datta, (7) Yaja, (8) U r u k r a m a (Rsabha), (9)

( 2 ) V a r h a , ( 3 ) N r a d a , (4) N a r a - N r y a n a ( 5 ) K a p i l a ,

1. G P . I . 11. 1.

2.

Ibid. 1.32.3-6 trap rrerpspr: ^rr^T: TOTTeTr *PTRre: II

4i<i,$=l vjjc. ws:

?r ITCR tot

sRarrrr

Prr^pr:
I

q s ^ r r *ft*Tct ^h: h

s f t + H f i r ^ T : <i|Mr<HI!R:

<rrr jrsfH^uufiresreSrT ^

few:

t k I ^ u i w ^ u i q ^ a T spur: fi=*Rr: 11 3. I b i d . 1. 1 4 2 . 1.

fazmtf ^TWIsf t ^ O T t f ^ c T ^

l|

4. Ibid. 1. 175. 1 mentions D h a n v a n t a r i as V i s n u :

Introduction Matsya, (11) Krma, (19) (12) Dhanvantari,

xxxiii (13) Mohini, ( 1 4 )

N a r a s i m h a , (15) V m a n a , (16) P a r a u r m a , (17) Vysa, (18) R m a Darathi, (22) K a l k i . describe 6-13) the Balarma, (20) Krsna, (21) Buddha, P u r n a verses are ( I . 1. 13-34) that of Visnu 6-26). V e r b a t i m found in the which include all The Garuda avatras (1.3.

Bhgavata Purna mentions

T h e G a r u d a P u r n a ( 1 . 196.

twenty-eight

incarnations

i n c a r n a t i o n s o f o t h e r lists. A m o n g the Visnubhakti. his n a m e s : deities glorified i n this Purna Visnu holds by

the s u p r e m e position. T h e G a r u d a P u r n a ( I . 227 f f ) d e a l s with In I. 233. Dmodara, Sage Mrkandeya glorifies V i s n u Adhoksaja, Varha, V m a n a , Visnu, Besides, the of Visnu

Narasimha, Janrdana, Mdhava, Purusa, Lokantha, Sahasrairas, D e v a , M a h y o g a , Yajayoni and V i v a r p a . G a r u d a Purna (1.15) records one thousand names

as the S u p r e m e B e i n g a n d mentions his attributes. In all these places the influence of B h g a v a t a cult is distinctly visible. S t i l l this deities too, Supreme Visnu ( I . others. N e x t to Visnu, iva holds a prominent place. H i s wors h i p , his V r a t a s s u c h a s i v a - r t r i , b u i l d i n g his t e m p l e , i n s t a l l a t i o n o f his i m a g e a r e d e s c r i b e d i n s e v e r a l c h a p t e r s . A m o n g the a i v i t e deities we find references to V i n y a k a , S k a n d a , V i k h a , D u r g and Seven Mothers (sapta-mtrks): Next to iva c o m e B r a h m a , I n d r a , Srya, Agni, and Vyu. T h u s we find that though the worship of other deities, the P u r n a describes it though no Visnu as Candra Purna cannot Purna be deemed as sectarian. For, as d e a l s with the worship of other the find the m o d e of worship of S r y a as a form of and

the study reveals, this Being. For

though it devotes greater attention to V i s n u as instance, we of worship

o f i v a ( I . 2 2 - 2 3 ) , the m o d e

17, 3 9 ) , t h e m o d e o f w o r s h i p o f D u r g ( I . 3 8 )

the S u p r e m e Being, identical with B r a h m a n ,

does not omit

other deity receives

more attention than Visnu. T h e eulogy of iva, Dvrg, S k a n d a ,

xxxiv G a n e a a n d other deities in an the strongst non-sectarian attendants. objects in entity Brahman.1 T h o u g h other treatment, Vaisnavite.2 yet deities of receive this equally is which testimony in The is that character. concept to designated

Garuda otherwise V a i s n a v a this The Purna other deities

Purna is

Purna are

attempts to remain Visnu's non-dual

o f Visnu a s B r a h m a annihilates all the concept as an of formless, indivisible an all-pervading honourable proproIt

the universe

portions

Purna Brahma,

are decidedly evidently of Visnu.

T h e last Section,

Vaisnava. It cannot

tolerate the non-devotees

i s very h a r d u p o n n o n - V a i s n a v i t e s . In between the nature of the supreme knowledge and not sectarian deity by

It shows e x t r e m e rigidity in

its p r e f e r e n c e for V i s n u o v e r o t h e r g o d s . and non-sectarian character of non-dual the who (kriy) . 3 can In be realized by C h . 226 the P u r n a there is a m a r k e d tendency to uphold the 'Visnu' worship

s u p r e m e lord is considered to be limitless, i m p e r s o n a l , non-dual, infinite a n d f o r m l e s s .

1. G P . I. 6. 72-73

T h e P u r n a refers t o t h e

i d e n t i t y o f the

2. Ibid. I I I .

12. 5 9 :

cre*m?

4KtU4

*recrpc

*m tfn n

Ibid. III.12.79

frnprgf wPi<^ w ftrfT

Ibid. 1.41

* ^rf?5i fifKofi: srsw ^ hi

3.

GP. 1.228.

Introduction Individual

XXXV

S e l f with t h e S u p r e m e S e l f a n d d e s c r i b e s the r e a l i as a whole we find that though and t h o u g h for different the by

z a t i o n o f this i d e n t i t y a s l i b e r a t i o n . 1 C o n s i d e r i n g the P u r n a the worship of V i s n u objects a n d desires the rest i n t h e p r e s c r i b e d focusing ion was made among predominates

a s p i r a n t i s a d v i s e d t o w o r s h i p different way, liberation could be achieved

deities2 I n d r a , Srya, Agni, Vinyaka, C a n d r a , V y u a n d

t h o u g h t o n V i s n u a l o n e . 3 I n this p r o c e s s n o d i s t i n c t the d e i t i e s B r a h m a , V i s n u a n d i v a . 4 Bhairava,

T h e P u r n a refers t o the c o m p o s i t e n a t u r e o f t h e s u p r e m e d e i t y i n t h e c o n c e p t o f A m r t e a w h o i s the e m b o d i m e n t o f ed in less, his S r y a , K r s n a , i v a a n d B r a h m a . 5 T h e S u p r e m e lordis conceivi m p e r s o n a l form, d e v o i d o f a t t r i b u t e s , p u r e , c h a n g e unborn, and devoid deep of acts, beyond the states of dream sleep, nameless, without beginning Brahma', 'ayam tm eternal,

waking, asi',

a n d w i t h o u t e n d . 8 I t i s k n o w n only b y t h e f o r m u l a s ' t a t t v a m 'aharh Brahmsmi', 'prajnam Such Brahma." concepts indicate the metaphysical trend a n d

t h e c o s m o p o l i t a n c h a r a c t e r o f the G a r u d a P u r n a .

1. G P .

I. 226, 227

Ibid. I. 226, 227

2.

Ibid. I. 5 1 . 16-20

3. Ibid. I. 51. 21

4.

Ibid. I. 51 h l 8 2ff

5 . Ibid. 6.

Ibid. I. 91

ff*rTTf|cf $3 ^wafaerfiW II

*rerfe ^^R'Hr^nri sr^rrfcr Wsr*^ n

CHAPTER ONE
Incarnations of 1. Visnu

I b o w to L o r d H a r i , the un-born, u n - a g e i n g , e n d l e s s , pure, beginof physical b o d y a n d sense-organs, the inner

identical with Knowledge, S u p r e m e , auspicious, ningless, devoid

p r e s i d i n g deity of all living b e i n g s , the u n s u l l i e d a n d the only o m n i p r e s e n t force that transcends all-illusions. 2. offer m y 3-5. With mind, obeisance speech and actions, ever and anon, I unto Hari, Rudra, Brahma, Ganea and

the G o d d e s s S a r a s v a t . T h e learned S t a , 1 well-versed in all p a u r n i k a l o r e , holy forest N a i m i s a 2 in ever-calm, a m a s t e r of all sacred scriptures a n d a g r e a t devotee o f L o r d V i s n u h a p p e n e d t o visit the contemplating adored by on t h e c o u r s e o f his p i l g r i m a g e . A s h e w a s s i t t i n g o n a h o l y s e a t t h e sinless L o r d V i s n u t h e l e a r n e d S t a w a s and other holy sages o f the Naimisa Saunaka3

f o r e s t t h e s a g e s w h o w e r e effulgent l i k e t h e s u n , y e t e v e r c a l m a n d ever e n g a g e d in the c e l e b r a t i o n of sacrifices. The Sages said 6. : we ask you, since you know everything. worthy of creates of the process almighty,

O Sta, ?

W h o , a m o n g the g o d s , i s the m o s t g o d l y , our worship 7. W h o m are we to contemplate Who

upon ? Who suppressor the

t h e u n i v e r s e ? W h o p r o t e c t s it ? source of religion ? wicked ? 8.

d e s t r o y s it ? W h o is t h e

W h o is known to be the

W h a t i s the f o r m o f t h a t What

G o d ? H o w is

of creation explained ?

a r e t h e r e l i g i o u s rites t o p r o p i -

tiate him ? By which Y o g a can he be attained ?

1 . T h e stas i n t h e P a u r n i k a a g e w e r e r e g a r d e d as venerable persons w h o preserved the g e n e a l o g i e s of deities, s a g e s a n d kings in the form of songs a n d b a l l a d s . [ V i d e d e t a i l s i n P {AITM) p . l . f n . 2 . ] 2. A forest n e a r the Gomat-river. H e r e S a u t i related the M a h b h r a t a to the s a g e s . (Also refer P {AITM) p. 2107; Liga [AITM) p . 800). 3. A great sage, the author of the R g v e d a P r t i k h y a a n d o t h e r V e d i c c o m p o s i t i o n s . ( A l s o s e e P (AITM) p . l . fn. 1 ) .

2 9-10. sons of What are his i n c a r n a t i o n s ? W h a t various and

Garuda is

Purna

the origin per-

o f different l i n e a g e s ? W h o a s s i g n s t h e different castes1 h i m ? O wise sage,

duties to

r a m a s 2 o f life ? W h o c o n t r o l s everything else.

n a r r a t e to us all this a n d

T e l l us the m o s t excellent stories of N r y a n a . Sta said 11. of the : I s h a l l r e c o u n t t o y o u t h e Garuda P u r n a , t h e e s s e n c e of Visnu. F o r m e r l y , this alone the is was narrated to powerful i s the I h e a r d it from V y s a 4 in the past. Nryana is the most supreme soul. He

anecdotes

K a y a p a 3 by G a r u d a . 12. almighty 13. The Lord of all

gods. He

supreme Brahman.5

A l l this w o r l d o r i g i n a t e s f r o m h i m . assumes various incarnations6 in

F o r the preservation of the universe the u n b o r n , u n etc.

ageing, deathless V s u d e v a t h e form o f K u m r a 14.

1. Brkmana, 2098). 2. (iv) According That to Hindu (ii)

A t f i r s t , t h a t g o d , H a r i , a s s u m e d the form o f K u m r a 7
are Ksairiya, four m a i n castes prevalent a m o n g (iii) VaiSya and (iv)the Hindus: (i) p. Sdra. ( V i d e P AITM)

There

scriptures,

m a n ' s life-span (ii) Grhastha,

is divided into (iii) Vnaprastha, enjoying period (Also Liga

f o u r p e r i o d s (iramas) Sannysa.

viz.,

( i ) Brahmacarya,

is to say, ( 1 )

a period of studentship totally devoted (iv) a demons. (vide

t o s t u d y a n d p r e p a r a t i o n for life, ( i i ) a p e r i o d o f h o u s e h o l d e r s h i p t h e w o r l d l y life, ( i i i ) a p e r i o d o f r e t i r e d life i n t h e f o r e s t a n d of c o m p l e t e r e n u n c i a t i o n . 3. refer {AITM) 5. P 4. p. A great s a g e , the legendary father of deities (AITM) The 808.) indefinable supreme power. intelligibly AH these good p. 2104, Liga sage, {AITM) author p. of 798). the M a h b h r a t a . renowned and

Brahmanail

6. Visnu's preserving a n d restoring p o w e r is manifested in a variety of f o r m s c a l l e d avatras l i t e r a l l y ' d i s c e n t s ' b u t m o r e in natural {CDHM p . Kalki. form possessed of super-human some evil or 'incarnations' or the superworld. avatras b e c a m e in which a portion of his divine essence is e m b o d i e d in a h u m a n powers. effecting some

m a n i f e s t for c o r r e c t i n g Tortoise, Boar, that in reality 7. '2104;

361). T e n i n c a r n a t i o n s of V i s n u a r e a c c e p t e d

universallyFish, and asserts the suit. p.

Man-lion, Dwarf, P a r a u r m a , R m a , K r s n a , B u d d h a and are : innumerable. Garuda-Purna follows

B h g a v a t a - P u r n a e n u m e r a t e s twenty-two incarnations they

< V i d e d e t a i l s i n CDHM p p . 33-8.) A s o n of i v a {AITM) p. g e n e r a l l y k n o w n as K r t t i k e y a . {P {AITM) Liga 798).

1.1.18 and carya O 15. Brahman, (celibacy), performed the unbroken

3 vow of B r a h m a up the form into the a sage.

v e r y difficult for e v e r y o n e . of sacrifices that took earth had sunk deep of

Secondly, the lord

o f a b o a r lifting u p t h e aether region. 16. T h e third

incarnation was in the

form

Assuming the form of the divine s a g e 17. form

( N r a d a 1 ) he expounded H a r i , a s s u m i n g the the preserforemost time and

the S t v a t a T a n t r a 2 t h e philosophy of inactivity of actions. In the fourth incarnation L o r d practised of N a r a - N r y a n a 3 18. p e n a n c e for

v a t i o n o f religion. H e w a s h o n o u r e d b y g o d s a s well a s d e m o n s . T h e f i f t h was i n the form o f K a p i l a , 4 who instructed Asuri in the of a m o n g t h e Siddhas* c a t e g o r i s e d the the p h i l o s o p h y

o f Skhyc w h i c h h a d b e e n r a v a g e d b y t h e l a p s e ( t w e n t y f i v e ) tattvas (elements).

1. {AITM) 2. work on 3.

The p.2108;

famous Liga

legendary (AITM) refers

sage, p. 8oi:)

great

devotee

of V i ? n u .

(P

Obviously Vaisnavism. They

to N r a d a - S a r h h i t

o f Pacartraa austere

ritualistic on the by

are said to have been practising But Nryana put front P p. of 804). systems of H i n d u derives its a flower p. (AITM) 2108; ashes

penance to p.

H i m a l a y a s , which excited the fear to disturb their austerities. creating in a nymph Urvai (SSED (P p. 281; beauty. 4. of A

of I n d r a who sent d o w n several damsels all of them (AITM) shame 801.) on his thigh who Liga the 798). (refer P (AITM) p. excelled them

renowned sage who reduced to (AITM) class p. 2104, Liga semi-divine

sixty-thousand sons

Sagara. 5.

(AITM)

p.

SiddhasA Liga (AITM)

beings,

2114; 6.

One This

o f the six

Philosophy

attributed

to

sage

Kapila.

philosophy

n a m e from the fact that it describes the object to achieve or Soul, the final from the con-

t w e n t y - f i v e tattvas

(true principles)

with

e m a n c i p a t i o n o f t h e t w e n t y - f i f t h tattva,

viz.,

t h e Purusa

b o n d s of his w o r l d l y existencethe fetters of p h e n o m e n a l c r e a t i o n . It v e y s a correct k n o w l e d g e of the tanglement universe Purusa i s Vednta VaUefika; tains that which it in to of the Soul from be a twenty-four tattvas and effects

the disen-

their vicious influence. It r e g a r d s the whole while

d e v e l o p m e n t o f a n i n a n i m a t e principlePrakrti, passive and and simply differs a looker-on. from the analytical

altogether being

It a g r e e s with the Nyya. o r

synthetical,

b u t its g r e a t point of divergence principles which the affirms. (SSED. p. does not admit G o d as the creator

f r o m t h e Vednta i s t h a t i t m a i n them being and controller of the Universe,

certain Vednta

Vednta d e n i e s , c h i e f a m o n g

596.)

4 19. the son T h e sixth i n c a r n a t i o n was of Atri

2

Garuda in the

Purna

form o f D a t t a , 1 e x p o u n d e d the Prahlda4 born as of pro-

and

Anasy .

When Lord

philosophy of a n d others, 20. Yaja,

8

Anvksik

(Metaphysics) to Alarka, seventh and incarnation Akti,7 as he a

T h e n i n the the son

was result

of Ruci*

pitiation b y I n d r a a n d other g o d s i n the 21.

Svyambhuva era.8 women by the the

In the eighth incarnation he was born as U r u k r a m a

the son of N b h i a n d M e r u d e v . He indicated to 22. In the ninth incarnation, as

p a t h o f d u t y d e s e r v i n g r e s p e c t o f p e o p l e o f a l l s t a g e s o f life. requested sages, he took up the form of 23. Prthu.9 W i t h the milk of poten-

t i a l h e r b s h e r e s u s c i t a t e d t h e brhmanas a n d o t h e r c r e a t u r e s . He took the form of a fish in the g r e a t D e l u g e at the end of Cksusa M a n v a n t a r a 1 0 and saved Vaivasvata M a n u 1 1 by p u t t i n g him in a terrestrial b o a t .

1. 2. (AITM) 3. Visnu Liga 4. 5.

Popularly The p. name 624).

known as Datttreya, he is regarded as an incarnation iva. Atri o c c u r s in the R g v e d a as well as in the (CDHM p . 32. Also refer P (AITM) Epic and p . 2 0 9 6 ; Liga

of Brahma, Visnu and Purnic literature.

Wife of S a g e Atri. S h e is taken as a and (AITM) iva p. incarnated as her son 642.) of a to deer the and

m o d e l for c h a s t i t y . B r a h m a , (P (AITM) p . 2 0 9 5 ;

Datttreya.

Son of H i r a n y a k a i p u . He h a d the head was killed by Vrabhadra raised at According Harivarha, he was to the

D a k s a ' s sacrifice. (CDHM 6. 7. 8. 9. gave p. 371.)

planetary sphere by Brahma, Father of Y a j a and A daughter of Svyarnbhuva was Son of V e n a .

a n d m a d e into the constellation Daksin. first Manu the and his

Mrga-iras.

M a n u Svyambhuva and atarp. the period of reign is

called S v y a m b h u v a . He milked earth in the form of a cow and a n e w life t o t h e c r e a t u r e s w h o w e r e s u f f e r i n g o n a c c o u n t o f a f a m i n e . CDHM p p . 242-3.) reign p. of 423; the sixth p. Manu 784; (P (AITM) pp. p p. 1992106; 800; SSED. SED. CDHM (P 10. 2106; 201 Liga for M. Liga T h e period of the (AITM) p . and Manu

(For details,

Manvantara). Iksvku etc. p. 784; (AITM)

T h e seventh M a n u , father of p. 800; SSED. p. 423; SED

(AITM)

CDHM p p .

199-201).

1.1.31 24. In the eleventh incarnation the

5 all-pervasive

L o r d took the form o f a tortoise a n d b o r e the M o u n t M a n d a r a 1 o n his b a c k w h i l e t h e g o d s a n d d e m o n s c h u r n e d t h e o c e a n . 25. gratified 26. tore In his twelfth woman fourteenth and thirteenth others. incarnation as M a n - L i o n 4 he incarnations as Dhanvantari2 and a In the Mohin respectively,3 the Lord

the g o d s a n d c h a r m e d

t h e p o w e r f u l d e m o n w i t h his f i e r c e c l a w s j u s t a s t h e m a t 27. In his fifteenth i n c a r n a t i o n , a s s u m i n g the form o f Wishing to see-

m a k e r tears the willow-barks. V m a n a 5 he went to regain ing 28. the 29. In his the sacrificial altar o f B a l i . 6

heaven, he b e g g e d of him three steps of s p a c e . sixteenth incarnation as P a r a u r m a 7 p r i n c e s i n i m i c a l t o t h e brhmanas h e b e c a m e In his seventeenth incarnation he was infuriatborn of

e d a n d m a d e t h e e a r t h d e v o i d o f ksatriyas t w e n t y - o n e t i m e s . Satyavat8 and Parara.9 30. After that Seeing m e n deficient in intellect, he

c r e a t e d b r a n c h e s of the tree of V e d a . i n his e i g h t e e n t h i n c a r n a t i o n h e b e c a m e a P r i n c e R m a 1 0 a n d , i n his d e s i r e t o d o w o r k o f t h e g o d s , p e r formed m a n y deeds such as b r i d g i n g the o c e a n . 31. In his nineteenth and twentieth incarnations

1. p. 2106; 2. 3.

M a n d a r a a famous Liga (AITM) p. 799) .

mount

in

Indian

legends. (AITM)p. the the

(P 101

AITM) fn. 82)

D h a n v a n t a r i T h e d e i t y o f m e d i c i n . .., (P Mohina celestial n y m p h ; according the form of Mohin to of to cheat

legend

oTSamudra

manthana, V i s n u a s s u m e d distribution of nectar. 4. Visnu assumed who

d e m o n s of the to kill

this

form

half-man a

and

half-lion

Hiranyakaipu 5. 6. p. 750; 7. (AITM) p. 10. fn", p . 8-9.

was

empowered

with

boon that neither m e n nor

a n i m a l s c o u l d kill h i m . Vmanathe fn. 147, fns. son dwarf. Liga (AITM) p. 514). world (P (AITM) (P

Balithe celebrated king 9 5 5 ; Liga 151-2 p. AITM) 1453;

of the nether p. i 4 ) .

H e v o w e d t o d e s t r o y t h e Ksatriyas 751 A T h e parents of sage Vysa. of D a a r a t h a , 1613; the king (AITM)

altogether from the earth

fn.211). o f A y o d h y ; (P p. 118.) (AITM), p. 751

1236

f n . p . 94,

Liga

6 obtaining the V r s n i s 32. demons, 33.

3

Garuda birth At as

Purna

B a l a r m a 1 a n d rkrsna,2 in the family of the b u r d e n of the earth. era, in order to delude son of of K a l i 4

the L o r d lessened the j u n c t u r e

he will be b o r n in the K k a t a 5 country as the Again in the eighth juncture (change

Jina6 and named as Buddha.7 of cycles) Lord of when all kings will be on the v e r g e of extinction, the 34. 35. be Thus From O Brhmanas !

t h e u n i v e r s e will b e b o r n o f V i s n u y a a s 8 a n d n a m e d a s K a l k i . * innumerable a r e the incarnaThey have to tions o f H a r i , the O m n i p o t e n t L o r d . them and originate creations etc. worshipped p r o p i t i a t e d b y Vrata10 a n d o t h e r r e l i g i o u s

r i t e s . L o n g a g o , V y s a n a r r a t e d t o m e this Garuda P u r n a .

CHAPTER TWO
Tradition The sages said 1. : to you ? on the is essentially based of Garuda Purna

H o w d i d V y s a n a r r a t e t h i s Garuda P u r n a

P l e a s e e l u c i d a t e t h i s i n full, for i t anecdotes of Visnu.

1-2. 3. Vrsnis. 4. to (AITM) 5. 6. 7. 8-9. 10.

Well-known Vrsni The was a last 798). for

brothers

celebrated His

in

Indian

Literature. p . 2104) called

K r s n a killed K a r h s a ,

the d e m o n i c ruler of M a t h u r a . descendant of Y a d u .

(P (AITM)

descendants were (yugas), p.

i n c a r n a t i o n in the cycle of four e r a s (P (AITM) of the

supposed Liga It is of

have b e g u n after the M a h b h r a t a war. p. Kkatafamous Jinathere Gay, a holy

2103,

place

Hindus.

identified with M a g a d h a B u d d h a ' s father.

(modern South Bihar). name

seems to be s o m e confusion here a b o u t the ( P (ATIM) 2098). (P (AITM) (AITM) p.

S o n of u d d h o d a n a .

T h e l a s t i n c a r n a t i o n is yet to t a k e p l a c e Vratas m e a n s r e l i g i o u s a u s t e r i t i e s . (Liga

2103).

p . 808).

1.2.7
Sta said : 2. Arama.1 3. In the c o m p a n y of the s a g e s I h a d b e e n There With I saw V y s a

to B a d a r i k

in deep contemplation on the the great sage, I sat d o w n

Supreme Lord. due salutation to there a n d asked him. Sta said O 4. : sage Vysa, please explain the form of Hari a n d

n a r r a t e t h e full p r o c e s s you know him.

of creation

of the universe. brhma-

S i n c e y o u p o n d e r over the all-pervasive L o r d , I t h i n k T h u s asked, what he said, the s a m e O

nas ! y o u l e a r n f r o m m e . Vysa said 5. been : O Sta, hear. to I s h a l l n a r r a t e Garuda P u r n a a s i t h a s

narrated

m e b y B r a h m a , i n the p r e s e n c e o f N r a d a ,

D a k s a 2 a n d others. Sta said 6. : How all did Brahma essential n a r r a t e t h e h o l y Garuda P u r n a thingsto you accompanied by

expounding

N r a d a , D a k s a a n d others ? Vysa said : 7. N r a d a , Daksa, I, Bhrgu

3

a n d others saluted B r a h m a essen-

i n h i s Brahmaloka tially important.

1. A place

a n d r e q u e s t e d h i m t o tell u s w h a t w a s

sacred

to

Visnu,

on

the

Ganges

in

the

Himalayas, the M a h -

particularly to Visnu's dual form of N a r a - N r y a n a . a n d , w i t h N r y a n a for at Badari this p. A p. A for is 927 son 795). Vedic sage, one myriads properly fn. 142; though {AITM) 2. (AITM) 3.

Thus in

bhrata, fva, addressing Arjuna, says, " y o u were N a r a in the former b o d y your companion, you performed dreadful austerity of years". a title CDHMp, (for It 39). details P (AITM) p. 2099, Liga is now known as Badarntha P of Visnu, as L o r d of B a d a r i . ( V i d e

of Brahma,

of the P r a j p a t i s a n d founder of the r a c e of p. 2097; 'Liga (AITM) p. 794^

the Bhrgus or Bhrgavas. CDHM p p . 54-55)-

(P (AITM)

8 Brahma said 8. O :

Garuda

Purna

V y s a , I s h a l l n a r r a t e to y o u t h e s t o r y of by Visnu to me and Rudra

Garuda in the

Purna just as narrated c o m p a n y o f the g o d s . Vysa said : 9. the

O B r a h m a n , H o w d i d L o r d H a r i n a r r a t e in the of Garuda Purna, pregnant with

past

essence

m e a n i n g to

R u d r a a c c o m p a n i e d b y the g o d s ? Brahma said 10. Indra and 11-12. akara, a greater essentials. Rudra said : It is L o r d Visnu whom I contemplate S u p r e m e S o u l , the A l m i g h t y . 13. cosmic He is the giver of everything, the omnipresent, a n d p r e s e n t i n the f o r m o f e v e r y l i v i n g b e i n g , the I form, upon. He is the I : had other After than b e e n t o the m o u n t K a i l s a 1 a c c o m p a n i e d b y gods. due you, T h e r e I saw salutation, please tell I R u d r a contemplating asked him, O Lord

u p o n the highest state. w h o m do you ponder over ? Since I do not know of god me the essential of all I am desirous of hearing along with the g o d s .

h a v e s m e a r e d the s a c r e d ash all over my b o d y . I h a v e d e c o r a t ed my h e a d with m a t t e d hair. 14. worship 15. O Pitmaha, this is t h e s a c r e d r i t e I follow for t h e We shall as go to him a n d ask h i m and Hari is of Lord Visnu. Lord Visnu

a b o u t the essence I h a v e b e e n c o n t e m p l a t i n g u p o n . known and Padmanbha devoid of physical body is ever victorious. He is pure,

the source of purity, he is S u p r e m e S o u l , the A l m i g h t y , c o n n e c t e d b y t h e w o r d Tad ( i n t h e U p a n i s a d s ) . 2

1. (AITM) N a m e of a m o u n t a i n in t h e H i m a l a y a - r a n g e . p. 2 1 0 3 ; Liga (AITM), p. 798, SED. p. 3 0 1 ) . (Mbh iii 5 0 3 ; P

2. T h e mystical and philosophical writings of the ancient Indian sages. T h e s e d i s c u s s t h e n a t u r e o f Brahman t h e s u p r e m e s o u l , jvtman, the p e r s o n a l soul, worldly existence, h u m a n a c t i o n (karma) e t c . T h e s e a r e a l s o c a l l e d Vednta. T h e y g e n e r a l l y f o r m t h e l a s t s t a g e o f t h e V e d i c texts. Their n u m b e r is plenty but a k a r a has c o m m e n t e d only u p o n ten Upanisads. ( V i d e d e t a i l s i n CDHM p p . 325-6; CSL p p . 354-55)-

1.2.21 16-17. Uniting myself with

9 that universal Soul, I am living

m e d i t a t i n g o n that very G o d T h e L o r d o f creatures, the uniti n g string, in w h o m the entire universe c o n s i s t i n g of all clustering beads in thread. H e w h o h a s t h o u s a n d e y e s , t h o u s a n d feet, t h o u s a n d t h i g h s and a handsome 18. face; the stablest W h o i s the s u b t l e s t a m o n g t h e s u b t l e , b e i n g s lies p r e s e r v e d a n d l a t e r o n , b e c o m e s m e r g e d , l i k e c l o s e l y

a m o n g the stable, the b i g g e s t a m o n g the b i g a n d the s u b l i m e s t a m o n g the s u b l i m e . 19. Who is preserved in the sacred literature a n d the the true Smans,1 as U p a n i s a d s , in sentences a n d phrases a n d true a n d of true activities. 20. among the H e i s c a l l e d purna purusa twice-born. He is (the Primordial of as being), spoken Brahman2 and _____ a n d the one-syllabled existent a n d the non-

in the process of annihilation he is termed as S a r h k a r s a n a . 3 We a d o r e that adorable one. 2). A l l t h e w o r l d s q u i c k e n i n h i m like t h e a k u l a - f i s h i n beyond the

w a t e r . H e w h o isRta* ( t h e c o s m i c o r d e r ) g o d , the syllable O m 6 , is existent.

Ac
1. 2. 3. T h e m a n t r a s of the S m a v e d a are V i d e P. 2. fn. 5. N a m e of B a l a r m a . This conforms in in five the to the forms system of Pacartra SaVisnu viz., Vsudeva, It called smans since they are m e a n t for s i n g i n g . Majority of them occur in the R g v e d a .

which enjoins the worship of 4. 5. Rta i s Om is

karsana, Pradyumna, Aniruddha and Nryana. a significant term a Vedic literature. generally It is m e a n s 'cosmic order' 'divine law or truth', 'settled rule or s a c r e d c u s t o m . '

w o r d of s o l e m n affirmation a n d respectful a s s e n t . Upanisads a s a m y s t i c m o n o s y l l a b l e s e t f o r t h a s t h e the whole word but also to the viz., a (AITM),

generally p l a c e d at the b e g i n n i n g of a treatise, as a m a r k of a u s p i c i o u s n e s s . It a p p e a r s in the of buted not only to object attrip r o f o u n d religious m e d i t a t i o n , the highest spiritual efficacy b e i n g

three s o u n d s a u m, of (Visnu) u (iva), m called (AITM)

which it consists. In later t i m e s Om is the m y s t i c n a m e for the H i n d u t r i a d , a n d represents the union of the three g o d s ; (Brahma); aksara p. or it may ekksara, SED p . 2 3 5 ) . (Also refer P also b e typical o f the three V e d a s . p. It is also Liga

2108;

801;

10 22. Rksasas 23.

2

Garuda Who and Eyes is worshipped by the deities,

Purna Yaksas,
1

serpents, the

whose m o u t h i s f ir e , crest the fir m a the m o o n . I am contemplating whose

m e n t , n a v e l t h e h o r i z o n , feet t h e e a r t h ; sun a n d u p o n t h a t lord, i n w h o s e belly a r e the three worlds a n d a r m s a r e the different directions. 24. the rivers. 25. I am c o n t e m p l a t i n g u p o n that L o r d whose belly a r e beyond the Existent the o c e a n s , w h o is b e y o n d sacrifices a n d a n d the Non-existent. 26. He is b e g i n n i n g l e s s but the b e g i n n i n g of the universe I am contemplating upon him. The can be traced to him. 27. plating The upon I am contemplating upon that L o r d whose breath is are the wind, in whose h a i r are the c l o u d s a n d in whose j o i n t s

m o o n h a s c o m e o u t o f his m i n d a n d t h e s u n o u t o f his e y e s . fire h a s c o m e o u t o f his m o u t h . him. The earth I am contemh a s c o m e o u t o f his feet, t h e out o f his head. I am

quarters out of his ears. 28-29. tion, the T h e heaven has come the contemplating upon him. lineage, T h e creation, the subsidiary crea-

M a n v a n t a r a s a n d the records o f k i n g s

a n d g r e a t personages c a n all be traced to him. I am contemplating u p o n him. whom I We shall go to h i m to s e e t h e T r u e E s s e n c e on contemplate. : Thus I was s p o k e n to by R u d r a w h o , h a v i n g wordweller of vetadvipa , s t o o d narrative. Visnu the al3

Brahma said 30.

shipped a n d b o w e d to V i s n u , the 31. mighty, him. From amongst us Rudra

by, along with the g o d s desirous of hearing the addressed

the essence o f essences a n d after d u e s a l u t a t i o n s asked

1. wealth. 2. p. 802; 3.

A P

class

of demi-gods. p. 2120;

Attendants (Liga (AITM)

of p.

Kubera, 808). p. 2111; p.

the Liga

deity

of

(AITM),

The Refer

demons (P

(for details, (AITM) p.

P (AITM), Liga

(AITM)

CDHM, p p .

252-5). 2118; (AITM) 806).

1.2.41
Brahma said 32. : As Vysa asked me, so Lord Rudra

1!

asked Visnu

while the g o d s , along with other i m m o r t a l s stood listening. Rudra said 33. us, who : O L o r d V i s n u , t h e f o r e m o s t a m o n g g o d s , p l e a s e tell is the m o s t powerful a m o n g g o d s ? W h o h a s to be

c o n t e m p l a t e d u p o n ? W h o is the m o s t w o r t h y of our w o r s h i p ? By what sacred rites, is that great L o r d propitiated ? 34. form like ? 35. Of w h a t g o d is the universe b o r n ? W h o protects it universe a n d by w h a t sort of i n c a r n a t i o n s ? In w h o m d o e s the merge ultimately ? 36. the The creation, the subsidiary creation, the lineage, M a n v a n t a r a s f r o m w h a t g o d d o they p r o c e e d ? I n w h o m 37. anything of the O H a r i ! p l e a s e n a r r a t e a l l this, a n d a l s o i f else. Then the Lord yogic there is With what s a c r e d rituals, observations, pious wors h i p s a n d c o n d u c t o f life c a n h e b e p l e a s e d ? W h a t i s h i s d i v i n e

a r e these well-established? H a r i n a r r a t e d t o R u d r a the g l o r y m e a n s etc. a n d also the eighteen

almighty,

varieties o f lores ( v i d y s ) . 1 Hari said 38. I shall 39. 40. worlds. I a m the m o s t w o r t h y o f c o n t e m p l a t i o n a n d w o r s h i p . gods. on b e i n g O R u d r a , I a w a r d t h e loftiest o f p o s i t i o n s I am to be p r a i s e d with prayers by the : O R u d r a , listen a l o n g with B r a h m a a n d other g o d s . tell y o u I am the G o d of gods, the m a s t e r of all the

w o r s h i p p e d a n d gratified b y s a c r e d rites, o b s e r v a n c e s a n d g o o d conduct by men. 41. religion. O i v a , I am the seed of the existence of the w o r l d . I p u n i s h the w i c k e d . I p r o t e c t I am the c r e a t o r of the world.

i.

Eighteen

Vidys c o n s t i t u t e and

4 Vedas,

4 Upa-Vedas,

6 Vedgas,

Purnas, Mimms, Nyya

Dharma.

12 42. fish etc. I 43. I am I sustain the

Garuda

Purna

entire universe by my incarnations as

a m t h e s a c r e d mantras1 a n d t h e i r p u r p o r t . I a m e n I am the creator of H e a v e n a n d other worlds. Verily t h e h e a v e n a n d o t h e r w o r l d s . I a m t h e f i r s t yogi am the knower, the hearer, I am all. bestow the thinker, the

gaged in worship and contemplation. myself 44. speaker all. Iam 45. I and

a n d a l s o the yoga.2 I am t h e P u r n a s . the o b j e c t of s p e e c h . god who I am the soul of

the highest

enjoyment and find

beatitude. O R u d r a , verily I am the activity of c o n t e m p l a t i o n , I am the mystical orbs3 and mythouniversal

4

"worship a n d o f f e r i n g . logical epics. 46. soul. O 47. gion I am. 48. I am the

O iva, I know everything. I am B r a h m a . I am the entire u n i v e r s e . I am

O a m b h u , I am all knowledge. I am the iva,

the inner soul of all g o d s . V e r i l y , I am the g o o d c o n d u c t . I am the V a i s n a v a 5 their ancient relic u l t . I a m t h e c a s t e s a n d the r a m a s , a n d various religions

and

moral curbs and I am pe-

observances. 49. nance

I am the different kinds of rites. O R u d r a , Garuda propitiated me with

the S u n , the M o o n a n d the M a r s etc. In days of yore, he which u n d e r t o o k on the e a r t h . F e e l i n g gratified I

said : " a s k me a b o o n " , a n d he chose a b o o n . Garuda said 50-52.

1. 2. one's own

: O H a r i , my mother V i n a t 6 has been m a d e a

s p e c i a l l y t h e rks. with an aim by to Also unite

G e n e r a l l y used to denote V e d i c prayers, Deep meditation on the S u p r e m e idea. generally Soul

u s e d for a p r a y e r or f o r m u l a s a c r e d to a n y d e i t y . soul with It. A system of philosophy, propounded

Patajali,

elaborating the aforesaid 3. ship, 4. 5. believe 6. T h e mystical

drawings,

k n o w n as

mandalas

for

wor-

particularly in T n t r i c treatises. T h e R m y a n a a n d the M a h b h r a t a . O n e of the three m a i n cults of M o d e r n H i n d u i s m . in the s u p r e m a c y of Visnu. The other and akti respectively. a wife of K a y a p a . Its followers Skta t w o s e c t s aiva a n d

believe in the s u p r e m a c y of i v a A d a u g h t e r of D a k s a ,

1.2.59
slave by serpents. m a y bring the release from A c t thus, O g o d , your I that may and that conquering them I may secure her

nectar; that I, bondage;

carrier,

b e c o m e strong, mighty, expounder of Purna

omniscient, destroyer of serpents Samhit. Visnu said :

O G a r u d a , everything shall h a p p e n as y o u have r e q u e s t e d for. 53. You will from her slavery to the serpents. will b r i n g the d i v i n e n e c t a r . 54-55. know the form. You will b e strong. Y o u will b e m y carrier. Y o u With and my blessings in you will as glorifying m e be expounding my divine will b e the d e v o u r e r o f p o i s o n . Purna B y y o u r n a m e , i t will 56. tial glory 57. Purna. 58-59. Thus initiated by me, G a r u d a e x p o u n d e d this By the power he a burnt resuscitated P u r n a to K a y a p a who sought it from h i m . received on h e a r i n g tree. means With his Garuda P u r n a , fixed he mind Conquering the
i

secure the release of your mother, V i n a t gods, you

celebrated

the w o r l d the

G a r u d a Purna. O son of V i n a t , j u s t as I am known as of all esseng o d s , s o also G a r u d a P u r n a will a t t a i n the like me, O Garuda. this O

greatest fame a m o n g the P u r n a s . Y o u too shall be glorified chief of birds, contemplating upon me propound Garuda

on another, he revived others by T h i s is t h e s a c r e d Garuda P u r n a d e a l -

of this l e a r n i n g .

Taksi om urn svh.

vidy Grudi.

O R u d r a , please hear the

ing with my personality a n d narrated by G a r u d a .

14

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER T H R E E
Statement Sta said 1. : T h u s R u d r a a n d B r a h m a h e a r d this f r o m V i s n u , s a g e I shall now of Contents

V y s a from B r a h m a a n d I h e a r d this from V y s a . 2. gods, In this august

n a r r a t e this t o y o u , O a u n a k a , i n t h e s a c r e d forest N a i m i s a . a u d i e n c e c o n s i s t i n g o f s a g e s , will b e of worship of the n a r r a t e d the details of creation, the m o d e places 3-4. Manvantaras. The rights the and duties of the various the classes of advarielaborites, the the s o c i e t y a n d s t a g e s o f life, t h e m o d e o f gifts, ministration by King, conduct families, the m e d i c a l science a l o n g with ways of

of p i l g r i m a g e , the treasures of the world a n d the

o f life, s a c r e d Pathology, Visnu

ous ancillary subjects, p r a l a y a 1 ( d i s s o l u t i o n ) , the perfect knowledge of virtue, wealth a n d lqve, how L o r d 5-7. In the had r a t e d a n d a n n i h i l a t e d t h e u n i v e r s e a l l this i s b e i n g t o l d h e r e . Garuda P u r n a , G a r u d a i s bhagavn, who Vsudeva, a c q u i r i n g inordinate ability by the favour of L o r d

b e c o m i n g the vehicle o f H a r i , the c a u s e o f c r e a t i o n , c o n q u e r i n g the gods, brought the divine nectar, whose hunger was a p p e a s e d , w h o s e brahmnda i s i n t h e b e l l y 8.
2

of H a r i ,

seeing

whom

or

even r e m e m b e r i n g w h o m , the serpents etc perish. G a r u d a i s L o r d H a r i himself. Hence K a y a p a could m e n t i o n e d by bestows O resuscitate 9. the b u r n t t r e e b y t h e Garuda {-vidy)

G a r u d a to Kayapa. T h a t h o l y g l o r i o u s Garuda P u r n a , w h e n r e a d , Bowing to Vysa, everything. I shall n a r r a t e it to y o u .

a u n a k a ! listen now how it is so.

1. (SED p. 2. Cosmos.

The
3

destruction

of the

whole

world

at

the

end used

of to

Kalpa. denote

n . ) the e g g o f Brahman i s generally

B r a h m n d a , lit.

1.4.8

15

CHAPTER F O U R
Beginning Rudra said : 1. OJanrdana, please narrate to us the details of creation, s u b s i d i a r y c r e a t i o n , l i n e a g e , m a n v a n t a r a s of kings a n d great personages. Hari said: 2. Lord O R u d r a , listen. I shall n a r r a t e the details of c r e a t i o n w i p e off a l l s i n s . in creating, Lord I shall describe the old sport preserving Vsudeva, and annihilating of the the and records of Creation

etc. which Visnu 3. universe.

Un-sullied

N a r a - N r y a n a is

S u p r e m e S o u l , t h e infinite B r a h m a n , t h e c r e a t o r a n d d e s t r o y e r of the universe. 4. A l l this v i s i b l e u n i v e r s e , w i t h its m a n i f e s t a n d u n m a n i and the prithe f e s t p h a s e s e x i s t s i n t h e f o r m o f t h e g r e a t Purusa1 mordial T i m e . 2 5. great L o r d Visnu is both manifest and un-manifest, P u r u s a a s well a s p r i m o r d i a l T i m e . L i s t e n t o his d i v i n e 6-7. T h e creator, the limitless g r e a t P u r u s a , is devoid of H e c r e a t e d the un-manifest firmament. water. and from F r o m the soul e v o l v e d intellect a n d from i t the From firmament earth evolved within it From fire The

s p o r t like t h a t of a sportive child. beginning and death. that the soul. mind.

F r o m mind was evolved

a i r . F r o m a i r t h e fire. o u t o f it. 8. the Lord creation.

O R u d r a , there is a c o s m i c g o l d e n e g g a n d t a k e s for himself a physical

b o d y for t h e s a k e o f

1. 2. controls to t h e Liga

I n Skhya According Vaiiefikas, (AITM), it p.

Philosophy (P

Purusa p.

means 2111;

soul, Liga

a s o p p o s e d t o Prakfti, (AITM), p. 802). alone p. that 2118; According (kla) (AITM),

(primordial

matter) to

(AITM),

Indian of

thinkers, the nine

it is dravyas.

Time (P

the universe. Its destructive powers are is one 806),

unsurpassed.

16 9. With rajas
1

Garuda element in profusion, the

Purana

four-faced

B r a h m a takes a p h y s i c a l b o d y a n d c r e a t e s the m o v a b l e a n d the immovable. 10. The creator creates h i m s e l f a l o n g w i t h the d e i t i e s He protects what is

a n d h u m a n b e i n g s w i t h i n the c o s m i c e g g . to be protected. 11. too is L o r d

I n the e n d , h e destroys everything. himself, O Hara. Taking the

T h e annihilator form of B r a h m a ,

V i s n u creates the universe. 12-13.

H a r i h i m s e l f m a i n t a i n s it.

At the e n d of the K a l p a , 2 in the form of R u d r a , B r a h m a takes teeth O in water. means of curved submerged

he destroys the universe. At the time of c r e a t i o n up the physical form of a b o a r a n d by lifts u p t h e e a r t h , l e a r n i n g t h a t i t akara, 14. first one. of G o d s a n d others. T h e creation It is a is

l i s t e n : I shall briefly d e s c r i b e t h e p r o c e s s

of c r e a t i o n the

omahat3 ( t h e c o s m i c a l l y g r e a t ) i s of B r a h m a n . creation The the

metamorphosis

second

c r e a t i o n is c a l l e d bhta sarga, i.e. essences ( t a n m t r a s ) of elements. 15. creation) these T h e third o n e is together fourth

of t h e i n t r i n s i c

c a l l e d vaikrika sarga the

(modificatory (natural sarga (the

o r aindriyaka sarga ( t h e c r e a t i o n o f s e n s e - o r g a n s ) . A l l constitute creation is that prkrta sarga mukhya (the c o s m i c g r e a t ) .

three 16. The

c r e a t i o n ) b e g i n n i n g with the c o s m i c intellect called principal creation). creatures. tiryak-yonayah) known

T h e stationary things are called principal of the s u b - h u m a n b e i n g s as tiryaksrotas.

T h e fifth c r e a t i o n i s

1.

Rajas

the

second

of

the two

three constituent qualities being tamas sattva and tamas).

gunas Rajas

of a l l is the men, SSED (AITM}, ff; SED manas)

material substances c a u s e o f all p.462. 2. p. 262). 3. Liga The p. great 799, A

(the other

activities p e r t a i n i n g to the

creatures; it predominates in p r e d o m i n a t e s in a p. day 15 of fn. demons. (P

a s sattva p r e d o m i n a t e s i n d e i t i e s a n d fabulous 1364 period of Liga

time, (AITM)

Brahma 22,

p . 1 0 7 0 f n . , p.

fn. 160;

p p . 86 from

principle, S S E D p.

the 429.

intellect

(distinguished

(AITM)

1.4.24 17. seventh 18. sarga. T h e creation of super-human

17 g o d s i s the sixth o n e beings is the

k n o w n a s rdhvasrotas. The eighth

T h e creation of creation and sarga. is told

human

o n e k n o w n a s arvksrotas. w h a t i s k n o w n a s anugraha These five constitute y o u a b o u t the three t h a t i s b o t h prkrta tmasika.

It is b o t h sttvika the prkrta

t h e vaikrta sarga. constitute 19. a n d vaikrta.1

I have already

T h e ninth creation O Rudra, While sons also his

k n o w n a s kaumra are

thus there engaged were in

four t y p e s o f c r e a t i o n t h e mnasa Desirous manes2 then of and from

b e g i n n i n g with g o d s a n d e n d i n g with s t a t i o n a r y things. 20-21-22. creating human in the body tamas the loins the this c r e a t i o n , demons, evident create, He then (mentally created) beingsand task. born of B r a h m a . waters, became

fourfold When

beingsdeities, these self

he engaged

himself

of Prajpati who

desired to

came out the c a s t off t h a t

demons who increased 23-24. became

through tamas. tamas3.

preponderant with the

O a u n a k a , this d i s c a r d e d b o d y p r e p o n d e r a n t w i t h night. T h e yaksas and the d e m o n s found

i.

I n t h i s c o n n e c t i o n , t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r t will b e h e l p f u l Prkrta-Sarga

Mahat

Bhta-sarga (Tanmtras) Vaikrta-Sarga

Vaikrika-Sarga (aindriyika-Sarga)

Mukhyasarga

Tiryaksrotas

dhvasrotas Arvksrotas and Vaikrta

Anugraha-Sarga

Prkrta

Kaumra. 2. deceased classes sented; bhuvas or 3. T h e Pitrs o r d e c e a s e d a n c e s t o r s . father, rites they region Vide grandfather and great T h e y a r e of t w o c l a s s e s , viz., t h e grandfather of any and oblations 286, p p . particular of both these

p e r s o n , a n d the p r o g e n i t o r s o f m a n k i n d g e n e r a l l y ; , i n h o n o u r c a l l e d rddhas a r e p e r f o r m e d inhabit of t h e a peculiar p region, p. air. (AITM)

c a l l e d pindas p r e liga (AITM),

which according to some, is the 1615-19;

p . 407; SED p .

626.
p. 16. fn 1.

18

Garuda in that^ b o d y . Then from the mouth

Purna

pleasure

of B r a h m a

were b o r n the deities who i n g the d a y . 25.

increased

in sattva,

O Hara. This

b o d y w i t h t h e p r e p o n d e r a n t sttvika e l e m e n t w a s c a s t off evolvH e n c e , the d e m o n s a r e m o r e powerful in the night

a n d t h e g o d s d u r i n g t h e d a y . T h e m a n e s further e v o l v e d t h e m s e l v e s b y t a k i n g u p t h e i n t e r s p a c e s o f Sttvika e l e m e n t . 26. W h e n t h a t b o d y w a s c a s t off, t h e t w i l i g h t i n b e t w e e n evolved, the h u m a n beings evolved themd a y a n d night was i four, 27.

s e l v e s b y t a k i n g u p t h e i n t e r - s p a c e s o f rq/a.r-element. T h a t b o d y b e i n g c a s t off b e c a m e Thus the the moonlight, the night, the moonlight or his day bodies are and the the twilight of the d a w n ( p r k - s a n d h y ) . namely, 28. anger were By twilight. taking up rajar-element, hunger, darkness and were thirst, created the g i a n t s {rksasas) consumers of blood, called known of hair so on account of they were By (kesasarpana). evolved. Then

e m a c i a t e d with hunger a n d s o o n a c c o u n t o f rakpana 29. yaksana Yaksas were (eating). T h e

(protection). created and serpents were of movement (the evil created and

known so on account m e a n s o f a n g e r , bhtas t h e Gandharvas1 30. sas.

2

spirits)

were created. T h e n

were born.

Gandharvas w e r e b o r n s i n g i n g a l o u d a n d t h e n A p s a r a -

B r a h m a c r e a t e d h e a v e n a n d e a r t h f r o m his c h e s t a n d t h e 31. Prajpati elephants, created buffaloes, cows f r o m his belly and sides.

g o a t s f r o m his m o u t h . Horses, 32. 33. camels, sheep etc. were created produced medicinal herbs a n d

f r o m his feet. F r o m his h a i r w e r e These are fruit-bearing plants. T h e cow, g o a t , r a m , horses, m u l e , d o n k e y the domestic animals already told; now I describe the wild ones. T h e y a r e the beasts of prey, the cloven1. Liga 2. (AITM), A class of demi-gods, adept (Also in singing P and music. (Also vide (AITM), p. 2 0 9 5 ; Liga

(AITM) The p.

p . 796, C D H M p p . 105-6). celestial n y m p h s . CDHM, pp. refer 19-20) .

798;

1 .5 .1 hoofed, elephants and monkeys. T h e c r e a t i o n ( a m o n g lower 34. The sixth animals). is the creation The of aquatic and birds

19 constitute the fifth animals other texts The ksatriyas thighs by the

a n d the seventh that of reptiles. 35.

Rgveda

c a m e o u t o f his e a s t e r n a n d o t h e r m o u t h s . T h e brhmanas w e r e b o r n of his m o u t h . came can by be out o r i g i n a t e d f r o m his a r m s . T h e vaiyas a n d t h e dras o u t o f his feet. 36. brhmanas, vaiyas world vrata the is of 37. T h e world that the world of of Brahma (Indra) the who attained The of a k r a Ksatriyas. and goal of o f his

Maruts are of

t h a t o f dra i s t h e in t h e brahmacaryathe householders

Gandharvas. Again those attain steady and brahmaloka1 their

(celibacy) Prjpatya2 38.

s t e a d f a s t i n the

performance world.

ordained duties attain

T h e forest-dwellers ( v n a p r a s t h a s ) a t t a i n the world T h e sannysins g o a t w i l l t o t h e imperishable

o f t h e s e v e n rsis. region.

CHAPTER FIVE
Creation Hari said 1. : After m e n t a l l y c r e a t i n g t h e o f Praj-sarga, the order of things here a n d L o r d created the m e n t a l of Progenitors

t h e r e a t the t i m e

s o n s w h o w e r e t h e p r o g e n i t o r s o f praj.

1. ed it 2. GDHM

T h e world one pp.

o f B r a h m a n , t h e b e s t o f all t h e w o r l d s . H a v i n g free from re-birth. (Vide P (AITM) p.

attain2098;

becomes 179-80.)

T h e world of

Prajpatis.

20 2-3-4-5. T h e Marlci, Nrada Atri, and mind-created pulastya, types and from of four his sons are

Garuda Dharma, Kratu, namely,

Purna Rudra,

M a n u , Sanaka, S a n t a n a , Bhrgu, S a n a t k u m r a , Ruci, r a d d h Agiras, the seven Pulaha, manes, Vasistha, Barhisads,

Agnisvttas, Kravydas, jyapas, w h o m three are formless born L o r d created D a k s a 6. Daksa begot to

Suklins,

Upahtas

a n d Dpyas of

having forms. T h e L o t u s r i g h t t h u m b ; f r o m his left daughters on her and gave S a t 1 was given to a n d very powerful. grace to Bhrgu2.

t h u m b h e c r e a t e d D a k s a ' s wife. meritorious the sons them in marriage 7. 8. 9. 10. of B r a h m a . innumerable Dhtr

Rudra in marriage. R u d r a ' s sons She From They gave her were to H e g a v e his d a u g h t e r K h y t i o f u n - r i v a l l e d birth Hari

a n d V i d h t r from Bhrgu. Bala and Dhtr Unmda.

S h e a l s o g a v e b i r t h t o r , 3 t h e wife o f N r y a n a . himself begot the wives of Ayati a n d Niyati w e r e the d a u g h t e r s o f the high-souled M a n u . * became and Vidhtr of Mrkandeya5gave birth to w h o m two sons were b o r n P r n a a n d M r k a n d u . was the son of M r k a n d u . 11. 12. 13. Sambhti, the wife of Marlci, Paurnamsa. V i r a j a s a n d S a r v a g a w e r e his s o n s . and daughters

Agiras begot on Smrti m a n y sons Anasy, the wife

Sinvl, K u h , R k a n d A n u m a t i . o f A t r i , g a v e b i r t h t o t h e sinless yogin. Prti a son D a t t o l i , on his wife sonsSoma, Durvsas6 14-15. of K s a m , K a r m a s a , Arthavra a n d the a n d D a t t t r e y a the Sahisnuthese
7

Pulastya begot

t h r e e sons w e r e b o r n S u m a t i , t h e wife o f

wife o f P r a j p a t i P u l a h a .

K r a t u , gave birth to Blakhilyas .

1. 2. longed. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

T h e f i r s t wife o f i v a . H i s s e c o n d wife w a s P r v a t , The progenitor goddess of the Bhrgava race

the

daughter

of Himalaya. to which P a r a u r m a be-

Laksm. The The

of wealth. mankind.

T h e progenitor of

author of the M r k a n d e y a - P u r n a . authors of the Blakhilya-hymns.

A w e l l - k n o w n s a g e w i t h a fiery t e m p e r a m e n t .

1.5.26. 16. blazing Sixty-thousand sun, though in number, resplendent like

21

the

they were of the begot sinless on

size of a t h u m b T h e y seven sonsRajas, g a v e his

b e c a m e sages of sublimated vitality. 17-18. Gtra, T h e y are body. 19. From him, O Hara, she got three sons, known as o f e x a l t e d virility a n d the m a n e s g a v e birth b e c a m e brahma-Vdin Gaur who in was Sat Pvaka, p a v a m n a and uci, habitually consuming water. 20-21-22-23. S v a d h who to M e n and Vaitaran both got a son Mainka4 and a of married whom who were Vasistha1 as in the rj rdhvabhu, known arana, Anagha, Sutapas and ukra. Daksa had assumed

Sapta-rsis2.

daughter Svh

marriage to

G o d fire who

(experts i n the discussion o f B r a h m a n . F r o m M e n , H i m c a l a daughter5 formerly. O H a r a , Lord Brahma the appointed his s o n S v y a m the task of lord S v y a m destroyed her

bhuva M a n u , who was bhuva M a n u married 24. Ruci. 25. Priyavrata

really lady

B r a h m a himself, all-pervasive who had

p r e s e r v i n g the subjects. T h e n sins by ascetic austerities. Prasti, Akti and

atarp

a t a r p gave birth to two sons: a n d three d a u g h t e r s

and Uttnapda,

Devahti. M a n u gave kti in m a r r i a g e to

Prasti to D a k s a and Devahti to K a r d a m a , Ruci's s o n s , the p o w e r f u l y m a s 8 . Daksa

children were D a k s i n and Y a j a . 26. They had twelve h a d twenty-four d a u g h t e r s excellent in all respects.

1. seventh the priest 2. 3. studies. 4. CDHM, 5. 6. vances.

The

family

of

the

Vasisthas

was

very

illustrious

one.

The

Mandala T h i s list

of the

Rgveda

is ascribed to them.

Vasistha was also

of Daaratha It proves that A

and R m a c a n d r a of Ayodhy. sages varies from were not the well-known list. debarred from the Vedic (Refer the women

of the seven

famous mountain. 94)

Opinions

defer r e g a r d i n g its l o c a t i o n .

p.

W e l l k n o w n a s P r v a t I , the s e c o n d wife o f i v a . T h e reference is to ( SSED, p. 455) . the great moral or religious duties of obser-

22

Garuda 27.

Purana

T h e y were r a d d h ( f a i t h ) , L a k s m ( w e a l t h ) , Dhrti, (satisfaction), Pusti, ( N o u i s h m e n t ) , M e d h , Buddhi (Intelligence), Lajj nti (Peace) Rddhi (Beauty), (fame)

(fortitude), Tusti (bashfulness), (prosperity) 28. Sambhti 29. rj,

(Retentiveness), K r i y (Action), Vapuh and Krti

the thirteenth.

Dharma

married D k s y a n the daughter o f D a k s a . Smrti ( M e m o r y ) , Prti ( A f f e c t i o n ) ,

T h e eleven other d a u g h t e r s were K h y t i ( p r a i s e ) , S a t i (chastity) (production), Sannati K s a m (Forgiveness). (Obeisance), Anasy The (absence of malice) great sages Bhrgu, Vahni Darpa (Energy) S v h 1 a n d S v a d h . 2 30-31. gave birth 32. birth to to Pulastya, Pulaha, K r a t u , Kama to (Desire), Santosa cal

Bhava, Marci, Agiras. Atri, V a s i s t h a , (Laksm) to a n d the m a n e s married respectively K h y t i a n d others. r a d d h (Pride), Dhrti to N i y a m a (Restraint). Tusti Lobha and (Contentment) Medh and (Pusti gave to ruta (Punishment) and Lajj to (Greatness). K r i y to to and Vinaya Bodha gave birth

(knowledge) 33.

three sons : D a n d a , (humanity). (enlightenment) birth to (Welfare).

L a y a (Adherence) Buddhi Vinaya (Humility). 34. Rddhi

Vapus gave birth

the son V y a v a s y a

(Effort) and nti to K s e m a gave to Yaas (Renown). 35. 36. though 37. daughter Once They not

to Sukha (Happiness) and Krti t h e sons o f D h a r m a . K a m a ' s a horse-sacrifice to which by their wives. Sat,

These are

wife w a s R a t i ( L o v e ) a n d their s o n H a r s a ( J o y ) . Daksa were performed a l l his sons-in-law w e r e i n v i t e d . accompanied went off and there, invited, cast without Rudra, and was

disrespected by D a k s a . Sat her b o d y a n d was b o r n a g a i n as the She was then known as of M e n Himavn.

1. [Refer 2.

G e n e r a l l y an e x c l a m a t i o n used in offering o b l a t i o n or offering 633). made to STED p.

oblations gods

to

the

gods.

It also m e a n s an

all

indiscriminately an oblation to

Generally an exclamation uttered when It also m e a n s the food offered

offering manes.

the m a n e s .

to the

(SSED, p .

631].

1.6.7
Gaur and (Ganea). 38. And Kumra, and "You Rudra, the she married ambhu. She

23 gave birth t o V i n y a k a L o r d o f Bhrgins, ( t h e bearer o f Pinka, (the destroyed the sacrifice

attendants of iva) and cursed D a k s a :

most will

powerful be

famous bow of i v a )

b e i n g infuriated

born as a m a n in the line of

D h r u v a " . 1 ( son o f U t t n a p d a ) .

CHAPTER S I X
Description Hari said 1. s o n o f his position. 2. the Due t o the f a v o u r o f t h e s a g e ( N r a d a ) a n d t h r o u g h of Lord Janrdana, D h r u v a ' s son was listi propitiation 3. His : U t t n a p d a ' s son born o f Suruci was U t t a m a . A n o t h e r born of Sunti was D h r u v a who attained a lofty of families

w h o was very powerful. son was P r c n a b a r h i s whose son was U d r a d h h . as the glorious C k s u s a H i s son was D i v a j a y a whose son was R i p u . 4. Manu. 5. grass. 6. upon a 7. sit d o w n . He was then known a s N i s d a a n d h e t o o k u p his The Brhmanas a g a i n chura b o d e in the Vindhya mountains. T h e y c h u r n e d his t h i g h for t h e s a k e o f a purely dark-skinned boy was born. son whereT h e y asked him to Ripu's son was well-known G l o r i o u s R u m w a s his s o n w h o s e son w a s A g a . A g a ' s son was V e n a who was a non-righteous atheist. of the kua

T h e t y r a n t V e n a w a s k i l l e d b y the s a g e s b y m e a n s

n e d V e n a ' s right h a n d .
1. is known A son of U t t n a p d a . A as Dhruva star after him. great devotee of Visnu. ( A l s o CDHM, p . 91). The pole-star

24 8. Therefrom a son

Garuda

Purna

bearing the mental i m a g e of L o r d famous as Prthu. He (Vena)

V i s n u was born. attained heaven. 9. In

He became

order to resuscitate the subjects, the king ( P r t h u ) Prthu's son was A n t a r d h n a whose son was of

milked the Earth. Havirdhna. 10. the His

son Prcnabarhis shone as the sole emperor married Smudr, the

world. 11.

He

daughter of L a v a n a

(the s a l t - o c e a n ) . S m u d r g a v e birth to ten sons, P r c i n a b a r h i s a s , who T h e y were well-acquainted with the collectively, they practised ocean were known as Prcetasas. science of archery. 12. great P e r f o r m i n g s a c r e d rites They penance. 13. Mris. son. 14. 15. He then mentally Daksa created four kinds of progeny. creation by T h e y did not f l o u r i s h , b e c a u s e they were cursed b y L o r d H a r a . Thereupon Prajpati desired m e a n s of physical intercourse. He m a r r i e d Asikn, of Vrana Prajpati. 16. thousand 17. Daksa Vairan sons. At (the the daughter instigation of of V r a n a ) gave birth to o f N r a d a , t h e y set o u t i n returned. was thus elder lost, Riding briddled brothers, sons their the daughter also submerged in water of the

for ten t h o u s a n d y e a r s . T h e y a t t a i n e d the status o f P r a j p a t i . Daksa,1 who had They married been cursed b y B h a v a , b e c a m e her

search of the extremities of the world but never W h e n t h e first set thousand of b e g o t a n o t h e r set o f a t h o u s a n d s o n s .

h o r s e s , t h e y t o o followed the footsteps O Hara. 18. will be 19. This infuriated

D a k s a who cursed born

Nrada, "You as the son of

born in the w o r l d " . N r a d a w a s When formerly his sacrifice "O

Sage Kayapa. was destroyed by iva, (those who, will D a k s a cursed iva furiously, akara,

praise a n d worship you with religious Performances,

i. T h e first father-in-law of i v a .

1.6.35
20. Will perish even in one

25 another birth d u e to your enhave t h e feeling of enmity. were given Indu.

m i t y . " H e n c e , never should 21. 22. 23. Sixty beautiful Fourteen O to

F r o m Q u e e n Asikn, D a k s a got daughters. daughters, two of w h o m Kayapa Daksa and i n m a r r i a g e t o A g i r a s , t w o t o K r v a , ten t o D h a r m a . twenty-eight t o o f his S u p r a b h a n d B h m i n were given to B a h u p u t r a . Mahdeva, g a v e four daughters, M a n o r a m , Bhnumat, Vil, and Bahud to Aristanemi. 24-25. ten wives a r e He gave Supraj and J a y to Kriva. D h a r m a ' s Arundhat, Vasu, Ymi, Lamb, Marudvati,

S a k a l p , M u h r t , S d h y a n d V i v . N o w I shall tell t h o s e o f Kayapa. 26. 27. Sdhy to Vasus4. 28. Ngavthi. 29. 30. 31. the world. 32-33-34-35. in the world. S o m a ' s son w a s V a r c a s begot Prna of and R a m a n a . instilling vigour of Dhara M a n o h a r the sons D r u h i n a , Anila begot Arundhat The Vasus gave are birth eight to in all earthly objects a n d Apa, S a k a l p gave birth to S a k a l p a present in everyone. number, namely, Dhruva, S o m a , D h a v a , Anila, Anala, Pratysa a n d Prabhsa. A p a ' s sons are V a i t u n d i , r a m a , r n t a a n d D h v a n i . the time-factor in D h r u v ' s son was L o r d K l a who organised O Rudra , Bhnu's
6

Aditi, Diti, Viv

Danu,

K l , Anyu, birth

Sirhhik, to
3

Muni,

K a d r , Sdhy, Ir, K r o d h , Vinat, Surabhi and K h a g . (wife o f D h a r m a ) g a v e

2

Vivedevas1, and Vasu to as B h n u s 5

Sdhyas .

Marutvat

to Marutvans sons were

known

M u h r t ' s M u h r t a s . L a m b ' s son was G h o s a a n d Y m ' s son

Hutahavyavha, iira,

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Literally "all the A The DHM clouds.

deities".

(Vide (Vide

details

in

DHM,

p.

363).

c l a s s of i n f e r i o r d e i t i e s .

d e t a i l s in

CDHM p . (Vide

271). details in

E i g h t minor deities, attendants p. 342) . the suns. T h e rays of light or Moments.

upon

Indra.

26 his wife i v a t w o Kumra, Krttikeya, since 36. 37.

Garuda

Purna-

s o n s P u l o m a j a n d A v i j t a g a t i . A g n i ' s son, he was nurtured by the Krttiks. kha, son the of the

b o r n i n t h e .(ara ( w i l l o w ) - g r o v e , w a s o t h e r w i s e called

V i k h a a n d N a i g a m e y a w e r e b o r n after h i m . P r a t y s a ' s son was the s a g e D e v a l a . Ajaikapt, Ahirbudhnya, Tvastr son Prabhsa's and was Rudra b e c a m e famous as V i v a k a r m a n , the architect of the gods. powerful w e r e his o t h e r s o n s . great penance. 38-39. three world's T h e eleven R u d r a s are, Hara, who became Lords of Bahurpa, Tryambaka, Aparjita,. Tvasjr's Vivarpa

Vrskapi, ambhu, Kapardin, Raivata, Mrgavydha, arva a n d Kaplin, O sage. 40. 41. 42. T h e t w e l v e s u n s (dvdaa Adityas) b o r n t o A d i t i a n d Psan. and Vivasvat, The Savitr, Mitra, of Varuna, Amumat K a y a p a areVisnu, akra, Aryaman, Dhtr, Tvastr, B h a g a T h e s e are the twelve sons known. twenty-seven wives S o m a (moon) and are the twenty-seven 43. became great hrda 44. constellations. Hiranyakaipu born by Hiranyksa Simhik who

w e r e t h e sons o f D i t i . A daughter w a s also t h e wife o f V i p r a c i t t i . name H i r a n y a k a i p u h a d four s o n s o f (Prahlda) a n d Sarh-

valour. Anuhrda, Hrda, Prahrda was t h e last o n e ) . sons were (who 45. 46. 47. A m o n g them Prahlda was a Ayusmat, i v i a n d B s k a l a .

great devotee of Visnu. Samhrda's V i r o c a n a was the son of P r a h r d a . B a l i 1 was the son of V i r o c a n a . O i v a ! B a l i h a d a h u n d r e d sons o f w h o m t h e e l d e s t They are Utkura, akuni, Bhtasantpana, Mahwas B n a 2 . All the sons of H i r a n y k s a were very strong. nga, Mahbhu and Klanbha. 48. 49. T h e following were the sons o f D a n u D v i m r d h a n , . E k a c a k r a o f long a r m s , T r a k a the powerful, Svar-

akara, Ayomukha, amkuiras, Kapila, a m b a r a . b h n u , V r s a p a r v a n , the great d e m o n P u l o m a n .

1. 2.

S e e p . 5. f n . 6 Father of U s .

1.6.60 50. A n d the powerful Vipracitti. T h e s e are the

27 known

sons o f D a n u . S v a r b h n u ' s daughter was S u p r a b h . V r s a p a r v a n 1 begot armisth2. 51. 52. 53. 54. U p a d n a v a n d Hayairas who b e c a m e famous. were P u l o m a n d K l a k . Both These The two daughters of V a i v n a r a s a n d sons were b o r n of t h e m . sons of M r c i were known as P a u l o m a s a n d the strong, Nabha the powerful, Klakajas. T h e Sons of imhik a n d Vipracitti w e r e alya

of them were the wives of M r c i 3 . Sixty-thou-

Vyama,

Vtpi, Namuci, Ilvala, Khasrmat, 55. Ajaka, Naraka, and K l a n b h a . T h e Nivtakavaca d e m o n s were b o r n in P r a h r d a ! s line. 56. 57. 58. Tmr. 59. Aruna4. strength. 60. Kadr's sons c o n s i s t i n g o f a t h o u s a n d phanins ( s e r p e n t s ) of unlimited strength, O a k a r a , h a v e the following5 as their l e a d e r s e s a 6 , V s u k i , 7 T a k s a k a , Vinat had two sons celebrated as Garuda and S u r a s g a v e birth to a thousand serpents of un-limited T m r gave birth t o six d a u g h t e r s o f g r e a t Ulk to vigour, owls, horses, of namely, uk, yen, Bhs, Sugrv, uci a n d Grdhrik. uk gave birth to ukas ( p a r r o t s ) , uk gave birth Thus I y e n t o h a w k s , B h s t o kites a n d G r d h r t o v u l t u r e s . to water-birds, Sugrv to have explained the camels a n d donkeys. lineage

1. A d e m o n K i n g who struggled h a r d with the time aided by u k r a , the preceptor of the demons.

gods

for

long

2. T h e beloved of Yayti. Yayti married Devayn, daughter of u k r a , a n d a r m i s t h , d a u g h t e r o f t h e k i n g o f asuras w a s told by her f a t h e r t o b e h e r s e r v a n t a s a s o r t o f r e c o m p e n s e , for h e r i n s u l t i n g c o n d u c t t o w a r d s her on a p r e v i o u s o c c a s i o n . B u t Y a y t i fell i n l o v e w i t h t h i s s e r v a n t a n d privately m a r r i e d her. ( R e f e r SSED p . 4 5 5 ) . 3. 4. O n e of the ten Prajpatis. hoods, who is the Cauch and

T h e l a m e charioteer of Sun-god.

5. A serpent with one thousand c a n o p y o f V i s n u . [ CDHM 2 9 1 - 2 ] .

6. A serpent who was used as a rope a r o u n d the m o u n t a i n M a n d a r a for c h u r n i n g the o c e a n . 7. P'93lA serpent w h o bit K i n g Parksit. [ V i d e d e t a i l s Pk p. 192; Mbh

28 61. 62. curved akha1, veta, M a h p a d m a ,

Garuda Kambala, all

Purna

Avatara, have

Elpatra, Nga, fangs.

Karkotaka2 and Dhanajaya. of them gave birth to h i g h l y powerful P i c a s

All these a r e easily irritable a n d Krodh gave

(evil-spirits). 63. birth species. 64. Khag gave birth Arista to Yaksas birth and Rksasas. Muni to Gandharvas of gave birth to Apsarasas. inordinate strength. 65. Trijyoti, 66. 67. 68. Vihartr, 69. 70. 71. 72. There are forty-nine Dviukra, Maruts Triukra Ekajyoti, the Dvijyoti, Caturjyoti, Ekaukra, powerful, d r k , gave Surabhi b i r t h t o cows a n d b u f f a l o e s . I r g a v e turning plants a n d all kinds of grasst o trees, creepers,

Sadrk, Anydrk, Pratisadrk, M i t a , S a m i t a , S u m i t a the powerful, Rtajit, Satyajit, army, Atimitra, Amitra, D r a m i t r a , Ajita, R t a , R t a d h a r m , Varuna, Dhruva, this is one group called D u r m e d h a s ; engaged in penances, Vidhrana; Etena, Senajit having good

d r a , S a d r k s a , E t d r k s a e a t i n g little, Prasadrksa, Surata Hetumat, Prasava, glorious S u r a b h a , Valorous This is Ndi, Dhvani, the second Bhsa, Vimukta, Viksipa, Saha, Dyuti, Vasu, Andhrsya, L b h a , K/na, J a y i , Virt, g r o u p n a m e d U d v e s a n a in the s e v e n t h layer o f a t m o s p h e r i c m i n d s . All these k i n g s , d e m o n s a n d g o d s are forms of L o r d H a r i , s u r r o u n d e d by the sun etc. 73. M a n u a n d others worshipped L o r d H a r i .

1. 2. details

A serpent who stole A serpent who was in PK, p. 89].

the V e d a s . saved

(Vide

d e t a i l s i n PK,

p 483-4]. (Vide

by K i n g

N a l a , yet bit him.

1.7.6

29

CHAPTER SEVEN
Worship of the sun etc. Rudra said 1. (the sun) the rest. Brahma said : this yields both enjoyment and salvation. : P l e a s e n a r r a t e the details a n d others of the worship of Srya as practised by S v y a m b h u v a M a n u a n d

O Vysa,

L i s t e n to it in brief.1 Hari said 2. 3. : I shall e x p l a i n the w o r s h i p of the s u n etc. that b r i n g s (dharma), l o v e (kma) a n d other ( a i m s in life). to Om o b e i s a n c e to S r y a ' s s e a t . Om o b e i s a n c e to t h e s o l a r Sah o b e i s a n c e to S r y a . Om o b e i s a n c e

about virtue

f o r m , Om Hrm Hrim

S o m a ( the m o o n ) . O.m o b e i s a n c e t o M a g a l a ( M a r s ) . O m o b e i sance to B u d h a ( M e r c u r y ) . Om obeisance to Brhaspati ( J u p i t e r ) . Om obeisance to to S u k r a ( V e n u s ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to a n a i c a r a to R h u . Om o b e i s a n c e to K e t u . Om to the sun a n d others, (water for for s i p p i n g ) , gandha, visarjana these Tejacanda o f f i e r c e r e f u l g e n c e . (seat), vhana (offering), ( i n v o c a t i o n ) pdya, camana (water ( S a t u r n ) . Om o b e i s a n c e obeisance 4-5. n a m e l y sana snna kra mantras. 6. HrmSvh Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e to i v a . Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e to t h e heart. Om to t h e h e a d . Om Hrm v a s a t to t h e tuft. OmHraiHum eyes. Om Hraum weapon. to a u s p i c i o u s f o r m of i v a . Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e to t h e to t h e a r m o u r . Om Hraum v a u s a t to t h e t h r e e v a u s a t to the three eyes. Om Hrm obeisance to Sadyojta. Om

O i v a , the v a r i o u s rites

w a s h i n g f e e t ) , arghya (scent) departure puspa

( b a t h i n g ) , vastropavita (obeisance), ( o f deity)

(cloth a n d sacred

thread), and

( f l o w e r s ) , dhpa ( i n c e n s e ) , are

dpu ( l a m p ) , namas-

pradaksin(circumambulation)

to be performed by means of

Om H r a h obeisance to the Hrim

obeisance

V m a d e v a . Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e to A g h o r a . Om to T a t p u r u s a . OmHrim o b e i s a n c e to n a .
I. M i s s i n g in V e k a t e v a r a edition.

Hrim o b e i s a n c e

Om Hraum o b e i s a n c e

30

Garuda

Purna

to G a u r . Om Hraum o b e i s a n c e to t h e p r e c e p t o r s . OmHraum o b e i s a n c e to I n d r a . sance ance Om to A g h o r a . to V a s u d e v a ' s Om Hraum o b e i s a n c e to C a n d a . Om Hrm o b e i Om o b e i s a n c e to V a s u d e v a ' s seat. form. Sad Om obeisBrahman. to Lord Om Am Om o b e i s a n c e to L o r d A n i Om ksaum obeisance Lord

r u d d h a . Om o b e i s a n c e to N r y a n a . Om to Tat H r m o b e i s a n c e to V i s n u . Om Bhh. Om Om Kam Narasimha. teya obeisance to

Varha (the

boar-incarnation. divine discus). Pcajanya Pusfi to Om

Tarn Pam am o b e i s a n c e to V a i n a Pham Om S a m obeisance to the ( o b e i s a n c e to o b e i s a n c e to Gham D h a m Bham Ham Vam Sam Sam o b e i s a n c e to t h e O m Tham Cam

( G a r u d a ) . Om Jam Kham Ram o b e i s a n c e to S u d a r a n a ( t h e Kham T h a m divine conch)

G a d ( t h e d i v i n e c l u b ) . Om Vam Lam mam Ksam (the o b e i s a n c e to g o d d e s s r . Om Gam Dam (nourishment). rvtsa Yam (the V a n a m l (the divine g a r l a n d ) . divine to of the Bham obeisance

Om Dham Sam Vam

O m Sam Dam L a m o b e i s a n c e

m a r k on the b r e a s t ) .

K a u s t u b h a 1 (the divine j e w e l ) . Om Om obeisance to I n d r a a n d other directions). Om obeisance to

obeisance to the p r e c e p t o r s . dikplas2 (guardians Visvaksena. 7. Offerings of the

seat a n d other things to L o r d H a r i m a n t r a s . N o w hear Sarasvat3 a power of L o r d Visnu. Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e Hrm obeisance

should be m a d e , O i v a , by m e a n s of these the procedure of worship to It is very auspicious. 8. Om Hrim o b e i s a n c e to S a r a s v a t . to h e a r t . Om Hrim o b e i s a n c e to t h e

h e a d . Om

1. cious

N a m e of a celebrated jewel things Visnu (SED p. 318.) directions, The

obtained

with

thirteen

other

preof

at the c h u r n i n g of the o c e a n and s u s p e n d e d on the b r e a s t

K r s n a or 2. a,

E a c h of the ten and

beginning

with

the

east,

has

one

g u a r d i a n deitynamely, Indra, Agni, Y a m a , Nirrti, V a r u n a , V y u , K u b e r a Brahma 3. The Ananta. last t w o a r e for u p w a r d a n d downward directions respectively. goddess of eloquence and learning who is opposed to ri or the wife o f She Gyatr. p. the daughter and also

Eaksmi, and sometimes considered to be

B r a h m a , the p r o p e r wife o f t h a t g o d b e i n g r a t h e r S v i t r i o r is also identified with D u r g , or even with a n d held to be the d a u g h t e r p. 1182). of Daksa. [vide P

the wife o f V i s n u a n d o f M a n u [AITM], 350, SED

1.8.5
to t h e tuft. 9. Om Hraim o b e i s a n c e to the a r m o u r . Om

31 Hraum (faith), Tusti (intelli-

o b e i s a n c e to t h r e e e y e s . Om Hrah o b e i s a n c e to w e a p o n . Goddess Sarasvat's Kal powers are : r a d d h Medh (light), Mati Rddhi (prosperity), (arts), (intellect),

(satiation) Pusti ( n o u r i s h m e n t ) , Prabh (obeisance). 10. to the Om obeisance to Ksetrapla

g e n c e ) , t h o s e b e g i n n i n g w i t h O m Hrim a n d e n d i n g w i t h n a m a h (the guardian of t h e

field ( t h e b o d y ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to the p r e c e p t o r s . Om obeisance grand-preceptors. 11. Offering of seat etc. to S a r a s v a t s e a t e d on the divine lotus, a n d investiture with the Srya sacred thread (yajopavta) of etc., should be performed by their o w n mantras.

CHAPTER EIGHT
Worship of Visnu and Vajranbha Hari said 1-2. worshipped Mandapa mystic : O in R u d r a ! after the Mandala temple the or due hall) bath Visnu diagram) on It is the should be (mystic p r e p a r e d in a mandala

(consecrated diagram

the ground. T h i s known a s Vajra-

should

b e d r a w n w i t h p o w d e r s o f five c o l o u r s on fourth a n d t h e then extend the

a n d s h o u l d consist o f s i x t e e n a p a r t m e n t s . nbha. T h e s t r i n g s h o u l d b e f i r s t p l a c e d fifth corners. 3. strings original 4. taken. 5. I n all t h e interstices, should be there The into well-versed devotee

should

those corners too, which

a r e o n either s i d e o f the should centre eight be is done. to be

corners. O n t h e a l t e r n a t i v e c o r n e r s t o o this first

I n t h e i n t e r v a l j u n c t u r e o f t h e lines t h e

are such

centres.

T h e thread

whirled round from the earlier a n d the

m i d d l e centres.

Garuda 6. O iva, !

Purna

in t h e interstics the l e a r n e d brhmana s h o u l d l e n g t h ) . By draw this t h e

whirl ( t h e t h r e a d ) a b o u t t h r e e fourth (in 7. of the 8. T h e woll-versed d e v o t e e lotus in two should side

hypotenuse of the central thread should be whirled. the filaments parts on either of the hypotenuse. w h o knows reality regions in around

T h e p e t a l s s h o u l d b e d r a w n o n t h e t o p o f it. O you of firm vows, the instructor in all s h o u l d m a k e t h e f i g u r e o f lotuses the centres. 9. about Openings should be m a d e ( d r a w n ) opening halfway. 10. In the mystic d i a g r a m the colours the interstices chosen (for t h e the petals proportion to the f i r s t t h r e a d l e n g t h . T h e should be embellished the

p o w d e r s ) s h o u l d b e a s f o l l o w s T h e h y p o t e n u s e i n yellow, filaments in white a n d red, in black. 11-12. and the five r e d , yellow T h e four b o r d e r s i n lines i n black and lines in blue, the

black, the openings in white

t h e m y s t i c d i a g r a m t o o likewise. W h i t e , s h o u l d b e i n this o r d e r . H a v i n g performing the nysa1

p r e p a r e d t h e m y s t i c d i a g r a m a n d after one should begin the worship of H a r i . 13-14. head that

T h e nysa ( a s s i g n m e n t ) o f V i s n u i s i n t h e m i d d l e the and

of the heart, of S a k a r s a n a in the throat, of P r a d y u m n a in o f A n i r u d d h a i n t h e tuft, o f B r a h m a i n a l l t h e l i m b s of rdhara in 15. in 16.

b o t h t h e h a n d s . After c o t e m p l a t i n g " I a m Pradyumna

V i s n u " one should fix H a r i in the pericarp of the lotus. O n e s h o u l d f i x S a k a r s a n a i n t h e east, r d h a r a is to be worship by fixed the south, A n i r u d d h a in the west a n d B r a h m a in the north. in R u d r a ' s Corner (Northfixed in t h e four q u a r t e r s . incense and of fragrant should be means

east) , I n d r a and others Thereafter due

other articles one attains the greatest status.

i. tions.

Assignment of the various parts [SSED, p. 306.)

of the body and

to

different

deities,

'which is usually a c c o m p a n i e d with

prayers

corresponding

gesticula-

1.9.10

33

CHAPTER NINE
Visnu-diks Hari said : 1. T h e disciple, duly consecrated in p r o p e r time, s h o u l d He should be m a d e t o offer o b l a be blindfolded with a cloth. 2. oblations

t i o n s with t h e o r i g i n a l mantra h u n d r e d a n d e i g h t t i m e s . I f t h e c o n s e c r a t i o n i s for t h e offered a r e twice in it acquisition of a son, the a sdhaka R u d r a , if it is t h e it a m o u n t s woman. T h e n u m b e r , if it is for is t h r i c e . O be

( a s p i r a n t after s p i r i t u a l i s m ) 3. to details 4.

c a s e o f a p r e c e p t o r w h o h a d t o a t t a i n s a l v a t i o n , i t i s four t i m e s . If the consecration were to preceptor, Vaisnva of the consecration omitted, and killing a brhmana

will n o w b e n a r r a t e d b y m e . T h e should be

c o n s e c r a t i o n d e s t r o y s adharma. After m a k i n g t h e d i s c i p l e s sit o u t s i d e , they m a d e to c o n t e m p l a t e . O R u d r a , they should being dried up by a portion of wind. 5. portion 6. T h e y should be of fire, and considered as being scorched by a being inundated by a portion of water. mystic with syllable another, be considered as

Tejas will m a k e t h a t b e i n g o n e w i t h i t a n d t h e n l e a v e i t o u t . H e s h o u l d think cause in the upon Pranava1 ( t h e soul Om) a s t h e heaven, the cause in the body being

the other one. T h e r e he should unite one that being the cause of the body. 7. akara. 8.

T h e n having aroused, he should a t t a c h If one is incompetent to worship H a r i T h i s (adoration) should

each one, O in the mystic

d i a g r a m , one should a d o r e him in contemplation. h a v e four o p e n i n g s ( d o o r s ) The hand nails is the lotus filab e g i n n i n g with B r a h m a t r t h a in order. a n d the fingers a r e the petals. 9. T h e p a l m is the pericarp a n d the having are the Hari ments. He should adore, 10. on contemplated there in

the midst of the sun, the m o o n a n d fire. H e , with d u e c o n t e m p l a t i o n , s h o u l d p l a c e the p a l m the h e a d

1.

of the disciple. Since there is V i s n u in the p a l m ,

V i d e fn. 5 on p. 9.

34 this p a l m i s contact with 11. that it. of V i s n u ; and

Garuda

Purna

a l l sins p e r i s h o n c o m i n g i n whose eyes i t falls t h e r e of ladies

T h e teacher should honour the disciple, flower so that

are covered with a piece of cloth, a n d then keeping him face to f a c e w i t h t h e L o r d s h o u l d offer a where the h e a d o f L o r d V i s n u is. 12.. should be He should give him a n a m e . T h e self-chosen. T h e learned dsa. names preceptor shall fix the

n a m e s of t h e dras, e n d i n g w i t h

CHAPTER TEN
Worship Hari said 1. laksm. : I shall n a r r a t e the w o r s h i p of r a n d others Srm rirh rm Sraim raurh Srah in order, the in the of Laksm

a l t a r for t h e s a k e o f p r o s p e r i t y . Srrri Hrim o b e i s a n c e t o M a h heart, t h e h e a d , t h e tuft, t h e a r m o u r , t h e eyes, t h e a n d the idol should be worshipped. 2-4. In the mystic diagram the eyes, on the with the sky, the lotus drawn w i t h i n , h a v i n g four p a s s a g e s p e r v a d e s the in view firmament, of the subsistence abounding in dust, (everything m o o n a n d the sun, the V e d a s a n d the beginnings, he the eight w e a p o n , the seat

m o o n ) h a v i n g sixty-four extremities a n d w h o w i s h e s t o fulfil h i s d e s i r e s , sacrificial Om fire to Laksm and preceptor D u r g , Gana 5. the should her and the

offer o b l a t i o n s i n limbs
1

in one corner a n d

Ksetrapla i n a n o t h e r . worship L a k s m with before. O m Saum

Ghath Tom Dam Ham o b e i s a n c e to M a h l a k s m . W i t h this (mantra) o n e family should as narrated Svh.

all the m e m b e r s of the 6.

o b e i s a n c e to S a r a s v a t . Om Hrim Saum. Om Hrim s a y , s a y Vgvdini sance to Sarasvat.

1.

O b e i s a n c e to S a r a s v a t . Om Hrim o b e i -

A t u t e l a r y d e i t y ; their n u m b e r is g i v e n

a s 49. SED p . 3 3 2 .

1.11.10

35

CHAPTER ELEVEN
Nava-vyha1 Hari said 1. -which breath 2. 3. beings 4. *I am plate in the through : I shall now narrate had through the the p r o c e d u r e o f Nava-vyhrcana fix it in worship of Visnu

b e e n m e n t i o n e d t o K a y a p a . E x t r i c a t i n g the vital cerebral p a s s a g e one the bija mystic lam all With bija2 ram should

n a v e l , i n t h e sky. T h e n with With should the be the physical b o d y and immovable should s h a l l b e b u r n t . W i t h t h e bija yam h e s h o u l d d e s t r o y a l l . movable the bija deluged. bam h e

p o n d e r o v e r t h e amrta ( t h e i m p e r i s h a b l e ) . T h e n , in the m i d d l e of the bubbles with the thought yellow-clad, four-armed V i s n u ' he should contem-

mentally. 5-6. He s h o u l d then perform the and agas3 the T h e n with the help t h r e e - f o l d mantra-nysa of aforesaid bijas a n d hands six b o d y w i t h t h e bija c o n s i s t i n g o f t w e l v e body) he should so perform

mystic syllables.

( l i m b s of the

that H a r i is realised. S t a r t i n g with the right t h u m b , he should p l a c e t h e c e n t r e o f t h e t h u m b o n the p e t a l . 7. A f t e r f i x i n g t w o m y s t i c bijas i n t h e c e n t r e , them he s h o u l d in heart, hands p l a c e t h e m a g a i n o n t h e aga. H e s h o u l d p l a c e 8. 9. Arms, hands, knees And contemplate and feet.

n e a d , tuft, v i t a l l i m b s , m o u t h , e y e s , s t o m a c h , b a c k , Keeping lord the of s h a p e d like lotus, h e should p l a c e the t h u m b i n the m i d d l e . on V i s n u , the all, the s u p r e m e entity. 10. Then He should p l a c e on head, eyes, t h e s e m y s t i c bijas i n t h e f o r e mouth, neck, heart, navel

finger a n d other fingers. p r i v a t e p a r t , k n e e s a n d feet r e s p e c t i v e l y .

1. 2. 3. Vyhaa form, manifestation, Bijaa m y s t i c a l letter of a n y d e i t y . p . 569. e s p e c i a l l y of V i s n u . w h i c h forms the essential part

or s y l l a b l e

of the mantra p a r t . SSED.

S i x parts o f the b o d y : t w o thighs, t w o arms, h e a d and the m i d d l e

36 11. be placed finger. 12. hand, placing 13. be placed 14. the T h e netra-bija s h o u l d b e p l a c e d i n t h e same order is to be the heart After placing the sadaga Then thumb bijas i n the five
1

Garuda the

Purna

h a n d s he should

should p l a c e them over the b o d y . beginning with

bijas

a n d e n d i n g w i t h the little m i d d l e of the After

f o l l o w e d in aga-nysa.

in the heart, the h e a d should be p l a c e d on

the h e a d . A f t e r p l a c i n g t h e tuft o n t h e tuft, t h e a r m o u r s h o u l d all over the b o d y ; t h e eyes s h o u l d b e p l a c e d o v e r should he

the eyes a n d the w e a p o n in b o t h the h a n d s . B i n d i n g all the quarters with that a l o n e , he first with begin the process of worship. At s h o u l d think oftheyoga-pitha, 15. He should place a n d prosperity in the quarters respectively and 16. ing with the east. Therefore he should that place the infinite that had been well-covered by that acts as the part. 17-18. T h e n c o n t e m p l a t i n g on the white lotus petals in the a hundred leaves, a n d the with born form of of t h e p o n d o f vidy, h a v i n g e i g h t s i m i l a r the quarters, having upper zones of the 19. Then these, identifies itself with t h e m , concentration,

(the sacred s e a t ) in the heart. virtue, knowledge, renunciation south-east beginning with the

un-righteousness etc.

in the quarters beginn-

supporting

s e a t a n d t h a t i s r a i s e d i n t h e fore-

the

upper

p e r i c a r p scattered a b o u t ; he should think sun, he the V e d a s a n d others. should place the

a b o u t the u p p e r a n d

moon, fire a n d soul by m e a n s of eight-fold power powers of beginnin the

K e a v a , i . e . Vimal a n d o t h e r s , r e s t i n g i n t h e ing with the east; a n d pericarp. 20. also the ninth

quarters vested

C o n t e m p l a t i n g t h u s a n d w o r s h i p p i n g t h e yoga-pitha, the holder of the bow,

h e s h o u l d thereafter p l a c e L o r d V i s n u , invoking him mentally. 21.

1.

T h e n h e should p l a c e the

eye in

the m i d d l e ,

the

T h e six

bijas f o r t h e s i x p a r t s o f t h e b o d y .

1.11.31. astra-mantra 22. in the corners, the uniting the

37 h e a r t etc. with the others with

four-petals of the four-quarters b e g i n n i n g with the east. Uniting bijas o f S a k a r s a n a a n d he should place the east etc. 23. door. 24. H e s h o u l d t h e n p l a c e t h e c o n c h i n t h e c o r n e r s after devotee left o f the p l a c i n g the c l u b in the northern door. T h e intelligent s h o u l d p l a c e r g a - b o w either on the right or on the lord. 25. (cakra) quarters 26. Ananta1 27. on Similarly, he should place the s w o r d either side and thereafter the ( I n d r a a n d others) (east etc.) the weapons he should contemplate and Brahman above and them, all mudr i s heart in accordance a n d the discus g u a r d i a n s of the w i t h their r e s p e c in order, Vainateya (garuda)

in the eastern a n d western doors. He should assign r to the south a n d L a k s m to the the southern north, a n d u d a r a n a with a thousand spokes to

tive q u a r t e r s

I n the s a m e m a n n e r , h e should p l a c e below. After contemplating signs) s h o u l d be

Vajra e t c . T h e n

worshipping The

mudrs2 ( m y s t i c 28-29.

shown. when the

first

Ajali w h i c h p r o p i t i a t e s t h e l o r d q u i c k l y . Vandani i s t h e n e x t p l a c e d on the with the right h a n d raised up. W h e n i t i s rdhvgustha. left f i s t i s k e p t w i t h

t h e t h u m b lifted u p a n d t h e n l o c k e d u p w i t h t h e r i g h t t h u m b T h e s e three a r e c o m m o n . T h e r e a r e others a c c o r d i n g t o t h e different f o r m s o f the i d o l s . 30. W i t h the u s e o f the little f i n g e r ( a n d other f i n g e r s ) plus .. ending with the little three). It should e i g h t mudrs a r e f o r m e d i n o r d e r (five tioned before. 31. B e n d i n g the is three \ fingers

b e b o r n e i n m i n d t h a t t h e o r d e r i s t h o s e o f t h e e i g h t bijas m e n -

f i n g e r , with the t h u m b a n d keeping b o t h the h a n d s b e n t d o w n , Narasirhha-mudr formed.

1. 2. number). possess

N a m e s of Visnu, N a m e of an

a l s o o f s e r p e n t e s a , SED, p . in religious worship

16. fingers (24 i n and p. 822. supposed to

particular positions or intertwinings of the

Commonly practised

occult m e a n i n g a n d m a g i c a l efficacy. Ibid.,

38 32. 33. them one Aga-mudr. 34. mudrs order. 35. due order. 36. Boar. 37. I n v i e w o f t h e different h u e s , t h e red, honey-coloured. Tarn, Path, Sam G a r u d a ; Jam, Om, T h e f i r s t vowel, the second, the Keeping ten both Keeping the left h a n d raised

Garuda u p , whirl

Purna

it slowly.

T h i s i s t h e n i n t h o n e k n o w n a s Varha-mudr. K e e p i n g b o t h t h e sts r a i s e d u p a n d s t r a i g h t , r e l e a s e by one a n d then a g a i n contract all. T h i s is c a l l e d the f i s t s tight o n e after a n o t h e r of the quarters the

of the

guardians

are formed in and

penultimate

t h e f i n a l signify V s u d e v a , B a l a ,

Kama,

and

Aniruddha in t h e mantras the lordly are nine-

Tat Sat, Hum, Ksaum, Bhh, t h e s e a r e B r a h m a , V i s n u , ( N a r a - ) sirhha a n d names

for N r y a n a ,

foldwhite, 38. Lam,

yellow, b l u e , black, p u r p l e , cloud-coloured, Kham, Vam Vam, Sam I

fire-coloured a n d Karh,

S u d a r a n a ; Sam, Cam, Phar, SamGad ( t h e d i v i n e c l u b ) ; Mam, 39. Pustik; 40 myself. black 41. KsamConch; Gam, Jam, Vam, VamVanaml; Parh, DamSamSrvatsa; and Gharh, Dham, Bham, Ham r ; Gharh, Cham, Dam,

YamKaustubha

Ananta is

T h u s the l i m b s of the lord of lords a r e ten duly. G a r u d a resembles the lotus in colour, the club h a s a the halo (Pusti) has t h e c o l o u r o f irisa-ower; full-moon, K a u s t u b h a has thousand Ananta is suns a n d like the form,

Laksm has a golden complexion. 42. T h e conch resembles the red h u e , the discus h a s the brilliance of a Srivatsa r e s e m b l e s 43. w h i t e Kunda-ftower. five colours, T h e g a r l a n d is of

cloud, the w e a p o n s have the forms of lightning which m a y not have been mentioned. 44. with Punda O n e should kksa-vidy. offer arghya and pdya i n accordance

1.12.3

39

CHAPTER TWELVE
Order of worship Hari said 1. for : I shall describe the order in the p r o c e d u r e of w o r s h i p its success. At O m Namah Vam, first the the remembrance purification of caturbhujaof the of the (obeisance)'. formation (four

achieving 2.

S u p r e m e S o u l with Tarn, Ram, soul. Then body. armed) 3.

Lamthus

Om o b e i s a n c e , t h u s the

t h r e e f o l d p l a c e m e n t o f kra. T h e n t h e w o r s h i p o b e i s a n c e t o Ananta. prosperity. Om Om Om obeito obeiOm o b e i s a n c e to k n o w l e d g e . Om o b e i Om o b e i s a n c e to to to i g n o r a n c e . obeisance

o f t h e jyoga-seat e m b e d d e d i n t h e h e a r t . Om o b e i s a n c e to dharma. s a n c e to r e n u n c i a t i o n . non-detachment.

s a n c e to evil. Om o b e i s a n c e

Om o b e i s a n c e

non-prosperity.

s a n c e to t h e l o t u s . Om o b e i s a n c e to t h e s o l a r - s p h e r e . o b e i s a n c e to V i m a l . Om o b e i s a n c e to U t k a r s i n . to J n . Om o b e i s a n c e to K r i y . Om o b e i s a n c e o b e i s a n c e to Prahy. Om o b e i s a n c e to n. seat with all agas and upgas. Saty. in the Om

Om o b e i -

s a n c e to the lower s p h e r e . Om o b e i s a n c e to the fiery s p h e r e . Om Om o b e i s a n c e to Y o g a . Om o b e i s a n c e to

Om obeisance to S a r v a t o m u k h . Om obeisance to H a r i ' s Then the pericarpAm heart. 1m obei-

o b e i s a n c e to V s u d e v a . Am o b e i s a n c e to s a n c e to the the a r m o u r . sance sance to to the h e a d . m Aum obeisance Ah Om

o b e i s a n c e t o t h e tuft. Aim o b e i s a n c e t o to t h e t r i o of e y e s . obeisance Tat Sat Ksaum to to h Phat o b e i Om Ah to obeisance to S a k a r s a n a . Am obeiAniruddha. to obeisance Brahman.

w e a p o n . Am

Pradyumna,

o b e i s a n c e to r y a n a . Om Hum o b e i s a n c e Varha.

to V i s n u . Vum, Sr.

N a r a s i m h a . Bhh

Kam to V a i n a t e y a . Jam Kham Vam to S u d a r a n a . Kham Lam, Mam, K?am to P c a j a n y a . Gam, Dam, Vam, am to Dam, Pusti, Tarn Srivatsa, Cham Bham Ham to Sam to

Cam, Pham, Sam to Gad. Gharh Dham

Dham, Vam to Vanaml. Dam Sam to to K a u s t u b h a . the hide. r g a . 1m sword; Kham to the

to t h e t w o q u i v e r s . Cam to of dharma, Ksam t o Tarn

to I n d r a , the lord of g o d s ; to

A g n i , the lord of lustre: to Y a m a , the lord N a i r t a , the

lord of d e m o n s ; to V a r u n a , the lord of water.

40 to Vyu, the lord of

Garuda

Purna

b r e a t h . Dham t o D h a n a d a , t h e l o r d o f of l e a r n i n g . to Om to V a j r a , to Om to the l o r d o f all the sword. the

w e a l t h . Ham to n a , t h e l o r d P o w e r . Om to

Danda ( p u n i s h m e n t ) , Kham to

n o o s e , to t h e b a n n e r , to t h e c l u b , to t h e t r i d e n t . Lam to Ananta, the lord of nether-worlds. worlds. Om obeisance Om Nam o b e i s a n c e . Om Gam o b e i s a n c e . Vm obeisance. obeisance obeisance. obeisance Om Om Om Om Brahman, Om to L o r d V s u d e v a . Om Om o b e i s a n c e . Bham o b e i s a n c e . Tern o b e i s a n c e . Om o b e i s a n c e . Om Nam Om Yarn

Om Mam o b e i s a n c e . Om Vam o b e i s a n c e . Om o b e i s a n c e . Om obeisance. obeisance Om Om Om

o b e i s a n c e . Om Sum o b e i s a n c e . Om Dem o b e i s a n c e Om Vm Tarn Mom Yam Nam o b e i s a n c e . Om Rm Nam o b e i s a n c e . Vam Tern Vmsumdervm

Nam mom Bham Gam

Yam Om o b e i s a n c e to N r y a n a . Om o b e i s a n c e to P u r u s o t t a m a . 4. you, O O b e i s a n c e to you, O Pundarkksa. O b e i s a n c e to you Obeisance to Subrahmanya (well-embedded in the B r a h m a n ) , O

O V i v a b h v a n a (well-wisher of the u n i v e r s e ) . Great-being, O Elder. 5-6-7. be added at hundred Then and

In t h e havana-rites1 of these t h e w o r d the eight end of these

svh s h o u l d

mantras. T h u s r e p e a t i n g this (he has won).

t i m e s a n d g i v i n g arghyd, o b e i s a n c e s h o u l d well-versed a n d t h e rest. i n mantras s h o u l d w o r s h i p d u l y

b e m a d e r e p e a t e d w i t h t h e mantra jitarii teno, the devotee

t h a t g o d o f g o d s , A c y u t a , with, f i r s t h a v i n g m e n t i o n e d pranava, h i s o w n bija, agas 8. p i t with

A f t e r k i n d l i n g f i r e , h e s h o u l d k e e p i t well i n t h e s a c r e d the a u s p i c i o u s results thereof. A f t e r contemplating

e v e r y t h i n g , h e s h o u l d m e d i t a t e u p o n t h e mandala. 9. H a v i n g p e r f o r m e d havana, h u n d r e d a n d should eight six times obla-

with the principle c a l l e d V s u d e v a , he tions with Sakarsanabija. 10. guardians the e n d .

offer

T h r e e e a c h t i m e t o t h e agas a n d o n e of the quarters.

each

to

the

The prnhuti 2 s h o u l d b e m a d e i n

1. 2.

O f f e r i n g o b l a t i o n i n t o fire. T h e final offering into fire.

1.13.3-10 11. The soul should be merged with the

41 greatest

principle b e y o n d the pale 12. twice this 13. 14. 15. This homa is

of speech. called nitya; the to

After sitting a n d s h o w i n g and naimittika requires

t h e mudrs, h e s h o u l d b o w d o w n a g a i n . ritual. G o , I go to greatest destination where their respective places.

there is L o r d N i r a j a n a (the unsullied o n e ) . M a y the g o d s go Caturbhuja, back S u d a r a n a , r, H a r i , Acyuta, T r i v i k r a m a . Vsudeva, Pradyumna, that the by me Sakarsana, Anantaka beginhouse P u r u s a t h e s e c o n s t i t u t e t h e ten w i t h t h e n i n e vyhas. Aniruddha, Dvdatm, beyond t h e s e devas s h o u l d b e k n o w n a s s i g n i f i e d b y ing with one. 16. They should Om be worshipped to in Om a m a r k e d with the wheels. Om Svh to Sucakra. the d e s t r o y e r of Phat. is auspicious 17. and s p o k e d , Hum Om Svh to Cakra. Om S v h to Vicakra. Svh Mahcakra. Mahcakra Om Hum to t h e t h o u s a n d wheels

d e m o n s , Hum Phat.

T h i s Dvrak-cakra-pj in the house

well-protecting.

CHAPTER THIRTEEN
Visnupajarastotra Hari Said: 1-2. I shall now expound Visnu's to protect me auspicious Thee, in O, the Pafijara east. O

(protective c a g e ) Obeisance, obeisance T a k i n g up the Visnu, I seek discus S u d a r a n a refuge in T h e e . O

Govinda.

P a d m a n b h a , take up the seek refuge in

club K a u m o d a k , obeisance to Thee. 3-10. in O V i s n u , p r o t e c t me in the S o u t h . I T h e e . T a k i n g u p the plough-share S a u n a n d a protect m e i n I seek refuge

the west, O P u r u s o t t a m a , o b e i s a n c e to T h e e . e y e d o n e ) protect m e i n the north.

T h e e . T a k i n g u p the destructive M o r t a r O P u n d a r k k s a (lotusO J a g a n n t h a (lord of the

42

Garuda in Thee. Taking up the I

Purna the

u n i v e r s e ) I seek r e f u g e shield and the other

Sword have

weapons

p r o t e c t m e , O H a r i , killer of sought Pcaform, the great Conch of divine a

Rksasas, i n t h e n o r t h e a s t , O b e i s a n c e t o T h e e . refuge in T h e e . O Visnu, taking up janya

1

and the lotus A n u d b o d h a protect me in me. O Nrkesarin (Man-lion) the m o o n a n d South me the in

the South-east, (Lunar O

O Boar, protect

T a k i n g u p the s u n a n d a n d the Lord me necklace

Cndramas

S w o r d , ) p r o t e c t m e i n the Hayagrva3,

west. T a k i n g up Vaijayant the north-west.

Srivatsa2 p r o t e c t obeisance

to Thee. Riding on Vainateya unconquered, protect to Thee me to to T h e e . R i d i n g on

h i g h o v e r i n t h e sky O J a n r d a n a , t h e always. O

un-vanquished, obeisance

V i a l k s a p r o t e c t m e i n the n e t h e r w o r l d s , o b e i s a n c e m a k i n g t h e Bhupajara in the among men, obeisance (Protective C a g e of Arms) to Thee. Thus was

O s h o r e l e s s O c e a n , O b e i s a n c e to T h e e O G r e a t F i s h ! O T r u t h ! protect hands, fingers, head and other parts. O V i s n u , foremost expounded for Vaisnava Pajara Mahissura the formerly demon the protecthis s h e a man

a k a r a the G r e a t destroyed C m a r a ,

t i o n o f K t y y a n , 4 t h e wife o f n a . O

a k a r a , by devotion

Rakta-bja and

o t h e r e n e m i e s o f g o d s . B y r e c i t i n g this w i t h a l w a y s c o n q u e r s his e n e m i e s .

CHAPTER FOURTEEN
Meditation Hari Said: 1. I shall now e x p o u n d Toga c o n d u c i v e to enjoyment

a n d final b e a t i t u d e . H a r i , the lord, is to be c o n t e m p l a t e d , so say the devotees w h o regularly c o n t e m p l a t e .

1. 2. It is Krsna's conch. mark It derives its name on the from the sea-demon

Pacajana. A particular (a curl of hair) breast of Visnu (and

also K r s n a ) . 3. Refer 4. According to CDHM p. A name 120. of the goddess D u r g . some, Visnu took this form to save the Vedas.

1.14.12
2. 3.

43 O I a l i s t e n , V i s n u , t h e l o r d o f a l l , i s infinite, r e m o v e r feet.1 universe, the soul I am V s u d e v a , the lord the immanent of the

o f a l l s i n s , d e v o i d o f g r o u n d o f r e s t for t h e of B r a h m a n , 4. soul,

the e t e r n a l , free f r o m all ksara and

kinds of physical bodies. D e v o i d o f t h e a t t r i b u t e s o f t h e b o d y , free f r o m a n d Aksara (imperishable) the smeller (perishable) p r e s i d i n g over the six

types ( o f living b e i n g s ) , the seer, the h e a r e r , b e y o n d the p a l e of the senses. 5. mind. 6. being in 7.

F r e e f r o m its a t t r i b u t e s , t h e c r e a t o r , d e v o i d o f n a m e free from

a n d r a c e , the thinker residing in the m i n d , the lord

D e v o i d of the attributes of the m i n d , he is the worldly knower the presiding the intellect, the omniscient witness devoid of ( t h e the intellect. of the intellect, all in-all, devoid and

k n o w l e d g e , the s p i r i t u a l knowledge, the a t t r i b u t e s of)

F r e e from the attributes

t h e o m n i p r e s e n t m i n d , free from all l i v i n g b e i n g s , of the attributes of the vital breath. 8.

T h e Vital b r e a t h o f l i v i n g b e i n g s , t h e q u i e t , d e v o i d o f of the attributes

f e a r , free f r o m e g o t i s t i c f e e l i n g s a n d d e v o i d (of the e g o ) . 9. T h e witness ( o f e g o ) , the

controller, (of e g o ) , Bliss

personified, 10. form

the p r e s i d i n g b e i n g of ( t h e three states of) wake(Having the I

f u l n e s s , d r e a m a n d s l e e p , d e v o i d o f their a t t r i b u t e s . T h e f o u r t h , t h e g r e a t C r e a t o r Drgrpa free from qualities, the of the V i s i o n ) , independent, Truth.

the enlightened, the u n a g e i n g , the all-pervading, the am the soul, the auspicious o n e . 11. Those men of knowledge entertained. I have reads who

contemplate upon

(me) a n d the lord thus, form; no doubt need be 12.

a t t a i n the g r e a t s t a t u s a n d also that narrated this to

O a k a r a o f g o o d v o w s , thus

you the procedure of contemplation. He who tantly attains to V i s n u ' s world.

cons-

1.

T h e reading

q^T^Tfr^1%cr:

is s u g g e s t e d .

44

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER FIFTEEN
Visnu-sahasra-nma-stotra Rudra said 1. : O L o r d , w h a t is to be m u t t e r e d by a m a n so t h a t he

is released from the terrible ocean of worldly existence. O J a n r d a n a , y o u n a r r a t e t o m e t h a t g r e a t stotra.1 Hari Said : 2. Supreme Praising Soul, Lord the Visnu (the great Brahman, names holy Listen the immutable) by thousand the a man

b e c o m e s free. 3-160. a t t e n t i o n . Om Vsudevason of Vasudeva. M a h v i s n u t h e g r e a t V i s n u the o m n i p r e s e n t . V m a n a t h e d w a r f (who p u t d o w n the d e m o n B a l i ) . VsavaIndra. V a s u t h e eight semi-divine beings, B l a c a n d r a n i b h a r e s e m b l i n g the crescent m o o n . B l a t h e child. BalabhadraBalarma. B a l d h i p a h i g h l y powerful. B a l i b a n d h a n a k r t w h o fettered the d e m o n B a l i . V e d h a s t h e creator. Varenyathe Kavipoet. Vedakartrproducer of Vedas. V e d a r p a V e d a s personified. Vedyaworthy of being known. Vedapariplutafilled with V e d a s . excellent. of Vedas. Vedavitknower I s h a l l tell y o u O akara, and great with full object of recitation2 which r e m o v e s a l l sins.

1. 2. muttered.

A h y m n to recite Japyaa hymn

one

thousand

names that

of

Visnu. to be

It

is rather and

different form the o n e found in

the M a h b h r a t a . which is recited

of adoration;

1.15.3-160
Vedgavettrknower o f the V e d g a s . 1

45

V e d e a l o r d of the V e d a s . B a l d h r a s t o r e of strength. B a l r d a n a s u p p r e s s o r of the strong. Avikraunchanging. Varealord of Boons. Varada(or Varuna) Vrahslayer he who grants boons (or V a r u n a ) . of Varuna. Varundhipaoverlord of heroes. hero. Brhadvragreater

Vanditathe adored. P a r a m e v a r a the g r e a t I v a r a . A t m a n t h e soul. Paramtmanthe Supreme Soul. P r a t y a g t m a n t h e inner Self. V i y a t p a r a b e y o n d t h e sky. Padmanbhalotus-navelled. P a d m a n i d h i t h e treasure trove P d m a . P a d m a h a s t a t h e holder of a lotus in the h a n d . G a d d h a r a t h e holder of club. P a r a m a t h e greatest. P a r a b h t a b e y o n d the elements. P u r u s o t t a m a m o s t excellent of purusas. Ivarathe powerful. Padmajaghalotus-wristed. P u n d a r k a w h i t e in colour. P a d m a m l d h a r a w e a r i n g g a r l a n d of lotuses. P r i y a b e l o v e d of all. Padmksalotus-eyed. Padmagarbhalotus-wombed. Parjanyarainbearing cloud. P a d m a s a i h s t h i t a s e a t e d in a lotus. A p r a b e y o n d the range. P a r a m r t h a t h e greatest entity. P a r n m p a r a g r e a t e s t o f the g r e a t . Prabhulord.
1. Six subsidiary treatises related to the Vedas. They are

f^rSTl,

^r.

<^I+<UI.

fcw,

s*f5T,

szrrftre

46 Panditebhyah Panditascholarly of Scholars. Pavitraholy. P p a m a r d a k a s u p p r e s s o r o f sins. uddhaPure. P r a k a r p a o f refulgent Pavitrapurifier. Pariraksakaprotector. Pips-Varjitafree from thirst. form.

Garuda

Purna

P d y a h o l y w a t e r ( o f f e r e d a t t h e feet o f t h e l o r d ) . P u r u s a t h e divine being. Prakrti the divine N a t u r e . P r a d h n a the d i v i n e intellect. P r t h i v p a d m a t h e lotus of the earth. Padmanbhalotus-navelled. P r i y a p r a d a g i v e r of desire. Sarvealord of all. Sarvagagoing everywhere. S a r v a t h e all-in-all. Sarvavidomniscient. S a r v a d a b e s t o w e r of all. P a r a h e who is beyond everything. S a r v a i d e n t i c a l with all. J a g a t o d h m a t h e a b o d e o f the universe. S a r v a d a r i n t h e witness of all. Sarvabhrtupholder of all.

S a r v n u g r a h a k r d D e v a the deity benevolent to all. Sarvabhtahrdisthitaresiding beings. S a r v a p a p r o t e c t o r of all. S a r v a p j y a w o r t h y of every one's worship. S a r v a d e v a n a m a s k r t a s a l u t e d by all devas. S a r v a s y a j a g a t o m l a m r o o t - c a u s e o f all universe. S a k a l a t h e entire, the whole. Niskalathe undivided. Analathe fire. S a r v a g o p t r t h e protector of all. in the hearts of all living

1.15.3-160 S a r v a n i s t h a a l 1-pervasive. S a r v a k r a n a k r a n a m c a u s e of all causes. S a r v a d h y e y a w o r t h y of meditation by all. S a r v a m i t r a f r i e n d of all. S a r v a d e v a s v a r p a d h r k h o l d i n g the forms of all g o d s . S a r v d h y y a o b j e c t of study by all. Surdhyaksapresiding deity of gods. Sursuranamaskrtaadored by gods and demons. D u s t n m a s u r n r i i c a s a r v a d g h t a k a t h e p e r p e t u a l slay< o f t h e w i c k e d a n d t h e asuras. Antakathe destroyer. S a t y a p l a the protector of truth. S a n n b h a c e n t r a l cynosure of the g o o d . Siddhealord o f Siddhas. Siddhas. S i d d h a v a n d i t a r e s p e c t e d by S i d d h a s i d h a o b t a i n e d by S d h y a s i d d h a o b t a i n e d by H r d v a r a l o r d of the heart. J a g a t a h a r a n a m r e f u g e o f the universe. J a g a t a h reyahglory o f the U n i v e r s e . J a g a t a h ksemaaffluence o f the U n i v e r s e . ubhakrtdoer of good. obhanabeautiful. Saumyagentle. Satyareality. S a t y a p a r k r a m a o f true valour. S a t y a s t h a s t a t i o n e d in truth. S a t y a s a k a l p a o f true volition. Satyavidknower of truth.

S i d d h a s d h y a o n e who has achieved everything achievable. t h e Siddhas. Sdhyas.-

S a t y a d a g i v e r of truth. Dharmavirtue. Dharminvirtuous. K a r m i n o b s e r v e r of sacred Sarvakarmavivarjitafree rites. from all activities.

K a r m a k a r t r o r d a i n e r of actions. K a r m a n t h e action.

48 K r i y s a c r e d rite. K r y a m t h e result. rpatilord of splendour. Nrpatilord of men. rmatglorious. Sarvasya Devnm Vrsnlnm p a t i l o r d of all. powerful. p a t i l o r d o f devas. p a t i l o r d o f Vrsnis. of slayer o f Tripuras. rjitathe

Garuda

Purna

Hiranyagarbhasya patilord of Hiranyagarbha. Tripurntahpatilord Pryaabundance. V a s n m p a t i l o r d o f Vasus. Akhandalasya patilord of India. Varunasya patilord of Varuna. of plants. Vanaspatnm patilord Panrh p a t i l o r d of beasts.

Anilasya p a t i l o r d of wind. Analasya patilord of fire. Yamasya patilord of Y a m a . Kuberasya pati,lord of Kubera. Naksatrnm patilord of Stars. O s a d h n m patilord of medicinal herbs. V r k s n m p a t i l o r d o f trees. Ngnrii p a t i l o r d of the N a g a r s . A r k a s y a p a t i l o r d o f the S u n . Daksasya patilord of Daksa. Suhrdm patilord of friends.

Nrpnm patilord of Kings. Gandharvnrii patilord o f the Gandharvas. lord of vital breaths.

A s n m u t t a m a h p a t i m o s t excellent Parvatnrii patilord of mountains. N i m n a g n a r i i p a t i l o r d o f rivers. S u r n m p a t i l o r d of devas. r e s t h a t h e m o s t excellent. Kapilasya patilord ofKapila. L a t n m p a t i l o r d of creepers.

1.15.3-160 Vrudhrii p a t i l o r d of spreading creepers. Munnrii patilord of Sages. S r y a s y a u t t a m a p a t i m o s t excellent lord of the sun. C a n d r a m a s a h restha p a t i m o s t excellent lord ukrasya patilord of ukra. G r a h n m p a t i l o r d o f t h e planets. R k s a s n m p a t i l o r d the R k s a s a s . K i n n a r n r h p a t i l o r d o f t h e Kinnaras.

49

o f the m o o n .

D v i j n m u t t a m a p a t i m o s t excellent lord of the twice born. S a r i t m p a t i l o r d o f rivers. S a m u d r n m p a t i l o r d o f the o c e a n s S a r a s r h p a t i l o r d o f the l a k e s . B h u t n m p a t i l o r d o f the g o b l i n s . V e t l n m p a t i l o r d of the P a k s i n m p a t i l o r d of birds. P a n m p a t i l o r d of beasts. M a h t m a n - n o b l e soul. M a g a l a t h e auspicious. M e y a t h a t can be measured. Mandarathe mountain Mandara. Mandarevaralord of Mandara. Merumountain Meru. M t r t h e measurer. P r a m n i m e a n s of valid knowledge. Mdhava-lord of Laksm. Manuvarjita Devoid of mantras. Mldharawearing garlands. Mahdevagreat Lord. Mahdevena pjitaadored by iva. M a h n t a v e r y quiet. Mahbhgathe fortunate. heroism. vital
2 1

Vetlas.

K s m n d n m p a t i l o r d o f the p u m p k i n s .

Madhusdanaslayer of Madhu. M a h v r y a o f great M a h p r n a o f great breath

Mrkandeya pravandita saluted by Mrkandcya

1. 2. v.l. v.l. mahvarjila. mrkandyarsivandita.

50 M y t m a n i d e n t i f i e d with illusion. M y a y b a d d h a f e t t e r e d b y illusion. M y a y V i v a r j i t a f r e e from illusion. M u n i s t u t a l a u d e d b y the s a g e s . M u n i i d e n t i f i e d with M a i t r a g r e a t friend. M a h n s a h a v i n g long nose. M a h h a n u h a v i n g large cheeks. M a h b h u h a v i n g long arms. M a h d a n t a 1 h a v i n g big teeth. M a r a n e n a vivarjitadevoid of death. M a h v a k t r a h a v i n g a large mouth. M a h t m h a v i n g a huge body. M a h k r a 2 h a v i n g a b i g size. M a h o d a r a h a v i n g a g r e a t belly. M a h p d a h a v i n g l a r g e feet. M a h g r v a h a v i n g a l o n g neck. Mahmninhighly respected. Mahmanashigh-minded. M a h m a t i 3 o f g r e a t intellect. M a h k r t i o f great fame. M a h r p a o f g r e a t form. M a h s u r a i d e n t i f i e d with g r e a t Asura. M a d h u h o n ey. M d h a v a s p r i n g season. Mahdevagreat Deva. Mahevarathe great Ivara. M a k h e s t a 4 p l e a s e d with sacrifices. M a k h a r p i n o f the form of a sacrifice. Mnanyathe laudable. M a k h e v a r a l o r d o f sacrifices. M a h v t a t h e violent wind. M a h b h g a h a v i n g great share. M a h e a g r e a t lord. Attamnusathe
1. 2. 3. 4. v.l. v.l. v.l. v.l.

Garuda

Purna

sages.

Superman.

mahdanta. mahkya. mah&gati. makhejya.

1.15.3-160 M n a v a t h e mankind. M a n u M a n u (himself). M n a v n m Priyakaradoing good to men Mrgathe deer. M r g a p j y a a d o r e d by the deer. M r g n r h p a t i l o r d of the deer. Budhasya patilord of Mercury. Brhaspateh patilord of Jupiter. anaicarasya patilord of Saturn. Rhoh patilord of Rhu. Ketoh patilord of Ketu. Laksmanahhaving good mark. L a k s a n a g o o d sign. L a m b o s t h a h a v i n g h a n g i n g lips. L a l i t a h a n d s o m e t o look at. Nnlakrasarhyuktabedecked variety. Nncandanacarcitaanointed ous sorts. Nnrasojjvaladvaktrawith kinds of juices. Rma. mouth shining with with sandal with many ornaments

51

of

pastes of varidifferent

N n p u s p o p a o b h i t a a d o r n e d with flowers of various sorts. R m a ( i d e n t i f i e d with prince) R a m p a t i L o r d of Laksm. Sabhrya Paramevaraardhanrvara. of jewels. of jewels. Ratnadagiver

Ratnahartrconfiscator Rpavivarjitadevoid

R p i n p o s s e s s e d of forms. of forms. form. M a h r p a h a v i n g i m m e n s e form. U g r a r p a h a v i n g terrific S a u m y a r p a h a v i n g gentle form. Nlameghanibharesembling blue cloud. u d d h a t h e pure. Klameghanibharesembling dark D h m a v a r n a o f smoke-colour. P t a v a r n a o f yellow Avarnakahaving colour. N n r p a o f various forms. no colour. cloud.

52 V i r p a o f hideous form. Rpadabestower of comely appearance. u k l a v a r n a o f white colour. S a r v a v a r n a o f all colours. Mahyoginthe great Yaja the
1

Garuda

Purna

yogin.

sacrifice. good colour.

Y a j a krtthe sacrificer. Suvarnahaving V a r n a v a t h a v i n g colour. Suvarnkhyanamed gold. S u v a r n v a y a v a h a v i n g golden Suvarnasya pradtrgiver Suvarnasya priyafond Suvarndhyapossessing S u p a r n i n o f beautiful parts. S u v a r n a s v a r n a m e k h a l a h a v i n g a golden girdle of g o o d colour. of gold. Suvarnrha2having parts of gold. of gold. gold. wings.

M a h p a r n a o f huge wings. Suparnasya kranamcause of Suparna. VainateyaVinat's AdityaAditi's son. Adithe beginning. Adikaracreator of beginning. ivaiva. M a h a t a h k r a n a m c a u s e o f the intellectual p r i n c i p l e . Purnasya3 kranamcause of purnas. B u d d h n r h k r a n a m c a u s e o f intellects. M a n a s a h kranamcause of mind. Cetasah k r a n a m c a u s e of thought. A h a k r a s y a k r a n a m c a u s e o f the e g o . Bhtnrii k r a n a m c a u s e o f the elements. Vibhvasoh kranamcause of fire. A k a k r a n a m c a u s e of the ether. Prthivyh pararh k r a n a m t h e great c a u s e of the earth. A n d a s y a k r a n a m c a u s e of the c o s m i c egg. Prakrteh k r a n a m c a u s e of the
1. 2. 3. v.l.yjya. v I. suvarnefa. v.l. pradhSnasya

son.

Prakrti.

koranam.

1.15.3-160 Dehasya k r a n a m c a u s e of body. C a k s u s a h k r a n a m c a u s e o f the e y e . r o t r a s y a k r a n a m - c a u s e of the ear. T v a c a h k r a n a m c a u s e o f the skin. J i h v y h k r a n a m c a u s e o f the t o n g u e . P r n a s y a k r a n a m c a u s e o f the vital b r e a t h . Hastayoh kranamcause of hands. P d a y o h k r a n a m c a u s e o f feet. Vca'h k r a n a m c a u s e of speech. P y o h k r a n a m c a u s e o f the o r g a n o f e v a c u a t i o n . Indrasya kranamcause of Indra. K u b e r a s y a k r a n a m c a u s e o f the K u b e r a , Yamasya kranamcause of Yama. Inasya kranamcause of na. Yaksnm kranamcause of Yaksas. R a k s a s m p a r a m kranamgreat cause of demons. Bhsannrh restham kranam1excellent D h a r m a s y a k r a n a m c a u s e of the virtue. J a n t n m k r a n a m c a u s e o f the c r e a t u r e s . Vasnrh param kranamgreat cause of Vasus. Mannr kranamcause of Manus. Paksinm pararh k r a n a m g r e a t Munnm cause of birds. restham kranamexcellent cause of sages.

53

cause of ornaments.

Y o g i n m p a r a m k r a n a m g r e a t cause of ascetics. Siddhnrh kranamcause of Siddhas. Y a k s n m p a r a m kranamgreat cause of Yaksas. Kinnarnrh kranamcause of Kinnaras. Gandharvnrh kranamcause of Gandharvas. N a d n m k r a n a m c a u s e o f west f l o w i n g rivers. N a d n m p a r a m kranamgreat cause S a m u d r n m k r a n a m c a u s e of seas. Vrksnrii k r a n a m c a u s e of Vrudhrh kranamcause trees. of creepers. of east-flowing rivers.

L o k n r h k r a n a m c a u s e of worlds. Ptla-kranamcause of Ptla. D e v n m kranamcause of Devas. S a r p n m k r a n a m c a u s e o f serpents.

54 reyasrh k r a n a m c a u s e of glory. Panrh k r a n a m c a u s e of animals. Sarvesrh k r a n a m c a u s e of all. D e h t m a n s o u l o f the b o d y . Indriytmansoul of sense-organs. B u d d h e h t m a n 1 s o u l o f intellect. Manasah tmansoul of mind. A h a k r a c e t a s a h t m a n s o u l o f egoistic m i n d . J g r a t a h t m a n s o u l o f the wakeful. S v a p a t a h t m a n s o u l o f the Pradhnasya partmangreat A k t m a n s o u l of ether. A p m t m a n s o u l o f waters. P r i t h i v y h p a r a m t m a n g r e a t soul o f E a r t h . Vayasytman2soul o f friends. G a n d h a s y a p a r a m t m a n g r e a t soul o f smell. R p a s y a P a r a t m a n g r e a t soul o f colour. abdtmansoul of sound. V g t m a n s o u l of speech. S p a r t m a n s o u l of touch. Purusathe Being. r o t r t m a n s o u l of ears. T v a g t m a n s o u l o f skin. J i h v y h p a r a m t m a n g r e a t soul of tongue. G h r n t m a n s o u l o f smell. Hasttmansoul of hands. P a r a m a p d t m a n g r e a t s o u l o f feet. slumbering. s o u l o f Pradhna. P a r a m a h a d t m a n s o u l o f the c o s m i c i n t e l l e c t .

Garuda

Purna

U p a s t h a s y a t m a n s o u l o f the o r g a n o f g e n e r a t i o n . P a r a m a p y v t m a n g r e a t soul of o r g a n of evacuation. Indrtmansoul of Indra. Brahmtmansoul of Brahma. Rudrtmansoul of Rudra. Manoh tmansoul of Manu. D a k s a s y a p r a j p a t e h t m a n s o u l o f D a k s a the patriarch. P a r a m a s a t y t m a n g r e a t soul of truth.

1. 2.

v.l. v.l.

tm

buddhih.

rastman.

1.15.3-160 I t m a n s o u l o f Ia. P a r a m t m a n g r e a t soul. Rudrtmansoul of Rudra. Moksavidknower of salvation. Yatiascetic. Yatnavnstriving. Yatnaefforts. C a r m i n h a v i n g leather. K h a d g i n h a v i n g sword. A s u r n t a k a 1 s l a y e r o f Asuras. Hrpravartanalahabitually practising modesty. Y a t n m hite r a t a e n g a g e d in the welfare of ascetics. Y a t i r p i n h a v i n g the form of an a s c e t i c . Yogin -yogi. Yogidhyeyaworthy itithe dark Sarhvitperfect Medhgenius. Klatime. smheat (summer). Varsrain (rainy season). Matidetermination. Satvatsarayear. Moksakarabringing about salvation. M o h a p r a d h v a r h s a k a r e m o v e r of delusion. D u s t n m m o h a k a r t r s t u p e f y i n g the wicked. Mndavyasage Mndavya. B a d a v m u k h a h a v i n g s u b m a r i n e fire in the m o u t h . knowledge. o f m e d i t a t i o n b y yogtns. H a r i r e m o v e r (of s i n s ) .

55

S a r i i v a r t a k a t h e whirling fire at the time of final dissolution. K l a k a r t r c r e a t o r of time. Gautama-sage Gautama. Bhrgusage Bhrgu. A g i r a s s a g e Agiras. Atrisage Atri. Vasistha. Vasisfbasage

Pulahasage Pulaha.
1. v.l. murintaka.

5fi Pulastyasage Pulastya. Kutsasage Kutsa. Yjavalkyasage Vysasage Vysa. Pararasage Parara. a r m a d a g i v e r of Welfare. G g e y a G a g ' s son (Bhsma). H r s k e a M a s t e r of sense organs. Brhacchiavashaving large ears. K e a v a h a v i n g luxuriant hair. Kleahantrremover of pain. Sukarnahaving good ears. K a r n a v a r j i t a d e v o i d of ears. N r y a n a h a v i n g w a t e r s for Mahbhgaimmensely P r n a s y a p a t i L o r d of vital Vynasya patiLord abode. breath. lucky. Yjavalkya. Devalasage Devala.

Garuda

Purna

Apnasya patiLord of Apna. of Vyna. U d n a s y a restha p a t i L o r d o f U d n a . Samnasya patiLord of samna. S a b d a s y a restha patiexcellent lord of speech. Sparasya p a t i L o r d of touch. R p n m d y a n r p a t i f i r s t lord of colour. K h a d g a p n i h a v i n g sword in hand. Halyudhausing ploughshare as weapon. C a k r a p n i h a v i n g discus in hand. Kundalinhaving Prakrtithe prakrti earrings. chest. neck. (Nature). r v a t s k a h a v i n g r v a t s a m a r k on the

K a u s t u b h a g r v a h a v i n g K a u s t u b h a gem in the P i t m b a r a d h a r a h a v i n g yellow g a r m e n t . S u m u k h a h a v i n g nice face. D u r m u k h a h a v i n g wry face/ Anantaendless. A n a n t a r p a o f endless form. S u n a k h a h a v i n g nice nails. - v ^ \. \ \ M u k h e n a vivarjitawithout face.

.1

I . ,.it^v

1.15.

3-163

S u r a s u n d a r a 1 m o s t b e a u t i f u l o f a l l devas. S u k a l p a 2 h a v i n g good collection. V i b h u p r e s e n t everywhere Jisnuvictorious. Bhrjisnuresplendent. I s u d h i t h e quiver. Hiranyakaipuhantrslayer of Hirayakaipu. Hiranyksavimardakasuppressor of Hiranyksa. Ptannihantrslayer of Ptan. Bhskarntavinanaslayer of demon Bhskarnta. Keidalanasplitter of Kein. Mustikavimardakasuppressor of Mustika. Kamsadnavabhettrslayer of demon K a m s a . Cnrapramardakasuppressor of Cnra. Aristanihantrslayer Akirapriyafond Akrranot cruel. features. K r r a r p a o f cruel of Arista. of Akrra.

A k r r a p r i y a v a n d i t a a d o r e d by A k r r a ' s friends. B h a g a h d e s t r o y e r of glory. B h a g a v n h a v i n g lordly powers. B h n u t h e sun. Bhgavatadevotee of Lord. U d d h a v a U d d h a v a , uncle of K r s n a . U d d h a v a s y a a L o r d o f sacrificial f i r e . U d d h a v e n a vicintitathought of by U d d h a v a . C a k r a d h r k h o l d e r of wheel. Cacalaever moving. Calcalavivarjitadevoid of movable and irmmovable. A h a m k r a t h e ego. Mati3decision. Cittamwavering Prithivthe Jalamwater. mind. G a g a n a m t h e firmament. earth.

1. 2. 3.

v.l. v.l. v.l.

suramandara. sukolapa. upama.

58 Vyuwind. C a k s u s t h e eye. r o t r a m t h e ear. J i h v t h e tongue. G h r n a m t h e nose. V k p n i p d a s p e e c h , h a n d , foot. J a v a n a t h e quickr-^" Pyuthe organ of evacuation. U p a s t h a t h e organ of generation. akaragiver of auspiciousness. K h a r v a 1 t h o u s a n d crores. K s n t i d a g i v e r of forgiveness. Ksntikrtforgiver. Naraman. B h a k t a p r i y a f o n d of devotees. BhartrLord. B h a k t i m n e n d o w e d with devotion. BhaktivardhanaIncreasing devotion. B h a k t a s t u t a l a u d e d by votaries. B h a k t a p a r a a t t a c h e d to votaries. Krtidabestower of fame. Krtivardhanaenhancer Ksamforgiveness. K n t i s p l e n d o u r. Bhaktidevotion. Par Daygreatest compassion. D a n a t h e gift D t r t h e giver. K a r t r t h e agent. Devadevapriyafond of god ucithe pure. u c i m n p o s s e s s i n g the pure. Sukhadagiver of happiness. Moksaemancipation. KamaLove. Arthawealth.
1. v.l. arvJ.

of fame.

Krtidptiresplendence of fame.

of gods.

1.15.

3-160 1 0 0 0 feet.

Sahasrapthaving Vaidyathe

Sahasrarsthousand-headed. physician. M o k s a d v r a e n t r a n c e to salvation. P r a j d v r a m p a s s a g e of subjects. S a h a s r n t a 1 h a v i n g thousand ends. Sahasrakarahaving thousand hands. u k r a t h e essence. Sukirtinhaving good Sugrvahaving good coronets neck.

Kaustubhathe Kaustubha gem. PradyumnaPradyumna. AniruddhaAniruddha. HayagrvaHayagrva. karathe Boar. M a t s y a t h e Fish.ParaurmaParaurma. PrahldaPrahlda. BaliBali. aranyaworthy Buddhathe of being refuge. Nityathe permanent. enlightened. embodied. Muktathe emancipated. arrabhrtthe Kharadsanahantr,slayer of Khara & D s a n a . Rvanasya Pramardanaslayer of Rvana. Stpathusband of St. BharataBharata. Vardhisnuthe flourishing. Kumbhendrajit-nihantrslayer of kumbhendrajit. Kumbhakarnapramardanagrinder of Kumbhakarna. Narntakntakaslayer of Narntaka. Devntakavinanaslayer of Devntaka. Dusjsuranihantrslayer of wicked demons. ambarrienemy of ambara, Narakasya nihantrslayer of Naraka. Trirsasya vinanaslayer
1. v.l. sahasrksa,

of Triirsa.

60

Garuda

Purna

Y a m a l i j u n a b h e t t r s p l i t t e r o f twin A r j u n a s . Tapohitakaraencourager of penance. V d i t r a t h e player on instruments. V d y a m t h e musical instrument. B u d d h a t h e enlightened. V a r a p r a d a t h e giver of b o o n s . S a r a t h e essence. S r a p r i y a f o n d of essence. S a u r a b e l o n g i n g to the S u n . Klahantrslayer of Kla. N i k r n t a n a t h e splitter. Agastyasage Agastya. Devalasage Devala. Nradasage Nrada. Nradapriyafond of Nrada. P r n a v i t a l air P r n a . A p n a v i t a l air A p n a . Vynavital airVyna. R a j a s t h e quality of baseness. Sattvathe quality of goodness. T a m a s t h e quality of ignorance. aratthe Autumn. U d n a t h e vital air U d n a . S a m n a t h e vital air S a m n a Bhesajathe medicine. Bhisakthe physician. Ktasthathe unchanging. S v a c c h a r p a h a v i n g clean form. S a r v a d e h a v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of all kinds of bodies. C a k s u r i n d r i y a h n a d e v o i d of sense of vision. V g i n d r i y a v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of sense of speech. Hastendriyavihnadevoid of hands. P d b h y m v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d o f feet. Pypasthavihnadevoid of organs of generation and tion. M a h t a p a v i s a r j i t a 1 d i s c a r d e d from g r e a t p e n a n c e . Prabodhena vihnadevoid of good
1. v.l marutpavivarjita.

evacua-

perception.

1.15. 3 - 1 6 0 B u d d h y vivarjitadevoid of intellect. C e t a s v i g a t a d e v o i d of consciousness. Prnena vivarjitadevoid of Prna. Apnena vihnadevoid of Apna. Vynena vivarjitadevoid of Vyna. U d n e n a vihnadevoid of Udna. S a m n e n a vivarjitadevoid of Samna. A k e n a v i h n a d e v o i d o f ether. V y u n p a r i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of wind. Agnin vihnadevoid of fire. U d a k e n a vivarjitadevoid of water. Prithivyvihnadevoid of earth. abdena vivarjitadevoid of sound. S p a r e n a vihnadevoid of touch. S a r v a r p a v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of all forms. R g e n a vigatadevoid of passion. A g h e n a p a r i v a r j i t a d e v o i d o f sins. o k e n a r a h i t a d e v o i d o f grief. Vacas parivarjitadevoid of speech. Rajovivarjitadevoid of quality of rajas. S a d v i k r a v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of six deviations. K m a v a r j i t a d e v o i d o f lust. K r o d h e n a parivarjitadevoid of anger. L o b h e n a v i g a t a d e v o i d of covetousness. D a m b h e n a vivarjitadevoid of pride. S k s m a t h e subtle. S s k s m a t h e very subtle. S t h l t s t h l a t a r a g r o s s e t o f the V i r a d a t h e clever. Baldhyaksaleader of armies. S a r v a s y a k s o b h a k a a g i t a t o r of all. Prakrteh k s o b h a k a a g i t a t o r of Prakrti. M a h a t a h k s o b h a k a a g i t a t o r of intellectual principle. Bhtnrh ksobhakaagitator of elements. B u d d h e h k s o b h a k a a g i t a t o r of the intellect. I n d r i y n m k s o b h a k a a g i t a t o r o f the senses. Visayaksobhakaagitator of objects. Brahmanahksobhakaagitator of Brhm. Rudrasya ksobhakaagitator of Rudra. gross.

61

62 C a k s u r d e h a g a m y a b e y o n d the r a n g e o f eyes. r o t r g a m y a b e y o n d the r a n g e o f ears. T v a c na gamyaunknown by K r m a t h e tortoise. J i h v g r h y a b e y o n d the p e r c e p t i o n o f t o n g u e . the skin.

Garuda

Purna

G h r n e n d r i y g a m y a b e y o n d the perception of smell, Vcgrhyaunknown by speech. Pnibhym agamyaIncomprehensible by hands. P d g a m y a b e y o n d t h e r e a c h o f feet. M a n a s a h a g r h y a b e y o n d the r e a c h o f m i n d . B u d d h y a g r h y a b e y o n d the r e a c h o f intellects. H a r i r e m o v e r o f evil. A h a m b u d b h y g r h y a r e a l i z a b l e b y t h e p e r c e p t i o n o f aham. C e t a s G r h y a r e a l i z a b l e b y the m i n d . a k h a p n i h a v i n g c o n c h i n the h a n d . Avyayaundecaying. G a d p n i h a v i n g the club in the hand. r g a p n i h a v i n g t h e b o w r g a i n the h a n d . K r s n a ( d a r k in colour). J n a m r t i o f the form o f k n o w l e d g e . P a r a n t a p a s l a y e r of enemies. Tapasvinascetic. J n a g a m y a r e a l i s a b l e by knowledge. Jninendowed Jnavidknower with knowledge. of knowledge. of knowledge.

Jeyathe object of knowledge. J e y a h l n a d e v o i d of objects Japtiknowledge. C a i t a n y a r p a k a h a v i n g the form of consciousness. Bhvathe purport. Bhvyato be conceived. B h a v a k r a c a u s e of origin. B h v a n a t h e conceiver. B h a v a n a n a t h e destroyer of birth. G o v i n d a l o r d of cows. G o p a t i m a s t e r of kine. Gopacowherd. S a r v a g o p s u k h a p r a d a g i v e r of h a p p i n e s s to all cowherdesses. G o p l a p r o t e c t o r of cows.

1.15. 3-160 G o p a t i l o r d of speech. G o m a t i w i t h the m i n d directed to cows. Godharalifter of kine. U p e n d r a I n d r a ' s younger brother. Nrsimhathe Man-lion. auri Krsnagrandson of ra. J a n r d a n a t o r m e n t o r of the wicked. raneyaproduced f r o m Arani. shining. B r h a d b h n u o f long rays. BrhaddptaImmensely Triklathreefold time. D m o d a r a t i e d with a rope. Klajaracognizer of time K l a v a r j i t a d e v o i d of time. T r i s a n d h y a o f threefold j u n c t i o n s . D v p a r a m t h e D v p a r a Age. Tretthe Tret Age. P r a j d v r a t h e gateway of subjects. Trivikramahaving three steps. V i k r a m a t h e valorous. D a n d a h a s t a h a v i n g t h e staff i n the h a n d . E k a d a n d i n h a v i n g a s i n g l e staff. Tridandadhrkholding t h r e e staffs. Smabhedavariety of Sma. S m o p y a h a v i n g s m o p y a (peaceful m e a n s ) . S m a r p i n h a v i n g S m a a s form. Smaga1reached by Smans. Smavedathe S m a Veda. Atharva-the Atharva Sukrtawell-framed. Sukharpaka2-happily Atharvavedavidknower Atharvcryapreceptor Rgvedathe Rgveda. Rgvedesu p r a t i s f h i t a w e l l - s t a t i o n e d i n the R g v e d a . formed. of Atharva veda. of Atharva veda. Veda.

63

R g r p i n h a v i n g the form o f R k s .

1. 2.

v.l. v.l.

talhyopya. sutarpanah.

64 Yajurvettrknower of Yajur mantras.

Garuda

Purna

Yajurvedathe Yajur Veda. Yajurvedavidknower of Yajur V e d a . Ekaptsingle-footed. Bahuptmany-footed. Suptnice-footed. S a h a s r a p t t h o u s a n d footed. Catusptfour-footed. Dvipttwo-footed. S m r t i t h e S m r i t text. Nyyopama1comparable to Nyya. Balinthe powerful. S a n n y s i n t h e renouncer of the world. Sannysarenunciation. C a t u r r a m a h a v i n g t h e four s t a g e s o f life. B r a h m a c r i n t h e student. G r h a s t h a t h e householder. Vnaprasthathe retired. Bhiksukathe mendicant. Brhmanathe Brahmin. Ksatriyathe Ksatriya. Vaiyathe Vaiya. drathe dra. V a r n a t h e class of society. i l a d a p r o v i d e r of good character. l a s a m p a n n a e n d o w e d with good character. Duhlaparivarjitadevoid of b a d character. G o k s a 2 h a v i n g eyes fixed on the world. A d h y t m a s a m v i s t a e n g a g e d in Spiritual acts. S t u t i t h e praising verse. Stotrthe praiser. Pjakaworshipper. Pjyaworthy of worship. V k k a r a n a m t h e organ of Speech. V c y a o b j e c t of statement. Vcakathe
1. 2. v.l. vj.

reciter.
nyyoyamo.

moksa.

1.15.3-160 V e t t r t h e knower. Vykaranamgrammar. V k y a m t h e sentence. V k y a v i t c o n v e r s a n t with V k y a g a m y a w i t h i n the T r t h a t h e sacred shrine. T r t h i n o f the shrines. T r t h a v i d k n o w e r of holy places. T i r t h d i b h t a a b i d i n g in all Srhkhyathe Srhkhya trthas. system. sentences. reach of words.

Trthavsinliving in sacred places.

N i r u k t a m t h e science of etymology. A b h i d a i v a t a f a c e to face with the deity. P r a n a v a t h e s a c r e d s y l l a b l e om. Pranavealord of Pranava. P r a n a v e n a p r a v a n d i t a - a d o r e d b y Pranava. Pranavena laksyaindicated by Pranava. G y a t r t h e mystic verse G y a t r . G a d d h a r a h o l d e r of the club. lagrmanivsinliving in l a g r m a . l a g r m a t h e l a g r m a itself. J a l a y i n l y i n g in waters. Yogayinlying in Yoga. e s a a y i n l y i n g on serpent Sesa. K u l e a y a t h e mystic lotus. M a h b h a r t r t h e great lord. K r y a m t h e result. K r a n a m t h e reason. Prthivdharathe holder of earth. Prajpatithe patriarch. v a t a t h e eternal. K m y a w o r t h y of being desired. K m a y i t r t h e creator of desire. V i r t t h e lord P a r a m o u n t . S a m r t t h e emperor. Psanthe sun. S v a r g a t h e heaven. R a t h a s t h a s t a t i o n e d in a c a r . Srathithe charioteer.

66 B a l a m t h e strength. D h a n i n t h e rich. D h a n a p r a d a t h e giver of riches. D h a n y a t h e blessed.

Garuda

Purna

Y d a v n m hite r a t a e n g a g e d i n the wellbeing o f Y d a v a s . Arjunasya priyafond of Arjuna. ArjunaArjuna himself. B h m a B h i m a himself. P a r k r a m a v a l o u r (personified). Durvisahathe unbearable. Sarvastraviradaefficient in all stras. Srasvatadevotee of Sarasvati. M a h b h s m a t h e g r e a t terrifier. Prijtahararemover of prijta. Amrtasya pradtrgiver of nectar. K s r o d a t h e o c e a n of milk. K s r a t h e m i l k itself. Indrtmaja,son of Indra (Jayanta). Indragoptrprotector of Indra. Govardhanadharaupholder of Govardhana mountain. Kamsasya nanaslayer of K a m s a . H a s t i p a k e e p e r of elephant. H a s t i n a n a s l a y e r of elephant. i p i v i s j a p e r v a d e d by rays. P r a s a n n a t h e cheerful. S a r v a l o k r t i n a n a r e m o v e r of vexations of the whole world. M u d r a t h e mysterious. M u d r k a r a s h o w i n g the mystic sign with the h a n d . Sarvamudrvivarjitadevoid Dehinthe embodied. D e h a s t h i t a I m m a n e n t in the b o d y . D e h a s y a n i y m a k a O r g a n i z e r o f the b o d y . rotrthe hearer. r o t r a n i y a n t r t h e controller of the rotavyaworthy of being ravanapower of hearing. T v a k s t h i t a p r e s e n t in the skin. S p a r a y i t r t h e toucher. Sparyaobject of touching. heard. ears. of a l l Mudras.

1.15.3-160 S p a r a n a m p o w e r of touching. C a k s u s t h a p r e s e n t in the eye. R p a d r a s t r s e e r of forms. C a k s u s a h niyantrthe controller of eyes. D r y a m t h e object of vision. J i h v s t h a p r e s e n t in the t o n g u e . R a s a j a k n o w e r o f the t a s t e . J i h v n i y m a k a c o n t r o l l e r of the tongue. G h r n a s t h a s e a t e d in the nose. G h r n a k r t c r e a t o r df smell. G h r t r t h e smeller.

67

G h r n e n d r i y a n i y m a k a t h e controller of the o r g a n of smell. Vksthaseated in speech. Vaktrthe speaker". V a k t a v y a t h e object of speech. V a c a n a t h e action of speech. Vniymakacontroller of speech. Prnisthaseated in living beings. ilpakrtcreator of fine arts. i l p a t h e fine arts. Hastayoh niymakacontroller Padavyahthe roads. G a n t r t h e goer. G a n t a v y a t h e p l a c e g o i n g to. G a m a n a t h e act of going. Pdayoh niyantrthe Pdyabhkreceiver Visargakrtthe c o n t r o l l e r o f feet. of pdya. of hands.

excretor.

Visargasya niyantrcontroller of excretion. U p a s t h a s t h a s e a t e d in the organ of generation. Sukhapleasure. U p a s t h a s y a niyantrcontroller o f the o r g a n o f g e n e r a t i o n . Upasthnandakaracreator of pleasure generation. a t r u g h n a s l a y e r of enemies. K r t a v r y a , t h e king K r t a v r y a . Datttreyathe sage Datttreya. A l a r k a s y a hite r a t a h e n g a g e d in the welfare Krtavryanikrntanaslayer of Krttavrya. of Alarka. through the o r g a n of

68 K l a n e m i r i m r o u n d the wheel o f M a h n e m i t h e great rim. M e g h a t h e cloud. M e g h a p a t i L o r d of clouds. A n n a p r a d a p u r v e y o r ' s ! food. A n n a r p i n o f the form o f A n n d a t h e eater of food. Annapravartakaproducer of food. Dhmakrtproducer of smoke. D h m a r p a o f the form of s m o k e . Devakputrason of Devak. U t t a m a t h e most excellent. Devakynandanadelighter of Devak. Nandafoster father. of Vasudeva. Rohinyh priyabeloved ofRohin. Vasudeva priyabeloved Vasudevasutason of Vasudeva. food. ^ time.

Garuda

Purna

Dundubhithe trumpet Dundubhi. H s a r p a o f the form of laughter. P u s p a h s a s m i l i n g like f l o w e r s . Attahsapriyaloving K s a r a t h e decaying. Aksarathe Acyutathe undecaying. undefaulting. of Saty. boisterous laugh. S a r v d h y a k s a p r e s i d i n g deity over all.

S a t y e a l o r d of truth. Satyyh priyalover Varathe excellent.

Rukminyh patilord of Rukmin. Rukminyh vallabhalover of Rukmin. Gopnrh vallabhalover Virutafamous. VrskapiVrskapi. Y a m a t h e god of death. G u h y a s e a t e d in caves. M a g a l a 1 t h e auspicious.
1. v.l.mukula.

of cowherdesses.

Punyalokaof meritorious fame.

1.15. 3-160
B u d h a t h e planet Mercury. R h u t h e planet R h u . K e t u g r a h a t h e planet G r h a t h e crocodile. G a j e n d r a m u k h a m e l a k a a s s o c i a t e of the G r h a s y a vinihantrslayer of crocodile. G r m a n i t h e leader of the Raksakathe protector. village. lord of elephants. Ketu.

K i n n a r a t h e semidivine K i n n a r a . S i d d h a t h e semidivine S i d d h a . Chandasthe prosody. form. S v a c h a n d a s t h e free. V i v a r p a h a v i n g the C o s m i c Vilksahaving wide Anantarpahaving Bhtasthaseated in eyes.

Daityasdanaslayer of demons. endless forms. elements. devas a n d dnavas.

Devadnavasariisthitastanding between S u s u p t i s t h a s t a t i o n e d in sleep. Susuptideep slumber. abode. Sthnamthe permanent Sthnntaend of abode. J a g a t s t h a s t a n d i n g in Jgartrthe wakeful. the U n i v e r s e .

J g a r i t a r h s t h n a m t h e s e a t o f the w a k e f u l . Svapnasthastanding in dream. Svapnavid1knower of dream. Svapnathe dream. S t h n a s t h a r e m a i n i n g i n his o w n p l a c e . Susthawell stationed. wakefulness. of dream. of slumber. knowledge. the m o n t h C a i t r a .
adds svapnasthnam a f t e r t h i s .

Jgradvihnadevoid of Svapnavihnadevoid Susuptivihnadevoid Caturthakathe V i j n a m t h e precise

fourth.

C a i t r a r p a 2 o f the form of
1. 2. v.l. P.l,

V e k a t e v a r a edition vedyarpam.

70

Garuda

Purna

J v a t h e life. J v a y i t r t h e life g i v e r . B h u v a n d h i p a t i l o r d of the universe. Bhuvannrh niymakacontroller of worlds. Ptlavsinresiding in P t l a t h e nether Ptla. o f a l l fevers. o f dharmas. world.

Sarvajvaravinanadestroyer Dharmnr

P a r a m n a n d a r p i n o f the form of g r e a t bliss. pravartakaorganizer access. Sulabhaeasily acessible. Durlabhadifficult of Pratyhrathe P r n y m a p a r a e n g a g e d in holding breath. redeemer. . D h r a k a t h e supporter. P r a t y h r a k a r a o r g a n i z e r of r e d e m p t i o n . Prabhspl endour. Kntibrilliance. Arcislustre. u d d h a t h e pure. S p h a t i k a s a n n i b h a l i k e glass. Agrhyaincomprehensible. G a u r a t h e white-coloured. S a r v a t h e all. S u c i t h e clean. Abhistutathe VasatVasat. Vausatthe mantra Vausat. S v a d h t h e offering S v a d h . S v h t h e offering S v h . R a t i t h e pleasurable love. Paktrthe cook. N a n d a y i t r t h e delighter. Bhoktrthe Boddhrthe enjoyer. knower. conceiver. adored. Vasatkrathe mantra Vasat.

Bhvayitrthe

J n t m a n t h e soul o f k n o w l e d g e . h t m a n 1 t h e soul of inference,

i. v.l. dehlman.

1.15.3-160 B h m t h e prolific. S a r v e v a r e v a r a s u p r e m e L o r d of all. N a d I t h e river. N a n d i n t h e delighted; Nandialord of Nandin. B h a r a t a e n g a g e d in lustre T a r u n a n a d e s t r o y e r o f trees. C a k r a p a p r o t e c t o r of the wheel. rpatiLord of Laksm N r p a t h e king. Cakravartinma1lord of emperors. S a r v a d e v n m a l o r d o f a l l devas. S v v a k a s t h i t 2 a b i d i n g b y his s p a c e . P u s k a r a t h e lotus. P u s k a r d h y a k s a p r e s i d i n g over lotus. Puskaradvpathe continent Puskara. B h a r a t a t h e nourisher. J a n a k a t h e king J a n a k a . J a n y a t h e resultant. S a r v k r a v i v a r j i t a d e v o i d of all Nirkrahaving no form. Nirnimittahaving no cause. Nirtakahaving no calamity. Nirrayahaving no support. D e v a 3 t h e lord. Visnu4the omnipresent. Ia5the master. O Vrsabhadhvaja (akara) thus I have mentioned wipe wealth off all forms.

71

to

you the thousand names of L o r d Visnu that becomes victorious, the Vaiya realises

sins.

T h e B r a h m i n w h o r e c i t e s this a t t a i n s V i s n u h o o d , a t t a i n s h a p p i n e s s full o f V i s n u ' s d e v o t i o n .

the K s a t r i y a and dra

1. 2. o. 4. 5.

v.l. v.l.

nrpnm

cakravartinm

Dvrak-samsthita.

N o t found in V e k a t e v a r a edition. do do

70 J v a t h e life. J v a y i t r t h e life g i v e r . B h u v a n d h i p a t i l o r d of the Bhuvannrh niymakacor Ptlavsinresiding in P t l a t h e nether Pt world.

Sarvajvaravinanadestroy P a r a m n a n d a r p i n o f the Dharmnrh pravartakao Sulabhaeasily acessible. Durlabhadifficult of acce; Prnymaparaengaged i Pratyhrathe redeemer D h r a k a t h e supporter. Pratyhrakaraorganizei Prabhsplendour. Kntibrilliance. Arcislustre. u d d h a t h e pure. S p h a t i k a s a n n i b h a l i k e gl Agrhyaincomprehensit G a u r a t h e white-coloure S a r v a t h e all. u c i t h e clean. Abhistutathe VasatVasat. Vausatthe mantra Vai S v a d h t h e offering Sv; S v h t h e offering S v l R a t i t h e p l e a s u r a b l e 1< Paktrthe cook. N a n d a y i t r t h e delighte Bhoktrthe Boddhrthe enjoyer. knower. conceh adored. Vasatkrathe mantra A

Bhvayitrthe

J n t m a n t h e soul o U h t m a n 1 t h e soul of I. v.l. dehtman.

72

Gari

CHAPTER SIXTEEN
Contemplation Rudra said 1. : O L o r d , the h o l d e r of conch, discus a n d cl me further of Hari ami Sun-worship :

Om khakholkyanamah planet stic of the that verse) (Mukti).

(Om s a l u t a t i o n is the

sky). This

gives worldly

enj

[Special Srya m a n t r a ] Om o t h e p r o c e s s o f c o n t e m p l a t i o <a*. Om in t h e r a y s t h a t s p r e a d (vic V i s n u , the p u r e a n d t h e S u p r e m e s o u l . Jhe h e a d . narrate to Hari said 2-3. : tha tha u n t o t h e

knowledge. Obeisa

(ha tha t o t h e t h o u s a n d - r a y e d , o b e i s a

O R u d r a , listen to the p r o c e d u r e in the co a n d m y s t i c s y l l a b l e ) . worldly Om tha tha to t h e l o r d of a l l b r i l l i a T h e r e i s t h e g r e a t B r a h m a n w h o s e f o r m i s i n v i s i b l e , ' J o n . Ottl b u r n , b u r n , b l a z e , b l a z e tha c a n n o t be seen, who is omnipresent, unborn, i m m u t a b l . T h i s i s t h e S u n ' s mantra o f fiery s p e t i o n o f L o r d H a r i w h i c h destroys the tree o f shable, all-pervasive, eternal the root-cause of t u n i v e r s e a n d the s u p r e m e lord o f all. 4. H e i s s e a t e d i n the h e a r t o f all the l i v i n g b e i n g ya support of With this Gyatr (a particular should perform Vidmahe the g r e a t lord of all creatures. He is 5-6. He is stainless, [ Sakalikarana Vivabhvya mantra] dhimahi

i s n o t s u p p o r t e d b y a n y t h i n g e l s e . H e i s t h e c a u s e o f cii a by sages who are e m a n c i p a t e d . He has no gross

l e c t . He is free f r o m Prna and Apno?; air called P r n a 3 and be contemplated). Hari said : again the

the Sakali-ka bov |e s a l u t a t i o n (special g e s t u r e with d e v o i d of eyes, vital airs a n d sense-organs, all qualiti in the east, to Y a m a in the s o u t h . ing beings, organs of excretion a n d generation a n d all To D a n d a n y a k a a n d then t o 7. H e i s w i t h o u t m i n d a s w e l l a s a l l its q u a l i T h e dark-tawny (form) in the n is d e v o i d of intellect a n d thought yet (functions a Jin the s o u t h - e a s t t o b e w o r s h i p p e d , all gods. i. To I n d r a , the holder of thunderbolt 8-9. He is d e v o i d of e g o a n d functions of th [shipped in the South-west a n d th
1

free f r o m b o n d a g e , c o n t .^hipper

he is w i t h o u t tJ jah svah in t h e n o r t h - w e s t . a l l its q u a l i t i e s . ( S u c h a B r a h m |o Bull-bannered a k a r a , the follow orth-east. process of worship sisance ce ce to to to the Om o b e i s a n c e to the m o o (Mars) the son th so

. in the eight directions b e g i n n i n g wi Agraka lord

I shall expound

S u n that h a d a l r e a d y been explained to B h r g u before.

s a n c e to B u d h a ( M e r c u r y ) the of speech to g. Om obeisance anaicara

(Brhasp

sage ukra ( S a t u r n ) the

1. 2.

T h e f i r s t o f t h e f i v e v i t a l a i r s e n u m e r a t e d a s prna, O n e of the five vital v.l. vyna.

apna

vyna a n d udna. Prna h a s i t s s e a t i n

the beings, hence it m e a n s th

airs which comes out of the arms

I c e to R h u .
Vekatevara

Om obeisance to K e t u
edition a d d s tridaya.

72

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER SIXTEEN
Contemplation Rudra said 1. narrate : O L o r d , the holder of conch, discus and club, please to me further the process of c o n t e m p l a t i o n on L o r d of Hari and Sun-worship

V i s n u , the p u r e a n d t h e S u p r e m e s o u l . Hari said 2 -3. : O R u d r a , listen to the p r o c e d u r e in the c o n t e m p l a worldly existence. invisible, whose end o f the w h o l e He is He

tion of L o r d H a r i which destroys the tree of T h e r e is the great B r a h m a n whose form is shable, 4. all-pervasive, eternal the

c a n n o t be seen, who is omnipresent, unborn, i m m u t a b l e , imperiroot-cause universe a n d the s u p r e m e lord of all. H e i s s e a t e d i n the h e a r t o f all the living beings. support the great lord of all creatures. He is 5-6. He is stainless, of all.

is n o t s u p p o r t e d by a n y thing else. He is the c a u s e of all c a u s e s . free f r o m b o n d a g e , c o n t e m p l a t e d has no gross all body, he is q u a l i t i e s o f livHe by sages who are e m a n c i p a t e d . He

d e v o i d of eyes, vital airs a n d sense-organs, 7. is devoid 8-9. all gods. He is devoid of ego and He is without m i n d of intellect and as well as all yet

ing b e i n g s , o r g a n s o f excretion a n d g e n e r a t i o n a n d all senses. its q u a l i t i e s . thought (functions as l o r d of of the the intelvital

functions

l e c t . He is free f r o m Prna1 and Apna2; air called P r n a 3 a n d be contemplated). Hari said : again the

he is w i t h o u t

a l l its q u a l i t i e s . ( S u c h a B r a h m a n m u s t

I shall e x p o u n d

process

of

worship

of

the

S u n that h a d already been explained to B h r g u before.

1. 2.

T h e f i r s t o f t h e f i v e v i t a l a i r s e n u m e r a t e d a s prna, O n e of the five vital v.l. vyna.

apna,

samna,

vyna a n d udna. Prna h a s i t s s e a t i n

the beings, h e n c e it m e a n s the b r e a t h .

airs which comes out of the a r m s .

1.16.16 10. meteoric basic beatitude 11. Om khakholkya namah (Om s a l u t a t i o n planet of the that Srya sky) . T h i s is the verse) gives worldly mantra]

73 to t h e S u n , t h e Mlamantra (the and final to lord

mystic

enjoyment

(Mukti). [Special Om obeisance rays that s p r e a d (vici) t h a tha obeis-

K h a k h o l k a 1 . Om in the a n c e to the head.

Om tha tha u n t o t h e

knowledge.

O b e i s a n c e to t h e tuft of

h a i r . Om tha tha to t h e t h o u s a n d - r a y e d , o b e i s a n c e to t h e a r m o u r (amulet and mystic syllable). 12. 13. all sins. [Sakalikarana Om dityya codayt. 14. the T h e n the 15. north. With this Gyatr (special (a particular metre) the gesture and of the sun up). to the the worshipper should perform Sakall-karana(summing Vidmahe ViJvabhvya mantra] dhimahi Tannah Sryah praOm tha }ha to t h e l o r d of a l l b r i l l i a n c e , Om b u r n , b u r n , b l a z e , b l a z e tha o b e i s a n c e to the w e a p o n . tha o b e i s a n c e .

T h i s i s t h e S u n ' s mantra o f fiery s p e c i e s t h a t d e s t r o y s

salutation To The

with j o i n e d palms) to Vaivarna north-east in and

D h a r m a in the east,

to Y a m a in the south. then the (form) in

Dandanyaka dark-tawny

D k s i t a in the south-east to be w o r s h i p p e d . 16. T o I n d r a , t h e h o l d e r o f t h u n d e r b o l t i n t h e h a n d , i s t o be worshipped in the South-west and the mystic syllables worBhrbhuvah svah in t h e n o r t h - w e s t . a k a r a , the following should b e

To Bull-bannered with Om north-east. obeisance to to to the Om

s h i p p e d i n the e i g h t d i r e c t i o n s b e g i n n i n g w i t h e a s t a n d e n d i n g o b e i s a n c e to the m o o n , the l o r d of stars. (Mars) the son the son son of the Earth. Om Om Om of the moon. Agraka lord

Om o b e s a n c e to B u d h a ( M e r c u r y ) the obeisance obeisance of speech to sage l e a r n i n g . Om obeisance anaicara

( B r h a s p a t i ) , the lord of all ukra son of B h r g u . of the Sun.

( S a t u r n ) the

obeisance to R h u .
I.

Om obeisance to K e t u .

V e k a t e v a r a e d i t i o n a d d s tridaSya.

74

Garuda 17. Om obeisance to Anruka1. Om

Purna

o b e i s a n c e to t h e obeisance

L o r d of Pramatha ( g o b l i n s a t t e n d i n g o n to the enlightened. 18. the to

i v a ) . Om

O L o r d ! h a v i n g r a y s m e a s u r e d all r o u n d , O L o r d o f universe, having seven horses for v e h i c l e s , the due tawny in colour

entire

f o u r - a r m e d o n e , g i v e r o f the g r e a t siddhis" the f l a m e s , the gentle one!

C o m e on, C o m e on. This is

w a t e r - o f f e r i n g . S a l u t a t i o n u n t o t h e h e a d . T a k e b a c k t h e terrific f o r m . O t h e u n - n a k e d , b u r n , b u r n tha tha o b e i s a n c e . 19. should With this him mantra he should invoke the sun. He salutation to the you please, to

discharge (sun)

with the m a n t r a . Om rays, go as

lord Aditya come again.

of thousand

CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
Worship Hari Said : 1. the sun Next which I shall had expound the process of worship of been explained to D h a n a d a (the lord of

wealthKubera). In a clean place the figure of a lotus with eight p e t a l s

should be d r a w n with the p e r i c a r p . 2. with Sun-god water.

1. 2. when names vaitva he v.l. anru. which of p. laghim, 2114; is achieved The by a sdhaka the the eight highest (P stage sdhan. following are

S h o w i n g the

mystical

sign placed

vhini in the

(the

invoking) The the holy

the fingers, the

worshipper

should invoke H a r i . middle in with sprinkled

K h a k h o l k a should be

f o r m o f a Tantra ( m e c h a n i c a l d e v i c e ) a n d

S u p e r h u m a n faculty or power reaches of the siddhisanim, (AITM)

mahim,prpti, prkmya, iitva, CSL p. 4 5 8 ) .

and,

karmvasyit.

1.18.2 3. eastern 4. to the

75 O i v a , let h i m p l a c e t h e h e a r t o f t h e g o d i n t h e s o u t h direction. The head should be p l a c e d in the northt h e tuft i n t h e S o u t h - w e s t . and t h e Astra (missile)

eastern direction. L e t him place

W i t h t h e m i n d solely c o n c e n t r a t e d let h i m f i x D h a r m a west.

t o t h e e a s t , t h e e y e t o the n o r t h - w e s t 5. Let him place soma

( M o o n ) in the north-east a n d Brhaspati ( J u p i t e r ) in is to the be

L o h i t a ( M a r s ) in the east. M o o n ' s sun ( B u d h a M e r c u r y ) is to be p l a c e d in the south-east a n d south. 6. The preceptor of demons and (ukra-Venus) p l a c e d in the south-west 7-8. shipped. Varuna, 9. a n a i c a r a (saturn) in the west. should be wor-

L e t h i m p l a c e K e t u i n the north-west a n d R h u i n the north. In a second s q u a r e the twelve suns Savitr, Indra Dhtr, T h e twelve s u n s a r c B h a g a , S r y a , A r y a m a n , M i t r a , vivasvat the powerful, T v a s t r , Psan, deities should be worshipped with of the be goddess should worshipped.

I n d r a a n d t h e twelfth i s V i s n u . and other reverence by the worshipper. Durg, J a y , Jayant and ( T h e four f o r m s Aparjit

S o also e s a , Vsuki a n d other serpents.

CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
Worship Sta said 1. : I shall (the now expound the process of worship covers all of the conqueror of death) narrated to K a y a p a by of Amrtea Mrtyujaya

Mrtyujaya deities. 2.

G a r u d a . It is holy, has r e d e e m i n g features a n d Okra (the (sah). (The mystic

s y l l a b l e Om) s h o u l d third (Om jurh

be p l a c e d one is sa

first. Jukra1 w i t h a visarga

syllable J a w ) next. T h e This mantra

sah) s u p p r e s s e s

death and poverty.

1. v.l. hukra.

76 3. equally 4. places. during 5. boons) T h i s mahmantra i s t h e l o r d o f N e c t a r . recital and

Garuda

Purna of are

It consists mantra

three syllables. T h e

worship of this

e f f i c a c i o u s . B y its r e c i t a l p e o p l e c a n b e c o m e free f r o m B y its r e c i t a l a By the He as reciting it hundred times a man attains to the holy

d e a t h a n d all kinds ofsins. fruits o f t h e r e c i t a l of V e d i c passages or pilgrimage he can

a h u n d r e d a n d eight times, three times and dusk) conquer

day (dawn, midday should

death a n d enemies. c o n t e m p l a t e o n the g o d V a r a d a (giver o f a white lotus indicating hands. of nectar, true of right h a n d fearlessness of as thought seated on

through gestures. T h e lord of N e c t a r should be h o l d i n g the j a r o f n e c t a r with b o t h the 6. He should think of the goddess

s p e e c h , a s s e a t e d o n h i s l i m b h o l d i n g the j a r i n t h e a n d t h e l o t u s i n t h e left. 7. a day,

R e c i t i n g this mantra e i g h t t h o u s a n d t i m e s , t h r e e t i m e s for a m o n t h h e c o n q u e r s o l d a g e , d e a t h , p e s t i l e n c e a n d A r e a l w o r s h i p p e r m u s t k n o w all site these things in

enemies and accords p e a c e a n d benevolence to all living beings. 8-11. detailthe of a p l a c e of worship, the consecration ( o f an the water for ritualistic the cloth, drink orna-

i d o l ) , the c h e c k i n g ( o f b r e a t h ) , the p r o x i m i t y , the p l a c i n g , the w a t e r (for w a s h i n g the f e e t ) , w i t h t h e p a l m , t h e w a t e r for b a t h i n g , t h e m a t e r i a l s o f w o r s h i p , the a p p l i c a t i o n of u n g u e n t s , the holy m e n t , food deity), the mtrs lamp, o f f e r i n g a n d t h e w a t e r for d r i n k i n g ( o f f e r e d t o t h e or quantities, mystical signs a n d gesticulafire, the musical instruments, vocal music, dancing

t i o n s , t h e gift for t h e p r i e s t s , the g h e e ' o f f e r i n g s i n t h e prayer, playing on going round in

in a t t e n d a n c e , a s s i g n m e n t of fingers etc, the p r o p e r a s s e m b l a g e , reverence, kneeling down, chanting of mystic syllables, sacrifices, offering o b e i s a n c e , a n d V i s a r j a n a ( t h e f i n a l s u m m i n g up and conclusion)this process of worship involving t h e u s e o f six l i m b s (sadagas, v i z . , t w o t h i g h s , t w o a r m s , and heart 12.
1.

head

(or First
v.l.

navel)

as mentioned

in order and

emanated

from the m o u t h o f the g r e a t L o r d . o f a l l , arghya s h o u l d b e o f f e r e d a n d prcana1

tutdanam.

arghyaptrrcanam dadydastrenaiva

1.18.20 p e r f o r m e d , then fanning is d o n e with then purified with Amrtlkarana. 13-14. presiding Then follows of the the worship of dhraaktis a piece

77 of cloth. It is t h e r i t e of

t h e kavaca mantras f o l l o w e d by

(the

goddesses

m a t e r i a l s o f w o r s h i p ) , Prnyma1 o f t h e Pinda2 remember with it up. Then

( h o l d i n g the b r e a t h ) , yogic postures, purification ( b a l l o f f o o d ) for t h e m a n e s b y d r y i n g t h e s o u l a s i n t h e f o r m o f g o d , a s s i g n the v a r i o u s i n t h e m i d d l e o f t h e lotus o f the h e a r t . 15. or on the

gestures

f i n g e r s o f t h e h a n d , p r a y t o t h e s o u l i n the f o r m o f r e f u l g e n c e

T h e n he should scatter brilliant flowers on ground all round. the F o r the and worship the soul

the idol Dvra are

o f its

(entrance-passage), worshipped. 16. Then

dhra-Saktis

follows

snnidhyakarana

o f the devas of the divided. others

(invoking For

them to be near o n e ) a n d the worship

followers.

t h e pj3 o f the six l i m b s t h e q u a r t e r s a r e 17. Dharma and others,

Indra and

are

duly

w o r s h i p p e d a l o n g with their w e a p o n s salvation.4 18.

a n d followers.

Worship

o f t h e c y c l e s , the V e d a s a n d t h e muhrtas y i e l d s e n j o y m e n t a n d

T h e groups of Mothers Nand and

Gag,

Mah-

kla a n d Y a m u n a are 19. Om

to be worshipped at the threshold. Bhairava the lord of N e c t a r .

obeisance to

S i m i l a r l y , Om jum sah5 o b e i s a n c e to s u n . 20. I n the s a m e m a n n e r h e should p e r f o r m the worship o f i v a - K r s n a , B r a h m a n , the laksm a n d others. Gunas, C a n d i k
6

Sarasvat, M a h -

1. tecaka. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E x e r c i s i n g the breath. v.l. v.l. v.l. plfhaiuddhi. kartavy hamsah. ca vipaicitaih.

It

i s o f t h r e e t y p e s p r a k a , kumbhaka

and

An association Durg.

of, s p e c i a l l y , a t t e n d a n t s o f i v a .

78

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER NINETEEN
Prnevari Sta said : 1. explained 2. I shall by If he now n a r r a t e t h e prnevari r i t e o f G a r u d a a s Vidy

iva. is

I shall at first m e n t i o n the places where a bitten in the funeral pyre, anthill, well,

person bitten by a cobra does not remain alive. a n d t h e c a v i t i e s o f t r e e s o r i f the m a r k s o f t h e b i t e a r e i n d i s t i n c t a n d there are three lines, he does not survive. 3-4. bitten on the Z o d i a c , throat, with a A p e r s o n c a n n o t s u r v i v e the the sixth d a y of the fortnight Cancer serpent bite if he is or when the sun is in the a r m p i t , loins, arms, neck or is a m a n

or Aries, or the m o o n in the constellations belly, m o u t h , to the a mendicant

M l , Ales and M a g h ; If he is bitten in joints, s t i c k or temples, ears, a weapon, the b a c k ; If the m e s s e n g e r going the patient is sure to die. 5-7. the day the s u n has

physician

or a n a k e d p e r s o n during day

T h e r e a r e s i x vivartanas (or u n i t s o f s e s s i o n ) a n d f i v e vivartanas

1

d u r i n g the night. D u r i n g the

t h e f i r s t s e s s i o n for a y m a , t h e o t h e r t e n p l a n e t s (10x|=5 sessions the serpents have their

(adding R h u a n d K e t u also) have half y m a each. sessions). D u r i n g the night A m o n g serpents S e s a is Sun,

( e s a o n e a n d e i g h t o t h e r s e r p e n t s t o g e t h e r four, f i v e s e s s i o n s ) . Phanipa is moon, T a k s a k a is themselves Mars, Karkota is Jupiter, Padma and serpents a n d p l a n e t s . 8. Rhu
2

M a h p a d m a (jointly)

Venus and akha is saturn. R h u and Kulika are

W h e n J u p i t e r presides d u r i n g the d a y or in the n i g h t death by day. When a l o n g with kulika at the hours of confluence of

he is the slayer of even g o d s . S a t u r n is presides two half-ymas, the p e r i o d is destructive

1. hours, 2.

TSma g e n e r a l l y m e a n s (SSED p . T h i s list 457) of eight main

o n e e i g h t h p a r t of a d a y , a p e r i o d serpents is somewhat different

of three from that

found elsewhere.

1.19.19 9-11. T h e fifteen parts of the human body,

79 viztoes, a day

feet, c a l v e s , knees, g e n i t a l , navel, h e a r t , b r e a s t tips, neck, n o s e tip, eyes, ears, brows t e m p l e s a n d the h e a d a r e allotted e a c h from pralipad are assigned, the four calf, two in order, to so to many muhrtas (the first d a y of the fortnight). T h e s e p a r t s (one sixtieth of a the feet, five to twelve to

d a y ) a s follows :five t o t h e t o e ,

the k n e e , one to the genital, six to the navel,

to the b r e a s t tip, eight to the throat, fifteen to the n o s e t i p 12-13. If the m o o n p m i d e s over the right p a r t of the it is the

a n d one e a c h t o the eyes, ears eye-brow, t e m p l e a n d the h e a d . m a n ' s b o d y he m a y survive. In r e g a r d to a w o m a n left with p a r t of the body. t h e h a n d a n d s e t t i n g the w i n d i n m o t i o n . 14. is fourfold. It

Consciousness is restored by r u b b i n g T h e g r e a t Bija

("mystic s e e d )

o f t h e s o u l i s c a l l e d hamsa, i t i s a s p u r e a s c r y s t a l . i s k n o w n a s t h e q u e l l e r o f p o i s o n a n d s i n . I t s Bija first Bija is Bindu (the point in Om). T h e

The

s e c o n d consists of five v o w e l s ; the third stands on t h e sixth a n d t h e f o u r t h is w i t h visarga. 15. formerly 16. Pranava Om kuru Kunde1 for (Om) Svh. was kept by Garuda

T h i s V i d y (mystical knowledge) A man desirous of killing

the protection of the three worlds. the serpents shall p l a c e shall place Kuru the feet. T h i s nysa in the m o u t h . T h e wise m a n

i n t h e n e c k , Kunde2 i n t h e c a l v e s , S v h a i n ( p l a c i n g ) is calledyugah. 17.

T h e h o u s e i n w h i c h this mantra i s w r i t t e n a n d p l a c e d thousand

i s a b a n d o n e d b y s e r p e n t s . A f t e r r e c i t i n g this mantra a t i m e s t h e s a c r e d t h r e a d s h a l l b e p l a c e d o n the e a r . 18. scattered 19. Suvarnarekhe

S e r p e n t s l e a v e off t h e h o u s e w h e r e s a n d p a r t i c l e s a r e after r e c i t i n g this mantra. B y r e c i t i n g i t s e v e n l a k h s o f Om svh u n t o t h e fowl-formed of g o l d e n kukkutavigraharpini svh), he s h o u l d lines write, (Om on a

t i m e 3 siddhi h a s b e e n o b t a i n e d b y Devas a n d Asuras.

lotus of e i g h t petals, two letters in e a c h p e t a l .

1. 2. 3. v.l. Ibid. R e a d i n g altered to saptalaksa from J a p t a l a k s a . kule.

80 20. 21. thumb feet. 22. E v e n in d r e a m s the poisonous

Garuda T h e patient bitten by a serpent should be He then leaves the fingers finger Om Paksi Svh mantra the beginning should

Purna

sprinkled

with water of that lotus. R e c i t i n g this

off t h e p o i s o n . with the be placed, a n d the

a n d ending with

little

( N y s a ) in order, on the h e a d , m o u t h , heart, genital

serpents do not step

o n h i s s h a d o w . T h e p e r s o n w h o r e c i t e s this a h u n d r e d t h o u s a n d times is competent to quell p o i l o n by a m e r e glance. 23. This poison. 24-25. a i u e Nysa ai o u am ah Hamsa-mantra-nysa 'I am to be p l a c e d at t h e t i p of the feet calf ,, knee ,, waist ,, navel heart ,, mouth head when recited, c o n t e m p l a t e d or Om Hrim Hraum Hrim Bhirundyai Svh patient removes mantra r e c i t e d into the ear of the

This 26.

worshipped removes poison. G a r u d a ' m e d i t a t i n g l i k e this t h e p r o c e s s o f mantra with the shall d e s t r o y i n g p o i s o n s h o u l d b e d o n e . T h e Ham 27. P l a c i n g Hamsa o n t h e left h a n d , mantra the it

nysas o n t h e b o d y i s s a i d t o b e q u e l l i n g p o i s o n . the operator destroy close nostrils a n d m o u t h . T h i s in the skin as well as flesh. 28. blowing 29. He should the wind d r a w out place poison of the patient over his body. He by and of then shall poison

s h a l l r e m e m b e r the b l u e - t h r o a t e d G o d i v a a n d o t h e r s . The root Pratyagirh1 drunk with rice water Cakraj* removes poison. a r e a l s o like this.
1. Identity not clear. 2. S p r e a d i n g H o g m e e d , J W p . 233. 3. A l s o calledpriyanguCallicarpa macrophylla, VH, p. 236. 4. v.l. vakraj. S u r u t a describes a shrub called cakrak. T h e r e a l s o a h e r b n a m e d vakra ( v a l l e r i a n a w a l l i c h i i ) . GUDB, p p . i 5 0 a n d 1 7 3 .

T h e roots

o f Punarnav2

Phalini3 a n d

is

1.20.1 30. water a n d T h e roots mixed o f w h i t e Brhati1

3

81 a n d Karkofi2 a r e a l s o d e s kneaded with over the part applied

t r u c t i v e o f p o i s o n . Gairikarnik

(a clod of earth)

with ghee should be

b i t t e n . T h e a p p l i a n c e o f p a s t e will r e m o v e p o i s o n . 31-32. not spread. Grjana Gonasa

5

If the p a t i e n t Five parts of

drinks hot ghee, or

the poison the

does of body

the root

o f irisa* w i t h o n e p a r t a p p l i e d over removes the

(red garlic)

either drunk

removes poison.

The mantra

O m Hrim

poison of

(a kind of s n a k e ) . 33. W h e n this m a n t r a (Om Hrim) e n d i n g the heart a n d forehead one. If this m a n t r a i s p l a c e d w i t h visarga is power to in the vaginal

contemplated in influence every

it gives the

p a s s a g e the girl comes under his influence, tions of intoxication profusely. 34. times, and a poet,

p u t t i n g forth s e c r e -

H a v i n g r e c i t e d this m a n t r a 7 x 8 (fifty-six) t o g o everywhere like w e l l - r e a d i n V e d a s a n d o b t a i n s a wife

thousand Garuda,

one becomes competent

w h o will be

u n d e r his control. I n d e e d , the central theme of S a g e tive of p o i s o n . V y s a story is destruc-

CHAPTER TWENTY
Mantras for Sta said 1-2. noose, : I shall now e x p o u n d discus, the highly secret collection and spear. removing poison

of mantras described by iva. T h e usual weapons of a king are bow, heavy club (pestle), trident

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Solarium indicum. Name Gairika Allium of a kind

GVDB, p . red p.

277. (momordica chalk. 399. p. 143. SSED, divica). p. 192 GVDB, p. 81.

o f Karkofaka GVDB,

generally means

Albizzialebback.

a s c a l o n i c u m . GVDB,

82 With mantras, his enemies. 3. a n d e n d i n g with 4. as with these w e a p o n s the king the p e t a l

Garuda shall

Purna conquer

In the lotus b e g i n n i n g with the petal to

towards the east (the eighth) a, a r e Astavargas.

the north-east

e t c . s h o u l d be w r i t t e n as

Mantroddhra.

They

Omkra s h a l l b e t h e S t / a o f B r a h m a . Hrimkra i s V i s n u be written three times on the h e a d of

h i m s e l f . Hrimkra s h o u l d 5. Om Hrim Hrim

i v a and placed in order. T a k i n g up f a c i n g the sky. are destroyed. 6. hand H o l d i n g the s m o k e - c o l o u r e d b o w in the m i d d l e of the c o n t e m p l a t e over protect i t i n t h e sky. the three Evil planets, to are destroyed. worlds, not he should 7. 8. the trident by the hand, he s h o u l d whirl it

O n s e e i n g it,

t h e evil p l a n e t s a n d

the serpents

s e r p e n t s , c l o u d s a n d Rksasas This mantra can Om Jrii Sum s p e a k of the l a n d of mortals.

Hum Phat wood after the invocation can be no with harm over in the field. T h e r e mantra

E i g h t p e g s o f Khadira1 mantras s h a l l b e f i x e d u p 9. a t night. 10. 11. then p l a c e 12. 13. 14. and (Rksasas) This Hara wards Ksara off Mala

from thunderbolts or explosions in that p l a c e . I n v o k e the g r e a t mentioned by G a r u d a the eight p e g s a n d d i g the earth in the field twenty one times from lightning, vats bindu (Om) and is

troubles Vasat

thunderbolt. with the always auspicious. t h e pinda flowers with the O m Hrm o b e i s a n c e t o S a d i v a . H e s h o u l d (rice-ball) shining like the pomegranate forefinger. quarters. Trailokyadmara. removes suppresses poisons goblins

By only seeing it the evil c l o u d s , lightnings, poisons, Om Hrim o b e i s a n c e to G a n e a . Om Hrim o b e i s a n c e to Om Aim Tum o b e i s a n c e to Bhairava. the field. It It T h i s pinda i s c a l l e d It protects as well as o t h e r s .

Rksasas a n d g o b l i n s f l e e u n t o t h e t e n Stambhandicakxa. evil p l a n e t s .

1.

A c a c i a c a t e c h u . GVDB, p .

129.

1.21.1 15. in the Om obeisance. he can Contemplating evil clouds

83 Indra's thunderbolt etc. By Vajramudr

hand 16.

destroy

poison, enemies a n d goblins are destroyed. O m Kfum o b e i s a n c e . O n e shall r e m e m b e r the noose t h e manlra s h a l l death as the the o n t h e left h a n d . P o i s o n s , g o b l i n s e t c a r e d e s t r o y e d . Om Hrm o b e i s a n c e . 17. By m e r e r e p e t i t i o n it can burn r e m o v e p o i s o n , evil c l o u d s a n d evil p l a n e t s . By contemplation obeisance. lasad goblins with even whole world by m e a n s of splitting missiles. O m Ksnam 18. evil 19. kettle inserted. Om 20. Mara Mara Mraya \ eight hundred times and bent by the (in-take developed It destroys hosts of e n e m i e s . Mraya Svh Om Hum Phat Svh Om By c o n t e m p l a t i n g on B h a i r a v a Svh. and This mantra this mantra c a n b e m a d e t o q u e l l p l a n e t s , g o b l i n s a n d p o i s o n s . dvijihvksa poison prevents the field. on a be should planets, drum birds of affecting planets

Om ksm o b e i s a n c e . blood

After writing

mantra

the n a m e s

T h e trident should be invoked energies

m e n t a l l y w i t h the m a n t r a s . T h e lower 21. breath) p o u n c i n g of higher energies.

should be blunted

T h e m a n t r a s s h o u l d b e p r a c t i s e d i n Praka the t i m e o f Kumbhaka with Pranava. Thus and well-developed

of b r e a t h ) , well-invoked at

(retention of

m a n t r a s y i e l d fruits e v e n a s s e r v a n t s .

CHAPTER TWENTYONE
Worship Sta said : 1. (iva)
1. Vmadeua,

of Paca-vaktra

iva

I s h a l l n o w s e v e r a l l y r e l a t e t h e w o r s h i p of Pacavaktra which gives enjoyment a n d salvation.

The Aghora, five forms of and iva Sna. who has five faces are

Sadyojta,

Tatpurusa,

84 Om Bhh 2. Om 3. Dhrti obeisance to V i s n u , o f Sadyojta Sadyojta.

Garuda

Purna

the p r i m o r d i a l p r i n c i p l e , (iva) should be made

t h e f o r m t h a t s u p p o r t s e v e r y t h i n g , Svh. T h e invocation o b e i s a n c e to They are w i t h this mantra at first. Of h i m the eight Rddhi Kals a r e well p r a i s e d . Siddhi Lakpmi (achievement), (wealth), toVmadeva. Raks ( p r o t e c t i o n ) , p r e s e r v e d ) , Knti Kriy (action), Rati (love), Medh (prosperity) Knti (courage), OmHm 4. Ply Rj (intellect),

(splendour)

Svadh ( o b l a t i o n ) obeisance (the which

a n d Sthiti ( s u s t e n a n c e ) .

H i s K a l s a r e thirteen. king), (that should be (reflection), (splendour), Kama ( l u s t ) ,

Trsn ( t h i r s t ) , Mati a n d Mohini 5. pressing Ksudh 6. nti a n d My a r e ) Nivrtti 7.

Buddhi ( I n t e l l e c t ) , Rtri There are the mind), Kal (hunger),

( N i g h t ) , Trsani,

( t h a t w h i c h terrifies) Manonman Moh Mrtyu (sup-

(that which enchants). e i g h t terrific Aghor (not (digit), Kals1 v i z awful), (delusion), (death) ( H i s Kals (learning)

Nidr ( s l e e p ) , to Tatpurusa

(illusion). Om Hraim obeisance alone. ( r e t u r n ) , Pratisfh ( S t a b i l i z a t i o n ) , Vidy

(Peace). Om Hraum o b e i s a n c e to Ina. Nirajan (ray) (unsullied), Marici ( H i s Kals a r e ) Nical Sain, (bright) Agan

(unmoving), (woman),

a n d Jvlini ( h a v i n g f l a m e s ) ,

CHAPTER
Worship Sta said: 1. I shall now e x p l a i n enjoyment and

TWENTYTWO
of iva

the process salvation.

of worship He is

of i v a

which brings

quiet, omni-

present, void a n d stationed in a d i a g r a m of twelve parts.

1.

T h e s e o b v i o u s l y b e l o n g t o Aghora.

1.22.11 2. vowels T h e f i v e faces a r e s h o r t v o w e l s . with bindu. H i s limbs are

85 long word Haum

H i s m i s s i l e i s r e p r e s e n t e d b y visarga. A b o v e t h a t t h e i v a should be written. 3-4. In the sixth a p a r t m e n t the great mantra s h o u l d b e written b e l o w . I t bestows all w e a l t h .

T h e g r e a t Mudr i s a s follows. W i t h b o t h t h e h a n d s g r a s p t h e feet. feet. T h e head then shall be placed over the tips of the T h e n p e r f o r m Karganysa With the p a l m of the back. 5. T h e n perform Agavinysa beginning in the with the pericarp little of the f i n g e r a n d e n d i n g w i t h t h e forefinger. I shall now lotus of the heart. 6. P e r f o r m arcana1 o f virtue, knowledge, u n a t t a c h m e n t , invocation, installation of the the prosperity etc. with the heart. W i t h t h e h e a r t offer t h e d e i t y , t h e pdya a n d arghya. 7-8. ed. I shall n o w n a r r a t e t h e r i t e s in five Ullekhana-s ( p r o d d i n g With the c o a t of mail w i t h t h e t i p ) p e r f o r m e d w i t h t h e astra. heart. T h r o w fire either in the pit of Sakti or in the heart. 9. After performing Garbhdhna and other rites ( m y s t i c a l c o n c e p t i o n ) , p e r f o r m i n g all activities with the h e a r t h e s h o u l d p e r f o r m Homa o f S i v a w i t h a l l t h e Agas ( p a r t s ) . 10. a m b h u should be worshipped in the a l t a r a n d in t h e Padma Garbha; let t h e r e be a m a r k of a c o w . T h e mandala ( a l t a r ) o f Svksi, Svdhya a n d o t h e r t h i n g s h a s e i g h t i n t h e b e g i n n i n g a n d sixty-four i n t h e e n d . 11. means
1.

( t h e p l a c i n g of the fingers as Astra mantra p u r i f y

a m y s t i c ritual) the h a n d using the

explain the worship

The

camana

(mystical

drinking

of w a t e r ) ,

bathing, a n d the

worship of similar base

should be

perform-

s p r i n k l i n g s h o u l d b e m a d e . Saktinysa s h o u l d b e m a d e w i t h t h e

Svksi ( o n e ' s o w n e y e ) g o e s u p t o I n d r a a n d S u n b y fortyone vartanas (revolutions) in the whole sky,

of

Adoration.

86

Garuda

Purna

T h e a u s p i c i o u s pit s h o u l d be m a d e in the south-east in the form of a crescent m o o n . 12. Sastra The groups o f astra hrdaya in are devoted the border for to of the the of five. Astra should 13. rite) and (returning) 14. immutable 15-16. In be placed

q u a r t e r s a n d a d i v a i n the p e r i c a r p . I s h a l l n o w m e n t i o n Diks the g r o u n d , etc. settled is the g r o u n d , In is the (preparation in the five sacred learnthe tattvas. Nivrtti

t h e n Pratisth ( e s t a b l i s h i n g ) ; goes each beyond. there After

i n g is five; nti is t h e r a y . homa1 nti that quiescent. For After giving the purify shall be a hundred ghee-offer-

homa. T h u s homa s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d f i v e t i m e s . Prnhuti ( t h e final i n g ) h e s h o u l d m e d i t a t e u p o n i v a for his f a v o u r . order to the a t o n e m e n t e a c h huti s h o u l d b e g r a d u a l l y m a d e w i t h t h e Astrabija. E x c e p t the a c t u a l 17. If the T h u s D k s is concluded.

p e r f o r m a n c e of the sacrifice all other purified ritualistically

rituals should be kept confidential. d e v o t e e thus b e c o m e s he attains to ivahood, indeed.

CHAPTER TWENTYTHREE
Worship Sta said 1-2. three : I shall now e x p l a i n the beginning with worship of i v a love Om and conducive etc. W i t h the following e n d i n g w i t h Svh, of iva

to the achievement of virtue a n d mantras, camana s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d .

Om Hm A t m a t a t t v y a 2 S v h Om Him V i d y t a t t v y a 3 S v b Om Hum ivatattvya4 Svh the ears should be m a d e with the T h e salutation to heart.
1. 2. 3. 4.

v. I. vyoma. To soul-element. To knowledge-element. To iva-element.

1.23.7
3. the For the b a t h of ashes a n d and

87 Tarpana1 the m a n t r a s a r e Vausat2. (fathers and grand-

Om Hm Yarn Svh. F o r a l l devas, a l l s a g e s the a d o r a t i o n is w i t h Mantra 4. fathers) e n d i n g w i t h Kamah Pitrs a n d F o r a l l the t o the Pitmahas

t h e mantra s h o u l d e n d w i t h Svadh. great-grand-fathers and maternal grand

O m Hm fathers as well. 5.

Hm JVamah

t o a l l m o t h e r s . T h e n Prnyma s h o u l d b e s h o u l d b e m a d e . Gyatr b e Vidmahe j Vgviuddhya recital he should Hah. of prayers with begin worship iva-

performed. recited next. 6. 7. with

camana a n d Mrjana3 Hm Rudrah Tan

Om After

Maheya (special

DhimahijTanno

Pracodaytj/5

Sryopasthpana

mystic gesticulations with the h a n d ) s o l a r mantras. Om Hm Him Hum Haim Haurh

S a l u t a t i o n to

S r y a . Om Ham o b e i s a n c e to Khakolka, t h e f o r m of S u n .
1. 2. 3. grass. 4. G y a t r l generally m e a n s a verse c o m p o s e d in the Vedic metre called G y a t r which is of 24 syllables, usually a triplet of eight syllables each. R u t i n the I n d i a n culture it has a s s u m e d a specific m e a n i n g a n d the following R g v e d i c V e r s e is popularly known as G y a t r ( b e c a u s e it is also composed in the Gyatr metre). T a t savitur varenyam bhargo devasya dhmahi/ dhiyo yo nah pracodayt// ( R V 3.62.10) E v e r y c a s t e H i n d u i s e x p e c t e d t o r e p e a t this verse d u r i n g m o r n i n g and evening devotions ( s a n d h y ) . As it is addressed to S a v i t r , the sun, it is also called Svitr. G y a t r is also personified as a g o d d e s s a n d is s a i d to be the wife of B r a h m a a n d the m o t h e r of the four V e d a s a n d the first three castes. It is held very sacred and attributed with m a n y mystical a n d philosophical potentialities. T h e Tntrikas have a n u m b e r of mystical verses, e a c h one attributed to a p a r t i c u l a r deity, a n d these are also known by the name of G y a t r . ( A l s o Liga (AITM), p. 796, SED, p. ^^z;CDHM, pp. 111-2). N o n e t h e l e s s t h e v e r s e g i v e n h e r e b e g i n n i n g w i t h O m hm i s q u i t e different to that one generally accepted as G y a t r a n d quoted a b o v e . 5. This verse, also c o m p o s e d in G y a t r metre, is addressed i v a a n d s e e m s t o b e c o m p o s e d o n t h e m o d e l o f t h e R V 3.62.10. to Presenting libations of water to the An manes. the deities. of kua a blade

e x c l a m a t i o n uttered while offering o b l a t i o n s to

C l e a n s i n g , sprinkling w a t e r by m e a n s of h a n d or

88 8. Om Hrm Hrim Sah o b e i s a n c e to t h e

Garuda

Purna

s u n . Dantfin a n d pleasure shall with Raim, Vidyut

Pigala a n d o t h e r Bhtas s h o u l d be Rim; Vibhti obtained. 9-10. Sksm with He Rom;

be systematically r e m e m b e r e d . in fire great

A f t e r p r o p i t i a t i n g the p u r e I n a should worship Rm; Vimal and

Padm w i t h Rm; Dipt Rem; Bhadr with with Amoghik Raim;

with

Jay w i t h

with Ram in t h e e a s t e r n a n d o t h e r q u a r t e r s ; Rom in t h e m i d d l e , Sarvatomukh w i t h R a m ; t h e s u n ' s s e a t a n d Hrm a n d Hrm; a n d t h e s u n w i t h Sah. 11. of h a i r ed duly. 12. T h e queen properly initiated with with Som; Bam; Magala should be worshipped ( M o o n ) should be with Mam; Budha w i t h Srya-Hrdaya Mantra. T h e p l a n e t Soma worshipped (Mercury) (ukra-venus) 13. should (Mars) O m a n d A m for the sun in Svah, t h e h e a r t ; h e a d a n d tuft be w o r s h i p p be assigned a n d Bhh, Bhuvah, Om. Jvlini s h o u l d weapon should the form of sun with

w i t h Hrm.

C o a t of mail a n d

B r h a s p a t i ( J u p i t e r ) w i t h Br; Bhrgava anaicara ( S a t u r n ) w i t h am. Kam a n d t h e fierce l u s t r e worshipping the sun should be m a d e beginKetu with

w i t h Bham; t h e p l a n e t Rhu w i t h Ram; with

be worshipped

Om. After

a n d p e r f o r m i n g camana t h e Aganysa ning with the 14. Hm little finger. Him for the h e a d ; for t h e

Hum for t h e tuft, Haim for e y e s . Hah for t h e w e a p o n . for the purification

t h e c o a t o f m a i l a n d Haum of elements. 15. with holy 16. lotus.

1

H a v i n g f i x e d akti, Nysa s h o u l d

be m a d e

T h e n m a k i n g a vessel for Arghya i t s h a l l b e s p r i n k l e d water. The tman

2

should

be w o r s h i p p e d as seated on the should be w o r s h i p p e d .

3

W i t h Haum

ivya

the exterior

Nandin a n d Mahkla
1. dian of him 2. 3.

at the g a t e ; G a g , Y a m u n a , S a r a s v a t , .
image of white He is He is one of (personal colour is always supposed to be put the before guar-

T h e bull of i v a . H i s all four-footed his tndava animals. dance.

the idol of i v a in every t e m p l e of i v a . during

S i v a ' s ganas a n d a c c o m p a n i e s

T h e c h i e f o f S i v a ' s ganas v.l.gauh.

attendants).

1.23.29 17. Brahma, 18. in the rivatsa, Gana, Vstvadhipati preceptor, in the (presiding east; Vm and

89 deity of the p l o t ) ; in t h e Jyesth

Sakti

a n d Anantaall t h e s e

m i d d l e , Dharma1 a n d o t h e r s i n t h e Adharma2 middle and 19-20. iva. in the

south-east; p e r i c a r p of the

l o t u s ; Raudri, Kali, T h e followdamani &

i v a a n d S t i n the east. Otn Haum o b e i s a n c e to Balapramathini Kalavikarini. Sarvabhtnr i n g s h o u l d b e w o r s h i p p e d i n the Ealavikrini, 21-23. Sthpana, Arghya, cana? Next Pdya, he m i d d l e of the seat in front of

M a n o n m a n , the g r e a t f o r m o f S i v a ' s s e a t a n d i n its m i d d l e i v a . A l l t h e s e r i t e s s h o u l d b e p e r f o r m e d duly- vhana, Nirodhana* Abhyaga,5 offer Sakalikarana, Udvarta* garments, camana, Mudrdarana, Snna, Nirmacamana, should food Sannidhna,3

unguents, flowers,

incense, l a m p , thread

offerings,

fragrant spices, betel

l e a v e s , w a t e r for w a s h i n g h a n d s , u m b r e l l a , c h o w r i e s a n d s a c r e d a n d p e r f o r m Paramikarana. After i m a g i n i n g the d e i t y i n its s o l i t a r y f o r m r e c i t a l and the dedication thereof should be performed. called Nmga w o r s h i p i . e . prayer, kneeling etc. by north-west a n d southothers a n d Nirmlya thou art 24. of prayers T h i s is 25.

m e a n s o f the h e a r t . In the south-east, north-east, should The worship Indra and w e s t , t h e w o r s h i p m e n t i o n e d for t h e e a s t s h o u l d b e m a d e i n t h e middle. He 26-29. s h o u l d b e a p p l i e d t o Canda. p r a y e r shall b e : O L o r d iva, t h e p r o t e c t o r o f t h e s e c r e t o f s e c r e t s . P l e a s e a c c e p t this c h a n t i n g of prayer performed by us. for m e by thy grace in L e t there b e successful a c h i e v e m e n t thy presence. Whatever sin I m a y

1. Dharma i s 2. to be 3. 4. 5 6. 7.

A also

personification a name

of

Religion the god It is

or very

Righteousness (SSED, p. 268). peculiar

or

virtue.

o f Tama, dharma.

of d e a t h .

A personification of V i c e . worshipped with Endorsing,

t h a t adharma i s a l s o

Receiving or putting down together. covering up. S m e a r i n g with oily substances. S m e a r i n g with v.l. nirmohana. perfumes.

90

Garuda

Puina

have committed do thou destroy that since I am in S i v a ' s region. T h o u art the giver of Renown. Whatever I i v a is have the giver, i v a is the w h a t e v e r I will thou art the any other e n j o y e r , i v a i s this e n t i r e w o r l d , I am he w h o is i v a . do let everything be i v a is victorious everywhere. done, O iva

sacred u n t o thee. universe.

saviour, the leader of the lord." 30-35. gates:Gana, Vstvadhipa. Tattvas I shall from and Sarasvati,

I do not h a v e method Gag,

explain the Nandi, others

another

of worship of Tamun, & The

iva. Beginning Indra

east

these should Mahkla, should form, be

be p l a c e d in the

worshipped.

(principles) anus,
e

should be

worshipped v i z : E a r t h , Water, S o u n d , touch, speech, Vidy, Kla, akti Akla* and eyes, t o n g u e , nose, m i n d , Sadiva,

Fire, Wind, Ether, h a n d s , feet, intellect, JViyati,

5

smell, taste,

penis, e a r s , skin, learning, all these

ego,

Prakrti,1 pure known

Purusa, Rga,2 Dvesa,3 vara, he should

My,

iva. Having

b e c o m e wise a n d

liberated. He who is iva is Hari and B r a h m a and I am Brahm a n due to liberation. 36-37. is in the I lotus shall of explain the Ndis, the purification The return of e l e m e n t s , The mantra is i m m e d i a t e . Pigal.6 T h e t w o t h r o u g h w h i c h a m a n b e i n g purified b e c o m e s i v a . heart. (nerves) T h e s e two a r e the Ida7 a n d

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. celestial

Nature. Passion. Jealousy. O b v i o u s l y o p p o s i t e o f Kla Destiny. Illusion, Deception. Illusion origin, is personified as a female form of In c r e a t e d for the p u r p o s e o f beguiling some individual. from is the of supreme false (time).

V e d n t a philosophy, it m e a n s illusion by virtue unreal universe as really existent a n d as distinct It In CSL, is regarded as a power it of God. the My s y n o n y m o u s w i t h Ajna skhya p. 7. 8. philosophy to 437). According the on o r Avidy w h i c h i s t h e means

of which one considers the spirit. considered by some to be knowledge. p. 207; Prakrti.(Vide CDHM,

cause

Pradhnaox

Tantras, i t i s t h e p r i n c i p a l n e r v e t h e left side of the body. (CSL, p. of the b o d y .

in the h u m a n 446). (CSL, p . 446).

nervous system, being

T h e principal nerve on the right side

1.23.46 Prna a n d Apna i n t h e s q u a r e bodies of Indra and B r a h m a . 38-40. inated. T h e quiver Vidyyai crores Bhavavrksa The downwards. 41. The mandala i s m a r k e d o f the by Vajra1 and Mandala ( d i a g r a m )

91 shall be t h e illum-

arrows are Hrim Hah In

quality of single stroke. T h e Hah Phat; is Om Hrm

in the p l a c e of heart is s p a c i o u s a n d contains h u n d r e d Pratisthyai Hum Phat. its The centre he then the Hrm Bhmi Tantra eightyfour

c h a m b e r s . Om

in height. Earth Then Vm

should

contemplate the of as with a f a c e Susumn,2 is

(the tree of worldly existence) should Devi is

and the soul.

be thought Pratisth The are

everything should be m a d e pure. (base). deities a r e four t i m e s . Samna, Udna The dhyna

dhrik ( t h e s u p p o r t i n g p r o p ) . a n d Varuna. V i s n u i s t h e c a u s e . 42. The Udghtas ( b e g i n n i n g s ) The (diagram) i s veta ( w h i t e ) . mandala 43. crores. 44. moon).

l o t u s o f the n e c k s h o u l d

be m a d e thus. (Crescent

s h a l l b e c a l l e d Ardhacandra extend to in

M a r k e d by a lotus it shall The tman ninetyfour

two h u n d r e d shall be

(times)

height

thought of as with face downwards. T h e r e are p l a c e s a n d lotuses. and the deity of T h e Aghora (non-terrific) shall be a c c o m p a n i e d by learning. Nga ( S e r p e n t ) 45. gular crores. 46-48. It is in R u d r a Tattva s h o u l d b e c o n t e m p l a t e d the forehead t h a t t h e Purusa h a s his thus. akti. A V y u is to is in fire a r e t o b e c o n t e m centre. p l a t e d as the t o n g u e of an e l e p h a n t with the lips in the R u d r a is the cause. shape. Its altitude

T h e Udghta i s for t h r e e t i m e s . and width are four h u n d r e d

I t s c o l o u r i s t h a t o f b l o o d . I t i s i n the f o r m o f a b l a z e , t r i a n -

grassy p l a c e with tortoise a n d partridge, O scholars. the deity. fourteen

1. 2. the

I v a r a is the cause. extending mandala crores.

v.l.vakra.

T h e Vyu Tattva s h o u l d b e c o n t e m p l a t e d a s Udghta is for two times.

The

T h e most important

nerve in the h u m a n nervous

system,

being in

m i d d l e of the body.

(CSL, p . 4 6 1 . )

92 haxagonal The nti the for width 49. in In shape a lotus called of Vrsa. It is

Garuda marked by a

Purna dot.

and the altitude are eight crores. twelve ends Devadatta t h e Ivaras a r e b e y o n d . and Dhanajaya T h e Udghta are is Kuh, akhinl,

(peace) Ndis. 50.

T h e c a u s e is

ikhena a n d Sadiva.

once only. 51.

It should be remembered is sixteen crores. abode should akti,

as resembling bright

glass. T h e width Thus shape. Ganaguru, Aivaryaall Both the T h e a l t i t u d e i s twenty be Ananta, contemplated as five crores. circular in 52. Vairgya, 53. The

Bhta uddhi h a s b e e n e x p l a i n e d t h u s . Bijaguru, these Dharmaka, jna, beginning with supine-faced. contemplated. (study of soul) a r e in t h e p e t a l s prone-faced lotus and are

that in the east. of them are pericarp a n d filaments o f the

O n e s h o u l d a l w a y s c o n t e m p l a t e t h e tmavidy a n d t h o s e o t h e r s b e g i n n i n g w i t h Vm. 54. seat deha. Lord 55. right Khatvga.

4,

The iva. iva He

Tattva n a m e d iva s h o u l d The is Mrti seated is in Ho Haum.

b e t h o u g h t o f i n the O b e i s a n c e to Vidyin

of

t h e p o s e Padmsana1,

white

colour a n d sixteen years old. has five faces. Abhaya,2 Prasda, O f his t e n h a n d s , t h e f i v e o n t h e akti,3 la (trident)
5

carry

and

56. 57. power),

1. A

And

the

left is

ones c a r r y S e r p e n t , Aksastra three-eyed. He has

drums,

b l u e lotus a n d the p o m e g r a n a t e . Sadiva Icch akti (will(ActionJanaakti ( k n o w l e d g e - p o w e r ) ,

particular posture in religious

a n d Kriyakti

meditation.

rmle vmapdampunastu daksinam padam j Vmorau sthpayitv tu padmsanamiti smrtamU ( S S E D , p . 3 1 4 ) .

2. 3. 4. 5. A p a r t i c u l a r mudr. o f h a n d p r o m i s i n g A kind of missile, s p e a r , d a r t , p i p e or with a skull at the t o p by A c l u b or staff A rosary. protection. lance. considered to be a w e a p o n p. 174).

of i v a and carried

ascetics a n d yogins. ( S S E D ,

1.24.3 p o w e r ) . A person who worships i v a like this

93 and contem-

p l a t e s t h u s will b e d e v o i d o f K l a 58. and If one circle

(become deathless). completed in a day

of worship is

night, the

w o r s h i p p e r shall l i v e for t h r e e y e a r s , i f i n t w o

d a y s , h e s h a l l l i v e for t w o y e a r s . 59. If in three days h e s h a l l l i v e for o n e y e a r . H e will

never have p r e m a t u r e d e a t h or d e a t h d u e to cold or heat.

CHAPTER TWENTYFOUR Worship Sta said 1. Ganas. bliss. : I shall now describe the m o s t e x c e l l e n t w o r s h i p o f iva under even the supereverything, heavenly He should to Durg
2

of

Tripur

Inferior

deities

attending on

v i s i o n o f G a n e a 1 w h i c h will y i e l d T h e s e a t s o f the 2. the seat 3. the Nyik,

1.

Ganas s h o u l d b e a d o r e d . assigned of the

w o r s h i p the i d o l s of t h e ganas a n d the l o r d of ganas H e a r t and other limbs should be The idol sandals should o f Durg W i t h the aktis3: Cand,
He is the

w i t h Gm a n d o t h e r mantras. and heart her mantraHrim eight Durge Raksini.

preceptor,

be a d o r e d with the should be m a d e to Candogr, Canda-

etc. assignment Pracand,

Rudracand,

Candavati.
son of iva and Prvati, or of of Prvat only, for, the

according ed and

to one legend, he and remover

sprang from the scurf

her b o d y . H e i s He is

god of wisdom represented four 2. 3.

of obstacles; hence he is invoked and worshippusually f a t w i t h a p r o t u b e r a n t belly, 106-8). (the first was Sat). his wife.

at the c o m m e n c e m e n t hands riding

of every important undertaking. a mouse; p. and

in a sitting p o s t u r e s h o r t a n d

with the head of an elephant. T h i s

h e a d h a s o n l y o n e t u s k . (SSED, A n a m e of Prvat, o n Devi CDHM, eight ( V i d e note pp.

1 7 8 ; CDHM, p p .

the s e c o n d wife of i v a 86-8).

T h e a c t i v e power of a

d e i t y i s c a l l e d akti, r e g a r d e d a s

aktis m a y b e

or nine or even fifty.

94 4. Durge'tha 5. Aim Candarp, raksini. Then Klim The Sadiva, Svah. and Candik with the signs)

Garuda

Purna

mantraDurge Vajra, Khadga a n d the Hrim

Mudrs

(mystic the

etc. shall be a s s i g n e d to i v a a n d others in the lord of lotus-seat a l s o shall b e w o r s h i p p e d . O b e i s a n c e to Tripur

the south-east. big goblins Om

Hrm

Kset Ksairh Strirh Skom rorh Spherh Sphorh rh ! t h e l o t u s - s e a t a n d the heart etc. 6. Brahmni, 1. ship Rura, the 8-9. o f Tripur. \oXus-Pitha (altar) Then are should be adored Kaumri
1

T h e n in the Mahevar, Bhairavas . Krodha, Kaplin,

Vaisnavi,

Vrhi, eight

Indradevat. Bhairavas: Asitga,

Cmund, and Candik. There Bhisana

the devotees shall wor-

Canda,

Unmattabhairava. and on Togini, a Samhra. T h e devotee should with Rati,2 Durg, a l o t u s inPriti, KmaVighnarja, times in the her

m e d i t a t e in h i s h e a r t , in a mandala ( d i a g r a m ) side a n d triangular in s h a p e , deva3, Guru the and 10. By five Kselrapa. reciting Varksa Aksastra, havana for hundred arrows, these : Vatuka,

thousand samanvit

n a m e s of ukl, the excellent hands) and

stra

pustakbhaya offering)

(having

b o o k , a n d offer o f f e a r l e s s n e s s (sacrificial

Tripura g i v e s Siddhi

(full a c h i e v e m e n t ) .

CHAPTER
Adoration Sta said 1. Ananta-Sakti 2. dhra-akti
1. terrific. 2. 3.

TWENTYFIVE
of sana

: Aim Krim rim Spherh Kfaum. I worship the s a n d a l of (Endless power). Obeisance (unto i t ) ' t h e s a n d a l of it).
of iva, all

Aim Hrim rim Phraurh Ksum. I w o r s h i p (Supporting power).

are eight p. inferior forms 45;. love, literally

Obeisance
or

(unto

These Wife

manifestations

( S e e CDHM,

of K m a d e v a , the deity of

m e a n s love.

T h e deity of love, cupid. L i t e r a l l y m e a n s passion.

1.26.2
3. 4. kevara. earth, 5. 6. Om its quarters. Om Hrim. Hrim rim word I worship Nivrtti the Pduk of efa Om hrim Hm\ I worship the Pduk

95 ( s a n d a l ) of lord Ananta Hfaof t h e the

Klgni Rudra.

Obeisance

(unto i t ) . I worship the Pduk of

Om Hrim rim. Hrim

Obeisance (unto it). rim. I w o r s h i p t h e the universe, seat called islands, syllables, oceans and

Bhattraka. the of It

O b e i s a n c e u n t o it. a n d other Kals; the earth, mantra nectar. Tattvas, Ananta a n d o t h e r w o r l d s , Orhkra a n d o t h e r s y l l a b l e s . T h e nine-syllabled b e g i n n i n g with H a k r a is the Sadyojta ( Q u i c k - b o r n ) e t c . Hm the h e a r t a n d o t h e r l i m b s . T h i s i s t h e Mhevara m a n t r a . I t i s t h e o c e a n o f t h e g r e a t i s i d e n t i c a l w i t h Siddhavidy ( t h e a c c o m p l i s h e d In is and of all the with the of quarters the base the around of ri of doer, the the side and six the w a t e r o f t h e o c e a n o f a d i v a , t h e identical with the the state Tridents Jyesth characteristics being agas Vidy, Rudra, learning). (parts) full o c e a n Um, akof knowledge (zones) of the Mna.

complete Rpacakra1, three

tytmaka, Karnik, Nava-akti w i t h of i v a

manialas

a n d o t h e r s . I w o r s h i p t h e Pduk O b e i s a n c e u n t o it.

Nyastapadmsana in t h e f o r m of a l o t u s .

CHAPTER

TWENTYSIX
over the body

Assignment of limbs Sta said 1. of Padma, 2. shall be

1.

: After t h a t , Karanysa a n d to be performed. shall be Mantra-Nysa performed.

v.l. JyesfhS-cakra.

the purification

conducive

t o Vidy a r e

After m a k i n g t h e m y s t i c s i g n performed. the body (Deha Nysa) (the west),

T h e n the assignments over

Kam o b e i s a n c e t o Manibandha

96 Aim Hrim Srim o b e i s a n c e fruit). washed. 3. (the Na Aim Hrim Srim Hraim lord). to the Sphaim Sphaim Mahtejorpam upon and templated to with Kraskara Hum (a tree

Garuda with hands

Purna a bitter shall be

( t h e g r e a t effulgent f o r m ) s h a l l b e c o n Humkra

o b e i s a n c e to B h a g a v n to Kraurh Kili Kili Kubjik a a (an Na Hrim Him

great and Ma and

obeisance Hm

u n m a r r i e d g i r l of e i g h t y e a r s ) . Hrm Aghoramukhi. Vyaga Urdhvavaktra on Vidy Kubjik. Srim

dependent

( t h e c r i p p l e d ) . Hrim Hrim Srim Aim (to the N o r t h ) . (face Srim the Sphaum t o t h e e a s t ) . Hrim (face to turned Kili to

o b e i s a n c e to L o r d Hrim

O b e i s a n c e to South). (face to

Prvavaktra Om Hrim to (face

a a Na Na Ma o b e i s a n c e to Daksina Vaktra turned west). Om the

t u r n e d to t h e Pacimavaktra obeisance t h e Kubjik.

Kili o b e i s a n c e north). Kfem

Aghoramukhi. OKI Aim to Na of Vivve

Uttaravaktra

turned

o b e i s a n c e to t h e

l o r d Hrdaya ( H e a r t ) o b e i s a n c e . to the

Svh to t h e h e a d . Hrim Krim Hrim Pram a a Kavaca Kili (coat Kili eyes.

Na Ma to t h e tuft. Aghoramukhi, Hum Phat to 4. zone. t h e Astra Aim by (weapon). Srim obeisance

m a i l ) . Hairh Haim irii Vausat to t h e t h r e e

Hrim

to

the

Mahlamandala (the z o n e of zone of of the Aim Aim Bodhvali

(surrounded

g r e a t tridents) having the form of an unsplit (the

Aim Hrim rim o b e i s a n c e to the Vyumandala Srim by obeisance the cluster obeisance to to

w i n d ) . Aim Hrim Srim o b e i s a n c e to Somamandala t h e m o o n ) . Aim Hrim Mandala (surrounded

Mahkula

of conceptions

g r e a t f a m i l y ) . Aim Hrim Srim Hrim Srim o b e i s a n c e to to Samagramandala, Mandala,

Kaulamandala. Srim and

Gurumandala Siddhamandala, mandalas

( t h e z o n e of J u p i t e r ) . Togimandala, a r e to

Hrim Srim o b e i s a n c e to Smamandala. Aim Hrim Apapitha order. Ksetramandala, Apaksetramandala

obeisance Pithamandala, Santnain

mandala.Thus

all the twelve

be w o r s h i p p e d

1.28.1

97

C H A P T E R TWENTYSEVEN
Mantra to Sta said : I. (Venom O ! the skeletal f o r m of Kla a n d Vikla ! O Carvini ! (destroying b u r n in creatures); Phanivisini of a devoid cure snake-bite

( t h e c h e w i n g ) ; Bhtahrini chariot) : U m e ; Raudri, Mhevari, mouthed), ed), Khakha enchant, Rudra destroy thou the burn,

o f s e r p e n t s ) ; Virathanryani ( N r y a n i t h e h a n d Cande Sukamunde Mahmukhi enemy Thou Protect the

(O ! fierce), (flameof all). (parrot-head-

( l a r g e - f a c e d ) , Jvlmukhi Sarvanini\ (destroyer

akukarni

(dart-eared),

seest t h e b l o o d in e v e r y l i m b . O G o d d e s s Manas, born me, of the heart of R u d r a ! T h o u Thou hast the form of the from Protect m e . Hum Mm Phapha T h o u removest Vioka (free of R u d r a .

enchant. O ! Devi

art stationed in the heart Thapha. T h o u h a s t Om Sale Male, sorrow). Hm Hm avari

girdle

o f Skanda. remove. O

poison of planets and enemies. remove,

Hum Savari Prakonaviare Sarve ! Vica Meghamile ! These mantras (recited properly) are conducive to the

r e m o v a l of poison of all serpents.

CHAPTER TWENTYEIGHT
Worship Sta said : 1 -3. Krsna) I shall that yields n o w d e s c r i b e the worldly worship of G o p l a ( L o r d the Sakhanidhi, Padmaof Gopla

enjoyment and salvation. In Yamuna,

d o o r - w a y s Dhtr1, Vidhtr2, Gag,

1. 2.

Brahma. Dispenser of Destiny.

98 nidhi, Sraga, arabha

1

Garuda
2

Purna

a n d ri a r e to be w o r s h i p p e d . In the e a s t in the South Cancla and

Bhadra a n d Subhadra a r e w o r s h i p p e d , Pracandaka the main north Jaya3 ri,

a r e w o r s h i p p e d , in t h e west Bala a n d Prabala a n d in a n d Vijaya a r e t o b e w o r s h i p p e d . I n t h e four Gana, Durg and Sarasvat are to be

doors, 4.

worshipped. I n the corners of south-east o f the f i e l d , N r a d a , In the S i d d h a , G u r u a n d N a l a k b a r a 5 , are to be worshipped. corner one 5. Visnu's Krma Vairgya man 7. In Tapas s h o u l d w o r s h i p Bhgavata.6 the east, the devotee the should of worship Visnu, Sakti and and ( p e n a n c e ) a n d V i s n u ' s akti family (power). T h e n in Visnu,

the m i d d l e he shall worship (the t o r t o i s e ) . 6. He

s h a l l w o r s h i p Ananta, Earth, Virtue,

Knowledge

(non-attachment) (brilliant-souled). Worship shall be

i n t h e S o u t h - e a s t . P r o s p e r i t y shall Prakt-

b e w o r s h i p p e d i n t h e n o r t h - w e s t a n d i n t h e n o r t h the offered of to

Sattva o f the n a t u r e o f and to Tamas the

Prakrti; to Rajas of t h e l o t u s o f Ahakra 8. The Tattva

nature

delusion

(the p r i n c i p l e o f e g o ) . ' the great principle. T h e east with

principle of learning,

z o n e s o f S u n , M o o n a n d f i r e a l l these shall b e w o r s h i p p e d . T h e s e a t o f Vimal a n d o t h e r s s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d i n t h e Hrim with the Srim. 9-10. Svh heart
1. 2. 3. 4. as a Liga 5. 6. 7. tamase

T o the l o v e r o f c o w h e r d l a s s e s the m a n t r a e n d i n g is the mentioned. In the east Sucakra, of the corners of weaponscakra, Vicakra, Trailokya-

C h t a k a , peacock, deer or elephant. A f a b u l o u s a n i m a l or a y o u n g e l e p h a n t . J a y a and Vijaya are T h e goddess of speech. In the the well-known The wife attendants of Visnu. An as p. ancient a river 350 fn. the river and 268; of B r a h m a .

(which isnow lost). vedic literature. (AITM), p.

Rgveda,

she is lauded both 284, P (AITM),

deity. But she b e c a m e the goddess of learning only in (Also 804). of K u b e r a . edition, the s e c o n d half of refer CDHM, p p .

post- R g -

N a m e of a son In the

B h g a v a t a - P u r n a or a follower of V i s n u . Vekatevara this verse is kandapadmyayajet kamkkatattvakam.

1.28.12 raksana ( p r o t e c t i n g t h e Astra a n d akti s h a l l 11. 12. rga

15

99 three worlds) Asurricakra, Ngnajit Sudarana

1

be w o r s h i p p e d . Satyabhm,3 and Suil9 Sunand* (shall Laksmancfi and be first w o r s h i p p e d ) . Musalau

Rukmini2 Then be

Mitravrnda1 Jmbavati5 shall

akha,10

Cakra11,

Gad12, Padma13,

worshipped. worshipped w i l d flowers, along with

T h e n the sword, the noose, the g o a d shall be in t h e e a s t . rvatsa Kaustubha, c o r o n e t , g a r l a n d of Indra a n d others, w o r s h i p p e d . Kumuda16 a n d o t h e r s , Visvaksena11 Krsna

the p r i n c i p a l l e a d e r s o f t h e b a n n e r shall b e

r shall be worshipped. By the recital of the n a m e , c o n t e m p l a t i o n a n d worship the d e v o t e e s h a l l o b t a i n all d e s i r e s .

1. 2. Krsna. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. of his 14. 15. 16. 17.

It is the well-known discus of L o r d D a u g h t e r of Bhismaka, king Another A wife A A A A wife wife wife of

Krsna. Vidarbha.

According The

to

legends wife of

Agni gave it to him. chief

wife o f K r s n a . D a u g h t e r of Krsna. Krsna. of K r s n a . of K r s n a .

of Satrjit.

wife of

A wife of K r s n a . of K r s n a . Conch. Discus. Club.

D a u g h t e r of J m b a v a t .

Lotus. K r s n a holds four h a n d s .

a conch,

a discus,

c l u b a n d a lotus in e a c h

Pestle. It is held by B a l a r m a , The bow Visnu. is generally associated

as his w e a p o n . with Visnu. the mace of Visnu.

An obvious reference to K a u m o d a k ,

100

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER TWENTYNINE
Trailokya-mohini Hari said 1. (the : I s h a l l n o w d e s c r i b e t h e w o r s h i p of of and also the mantras for Trailokya the Mohini1 of

enchantress

t h e t h r e e w o r l d s ) a c h i e f f o r m o f Purusotworship

tama ( L o r d V i s n u ) 2.

ri Rdh2 t h a t y i e l d s v i r t u e , d e s i r e e t c . Om Hrim rim Klim Hum Om o b e i s a n c e . exciter of the entire O ! foremost the among men ! O thou the unrivalled in features ! the a b o d e of universe !

goddess of F o r t u n e ! the

breaker of the hearts of all w o m a n ! O thou w h o heightenst the elation of the three worlds ! Distress the m i n d s of the w o m e n a m o n g the gods a n d d e m o n s ; beat (them); dry, dry win, win ( t h e m ) ; melt, m e l t grant (them); beautiful attract of all ( t h e m ) ; beat, the giver

a t t r a c t ( t h e m ) . O t h o u t h e fine-featured ! O t h o u fine features desires ! Kill goad and 3. worlds. 4. worlds. kill so-and-so Why with the discus, club that

g o o d fortune. O thou the giver of

a n d sword. with the

P i e r c e , p i e r c e w i t h all t h e noose.

arrows; dost thou

pound and beat

t a r r y ? S a v e , s a v e , till m y of t h e three of

d e s i r e d o b j e c t is a c h i e v e d . Hrm Phaf o b e i s a n c e . rim o b e i s a n c e to ridhara t h e e n c h a n t e r Klirh o b e i s a n c e to Purusottama the enchanter of the

three worlds ! Hum o b e i s a n c e t o Visnu- t h e enchanter three

Om rim Hrim Klim o b e i s a n c e to t h e e n c h a n t e r of t h e t h r e e worlds, 5. meditated succinctly.

It assumed demons. 2. v.l. ridhara. An obvious reference by Visnu, at the to time the of form of a most beautiful woman

Visnu. A l l t h e mantras o f t h e e n c h a n t e r o f of all upon collectively, separately the three All worlds can be or objects.

are conducive to the achievement

analytically

distributing

of nectar, to cheat the

1.30.6
6-7. ancillary Pestle, Conch After objects

101 t h e w o r s h i p o f t h e s e a t , i d o l , w e a p o n , t h e six of t h e sacrifice Laksm viz ;Cakra, and Gad, Sword, or a n d Visvaksena detail

a n d t h e Srga, a r r o w , n o o s e , g o a d

(Visnu) accompanied by

Garuda, in

otherwise, the d e v o t e e shall o b t a i n everything.

CHAPTER THIRTY
Worship Sta said 1. dhara 2. : I shall now describe the a u s p i c i o u s The S c h o l a r s s h a l l n o t e it. to the tuft. Om SrairiiHurh to the Kavaca three eyes. known Om as Srah rworship of rof Sridhara

Parivra ( a t t e n d a n t s , f o l l o w e r s ) i s t h e s a m e ( a s i n

Gopla Pj).

Om Srrii o b e i s a n c e to t h e h e a r t . Om Srim Svh to t h e Sraurh Vausat to t h e upon

h e a d . Om Srurh Vasaf ( c o a t of m a i l ) . Om Phat to the Astra 3. Having

(weapon). meditated t h e tman (mystiin the of Om Om

d h a r a , b e a r i n g c o n c h , d i s c u s , a n d t h e c l u b , t h e Mudrs c a l s i g n s ) o f c o n c h , d i s c u s , a n d the c l u b s h a l l b e s h o w n . 4. T h e n the devotee shall worship With the deity Svastika1 mandala rgin 5. 6. (mystical diagram). these

mantras, O the s e a t come. Vidhtr.

a k a r a , the g r e a t g o d ,

the devotee shall worship

( V i s n u ) t h e g o d o f G o d s . P l e a s e h e a r t h o s e mantras. Om O ye d e i t i e s of t h e s e a t of S r d h a r a , Om o b e i s a n c e to Dhtr. Om o b e i s a n c e to Gag. Om o b e i s a n c e Krma ( t h e Om

o b e i s a n c e t o t h e s e a t o f Acyuta a t t e n d e d b y a l l f o l l o w e r s . o b e i s a n c e to to Yamuna. Om o b e i s a n c e to tortoise). obeisance Om o b e i ( Earth). to Jna

dhra-Sakti. Om o b e i s a n c e to Om obeisance to Dharma

s a n c e to Ananta ( t h e e n d l e s s ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to Prthivi (virtue). (knowledge).

1. t h e m with

Om o b e i s a n c e to Vairgya
on

( n o n - a t t a c h m e n t ) . Om
or things, to bless

It is in fact a mystical m a r k put g o o d luck.

persons

102 o b e i s a n c e to Aivarya (evil). special attachment (prosperity). Ajna world. to Om

Garuda obeisance obeisance to to

Purna Adharma

Om o b e i s a n c e to

( i g n o r a n c e ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to AnaUvarya to Vimal

( i m p o v e r i s h e d s t a t e ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to Skanda. Om o b e i s a n c e to Nila. Om o b e i s a n c e to Padma ( l o t u s ) . Om Om o b e i s a n c e Kriy the m i n d ) . humble). 7. Om to Jna ( t h e p o w e r to obeisance ( t h e u n t a r n i s h e d ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to Utkarfini ( t h e a c t i o n ) . Om o b e i s a n c e (the p r o s p e r o u s ) .

k n o w ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to

t o Toga ( t h e p o w e r o f f i x i n g

o b e i s a n c e to Putri. Om o b e i s a n c e to Prthvi ( t h e o b e i s a n c e to Saty ( t h e t r u t h f u l ) . Om o b e i s a n c e worshipped all, O Rudra, H a r i shall be

to n ( t h e l o r d l y ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to Anugrah ( t h e b l e s s e d ) . Having i n v o k e d . T h e w i s e d e v o t e e then 8. 9. shall invoke a n d worship H a r i of t h e to the to

w i t h t h e s e mantras d e s t r o y i n g all s i n s . Om Hrim o b e i s a n c e to S r d h a r a , t h e e n c h a n t e r (Himself). to Sri. Om to the Srm Om Kavaca obeisance (coat of rm o b e i s a n c e Om obeisance three worlds, V i s n u

h e a r t . Om rim o b e i s a n c e to t h e h e a d . t h e tuft. Om raim o b e i s a n c e Om raum o b e i s a n c e to the

mail).

t h r e e e y e s . Om Srah o b e i s a n c e to Om o b e i s a n c e to the t h e Kaustubha.

t h e Astra ( w e a p o n ) . Om o b e i s a n c e to t h e c o u c h . club. Om Om Om Om o b e i s a n c e obeisance obeisance to to to Indra. to Srivatsa. Om o b e i s a n c e to (the g a r l a n d

t o t h e l o t u s . O m o b e i s a n c e t o the d i s c u s . O m o b e i s a n c e obeisance to t h e Vanaml the Nrada. Om

of wild flowers).

y e l l o w - r o b e d . Om o b e i s a n c e to Brahman. o b e i s a n c e to the p r e c e p t o r . Om to t h e F i r e - g o d . Om o b e i Om obeisance to Soma to

obeisance Om

Om o b e i s a n c e (wind g o d ) . to

s a n c e to Tama. Om o b e i s a n c e to Nirrti. Om o b e i s a n c e to Varuna. obeisance Om to Vyu (Moon). Rajas. obeisance Ina. Om o b e i s a n c e to Ananta. Om Om o b e i s a n c e Om o b e i s a n c e to Visvaksena. offered t h e

o b e i s a n c e to Brahman. Om o b e i s a n c e to Sattva. Om o b e i s a n c e to Tamas. 10-11. Abhiseka W i t h the

f o l l o w i n g mantras s h a l l b e

( b a t h i n g of the i d o l ) , g a r m e n t s , s a c r e d t h r e a d , s a n d a l food oblation, a n d circular perelet h i m r e c i t e the mantra

paste, flower, incense, l a m p ,

g i n a t i o n . After c o m p l e t i n g t h e s a m e , 12-13.

o n e h u n d r e d a n d e i g h t t i m e s . T h e n d e d i c a t e this t o t h e d e i t y . T h e n for a muhrta ( 2 4 m i n u t e s ) h e s h o u l d m e d i t a t e pure i n his h e a r t t h e d e i t y s e a t e d i n the h e a r t , a s b r i g h t a s the

1.30.20 c r y s t a l , b r i l l i a n t like a c r o r e o f S u n s , p l e a s a n t beautiful 14. of limbs, bedecked by a garland thus in face,

103 gentle,

w e a r i n g t h e t w o e a r r i n g s s h a p e d like t h e Makara1 a n d c o r o n e t s , of wild flowers, worship and i d e n t i c a l w i t h the S u p r e m e S o u l . The scholarly devotee shall him contemplate 15. obeisance 16. upon ridhara. Let e u l o g i s e the g r e a t lord to rpati*

w i t h this p r a y e r h y m n . Obeisance to L o r d Srnivsa2, obeisance to rdhara with the rga ( t h e b o w ) , o b e i s a n c e obeisance to the

to the d o n o r of prosperity. Obeisance to n v a l l a b h a 4 (Lover of r ) , splendour. t o t h e c a l m d e i t y e n d o w e d with giver of renown. 17. the refuge 18. sance to unto him. mystically 19. O b e i s a n c e t o t h e l o r d o f all (of all) ; Obeisance Varenya After benefits; obeisance to o b e i s a n c e to the r e n o w n - f e a t u r e d ; to aranya the (worthy let of R e f u g e ) . him prostrate of obeiObeiand Visnu, Obeisance

deity whose a b o d e is in r p a r v a t a 5 mountain. Obeisance to the

sance to rkara6. (the foremost) ; obeisance again and again

reciting

hymn

discharge the deity

(Visarjana).

R u d r a , I h a v e thus e x p l a i n e d the w o r s h i p

the great soul. 20. region.

H e w h o d o e s this w i t h g r e a t d e v o t i o n a t t a i n s t h e light on the

supreme region. H e w h o r e a d s this c h a p t e r w h i c h s h e d s w o r s h i p o f V i s n u s h a k e s off all s i n s a n d a t t a i n s V i s n u ' s s u p r e m e

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. At

A A A

c r o c o d i l e or a s h a r k . n a m e of V i s n u . name of V i s n u . the s o u t h of the including also p. 806). It is river the as Krsn. famous raila

A n a m e of V i s n u . A hill s i t u a t e d in K a r n u l d i s t r i c t to are numerous the (AITM) nine p. Jyotirlgas. 2117; Sioa-ligas h e r e , Liga

present there p. 6. A

M a l l i k r j u n a , one of (CSL, 5 0 0 ; ^

known

(AITM)

n a m e of V i s n u .

104

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER THIRTYONE
Worship of Visnu Rudra Said: 1. the O ! L o r d of of the the deity Universe ! whereby Please explain further

worship

I s h a l l c r o s s the o c e a n o f

w o r l d l y e x i s t e n c e w h i c h i s v e r y difficult t o c r o s s . Hari said: 2. adoration 3-4. (prayers) O Vrsabhadhvaja ( i v a ) ! I s h a l l e x p l a i n to y o u the o f L o r d V i s n u . O F o r t u n a t e i v a ! H e a r i t which i s T h e devotee shall and take bath, perform Sandhy he shall

auspicious a n d which yields worldly pleasure a n d salvation. e n t e r t h e r o o m for s a c r i f i c e . After w a s h i n g t h e particularly to his h a n d . r o o t mantra) O Rudra ! (Hima l l sins the

h a n d s a n d feet a n d p e r f o r m i n g camana a s s i g n the Mlamantra ( t h e 5-6. self). This I s h a l l tell y o u the Alula Mantra.

Orh rir Hrim o b e i s a n c e to r d h a r a , V i s n u mantra is of V i s n u all defects in planets, then

expressing h i m as the lord of

deities, d i s p e l l i n g all sickness, 7. O skilful iva,

a n d giving enjoyment and salvation. the d e v o t e e shall Om perform Aganysa w i t h t h e s e mantras. Hum to 8. you. T h e 9. the Kavaca, Hm o b e i s a n c e to t h e to the eyes; the heart; Hah to

Om Him Svh to t h e h e a d ; Om Hum Vasat to t h e tuft; Om Haum Vausat Phat to t h e Astra. P o w e r f u l t h a t I am I h a v e devotee T h e n the residing having devotee in explained his soul on

Om Haim Om mantra

conquered shall

shall show the the supreme

Mudr of t h e tman after p e r f o r m i n g t h e Nysa. meditate lord Visnu 10. shall the hollow of the h e a r t , h o l d i n g c o n c h rite the devotee and wearing

a n d discus a n d white meditate T

a s t h e Kunda1 f l o w e r a n d t h e m o o n . am Visnu'Visnu with rvatsa

After p e r f o r m i n g t h e p u r i f i c a t o r y

K a u s t u b h a , bedecked with garlands of wild

flowers,

c o r o n e t a n d d i a m o n d n e c k l a c e a n d the g r e a t L o r d .

1.

Jasminum

multiflorum

(GVDB,

p.

105).

1.31.19 11. the names 12-14. mentioned W i t h t h e Bijas ( m y s t i c s e e d s ) he shall (in imagination) Tarn Ksarh Ram egg

105 and and

prepare an

h a r d e n i t a n d t h e n p i e r c e i t w i t h Pranava itself. T h e n , O V r s a b h a d h v a j a , thinking of the form as before, t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l p e r f o r m t h e tmapj w i t h deities of the seat shall

a u s p i c i o u s f r a g r a n t flowers. All the

b e i n v o k e d w i t h t h e s e mantras, O a k a r a ! H e a r t h o s e m a n t r a s . O ye deities of the seat of V i s n u ! G o m e . 15. obeisance Gag; akha; Canda; Om o b e i s a n c e to Dhtr; Orh to Acyuta with all a t t e n d e n t s ; Om to t h e treasure to to to o b e i s a n c e to Vidhtr; Om o b e i s a n c e to Om o b e i s a n c e Om obeisance

Om o b e i s a n c e to Yamuna. Om o b e i s a n c e

Om o b e i s a n c e to the t r e a s u r e Padma; obeisance Om to the dhra to akti;

to Pracan4a; Om o b e i s a n c e to t h e s p l e n d o u r Om o b e i s a n c e Om to obeisance Aivarya Om obei(pros-

of g a t e ; Om

Krma; Om o b e i s a n c e to Ananta; Om o b e i s a n c e to ri; sance to Dharma; Vairgya obeisance Om to Jna; obeisance Avairgya (non-attachment); Om obeisance

perity) ;Om o b e i s a n c e to Adharma (ignorance) ; o b e i s a n c e to Anaivarya

(evil);

Om o b e i s a n c e to Ajna ( a t t a c h m e n t ) ; Om Tarn Nam Am obeisance obeisance to to

( i m p o v e r i s h e d s t a t e ) ; Om Sam o b e i s a n c e to Rajas; Om Skanda; to Orh the to to to Padma; Orh to

to Sattva; Orh Ram o b e i s a n c e Tamas; Orh Kam o b e i s a n c e Nila; solar Orh Lam obeisance fiery Orh Orh zone; Orh Sam to t h e

o b e i s a n c e to t h e Orh Vam knowto Rog to Vimal; Orh

obeisance zone;

lunar z o n e ; the Prahvi P o w e r of obeisance (the Orh

obeisance ledge; (deity Orh to

Orh o b e i s a n c e

o b e i s a n c e to Vikarfini. of d i s e a s e s ) ; to

obeisance obeisance one). mantras

Om o b e i s a n c e to Kriy

( A c t i o n ) ; Orh

humble); obeisance the

obeisance Anugrah 16-17.

Sati; Orh o b e i s a n c e to In; these and fragrant

(the b l e s s e d With

flowers, shall

d e v o t e e s h a l l w o r s h i p these d e i t i e s .

After t h a t h e

invoke

i n t o t h e Mandala a n d w o r s h i p V i s n u t h e g r e a t l o r d , t h e c r e a t o r a n d d e s t r o y e r , H a r i the r e m o v e r o f a l l s i n s . 18. J u s t a s i n t h e tman, s o in the lord t o o , t h e Nysa s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d from t h e 19-20. beginning a n d afterwards show of b a t h i n g , offer-

Mudr a n d t h e n Arghya e t c . s h a l l be g i v e n . T h e n in order shall be performed fragrant flowers, i n g o f g a r m e n t , camana, i n c e n s e , light, f o o d

106 offering a n d c i r c u l a r the worship 21. of the peregrination. Agas (parts)

Garuda

Purna

T h e Japas s h a l l b e r e c i t e d respective mantras s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d b y the the root-mantra

a n d d e d i c a t e d to the deity. Sdhaka (devotee).

W i t h their o w n

O V r s a d h v a j a k n o w this t o b e w i t h listen, O

alone. Please recited by m e . 22. to the

T h r e e - e y e d i v a , to t h e mantras b e i n g Orh Him obeisance Orh Cakra; obeiOrh Om obeito

Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to the h e a r t . Om Hum obeisance

head.

to t h e tuft.

Om Haim o b e i Orh obeisance Om

s a n c e to t h e Kavaca;

Orh Haum o b e i s a n c e to t h e t h r e e e y e s : Orh o b e i s a n c e to to rivatsa. Vanaml (the

Hah o b e i s a n c e to t h e Astra; Om o b e i s a n c e to ri; to t h e akha; Orh o b e i s a n c e to Padma, Orh o b e i s a n c e to s a n c e to Kaustubha; o b e i s a n c e to Khadga Gad; Orh to obeisance to Om o b e i s a n c e

( g a r l a n d of wild (Pestle) ; goad. Orh

flowers); Orh o b e i s a n c e

Pitmbara

yellow-robed); to the

( s w o r d ) . Orh o b e i s a n c e to Musala obeisance to Om o b e i s a n c e to

Orh o b e i s a n c e to t h e n o o s e ; Om o b e i s a n c e to rga ( t h e b o w ) sance all to all Siddhas (yogins).

Sara ( a r r o w ) ;

Om o b e i s a n c e to Brahman; Om o b e i s a n c e

Nrada; Orh

Om o b e i s a n c e to a l l Bhgavatas obeisance Om

( d e v o t e e s ) ; O m o b e i s a n c e t o all p r e c e p t o r s : great preceptors; (Fire-god) seated Orh of and s e a t e d i n his v e h i c l e a n d a t t e n d e d b y to Agni the lord in

Orh o b e i s a n c e t o I n d r a , t h e l o r d o f g o d s followers; obeisance lord by of his o f lustres seated vehicle to by and in his vehicle a n d the attended of d e m o n s

a t t e n d e d b y his f o l l o w e r s ; O m o b e i s a n c e t o Y a m a , dead, his followers. i n his Varuna vehicle lord lord and obeisance waters Nirrti l o r d

seated his his by

vehicle

attended

f o l l o w e r s ; Orh

obeisance to in

s e a t e d i n his v e h i c l e ,

a t t e n d e d by

f o l l o w e r s ; Om o b e i s a n c e to Vyu l o r d of v i t a l a i r s s e a t e d a t t e n d e d by stars, seated of the in his vehicle and

his f o l l o w e r s ; Orh o b e i s a n c e to Soma1 attended

f o l l o w e r s ; Om vehicle a n d

o b e i s a n c e to no? l o r d of l e a r n i n g s e a t e d in h i s

a t t e n d e d by his f o l l o w e r s ; Om o b e i s a n c e to Ananta?

t h e l o r d o f s e r p e n t s s e a t e d i n his v e h i c l e a t t e n d e d b y his f o l l o w e r s ;
1. 2. CDHM The moon. R u d r a , or a s efanga. of one of his manifestations. (Vide

A n a m e of iva or p. 128). Popularly known

3.

1.31.32 Om o b e i s a n c e to vehicle, Vajra; to Danda Brahman the lord of w o r l d s Hum seated in

107 his

a t t e n d e d by his f o l l o w e r s ; Orh

Phat o b e i s a n c e to

Om Hum Phat o b e i s a n c e to akti; Orh Hum

Om Hum Phat o b e i s a n c e Phat o b e i s a n c e Om Hum Phat Cakra; to the obeiOm with

( b a t o n ) ; Om Hum Phat o b e i s a n c e to s w o r d ; Om Hum

Phat o b e i s a n c e to t h e n o o s e ;

b a n n e r ; Orh Hum Phat o b e i s a n c e to Gad; Hum Phat o b e i s a n c e to Padma; Om 23. of

s a n c e to t h e t r i d e n t ; Orh Hum Phaf o b e i s a n c e to t h e O M a h d e v a ! Aga e t c . shall be

Vaum o b e i s a n c e to Visvaksena. worshipped

t h e s e mantras. After w o r s h i p p i n g Visnu t h e g r e a t s o u l of t h e f o r m Brahman. 24. hymn. 25. deluge). 26. lord O b e i s a n c e to the lord of g o d s ; obeisance to the lord of sacrifices. O b e i s a n c e to the lord of Yaksas. 27. O b e i s a n c e t o t h e c o n q u e r o r o f all gods; obeisance all, Obeisance to the lord of of sages. O b e i s a n c e to the Prabha-Visnu T h e s u p r e m e S o u l shall be Obeisance (the to Visnu the god powerful). to the Pralayayin ( l y i n g in t h e w a t e r s of sung in praise by this to of gods; obeisance

O b e i s a n c e t o Vsudeva t h e s u s t a i n e r ; o b e i s a n c e t o the

grasping; o b e i s a n c e

to the omnipresent of great soul. 28.

honoured by Brahma, Indra and Rudra. O b e i s a n c e to the beneficiary of all w o r l d s ; o b e i s a n c e to the p r e s i d i n g deity of the U n i v e r s e ; O b e i s a n c e to the p r o t e ctor of a l l ; d o e r of all, destroyer of all. 29. Obeisance to the giver of boons; the quiet; the foremost. O b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e , to the refuge, to the self-formed a n d the giver of Virtue, love a n d wealth. 30. After singing the h y m n , the devotee shall m e d i t a t e i n h i s h e a r t o n t h e i m p e r i s h a b l e i n t h e f o r m o f B r a h m a n , let h i m w o r s h i p V i s n u w i t h the r o o t m a n t r a , O a k a r a . 31. Hari. Visnu. 32. ment and T h i s is to be kept as a great salvation. T h e scholar who who hears secret. reads or It gives to enjoyothers this b e c o m e s a O r , L e t h i m r e c i t e the M l a m a n t r a . H e s h a l l a t t a i n the excellent worship of O R u d r a , thus I h a v e n a r r a t e d

great devotee of Visnu. He attains the world of V i s n u .

recites

108

Garuda

Purna

C H A P T E R THIRTYTWO
Worship Mahevara 1. pound said: O ! L o r d ! b e a r i n g akha, cakra, a n d gad ! P l e a s e exthe Paca-Tattvrcana by knowing (the worship entirely a of five principles) man attains the which of Paca-Tattvas
1

of worship

supreme region. Hari said: 2. worship 3-4. Kali age. O a k a r a of s p l e n d i d v o w s ! o f Paca-Tattvas t h a t i s It is holy and auspicious, of I shall expound the

divine, esoteric a n d the bad effects and of unen-

y i e l d s all w i s h e s . destructive is Listen. Vsudeva the only eternal s u p r e m e soul,

imperishable, tranquil, permanent, pure, omnipresent 5-6. tirely. The To bless the Universe a n d destroy five-fold forms the

s u l l i e d . H a r i h i m s e l f b y m e a n s o f his My s t a n d s f i v e - f o l d . wicked are: Vsudeva2, Sakarsana,3 stands

Pradyumna4, Aniruddha,5 and N r y a n a 6 . Visnu alone in a l l these f o r m s . 7. Om Am sana;

O V r s a d h v a j a ! L i s t e n to t h e mantras e x p r e s s i n g t h e s e . obeisance to V s u d e v a ; to Orh Am o b e i s a n c e to S a k a r Om obeisance expressing to the They obeisance Pradyumna; the

Om Am 8.

A n i r u d d h a , Orh o b e i s a n c e t o N r y a n a . Thus I have expounded mantras f i v e d e i t i e s . T h e y r e m o v e all sins, d e s t r o y a l l s i c k n e s s e s . are holy.

1. namely, and (v) basis 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. the H e r e paca-tattvas o b v i o u s l y m e a n (i) V s u d e v a , (ii) S a k a r s a n a , T h e worship of Pcartra s e c t Vaisnavism. Nryana. of t h e Krsna, Son the (iii) five-fold forms of Visnu, is the

Pradyumna, (iv)

Aniruddha

of the five-fold forms

of Visnu

a s o n of V a s u d e v a . Rukmin, father of A n i r u d d h a . Literally it m e a n s the son of Nara,

B a l a r m a , another son of Vasudeva. of K r s n a by Son of Pradyumna. Grandson of Krsna. A c o m m o n n a m e for V i s n u .

primordial m a n .

1.32.18 9. tattvas, N o w I shall e x p l a i n the a u s p i c i o u s worship of by w h a t all m e a n s it shall be performed a n d with akara. The devotee shall first take the and his bath 10-11. then perform then

109 Pacawhat and

all m a n t r a s , O

Sandhy. T h e n

going to feet

c h a m b e r o f worperform Acamana.

s h i p let h i m w a s h his h a n d s a n d He shall let him 12. 13-14. perform the

sit in a comfortable position as he wishes; then r i t e o f osana e t c . ( w i p i n g d r y ) w i t h t h e let h i m p r e p a r e a n e g g

m a n t r a s Am Ksraurh Ram. B y u n h a r d e n i n g t h e Smans a n d b r e a k i n g it m e d i t a t e on the s u p r e m e g o d in the egg. In the heart lotus of oneself h e s h a l l first m e d i t a t e thousand suns, and with glittering o n V s u d e v a t h e l o r d o f t h e u n i v e r s e , w e a r i n g t h e s i l k e n yellow r o b e s , r e s p l e n d e n t like a earring 15. shaped like M a k a r a fish. Afterwards S a k a r s a n a the Pradyumna, Aniruddha and rimn1

lord o f self shall b e m e d i t a t e d u p o n . Thereafter ( p r o s p e r o u s ) N r y a n a shall be m e d i t a t e d u p o n . T h e n he should think o f the g o d s I n d r a and lords. 16. The Agamantras. 17. M a h d e v a o f g o o d v o w s ! listen t o t h o s e mantras. O m heart. Om Im obeisance to t h e h e a d . Om Orh Om to Orh o b e i s a n c e to t h e Kavaca. Om Ah p h a t to t h e Astra. to Vidhtr; Om o b e i s a n c e obeisance Orh to Dharma; to Am o b e i s a n c e to t h e Then Nysa s h a l l Aganysa be performed shall be with on both the hands. t h e r o o t mantra a n d pervading others springing from that L o r d of

m o b e i s a n c e to t h e tuft. Orh Aim Aum o b e i s a n c e to t h e t h r e e e y e s . 18. Orh obeisance obeisance to the Jna o b e i s a n c e to Dhtr; Om dhra akti; Orh Orh o b e i s a n c e obeisance to obeisance earth; Orh

to Acyuta? w i t h all h i s f o l l o w e r s ; to Krma3; Om o b e i s a n c e obeisance

to Adanta; Vairgya

(knowledge) ;

( n o n - a t t a c h m e n t ) ; Orh o b e i s a n c e to Aivarya

( p r o s p e r i t y ) ; Om Orh o b e i s a n c e

o b e i s a n c e to Adharma ( e v i l ) ; Om o b e i s a n c e to Ajna ( I g n o r a n c e ) ; Om o b e i s a n c e to Anaivarya ( i m p o v e r i s h e d S t a t e ) ;

1. 2. 3. Literally Visnu or The it means'with Krsna. Laksm'.

tortoise incarnation of Visnu.

110 to the solar z o n e ; Om o b e i s a n c e to a u s p i c i o u s , the to Lunar

Garuda zone;

Purna Om Mam

o b e i s a n c e t o the f i e r y 1 z o n e ; O m Vam o b e i s a n c e t o V s u d e v a t h e s u p r e m e Brahman, t h e vading and Pcajanya. Om the Om to lustre-featured, the perOm obeisance to Om obeisance to imperial lord of all deities. Sudarana. rite); Orh

obeisance

Gad. Om o b e i s a n c e to Padma. Om o b e i s a n c e to ri ( p r o s p e r i t y ) ; obeisance Kriy ( a c t i o n , o b e i s a n c e to Pusfi (Nourishment); obeisance Om o b e i s a n c e to Giti; Orh o b e i s a n c e to akti;

Om o b e i s a n c e to Priti ( s a t i s f a c t i o n ) ; Om o b e i s a n c e to Indra, Om t o Agni ( F i r e - g o d ) . obeisance Om o b e i s a n c e t o Tama ( G o d o f obeisance to Varuna; Om D e a t h ) ; Om to Nirrti; Orh

o b e i s a n c e t o Vyu ( W i n d - g o d ) ; Orh o b e i s a n c e t o Soma ( M o o n ) ; Orh o b e i s a n c e to na; Om to Brahman; Padma. 19. O Rudra, worship I has have to be succinctly performed all great expounded in such the zones be be Mantras. T h e 20. shown. 21. invoking 22. Orh o b e i s a n c e to to Ananta; Om o b e i s a n c e Orh obeisance to obeisance Visvaksena;

( m y s t i c d i a g r a m s ) a s Svastika e t c . After The performing and Aganysa the Mudrs lord shall shall tman Vsudeva

meditated upon. T h e devotee shall then worship t h e s e a t after d u l y it. O Vrsadhvaja, t h e w o r s h i p of Dhtr a n d Vidhtr s h a l l O akara, and east in front o f Vasudeva (all the devotee shall paraphernalia) q u a r t e r s ) Dharma, and in t h e

be performed at the doorway. worship G a r u d a 23. From in the m i d d l e his

f r o m akha to Padma shall be w o r s h i p p e d . o n w a r d s (in the shall be four Jna, Vairgya a n d Aivarya worshipped

four c o r n e r q u a r t e r s b e g i n n i n g w i t h s o u t h - e a s t Adharma a n d t h e three others shall be worshipped. 24. T h e s e a t i s f i x e d i n t h e m i d d l e o f t h e t w o Mandalas. be worshipped Vsudeva the i n the e a s t e r n a n d great L o r d shall be Sakarsana a n d o t h e r s a r e t o other petals. 25. I n the pericarp w o r s h i p p e d . Pcajanya a n d o t h e r s a r e t o b e w o r s h i p p e d a s f i x e d in the n o r t h - e a s t , etc.
1. T h e solar zone.

1.32.37
2 6 . O a k a r a ! t h e aktis o f t h e worshipped 27. t h e Brahma The 28. in the east. Indra and god of g o d s other a r e to

111 be of

guardians

q u a r t e r s a r e to be w o r s h i p p e d fixed in their respective stations. T h e Nga (Serpent) shall be worshipped below a n d O akara 1 h i g h a b o v e by the After invoking and the scholarly devotee. Lord

order of fixation shall be understood thus by you. i n the M i n d a l a a n d permudr, O a k a r a , Pdya Namaskra s h o w i n g the

f o r m i n g h i s Nysa 29. Bathing

( w a t e r for w a s h i n g feet)

s h a l l b e g i v e n a t t h e foot. offering, camana,

garment

( b o w i n g d o w n ) , circular p e r e g r i n a t i o n a l l these shall b e offered a t t h e foot. 30. be recited : Sakarsana. 31. 32. Obeisance unto Pradyumna the first deity; primordial obeiBeing, s a n c e to A n i r u d d h a ; obeisance to N r y a n a the lord of m e n . Obeisance, obeisance, unto the worthy of respect of m e n , of b e i n g glorified, of being h o n o u r e d ; the giver of b o o n s a n d devoid of b e g i n n i n g a n d d e a t h . 33. lord of 34. sin and who 35. O b e i s a n c e u n t o H i m the c r e a t o r a n d Brahma; obeisance unto Him who destroyer, the can be known the T h e n t h e Japa s h a l l b e d e d i c a t e d . Afterwards Om remembering unto V s u d e v a let this hymn unto obeisance Vsudeva, obeisance

t h r o u g h V e d a s a n d w h o h o l d s akha a n d Cakra. O b e i s a n c e unto the L o r d of gods who cuts pierces My who destroys o f Kali-age, d o w n the tree of w o r l d l y e x i s t e n c e

(the i g n o r a n c e , I l l u s i o n ) . O b e i s a n c e , diverse forms, the holy of

obeisance. Obeisance unto H i m of salvation and h o l i e s , h a v i n g t h e t h r e e Gunas, o b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e . to H i m who awards 36. who is 37. the ocean who manifests is the Brahma, Visnu and Isvara1. Obeisance, obeisance. O b e i s a n c e unto him who path to salvation, v i r t u e , w h o i s the e x t i n c t i o n (of b o n d a g e ) , who gives Obeisance Himself as

a l l d e s i r e s , w h o h a s t h e f o r m o f Parabrahman3. O L o r d o f the U n i v e r s e , s a v e m e d e e p l y i m m e r s e d i n of worldly e x i s t e n c e o f terrific n a t u r e . O t h e r ' t h a n

y o u there is no better saviour.

1. 2. iva. The Supreme Being, God.

112 38. 39. I have sought

Garuda

Purna

refuge under you the omnipresent:

r e l e a s e m e f r o m d a r k n e s s b y g i v i n g m e the l a m p o f k n o w l e d g e . O N i l a l o h i t a ( i v a ) ! for t h e d e s t r u c t i o n o f a l l p a i n , by m e a n s o f this h y m n his the heart and on the lord of g o d s shall be p r a i s e d s i m i l a r h y m n s from the V e d a s . 40. shall be 41. The devotee shall the m e d i t a t e within Then hymn V i s n u a c c o m p a n i e d by F i v e Tattvas. Visarjana

performed. T h u s I h a v e e x - p o u n d e d the worship. B y r e c i t i n g this, O a k a r a , the shall a w a r d of having H e s h a l l b e h a v i n g the s a t i s f a c t i o n who reads this worship repeats entitled this

him all desires. d o n e his duty. 42. the region He

Pacatattvrshall attain

cana, h e w h o h e a r s this a n d h e w h o of Visnu.

CHAPTER THIRTY THREE Worship Rudra said 1. O : Lord holding Sakha, Cakra and Gad, please Sudarana, b y p e r f o r m i n g w h i c h of Sudarana

e x p o u n d to me the worship of Hari said : 2. Sudarana. 3. O Vrsadhvaja, The devotee

t h e evil effects o f p l a n e t s , a n d illness a r e d e s t r o y e d . listen shall to first the take worship his of Cakra

b a t h a n d then

worship H a r i . T h e Nysa i s d o n e b y m e a n s o f t h e Mla mantra. L i s t e n (having thousand spokes) Hum Phat to it. It is Orh Sahasrrarh 4. The

o b e i s a n c e ( w i t h t h e Pranava i n t h e b e g i n n i n g ) . T h i s p i e r c i n g Mantra i s s a i d t o b e t h e d e s t r o y e r o f a l l devotee shall m e d i t a t e in the lotus of his h e a r t wicked persons. S u d a r a n a the^ninigs.

1.33.16
5-6. by means Then after invoking the gentle deity

113 wearing

akha, Cakra, Gad axvAPadma a n d c o r o n e t in t h e m y s t i c d i a g r a m already mentioned, O H a r a , let h i m w o r s h i p H i m After worship worship shall of the the with the offerings of f r a g r a n t flowers, etc. 7. He who performs the excellent and

mantra i s t o b e r e c i t e d o n e h u n d r e d a n d e i g h t t i m e s . Cakra t h u s , s h a l l b e free f r o m a l l s i c k n e s s world of Visnu. 8. tructive 9. spokes Thereafter of all let him recite the unto following h y m n desSudarana lustrous diseases. Obeisance attain the

like a t h o u s a n d s u n s . L i g h t e d by a series of flames a n d h a v i n g and 10. mantras. 11. eyes (obeisance unto a thousand H i m ) who destroys all t h e Vicakra a n d piercer of all

w i c k e d , a n d s u p p r e s s e s a l l sins. O b e i s a n c e u n t o Sucakra, Obeisance unto the o r i g i n a t o r o f t h e w o r l d , the s u s of all wicked d e m o n s gentle

tainer of the world a n d the destroyer of the world. O b e i s a n c e u n t o the destroyer for t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e w o r l d . Obeisance, obeisance unto H i m who is fierce and a n d terrific i n f o r m . 12. O b e i s a n c e unto H i m who is in who unto dispels the Him who Him fear breaks of the form of the eye existence. the c a g e o f o f the w o r l d a n d Obeisance 13 and planets. Obeisance, obeisance unto H i m who is a n d D e a t h a n d t h e terrific. 14. O b e i s a n c e to the protector of and blesser of devotees. Obeisance is tranquil, unto hymn, Obeisance, unto H i m obeisance to the all w e a p o n s . 15. Again again obeisance This the weapon read of V i s n u ; unto the great devotion. 16. He who does so attains the world of Visnu. Cakra o b e i s a n c e . highly meriwith of devotees. Time (Supreme) worldly asunder

My, o b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e u n t o Obeisance unto all surpasses

the benefactor. who is in the form of a planet

the other planets. O b e i s a n c e to the lord of

w h o i s i n the f o r m

Visnu, who

a n d who b e a r s

t o r i o u s o f t h e Cakra t h a t I e x p l a i n e d t o y o u s h a l l b e

114

Garuda

Purna

17. O R u d r a ! he w h o r e a d s the s c h e m e of the w o r s h i p of the Cakra, with all the sense-organs u n d e r his control shall to ascend to the b u r n a l l sins t o a s h e s a n d b e c o m e c o m p e t e n t world of Visnu.

CHAPTER THIRTYFOUR
Worship Rudra said 1. detail : O H r s k e a 2 ( V i s n u ) b e a r i n g the club ! The I the worship the more delight Please exmore you speak in i n h e a r i n g it. of Hayagriva1

p o u n d a g a i n the worship o f the lord. about I am never satiated. Hari said 2. 3. 4. 5. :

I shall n a r r a t e the worship of L o r d H a y a g r v a whereO Orh O Mahdeva, haum I shall explain the holy Sirase Namo haum. listen Mla mantra

by the lord of the universe V i s n u , is p r o p i t i a t e d . L i s t e n to it. e x p r e s s i n g Hayagriva. O a k a r a listen to t h a t first. Ksraurh T h i s m a n t r a of to its l i m b s . Orh learning. Vrsadhvaja, Om Hrim Svh to the h e a d (Sirah lord's tuft is to be k n o w n as is des-

n i n e syllables gives all

Mahdeva,

Ksrm o b e i s a n c e to t h e h e a r t . 6. O Vrsadhvaja, the

is s a i d to be a t t a c h e d w i t h Svh). Ksrm Vasat is a l s o likewise. a c c o m p a n i e d by Okra. Orh Ksraim to t h e Kavaca. Hum c r i b e d as Kavaca. 7. as Orh Ksaum Vausat to t h e t h r e e eyes. T h i s is d e s c r i b e d the lord's eye. 8. I shall Om Hah Phat to t h e Astra. T h i s is d e s c r i b e d explain the p r o c e d u r e of worship. Please

as the lord's w e a p o n . listen to me as I n a r r a t e . F i r s t t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l t a k e his b a t h .

1. 2.

Visnu

(CDHM, p .

120). conqueror of the five sense-organs.

Literally,

the lord or

1.34.20 T h e n after p e r f o r m i n g Sacrifice. 9-10. of o s a n a After e n t e r i n g let h i m p e r f o r m (wiping dry). After Ksaum Ram the mystical egg with camana he

115 shall go to the c h a m b e r of rite the

c r e a t i n g the

Bija mantrasTarn

Lamand h a r d e n i n g it,

let h i m

s p l i t it w i t h Okra itself. L e t h i m m e d i t a t e on Hayagriva w i t h i n his s e l f i n the m i d d l e o f t h e e g g . 11-13. (Hayagriva w h o is) a s white four wears as conch, m o o n a n d bearing ; he is hands ; Hayagrva after t h e f l o w e r Kunda, s h i n i n g l i k e the l o t u s s t a l k a n d silver, akha, Cakra, Gad a n d Padma in his c r i m s o n - c o l o u r e d i n his c h e e k s a n d m e d i t a t i n g o n the a l l - p e r v a s i v e deities the 14. let him perform Mla mantra. T h e n O a k a r a , let h i m s h o w the Mudrs of Sakha, let him O meditate Rudra, upon and worship of the seats Mla mantra. invoke those deities who "Om O ye d e i t i e s of t h e s e a t Hayagriva, t h e m in the Svastika "wearing a c r o w n , e a r r i n g s a n d g a r l a n d of wild flowers

yellow robes;

n o b l e soul a c c o m p a n i e d by all

t h e Nysa w i t h t h e Aga mantras a n d

Padma, e t c . T h e r e a f t e r V i s n u by m e a n s 15. preside come." 16. mandala. 17. Let over the him

then,

After i n v o k i n g let h i m w o r s h i p

O V r s a d h v a j a , t h e w o r s h i p of Dhtr a n d "Obeisance to Acyuta w i t h

Vidhtr s h a l l

be performed in the doorway. the entire a t t e n d a n t s , " Then and s a y i n g so in the m i d d l e the worship shall be p e r f o r m e d . t h e w o r s h i p of Gag. 18. akti is worship earth. 20. Yamuna, Mahdevi and 'the two Nidhis akha Padma a n d G a r u d a a r e t o b e w o r s h i p p e d i n front. I n the m i d d l e to be w o r s h i p p e d . The akti is c a l l e d dhra let him akti. worship Then Ananta let him Krma. A f t e r w a r d s Let him a n d the 19.

T h e n Dharma a n d Jna. w o r s h i p Vairgya a n d Aivarya i n the c o r n e r s Avairgya and Anaivarya are to be

south-east, etc. Adharma, Ajna, w o r s h i p p e d in the east.

116 21. middle. 22. shall be 23. 24. petals narrated. T h e aktis a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g T h e first eight aktis in are to Vimal, Let him worship

Garuda

Purna

i n t h e m i d d l e p l a c e Sattva, Rajas

a n d Tamas. L e t h i m w o r s h i p Nanda, Nala a n d Padma o n l y in t h e T h e w o r s h i p o f t h e mandalas o f S u n , M o o n a n d F i r e performed in the middle place. O R u d r a , it is so Utkarsini Jn,

Kriy, yoga, Prahvl, Saty, in a n d Anugrah. b e w o r s h i p p e d i n the beginning 25. The with that shall the east a n d A n u g r a h in the the seat with these

p e r i c a r p b y m e n w h o w i s h for l a s t i n g g o o d . devotee worship mantras k e e p i n g the n a m e s i n t h e d a t i v e c a s e , p r e f i x i n g P r a n a v a a n d e n d i n g with " N a m a h . " 26. T h e worship of the seat shall be flowers, as auspicious by duly light a n d the to be upon offering b a t h , f r a g r a n t p a s t e s , f o o d offerings. 27. followed. 28. as This O is the scheme the adumbrated shall and is T h e n h e s h a l l i n v o k e L o r d Hayagriva, l o r d o f g o d s . akara, deity nostril. be meditated T h e Mla mantra is to be akhin the (holding devotee incense,

e n t e r i n g t h r o u g h t h e left 29.

employed while he arrives. T h e invocation of the g o d of gods akha) s h a l l then b e p e r f o r m e d . A f t e r i n v o k i n g , s h a l l c a u t i o u s l y p e r f o r m t h e Nysa in t h e Mandala. 30-31. demons, After p e r f o r m i n g the Nysa let h i m t h i n k o f t h e by the guardians the of the quarters After t h e g o d s e a t e d t h e r e , Hayagriva, t h e g r e a t g o d , b o w e d t o b y g o d s a n d accompanied he Pdya, to free shall I n d r a a n d others, contemplation Cakra, e t c . 32-33. shall lord O be Arghya, Visnu. camaniya Then (water for camana) offered the devotee shall b a t h e the A f t e r fixing t h e l o r d d u l y , the imperishable show Visnu Himself.

a u s p i c i o u s Mudrs, akha,

Padmanbha

from illness.

Vrsadhvaja, 34. Then

h e s h a l l offer t h e g a r m e n t s , t h e n camana a n d he shall m e d i t a t e on the g r e a t L o r d in the s h a l l a g a i n g i v e pdya

the auspicious sacred thread. mandala, O R u d r a . After m e d i t a t i o n he

a n d other things to the deity, O a k a r a .

I 34.47 35. mantra. Orh He shall give it to Bhairava-deva With with

117 t h e Mlashall

Ksm o b e i s a n c e to t h e h e a r t . O m Km obeisance to the

t h i s he

worship the heart. 36. of the head, then the worship With this let head. Orh O m Ksm Ksaim o b e i s a n c e t o t h e tuft.

h i m w o r s h i p t h e tuft. 37. the Kavaca. 38. tuft obeisance to t h e Kavaca; l e t h i m w o r s h i p W i t h t h i s let h i m him Om Ksaum o b e i s a n c e to t h e e y e .

worship the eye. O m Ksah o b e i s a n c e t o t h e w e a p o n . W i t h this let w o r s h i p the w e a p o n . ( T h u s let h i m w o r s h i p ) a n d Kavaca. 39. these. I n t h e p l a c e s b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e e a s t let h i m w o r s h i p t h e Astra i n t h e c o r n e r s a n d great goddess L a k s m , the O R u d r a , let h i m w o r s h i p Let him worship the the heart, head,

the eye in the m i d d l e . 40. auspicious giver of prosperity. 41. goad and 42-43. Then let O Rudra, the O bow H e s h a l l w o r s h i p akha, Padma

Cakra a n d Gad b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e e a s t . let h i m w o r s h i p t h e s w o r d , p e s t l e , n o o s e , with the arrow from the east with these him worship

mantras w i t h t h e i r

own name.s R u d r a , from worship and the the east itself let deity bearing (the a n d the auspicious yellow g a r m e n t . akha, Cakra a n d Preceptor). preceptor a n d preceptor with yogic of the

rivatsa, Kaustubha, g a r l a n d , him

Gad, B r a h m a , N r a d a , S i d d h a g u r u achievements), Paraguru the Similarly (let h i m worship) the supreme preceptor. 44-45.

(the sandals

supreme

O V r s a b h a d h v a j a , let h i m w o r s h i p b e g i n n i n g w i t h Indra a l o n g with his

t h e e a s t a n d e n d i n g w i t h rdhva ( a b o v e ) Ina, N g a and Brahma. 46. a n d lotus. 47. with these Let him worship the Let him then worship

v e h i c l e a n d followers A g n i , Y a m a , N i r r t i , V a r u n a , V y u , S o m a , the ten weapons Vajra

( t h u n d e r b o l t ) , akti, Danda, s w o r d , n o o s e , b a n n e r , t r i d e n t , d i s c u s t h e n i n t h e n o r t h - e a s t , Visvaksena Pranava in the beginning and

mantras, with

Namah in t h e e n d , O V r s a d h v a j a .

118 48. T h e n let t h e worship of Ananta that be the

Garuda

Purna O

performed

Vrsadhvaja. 49. circular 50. ning. O 51.

I t i s w i t h the mamantra

w o r s h i p o f the

d e i t y shall b e d o n e , O V r s a d h v a j a . F r a g r a n t unguents, flowers, incense, l a m p , oblations peregrinations, Let him prostrations him. to Hayairas t h e p r e s i d i n g who is of the form of and Japyas (recital of

p r a y e r s ) shall b e d e d i c a t e d t o sing Vrsadhvaja.

this h y m n w i t h Pranava i n the b e g i n -

Om o b e i s a n c e to

deity of learning. Orh o b e i s a n c e the deity l e a r n i n g a n d the g i v e r o f l e a r n i n g . O b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e . O b e i s a n c e to the quiet lord, t h r e e Gunas. 52. O b e i s a n c e t o the d e s t r o y e r o f g o d s a n d d e m o n s a n d the wicked. worlds, in ivara. to the slayer of o b e i s a n c e t o t h e tman o f t h e

O b e i s a n c e u n t o the d e i t y w h o i s t h e l o r d o f all the f o r m o f B r a h m a . 53. to the O b e i s a n c e to deity, the the deity fully

worthy of respect of controlled,

O b e i s a n c e t o t h e d e i t y w h o b e a r s akha a n d Cakra. primordial t h e benefit o f all l i v i n g b e i n g s . 54.

Obeisance

conducive

D e v o i d of t h r e e gunas a n d e q u i p p e d with gunas in t h e

form of B r a h m a , R u d r a a n d Visnu, the doer, the destroyer, the lord of g o d s , obeisance to the omnipresent. 55-56. tate on bearing O R u d r a , after s i n g i n g the h y m n h e s h a l l Cakra every and Gad, r e f u l g e n t the great like lord a mediof the t h e g o d o f g o d s i n t h e p u r e lotus o f t h e h e a r t , the g o d akha, crore limb, Hayagriva,

s u n s , b e a u t i f u l in 57. of

n o b l e , tman the i m p e r i s h a b l e . O a k a r a , thus I h a v e e x p o u n d e d to you the worship w i t h g r e a t d e v o t i o n shall g o t o Hayagriva. H e w h o r e a d s this

the s u p r e m e region.

1.35.11

119

CHAPTER THIRTYFIVE
Worship Hari Said 1. 2. stationed Sagotra 3. Gyatr times. 4. six I t h a s t h r e e feet o f e i g h t s y l l a b l e s e a c h o r four feet o f for Japa ( r e p e t i t i o n ) ; it Japa, Dhyna is t h r e e - f o o t e d a n d for syllables 5. In is : I shall expound the Nysa, etc. and the m e t r e its tuft, it of is of Gyatrl

Gyatii; V i v m i t r a i s t h e s a g e ; S a v i t r 1 i s t h e d e i t y . I t h a s B r a h m a for its h e a d , R u d r a for in It to Visnu's heart. The ( o f the s a m e family) w i t h Ktyyana.2 for its base. Knowing it thus a p p l i c a t i o n i s its e y e . It is

m u s t b e k n o w n a s h a v i n g t h r e e w o r l d s for its feet. be repeated one million two h u n d r e d thousand

It h a s the bowels of the earth

w o r s h i p it is four-footed. Nysa ( c o n t e m p l a t i o n ) , Agnikrya the devotee shall ( s a c r e d rites i n f i r e ) a n d Arcana 6-7. The devotee (worship) the

e m p l o y Gyatri a l w a y s . It d i s p e l s a l l sins. shall assign outline to the toes, i n s t e p s , c a l v e s , k n e e s , t h i g h s , p r i v a t e p a r t s , s c r o t u m , b l o o d vessel, n a v e l , belly, the shoulders, 8 -10. deep t h e n i p p l e s , t h e h e a r t , t h r o a t , lips, m o u t h , p a l a t e , eyes, eyebrows, forehead, the grey, the four quarters

a n d t h e h e a d . I s h a l l tell y o u t h e c o l o u r s . T h e sapphire white, colour, yellow, colour of fire, yellow, ruby colour, conch black, tawny, white, lightning colour, silvery white, dark, g r e y red as wine, sun the colour, similar to the colour of touches w i t h his h a n d a n d

crimson, darkblue, colour,

the m o o n a n d white as the lustre of conch-shell. 11. whatever Whatever he sees devotee his with eyes i t b e c o m e s p u r e . T h e y k n o w

n o t h i n g s u p e r i o r to Gyatri.

1. 2. CSL p .

Literally A 57). great

m e a n s the sage. T h e

'generator'. It Vrttikas a r e

is

solar him.

deity

and p.

many 154;

hymns are addressed to

him in the R g v e d a . a s c r i b e d to [CDHM

120

Garuda

Pur3?a

CHAPTER THIRTYSIX
Method Hari said 1. Sandhy : O R u d r a , I shall explain the m o d e of p e r f o r m a n c e of prayer. It destroys sins. Listen. After performing of performing Sandhy1

prnyma ( h o l d i n g o f t h e b r e a t h ) t h r i c e , t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l t a k e t h e Sandhy b a t h . 2. It is c a l l e d prnyma w h e n o n e r e p e a t s t h e Gyatri {Orh Bhh Bhuvah Svah Orh) to burn off a l l m e n t a l , he shall a l o n g w i t h pranava a n d t h e Vyhrtis three times while holding the b r e a t h . 3. verbal 4. A t w i c e - b o r n will and be able physical defects by prnyma. Hence,

practise the s a m e always. T h e camana mantra d u r i n g t h e e v e n i n g Sandhy is t h e the m o r n i n g L e t him it is Sryaca m; in Upasthe duly perform with V e d i c R k : Agnicam; d u r i n g para? a l s o . 5. Rk H e s h a l l p e r f o r m Mrjana ( m y s t i c a l w i p i n g ) and w a t e r by m e a n s (three of Kua g r a s s r e c i t a l o f pranava. t i m e s d a i l y t h r e e m a i n rites) Moha (delusion) waking : po hi sfh 6. the Rajas, state, s h a l l be

t h e m i d - d a y i t i s : pah punantu.

sprinkled at every step with the W i t h these nine

d e v o t e e s h a l l b u r n off t h e n i n e sorts o f d e f e c t s a r i s i n g f r o m (passion) dreaming 7. Taking Tamas ( i g n o r a n c e ) , state and actions. the joint palms (in the form of a shall Rks be Udu mantra, Aghamarsana w a t e r the two state of sound sleep, from speech,

from thought a n d from cup) and 8. tyam reciting the

water in

offered t h r e e , e i g h t o r t w e l v e t i m e s . T h e sun shall be worshipped with a n d Citram. T h e sins c o m m i t t e d d u r i n g t h e d a y o r n i g h t

shall be destroyed instantly.

1. 2. religious

Morning, B a t h i n g or act.

noon and evening rinsing the

prayers. and ejecting water as a

mouth, sipping

1.36.18 9. T h e Sandhy p r a y e r prefixed shall be recited in

121 the morning

s t a n d i n g a n d in the evening, sitting. e d w i t h pranava 10. all

T h e Gyatri shall b e r e c i t b y Alahvyhrtis.1 the the sin sins of of removes

and accompanied

I f i t i s r e c i t e d t e n t i m e s Gyatri and of if it is recited (Ages

this birth; if it is recited h u n d r e d times it destroys previous births the sins Gyatri removes Dvpara). 11. and is c r i m s o n - c o l o u r e d . Svitri3 is t h r e e yugas2 i.e. Krta,

a t h o u s a n d times it Tret a n d white-hued are Om

Sarasvati* 12-13.

shall be known to be d a r k in colour. T h e s e After fixing Om Bhh Om in Svah the the shall heart, be

t h e t h r e e Sandhys a s e x p l a i n e d . Bhuvah tuft. eyes. shall be fixed on of the h e a d ; in t h e in the

T h e s c h o l a r l y d e v o t e e s h a l l f i x t h e f i r s t pda ( g r o u p o f s i x Gyatri in t h e is to Kavaca; second third The 14. Aga-vinysa be done with t h e (pda)

syllables, h e r e )

a n d h e s h a l l f i x t h e f o u r t h (pda) a l l o v e r ( t h e b o d y ) . D u r i n g t h e Sandhys ( m o r n i n g , m i d - d a y a n d e v e n i n g ) after due JVysas. Nysa is limbs if the Gyatri t h e m o t h e r o f V e d a s s h a l l b e r e c i t e d H e s h a l l b e b l e s s e d w i t h w e l f a r e i n all a c c o m p a n i e d b y prnyma t o o . 15. only the after Chandas 16. Gyatri of three pdas (3x8 syllables) is identical be begun with Brahma, Visnu and Mahevara. knowing (metre). T h e f o u r t h pda (last g r o u p of six syllables) T h e Japa shall

t h e Viniyoga ( a p p l i c a t i o n ) , Rsi ( s a g e ) a n d

T h e n h e shall b e free f r o m a l l sins a n d s h a l l a t t a i n t o b e t h e e s s e n c e b e y o n d a l l Rajas (passion). not perform "Nirmala". the d e i t y is

Brahma's w o r l d . is mentioned 17. the 18. paramtm

1.

The

sun destroys the person w h o does is Gyatri t h e d i v i n e ; a n d

Sandhy p r a y e r . T h e s a g e o f t h e f o u r t h pda i s T h e Chandas (the s u p r e m e s o u l ) .

bhuvah a n d svah are called the Mahvyhrlis.

Bhr,

2. According to the Post-Rgvedic H i n d u traditions T i m e is divided into the cycle of four a g e s o r yugas. T h e y a r e Krta-yuga (also called Satyayuga), Trelyuga, Dvparoyuga a n d Kaliyuga. (Vide details in Liga (AITM) p. 809; CDHM, p p . 381-3). 3. N a m e o f G y a t r , for t h e m o r n i n g - w o i s h i p . of Gyatri and 4. It is note-worthy here that Sarasvat is a n a m e it is d a r k - c o l o u r e d for t h e e v e n i n g - w o r s h i p .

122

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER THIRTYSEVEN
Gyatri Hari said : 1. 2. Gyatri i s t h e g r e a t g o d d e s s . I shall now describe the All the Gyatri g r e a t sins o f t h e Kalpa (eulogy of p e r s o n w h o r e c i t e s Gyatri a r e destroyed. salvation hereKalpa

Gyatri). I t i s c o n d u c i v e t o e n j o y m e n t h e r e a n d or one hundred and eight times. 3. shall Thrice daily during I n the the period the

after. T h e d e v o t e e s h a l l r e p e a t i t o n e t h o u s a n d a n d e i g h t t i m e s , of conjunctions he t i m e s he is deity desdivine

attain

Brahmaloka. After r e p e a t i n g Sandhy

a hundred

allowed to take water. 4. Bhuvah 5. Brahmni eyes). 6-7. ghee) In and to order In the fire

t r o y i n g a l l sins s h a l l b e i n v o k e d a n d w o r s h i p p e d . A l o n g w i t h t w e l v e n a m e s w i t h h e r o w n mantra : Bhh Svah. O b e i s a n c e to Gyatri; to to the Sdhvi, obeisance of to Svitri; obeito can

sance to Sarasvat. Obeisance to Kauiki, mother to Vedas t o Skrti, (who Sarvrthasdhini

a c c o m p l i s h all desired o b j e c t s ) , to S a h a s r k s (having t h o u s a n d let (food t h e d e v o t e e offer t h e jya ( m e l t e d offering w i t h Bhh Bhuvah shall Svah). pour

Havisyaka

get all virtues a n d desired objects he

ghee (in t h e fire) o n e t h o u s a n d a n d e i g h t t i m e s o r o n e h u n d r e d and eight times. After w o r s h i p p i n g t h e i d o l m a d e o f s a n d a l w o o d 8. times, 9. T h e devotee shall only milk, repeat bulbous it one hundred fruits. taking roots and or gold, thousand Pouring

twenty t h o u s a n d Ahutis he shall o b t a i n all desires. ( T h e Visarjana mantra) i s : " O G o d d e s s , b o r n i n t h e l a n d to stay on the M o u n t a i n by of northern S u m m i t a n d permitted

B r a h m a , please repair as please y o u " .

1.38.7 CHAPTER THIRTYEIGHT of Durg

123

Worship Hari said : 1. the On Navami1, Hrim

the devotee shall Raksini. O

worship

Durg w i t h O excellent and

mantra

Durge

Mother,

mother Goddess 2-3.

Durg, t h e g i v e r o f a l l i m p l e m e n t s o f l o v e

w e a l t h ! G r a n t u n t o m e a l l d e s i r e s a c c e p t i n g this offering. I n t h e mrgairsa2 m o n t h ( O c t - N o v . ) goddesses Magal, : Gauri, Vijay, Kali, Um, iv on beginning with shall Durg, worship Bhadr, the third d a y of the lunar fortnight the devotee in o r d e r t h e s e Knti, Sarasvati, 4-5. eighteen noose, Vajraka 6. 7. the great Laksm,

a n d Nryani. He the goddess with Tarjan (skull), of r in

will n e v e r h a v e t h e s o r r o w o f s e p a r a t i o n . T h e devotee shall m e d i t a t e hands bearing Khetaka ( c l u b ) , bell, mirror, (trident), process Kapla of Japa

(censuring s y m b o l ) , bow, banner,Damaruka (small d r u m ) , a x e , akti I Om ( J a v e l i n ) , p e s t l e , la shall now explain to the (thunderbolt) g o a d , arrow, Cakra a n d a p r o b e .

B h a g a v a t 3 a l o n g w i t h t h e r e q u i s i t e mantras. obeisance having T h e e G o d d e s s Cmund? l i v i n g (aerial cremation spirit Klartri g r o u n d , h a v i n g a skull i n t h e h a n d , r i d i n g o n a a c l u s t e r o f mahvimnas chariots) a arms, sound with (terrific like a n i g h t m a r e ) , s u r r o u n d e d by and many

around bearing kili-kili. blood

number of attendants, having a huge mouth

b e l l , d r u m a n d kikini, l o u d l y l a u g h i n g w i t h t h e with the hide of an elephant, smeared

Hum u n t o t h e e . O d e i t y p r o d u c i n g a l l sorts of s o u n d s , a n d flesh, h a v i n g like the move a terrific dangling tongue, O Karlanetr Hum u n t o O great (having Thee.

body covered

Rksasi, terrific w i t h h i d e o u s c r o o k e d t e e t h , l a u g h i n g b o i s t e r o u s l y , effulgent awful

1. 2. begins 3. 4. (CDHM,

glittering on, move

lightning, on.

eyes)

Hili-Hili.

T h e ninth day The with chaitra.

in the lunar fortnight. of the Hindu calendar which now-a-days

ninth month

Durg. A form of D u r g who pp. 65-6). killed the demons Canda and Munda

124 Put seat, both thy tongues a into

Garuda

Purna

t h e m o u t h . O Bhrkutimukhi ( w i t h thy auspicious

f a c e h a v i n g k n i t e y e b r o w s ) , h a v i n g Okra for wearing garland thy

o f skulls, h a v i n g m a t t e d h a i r c r o w n crooked teeth thou dost bring quickly. on,

a n d m o o n on the h e a d , b o i s t e r o u s l y l a u g h i n g Kili-Kili Hum Hum unto T h e e . With about a terrific hideous darkness. O thou who dispellest all obstacles Vaga ! Vaga on, move

a c h i e v e this ( s u c h a n d s u c h a s s p e c i f i e d ) w o r k . D o i t Kaha Kaha a l l o w me to e n t e r a l o n g w i t h t h e g o a d . make him tremble, m a k e lead, lead. O deity him tremble, move

f o n d o f b l o o d , f l e s h a n d w i n e ! k i l l , kill, speak requesting

p o u n d , p o u n d ; c u t , c u t ; s t r i k e , s t r i k e ; let u s in the three him go worlds,

y o u t o m a k e the b o d y a d a m a n t i n e ; d e s t r o y a l l w i c k e d p e r s o n s whether taken or not t a k e n ; m a k e h i m presence); make him go ahead, enter, m a k e h i m enter (thy make O having deity

a h e a d ; d a n c e ! d a n c e ! b i n d ! b i n d ! trot ! trot. tied u p ; O owl-faced ! having a g a r l a n d of him On oath in the hand. O deity

with sunken eyes ! with hair kikinis

skeletons, b u r n ! b u r n ! cook ! cook ! g r a s p ! g r a s p ! m a k e e n t e r t h e m i d d l e o f the mandala, w h y d o s t t h o u d e l a y ? unto Rudra. cili-cili; down, Inspire him ! Inspire him

unto B r a h m a ! on oath unto Visnu, on oath unto sages, on oath Kili-Kili-Khili-Khiliplanets, of lips mili-mili drooping O thou deformed deity ! with body encircled of nose sunken between eyebrows; of grim break ! blaze ! roll them,

by a b l a c k serpent! O T h o u who takest in all f a c e , of g r e y m a t t e d h a i r ! 0 Brhmi! break !

b l a z e , O Klamukhi ( h a v i n g d a r k &ce)Khala ! Khala ! strike, s t r i k e d o w n . O ! t h o u red-eyed ! roll t h e m , m a k e eyes; break, b r e a k ; take, take, thy kill, kill w i t h t h e chop off, others fell t h e m t o t h e g r o u n d ; h o l d , h o l d t h e h e a d ; o p e n e o p e n t h y f e e t ; s h o w t h e mudrs, Hum strike, with nail, nail the baton, Hum phat u n t o t h e e . P i e r c e , p i e r c e , t e a r , t e a r w i t h t h e t r i d e n t ; t h u n d e r b o l t ; strike, curved me from from tooth; c h o p off w i t h t h e cakra, p i e r c e , p i e r c e w i t h t h e Sakti, with the p i n ; daily with

chew, chew with the the goad; release

m i n c e , m i n c e w i t h t h e s c i s s o r s ; c a t c h h o l d of, c a t c h h o l d o f w i t h t h e fever recurring (the lift h e a d a c h e ; f r o m t h e fever r e c u r r i n g e v e r y t w o d a y s , t h r e e d a y s , four d a y s ; of t h e release me Dkini) Dkiniskandagraha up O haunting up? strike come, spirit c a t c h Lala, Lala, lift

d o w n , strike d o w n to the g r o u n d ; c a t c h .

Brahmni,

1.38.12 come. come; O Mhevari O Vaisnavi come, come; O come, come; Kaplini O Kaumri c o m e , c o m e ; O Nrasirhhi c o m e , come; O

125 O

Vrhi c o m e , c o m e ; O Aindri c o m e , O Svadti c o m e , c o m e ; O come, come; O ka Revati O Kailsacrini Kili Bimbe ! ndle in
2

come; come,

Cmund c o m e , come; Mahkli come; Kili dwi-

O Revati c o m e c o m e ; O Suska Revati c o m e , c o m e ; come, O Aghora; c o m e ; O Himavantacrini1 O Cmund come, come, come; c u t , c u t t h e e n e m i e s ; mantra:

of terrific f o r m o r i g i n a t i n g

f r o m t h e fury of Rudra ! numbers with the noose the time ! i t ; b i n d , b i n d its f a c e bind, bind above; the

O t h o u d e i t y w h o m a k e s t Asuras stop, stop, make it enter,

a n d goest a l o n g the firmament; bind, bind m a k e it

e n t e r t h e mandala; c a u s e i t t o f a l l ; c a u s e i t t o f a l l ; g r a s p it, g r a s p ( m o u t h ) ; b i n d bind the eves, bind, b i n d bind, bind the corners; bind, bind with ashes, water, them them d o w n , strike eight homa and t h e h e a r t ; b i n d , b i n d h a n d s a n d f e e t ; b i n d , b i n d a l l evil p l a n e t s , quarters; bind below; mustard bind, Inspire them

earth or with down. O ! 8. to

s e e d s ; strike one

Cmund Kili Kili Vicce,

Hum phat Svh. thousand Each Then letters i n (letter) is to is be word

T h i s is the g a r l a n d of eight

t h e f o r m o f mantras for r e p e a t e d Japa. be repeated thousand times. times with performed eight thousand butter). 9. three With the

gingelly

seeds

coated clarified

w i t h Trimadhura ( t h r e e s w e e t t h i n g s

sugar, honey

great flesh ( h u m a n flesh) coated with the homa s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d o n e t h o u s a n d a n d times. Or with trimadhura throwing can b e u s e d for

sweet things

eight times r e p e a t i n g e a c h letter one t h o u s a n d eight merely gingelly seeds c o a t e d homa. 10. 11. 12. mace and In The One the case of war, by

water, m u s t a r d

seed or ashes one's victory is assured. deity c a n b e m e d i t a t e d u p o n a s h a v i n g twentypair of hands has sword and club, the other third bow a n d arrows a n d the fourth e i g h t , e i g h t e e n , t w e l v e , e i g h t o r four a r m s . baton, the

sword and pestle.

1. 2. M o v i n g in the H i m a l a y a s . Kailsa mountain.

M o v i n g in the

126 13. A n o t h e r p a i r o f h a n d s h a s Sakha a n d discus;

Garuda bell;

Purna another

banner a n d pole; another pair a x e a n d pair small drum and mirror. 14. culates;

and another gestiPanava (the the

I n o n e p a i r a h a n d h o l d s akti a n d t h e other another pair h a s Musalas still a n o t h e r h a s Dhakk a n d the goddess Mudr1 is threatening

(pestles); another pair has

noose a n d a long javelin; ( t w o kinds of d r u m s ) . 15. hand Mahisa) she With one hand

d e m o n s ) , with another she p r o d u c e s a tinkling s o u n d ; with one shows

2

the

Abhaya

a n d with the other

Svastika Mudr. 16. tion.

S u c h is Mahisaghni on a l i o n .

(the

s l a y e r of t h e d e m o n surrounded

riding

Victory unto thee, O goddess of goblins, Protect me from your spirits.

by all spirits.

A c c e p t this o b l a -

Obeisance unto thee.

CHAPTER THIRTYNINE
Worship of the Sun Rudra said 1. ship after. Vsudeva said : 2. O R u d r a , listen, I shall a g a i n Om o b e i s a n c e u n t o expound the m o d e of Om o b e i s a n c e w o r s h i p of s u n . Uccairavas.3 that : O Janrdana, affords please expound again succinctly the

w o r s h i p o f t h e S u n - g o d w h o i s i d e n t i c a l w i t h Visnu.

T h e wor-

enjoyment in this world a n d salvation here-

u n t o Aruna. Om o b e i s a n c e u n t o Dan<j.in. Om o b e i s a n c e u n t o Pigala. O Vrsadhvaja w i t h t h e s e mantras they a r e at the door. to be w o r s h i p p e d

1. 2. 3.

Promising

protection.

Promising g o o d luck. T h e horse obtained at the churning of the ocean.

1.39.10 3. Om Am o b e i s a n c e u n t o Bhta, t h e

127 devotee shall wor-

s h i p h i m i n t h e m i d d l e , h i m w h o s e n a m e i s Prabhtmala. Om Am o b e i s a n c e u n t o Vimala. Om Am o b e i s a n c e u n t o Sara. Om Am o b e i s a n c e u n t o dhra. Om Am mukha Vimala a n d east a n d other 4. cal in others corners. to t h e Karnik the mystiinside are obeisance unto Paramato be w o r s h i p p e d in the south-

Om o b e i s a n c e to Padma. Om o b e i s a n c e Dipt and others are

the p e r i c a r p . A devotee shall worship these diagram. east a n d other directions a n d Sarvatomukhi i s

to be worshipped in the to be worshipped Vin Vam obeisance obeisance obeisance

t h e m i d d l e . Om Vm o b e i s a n c e u n t o Dipt. Orh Orh Vim o b e i s a n c e u n t o Vibhti. Orh Orh o b e i s a n c e u n t o Sarvatomukhi. Sun.

u n t o Sksm. Orh Vm o b e i s a n c e u n t o Bhadr. Orh Vaim u n t o Jay. unto

u n t o Aghora. Orh Vam o b e i s a n c e u n t o Vidyut. Orh Vah o b e i s a n c e Vijay. 5. middle. of the formed. 6. son in 7. Mlamantra 8. Orh o b e i s a n c e u n t o t h e s e a t of O akara, Sun. With listen this to the the Om Hrm obeisSam

a n c e to the idol of the S u n . T h e s e a r e to be worshipped in the Hrnmantras. Orh Ham Kham Khakholkya Krrh Krirh Sah Svh. O b e i s a n c e u n t o t h e i d o l vhana up) (invocation), are to is Sthpana be per(installation) for Sannirodhana worship with the colour, a n d Sannidhnaka (warding off). shown the a likewise. O R u d r a , let him Mlamanlra, seated in sun brilliant in form, criml o t u s , in a c h a r i o t w i t h a this. L i s t e n t o the sun. BimbaJvlin and to the (bringing near)

Sakalikarana ( s u m m i n g Mudrs a r e t o b e

t o b e w i t h t h e mantra

white

sirfgle w h e e l , h a v i n g t w o a r m s , h o l d i n g a l o t u s . T h e sun shall be m e d i t a t e d upon :Om Hrm The devotee shall show Hrim Sah o b e i s a n c e u n t o Padmamudr obeisance

Mudr t h r e e t i m e s . Om Am t h e s u n , to t h e h e a d . to tuft. 9. middle. 10. In the

to t h e h e a r t . Om Svh to

Om Ah Bhrbhuvah Svah Vasat

Orh Hum Hum to Kavaca.

Orh Bhm Vausat to t h e t w o e y e s .

Om Vah Phat to t h e w e a p o n . T h e d e v o t e e shall worship the heart, etc. in the southor north-west and the eye in the east, north-east, south-west

directions he shall worship the w e a p o n a n d

128 t h e w h i t e - h u e d Moon. 11. O Rudra, In the eastern petal, (mercury). in the

Garuda

Purna

O R u d r a , he shall worship yellow-

w o r s h i p t h e g o l d - c o l o u r e d Budha coloured Jupiter. 12. south-west. 13. the

south he shall

H e s h a l l w o r s h i p Bhtea ( t h e l o r d

of spirits) the red-

i n t h e n o r t h a n d t h e w h i t e - h u e d Venus. In t h e s o u t h - e a s t , O Hara, he s h a l l w o r s h i p \\\ie Agraka(M.axs). He s h a l l w o r s h i p b l a c k - h u e d Saturn in t h e s h a l l w o r s h i p Rhu of

In t h e n o r t h - w e s t , O Hara, he of the flower

colour 14. 15.

Nandyvarta a n d i n t h e n o r t h - e a s t h e O akara, l i s t e n :

s h a l l w o r s h i p Ketu t h e s m o k e - c o l o u r e d . T h e s e a r e t h e mantras

Om Som o b e i s a n c e to t h e m o o n . Om Bum o b e i s a n c e to Om Brm o b e i s a n c e to Brhaspati ( J u p i t e r ) . Orh ( V e n u s ) . Om Am o b e i s a n c e to (Saturn). AgOm Ram Mlathe

Budha ( M e r c u r y ) . raka(Mars). 16. mantra, the Om O

Bham o b e i s a n c e to Bhrgava

Sam o b e i s a n c e to Sanaicara Sakara, after g i v i n g Pdya, (the food.

o b e i s a n c e to Rhu. Om Kam o b e i s a n c e to Ketu. etc. with the shall show best of devotees aspirant)

Dhenumudr at t h e e n d of offering 17. worship east, etc. 18-19. Om Hum

After r e p e a t i n g t h e mantra the Tejacanda (the fierce

eight t h o u s a n d times, he splendour) in the north-

m u s t d e d i c a t e t h e s a m e to t h e d e i t y ; O Bhtea (iva), he s h a l l

Phat Svadh

Svh Vausat to Tejacanda. and Arghya c o n s i s t i n g

H e s h a l l d e d i c a t e u n t o h i m t h e Nirmlya into a

o f gingelly seeds a n d rice grains, m i x e d with red s a n d a l g r o u n d paste with unguent water a c c o m p a n i e d by flowers a n d H e s h a l l p l a c e t h a t vessel a b o v e t h e h e a d a n d k n e e l he shall give the Arghya to the he Hrnmantra. preceptors, Om Gam o b e i s a n c e to Ganapati. Orh Am of S u n h a s been described. Perincense. 20. i n g on t h e e a r t h , O Vrsadhvaja, S u n with the 21.

After w o r s h i p p i n g t h e Gana a n d

shall worship all deities. 22. Thus the

obeisance to the preceptors. worship f o r m i n g this, t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l a t t a i n t h e w o r l d o f Visnu.

1.40.6
CHAPTER FORTY Worship Sakara said : 1. Siddhi t h e Mhevari PjS ( w o r s h i p ) (achievement). : O Vrsadhvaja, listen to the mode After seat of w o r s h i p of Mahevara ' after knowing which men

129

O L o r d , b e a r i n g Sakha a n d Gad, p l e a s e n a r r a t e t o m e attain

Hari said 2.

of

Mahevara e v e n a s I d e s c r i b e t h e s a m e . Nysa. 3.

taking bath, a n d and perform

p e r f o r m i n g camana let the d e v o t e e sit on a

He s h a l l t h e n w o r s h i p Mahevara in t h e mandala ( m y s t i c these O mantras ye ( h e shall worship) seat of Mahevara iva, c o m e . o b e i s a n c e to o b e i s a n c e to obeisance to

diagram) . With 4. 5. Sarasvati. Gag. Mahkla. Om

a c c o m p a n i e d b y all followers. Hm, d e i t i e s of t h e H e s h a l l i n v o k e t h e d e i t i e s o f t h e s e a t w i t h this. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Ganapati. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Nandin. obeisance to Laksm. Om Hm Om Om Hm Hm

Om Hm

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to t h e Astra. be w o r s h i p p e d at t h e d o o r w i t h Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Brahman t h e l o r d to t h e p r e c e p t o r s . Om Hm to Ananta. Orh obeisance Orh to Jna ( k n o w -

6. O Hara, t h e s e a r e to bathing, unguent, etc. of Vstu (plot).

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e Orh Hm

o b e i s a n c e to t h e dhraakti. Hm o b e i s a n c e to Dharma. l e d g e ) . Orh Hm Hm o b e i s a n c e to Adharma ( E v i l ) . to Anaivarya metre Hm o b e i s a n c e to Aivarya Avairgya

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e

o b e i s a n c e to Vairgya ( n o n - a t t a c h m e n t ) . Om (prosperity). Hm o b e i s a n c e to (ignorance). Om Hm Om obeisance Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Ajna (attachment) . Om Hm Om obeisance

(Poverty). down).

to rdhvacchandas Hm Om Orh

( t h e m e t r e lifted u p ) . shelved o b e i s a n c e to t h e K a r n i k Hm o b e i s a n c e to Kali. Hm o b e i s a n c e

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e

to Adhacchandas ( t h e

Hm o b e i s a n c e to Padma. Orh

( p e r i c a r p ) . Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vm. Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to Kalavikarini.

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Jyesth. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Raudr. to Balapramathin.

OmHm o b e i s a n c e to Sarvabhta-

130 damani (suppressor of all l i v i n g b e i n g s ) . to t h e iva. heart. to

Garuda

Purna

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Om Hm Om Hm Orh Him Orh o b e i s a n c e to o b e i s a n c e to obeisance Om Hah eyes.

Manonmani.

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e

t h r e e mandalas.

Haum Ham o b e i s a n c e to t h e i d o l of iv. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to t h e Orh Hum o b e i s a n c e to Orh Haum o b e i s a n c e obeisance Orh Om

t h e p r e s i d i n g d e i t y of l e a r n i n g . Orh Hm Him Haum o b e i s a n c e to the head. t h e tuft. Haim

to t h e Kavaca. 7.

the three Om to to Hm

o b e i s a n c e to t h e Astra. Orh Hm the Rddhi ( p r o s p e r i t y ) . o b e i s a n c e to obeisance 8. 9. Rajas. to Laksmi. Kali.3

Om o b e i s a n c e to t h e Sadyojta. to Siddhi. o b e i s a n c e to Orh Hm Orh Hm Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vidyut.1 Om Hm Hm Hm eight obeisance obeisance Kals Bodh? Svadh.

o b e i s a n c e to Prabh.4, T h e s e are the (digits) o f Satya s i t u a t e d in the east, etc. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vmadeva. Orh Kany.e
e

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Hm o b e i s a n c e to Rati. Orh Orh Hm Om Hm Om Hm known as

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Raks.5

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Hm o b e i s a n c e to Jni. obeisance obeisance to Vrddhi.9 to Rtri.

11

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Kama.7 obeisance to Kry.10

Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to Kriy. Orh Hm Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Bhrmi.12 o b e i s a n c e to Tvar Vmadeva a r e to be

o b e i s a n c e to Mohini.13 O Vrsadhvaja, t h e thirteen.

Orh Hm Kals of

(Hurry).

10. Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Tatpurusa. Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vrtti.11 Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. of lightning-colour. Having Lustre. Security. Virgin. T h e loving Prosperity. T h a t which is to be done. Night. Roaming. Enchanting. Existence. Position. one T h e knowing one. knowledge. one. T h e black

Pratisph.15

Om

Hm o b e i s a n c e to

1.40.13 Vidy.
1

131 Om Hm obeisance to nti.

2

O ! four. Om Om Hm Orh to

Vrsabhadhvaja, Hm Hm

the

Kals of Tatpurusa Um.

i

a r e to be k n o w n as to Ksam? Orh

1 1 . Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Om Hm o b e i s a n c e Ksudh JVidr ( s l e e p ) . o b e i s a n c e to (thirst).

Aghora3.

o b e i s a n c e to obeisance to to Om Hm Trsn to

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vydhi ( s i c k n e s s ) . (hunger). o b e i s a n c e to Om Hm Hm obeisance

T h e s e six a r e t h e terrific Kals of Aghora, O H a r a . Ina. Hm o b e i s a n c e Agad.e obeisance obeisance Om Hm

12. Om Hm obeisance Kals to

Samiti ( A s s o c i a t i o n ) . o b e i s a n c e to Jvl of Ina. 13. Orh Hm

Krsn.7 Om

to Maric.8 Orh Hm

( f l a m e ) . O Vrsabhadhvaja, k n o w t h e s e five a r e obeisance the lord Om to Siva's followers. Om to Orh Hm lord of Orh

o b e i s a n c e to I n d r a of d e p a r t e d demons. spirits.

of deities. obeisance

Hm o b e i s a n c e t o Nirrti t h e l o r d

Agni t h e l o r d of b r i l l i a n c e . Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Tama t h e Hm Orh Hm o b e i s a n c e to Varuna9 t h e l o r d of w a t e r s .

Hm o b e i s a n c e to Vyu10 t h e L o r d of v i t a l a i r s . n c e to Soma11 t h e l o r d of e y e s . l o r d of a l l l e a r n i n g . Ngas. Orh Hm

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. the (P came whereas p. 11. one whole identified identified sky. 10.

Om Hm o b e i s a to na t h e

Om 'Hm o b e i s a n c e to

Orh

Hm o b e i s a n c e

Ananta t h e l o r d of

Om Hm o b e i s a n c e to Brahman t h e l o r d of a l l t h e w o r l d s . obeisance
Knowledge. Peace. Beautiful. Tranquillity. Forgiveness. Having an Black. R a y o f light. A very important deity in the R g v e d a where he solar deity, a p. minor 494 note or a the in deity, is treated Lord of pp. as the of H e is, i n fact, a became (AITM) the personification armlet.

to Dhlican4evara.

k i n g of the universe. (AITM) A to be p.

In later times, he 1 5 9 8 ; Liga deity in as minor

water. 336-8).

8 6 5 ; CDHM

Rgveda.

However,

the later days, he name Marut : (P (AITM),

regarded Rgveda, the

the L o r d of air a n d the

also bore the

in the In

M a r u t s enjoy a separate

identity.

2119;

CDHM p p . mandala with the

343-4). he is identical with Soma-juice a n d is praised in he he is is sometime completely in pp. later mythology

Rgveda,

( I X ) . However, in the s a m e R g v e d a moon. (CDHM, 301-3).

with the m o o n : whereas

132 14-19. of p r i n c i p l e s ) , T h e devotee Sannindha, showing shall duly Sakalikarana, scented food Gandha, perform

Garuda vhana,

Purna Sth-

pana, Sannidhna,

Tattvanysa

(fixation Snna, of

of Mudrs, m e d i t a t i o n ,

Pdya, camana,

Arghya, offerings of flowers a n d etc. AAganysa, h a n d s , Pdya, play, Incense, L a m p , Arghya, camana,

oils, Udvartana, offerings, betel Rpa,

a p p l i c a t i o n o f s c e n t e d u n g u e n t s offering o f g a r m e n t s , o r n a m e n t s washing leaves, musical with of

d a n c e offering

of u m b r e l l a ,

Mudrs,

Dhyna, Japa, Japa

Ekavadbhva ( i d e n t i f i c a t i o n ) , e t c . t h e Mla-mantra. O Mahea, t h a t d e s t r o y s a l l sins.

He shall d e d i c a t e described

R u d r a , I have,

the worship

CHAPTER

FORTYONE Woman

Mantras to obtain Vsudeva said 1. Vivvasu. 2. Om :

t h e r e is a Gandharva Vivvasu1 t h e of

l o r d of this

girls. mantra. (Bear-

I a m g e t t i n g h i m for t h y s a k e . After b e g e t t i n g a g i r l Svh u n t o A c q u i s i t i o n of g i r l s by t h e r e c i t a t i o n Om o b e i s a n c e and digest, the unto thee, N o w I s h a l l d e s c r i b e t h e N i g h t - m a r e (Klartri). G o d d e s s Rksakarni e a r e d ) , h a v i n g four a r m s , h a i r t i e d u p , t h r e e - e y e d o n e . Klartri f e e d i n g o n fat whom burn, the burn; of b l o o d of m e n , giver has approached. flesh digest of death to so-and so Hum Phat. K i l l , kill^ Svh u n t o t h e e , Neither being over g o d of death

and blood.

O Rksapatni (wife day 3. his cal clay pot. stipulated. The lift

of the constellation lunar

'Great Bear').

fortnight nor star in all fury shall

nor fasting is smear blood

devotee the

hands, devices)
1.

phallic as

emblem (the

a n d strike yawning),

the u n b a k e d Mohani (the

Om o b e i s a n c e ! a l l r o u n d a r e such Jambhani

t h e s e Yantras ( m e c h a n i -

T h e legendary chief of the

Gandharvas.

1.42.6 c h a r m i n g ) a n d Sarvaatruvidrini

133 (tearer of all enemies) ; p r o t e c t

m e s o a n d s o p r o t e c t m e f r o m all fear a n d h a r a s s m e n t s , Svh u n t o t h e e . W h e n Sukra i s d e s t r o y e d after t h e japa h a s b e e n p e r f o r m e d twice, I shall e x p l a i n further.

CHAPTER Pavitrnpana Hari said 1. : I shall now describe

FORTYTWO of iva

the the

s a c r e d r i t e of iva, n a m e d sacred thread consisting

Pavitrropana the aspirant worship. 2. performed the month 3. thread;

(the rite of putting or his son

of three yarns a r o u n d the i m a g e ) .

O Hara, o n l y t h e p r e c e p t o r , the vow shall perform the a worship

observing

Otherwise over

Vighnea

r e m o v e s t h e effects of Mgha3

a year.

This worship has to be performed in or Bhdrapada.* is in made Dvpara of g o l d it is of thread

of sdha,1

rvana,2 it is

I n the Krtayuga t h e s a c r e d In t h e Tretyuga

of s i l v e r ;

c o p p e r a n d i n t h e Kali a g e i t i s o f c o t t o n t h r e a d . spin it a n d cut the ends. 4. three Three yarns are to be twisted Pavitraka. into

A virgin shall one and such

new yarns constitute the and It 5. The knots shall

T h e ' knots shall be Satya mantra. with Iaw i t h Aghora-mantra a n d incensed Vahni

m a d e w i t h Vmadeva-mantra tied with 6. Nga, Tatpurusa-mantra. Osikra,

washed with shall be

be purified

mantra.

T h e deities of the yarn a r e these. Candramas (Lord (moon), (fire); Brahma, and Sikhidhvaja Subrahmanya), Ravi (sun), Visnu

Siva a r e t h e d e i t i e s o f t h e y a r n . 1. T h e fourth month in the H i n d u lunar calendar. It generally heralds the beginning of rainy season. J u n e - J u l y . 2 . T h e f i f t h month i n the H i n d u lunar c a l e n d a r : July-August. 3. T h e eleventh month in the H i n d u lunar c a l e n d a r : J a n u a r y February. 4. T h e sixth month in the H i n d u lunar c a l e n d a r : August-September.

134 7. 8-9. agulas.1 Vir,* and O Rudra,

Garuda

Purna

e a c h yarn shall be of length one h u n d r e d T h e r e are ten knots. intervals are

8

a n d e i g h t , f i f t y o r twentyfive hastas. Between two The

11

knots Vijay,
12 7

the

shall be of four Paurusi3

9

names
5

of
6

the knots

: Prakrti 2 Ajit,

Aparjit,

Jay,

Rudr,

Manonmani,10,

Sawamukhi, 10.

Sadiva,

t h e i n t e r - s p a c e s of t h e k n o t s c a n the other, the Pavitraka

be t w o agulas or o n e agula t o o . E i t h e r in t h e b r i g h t h a l f or c a n be m a d e on the seventh or thirteenth d a y . It shall be coloure d w i t h f r a g r a n t Kukuma a n d o t h e r s u b s t a n c e s 11. After b a t h i n g t h e liga etc., it shall be w o r s h i p p e d with f r a g r a n t Pavitraka s h a l l 12. in the 13. In east the (saffron). with milk The (phallic emblem)

fragrant unguents, etc.

be offered to Brahman t h e tman.

north-east, fragrant flower shall be offered;

t h e p o l e - s h a f t a n d i n t h e n o r t h t h e fruit o f m y r o -

b a l a n s h a l l b e offered. T h e d e v o t e e c o n v e r s a n t w i t h t h e u s e o f mantras s h a l l the west, a s h e s i n t h e s o u t h , Aguru13 i n place m u s t a r d with the shall be encircled p l a c e clod of earth in 14. In

t h e s o u t h - w e s t w i t h t h e ikh mantra. t h e north-west h e s h a l l The Kavaca-mantra, O V r s a d h v a j a . 15. Bhtabali house

w i t h t h e t h r e a d a n d Gandhapavitraka s h a l l b e offered. T h e Homa s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d i n t h e (Oblation) shall be offered. sacred fire and O Mahevara, l o r d of

g o d s , t h o u a r t i n v i t e d a l o n g w i t h thy followers.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. In ancient Indian metrics, one

agula hasta).

is

equal

to

a finger's

b r e a d t h . ( 1 2 agulas m a k e a vitasti a n d 2 4 , a Nature. Valorous. Heroic. T h a t which cannot be Victorious. Ever-victorious Fierce. Unconquered. Exciting. All-faced. W h o is always Fragrant aloe. benevolent. conquered.

1.42.25 16. here." "I shall worship

135 thee in the m o r n i n g . Be present the deity in

W i t h these words the devotee shall invite

the night a n d send it by singing hymns. 17. the deity. The On mantra-inspired the Pavitras day shall be placed near

fourteenth

of the d a r k fortnight let

h i m b a t h e t h e i m a g e o f t h e S u n a n d w o r s h i p Rudra. 18. formed) the M e d i t a t i n g o n t h e s e l f (tman) incense mantra, to the as Vivarpa ( o m n i -

s t a t i o n e d o n t h e f o r e h e a d let h i m w o r s h i p it. d e i t y , after s p r i n k l i n g it w i t h t h e Hrdayamantra. He shall Astra worshipping

He shall dedicate s a m e with 19. mantra.

a n d i n s p i r i n g i t w i t h t h e Samhit tattva first, Vidytattva n e x t ,

w o r s h i p t h e Siva 20. to Sivatattva. 21. Ksaum time

a n d t h e n tmatattva a n d Devaka. Orh Him o b e i s a n c e to

Orh Haum o b e i s a n c e

Vidytattva. Hum

Orh Hm, to

o b e i s a n c e to tmatattva; Orh Hm, Him, Sarvatattva.1 has Om t h o u been art Whatever seen by thee

obeisance (Kltmaka).

identical with in my

r i t e s p e r f o r m e d w r o n g l y , o m i t t e d , s e c r e t l y offered, 22. 23. vtmaka), by Siva. 24. a n d the He who gives four Pavitrakas s h a l l d o s o w i t h t h i s t h e Pavitra t o t h e s a c r e d all O Sambhu, by thy will l e t it be h o l y . Orh fulfil, fulfil t h e s a c r i f i c i a l with all principles and rite. Obeisance unto (Sarvatatt-

t h e e w h o a r t t h e l o r d o f its c o n t r o l , w h o a r t i d e n t i c a l reasons). Om Hm Him Hum Hairh

Sarvakranaplita ( p r o t e c t e d Haum o b e i s a n c e to

previous ones.

After g i v i n g

f i r e , Daksin s h a l l b e g i v e n t o t h e p r e c e p t o r . 25. The oblation shall then b e given a n d the B r a h m i n s

f e d . F i n a l l y Canda s h a l l b e d i s c h a r g e d after w o r s h i p .

1.

T h e universal element.

136 CHAPTER FORTYTHREE of Visnu

Garuda

Purna

Pavitrropana Hari said 1. worldly in Hari. 2. : I shall the expound and

t h e r i t e of Pavitrropana t h a t Formerly at

yields

enjoyment

salvation.

the time of

their w a r with

d e m o n s , Brahma a n d

others s o u g h t refuge necklace. H a r i told (the

Visnu g a v e t h e m a b a n n e r a n d a

t h e m that they c a n o v e r c o m e the d e m o n s banner and necklace). 3. said : ' ' O Vrsadhvaja, I this b o o n . 4. name." 5. be L e t this n e c k l a c e g i v e n b y H a r i During the rainy season if they year's plead thee for When V i s n u said thus,

by seeing them

t h e s e r p e n t , b r o t h e r o f Vsuki t h e Pavitra; g r a n t me

b e f a m o u s u n d e r his do not worship by

When he said thus, he g r a n t e d that b o o n . w o r s h i p o f t h o s e m e n shall

m e a n s o f Pavitrakas, t h e full fruitless. 6.

H e n c e , Pavitrropana is e s s e n t i a l for a l l d e i t i e s . with the first d a y a n d ending w i t h Paurnamsi w o r s h i p p e d on their respective Visnu shall be p e r f o r m e d on Solar or

Beginning days. 7. half.

(full m o o n ) , t h e deities s h a l l b e O Hara, t h e w o r s h i p of calamities, rite in for

t h e twelfth d a y , e i t h e r d u r i n g t h e b r i g h t h a l f o r d u r i n g t h e d a r k During 8 advent 9. Daksinyana1, prosperity rite is during L u n a r eclipses. When any performed, for Visnu at the has to or of the preceptor, T h e sacred this Pavitra can

be performed. D u r i n g the rainy season it is essential. thread b e m a d e o f silk, c o t t o n l i n e n . F o r B r a h m i n s i t c a n b e m a d e o f Kua g r a s s . F o r k i n g s i t c a n b e o f r e d silk.

1.
January.

It m e a n s a period of

six months

during

which the

sun m o v e s
to 15th

from the north to the south, as seen in I n d i a .

Roughly

15th J u l y

1.43.20 10. shall

137 F o r Vaiyas it s h a l l be w o o l l e n or s i l k e n ; for Sdras it of trees.1 O vara, a sacred thread

b e o f fresh b a r k s

m a d e of cotton or fibres of lotus stalk is praiseworthy in r e g a r d to all castes. 11. T h e thread shall spun by a brahmin lady and twisted three times three Okra,2 iva, 12. 13. copper, 14. one be used. T h e deities for t h e y a r n a r e are

Soma, Agni, Brahma, Phanin,3 Ravi.* d e i t i e s o f t h e Tristra

Vighnea5 a n d Visnu. T h e

Brahma, Visnu a n d Rudra. T h e t h r e a d s h a l l b e p l a c e d i n a v e s s e l o f g o l d , silver, bamboo A n d the and or earth ( c l a y ) . T h e b e s t vessel i s s i x t y f o u r of it. T h e best thread is of it long; Madhyamahalf the m i d d l i n g half eight agulas

agulas l a r g e ; hundred 15.

s m a l l e s t still h a l f o f it.

a n d the s m a l l e s t s t i l l half as explained before. T h e b e s t k n o t shall b e o f t h e s i z e o f t h e thumb, the m i d d l i n g o f t h e size o f t h e m i d d l e f i n g e r a n d t h e s m a l l e s t o f t h e size o f t h e little finger. 16. In length and in the s i z e o f t h e vessel this i s t h e p r i n c i p l e to be followed. O i v a , the devotee shall p l a c e the t h r e a d on the idol. 17. 18. 19. S u c h that it passes through the chest, navel a n d t h i g h a n d resets o n t h e k n e e . T h e length of the thread m a y be one thousand a n d e i g h t agulas. W i t h four, thirtysix, t w e n t y f o u r , o r t w e l v e k n o t s . T h e Pavitraka s h a l l b e d y e d w i t h S a f f r o n t u r m e r i c o r who has o b s e r v e d fast shall c o n s e c r a t e t h e to Sakarsana i n t h e e a s t t h e t w i g m a d e of b a n y a n tree leaves sandal paste. T h e devotee Pavitra. 20. He shall dedicate a n d Kua g r a s s p l a c e d i n a vessel

in all the eight quarters.

1.

Variant:

Sana-valkajam.

2-

H e r e we find deification of Om.

3.
4.

Ananta or esa-nga.
T h e sun.

5.

Ganea.

138 21-22. T h e same

Garuda

Purna

d y e d w i t h y e l l o w p i g m e n t a n d saffron T h e devotee w h o and shall

s h a l l b e d e d i c a t e d t o Pradyumna i n t h e s o u t h . t h e Pavitra d y e d w i t h rice grains 23. in a sandal, blue ashes,

i s a b o u t t o w a g e w a r s h a l l for t h e s a k e o f g o o d r e s u l t s d e d i c a t e gingelly seeds west. He m i x t u r e , to Aniruddha in the

a s s i g n i n t h e s o u t h - e a s t a n d o t h e r d i r e c t i o n s t h e d e i t i e s ri, e t c . T h e devotee shall inspire t h e Pavitra w i t h Vsudevamantra o n c e , l o o k a t i t a n d w o r s h i p it w i t h a c l o t h c a r e f u l l y . 24. A n d p l a c e i t i n front o f t h e deity o r i n front o f t h e place it in the mystic d i a g r a m of the idol. As west-south a n d north. 25. oblation I n o r d e r o f Brhmana, e t c . , (Naivedya). After finishing the rite of Adhivsa1 to the (the a n d worship the pitcher. let h i m offer t h e After m a k i n g a Mandala w i t h t h e Astra-mantra, 26-27. b e f o r e , let h i m a g a i n . He shall then cover

Pavitra, he shall e n c i r c l e t h e a l t a r , t h e s o u l w i t h Kalaa ( p i t c h e r ) , s a c r i f i c i a l p i t , Vimna (the r e s t i n g p l a c e of i d o l s ) , mandapa raised platform) 28. a n d recite 29. I a n d the house with three or nine ( t h r e a d s ) . o f Mahevara Thou be

He shall take o n e thread a n d p l a c e it on the h e a d of the deity. After t h a t let h i m p e r f o r m t h e w o r s h i p this mantra"O worship lord thee of g o d s Paramevara ! in the morning.

h a s t b e e n i n v o k e d for t h e w o r s h i p . shall Please present n e a r the 30. morning 31. materials got ready." T h e night or Keava2 Adhivsa r i t e s h a l l

t h u s b e p e r f o r m e d for o n e He shall be after w o r s h i p p i n g

three nights. he shall put the three

awake throughout the night a n d in the

Pavitrakas t h e b e s t , t h e m i d d l i n g a n d t h e s m a l l e s t i n o r d e r . H e s h a l l s h o w i n c e n s e a n d i n s p i r e w i t h mantras. the n a m e s of be Let the knots he shall worship with Reciting 32.

flowers a n d other things. It shall a g a i n w o r s h i p p e d w i t h Gyatri a n d t h e n t h e e n d o f this s a c r e d t h r e a d be d e d i c a t e d to the deity.

h e l d b y h i s s o n s , wife, e t c .
1. image. 2. Visnu. Application of scents. Adhivsa or a Adhivsana divinity also means its prelimian

nary consecration of om i m a g e , m a k i n g

assume

a b o d e in

1.43.43
33. "I am holding in front o f y o u

139 this b e a u t i f u l Pavi-

traka w i t h p u r e k n o t s , d e s t r u c t i v e o f t h e g r e a t e s t i n i q u i t y , d i s p e l l ing all sins." 34. (Having said s o ) the devotee shall p l a c e the three t h r e a d s ( b e s t , m i d d l i n g a n d the s m a l l e s t ) i n o r d e r . " T h i s i s t h e p u r e r e f u l g e n c e o f Visnu t h a t d e s t r o y s a l l sins. 35. After 36. 37. In order to acquire worshipping the virtue, love and wealth I w e a r shall this r o u n d m y n e c k . " g a r l a n d of wild flowers he d e d i c a t e it w i t h its o w n mantra. After m a k i n g v a r i o u s k i n d s o f food-offerings, In a sacrificial p i t twelve agulas one hundred him worship in l e n g t h let h i m let him m a k e o b l a t i o n s a n d offerings o f f l o w e r s . w o r s h i p fire a n d offer a Pavitra 38. preceptor 39. Then O Hara, let a n d e i g h t agulas Visvaksena this and the mantra in

l o n g . L e t h i m first offer Arghya to t h e S u n a n d t h e n a Pavitra. w i t h Arghya, e t c . T h e n let h i m recite

front o f the d e i t y , s t a n d i n g w i t h t h e j o i n e d p a l m s . O S u r e v a r a , 1 w h e t h e r I k n o w it c o m p l e t e l y or I am i g n o r a n t , I h a v e c o m p l e t e d t h e w o r s h i p . D u e t o t h y g r a c e let i t b e fulfilled. 40. Mandara2 41. (As if it was) with flowers, J u s t as jewels, corals and garlands of O Garudadhvaja,3 let this Srhvatsari thou wearest also the Vanaml and (Annual) Kaustubha

worship be dedicated unto thee. a l w a y s o n t h y chest, s o 42. be pleased t o w e a r this Pavitra the prayer t h u s , let

the g a r l a n d of threads too. After w o r s h i p p i n g a n d r e c i t i n g h i m feed t h e b r a h m i n s a n d g i v e t h e m Daksins* a n d s e n d t h e m off i n t h e e v e n i n g . 43. T h e n e x t d a y h e s h a l l s a y t h u s : " O Pavitraka, a f t e r discharged. Be p l e a s e d to f i n i s h i n g t h e Smvatsari Pj t h o u a r t go now to the world of V i s n u . "
1. 2. 3. 4. L o r d of the deities. the i m a g e of G a r u d a .

P e r h a p s c a l o t r o p i s g i g a n t e a o r C . p r o c e r a VN, p . 3 2 . (Visnu) in whose banner is An offering, as a fee or r e m u n e r a t i o n , to the p r e c e p t o r or to t h e

brhmanas.

140

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER F O R T Y F O U R
(Contemplation of Brahman Hari said : 1. Hari. ctive 2. a n d the ledge. After worshipping on Brahman of My shall with Pavitra, e t c . if the devotee or Visnu's form)

meditates deeply

he shall (Illusion). restrict

b e c o m e identical with

I shall now The mind

d e s c r i b e t h e m e d i t a t i o n on Brahman d e s t r u speech with the m i n d (the great am

of t h e m a c h i n e in

intelligent

t h e soul w h i c h i s o f t h e f o r m o f p u r e k n o w -

T h e i n t e l l e c t s h a l l b e c o n f i n e d t o t h e Mahat Samdhi1 or Spiritual Trance is Brahman that vital the is three shorn Gunas, the

p r i n c i p l e ) i f o n e w i s h e s for p u r e k n o w l e d g e i n t h e s o u l . 3-5. Brahmanthe the five realisation I sense and of b o d y , birth organs,

m i n d , intellect, the elements, is Brahman t h a t

airs, the ego, the subtle d e v o i d of true,

particles of feeding; the

self-luminous, flourishing, It is the

forms, beginningless without a second and the three

a n d o f t h e n a t u r e o f p e r p e t u a l B l i s s ; t h e Brahman t h a t i s e t e r n a l , pure, conscious, (real reme Gunas). 6. Know the Soul t o b e like a charioteer, the body is and m i n d the subsidiary the c h a r i o t ; know the intellect to senses. 7-9. sense-organs experience). T h e l e a r n e d speak o f the soul i n conjunction with and He the who m i n d a s t h e Bhoktr ( E n j o y e r o f w o r l d l y is e n d o w e d w i t h t h e v e h i c l e o f Vijna concentrated rein t h e mind attains soul crosses of that the With real knowledge Visnu. to be the driver entity). position. blissful, the trinity f o u r t h i m p e r i s h a b l e Brahman t h e s u p -

(Fourthbeyond

rein; the sense-organs are the horses; the objects a r e

( R e a l perception) as the

a n d a full

supreme position. He is not born again. charioteer a n d m i n d as the Gag. That is the is c a l l e d Tama Divine supreme

position

Non-violence etc.

(Restraint).

P u r i t y , e t c . is

c a l l e d Niyama ( r e l i g i o u s r i t u a l ) .

1.

Samdhi means perfect absorption of

thought

into

one

subject

of

meditation, e.g. the supreme spirit.

1.44.15 10. yma. T h e withdrawal Jaya; 11. ( o f t h e senses f r o m t h e o b j e c t s ) T h e Togic p a s t u r e s o f Padma ( s q u a t t i n g p o s t u r e ) Full

141 etc.

a r e c a l l e d Asanas.

c o n t r o l o v e r t h e b r e a t h i s c a l l e d Prnis called

Dhyna is t h e m e d i t a t i o n on t h e L o r d . T h e s t a b i l i s a t i o n o f t h e m i n d i s Dhran a n d Samdhi mind, then the

i s t h e e x i s t e n c e i n Brahman, ( i . e . R e a l i s a t i o n t h a t I a m B r a h m a n ) . If at first, it is not possible to concentrate the devotee shall m e d i t a t e on an idol. 12. be In the middle of the p e r i c a r p of the lotus Of t h e and Gad shall h e a r t t h e f o r m o f V i s n u b e a r i n g akha, Cakra meditated upon

e n d o w e d w i t h rivatsa ( t h e i n d e l i b l e c o n -

g e n i t a l m a r k ) a n d t h e g e m Kaustubha, r e f u l g e n t w i t h t h e g l o w o f t h e g a r l a n d o f forest f l o w e r s . 13. intelligent always be He is the s u p r e m e L o r d the and known as eternal, the pure, the T r u t h a n d Bliss. T h e devotee shall

c o n s c i o u s " I a m t h e tman, t h e s u p r e m e Brahman, V i s n u o f twenty-four different f o r m s 1 Hari can all (incarnations)

the great L i g h t . " 14. i s s e a t e d o n t h e lagrma s t o n e . 15. come The devotee shall also be m e d i t a t e d desires (aerial and and bethe

u p o n or worshipped as staying in D v r a k , 2 etc. acquire in Vimna prayers Deva moving about chariot)..

C o n t e m p l a t i n g on the idol, singing

reciting

n a m e s , t h e d e v o t e e , free f r o m d e s i r e s , s h a l l a t t a i n s a l v a t i o n .

1. spirals

A stone

held s a c r e d a n d worshipped by

the Vaisnavas, highly 275.) the

b e c a u s e itsto

are supposed to contain or to

be typical of Visnu. (CDHM p.

It is an ammonite according

found in the river G a n d a k a , the n u m b e r of its spirals a n d 2. Krsna's capital in there from N o r t h India.

a n d i s v a l u e d m o r e o r less perforations. Gujrat sea-coast after

Ydavas

migrated

T h e r e i s a m o d e r n city o f this n a m e i n G u j r a t .

142

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER FORTYFIVE
Characteristics Hari said 1. : R e l e v e n t t o t h e c o n t e x t I shall e x p l a i n t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t h e sins of a of lagrma

t i c s of lagrma stone a t o u c h of w h i c h d e s t r o y s crore of births. 2. Gaddhara (Visnu) bearing for akha,

Cakra, of

Gad a n d meditaKaumodaki Abja and as

Padma is c a l l e d Keava. o f the w e a p o n s s h a l l b e tion]. T h e supreme {gad) 3. Govinda 4. Padma, 5. who and Obeisance akha. 6.

( I n this a n d t h o s e t h a t follow, t h e o r d e r preserved lord the success holding Abja ( P a d m a ) , akha, be

Cakra a n d akha is Nryana. rigaddhara ( V i s n u ) w e a r i n g Gad, akha, Cakra Abja, and b e a r i n g Cakra, He the can form (Visnu). of worshiped

Gad is Mdhava Gaddhara

akha a n d Cakra. of Visnu bearing to Madhusdana Vmana Padma Abja, Gad. Obeisance (the

O b e i s a n c e unto thee

mrti ( f o r m took

b e a r i n g akha, Abja, Gad a n d Cakra. incarnation three s t e p s ) b e a r i n g Gad, Cakra, akha a n d Abja.

O b e i s a n c e u n t o Traivikrama u n t o Vmana

mrti, b e a r i n g Cakra, Kaumodaki, ridhara-mrti bearing Cakra,

Obeisance unto Cakra. unto Gad

akha a n d Gad. akha a n d 7. b e a r i n g Abja, Padma. 8. and

O b e i s a n c e u n t o Hrsikea b e a r i n g Abja, Gad a n d thee and in the form O of Padmanbha1 Dmodara,2 Cakra, Gad obeiand

Obeisance Cakra,

akha.

sance, obeisance

unto thee

bearing

akha,

O b e i s a n c e u n t o Vsudeva b e a r i n g

Cakra,

akha, Gad Cakra

a n d Abja. O b e i s a n c e u n t o Sakarsana b e a r i n g akha, Abja, Gad.

1. lotus'. 2. tried

N a m e of Visnu, N a m e of Visnu.

literally m e a n i n g ' f r o m

whose

navel comes

out

more properly of K r s n a because

his foster m o t h e r 80.)

to tie h i m up with a r o p e (daman)

r o u n d h i s b e l l y (udara). (CDHM p .

1.45.17
9. Abja a n d Abja Gad and 10. Obeisance Cakra. O b e i s a n c e to Purusottama-mrti akha, Cakra a n d Padma. Nrsirhha-mrti to b e a r i n g Padma, bearing to Pradyumna-mrti b e a r i n g akha, Cakra. O b e i s a n c e

143
Gad, u n t o Aniruddha b e a r i n g Gad, akha, Abja, akha,

a n d Cakra. 11.

O b e i s a n c e u n t o t h e e in t h e f o r m of Adhokfqja1 Gad,

b e a r i n g Gad,

Obeisance unto

akha and Cakra. 12. Gad, and I

Obeisance

Acyuta-mrti2

b e a r i n g Padma,

Cakra, akha a n d Gad. i n v o k e Janrdana3 h e r e b e a r i n g obeisance unto thee, akha. Cakra, Abja, Gad and akha, Cakra, Abja O Upendra* h a v i n g a n d Gad. O b e i s a n c e , Cakra, Padma 13. Cakra a n d 14. ring-like 15. i n front, Sakarsana. 16-17. akha.

O b e i s a n c e u n t o Hari-mrti5 b e a r i n g akha. T h e lagrma s t o n e w h i t e marks at the entrance in

O b e i s a n c e u n t o Srikrsna-mrti b e a r i n g Gad, Abja, colour that has two

i s c a l l e d Vsudeva.

Let Lord lotus called

V i s n u presiding over it protect you all. T h e stone red in colour, h a v i n g the m a r k of a with two If it clearly defined ring-like marks, is is yellow in colour with stone is ringlike

marks not a long It the

c l e a r l y d e f i n e d it is c a l l e d Pradyumna. Aniruddha b l u e in c o l o u r ; it h a s a p e r t u r e at the top, it h a s three lines at the lateral a p e r t u r e . is circular in shape. t h e f o r m o f Gad i n T h e Nryana s t o n e i s b l a c k i n the middle, with the Cakra lines at

colour with

1. 2. the in per

Name

of Visnu. a n a m e of Visnu or Krsna. with final It has been variously in and procreated things", from his

Unfallen;

i n t e r p r e t e d as signifying " h e w h o does not perish M a h b h r a t a as nature". 3. (CDHM 4. 5. p. " h e who is not distinct from firm, the S k a n d a P u r n a as " h e who never declines It can also m e a n 'one who is (CDHM p . 2; SSED p . as as p. 7).

emancipation",

(or varies)

one who does not yield to or Visnu; but other

passions.

T h e adored of mankind; A n a m e of offered, 'extirpator the 116.) 133). N a m e of Visnu (SSED A name younger

Krsna

derivations are

of the

wicked, by

akarcrya. fifth or

brother o f I n d r a i n his

dwarf incarnation.

of V i s n u .

144 centre that 18. is lifted u p .

Garuda

Purna

T h e s t o n e c a l l e d Nrsirhha h a s a s t o u t M a y it two protect uneven It has called us. ring three Krsna garis five dots. Only Brahmacrins (stu-

chest a n d t h r e e d o t s . I t i s t a w n y i n c o l o u r . Or it m a y have d e n t s ) shall w o r s h i p it. 19. lines. T h e Krma T h e lagrma w i t h mrti2 i s b l u e dots. in

-like m a r k s i s c a l l e d Varhaaktiliga.1 It is stout a n d has 20. l a n d of circular leftside. 21. May

M a y it protect us. colour. the stone

depressed at the back a n d having circular curb protect you. L e t t h e ridhara s t o n e m a r k e d w i t h five lines, a forest 1 flowers a n d and short. club protect us. Vmana stone

Surevara s t o n e h a s a r i n g l i k e m a r k o n the colours and forms

T h e Anantaka s t o n e i s o f v a r i o u s

with serpentine m a r k s . 22. small

T h e Dmodara s t o n e i s s t o u t a n d o f b l u e is of crimson colour. It has a

c o l o u r . I n its m i d d l e t h e r e i s a ring-like m a r k o f d e e p b l u e c o l o u r . T h e Brahma s t o n e aperture. 23. M a y it protect you. has a I t h a s a l o n g line a stout and a ring-

ringlike m a r k a n d a large lotus in the a p e r t u r e . Hayagriva s t o n e d a r k spots. big aperture, has a like m a r k a n d 24. T h a t which five lines i n t h e gem. It

f o r m of a g o a d is Kaustubha s t o n e . Vaikunfha* s t o n e is l u s t r o u s like precious has a single ringlike m a r k a n d a lotus. It is dark in colour. T h e M a t s y a 4 s t o n e i s o f g r e a t l e n g t h i n t h e f o r m o f a l o t u s w i t h lines at the aperture. 25. left and lines M a y it protect you. on the the right and dark in colour protect you. staying in lagrma in us t h e which' M a y t h e Trivikrama? s t o n e w i t h r i n g l i k e m a r k o n t h e lord with Gad

Obeisance unto Dvrak. 26-27.

M a y t h e Laksminryana* s t o n e with four

protect

stone that has one aperture

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

ringlike

marks,

T h e indicator of the power of the B o a r Refers to the Tortoise-incarnation This is supposed to

(incarnation of Vinsu). resides. Sometimes

of Visnu.

be a p a r a d i s e where Visnu

V i s n u i s a l s o c a l l e d vaikunfha. Refers to the Fish-incarnation of Visnu. V i s n u is c a l l e d Trivkrama because he took three steps at the time of

Tmasa-incarnation. N a m e of Visnu. Literally L a k s m i a n d N r y a n a .

1.45.34 i s b e d e c k e d w i t h g a r l a n d o f forest in the form of c o w ' s hoofs. It flower. T h e 28. flowers.

145 It h a s g o l d e n lines
1

is of the s h a p e of a Kadamba with a

Sudarana c l a s s o f s t o n e s i s m a r k e d

single Laksmi class

characteristic. M a y V i s n u presiding over it protect us. T h e Caturvyha2 c l a s s is The nryana c l a s s is m a r k e d w i t h t w o f e a t u r e s , with three features. features: 29. with seven. the 30. t h e Vsudeva c l a s s w i t h five. T h e Pradyumna class w i t h six a n d t h e Sakarsana c l a s s T h e Purusottama c l a s s i s m a r k e d w i t h e i g h t f e a t u r e s , T h e Davatra* c l a s s i s m a r k e d w i t h t e n f e a t u r e s a n d eleven. M a y it protect us. The Dvdatm5 class with t h e Trivikrama marked

with four

JVavavyha3 c l a s s w i t h n i n e .

Aniruddha w i t h m o r e features. 31. shall

class is m a r k e d with twelve features a n d the A n a n t a

H e w h o r e a d s this p r a y e r c o n s i s t i n g o f V i s n u ' s f o r m s It ( t h e i m a g e ) has hands and the

g o t o H e a v e n . Brahma i s f o u r - h e a d e d . 32.

a staff a n d two waterpots. T h a t o f Mahevara6 h a s f i v e f a c e s , t e n sarasvatl, T h e idol of the S u n has a lotus in an elephant. Skanda face of e m b l e m of a bull. It has suitable weapons a n d Gauri, Candik, 33. A n d Mahlaksmithe a t t e n d a n t s

t h e h a n d . T h e Gandhipa" h a s t h e h a s six f a c e s . 34. T h e s e images of the

different c h a r a c t e r i s t i c f e a t u r e s mansions after d u l y owner of that building

shall be duly worshipped

and installed in

consecrating the plot of land. T h e n the a n d o t h e r benefits.

s h a l l o b t a i n V i r t u e , W e a l t h , fulfilment o f d e s i r e s , e m a n c i p a t i o n

1. A n t h o c e p h a l u s indicus. (GVDB p . 70.) 2. It refers to the worship of Visnu in four-fold forms of V s u d e v a , Sakarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha. 3. T h e worship of Visnu in nine forms. T h e y are, according to Garuda PurnaVsudeva. Balarma, K a m a (Pradyumna), Aniruddha, N r y a n a , Brahma, Visnu, S i m h a (Nrsirhha) and V a r h a ( GPEA p p . 332-3).' 4. F o r t e n i n c a r n a t i o n s o f V i s n u s e e p . 2 , fn. 6 . 5. T w e l v e forms of Visnu, to be worshippd in each month of the year, viz., K e a v a , N r y a n a , M d h a v a , V s u d e v a , T r i v i k r a m a , V m a n a , ridhara, Pradyumna, Hrsikea, Padmanbha, D m o d a r a and Aniruddha. (GPEA, p . 3 3 3 ) . 6. 7. iva. Ganea.

146 CHAPTER F O R T Y S I X
Vstu-pj1 Hari said : 1. I s h a l l n o w briefly d e s c r i b e t h e Vstu

Garuda

Purna

Pj

(worship

of the site) which destroys obstacles in B e g i n n i n g from the north-east t o e i g h t y - o n e feet. 2-3.

the building of houses.

corner the worship shall extend

T h e Vstu Purusa's2 h e a d i s w o r s h i p p e d i n t h e n o r t h In building shall be temporary sheds, houses, cities, outside the plot

e a s t ; t h e feet i n t h e s o u t h - w e s t a n d t h e h a n d s i n t h e s o u t h - e a s t a n d north-west. v i l l a g e s , b a z a a r s , p a l a c e s , p a r k s , forts, t e m p l e s a n d m o n a s t e r i e s the twentytwo deities a n d thirteen within. 4-7. judha Vitatha'!,Graha8, T h e deities Ksetra,9 a r e : a,
5 6

worshipped

Parjanya,3

Jayanta*,

Kuli-

(Indra),*Srya,

Satya , the

Bhrgu , ka two Tamas,

(sky), Gandharva,

Vyu, Psan, Bhrgurja,

lv p j m e a n s 2. in the demon,

Vstu

m e a n s t h e site for b u i l d i n g a n d a l s o t h e h o u s e .

Hence

VstuIt

the w o r s h i p of the site c h o s e n for b u i l d i n g a t e m p l e or a house. deity of the site. assumed fell a from

is t r e a t e d as a m u s t for the s a f e a n d s o u n d c o n s t r u c t i o n . Vstu-pwrufa i s t h e p r e s i d i n g Matsya-purna, Andhaka. a fierce Drops ghost Lord iva A c c o r d i n g to a l e g e n d kill the and Siva's forehead be ferocious form to

of perspiration c a m e out. we come

therefrom ed. In 3. fied. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. upon 9.

He was given a boon across 342). Vstospati,

by iva. ThereworshippProtector of the

a f t e r h e fell d o w n c o v e r i n g t h e e n t i r e e a r t h . T h e n h e c a m e t o Vedic literature, 395; Houses. (GPEA, p . CDHM, p .

A R g v e d i c deity. Son of Indra. Truth A

He is the deity of the rains or the rains personi-

(personified). the B h r g a v a s . T h e planet V e n u s is

famous sage, progenitor of (personified). It also means

also called Bhrgu. Falsehood T h e planet. Field a class of demons 195.) supposed to seize

children a n d

produce convulsions.

(SSED p .

or ground.

1.46.14. Mrga, Asura,

1

147 Pitrgana, Dauvrika, Sesapdas,

2

Sugrva , Roga*

Puspadanta*
1

Gan&dhipa. Soma,

the

two

Ahimukhya ', Bhallta,

Sarpcfi, Aditi, Ditithese t h i r t y two a r e to be w o r s h i p p e d o u t s i d e . L i s t e n t o t h e four t o b e w o r s h i p p e d w i t h i n . 8. four scholarly 9. follows I n t h e four c o r n e r s b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e n o r t h - e a s t , t h e therein shall be his worshipped eight by the devotee. In : Aryaman10,
13

devas s t a t i o n e d

T h e y a r e pa, Svitra9, the east. Vivasvn11,

Jaya a n d Rudra. attendants all Their names are as Vibudhdhipa12, Mitra,

t h e m i d d l e , Brahma a n d

r o u n d s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d from 10. Rjayaskm , 11. is r o u n d Brahma. 12. Durdhara. 13. And Savilr,

Prthvidhara. A n d t h e e i g h t h pavatsa. T h e s e a r e t o b e p l a c e d a l l T h e g r o u p of deities b e g i n n i n g with north-east that beginning Sakra15, with and south-east Gandharvaga is called

c a l l e d Durga. These VstudevasAditi, Himavanta1*, Jayanta, s h a l l first houses a n d front.

Nyik, Klik,

b e w o r s h i p p e d a n d then only the-work o f b u i l d i n g palaces should be commenced. 14.

T h e i m a g e o f Brhaspati16 s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n

T h e kitchen shall be m a d e in the south-east with a ventilator

1. 2. 3. in 4. of the Rhu. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Disease (personified). Reference m a y be to Generally means The sun. Vsuki. a serpent. 5. T h e constellation M r g a i r a s . A door-keeper. He helped Rma of one (CDHM, p . 306). T h e monkey-chief mentioned in the R m y a n a .

his w a r a g a i n s t R v a n a . guardian Asura elephants. generally

O n e of the attendants of iva: P u s p a d a n t a is also the n a m e means a demon.

H o w e v e r , it is also the n a m e of

O n e of the Adi tyas. T h e sun. Indra. T h e disease called Himalaya. Indra. Brhaspati is a R g v e d i c deity. He is also is as called well Brahmanaspati. called Purohita. I n of the prayers. He consumption.

He is invoked as the deity

148 just enough 15. t o let a m o n k e y p a s s erected. for s t o r i n g paved scents room through.

Garuda

Purna

In the east, t h e

sacrificial altar shall be The m a d e in the north-east 16. Au/a-grass, south-west. 17. The

a n d flowers shall be The store-room north-west.

with

slabs.

shall be m a d e in the north a n d the cowshed in the T h e water-shed fuel, (Bathroom?) be to be m a d e in the west.

having windows is constructed in the

T h e r o o m for s t o r i n g s a c r i f i c i a l t w i g s ,

weapons, etc. shall guest-room shall be

in the south.

It shall be

furnished with b e d s , seats, s a n d a l s , w a t e r pots, fire, l a m p s , etc. It shall be beautifully laid out a n d servants shall be employed to look to their 18. 19. Other An comfort. houses shall be shall be m a d e fully erected five bedecked with hastas ( c u b i t s )

flowers of five colours, p l a n t a i n trees, water sheds, etc. outer wall h i g h . T h u s Vifnu-rama s h a l l b e m a d e w i t h g a r d e n s a n d p a r k s . 20. In the c a s e o f p a l a c e s , e t c . , t h e Vstu o f s i x t y - f o u r a r e t o h a v e t w o feet e a c h . Along

feet i s t o b e w o r s h i p p e d . I n t h e m i d d l e , Brahma o c c u p i e s f o u r feet a n d Aryaman, e t c . , 21.

I n t h e h y p o t e u n s e ikh1 e t c , a r e t h e D e i t i e s . t w o feet e a c h .

with t h e m the other deities shall h a v e 22.

T h u s it has been explained how the deities c o m e to Caraki, Vidri, Pian

2

o c c u p y s i x t y - f o u r feet. 23. corners. Tripurnta, 24. shipped; Shall be Hetuka a n d Agni

a n d Pparksasi, and other

worshipped others Tama,

in the north-east

a r e to be a d o r e d outsideHetuka,

Vetlaka,

Agnijihva, in Ptla

Klaka,

Karla,

and

Ekapdaka. is

In

the

n o r t h - e a s t Bhimarpa

(Terrific Pretanyaka.

in a p p e a r a n c e s )

to be wor-

later mythology he is referred to m o r e as the as a deity. 1. 2. It is also the n a m e of

preceptor

of the

deities pp.

than 63-4).

the planet Jupiter.

(CDHM,

Fire. A d e m o n e s s w h o w a s k i l l e d b y K r s n a w h e n h e w a s still a child.

1.46.36
25. A n d in the s k y Gandhamlin. Then Ksetraplas

149 are

to be worshipped. 26. Divided

T h e length divided by the widththat n u m o f t h e Vstu. remainder is called ya. this (Rksabhga). by eight, the

b e r i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e t h e Ri1

M u l t i p l y it by eight a n d divide by seven. 27-28. b y four. Consider If it what remains is multiplied by is Jiva. T h e n divide by

a s Rksa. M u l t i p l y

n i n e . W h a t r e m a i n s i s Vyaya a c c o r d e i g h t i t s h a l l b e Pinda.3 quotient is Marana

ing to D e v a l a 2 . 29. (death). 30. matter. and 31. What

D i v i d e it by sixty. remains The N o o n e s h a l l b u i l d h o u s e s b e h i n d t h e Vstu. T h e y a r e H e s h a l l s l e e p o n his left s i d e . N o h e s i t a t i o n i n this F o r p e r s o n s b o r n i n t h e z o d i a c a l s i g n o f Simha* Kany,5 t h e m a i n d o o r is g o o d if m a d e i n t h e n o r t h . F o r the persons born of Vrcika,7 etc. the door is must T h e d o o r shall There

t o b e b u i l t i n s i d e t h e Vstu.

Tula6

a d v i s e d in the east, south a n d west in order. h a v e two units 32. 33. if it of length a n d one unit of width. is slanting to the south, result. to the south-east, be eight doors at least in a house. If the b e d If it

d e a t h due to a imprisonment is

s e r p e n t , issuelessness a n d i m p o t e n c y m a y is slanting

the result, if t o w a r d s north-west, b i r t h of a son a n d satisfaction; is to the north, harassment by 34-35. king, doors. the king, if t o w a r d s west, sickness. I f t h e d o o r i s i n the n o r t h t h e n t h e r e i s fear f r o m issuelessness, enmity, wealth, loss of of son. I shall now say a b o u t the eastern wealth a n d honour, results if the are the d e a t h of infants,

w e a l t h , faults, d e a t h 36.

F e a r from fire, plenty of daughters, D e a t h of king, sickness, these

d o o r is in the east.

In the north-east, etc., let it be in the e a s t ;

in the south-east, etc., let it be in the south.

1. T h e n u m b e r s o r f i g u r e s p u t d o w n for a n y s u c h a s a d d i n g , m u l t i p l y i n g , e t c . (SSED, p . 4 6 9 ) . arithmetical an operation astronomer.

2. T h e r e a r e several m e n o f this n a m e . O n e w a s (CDHM p. 85). 3. S u m , t o t a l a m o u n t i n a r i t h m e t i c . (SSED p . 3 3 6 . ) 4. Leo. 5. Virgo. 6. Libra. 7. Scorpio.

150 37. In the south-west, etc. let i t b e i n

Garuda

Purna

the west; in the

north-west, e t c . let 38. planted in If

it be in the north. W h e n divided by eight, Plaksa,2 Nyagrodha* a n d Slmali5 ( S i l k are worshipped, and cotton Udumbara* tree) in are the

these a r e the results of doors. Avattha,1 the east

north-east a n d they

it shall be

beneficent to

the house a n d p a l a c e .

CHAPTER

FORTYSEVEN of Palaces

Characteristics Sta said 1-2. palaces. : I shall now describe listen

the characteristic T h e plot shall

features of be divided The

O aunaka,

t o it.

i n t o sixty-four s q u a r e s w i t h t h e q u a r t e r s d i s t i n c t l y m a r k e d . for w a l l s . 3.

d o o r s a r e t w e l v e i n a l l . F o r t y e i g h t d i v i s i o n s a r e t o b e set a p a r t T h e Jagh ( c a l f ) , i.e. t h e h e i g h t o f t h e p l i n t h , s h a l l b e length of the platform a b o v e the g r o u n d a n d b e ukghri, the h e i g h t of shall b e twice t h a t . T h e

equal to the yond that it

the inner vault, shall be as large 4. T h e depressions on

a s its b a s e . side shall m e a s u r e v a u l t , rising a third

either

o r a f i f t h o f the

c h o r d o f the i n n e r

u p t o the h a l f

of the entire height of the p i n n a c l e . 5. T h e w h o l e h e i g h t o f the p i n n a c l e s h a l l b e d i v i d e d inT h e super-structure figure edging is over the third part and the e n t i r e h e i g h t s h a l l b e o n t h e

t o four p a r t s . the o r n a m e n t a l fourth p a r t .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Ficus religiosa. Ficus Lacor.

(GVDB, p .

29.)

(GVDB, p . 2 6 4 . ) (GVDB, p. 356.) 5i.) (GVDB, p . 397.)

Ficusbengalensis. Ficus racemosa.

(GVDB, p .

Salmalia malabarica. B o m b a x ceiba.

1.47.20
6-7. and parts. in the

151 O r let t h e Vstu b e d i v i d e d i n t o s i x t e e n e q u a l p a r t s middle the inner vault be constructed over four

O v e r the r e m a i n i n g twelve parts, the wall shall be r a i s e d 8. T h e height of the pinnacle is twice t h e h e i g h t o f t h e o f the h e i g h t to a inner

with the height well-proportioned. wall. T h e circular verandah 9-10. edifice 11. T h e outlets on in shall b e one-fourth

of the pinnacle in width. t h e four s i d e s shall shall be equal be equal or to the fifth of the vault vault from above. T h i s is the general feature of a p a l a c e ( o r a t e m p l e ) . b a s e d on the size of the I shall now mention the dimensions 12. breadth. T h e Mukhamandapa frontal

(protruding promontory)

idol. T h e pedestal shall be as large as the idol. O a u n a k a , the sanctum s a n c t o r u m T h e wall shall pinnacle is be of the s a m e shall b e t w i c e size and the the the that all r o u n d . 13-14. vault depressions (dimensions

c a l f ( t h e h e i g h t o f t h e p l i n t h ) s h a l l b e h a l f o f it. The t w i c e t h e calf, O a u n a k a ; occupied by the pedestal; called T h i s is covers the entire space

a n d outlets

as before.

Liga-Mna I shall accord-

in a c c o r d a n c e with the size

of the i d o l ) .

n o w m e n t i o n Dvra-Mna 15. Multiply

(where the dimensions are in length u p t o

a n c e with the size of d o o r - f r a m e s ) . the total t h e tip o f t h e h a n d be the that twice t h a t also. above ( o f the idol) by four; a n d width of the door. 16. 17. one-eighth of the s a m e shall

I f o n e wishes, i t s h a l l b e

U p t o t h e half, t h e d o o r i s a s u s u a l a n d

it contains holes. A p a r t of the door is taken by the wall. T h e p l i n t h i s e q u a l t o its w i d t h ( w i d t h o f t h e d o o r ) ; t h e p i n n a c l e i s twice t h a t ; t h e v a u l t shall b e m a d e , a s b e f o r e , a s high as the outlet. 18-19. is type. I h a v e d e s c r i b e d t h e mandapa-mna the p l a t f o r m ) . the exterior I shall be (measurement another multiplied by T h e inner r i m a c c o r d a n c e with gives mention

T h e s p a c e o c c u p i e d b y the idols shall dimensions. all r o u n d the

twelve which side. 20.

shall be one fourth in a r e a , The

temple on the inner twice the a r e a o f

sanctum sanctorum shall be

152 the rim. T h e s a m e is the height of is t w i c e . 21-22. temples. ka, 3) I shall 4) mention Mlik, the origin 5) Trivistapa. and 1) the wall a n d

Garuda

Purna

the pinnacle dimensions of the

T h e r e a r e five t y p e s of t e m p l e s : Kailsa, for a l l o t h e r t e m p l e s . is circular; the

Vairja, 2)PuspaThey are

sources (models) 23.

T h e first o n e i s s q u a r e fourth i s o v a l and built the on are

in s h a p e ; the second is rectangular. T h e third fifth i s o c t a g o n a l i n 24-27. s q u a r e in Vimna, and angular Mandira, vema. 28-30. in shape, Mukul, Gaja, and T e m p l e s built on the are nine: viz. Valaya, model Dundubhi, o f Kaila, Padma, circular Mahpadma, a r e nine : shape. All beautiful temples are on the nine Rucaka, model Mandana, of

t h e m o d e l o f t h e s e ) . T h e y a r e forty-five i n a l l . Temples built Vairja shape and c o n s i s t of sorts, viz., Meru, Mandara, Mandivardhana a n d rectlgrha, Sibiko f Puspaka Grharja, and Uttambha

Bhadraka, in Vimna,

Sarvatobhadra, are

rivatsa.

T e m p l e s built on the m o d e l shape nine Brahmamandira, Bhavana,

: Valabhi,

Usnisi, akha, Vrsabha, 31-33. Hamsa,

Kalaa a n d Guvvrksa. Garuda, built are Sirhha, on

T e m p l e s b u i l t on t h e Bhdhara, Srijaya of Cakra, and Trivistapa, Mustika, Vijaya. Crescent,

m o d e l o f Manik Prthividhara.

Mlik, o v a l o r g l o b u l a r i n s h a p e , Bhmukha, the model Vajra, rivrksa

Temples in shape,

octagonal Babhru,

nine:viz. Gad,

Vakra,

Svastikabhaga,

Mandapas1 a r e m a d e i n t h e f o r m s o f T r i a n g l e s , L o t u s ,

Q u a d r i l a t e r a l a n d B i - o c t a g o n a l . I f t h e mandapa i s t r i a n g u l a r , t h e o w n e r shall w i n a k i n g d o m ; i f l o t u s - s h a p e d , w e a l t h ; i f c r e s c e n t , longevity; 34. Quadrilateral, birth of a son a n d the bi-octagonal, women and prosperity. 35. T h e banner s h a l l b e f i x e d , Garbha-grha the entrance. befitting t h e q u a l i t y

o r s a n c t u m s a n c t o r u m shall b e m a d e a t s h a l l b e m a d e . Bhadra s h a l l b e m a d e 36-37. mandapas 1. It can have windows equal to are m a d e The halls.

Mandapas e q u a l i n n u m b e r a n d

o n e - f o u r t h o f t h e mandapa.

o r n o t . I n s o m e p l a c e s the

o n e a n d a h a l f t i m e s o r twice the

1.48.1 length of the wall. temples, 38-39. With Ornamental cornices shall be

153 m a d e on

spaces of unequal length of various shapes The t e m p l e Meru is four d o o r s b e d e c k e d w i t h four mandapas a n d or turrets. Cupolas and can be constructed shapes too, they differ (arches).

i n b e t w e e n a n d l i n e s o f different l e n g t h s . the best, a b a s e of a hundred 40. pinnacles In

o v e r t h e m w i t h t h r e e Bhadras structure,

dimensions

variously. T h e r e are m a n y with bases a n d s o m e with no bases. 41-42. differ. D u e t o t h e difference i n i m a g e s the temples D u e t o t h e difference i n c o n s e c r a t i o n , s t r u c t u r e , s p e c i a l (not m a n - m a d e )

c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e d e i t i e s , etc., t h e r e a r e v a r i e t i e s o f t e m p l e s . W i t h r e g a r d t o d e i t i e s ( i m a g e s ) o f self-origin 43-44. T h e y s e t forth a b o v e . teral with 45-46. tructed in the temples shall t h e r e is no rule governing the construction of temples. b e m a d e a c c o r d i n g t o the dimensions I n front, s m a l l mandapas dances) shall be consthe t e m p l e . In shall be installed They can be square, rectangular, or quadrila-

long terraces, turrets, etc. Dance-halls Dvraplas (for r e l i g i o u s and

s h a l l b e m a d e for t h e v e h i c l e s o f t h e d e i t i e s . the proximity of the m a i n door of (watch ward)

collectively or separately. T h e rest-houses of those who serve in t h e t e m p l e a r e t o b e m a d e a little a w a y 47. flowers and C o v e r e d hedges profusely from the temple. fruits a n d of all. shall worship the shall be m a d e c o n t a i n i n g

watered. T h e devotee

deities to be installed in the temples. P e r s o n s w h o build h i s t e m p l e s enjoy

Vsudeva i s t h e g o d everything.

CHAPTER

FORTYEIGHT of idols

Installation Sta said 1. :

I s h a l l n o w s u c c i n c t l y e x p l a i n t h e m o d e of i n s t a l l a t i o n On an auspicious day, the preceptor

o f the idols o f deities.

s h a l l p e r f o r m the installation rites.

154 2-3.

Garuda

Purna

A l o n g w i t h five or more Rtviks ( s a c r i f i c i a l p r i e s t s ) a as the

b r a h m i n belonging to the central region shall be chosen

m a i n p r i e s t i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e i n j u n c t i o n s i n his b r a n c h o f V e d a o r s i m p l y b y r e c i t i n g the Pran,ava. T h e y m u s t . b e r e c e i v e d w i t h t h e offerings of Pdya a n d 4. The preceptor shall Arghya, mudriks, g a r m e n t s , b e g i n the r i t e after ung u e n t s , flowers, s a n d a l p a s t e s , e t c . performing mantra-nysa. 5. A mandapa s h a l l be m a d e t e n hastas s q u a r e in front make mandapas twelve cubits square. It must

of the temple. Some h a v e sixteen p i l l a r s . 6-7. be Sand In the m i d d l e there shall be the altar four

cubits s q u a r e . T h e r e shall be eight flags fitted to the pillars. taken from the confluence of two rivers shall T h e sacrificial p i t s s h a l l b e m a d e o f shall be square. They strewn over the altar.

various s h a p e s s q u a r e , segmem-shaped (bow-like), circular or in the form of a lotus. Or all of t h e m m u s t b e five i n a l l . 8. With t h e p r e l i m i n a r y nti rite ( f o r p e a c e f u l (ghee-offering i n the fire) compleat the t i o n o f t h e m a i n t a s k ) a n d for t h e a c h i e v e m e n t o f a l l d e s i r e s , t h e p r i e s t s h a l l b e g i n t h e homa h e a d of the i m a g e . 9-10. paste. Four five In S o m e d e s i r e t h a t this b e p e r f o r m e d coat and main in the northof cowdung poles of tree e a s t after s c r u b b i n g t h e f l o o r a n d a p p l y i n g a Nyagrodha, branches, 11. Udumbara, Avattha, Bilva, long,
1

d o o r s s h a l l b e m a d e . F o r festoons, Pala
2

Khadira

cubits the four

shall

b e fixed a n d d e c o r a t e d w i t h

coloured cloths a n d flowers. main q u a r t e r s four p i t s s h a l l b e m a d e figure of the lion in t h e each a cubit deep. south. 12. T h a t o f a b u l l i n t h e west a n d t h a t o f d i v i n e tiger i n installation
3

I n t h e e a s t e r n g a t e the

shall be installed; that

o f Uccairavas ( t h e d i v i n e h o r s e )

the north. T h e mantraAgnimile ,

1. 2. 3.

of lion

shall

be

with

the

Vedic

etc.
(GVDB, p. 2 7 4 . ) p. 241.)

Aegle marmelos. RV. 1.1.1.

Butea monosperma.

(GVDB,

1.58.22 13. The i n s t a l l a t i o n o f the

155 horse in the south, shall be b u l l in t h e

w i t h t h e mantrahe tv,1 etc., the i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e w e s t s h a l l be w i t h t h e mantraAgna yhi2, e t c . 14.

A n d t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e c e l e s t i a l tiger i n t h e n o r t h

s h a l l b e w i t h t h e mantraanno Devi3, e t c . T h e f l a g i n t h e e a s t i s cloud-coloured, that in the south-east is smoke-coloured. 15. That in the south is dark in colour, that in the south-west is d a r k - b l u e a g r e y i s h flag is to be h o i s t e d in the w e s t ; t h a t i n t h e north-west shall b e y e l l o w . 16. T h e f l a g i n t h e n o r t h i s r e d - c o l o u r e d a n d t h a t i n the In in the the the west the middle, a south-east in the be should flag of various colours consecrated with the T h e f l a g i n the e a s t i s c a l l e d Indra-vidy. flag shall b e south The flag is c a l l e d Tamonorth-east is white. shall be hoisted. 17. nga. The

w i t h Samsupti mantra. T h e flag in 18. mantra-Vta6 is t h e s a m e . 19. T h e y shall paste, 20. be In the mantraRaksohanam*

worshipped is the

north

consecration etc. In

either w i t h t h e north-east too

etc.

or pyyasva?

In t h e middle Visnornu kam? c o v e r e d with two c l o t h s ; b e d e c k e d w i t h s a n d a l -

N e a r every o n e o f t h e g a t e s t w o p o t s s h a l l b e p l a c e d .

A n d m a n y varieties of flowers. T h e y shall be inspired The The of Asmin guardian deities of the q u a r t e r s shall b e

w i t h mantras. 21-22. the Agnimrdhf

w o r s h i p p e d i n t h e m a n n e r l a i d d o w n i n t h e Sstras. efficient d e v o t e e s h a l l use t h e s e mantras for the g u a r d i a n deities Vrkse, Itacaiva : Trtram Indram,s Pracri; Kicedadht, invocation

ca tv10 Abhi tv Deva11 and Im Rudrya.12

1. 2. a. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

VS. RV. RV. RVRV. V. V.

1.1.22. 6.16.10. 10.9.4. or A V . 2.25.1. 10.87.1. 10.186.1. 1 . 9 1 . 1 6 o r 17. 1.154.1.

V . 6.47.11 o r V S . 8.46. R V . 8.44.16. V . 3 . 4 3 . 4 ( ca tvm). R V . 1.24.3. im rudrya R V . 1 . 1 1 4 . 1 o r 7 . 4 6 . 1 .

156 23. The various articles in the for homa

Garuda

Purna

with other ancillary As laid down in purify

objects shall be p l a c e d t h e w h i t e akhas. 24.

north-west.

s a c r e d scriptures, the preceptor shall cast g l a n c e s on a n d T h e r e is no d o u b t in this t h a t the glances. is also Heart Vyhrtis. used

sacrificial a r t i c l e s

b e c o m e purified by 25. vogue for 26. with Astra-mantra all rites.

a n d other limbs shall be in a l l a s s i g n m e n t s as is in and the other materials of articles together with Astra

a s s i g n e d by Pranava w i t h t h e Raw

rice grains all

s a c r i f i c e shall be i n s p i r e d w i t h Astra mantra. T h e p r e c e p t o r shall t o u c h rice-grains shall rite. Beginning with with unguents. the The east a n d ending with norththe mandapa s h a l l assign the shall t h e Ygamantfapa1 w i t h t h e Kua seat inspired

mantra. T h e purificatory 27-28. be smeared

b e s c a t t e r e d a l l a r o u n d after t h e

east, the rice grains shall be scattered. T h e n preceptor

mantras to t h e Arghya-pot as w e l l . W i t h t h e w a t e r in t h e Arghyap o t h e s h a l l s p r i n k l e t h e Ygamand,apa. 29. The Kalaa (pot) of the deity to be installed shall in the south shall be worshipped with b e k n o w n after i t a n d p l a c e d i n t h e n o r t h - e a s t a n d t h e Vardhani Astra-mantra. 30. Just as Kalaa and water j a r s o also the planets shall be p l a c e d a n d Vstospati t o o s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d . A l l t h e s e in their respective seats a n d 31. it and 32. with the 33. (water j a r with s p o u t )

t h e p r e c e p t o r s h a l l r e c i t e Pranava. and s m e a r e d with all

A n d w o r s h i p t h e Kalaa w i t h t h e s a c r e d t h r e a d r o u n d

covered with an excellent cloth T h e deity shall Vardhani be

medicinal herbs a n d unguents. w o r s h i p p e d i n t h e Kalaa a l o n g Afterwards, Vardhani he let h i m Vardhani a n d t h e e x c e l l e n t c l o t h . With water dripping from and the the

w h i r l t h e Kalaa a n d

(water pot with a s p o u t ) . (water-pot shall worship

w i t h a s p o u t ) h e s h a l l s p r i n k l e a n d p l a c e i t i n front. After w o r s h i p p i n g a g a i n t h e Vardhani Kalaa, the deity on the a l t a r g r o u n d .

1. T h e mandapa p r e p a r e d f o r t h e s a c r i f i c e .

1.58.45 34. He Removing t h e Kalaa to the the north-west mantra mantra he

2

157 shall tv1. for

w o r s h i p Ganea in t h e n o r t h - e a s t w i t h suppressing oblations Ganadevas. 35. the shall defects i n t h e p l o t . be offered to the

Gannm Vstospati

s h a l l t h e n w o r s h i p Vstupati w i t h t h e

T o t h e e a s t o f t h e Kalaa, Bhtas (living beings) a n d lambana ( s p l i t Togeyog'e3, etc.

L e t h i m r e a d t h e Vidys a n d p e r f o r m twigs). With the mantra

ting evidently the 36-38.

he s h a l l s p r e a d t h e Kua g r a s s . T h e preceptor in the pedestal with shall for c o m p a n y o f t h e Rtviks s h a l l bath. the V e d i c mantras s h a l l and Jayamathe i m a g e shall be p l a c e d Punyha* be b r o u g h t to the north-east mantra Bhadp l a c e the deity on the in t h e Brahmaratha gala mantras. 39. The The

b e s u n g i n c h o r u s (Brahmaghofd) a n d (chariot) pedestal shall shall

a n d p l a c e d i n t h e mandapa b y t h e p r e c e p t o r . image He be b a t h e d with the then for eyes be the put eye ram karnebhih6 40-41. ing Agnirjyoti6 of the 42. o f the eyes shall ction)
1. 2. 3. 4. ment 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

etc.

the sacred thread on shall be p l a c e d in a golden the

t h e i m a g e a n d m a k e t h e e n t r a n c e , b o w i n g low f r o m far. T h e collyrium vessel the shall mantra, deity bell-metal or copper containing honey a n d ghee. Recits h a l l be p r o b e d w i t h At this t i m e

p r o b i n g twig a n d collyrium shall be a p p l i e d . name (the installer). With the verse shall be a p p l i e d with the five Imam me Gage
7

m e n t i o n e d o n c e b y t h e Sthpaka

cooling etc.

operation

performed

a n d t h e d u s t from t h e A n t - h i l l the Kasya (decoVata

be

mantraAgnirmrdh6

43-45.

With the

mantra Yayyaj*

of the b a r k s of
RV RV. 2.23.1 RV.

trees Bilva, Udumbara, Avattha,

Vstospate

7.54.1. three times at the 340.) commence-

1.30.7. 'this i s a n a u s p i c i o u s d a y ' ceremonies. (SSED p.

Repeating RV. RV. RV RV.

of m o s t religious 1.89.8. 10.75.5. 8.44.16. 6.48.1. S V . 2.1181.

158 and Pala, along with image.

3

Garuda Pacagavya These

Pura

(the m e d i c i n a l m i x t u r e of cowdung,
5

five products of cow-milk, butter, curd, be p o u r e d over the Bal.

2

urine) and

shall
1

m e d i c i n a l herbs Sahadevi. Gudci, Simhft poured

atamli,

atvari,

Kumri*,

Vyghr over

shall be soaked in water a n d the i m a g e with the 46. Thereafter is to be 47. formed ( r u b b i n g off) i n t h e Kalaas 48-49. Kalaas shall 50. the image 51-52. Whatever mantra the

the w a t e r shall be T osadhf e t c .

Phala-snna

( b a t h i n g w i t h the fruit j u i c e ) etc. Udvartana

with

mantraTh phalini3

shall b e

d o n e w i t h t h e MantraDrupaddiv9, e t c . h e r b atapuspik10

After p l a c i n g g e m s , c e r e a l s a n d t h e b e g i n n i n g with the one in north.

T h e w a t e r s o f t h e four o c e a n s o f p u r e w a t e r , c u r d , four q u a r t e r s mantras and the etc. Kalaas, be inspired with the pyyasva the

m i l k a n d g h e e shall b e a s s i g n e d i n t h e Dadhikrvnd11 e t c . shall

T osadhih, e t c . a n d Tejosi12, e t c . be bathed. After bathing and dressing, Tirthas the

T h e n giving the n a m e s of the oceans to ( g u m r e s i n ) shall be shown.

i n c e n s e w i t h Guggulu

F o r t h e final Abhiseka ( b a t h i n g ) in

different pots

( w a t e r s f r o m the holy r i v e r s ) shall b e p u t

separately. Mantra

h o l y r i v e r t h e r e i s i n the w o r l d o r w h a t e v e r s e a , be

w a t e r f r o m t h o s e s h a l l b e k e p t i n different p o t s w i t h t h e T osadhi, e t c . t h o s e p o t s s h a l l 53. b a t h w i t h t h a t , w a t e r i s freed f r o m a l l sins. After p e r f o r m i n g t h e Abhiseka with

i n s p i r e d . W h o e v e r t a k e s his Samudra-mantras, the

Arghya s h a l l be offered.

S w e e t s c e n t s shall be offered with

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. (GVDB, 11. 12.

Perhaps Abution Sida Aloe cordifolia.

indicum. (GVDB p . (VNp.

(GVDB, 269.)

p. 428, p. 389.)

11.)

Asparagus racemosus. barbadensis. T i n o s p o r a cordifolia. Solarium RV. RV. AV. p. 10.97.1. 10.97.15. 6.115.3.

(GVDB, p . 134.) (GVDB, p. (GVDB,

141.) pp. 68-69.)

xanthocarpum.

P e r h a p s &jfa/>u//>-Peucedanum 388.) 4.39.6. 7-89.4. RV. AV.

graveolens or Foeniculum vulgare.

T.58.62 MantraGandhadvrSm1 Vedic mantras. 54. G a r m e n t s shall b e offered with Mandapa the etc, and Nysa shall be

159
performed with mantrasYavarh Mantrashall

vastra e t c . , in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h the i n j u n c t i o n s T h e n the i d o l shall be t a k e n to the Kavihau, etc. W i t h the mantraSam bhavya etc., 55: with nysa the 56. shall 57. t h e foot. 58. T h e Kalaa i n s p i r e d b y Pranava, Vedas,

of the s c r i p t u r e . with the the

idol

b e l a i d o n t h e b e d . T h e Sakala-Miskalam r i t e shall b e p e r f o r m e d mantraVivata-caksuh.2 Staying in be done. the As Supreme laid Principle (God) manlraof and at down in one's own branch

T h e deity is then covered with a sheet of cloth T h e jYaivedyas (food offerings) shall be given and covered be

worshipped.

with

two c l o t h s , a l o n g w i t h t h e m o n e y ( g o l d c o i n ) , shall at the h e a d . 59. T h e n t h e p r e c e p t o r shall stand near

offered

t h e sacrificial branch hymns or in

p i t a n d i g n i t e f i r e , with t h e mantras l a i d d o w n i n his g e n e r a l V e d i c mantras. 60. the Mitra and 61. H e s h a l l recite the following Mantras a n d Vsa, Dsya* Ajina, Bahvrca. T h e Adhvaryu the (The the priest performing e a s t : Srsiikta3, Pavamna,

Vr$kap,

t h e sacrifice) and and Pitrmaitra. west, Bherunda-

shall r e c i t e in 62. Vedavrata, smans.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

south

following : R u d r a , Purusaskla6,

Slokdhyya ( c h a p t e r of verses p r a y e r s , Brahma Vmadevya,1 Jyesthasmas, Rathantara9

T h e Chandoga ( V e d i c S c h o o l shall r e c i t e i n the

Gandhadvrm RV. 10.81.3. 5.87. RVkh. RV.

(RVkh.

5.87.9.)

AV. 6.71.3 Ibid. 10.90.

(dsyan)

10.86.2. .

M S . 4 . 9 . 1 1 ; 132.10. SV. 1. 2 7 3 . V S . 10.10.

160 63. Veda) Atharva (scholar

Garuda specially wellversed Atharvairas in

Purna Atharva portion

shall r e c i t e i n t h e n o r t h

(principal

in t h a t V e d a ) ; Kumbha-skta Nilarudra a n d Maitra.1 64-65. mantra a n d according mantra. 66. T h e preceptor then shall the with perform vessel the the Amrtikarana his r i t e w i t h a l l mantras a n d h o l d i n g h a n d s whirl it r o u n d the pit. 67-68. P u t in it Tejas Vaisnava-mantra. and With t h e g e n e r a l mantra o r t h a t l a i d d o w n i n his o w n s a c r e d l i t e r a t u r e he shall p l a c e t h e Brahma in t h e vessels) 69. in the north. south Pranit ( s a c r i f i c i a l H e shall t h e n s p r e a d t h e Pala t w i g s Hara a n d na shall be worshipped Darbha3 pure with both of to T h e p r e c e p t o r shall s p r i n k l e t h e p i t f i r s t w i t h Astrathen bring fire in a and copper-vessel it envelop it or mudpot, He shall his position, a n d place i n front.

i g n i t e t h e fire w i t h Astra-mantra

w i t h Kavaca-

a l o n g w i t h Kua2 g r a s s in different q u a r t e r s . Brahma, Visnu, w i t h c o m m o n mantras. 70-71. T h e f i r e shall b e p l a c e d Darbha water by in the

g r a s s . W h a t e v e r is e n v e l o p e d in Darbha g r a s s , Or sprinkled with Fire becomes e v e n w i t h o u t mantra. o f its own 72. shall child). accord. enveloped uncut in Kua g r a s s e s shall do

w i t h their tips t u r n e d t o w a r d s e a s t , n o r t h a n d west, c o m e s n e a r Persons well-versed that mantras e v e r y t h i n g for t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e f i r e . S o m e preceptors maintain (the r i t e t h e jya installation be of fire be after Jtakarman W e a r i n g Pavitra, of each 73. c o n s e q u e n t to t h e b i r t h of a (ghee) shall consecrated. the should

T h e p r e c e p t o r shall see a n d i n s p i r e w i t h mantras lights before t h e i d o l ) . huti five drops T h e jya

Nirjana ( w a v i n g 74. For

b e t a k e n j u s t e n o u g h to last till t h e final huti i s m a d e . a r e p o u r e d into the l e a f to Godna w i t h w h i c h t h e huti is t h e n m a d e . A l l t h e rites t h a t o n e h a s

to p e r f o r m from t h e t i m e of Garbhdhna ( c o n c e p t i o n ) ( c u t t i n g o f t h e f o r e l o c k s o f a child for t h e f i r s t t i m e ) ,

1. 2. 3. VS. Kua. 39.5. (GVDB, p. 111.) (GVDB, p. 201.)

Desmostachya bipinnata.

1 .48.87 75. after Are to be (entire performed either in accordance

161 with

straic i n j u n c t i o n w i t h t h o s e Prnhuti 76.

mantras,

or w i t h Pranava.

There-

g h e e p o u r e d i n t o t h e fire) is p e r f o r m e d is c o n d u c i v e to worship the all success shall be

a n d t h e d e v o t e e gets a l l his desires fulfilled. A fire t h u s m a i n t a i n e d After performing the i n all rites. 77. fire

t r a n s f e r r e d t o the p i t s . T o I n d r a a n d other g o d s o n e hundred the hutis each is shall b e g i v e n . 78-80. A t the e n d o f h u n d r e d hutis Prnhuti

p e r f o r m e d for all g o d s . T h e Hotr s h a l l a s s i g n to the Kalaa his o w n huti. the deities, m a n t r a s , to the sacrificial f i r e himself rites. K e e p i n g t o o n e ' s s i d e all the preceptor shall

a n d h i m s e l f the Prnhuti shall b e g i v e n . After e x t r i c a t i n g offer o b l a t i o n s q u a r t e r s , spirits, g o d s , a n d t o s e r p e n t s b y m e a n s Gingelly endits. 81. the east. 82. west. part Ghee i s a n a u x i l i a r y . Rudra in t h e s o u t h . Jyesthasman1, Bhirunda and Tannaymi is an T h e other articles are

g u a r d i a n s of the of due

s e e d s a n d sacrificial twigs a r e t h e two essential i n g r e to be

g i v e n after s m e a r i n g t h e m w i t h ghee. Purusas kta is to be u s e d in to the

Nilarudra is a g r e a t mantra. Kumbhaskta of t h e Atharvaveda. 83.

important Havana Then

E a c h o f t h e Devas shall b e w o r s h i p p e d Similarly in the m i d d l e a n d at shall be offered. T h e brahmin the the

with foot.

a t h o u s a n d times at the h e a d . 84-85. with the Prnhuti, hutis on all those spots termed ' H e a d ' of the i m a g e , s h a l l offer hutis in mantras or or the with gods and either w i t h Pranava. of Homa, with the the preAgnimile mantra feet is principal

h o n o u r of the mantras Gyatri, ceptor Vyhrti shall

of his o w n s c r i p t u r a l c o d e or w i t h t h e Gyatr H a v i n g thus performed the rite p e r f o r m mantra-nysa : a t t h e calves the assignment

86.

mantra, at t h e a n k l e s w i t h Ife tv mantra. 87. At the with

1. SV. 1.273.

162 Agna yhi, 88. rli ca te1 89. Thereafter, 90. the Triyugmaka etc. at t h e knee-joint Sanno devi

Garuda mantra, in at the the

Purna at the heart eyes

t h i g h Brhadrathntara a n d in galake, at mantra. At he the top of raise the

the b e l l y Svtila mantra. made Trtram Indram, head deity

F o r longevity the assignment is chest the the

Mrdh bhuvo2 by saying "O

mantra. lord of

shall

Brahman ! rise". T h e n reciting the V e d i c the mantra Punyha mantras h e shall g o he shall split r o u n d the temple with Pindik. 91. 92. A n d p l a c e the images of gods, gems, minerals, medideity. exactly in the is the no centre it. I t shall b e attendant "Orh T h e i m a g e is not to be placed far a w a y from Devasya tv3

c i n a l h e r b s a n d loha-bijas b e h i n d t h e o f the s a n c t u m s a n c t o r u m o r p l a c e d slightly defect therein. 93. 94. ples, It s h o u l d be b r o u g h t a

r e m o v e d from

the c e n t r e . T h e r e little to

north.

o b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e , b e s t a b l e , b e b e n e f i c e n t t o all p e o p l e . " T o t h e six deities h e shall m a k e a s s i g n m e n t s w i t h t h e savitur vah and reciting"All having h e shall installed and scented the the princihis and Kals in t h e g o d w o r l d as mantraDevasya tv Varnas, 95. mantras bathed. 96. worship. 97. forgiveness. T o t h e Rtviks daksin s h a l l b e g i v e n a c c o r d i n g to the c a p a c i t y a n d articles, s u c h a s a vessel, a p a i r o f c l o t h s , u m b r e l l a , g o o d rings, e t c . 98. with full T h e h o u s e h o l d e r s h a l l t h e n p e r f o r m t h e f o u r t h Homa, c o n c e n t r a t i o n . After be offered.
ca V S . 3 1 . 2 2 . 88.6. 492-4).

progeny. After a s s i g n i n g a l l t h e six the Samptakalaa t h e lamps, incense inspire them with deity sticks shall shall he be shall with

With

After p e r f o r m i n g Arghya a n d b o w i n g h e

p r a y for

offering

hundred

hutis,

the

Prnhuti shall
1. 2. 3.

SrS ca te laksmtt Mrdh bhuvo V S . 1.21

RV 10.

( A l s o DC. p p .

1.49.6 99. T h e preceptor shall then c o m e out and

163 offer o b l a -

t i o n s t o t h e g u a r d i a n s o f t h e q u a r t e r s . W i t h f l o w e r s i n his h a n d s he shall say " F o r g i v e " a n d scatter them. 100-101. shall give to At the end o f t h e sacrifice, cow, chowrie, the householder ear-rings, crya a g r e y coronet,

u m b r e l l a , b r a c e l e t , g i r d l e , fan, v i l l a g e s , g a r m e n t s , e t c . , w i t h a l l s u b s i d i a r y t h i n g s . H e s h a l l feed l a v i s h l y . B y t h e g o d ' s g r a c e h e shall be liberated.

CHAPTER Four Brahma said 1. to : by Brahma

FORTYNINE

Varnas and ramas

O V y s a , H a r i i s the c r e a t o r o f the w o r l d , e t c . H e h a s the self-created and others. and the others according He to Brhmanas assigned to

be worshipped

has to be duly a d o r e d by t h e i r o w n duties. 2. Six duties are

P l e a s e l i s t e n to t h o s e duties. Brhmana; performing g i v i n g gifts, them for o t h e r s ,

s a c r i f i c e s for himself, p e r f o r m i n g 3. studying Ksatriya is 4. yaja

1

accepting them, studying a n d teaching others. T h e c o m m o n duty of Ksatriya a n d Vaiya is g i v i n g gifts, and p e r f o r m i n g yajas. The additional a n d t h a t of duty of a maintaining law Service of the a l s o their d u t y . T h e s p e c i a l d u t y of a Brahmacn is to the p r e c e p t o r , s t u d y , sacrificial b e g g i n g for a l m s , rites and renunand order a Vaiya is

agriculture. twice-born i s t h e m a i n d u t y o f dras. arts a n d crafts a n d pkaMaintenance is 5. service ciation. 6. to T h e r e a r e two-fold c o n d i t i o n s Upakurvna or JVaisthika. in a l l ramas. BrahmaT h i s JVaisthika is. e a g e r cn b e c o m e s by means of various

r e a l i s e Brahman.
1. A s i m p l e or d o m e s t i c sacrifice.

164 7. death. 8. O best b r a h m i n ! the

Garuda

Purna

After s t u d y i n g t h e V e d a s if he b e c o m e s a h o u s e h o l d e r T h e JVaisthika r e m a i n s a Brahmacn till d u t i e s of a h o u s e - h o l d e r a r e in sacred fire, hospitality to the g i v i n g gifts, and worship-

he is c a l l e d Upakurvna.

b r i e f the preservation of the guests; performance ping gods. 9. called to the

o f sacrifices,

T h e h o u s e h o l d e r is of two k i n d s : Udsina a n d Sdhaka. endeavours to maintain the house is Sdhaka.

T h e householder who 10.

After r e p a y i n g t h e t h r e e d e b t s (to s a g e s , t o g o d s a n d

m a n e s ) a n d r e n o u n c i n g wife a n d w e a l t h , h e w h o s e e k s T h e d u t y of a Vanavsin ( d e a l e r in a f o r e s t ) is l y i n g

s a l v a t i o n a l o n e , is c a l l e d Udsina. 11. o n t h e g r o u n d , s u s t e n a n c e o n fruits a n d r o o t s , s t u d y , a u s t e r i t i e s a n d sharing of whatever he gets with others. 12. the study. 13. He is to be c o n s i d e r e d a s a g e s t a t i o n e d in vnaprastha order who is very m u c h e m a c i a t e d d u e to p e n a n c e a n d is extremely devoted to meditation. 14. T h e Bhiksu (mendicant) to who is engaged in yogic practices always, 15. ever aspires r i s e u p , c o n t r o l s his s e n s e - o r g a n s in communion with the soul, He is the best of ascetics who performs penance devoted in to t h e forest, w o r s h i p s g o d s , p e r f o r m s sacrifices a n d i s

a n d strives for k n o w l e d g e is c a l l e d a Pramesthika. T h e sage delighting who practises satiated, 16. yogic exercises a n d m o v e s a b o u t his b o d y i s c a l l e d Togin. characteristics :

with s a n d a l p a s t e a p p l i e d all over

I n a Bhiksu t h e s e a r e t h e e s s e n t i a l

beggary, V e d i c study, vow of silence, austerities, special m e d i t a t i o n , perfect k n o w l e d g e a n d c o m p l e t e d e t a c h m e n t f r o m w o r l d l y affairs. 17. jna. T h e Pramesthika i s o f t h r e e t y p e s : S o m e r e n o u n c e r e n o u n c e Vedic Rites. T h e third Ksatra renounces all and AntyOthers 18.

sorts of activities. Togin is of t h r e e t y p e s Bhautika, ramin w h o relies on t h e Toga-mrti.

1.49.31 19. and

165 In t h e first Togin the BhvanS ( I m a g i n a t i o n ) is p r i m a r y , t h e r e is Duskara (difficult) Bhvan in salvation ( G o d l y ) Bhvan.

in t h e s e c o n d 20-24. is pursued

in the t h i r d t h e r e is Pramevari F r o m virtue, with

salvation is p r o d u c e d ; from wealth, is Nivrtti ( w i t h d r a w a l of sense-

love i s s u e s forth. organs) , and

T h e r e a r e t w o t y p e s o f V e d i c rites t h a t w h i c h knowledge is the p e r f o r m a n c e of fire rites a n d g o d ramas: religi-

Pravrtti

worship. T h e s e are the c o m m o n characteristics of all straight-forwardness, want of jealousy, ous leaders, organs, worship ness. I shall who of deities, respecting now describe maintain the g o a l sacred following

F o r g i v e n e s s , self-rCstraint, c o m p a s s i o n , c h a r i t y , a b s e n c e o f g r e e d , great t r u t h f u l n e s s , c o n t e n t e d n e s s , theism, c o n t r o l o f s e n s e Brahmins, non-violence, o f t h e four c a s t e s . T h e rites attain Prjpatya

p l e a s a n t speech, absence of backbiting a n d refraining from harshBrhmanas their

(Brahma's) 25. fear attain

region. T h e Ksatriyas w h o Indra's region. never quit the battle ground in adhere to (Wind g o d s ) , attain the eightyeight with their is obtained region of thousand preceptors. by forest-

T h e Vaiyas w h o s t r i c t l y Maruts

their duties attain the region of the 26-27. Gandharvas.

T h e dras w h o s e r v e o t h e r s by the

T h e region attained who remain seven

sages w h o h a v e s u b l i m a t e d their sensual feelings ed by pupils The dweller. 28. the T h e region from w h i c h the s a g e of Brahman, the Blissful, minds, who renounce and continuously divine sages region of the

c a n be attain-

never

returns, the ascetics who their

region

is for t h e who

c o n t r o l their

sublimate

b a s e passions. 29. T h e r e g i o n of Togins is Amrtasthna w h i c h which by the the is imperiliberated

s h a b l e e i t h e r , t h e blissful, t h e d i v i n e , f r o m soul never returns. 30-31. the shall i . e . 1) eight Salvation is to be attained [yama etc.

knowledge of I is of five sorts, Satya Asteya

constituents

hereinafter e x p l a i n e d ] .

describe them

i n brief.

Tama ( r e s t r a i n t ) to

Ahirhs w h i c h is

n o t i n j u r i n g a n y l i v i n g b e i n g ; 2) others, 3)

w h i c h i s t h e n a r r a t i o n o f facts b e n e f i c e n t

166 is n o t t a k i n g a n y t h i n g ( b e l o n g i n g to o t h e r s ) ; 4)

Garuda

Purna

Brahmacarya is renunIt is

r e f r a i n i n g from s e x u a l i n t e r c o u r s e ; 5 ) ciation of all possessions. 32. fulness) 5) 33. Niyama 3) (control) 1) are of

Aparigraha i s t h e five 4)

sorts, Satya e t c . 2) Tapas Satya

both external a n d internal. Santosa Indriyanigraha

auca ( p u r i t y )

(truth-

(contentment)

(penance) is worship

(controlling sense-organs).

Svdhyya is m a s t e r y of mantras. Pranidhna

of G o d Visnu, 34. and

sana is t h e y o g i c p o s t u r e Padmaka, e t c . Prnyma meditation is agarbha. Laghu one is

is the m a s t e r y of b r e a t h . In Prnyma the garbha is a t t e n d e d w i t h mantras. Prnyma without is this I n h a l i n g i s Praka. Exhaling Recaka. the higher r e p e t i t i o n of 35.

It is a g a i n of three varieties. R e t e n t i o n is

Kumbhaka.

or the simplest is of twelve seconds d u r a t i o n ; of twentyfour seconds' d u r a t i o n . 36. hra is t h e

A n d t h e b e s t i s o f thirty six s e c o n d s ' d u r a t i o n . Pratyw i t h d r a w a l of s e n s e - o r g a n s from t h e o b j e c t s . of the m i n d . o n e is tman, conscious the that supreme Dhyna the

is the m e d i t a t i o n over the identity of the s u p r e m e soul a n d i n d i v i d u a l s o u l . Dhran i s t h e s t e a d y i n g 37. Samdhi is t h a t retains state it. where I am Brahman a n d 38. are. 39. dreamless 40. Bliss, I am the

Brahman, t h e t r u t h , t h e k n o w l e d g e , t h e e n d l e s s , Brahman, t h e specific k n o w l e d g e o f t h e bliss t h a t y o u A n d free f r o m m i n d , i n t e l l e c t , M a h a t , e g o , e t c . I a m from the three states of wakefulness, d r e a m a n d pure, the intelligent, S u n is Truth, becomes sleep. The p e r m a n e n t , the The A soul w i t h i n the I myself, I a m Brahman, w i t h o u t t h e b o d y , s e n s e - o r g a n s ,

the L i g h t free

without second.

the unsevered.

b r h m a n a w h o m e d i t a t e s o v e r this of worldly existence.

liberated from the b o n d a g e

1.50.11 CHAPTER Daily Brahma said 1. : The aspirant break is who undertakes sure in to the achieve fourth way in the FIFTY aspirant

167

routine for the

the following r o u t i n e enlightenment. quarter He and of the night

daily, without should wake and review 2-3. prosperity. his

u p from b e d progress

of righteousness

He should

m e d i t a t e u p o n the j o y o u s a n d u n a g e i n g the filament of the lotus. After

V i s n u a s s e a t e d i n his h e a r t o n take bath 4.

c o n d u c t i n g the necessaries by way of purging himself he should i n t h e p u r e w a t e r s o f t h e river, a s this a c t , A morning b a t h should be taken without viz. b a t h , negligence. one's to a b s o l v e s h i m o f all his sins. T h e wise p r o c l a i m that a m o r n i n g b a t h causes fruition of acts both perceptible and imperceptible. 5. various 6. A person in sound s l e e p is l i a b l e to not begin fall p r e y any sorts o f p o l l u t i o n s . A morning it. In the performance of the ritual such as a n d weak he shall take the bath He should activity

without taking a bath. b a t h removes sins o f p o v e r t y , O n e should not indisposientertain tion, b a d d r e a m any doubt about 7. a n d evil t h o u g h t .

He should not c o m m e n c e any ceremonious acts with-

out first taking bath. 8. When

sacrifice, o r t h e r e c i t a t i o n o f m a n t r a s a b a t h i s i n e v i t a b l e . he is indisposed d o w n the neck (without pouring water over the b o d y with a wet cloth. 9. gneya, 10. drops bath of chanting Purificatory 3) Vyavya, The water b a t h is 4) of six 5) types : 1) 6) Brahma 2)' Divya, the holy Varuna, Taugika. h e a d ) or wipe

Brahma b a t h m e a n s through

sprinkling Kua g r a s s

the b o d y with simultaneously The gneya divine ashes cowbath

t h e h o l y mantras a n d r u b b i n g t h e b o d y . the b o d y by the body smearing the

m e a n s purifying 11. Smearing

f r o m h e a d t o foot.
(

with

the dust of dried

d u n g i s t h e e x c e l l e n t f o r m i n b a t h c a l l e d Vyavya. T a k i n g

168 i n the r a i n w h e n Divya bath. 12. Plunging into water there is simultaneous

Garuda sunshine is

Purna

called the called

( o f t a n k rivers, e t c . ) i s

Varuna b a t h . 13. tman)

T h e Taugika b a t h i s t h e m e d i t a t i o n o n t h e A t m a n as t h e tmatirtha are (the h o l y w a t e r of t h e o f a n y o f the Nyagrodha, shall face

by Yogic means and mental dedication. It is k n o w n a n d is r e s o r t e d 1) to by p h i l o s o p h e r s . T w i g s for c h e w i n g trees

(for c l e a n i n g the teeth) f o l l o w i n g trees Udumbara, 14. 15. camana 3) Avattha or

excellent if they are 2) Mlati2,

Ksiravrksa ( o n e of t h e four Madhka1), 4)

ApmSrgeP,

Bilva1 5) Karavira? He cleansing

the north or the east while cleaning the teeth. After chewing, the twig shall be washed After d u l y f i n i s h i n g t h e and shall b a t h , Tarpana be performed camana o n c e of water by Let him syllable a n d thrown carefully (the (offering o f 16-17. again. etc. Om. Let along m e a n s of Kua in a clean p l a c e .

ritualistic drinking

of w a t e r )

w a t e r c h a n t i n g V e d i c Mantras) After t h a t he s h a l l silently him with sprinkle his body grass6 chanting

for t h e g o d s , s a g e s a n d t h e m a n e s . perform drops with

the V e d i c

mantras, po hi sth mystic

Svitri mantras1 a n d

Varuna mantras8. the mantras. has

t h e n r e c i t e t h e Gyatri mantra prefixed w i t h T h i s mantra is t h e m o t h e r of a l l V e d i c 18-19. him. T h e ruti ( V e d a )

H e s h a l l t h e n f i x his m i n d o n t h e S u n a n d m a k e ordained that mantra) This and

water-offering u n t o Prnyma gives birth

o n e s h o u l d sit o n t h e Kua g r a s s w i t h m e n t a l c o n c e n t r a t i o n , d o (hold the b r e a t h chanting the requisite (repetition of V e d i c mantras). to the p e r f o r m Sandhy Sandhy

u n i v e r s e . I t i s free from t a i n t s . I t i s b e y o n d

My ( I l l u s i o n a n d i g n o r a n c e ) .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 7. 8.

Madhuca Jasminum Aegle

indica

GVDB,

p.

295. 166. p. 274. 77. t 14.

grandiflorum aspera GVDB, GVDB,

GVDB, p . p. p.

Achyrandthes Nerium

GVDB,

marmelos indicum

6 . R V . 10.9.1.
r e s a d d r e s s e d to S a v i t r . res addressed to V a r u n a .

1.50.32
20. on I t i s t h e sole p o w e r three Tattvas the

169 o f Ivara ( t h e A l m i g h t y ) . I t h a s (Principles). and dusk), always face who shall After m e d i t a t i n g and the d a r k man the learned the white

s p r u n g from t h e (Sandhy) (respectively 21. forming

crimson-coloured,

at dawn, midday

shall r e p e a t t h e Gyatri. T h e B r a h m i n shall Sandhyopsan. Whatever with the east when perdoes (holy) not not rite. reap the fruit perform T h e person he does he

Sandhy is i m p u r e a n d unfit for a n y o t h e r 22-24. thereof. t h e Sandhy

B r a h m i n s who have m a s t e r e d the V e d a s a n d performed single-minded He m a y be worship and hell a n d thereby concentration the best have attained but if he of brahmins for

the highest goal. n e g l e c t s Sandhy activities he goes to 25-27. being

exerts himself in other religious remains there the Almighty ten t h o u s a n d performed. body, is should be

y e a r s . H e n c e , b y a l l m e a n s Sandhyopsan Verily propitiated.

of yogic

A scholar, p u r e a n d controlling the senses,

s h a l l r e p e a t t h e Gyatri e v e r y d a y , f a c i n g t h e e a s t , t h e m a x i m u m n u m b e r of a thousand times, or a h u n d r e d times or at least ten times. T h e n with various kinds Smaveda o f e s s e n t i a l mantras f r o m he shall propitiate Rgveda, Yajurveda and g r e a t fortune, 28. H e shall p r o s t r a t e the h e a d t o u c h i n g t h e g r o u n d . H e " O m obeisance to Khakholka, t h e s h a l l t h e n r e c i t e this mantra. 29. the rising

s u n . After t h e w o r s h i p o f t h e s u n , the

g o d of gods, the giver of

q u i e t , t h e c a u s e o f three-fold c a u s e s . I am dedicating myself unto you. O b e i s a n c e to thee in T h o u a r t t h e g r e a t Brahman, t h e w a t e r s , region; the this heaven; excellent in the the form of knowledge. 30. t h e Okra; 31.

the brilliant lustre, the essential j u i c e , the nectar. T h o u art the e a r t h ; the upper all the eternal R u d r a s . " Reciting

p r a y e r w i t h i n the h e a r t , Prostrations shall be m a d e unto the sun b o t h morning and at midday. a n d p e r f o r m camana d u l y . 32. offer brother, Then let it. him The duly kindle his the son, sacrificial fire a n d wife, disciple or oblations to priest, T h e n the b r a h m i n shall r e t u r n h o m e

170 33. After b e i n g p e r m i t t e d , shall A r e l i g i o u s rite offer

Garuda

Purna

special additional mantras is not

offerings of o b l a t i o n s . 34. unto them. 35.

without

c o n d u c i v e t o g o o d r e s u l t s either h e r e o r h e r e a f t e r . A l l d e i t i e s shall b e b o w e d t o a n d food offerings m a d e T h e p r e c e p t o r shall b e r e v e r e d a n d w h a t i s b e n e T h e r e a f t e r , t h e b r a h m i n shall p r o c e e d w i t h t h e s t u d y o f his a b i l i t y . ponder through the L e t h i m recite w o r d s o f o v e r the s u b j e c t s d i s c u s s e d Dharma-stras1 and other disciples, go and

ficent to him be performed. of V e d a s to the extent p r a y e r , t e a c h his 36. entirely. 37. H e s h a l l t h e n a p p r o a c h the k i n g (securing and (or a r i c h m a n ) for t h e s a k e o f Togaksema 38. p r e s e r v i n g ) a n d from h i m a b l u t i o n h e shall grains, gingelly He

a n d r e t a i n t h e m i n his m i n d . shall s a c r e d texts, V e d a s six Vedgas2 (ancillary subjects)

he s h a l l r e c e i v e different a r t i c l e s for the s a k e of his f a m i l y . T h e n a t m i d d a y for the s a k e o f h i s take with h i m a l u m p of clay, flowers, dry rice seeds, k u a grass a n d p u r e dry c o w d u n g . 39. tanks. 40. H e shall t a k e b a t h o n l y i n Without offering rivers, o r n a t u r a l l a k e s o r He shall not b a t h e in another m a n ' s private tank. t h e f i v e r i c e b a l l s (to the m a n e s ) With one part o f the the clay lump n a v e l w i t h two a n d the feet

the b a t h b e c o m e s i m p e r f e c t . parts. 41. T h e nether

3

the h e a d shall b e w i p e d , t h e p o r t i o n a b o v e regions with three

parts

shall b e w i p e d w i t h six p a r t s . a r i p e malaka 42. w i t h it. 43. (Myrobalan).

T h e clay-lump shall be as big as T h e limbs are to be smeared

S o a l s o the c o w - d u n g . H e t h e n shall wash

i t a n d p e r f o r m camana. L e t h i m sitting on the T h e water

This encombooks ascribCDHM, p.89)

t h e n t a k e b a t h w i t h a l l senses fully c o n t r o l l e d . T h e s m e a r i n g with c l a y s h a l l b e d o n e Liga-mantras

m e a n s the

b a n k a n d chanting the
1. ed to Dharma-stra a c t u a l l y Yjavalkya, ancillary Vykarana,

(of

Visnu) .
of conduct.

code-book

p a s s e s t h e e n t i r e H i n d u l a w . G e n e r a l l y t h e Smrtis, o r t h e s a c r e d Manu, 2. Sikf, 3. The Chandas, etc. come Jyotisa p. 36. u n d e r Dharma-stra,(Also divided and Kalpa. Vedic JVirukta, GDVB, literature

u n d e r the six h e a d i n g s

E m b l i c a officinalis

1 .50.53 also shall 44. be infused with Liga God and Varuna

171 mantras of very-

auspicious nature. H e shall r e m e m b e r V i s n u a t the time o f b a t h . L o o k i n g a t the S u n let h i m that inner Verily the waters are the L o r d N r y a n a . 45. he is.

t h a t i s Okra itself let h i m d i p h i m s e l f i n w a t e r t h r e e t i m e s . After p e r f o r m i n g an camana ( w i t h o u t mantra) this mantra, movest the mantra] : t h o u about in do a n o t h e r camana w i t h \_camana 46. mantra-knovser the

c a v i t i e s i n the l i v i n g b e i n g s f a c i n g a l l r o u n d . T h o u a r t the sacrifice, t h e m y s t i c the lustre, t h e j u i c e , the times along Svah). c a n r e p e a t t h e Svitri shall be along done with or the the with s y l l a b l e Vasatkra, nectar. with Or he t h e Pranava thou art the waters, and the 47. Aghamarsana mantraspo 48. 49. padam2. 50. O r h e shall r e p e a t the Pranava f r e q u e n t l y . I f Mrjana ( w i p i n g ) He shall is done r e m e m b e r Hari, t h e g o d o f g o d s . 51. free from 52. Vyhrtis Orhi Or

shall r e p e a t Drupad mantra three, he, sth, Idam the scholar,

(Om Bhh Bhuvah Then etc. pah he wiping

mantra.

pravahata1 shall

vyhrtis. the

T h e n t h e w a t e r s h a l l be infused w i t h t h e mantraspo hi sth. Inside water, or silently repeat Tad thrice manlra-Aghamarsana Drupad or Svitri or Vi.moh paramam

w i t h w a t e r h e l d i n the p a l m a n d t h e mantra r e c i t e d . Or if that water is sprinkled on the head, he b e c o m e s all sins. he of tyam,
3

After p e r f o r m i n g shall propitiate flowers). Citram

Sandhy a n d camana the Sun with

he

shall a l w a y s r e m e m b e r G o d . Then lifted-up he Puspjali ( h a n d f u l 53. etc. Udu Scattering devnm* (the Taccaksuh ucisad flowers

shall l o o k at the rising s u n w i t h the m a n t r a s Na hanyate. devahitam6 specially T h e n he shall r e p e a t t h e mantras Harrisah

a c c o m p a n i e d by the Svitri.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

RV. RV. RV. RV. RV.

1.23.22. 1.22.20. 1.50.1. 1.115.1. 7.66.16.

172

Garuda 54.

Purna

A n d o t h e r s o l a r mantras m e n t i o n e d i n t h e V e d a s a n d A f t e r w a r d s , s i t t i n g on H e shall r e p e a t look at various He a s e a t of kua g r a s s mantras shall with repeat on t h e

Gyatri t o o . eastern bank. 55. mind and

concentrated t h e japas w i t h or Putrajiva}-

the sun.

r o s a r y of b e a d s m a d e of g l a s s , in the interval. 56. 57. I f the d e v o t e e i s water. wearing Or if he is

abjksa,

Rudrksa wet

wearing dry

cloth he shall repeat he shall sit o n the he

the b e a d s standing in

cloth

g r o u n d in a c l e a n p l a c e on a m a t always be concentrated. 58. shall prostrate on the g r o u n d .

of kua g r a s s .

T h e m i n d shall

After t h e

circular perambulation

T h e n h e s h a l l p e r f o r m camana a n d p r o c e e d w i t h the Then Tarpana ( w a t e r offering

s t u d y o f V e d a s t o his c a p a c i t y . 59. added in

i n p r o p i t i a t i o n ) s h a l l b e m a d e t o devas, s a g e s a n d t h e m a n e s . T h e d e i t i e s , e t c . , s h a l l b e n a m e d w i t h Okra prefixed and rice Tarpaymi ( I to propitiate) and to the end. In the water-offerings be devas t o t h e m a n d JVamah ( o b e i s a n c e ) B r a h m i n i c a l s a g e s t h e r e shall 60.

grains in the w a t e r [ a n d

not gingelly seeds as in r e g a r d to the m a n e s ] . T h e p r o c e s s o f offering Stra shall be in a c c o r d a n c e with [the branch of scriptural While the injunctions in one's own code one follows]. 61. offering 62. the cloth silently. 63-64. worship all T h e n the favourite and g o d s shall be worshipped and water. with He their shall r e s p e c t i v e mantras, w i t h f l o w e r s , l e a v e s gods Brahma, Madhu (Visnu) Purusa
1.

S o a l s o offering s h o u l d b e to deities the sacred

m a d e to

devars.

thread

is worn as u s u a l ; while the sacred thread shall the w a t e r f r o m perform camana

offering t o t h e s a g e s i t s h a l l b e w o r n like a g a r l a n d . W h i l e offering t o t h e m a n e s , b e w o r n t o t h e left s i d e . After s q u e e z i n g o u t

(worn a t t h e t i m e o f b a t h ) h e s h a l l

a k a r a , S u n , slayer of H a r a (iva) is

other a p p r o v e d deities.

p l e a s e d w i t h d e v o t i o n . O r h e s h a l l offer f l o w e r s , e t c . c h a n t i n g skta.
Putrajiva roxburgh GVDB, p . 2 5 2 .

1.50.75 65. the T h e deities of waters m a y also concentrated he the flowers be

173 w o r s h i p p e d well.

W i t h t h e m i n d fully Pranava, 66. 67. and And offer

shall prostrate c h a n t i n g Without the

separately.

rdhan ( p r o p i t i a t i o n ) , n o v e d i c r i t e b e c o m e s m e r i t o r i o u s . H e n c e there, in the beginning, meditated upon. With m i d d l e a n d the e n d , t h e mantra Tad visnoh H a r i shall be 68. 69. Brahman. 70. ing If he
2

t h e Purusa skta, H e s h a l l d e d i c a t e h i m s e l f t o Visnu o f p u r e e f f u l g e n c e . T h e n he shall perform t h e five yajas, manes, to (sacrifices) the

\ R e p e a t i n g t h e mantras h e s h a l l r e m a i n m e d i t a t i n g o n G o d . to gods, to the living beings, to the has already men a n d to

1

performed men

Brahma yaja

before

Tarpana, h e c a n p r o c e e d w i t h his s t u d y manusyayaja 71. ( t h e sacrifice to Vaivadeva

o f V e d a s after the fire

performbefore

(offering o f o b l a t i o n s i n T h e offering to

m e a l s , i n t e n d e d for a l l deities c o l l e c t i v e l y ) it is c a l l e d Devayaja. spirits people; 73. salvation. 74. centrated 75. actions 72. is to be k n o w n as Bhtayaja.

shall be p e r f o r m e d Bhtasliving b e i n g s or (degraded (the of

F o o d offerings a r e m a d e t o d o g s , Svapacas o u t c a s t e s ) , fallen The Pitryaja is people, on

the g r o u n d outside to the

h o u s e ) as also to the birds. conducive a attainment T h e b e s t m a n s h a l l feed single b r a h m i n bearing all

the manes in mind.

It h a s to be p e r f o r m e d e v e r y d a y f a i t h f u l l y . mind fully con-

Or in a c c o r d a n c e with one's c a p a c i t y , he shall take a to A a brahmin guest shall be bowed w h o is a s c h o l a r fully c o n v e r s a n t w i t h be and to worshipped is perfect and always. in mind, with A brahmin and of words

s m a l l q u a n t i t y o f food a n d offer t h a t w i t h t h e the meanings a n d principles of V e d a . w h o c o m e s t o the h o u s e shall welcome.

speech

worshipped

1. One householder; Manu. 3.70. 2.

o f t h e f i v e d a i l y yajas o r s a c r i f i c e s t o b e p e r f o r m e d b y a teaching and reciting t h e V e d a s . Adhypanam brahmavajah

Y

In practice, hospitality,

reception

of guests.

Garuda 76. sufficient 77. If a m o u t h f u l of f o o d is g i v e n , it for an Atithi ( g u e s t ) .

Purna A

is c a l l e d Bhiks.

h a n d f u l is e q u i v a l e n t to four such mouthfuls

a n d is considered

T h e g u e s t s h a l l w a i t for a s m u c h t i m e a s i s n e c e s s a r y h o u s e h o l d e r shall d u l y h o n o u r a c c o r d give a l m s to a mendicant who is a

for m i l k i n g a c o w . T h e 78. He shall duly

i n g t o his a b i l i t y , visitors a n d g u e s t s . Brahmacrin ( u n m a r r i e d s t u d e n t ) . 79. W i t h o u t greed, with he s h a l l g i v e kinsmen while

f o o d to t h o s e w h o request for it, c o m m e n s u r a t e w i t h his a b i l i t y . He shall p a r t a k e of food along If a b r a h m i n takes food taking food he shall be silent a n d by no m e a n s shall he criticise t h e food served. the five 80. yajas, H e i s definitely foolish a n d s h a l l b e r e b o r n a s o n e o f without performing

the low a n i m a l s . He shall practise the study of the V e d a s every d a y , even if he is u n a b l e to perform great sacrifices. 81. If he does lethargy, 82. boar. auca. A n d takes food, he goes to hell or is reborn as a T h e worship of gods not perform the destroys all sins i m m e d i a t e l y .

worship of g o d out of delusion or

I shall now e x p o u n d the special type of impurity called A n i m p u r e m a n is e v e r a s i n n e r . 83-84. Impurity is due to contact and purity by avoiding all b r a h m i n s h a v e to of auca when a celebrated, is of investiture A Ksatriya is no such in T h e duration ceremony the

it.

When people die or a child is born,

o b s e r v e auca for t e n d a y s . c h i l d d i e s b e f o r e its t o n s u r e only o n e night. 85. If a child dies

has been ceremony

before

w i t h t h e s a c r e d t h r e a d , t h e d u r a t i o n o f auca i s for t h r e e n i g h t s . F o r d e a t h s thereafter t h e 86. impurity. auca is for ten n i g h t s . month. as f r e e d o f this i m p u r i t y i n t w e l v e d a y s ; a vaiya i n f i f t e e n d a y s , A n d a dra i n a An ascetic has takes place, months. I f a b o r t i o n o r still b i r t h the freedom (Abortion

from impurity is in as m a n y nights 5 n i g h t s o f auca a n d s o o n ] .

t h e t h i r d m o n t h 3 n i g h t s o f auca; A b o r t i o n i a t h e f i f t h m o n t h

1.51.10

175

CHAPTER FIFTYONE
Charity Brahma said: 1-2. I s h a l l n o w d e s c r i b e t h e v i r t u e of m a k i n g c h a r i t a b l e handing over

gifts t h a n w h i c h t h e r e i s n o t h i n g b e t t e r . I t h a s b e e n m e n t i o n e d b y t h o s e w h o k n o w i t t h a t c h a r i t a b l e gift m e a n s riches and articles w i t h d u e faith t o enjoyment in s a m e . C h a r i t y yields this world those w h o d e s e r v e t h e and salvation means. Its by t e a c h i n g , [ I f that is not

after d e a t h . O n e s h a l l a c q u i r e w e a l t h b y j u s t i f i a b l e fruit s h a l l b e c h a r i t y a s well a s e n j o y m e n t . 3. A brahmin's usual sacrifices and way and to (3) of e a r n i n g trade is presiding over t a k i n g Daksins.

possibej^usury, agriculture 4. (2) result) 5. T h e charity given

(shall b e resorted t o ) . (fighting). persons (Desiring is a Sttvika special to a (Daily gift),

O r h e c a n e a r n b y a c t i v i t i e s o f a ksatriya

deserving Kmya

(of p u r e q u a l i t y ) . C h a r i t y is of four t y p e s 1) JVitya Naimittika and (casual), ( 4 ) Vimala (free f r o m d i r t ) .

T h e Nityadna

is t h e gift of a n y a r t i c l e or c a s h

B r a h m i n who does not do anything in return. 6. 7. dharma. 8. Vimala2. 9. T h e charity given It is a u s p i c i o u s . T h e person who gives a land to persons T h e naimittika T h e charity charity is performed for

It shall be given by all good

e v e r y d a y w i t h o u t w i s h i n g for a n y r e s u l t thereof. p e o p l e . S o m e t h i n g i s g i v e n t o s c h o l a r s for w i p i n g off s i n s . given, desiring progeny, success, about p r o s p e r i t y o r h e a v e n i s c a l l e d kmya1 b y s a g e s w h o think

with the knowledge of please G o d is called sugar-

the Brahman w i t h a Sttvika m i n d , j u s t to

o f flourishing

c a n e plants or barley or wheat to a V e d i c Scholar has no rebirth i n the w o r l d . 10.

1. 2. With Pure.

T h e r e never was nor ever shall be

desire.

a charity superior

176 t o the gift o f l a n d s . B y g i v i n g t h e gift o f Vidy a b r a h m i n , t h e d o n o r is 11. sincerity. Brahmaloka. 12. Full-moon 13. shall say He shall E v e r y d a y this s h a l l be g i v e n to then be freed of
1

Garuda

Purna to

( b y teaching) Brahmacrin sins and

h i g h l y r e v e r e d in t h e Brahma loka. a all with attain the

A l e a r n e d p e r s o n s h o u l d o b s e r v e fast h i m s e l f on day in the month of

Vaikha a n d h o n o u r t w e l v e fragrant "O incense, etc., Dharmarja, throughout gingelly gives he be life, seeds and

brahmins with honey, gingelly seeds a n d ghee. Having worshipped with through someone o r himself, all sins,

pleased as you like." 14-16. He c a n h a v e committed gives person w i p e d off i m m e d i a t e l y . T h e ghee to a b r a h m i n c r o s s e s rice the s a m e to Dharmarja, d o n e in Vaikha. t h e Dvdal d a y 17. 18. If after (12th all is person who

p l a c e d in a deer-skin to a b r a h m i n along with g o l d , honey evils. If a freed from s e a s o n e d w i t h ghee, a n d w a t e r t o observing brahmins, fear. T h i s (the fast

cooked

a f t e r offering is s p e c i a l l y on

previous day)

d a y in the lunar fortnight) he worships all sins. he should then Whatever deity honour worship he

V i s n u , t h e d e s t r o y e r o f a l l sins, H e b e c o m e s free f r o m It is necessary that m a y wish to p r o p i t i a t e , brahmins the gods. shall w i t h g r e a t effort a n d feed w o m e n a n d 19. A person desiring

A person desiring progeny shall worship I n d r a always. brahminical splendour for his w o r s h i p b r a h m i n s d e c i d e d l y firm in t h e Brahman. A m a n d e s i r o u s o f h e a l t h shall w o r s h i p t h e s u n ; a m a n w i s h i n g worship fire. 20. worship A m a n e a g e r for t h e fulfilment Vinyaka. A man a man who yearns for from wishing of for affairs shall shall enjoyment riches shall

worship the m o o n , the wind-god. 21.

strength shall the

worship

A m a n desiring freedom for a l l

or

entanglement of sincere effort;

worldly existence shall worship a m a n desiring

1. 2.

L o r d H a r i with of

sorts

things or without desire at all

shall w o r s h i p L o r d Gaddhara2 ( V i s n u ) .
Knowledge instruction. club. O n e who holds the

1.51.32 22. A m a n who gives cool water who man ( t o t h e thirsty) enjoy seeds

177 attains unend-

g r a t i f i c a t i o n . A m a n w h o g i v e s c o o k e d r i c e shall ing happiness. A m a n wished-for 23. having. gives house 24. progeny. A get keen vision. gives gingelly who

shall o b t a i n

m a k e s a gift of a l a m p shall worth-

A m a n w h o gifts a w a y l a n d s g e t s e v e r y t h i n g A m a n who gives gold obtains longevity. A attains excellent worlds. A

m a n who

m a n w h o gives silver of the who gives

s e c u r e s c o m e l y features. A m a n who gives garments attains the world he who m o o n . A g i v e r o f horses g e t s t o the r e g i o n o f i v a . gifts a w a y o x e n o b t a i n s full s c a l e p r o s p e r i t y a n d cows r e a c h e s t h e s o l a r r e g i o n . 25. gets T h e giver of vehicles a n d quilts secures a The of to giver happiness. The giver g o o d wife. of grains of the is H e w h o offers p r o t e c t i o n g e t s p r o s p e r i t y . permanent 26. from sins. 27. He who who gives 28-29. By with giving leaves Asipatravanaa the sunshine 30. w h o wishes 31-32. greater virtue gives to fuels becomes b r i l l i a n t like f i r e . H e medicines remove the sickness o f a p a t i e n t a n d He V e d a s , a t t a i n s the e t e r n a l Brahman. who imparts knowledge Vedic scholars honoured in heaven. H e w h o g i v e s g r a s s t o c o w s b e c o m e s free A man

knowledge

furnishes h i m w i t h food a n d g h e e , B e c o m e s h a p p y , free from sickness a n d lives l o n g . umbrellas forest having is and in edges sandals as he will b e able to cross the hell w h e r e p l e n t y of p l a n t s g r o w sharp is as sword-edge and where craved for in the w o r l d , a man Whatever

fierce.

w h a t e v e r l o v a b l e t h i n g h e p o s s e s s e s i n his h o u s e . Shall be given to a m a n of g o o d quality by an abundant supply of the s a m e . W h a t is g i v e n sign is no

d u r i n g a n y o f the e q u i n o x e s , i n s o l a r o r l u n a r eclipses, O r d u r i n g the m i g r a t i o n o f p l a n e t s f r o m o n e to any o f z o d i a c t o t h e other, b e c o m e s n e v e r - e x h a u s t i n g . T h e r e

o f the l i v i n g b e i n g s t h a n t h e v i r t u e o f

g i v i n g a w a y ( a r t i c l e s a n d c a s h ) i n holy p l a c e s like P r a y g a 1 e t c .

1.

The

place

where

the

Gag

a n d the Y a m u n a meet is known as

P r a y g a since ancient days.

178 or particularly at G a y . o f sins. 33.

1

Garuda

Purna

G i v i n g o f a n y gift b y a p e r s o n d e s i r is conducive to the destruction m a d e to

ing non-severance from heaven

A sinful p e r s o n , w h o p r e v e n t s t h e offerings

b r a h m i n s , o r i n f i r e o r a t t h e t i m e o f sacrifices, b e c o m e s r e b o r n as a lower a n i m a l . 34. famine, A p e r s o n r e f r a i n i n g from g i v i n g food a t when brahmins the t i m e of die, becomes as despicable as a slayer

of Brahmins.

CHAPTER

FIFTYTWO

Pryacitta2 Brahma said 1-2. : O B r a h m i n s , hereafter I shall e x p o u n d the process

o f a t o n e m e n t for s i n .

T h e r e a r e five great s i n n e r s : t h e slayer with any of these. etc. as T h e deities h a v e (subsidiary

o f b r a h m i n s , t h e d r u n k a r d , the thief, defiler o f p r e c e p t o r ' s b e d , a n d a person associating mentioned sin). 3. precipice, 4. 5. of the J u m p into fire, or drown himself into water. By giving food to a scholar he c a n wipe slaughter of a b r a h m i n . sin by off Or he evils ceres h a l l c a s t off his b o d y for t h e s a k e o f a b r a h m i n o r a c o w . the the A b r a h m i n (slayer bathing at of another The slayer of a b r a h m i n shall stay in a h u t in the fall f r o m a g r e a t forest for t w e l v e y e a r s . H e s h a l l o b s e r v e fast, the slaughter of cows, Upappa

b r a h m i n ) b e c o m e s free f r o m t h e 6-7. Or he shall give

m o n i a l b a t h after t h e h o r s e - s a c r i f i c e . away everything he possesses to a brahmin knowing Vedas. A b r a h m i n s h a l l fast for t h r e e n i g h t s

1. 2.

A renowned p l a c e of p i l g r i m a g e in Bihar, s a c r e d to the H i n d u s a n d A religious act to atone for one's sin.

t h e B a u d d h a s alike.

1.52.16 and take bath

179 thrice a d a y in the famous confluence of River t h e Setubandha2 (at Rmevara3 ' from in

Sarasvati1. 8.

By t a k i n g b a t h at

the s o u t h ) . O r i n Kaplamocana a t V r n a s 4 a m a n i s freed

the sin of slaughtering a b r a h m i n . A b r a h m i n guilty of drinking w i n e s h a l l b e freed f r o m t h e 9. 10. garments wife, 11. Shall expiate by embracing the redhot iron statue of a w o m a n . of a b r a h m i n . 12. ing it Or he shall perform Cndryana vow nine times [ T a k i n g f i f t e e n m o u t h f u l s o f f o o d o n t h e full m o o n a n d d e c r e a s daily, taking nothing on the new m o o n day. T h i s is a Cndryana Vrata. 13. T h i s , he s h a l l p e r f o r m n i n e t i m e s ] . A b r a h m i n four s i n n e r s m e n t i o n e d a b o v e , he shall perform bodily He shall be or freed bodily of he All persons guilty of illegitimate intercourse with sin b y d r i n k i n g h o t b o i l i n g w i n e , M i l k , g h e e o r c o w ' s u r i n e . A t h i e f s t e a l i n g g o l d i s freed A b r a h m i n guilty of and perform stealing gold shall wear the bark

f r o m t h a t sin i f h e i s s t r u c k b y t h e k i n g w i t h a p e s t l e . the expiatory a t o n e m e n t of a slayer of preceptor's

brahmin. A brahmin who passionately embraces

t h e p r e c e p t o r ' s wife, s h a l l p e r f o r m t h e e x p i a t o r y rites o f a s l a y e r

associating with a n y of the

S h a l l p e r f o r m t h e d u e e x p i a t o r y r i t e s for t h e r e s p e c and a u s t e r i t y for a y e a r w i t h o u t f a i l . he possesses. of performance Cndryana is

t i v e sins t o w a r d off t h e evil r e s u l t s . O r mortification 14. from all 15. sin. 16. shall b e
1. 2. 3. Pmbau. 4. T h e modern Vrnas. It was also

H e s h a l l offer a l l sins. Due

mortification, O r g o i n g t o h o l y p l a c e s like G a y Bhava (iva). new moon day After f e e d i n g b r a h m i n s o n t h e freed f r o m a l l s i n s .

An A i m p o r t a n t river in the R g v e d a , bridge mentioned in to is a the the flowed between S a t a d r and

destructive

He shall propitiate L o r d

Y a m u n a but, in later times, it w a s lost. R m y a n a ; constructed by R m a to Rma worshipped on the the iva liga of cross the sea to invade L a k . According legends, of here. N o w - a - d a y s it place pilgrimage situated island

known as K .

180 In the d a r k - h a l f of the lunar the fourteenth day. , seven 17-18. times A n d on the saying next d a y in the Yama , Antakya month o n e shall

Garuda

Purna

o b s e r v e fast o n he shall (to

morning

t a k e b a t h i n a river a n d offer w a t e r l i b a t i o n s w i t h g i n g e l l y s e e d s Yamya (to (to Dharmarjya (to Dharmarja), Mrtyave Mrtyu) Antaka),

Vaivasvatya (to V a i v a s v a t a ; K l y a ( t o K l a ) a n d 19. I n a l l Vratas ( s a c r e d r i t e s ) he shall Brahmacarya

Sarvabhtaksayya be quiescent, of (celibacy), ground fast (not

( t o S a r v a b h t a k s a y a ) . H e s h a l l t h e n b e freed f r o m a l l s i n s . controlled m i n d a n d shall on a c o t ) . 20. He shall observe fast o n t h e s i x t h d a y i n the b r i g h t b e freed from all h a l f of the l u n a r m o n t h a n d on the seventh d a y he shall worship G o d S u n with mental concentration. He shall sins. 21. of O b s e r v i n g fast o n t h e e l e v e n t h d a y i n t h e b r i g h t h a l f and w o r s h i p p i n g Janrdana o n t h e twelfth the lunar m o n t h 22. Austerity, observe

a n d w o r s h i p o f b r a h m i n s a n d s h a l l lie o n l y o n t h e

d a y h e s h a l l b e freed f r o m g r e a t s i n s . r e c i t a l o f p r a y e r s , visit t o h o l y p l a c e s a n d on the occasion of eclipses, etc. worship of gods a n d b r a h m i n s a r e d e s t r u c t i v e o f g r e a t sins. 23. E v e n t h o u g h a p e r s o n i s g u i l t y o f a l l sins, i f h e w e r e shall be t o d i e i n h o l y p l a c e s after d u e p e r f o r m a n c e o f rites, h e freed from a l l s i n s . 24. A w o m a n c a n r e d e e m her h u s b a n d guilty of slaughter a n y other great sin, ingratitude, etc. if she of a b r a h m i n , or 24. after. 26. Rksasas. 27. Persons taking a d i p in the holy river " P h a l g u " 1 ( i n good actions. Thus did G a y ) , e t c . , s h a l l r e a p t h e fruit o f a l l As it is said that S t , celebrated in the three worlds, wife o f R m a t h e s o n o f D a a r a t h a , s u b j u g a t e d e v e n the l o r d o f

a s c e n d s the funeral pyre of her h u s b a n d . If a w o m a n is chaste a n d is devotedly attached to her this w o r l d o r h e r e h u s b a n d , she h a s n o sin w h a t s o e v e r h e r e i n

L o r d V i s n u s p e a k t o m e , O s a g e s o b s e r v i n g d u e rites !
1. T h i s river flows t h r o u g h the town of G a y .

1.53.9
CHAPTER FIFTYTHREE Eight Sta said: 1. Nidhis.1 jTntrika They Kacchapa, 2. After h e a r i n g system are nidhis1

181

from H a r i , B r a h m a described the eight treasures belong to K u b e r a . In the on L a k s m ] . (Crocodile), are

[These

nidhis or

they a r e described as attendants Mahpadma, Makara,

3

Padma ( L o t u s ) , (Tortoise), Mukunda,

Nanda,2 Nila a n d

akha.

T h e s e Nidhis etc.

c o n d u c i v e to the describe their 3. 4. Mahpadma the pious. 5. A man

flourishing bearing

of q u a l i t i e s Sattva, the marks of

I shall now

special characteristics. Padma shall be Sttvika the same to gods, of

i n q u a l i t y . H e s h a l l b e c h i v a l r o u s . H e will g a t h e r t o g e t h e r g o l d , S i l v e r , e t c . , a n d will will b e offering ascetics a n d sacrificial priests. A person h a v i n g the m a r k s

be liberal in giving

wealth a n d other things to Mahpaama are Sttvika in

T h e two n i d h i s Padma and A person having the

characteristics. 6.

m a r k s of makara g a t h e r s

together swords, arrows, javelins, etc. H e will b e a d o n o r u n t o w e l l - r e a d p e r s o n s a n d f r i e n d l y w e a l t h a n d his e n e m i e s will nidhis a r e supposed w i t h k i n g s . H e will b e w a s t i n g his kill h i m i n b a t t l e . 7. Makara a n d Kacchapa t h e s e t w o A faith in t o b e tmasika i n c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . Kacchapa d o e s n o t h a v e 8. ground. person having the m a r k s of

a n y person. He neither enjoys in a d e e p pit in the

his w e a l t h n o r g i v e s i t t o a n y b o d y . H e will k e e p his w e a l t h b o a r d e d H e will r e m a i n a single person (without a n y friend). A person having

T h e nidhi Mukunda is rjasika in c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . the m a r k s thereof collects realms. 9.

H e enjoys all g o o d t h i n g s i n life a n d d i s t r i b u t e s w e a l t h

a m o n g musicians and courtesans. A person having the marks of

1. nine 2. 3. T r e a s u r e s of K u b e r a , the god A lute. (SSED, p . 279). of Wealth. Mdhis are said to be

also. Conch.

182

Garuda

Purna

JVanda b o t h tmasika a n d rjasika s h a l l be t h e v i t a l s u p p o r t of. his f a m i l y . 10. H e will be pleased b y f l a t t e r y : H e will old friends a n d marks of have m a n y w i v e s . H e will lose i n t e r e s t i n ship with others. 11. have A person h a v i n g the He t h e nidhiI Nla shall sttvika 12. H e will b e indicates 13. of akha) 14. a n d others enjoyment. H i s servants a n d kinsmen e a t w r e t c h e d food a n d d a b e a r i n g the m a r k s If, e v e r he g i v e s present to H a r a not wear g o o d garments. T h e Sakhin ( o n e He splendour. will gather together garments, persons. c o n t r a c t friend-

grains, etc: h a s the manliness a n d spends power of three m a k i n g m a n g o groves, selfcentredness. He t a n k s , e t c . T h e nidhi akha all his w e a l t h i n his o w n

is a s s i d u o u s in n o u r i s h i n g himself. When the the m a r k i n g s of of

anything to a n y b o d y it shall go in v a i n . different nidhis a r e the results a r e m i x e d . L o r d H a r i h a d thus e x p o u n d e d characteristics now as H a r i had expounded them previously.

t h e nidhis. I a m e x p o u n d i n g

CHAPTER

FIFTYFOUR

Bhuvana-Koa Hari said 1. : Priyavrata1 had ten sons. T h e y were Agnldhra,

Agnibhu, Vapusmn, Dyutimn, Medh, Medhtithi2, Bhavya, abala, Putra, 2. A n d J y o t i s m n . O f these ten, the three, viz., M e d h , Agnibhu a n d Putra indulged in yogic pursuits.
1. (CDHM 2. p. O n e of the two sons of B r a h m a a n d 244). He is mentioned in the V e d a as a sage. (CDHM p . 207). atarp, or a son of Manu.

'2

/ooaooo.oor>\

1.54.11 3. (i.e. vrata) 4. 5. Kua

4

183 T h e y n e v e r c a r e d for t h e r e a l m . T h e y w e r e Jtismaras T h e king (Priyaon water. It lmala,3

they

could k n o w their previous b i r t h s ) .

g a v e seven islands to the seven other sons. T h e e a r t h i s s i t u a t e d like a b o a t The Each seven
5

floating

i s fifty c r o r e s o f Y o j a n a s i n e x t e n t ( i . e . 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 k i l o m e t r e s ) . islands
6

are

Jambu,1
7

Plaksa,2

Krauca,

ka,

and Puskara. (2) Iksu

6. Sur

o f these i s l a n d s i s s u r r o u n d e d b y s e v e n o c e a n s ; (salt) Sarpis (sugarcane juice), Dadhi (curd), (3) (6) (4) (ghee), (5)

those of ( 1 ) L a v a n a (wine), 7. one D u g d h a (milk)

a n d (7) J a l a (water) encircles. T h e (i.e. is in J a m b t h o u s a n d Tojanas

T h e ocean is twice the island in a r e a it two hundred thousand kilometres)

m o u n t a i n M e r u 3 extending to a hundred million dvpa. 8.

I t s h e i g h t i s eighty-four t h o u s a n d Y o j a n a s ( o n e m i l l i o n and the u p p e r r i d g e i s thirty-two t h o u s a n d Tojanas

a n d e i g h t t h o u s a n d k i l o m e t r e s ) . I t g o e s s i x t e e n t h o u s a n d Tojanas underneath in girth. 9. It is in the form of the p e r i c a r p '"of a lotus. T h e mountains Himavn,9 Hemakta10
11

Varsaparvatasboundary and Nisadha 10-11. O akara,

a r e t o w a r d s the s o u t h o f M e r u . And N l a 1 2 , veta13 a n d r g i n 1 1 are in the north.

t h e r e i s n o d i v i s i o n o f Tugas ( A g e s ) a m o n g t h e p e o p l e

living in P l a k s a a n d other islands. Agndhra, the king of J a m b dvpa h a d nine sons:

1. T h e island having M e r u at its centre. It includes B h r a t a y a r s a 2. N o t identifiable. 3. N o t identifiable. 4. N o t identifiable. 5. N o t identifiable. 6. N o t identifiable. 7. N o t identifiable. But, for the p r o b a b l e identfication of the islands see S . M . Ali : G e o g r a p h y of the P u r n a s . 8. T h e modern Pmr-knot in Central Asia. 9. The Himalayas. 10. N o t identifiable. 11. N o t identifiable. 12. N o t identifiable. 13. N o t identifiable. 14. N o t identifiable. But, for the probable identification of the mountains see S . M . Ali, O p . cit.

184 12. 13. division Nbhi 14. 15. thin. 16. 17. 18. of Nbhi, Kimpurusa, Harivarsa, gave

Garuda Ilvrta, of his

Purna Ramya, sons a

Hiranvn, Kuru, Bhadrva. A n d K e t u m l a the the His king each island which later on were known after t h e m .

married

M e r u d e v a n d h a d a son k n o w n R s a b h a 1 . son was B h a r a t a 2 who performed His son s a c r e d rites i n was ParamesHis son

lagrma. B h a r a t a ' s s o n w a s S u m a t i a n d his son w a s T e j a s a . H i s son w a s I n d r a d y u m n a . H i s s o n w a s P r a t h r a a n d his s o n P r a t i h a r t r . H i s s o n w a s P r a s t r a . H i s son N a r a was the son of G a y a . His Tvastr and Viraja. Rajas was son Vibhu.

w a s P r t h u . N e x t w a s N a k t a . N a k t a h a d a son G a y a . was Buddhirt. H e h a d four sons v e r y i n t e l l i g e n t D h m n , B h a u v a n a , w a s his s o n . a t a j i t w a s R a j a ' s son a n d his son w a s V i v a k j y o t i .

CHAPTER FIFTYFIVE Bhuvana-Koa Hari said 1. 2. 3. Kalpa natural : T h e I l v r t a - V a r s a is situated in the m i d d l e . Then Kimpurusa-Varsa Ketumla-Varsa K u r u v a r s a is is to the S o u t h Bhadrof Meru.

v a i s i n t h e E a s t . T h e Hiranvn-Warsa i s i n the S o u t h - E a s t . B h a r a t a is also in the S o u t h . H a r i v a r s a is in the South-West. i s i n t h e W e s t a n d R a m y a k a i n the in the North. Varsa siddhi It is covered with is North-West. trees. 4-5. E x c e p t in B h a r a t a The nine (achievement) everywhere. islands surrounded by ocean

1. Bharata 2. on

According and he

to

the a

legend, life

Rsabha

gave

his

Kingdom

to

his

son

himself led abdicated

of penance. Visnu. Intent, (CDHM, pp. 46-7).

According to the legend, he w a s a great devotee of his throne

devotion

1.55.9 are Indradvpa, Kaerumn, Tmravarna,

185 Gabhastimn

N g a d v p a , K a t h a , S i m h a l a , 1 V r u n 2 a n d this t h e n i n t h o n e . 6. in the In its Eastern parts are t h e Kirtas, t h e Tavanas3 a r e

t h e W e s t , t h e ndhras* live in North. 7. B r h m a n a s , Ksatriyas,

t h e S o u t h a n d the Turuskas5 in

Vaiyas a n d

dras

live

in t h e

middle. Mahendra6, M a l a v a 7 , Sahya8, ktimn9, R k s a 1 0 . 8. iv,18 9. Godvar Tp17,

22

Vindhya

and

Priytra11 are

t h e s e v e n Kulaparvatas.

T h e s a c r e d rivers a r e V e d a - s m r t i 1 2 , N a r m a d 1 3 V a r a d 1 4 S u r a s 1 5 Payosn18,
23

Saray19
24

Kver20, , Mahnad,

Gomat21,
26

, Bhmarath , Krsnavarn

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. mountain 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

Modern Modern Modern The Modern Modern Not

Ceylon. Borneo. and other Europeans. they represent the Dravidians. India and allied South-Western eastern Asia. Andhras, perhaps here and in

Represents Greeks inhabitants

of Central

Mahendra Nilgiri

mountain in the

coast of

mountains. Hills South India. of India. to Mallintha SatpuraT h e Western G h a t s on the western sea-coast identifiable. bank of N a r m a d , probably it according the 5.44). modern Most India. Vindhya-ranges. represents modern It is situated on the in Central

(Raghuvarha, The

N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. Modern Not Narmad. in Vidarbha. M o d e r n W a r d h a river identifiable. Sea.

M o d e r n i v a n t h a river in C h h a t t i s g a r h in M a d h y a P r a d e s h . M o d e r n T p t i river i n C e n t r a l I n d i a . I t falls i n the A r a b i a n N o t identifiable. Modern Saray in Uttara Pradesh. Modern Modern Modern Modern Modern Kveri. Godvari. Bhim. Krsn. M a h n a d i in Central Eastern India. Modern Gomati in Uttara Pradesh.

186 10.
4

Garuda Ketuml , Vidarbh ,

7 1 2 3

Purna

Tmraparn , Candrabhg , Sarasvat,

5 6

Rsikuly , Kver, M a t t a g a g , Payasvin . 11. and atadr.

8

They are auspicious and

t h e y d e s t r o y sins. P e o p l e i n t h e c e n t r a l s t a t e s d r i n k t h e w a t e r s o f these rivers. 12. Pclas , Kuntis

14 9

The

races
10

that
15

inhabit
11

the

central
12

states are Pataccaras

13

Kurus

Matsyas .

Yaudheyas

and rasenas O Vrsadhvaja

22

13. Padmas and

16

(iva)
1 8

the p e o p l e living in the east a r e , Cedis

19

, Stas", Mgadhas .

Ksyas

2 0

Videhas,

21

Kosalas

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

N o t identifiable. Modern Tambervari in South India. M o d e r n C h e n a b in the Punjab. M o d e r n R s i k u l y in Orissa. N o t identifiable. M o d e r n Payasvin, a tributary of the Y a m u n a . N o t identifiable. M o d e r n Sutlaj in the Panjab. P c l a s were the people who inhabited a region which roughly

corresponds to the modern Rohtlkhanda-division of U t t a r a Pradesh a n d also the region south of it. L a t e r on, the region north of the G a g was called T h e one to the S o u t h of the Delhi on the west Their N o r t h P c l a a n d its c a p i t a l was Ahicchatra. 10.

G a g was S o u t h P c l a a n d its capital was K m p i l y a . T h e K u r u s inhabited roughly the region a r o u n d of the Y a m u n a , generally covered by the modern province of H a r y a n a . two capitals H a s t i n p u r a a n d I n d r a p r a s t h a are well known. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. T h e people who inhabited the modern territory a r o u n d Alwar N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. P e r h a p s the people who inhabited the territory north of C a m b a l a . T h e people who lived in the region a r o u n d M a t h u r a . P e r h a p s those who lived around Padma-river in the East-Bengal. N o t identifiable. M o d e r n S o u t h Bihar. T h e people inhabiting the central or the eastern Vindhya-ranges. T h e people inhabiting the region a r o u n d K , modern V r n a s i . M o d e r n N o r t h Bihar. T h e people living around Ayodhy. J a i p u r and Bharatpur.

1.55.17 14. Vagas , 15.

2

187 People
3

living

in
4

the South-East Vaidarbhas

5

are
8

Kaligas1,

Pundras ,

Agas ,

Mlakas , and those those of

w h o stay in the V i n d h y a ranges. T h e people living i n D a k s i n - p a t h a a r e P u l i n d a 7 , A m a k a 8 , a n d J m t a 9 , N a y a 1 0 , r s t r a r e g i o n s a s well a s Karntas11, Kmbojas12 and Ghtas.13 16. Dravidas , 17. women) Mthuras
28 15

The

people
10 20

in

the
17

South-West are A m b a s t h a s , 1 4 a k a s 1 9 a n d the

Ltas

, Kambojas

, Strmukhas18,

people of Anarta

. Mlecchas23,
27

T h e people in the West are Strrjyas21 (governed by Saindhavas22, Atheists24, Yavanas25 and Naisadhas.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. inhabiting perhaps 16. 17. 18. 19 . 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. have been 27.

Modern

Orissa.

Modern Bengal. N o t identifiable. Modern North Bengal. Modern Vidarbha (Berar). N o t identifiable. M o d e r n Chhatisgarh in M a d h y a Pradesh. T h e region around modern A u r a n g a b a d - H y d e r a b a d . Not Not Not Not In the to identifiable. identifiable. Mysore. identifiable. identifiable. modern South days, India the people are called believed Dravidas. to be of non-Aryan origin is T h e specific reference

Modern

T h e people inhabiting the sea-coast.

the m o d e r n T a m i l n a d u . Modern Not Not Not Not Khandesh area of Mahrsfra. identifiable. identifiable. identifiable. Eastern Sindh. Gujrata. identifiable.

Modern Modern

N o n - H i n d u s of the Western India. N o n - H i n d u s of the Western India. N o n - H i n d u s of the Western I n d i a . The people inhabiting before. the region West o f M a t h u r . rasenas mentioned

The region around modern Gwalior.

188 18. Tusras , 19.

2

Garuda The regions

3

Purna
1

in

the
4

North-West
5

are

Mndavyas
6

Mlikas , Avamukhas , The people occupying

Khaas , Mahkeas , and the Northern region are

Mahnsas.7 L a m b a k a s 8 Stanangas9, Madras10, Gndhras11, Bhlikas12, and the M l e c c h a s 20. Nlakola

14 18

o c c u p y i n g the H i m a l a y a n r a n g e s . p e o p l e living i n the N o r t h E a s t a r e T r i g a r t a s 1 3 Satakanas16, Abhshas17 and

The

Brahmaputras15,

Kmras.

CHAPTER FIFTYSIX Bhuvana-Koa Hari said : 1. 2. 3. Medhtithi, Sukhodaya, the king of iva, Plaksa-dvpa, iira. and Dhruva. Nrada, Ksemaka had seven sons : T h e y a r e : t h e e l d e s t n t a b h a v a , Nanda, T h e y ruled over Plaksa d v i p a . T h e seven mountains are G o m e d a , C a n d r a , Dundubhi, Somaka, Sumanas and Vaibhrja.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Not The identifiable. people of Central Asia adjoining North-Western India.

N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. The region North of Kashmir. N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. The Not The The modern region region Lamgan. around around around modern mode> i modem Peshawar. Kandhar. Balakh. identifiable.

T h e region

N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. The Not valley of the Brahmaputra. N o t identifiable. identifiable. Kashmir. Modern

1.56.18 4. 5. 6. The seven rivers there are A n u t a p t , Sikh,

189 Vip,

Tridiv, K r a m u , Amrt and Sukrt. V a p u s m n , the king of l m a l a - d v l p a h a d s even sons. Vaidyuta, etc). Mnasa The and Saprabha. mountains (The divisions They are veta, Harita, J l m t a , Rohita, o v e r w h i c h t h e y r u l e d a r e k n o w n after their n a m e s , v e t a v a r s a , Haritavarsa 7. 8. seven 9. each etc.). 10. 11. K. 12. The noble-minded sons. and They king of Krauca-dvpa, Dyutim n h a d seven 13. Krauca, 14. Muni are : K u a l a , The Mandaga, Usna, mountains are The The seven seven mountains sacred are :Vidruma, Hemaaila, removing sins are : Dyutimn, Puspavn, Kueaya, Hari and Mandarcala. rivers Dhtapp, iv, Pavitra, Sanmati, Vidyudabhr, Mah and is seven are : K u m u d a , rivers removing Unnata, Drona, Mahisa, Balhaka, K r a u c a and K a k u d m n . T h e seven And sins a r e : Y o n i , T o y , V i t r s n , C a n d r , u k l , V i m o c a n , Vidhrti. J y o t i s m n , the king o f K u a - d v p a , h a d Venumn, Dvairatha, Udbhidavarsa, Lambana, Dhrti, by sons. T h e y a r e : Udbhida, called

P r a b h k a r a a n d K a p i l a . ( H e r e a l s o t h e d i v i s i o n s r u l e d over respectively

Dvairathavarsa,

Pvara, Andhakraka, Dundubhi. seven Vmana, Andhakraka, Divvrt, Mahaila, Dundubhi and Pundarkavn. Kumudare : G a u r , The king

T h e s e v e n rivers i n t h e s e v e n d i v i s i o n s vat, S a n d h y , R t r i , M a n o j a v , 15. 16. 17. 18. Khyti and Pundark.

of kadvpa

B h a v y a h a d seven sons. T h e y are : J a l a d a , K u m r a , Sukumra, M a v a k a , T h e s e v e n rivers a r e : - S u k u m r , K u m r , Nalin, Kusumoda, Samodrki and Mahdruma. Dhenuk, Iksu, Venuk and Gabhast. T h e king o f P u s k a r a , S a b a l a , h a d two sons M a h v r a a n d Dhtaki-. T h e s e a r e t w o V a r s a s ( d i v i s i o n s ) , o n e t o t h e n o r t h of M n a s a a n d the other to the east.

190
19. fifty

Garuda T h i s d v p a is a h i g h l a n d fifty t h o u s a n d yojanas

Purna high

a n d as m u c h wide too. t h o u s a n d yojanas). 20. living. 21. is the

(It was circular in shape, diameter being

T h e P u s k a r a - d v l p a is encircled by an o c e a n of sweet as Svddaka. In front o f i t a r e seen t h e p e o p l e twice as bright wide. (as The of

water known

T h e g r o u n d has g o l d e n colour Lokloka, by ten

the g o l d h e r e ) . It is devoid of all sorts of a n i m a l s . mountain is t h o u s a n d yojanas which is mountain pervaded darkness

Beyond that

on the side

Andakatha.

CHAPTER

FIFTYSEVEN

Bhuvana-Koa Hari Said : 1. T h e h e i g h t o f t h e e a r t h (from 840,000, ten worlds each P t l a ) is said to be the the s e v e n t y t h o u s a n d yojanas ( a b o u t seven nether worlds a r e other below. 2. 3. The seven nether are are Atala, Vitala, Nitala black, white, crimson, G a b h a s t i m a t , M a h k h y a , S u t a i a a n d the last P t l a . T h e grounds respectively y e l l o w , (in c o l o u r ) a n d stony, r o c k y , a n d g o l d e n c o l o u r e d [ s e v e n in order]. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. T h e r e R k s a s a s a n d S e r p e n t s live. I n t h e terrific P u s k a r a d v p a t h e r e a r e t h e h e l l s . T h e i r Mahjvla, Asipatravana, Sadariia, Taptakumbha, Krsna, Lavana, Vimohita, PyaKilometres) yojanas and from

thousand

names are : R a u r a v a , kara, R o d h a , T l a , Vinaana, Rudhira, Vaitaran, K r m i a , Krmibhojana, Nnbhaksa, Druna, Tama, Avci, v a h a , Papa, V a h n i j v l o d b h a v a , A i v a . Krsnastra, vabhojana, injuries O with Apratistha, and Usnavci. Sinners guilty of poisoning, cooked and inflicting weapons a n d arson are roasted here. Rudra,

t h e u p p e r r e g i o n s Bhh, e t c . a r e s i t u a t e d o n e a b o v e t h e o t h e r .

1.58.7
9. wind principle) 10.

191 T h e Anda o r t h e c o s m i c e g g i s e n c i r c l e d b y w a t e r , f i r e , ether. It is then encircled by Mahat (the g r e a t a n d Pradhna ( t h e mla-prakrti).

and

L o r d N r y a n a p e r v a d e s ten t i m e s the s p a c e o c c u p i -

e d b y t h e Anda.

CHAPTER

FIFTYEIGHT

Description of the planets Hari said 1. of the : I shall now e x p o u n d the and O other planets. in l e n g t h . Vrsabhadhvaja (iva), its shaft is twice t h a t it. It has measurements and situation T h e c h a r i o t o f the s u n i s n i n e

Sun 2-3.

t h o u s a n d yojanas m u c h long. three central 4. one yojanas 5.

T h e a x l e o f the w h e e l i s o n e a n d a h a l f c r o r e s a n d T h e wheel is fitted to (Ara) joints (Nbhi), five s p o k e s a n d six nemis wheel takes

s e v e n m i l l i o n yojanas l o n g . (encircling r i m s ) .

All these constitute one year The second axle of the long. T h e f i v e o t h e r a x l e s a r e sixty

(when the

round).

s u n i s forty t h o u s a n d t h o u s a n d yojanas long,

e a c h . T h e length of the axle is in proportion to that of the two ends of the yoke. 6. T h e short axle is fixed to the end of the the
2

the

pole

of the

circular

wheel a l o n g w i t h 7. (chandas) and

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

yoke. Sun are

3

T h e second axle is the seven metres Anusfup

5

fixed in t h e Mnasa m o u n t a i n . T h e seven horses of Gyatri,

9

Brhati

Usnik ,

Jagat ,

Trisfup*,

Pakti.
A

A m e t r e with nine s y l l a b l e s in a q u a r t e r . metre with twentyeight syllables (total). A m e t r e with twelve syllables in a q u a r t e r . A m e t r e with eleven A metre with s y l l a b l e s in a q u a r t e r . a quarter. eight s y l l a b l e s in

A m e t r e with five s y l l a b l e s in a q u a r t e r .

192 8. (Apsaras) In the month (Rsi) of Caitra Dht, (Serpent),

Garuda (Aditya) (Gandharva)

Purna

Kratusthal,. (Taksa) y reside in

Pulastya

Vsuki

Rathakrt

Grmani, Heti the solar zone. 9. Pulaha

(Rksasagana)

a n d Tumburu Mdhava

In t h e m o n t h of (R?i), Rathajas Kacchanira

(Vaikha), Aryaman (Apsaras), Nrada (Sun), and

(Sun) Prahet

(Taksa),

Pujiksthal

(Rksasagana) 10. Taksaka Hh the sun. 11. (Sage) In

(Serpent)

(Gandharva) Atri (Sage),. (Apsaras),

(reside in the solar z o n e ) . In the m o n t h of Jyestha, Mitra (Serpent), Pauruseya an Rathawana month Sahajany (Taksa) of (Taksa) (Rksasagana) Menak

(Gandharva) the

r e s i d e in t h e c h a r i o t of Varuna Kuhu (Sun), (Gandharva), Vasistha Budha r e s i d e in Vivvasu (Sage) (Sun), Anumloc reside (Sun),. (Sage), (Apsaras) (Gandharva), Vivci rightful

of sdha (Apsaras), a n d Sukra rvana, Elpatra of

Rambh

(Bhskara), Rathacitra the solar zone. 12. (Gandharva), Pramloc 13. Ugrasena (Apsaras), 14. Suruci Dhanajaya 15. Bharadvja (Apsaras), 16. Amu Vidyut 17. rnyu Prvacitti (Serpent), In In In

(Rksasagana) Indra (Sun),

the m o n t h Srota the

(Taksa), month

(Bhskara), Agiras Vivasvn (Taksa),

(Apsaras)

a n d t h e s e r p e n t s r e s i d e in t h e s o l a r z o n e . Bhdrapada, prana (Sage),

(Gandharva), Bhrgu

akhapla ( S e r p e n t ) a n d Vyghra (Rksasagana) the month Dhtr Susena month of vayuj (Taksa), of Krttika, (Sun), a n d pah Airvata (vina), Psan Gautama a n d Ghrtcl Vivvasu,

in the solar zone. (Gandharva), (Serpent), In the (Rksasagana),

r e s i d e i n the s u n . ( S a g e ) , Parjanya Senji The (Taksa) rightful Kyapa Urvai, (Serpent), are

(Rksasagana)

residents of the solar zone. p o s s e s s o r s o f the Mrgairsa m o n t h a r e (Sage), (Apsaras) Trksya Citrasena (Taksa), Mahpadma and (Gandharva) Bharga (Sun),

(Rksasagana). I n t h e m o n t h o f P a u s a Kratu ( S a g e ) , (Gandharva), (Taksa) (Apsaras) Sphrja (Sun), Karkotaka (Rksasagana),

' ( S e r p e n t ) , Aristanemi

a n d the excellent celestial d a m s e l

t h e s e seven, r e s i d e in t h e s o l a r z o n e .

1.58.29 18. In t h e m o n t h Rtajit of Mgha Tilottam, Tvastr (Sun),

193 Jamadagni Brahmpeta

( S a g e ) , Kambala (Rksasagana), 19. (Taksa), 20.

(Serpent),

(Apsaras),

(Taksa) a n d month (Sage) of and

Dhrtarstra Visnu

(Gandharva) t h e s e (Sun), Avatara Satyajit reside

seven reside in the solar zone. In t h e Vivmitra Phlguna, Tajpeta ( S e r p e n t ) , Rambh in the solar zone. O B r a h m a n , i n the s o l a r z o n e t h e s a g e s s i n g s o n g s in front. damsels dance. bear the The yoke. d e m o n s walk The Taksas of (mentioned a b o v e ) , w h o s e p o w e r h a s b e e n e n h a n c e d b y V i s n u ' s akti, p r a y to t h e s u n . T h e Gandharvas 21. behind The sun. celestial The the (Apsaras), Sryavarcas (Gandharva), (Rksasagana)

serpents

c a t c h h o l d o f the r e i n s . 22. Kunda T h e Vlakhilyas1 sit s u r r o u n d i n g h i m . T h e c h a r i o t three wheels. His horses are left as and white five the M o o n has flower. 23. F i v e horses a r e y o k e d t o t h e to the son as the

right. T h e M o o n m o v e s a b o u t b y this. T h e c h a r i o t o f t h e wind and fire. 24-25. It is He has eight tawny-coloured of earth. It horses as is adorned

o f t h e M o o n (BudhaMercury) i s e v o l v e d o u t o f the s u b s t a n c e s fast a s with

t h e w i n d . ukra's g r e a t c h a r i o t h a s the fender yoked with horses b o r n banners. 26.

and bottom pole.

T h e c h a r i o t o f the son o f e a r t h ( M a r s ) i s like h e a t e d I t h a s eight horses. I t i s h u g e i n s i z e . T h e horses a r e c r i m s o n - c o l o u r e d of fire. His Brhaspati for a year. like Padmargastays (Jupiter)

gold in colour. 27-29. in e a c h fitted

gem. T h e y are evolved out Zodiac with eight grey The

g o l d - c o l o u r e d c h a r i o t is

h o r s e s . S a t u r n m o v e s v e r y slowly s e a t e d of variegated colours evolved out are eight. T h e y are beeo f Rhu

o n a c h a r i o t f i t t e d w i t h horses o f t h e ether. horses

coloured. T h e chariot is grey-coloured.

1.

T h e y a r e said to be pigmy in size a n d 60,000 T h e y move with the sun.

in

number.

Accord-

ing to the legends they were born from the hair of P r a j p a t i or from S u m a t i , the wife of K r a t u .

194 30.

Garuda

Purna

T h e y are yoked only once a n d they m o v e constantly, the chariot o f Ketu a r e eight in

O i v a . T h e horses f i t t e d t o 31. and the

n u m b e r . T h e y a r e a s fast a s t h e w i n d . S o m e are smoke-coloured, some straw-coloured, a n d ocean, nay the whole universe (consisting of m a n y s o m e a s c r i m s o n a s t h e l a c - j u i c e . T h e i s l a n d s , rivers, m o u n t a i n s worlds) is the b o d y of L o r d V i s n u .

CHAPTER FIFTYNINE Astrology Sta said : 1. After h a v i n g e x p o u n d e d t h e d i m e n s i o n s of essence the diffethat r e n t p l a n e t s , L o r d K e a v a e x p l a i n e d the h e is. Hari said 2. : Krttik (Alcyone) Deity. known (A group o f six stars) has Firehas Brahma. moon has the Rohini (Aldebarem) (Orionis) of Astrology

t h a t h a s fourfold a i m s , t o R u d r a , t h e g i v e r o f

everything

g o d a s the P r e s i d i n g Ilvalotherwise 3.

as Mrgairas

as t h e p r e s i d i n g d e i t y ; Ardr

(Betelguese) has Bhaga

h a s Rudra. (Cameri) Sarpa ( R h u ) ; Magh Uttaraphl-

Punarvasu ( P o l l u x ) h a s Aditi, Tisya ( P u s y a )

h a s Guru ( J u p i t e r ) , lesa ( H y d r a e ) ( R e g u l u s ) h a s Pitrs ( M a n e s ) . 4. guni Citra Prvaphlguni has (Lenis) has Hasta Vyu has the

(iva) ;

( D e n e b o l a ) h a s Aryaman; (Corvi) 5. 6. Tvaffr. Svti ( A r c t u r u s ) h a s Anurdh Sakra Nirrti is (Scorpia) (Indra); as (Sagittari)

( S p i c a ) h a s Savilr ( S u n ) ; (wind); Mitra presiding by those Vikh (Sun); deity who ravana of (Libra) Jyesfh Mla it.

h a s Indra a n d f i r e . (Antares)has (Scorpia) 7. h a s Visnu. (Sagittari)

explained

know

Prvsdh

h a s Apah

(water);

Uttarsdh (Affair)

h a s Vivedevas. Abhijit h a s

Brahma,

I 59.21 8. ed by 9. Psan. Dhanisth scholars: (Delphini) has Vsava ( I n d r a ) , as has Varuna. has Revati Aja

195 mention(Brahma) : has

Satabhisak(Aquarii) (Pegasi) (Arietis)

Pravabhdmpada

(Monkele) h a s Ahirbudhna. h a s Tama. first in and

Uttarabhdrapada Avini 10.

(Piscium)

( A r i e t i s ) h a s Aivinidevas. Thus I ninth have mentioned stars. Brahmni lunar the the different

Bharani

t h e different p r e s i d i n g d e i t i e s o f stands in the east on the fortnight. 11. tenth Mahevarl VSrh stands stands

d a y of on

the north

the second a n d fifth a n d sixth thir-

day. 12.

in the s o u t h on the on the

teenth day. lndrni stands in the west the a n d the day day fourteenth. and 13. a n d the 14. 15. journeys Uasta, and 16-18. Uttarsdh, Punarvasu. Prvsdh, lakes, 19. these stars. 20-21. said Hasta, O t h e r activities such as the study of M a t h e m a t i c s , following stars a r e Svti, (face s i d e w a y s ) Mrgairas Revati, Avini, Citr, Jyeslh. Astrology etc. can also be undertaken. T h e to be Prvamukha Punarvasu, Anurdh, and L a y i n g foundations of temples, digging treasures, done during g o i n g into mines, digging grass, ploughing can be C m u n d in Mahlaksmi new north-west north-east on the on the seventh eighth

Full moon day. in t h e m o o n d a y . V a i s n a v stands in the south-east on in the south-west on the for fourth and

the third a n d eleventh d a y . Kaumrl twelfth d a y s . No one shall : Avini, Jyesth. F o r w e a r i n g new g a r m e n t s the following stars a r e Citr, Svti, Vikh, Anurdh, be Uttarphlguni, Uttarabhdrapada, : Krttik, Avini, Rohini, s a i d to Pusya, Dhanisth a n d Adhovaktras (face Ml, All Vikh, activities Magh, Revati, t r a v e l i n t h e d i r e c t i o n o f t h e Toginis. auspicious undertaking Pusya, Mrgairas,Mla, Punarvasu,

T h e following stars a r e

auspicious:Hasta,

T h e following stars are Prvphlguni, and earth

turned down)

Bharani, les, such

Prvabhdrapad.

involving going down the

a s d i g g i n g tanks, wells,

196 22. buffaloes, T a m i n g of elephants, camels, sowing o f seeds-, paying horses,

Garuda

Purna and

bullocks

visits,

m a k i n g of wheels, The following Pusya, Sata-

chariots a n d machines, floating of boats, 23-24. nine stars are Dhanisth, C a n be done during these stars. said to be rdhvamukha Uttarsdh, Uttarphlguni, : Rohini, rdr, Uttarabhdrapada,

bhisak a n d Sravana. 25. All

D u r i n g these stars a king c a n be involving going up and

crowned, all n o b l e

a n d silk c l o t h e s c a n b e w o r n . activities actions can be pursued. T h e night are inauspicious : 26. following days o f t h e l u n a r fortThe

fourth, sixth,

eighth, ninth,

T w e l f t h , f o u r t e e n t h , n e w m o o n a n d full m o o n . Wednesday.

f o l l o w i n g d a y s a r e a u s p i c i o u s :first d a y o f t h e d a r k f o r t n i g h t , second d a y of either fortnight if it is on 27. 28. 29. T h i r d d a y o n T u e s d a y ; fourth d a y o n S a t u r d a y ; f i f t h Seventh d a y on W e d n e s d a y ; eighth d a y on T u e s d a y day on M o n d a y ; tenth d a y on T h u r s d a y . T u e s d a y ; fourEleventh d a y o n T h u r s d a y a n d F r i d a y ; twelfth d a y day on Friday and new

d a y on T h u r s d a y , sixth d a y on T u e s d a y a n d F r i d a y . a n d S u n d a y ; ninth

on Wednesday; thirteenth teenth d a y on S a t u r d a y . 30. falling Full M o o n and S u n d a y is

M o o n on Thursday are good. the lunar f o r t n i g h t [Dvda m o o n burns the Budha

T h e s u n b u r n s t h e twelfth d a y o f on a eleventh day. 31. (Mercury) day. 32-33.

b u r n t ( dagdha) ] . T h e

M a r s b u r n s t h e t e n t h d a y [Daami

o n Tuesday];

( W e d n e s d a y ) burns the ninth d a y ;

Jupiter (Thurs

day) burns the eighth d a y ; B h r g a v a ( F r i d a y )

burns the seventh

T h e S u n ' s son ( S a t u r n ) burns the sixth d a y . D u r i n g the first, eighth, ninth and the

these burnt days, one shall not travel. T h e u n d e r t a k i n g of l o n g journeys shall be a v o i d e d on fourteenth d a y s of the lunar fortnight a n d on Wednesdays. T h e

s i x t h d a y w h e n t h e lagna ( A s c e n d e n t ) is Mesa ( A r i e s ) or Karkataka ( C a n c e r ) ; t h e e i g h t h d a y w i t h t h e lagna Kany ( V i r g o ) or Mithuna (Gemini). 34. Kumbha T h e f o u r t h d a y w h e n t h e Lagna i s twelfth day Vrsa ( T a u r u s ) or (Aquaris) ; the w h e n t h e lagna is Makara

( C a p r i c o r n ) or

Tula

( L i b r a ) ; t h e t e n t h d a y , w h e n t h e lagna is

1 .59.49 Vrcika ( S c o r p i o ) o r Sirhha ( L e o ) the lagna is Dhanus ( S a g i t t a r i u s ) Hari said :

197 a n d the fourteenth d a y when

or Mind ( P i s c e s ) .

35-37.

T i m e s a r e a l s o dagdha ( b u r n t ) a n d h e n c e i n a u s p i T h e following conjunctions a r e or Jyesth; t h a t of the

c i o u s for u n d e r t a k i n g j o u r n e y s . the Sun (Sunday)

Autptika ( h a r m f u l ) . T h e y m a y c a u s e d e a t h , sickness, e t c . : t h a t o f w i t h Vikh, Anurdh Moon (Monday) of M e r c u r y Jupiter Venus with w i t h Prvsdh, Ultarsdh or Sravana; w i t h Revati, Avini or Rohini Chitr. Mrgairas or t h a t of of of

M a r s ( T u e s d a y ) with atabhisak, Dhanisth, or Purvabhdrapada ; t h a t (Wednesday) with Bharani; t h a t rdr; that (Thursday) (Friday) 38-39.

w i t h Pusya, les or Magh a n d t h a t Hasta or

of S a t u r n

Uttarphlguni,

T h e following c o n j u n c t i o n s a r e Amrlayogas ( N e c t a r -

like) a n d h e n c e c o n d u c i v e t o the fulfilment o f t a s k s u n d e r t a k e n : T h e s u n in Alula, t h e m o o n in Sravana, M a r s in Uttarabhdrapada, M e r c u r y in Krttik; J u p i t e r in Punarvasu; V e n u s a n d Svti in S a t u r n . 40. and A d d t o g e t h e r t h e letters two in is the the names of husband wife. D i v i d e b y t h r e e . I f 41-43. death. All in Viskambhafive Vyatipla, Parigha 44-45. junctions r e m a i n d e r , wife i s bringing then. In in Prvphlguni,

h a r m e d ; if one or zero, h u s b a n d is T h e r e a r e c e r t a i n yogas auspicious hours; and in activities in laseven Vyghta

harmed. (conjunctions) be avoided in Vajra hours; and

shall

Gandasix hours; n i n e hours. In conHasta

Atiganda six hours;

Vaidhrta t h e w h o l e evils are and

day. Sun a n d Mars. with

T h e f o l l o w i n g a r e Siddha yogas a u s p i c i o u s destroyed the Mercury, Rohini

when all

J u p i t e r a n d Pusya, Anurdh 46-47.

and Saturn,

Alrgairas a n d M o o n , Revati a n d V e n u s , Avini a n d t i o n s . Bharani w i t h M a r s , Dhanisth Venus; Citr w i t h Moon,

T h e f o l l o w i n g a r e Vifayogas p o i s o n o u s c o n j u n c Ultarsdh with Mercury, atabhisak w i t h J u p i t e r ; Rohini

w i t h V e n u s a n d Revati w i t h S a t u r n . 4 8 - 4 9 . T h e s t a r s a u s p i c i o u s for natal Dhanisth, Hasta, Avini, Mrgairas and the performance of postSravana, atabhisak. T h e following r e l i g i o u s rites a r e : P u s y a , Punarvasu, Revati, Citr,

198 stars are very at inauspicious that time Uttarsdh, a n d Krttik. for it will journey result

Garuda and

Purna

if journey Vikh, rdr,

is u n d e r t a k e n Uttarphlguni, Bharani, les

in d e a t h : Magh,

Uttarabhdrapad,

CHAPTER

SIXTY

Astrology Hari said 1. : T h e da ( d u r a t i o n o f t h e p e r i o d o f s p e c i a l influence)

o f t h e S u n i s for six y e a r s ; t h a t o f t h e M o o n f i f t e e n y e a r s ; t h a t of the M a r s eight y e a r s ; that of M e r c u r y seventeen years. 2. years. 3. T h e da o f S u n yields yields misery and heart-burn a n d happiness and destroys kings. M o o n ' s s u m p t u o u s food. 4. T h e da o f M a r s i s m i s e r a b l e . I t m a y c a u s e d e p o s i t i o n da o f M e r c u r y gives women of from the k i n g d o m , etc. T h e 5. da prosperity, T h a t of S a t u r n ten years; that of the J u p i t e r nineteen twenty-one y e a r s ; that of R h u twelve years a n d that of V e n u s

divine c h a r m s a n d f l o u r i s h i n g k i n g d o m with a m p l e treasury. T h e da o f s a t u r n d e s t r o y s k i n g d o m a n d y i e l d s m i s e r y happiness, virtue a n d t o k i n s m e n . T h e da o f J u p i t e r p r o v i d e s flourishing kingdom. 6. T h e da o f R h u c a u s e s d e s t r u c t i o n o f k i n g d o m s a n d of V e n u s provides elep r o d u c e s sickness a n d m i s e r y . T h e da 7. 8. 9. Saturn Mesa Ri is the the

phants, horses, flourishing k i n g d o m a n d w o m e n . h o u s e of M a r s ; Vrsa t h a t of V e n u s ; of M o o n . Kany t h a t of M e r c u r y ; Kumbha both of of s u n . Mithuna t h a t o f M e r c u r y ; Simha is Karkataka t h a t house

Tula t h a t of V e n u s ; Vrcika t h a t of M a r s ; Dhanus t h a t of J u p i t e r ; Makara a n d and Mina t h a t o f J u p i t e r . Thus I h a v e explained the

houses of the planets.

1.60.23 10. and two sdhas). If in the m o n t h prvsdhs, it o f sdha is called t h e r e a r e t w o full Dvirsdha

199 moons two Avini,

(having

V i s n u s l e e p s in C a n c e r t h e n . A u s p i c i o u s s t a r s for w e a r i n g o r n a m e n t s a r e At t h e t i m e of s t a r t i n g on a j o u r n e y :deer, mouse. mungoose, and

11-13. the

Revati, Citr a n d Dhanisth.

following a n i m a l s s e e n o n t h e r i g h t a r e a u s p i c i o u s a Brahmin girl, d e a d b o d y ,

serpent, monkey, cat, dog, boar, birds, Seeing a

conch, bugle, earth, b a m -

b o o , w o m a n , a n d a p o t full o f water, a t the t i m e o f s t a r t i n g o n journey on the 14. is a u s p i c i o u s . A j a c k a l , a c a m e l , a m u l e , etc. w h e n seen left s i d e w h i l e p r o c e e d i n g o n a j o u r n e y a r e a u s p i -

cious. S e e i n g c o t t o n , m e d i c i n e , oil, b u r n i n g e m b e r s , s n a k e s , a garland of red flowers a n d (the s o u n d a w o m a n with dishevelled hair, a n u d e p e r s o n is i n a u s p i c i o u s . 15. of duces I shall e x p l a i n when the i m p l i c a t i o n of Hikk hiccough heard). from the If it is h e a r d from the east it p r o south-eastsorrow and anxiety; anxiety; from t h e from

g r e a t results 16.

from t h e s o u t h l o s s . F r o m the south-westsorrow a n d from w e s t s u m p t u o u s feast: the n o r t h q u a r r e l . 17. F r o m the north-eastdeath. Draw the solar circle a n d inscribe in it the p i c t u r e of the sun in the form of a m a n . 18-20. ( a t the three each stars F i n d o u t the asterism on which the S u n p r e s i d e s Write the n a m e s of the T h e next beginning with arms, that star on the head. to and palms. t i m e of the birth of a c h i l d ) . shall be assigned the north-west m o n e y ;

three stars

the m o u t h ; assign one star to Assign five Stars to of feet. is one of those

of the shoulders,

the h e a r t ; o n e to the n a v e l ; one to the g e n i t a l ; one to e a c h the knees 21-23 assigned T h e r e m a i n i n g six stars to the If the star at the time t o t h e feet, of birth

the child dies y o u n g ; if it is one of those satisfied with what little

assigned to the kneesforeign travel; one at the g e n i t a l a d u l t e r e r ; o n e a t t h e n a v e l h e will b e he gets; one at the p a l m s a thief; s u m p t u o u s feast; one h e a r t h e shall be a great lord; one at the a t t h e a r m s h e falls in from high p o s i t i o n ; the mouthgets

one at the shouldersvery wealthy; one

one at the h e a d h e gets silk-clothes.

200 CHAPTER SIXTYONE

Garuda

Purna

Astrology

Hari said :
1. W h e n t h e m o o n i s o n t h e a s c e n d e n c y after t h e s e v e n t h half it is always favourable. Similarly the d a y in the bright 2.

second, fifth a n d ninth days a r e also auspicious. B e i n g h o n o u r e d b y t h e w o r l d like H e a r them. Avini [ 2 J Naksatras for e a c h Avasth.] The J u p i t e r it is consi(stages) of d e r e d ( a l s o like h i m ) . the m o o n . T h e r e a r e twelve A v a s t h s

3-6. I shall e x p l a i n t h e m as they a r e s i t u a t e d in sets of t h r e e stars b e g i n n i n g with results are sport) ( d e a t h ) , Jaya m e n t ) , Jvara : Pravsa ( e x i l e ) , Punarnasta ( r e p e a t e d (happiness), If the Visda l o s s ) , Mrtyu (sexual (enjoySvastha

( s u c c e s s ) , Hsa(being l a u g h e d a t ) , Krid ( s o r r o w ) , Bhoga (trembling), i n Janma (fever a n d d e b i l i t y ) , m o o n is Kampa

Pramoda

( b e i n g at e a s e ) . absense of mental 7. 8. w i t h o t h e r s ; i n the

Ri ( t h e sign o f

z o d i a c a t t h e t i m e o f b i r t h ) i t g i v e s s a t i s f a c t i o n ; i n the s e c o n d , satisfaction. in the fourthquarrels fifthacquisition o f wife. in In the thirdroyal honour,

I n t h e s i x t h a c q u i s i t i o n o f w e a l t h a n d g r a i n s ; i n the

seventhenjoyment of sexual pleasure and praise of others; 9. 10. from

t h e e i g h t h r i s k o f life, i n t h e n i n t h a c c u m u l a t i o n o f w e a l t h . I n t h e t e n t h s u c c e s s f u l fulfilment o f a c t i v i t i e s ; i n the is certain. can be made M a k i n g a j o u r n e y t o the is fruitful; j o u r n e y t o e a s t d u r i n g the s e v e n s t a r s the south is good. e l e v e n t h s u r e success; in the twelfthdeath Krttik

d u r i n g t h e s e v e n s t a r s f r o m M a g h , m a k i n g j o u r n e y t o t h e west d u r i n g t h e s i x stars from A n u r d h 11. A n d j o u r n e y t o t h e n o r t h d u r i n g t h e s e v e n s t a r s from

D h a n i s t h i s g o o d . T h e stars Avin, R e v a t , C i t r , a n d D h a n i s t h a r e a u s p i c i o u s for w e a r i n g o r n a m e n t s . 12. tion F o r the p e r f o r m a n c e of m a r r i a g e , stars are journey, installaof idols, etc. the auspicious 13. Mrgairas, Avin,

Citr, Pusya, M l a and Hasta. V e n u s a n d M o o n a r e a u s p i c i o u s w h e n they a r e i n t h e

1.62.4

201

J a n m a R o r i n the s e c o n d h o u s e ; M o o n , M e r c u r y , V e n u s a n d J u p i t e r in the third house are good. 14. M a r s , S a t u r n , M o o n , S u n a n d M e r c u r y in the fourth h o u s e are g o o d ; V e n u s a n d J u p i t e r i n the f i f t h house a s p e c t e d by M o o n and K e t u are good, 15. Saturn, Sun and Mars i n the sixth; J u p i t e r a n d M o o n in the seventh; M e r c u r y a n d V e n u s in the eighth a r e g o o d . J u p i t e r in the ninth is good: 16. 17-18. mutually) is S u n , S a t u r n a n d M o o n i n t h e t e n t h ; A l l the p l a n e t s i n twelfth a r e in the such sixth beneficent. and eighth with with T h e sadstaka conducive to (being i n the e l e v e n t h ; M e r c u r y a n d V e n u s pleasure

as :Sirhha

M a k a r a , K a n y with

M e s a , T u l a with

Mna, Kumbha

K a r k a t a k a , D h a n u s with V r s a b h a , M i t h u n a with Vrcika.

CHAPTER

SIXTYTWO

Astrology Hari said 1. he begins 2. ks e a c h and mts.) : At s u n r i s e e v e r y d a y the s u n is in his o w n his transit R. Then He ghatit o t h e o t h e r Ris ( s i g n s o f z o d i a c ) . night. five and Mesa-lagna he spends

c o v e r s s i x Ris i n t h e d a y - t i m e a n d six i n t h e In Mina-lagna ( 5 + 2 4 = 120 m i n u t e s = 2 H r s . ) he spends and

In Vrsa-lagna a n d Kumeach (1 H r . 1 2

bha-lagna he s p e n d s four g h a t i k s e a c h (96 m t s ) . In Makara-lagna Mithuna-lagna ; 3. seven In t h r e e ghatiks Dhanur-lagna Karkataka-lagnahe s p e n d s five ghatiks

e a c h (2 Hrs.) In Sirhha mts.) each and a n d Vrcika-lagnas he s p e n d s six ghatiks e a c h a n d in Kany-lagna a n d Tul-lagna he s p e n d s (2 Hrs. Mna 48 mts.) T h u s I explained the six ghatiks; o t h e r lagna i s cir(2 H r s . 24 ghatiks 4. Mesa

t i m e s p e n t in lagnas. lagnas have l a g n a s h a v e six o r four g h a t i k s . E a c h c u m s c r i b e d b y its o w n g h a t i k s . a n d every

[ T h e second part is not clear.]

202 5. Vrsa-lagna 6. and A woman very In born in Mesa-lagna in will

Garuda becomes

Purna

b a r r e n ; in in in

passionate; prostitute.

Mithuna-lagnafortunate; have ; v e r y few c h i l d r e n , in

Karakata-lagnaa Kany-lagnavery prosperity; 7. children; 8. 9. Sthira; eristics. 10. In

Sirhha-lagnashe beautiful in and

comely with

Tul-lagnabeauty l u c k ; in Makarathe world. Makara Vrcika are are

Vrcika-lagnaharsh a Tula, baseborn; Karkataka, Vrsa,

of sp e e c h . good in Mesa from Kumbha-lagnavery few and and

Dhanur-lagnaendowed

lagnashe will m a r r y a n d in The The Ris

Mina-lagnadetachment

c a l l e d Cara ris

(moving). RisSirhha, Kumbha Mina a n d Mithuna a r e of b o t h charact-

Kany, Dhanus,

U n d e r t a k i n g a j o u r n e y and other activities involving Entering a house and other

m o t i o n a r e to be in t h e Cara Ris. 11. volving called

affairs i n v o l v i n g s t a b i l i s a t i o n a r e to be in Sthira Ris. I n s t a l l a t i o n o f idols, m a r r i a g e a n d o t h e r a c t i v i t i e s i n m o t i o n a n d s t a b i l i z a t i o n a r e to be in Dvisvabhva Ris. and the eleventh seventh days of l u n a r fortnight a r e the twelfth are called Nand. 12. 13. The second, and

T h e f i r s t , sixth

Bhadr; t h e e i g h t h , t h i r d a n d t h e t h i r t e e n t h a r e c a l l e d Jay. T h e f o u r t h , n i n t h a n d t h e f o u r t e e n t h a r e c a l l e d Rikt, fifth, Cara the t e n t h a n d t h e full m o o n t h e y a r e t o b e a v o i d e d ; the 14. M e r c u r y is

a r e c a l l e d Prn a n d t h e y a r e a u s p i c i o u s . called (moving) ; JupiterKpra (quick) ; u k r a equanimity). 15. Dhruva when wished J o u r n e y should be are and u n d e r t a k e n w h e n Cara a n d Ksipra etc. when be Mrdu a n d war are should undertaken if v i c t o r y is planets are ascendant. planets Druna for. T h e a n o i n t i n g o f a k i n g a n d a c t i v i t i e s w i t h fire s h o u l d on Monday. House-building activities can be 16. Ugra Entry of house, planets Mrdu (soft) ; S u n D h r u v a (fixed) ; S a t u r n

Druna (terrific) ; M a r s Ugra (fierce) ; M o o n S a m a ( h a v i n g

ascendant;

ascendant,

be performed

started in the ascendancy of S o m a a n d T u l a .

1.63.6 17. When Mars is ascendant, be leading an

203 army, war,

practising of weapons can

undertaken;

activities involving

p r a c t i c e for y o g i c o r m a n t r a - s i d d h i s a n d j o u r n e y s c a n b e u n d e r taken when Mercury is ascendant. 18. age, When Jupiter is ascendant, study, worship of gods, be undertaken; marriwomen can be underwith wearing of garments and ornaments can riding an elephant, contract 19. An installation of taken when Venus is ascendant. idols, entry to a house, b i n d i n g e l e p h a n t s , e t c . , a r e a u s p i c i o u s w h e n Saturn i s a s c e n d a n t .

CHAPTER

SEKTYTHREE

I
t

, jS

^ " ft^ /

>

Pkysiogonomy Hari said : 1.

I s h a l l n o w d e s c r i b e in b r i e f t h e p r o m i n e n t c h a r a c t e r of men and women, fingers are O akara. If the palms are from t h e i n n e r p o r t i o n o f a lotus a n d d o n o t close together; are plump nails, if the perspire. nails

istic features a r e soft like 2.

If the

copper-coloured, protruding nerves: 3. and 4.

i f t h e a n k l e s a r e well s h a p e d a n d free i f t h e feet

a n d s h a p e d like t h e f a c e lifted u p sieves, ~ with

b a c k of a toitoisethe m a n is b o u n d to b e c o m e a king. R o u g h a n d yellow-coloured feet s h a p e d like fieshless. All these indicate sorrow a n d poverty. p r o t r u d i n g nerves, winnowing toes dry is no

There of an great

d o u b t a b o u t it^JT-he-ealf resembling the trunk with sparsely grown hairsis an excellent sign. 5. To those w h o are destined to become

elephant men or

k i n g s e a c h p o r e h a s a h a i r g r o w i n g o u t o f it. T o destined to b e c o m e great scholars a n d hairs grow out of each pore. 6. To those who are pore. destined to

those who a r e

V e d i c interpreters, two become poor three

hairs grow

out

of each

A sickly p e r s o n h a s k n e e c a p s

T.

A m a n with scrotum

s t o u t p e n i s shall will be miserable.

be p o o r . A rnan

A man having V_,

having a single

s c r o t u m s o f different sizes s h a l l b e c o m e t u m s a r e o f e q u a l size h e shall b e a k i n g . 8. long. A man having scrotums scrotums A man having badly

lecherous. If the scro-

h a n g i n g lose will n o t live shall be poor. and are a to pale coloured

shaped scrotum

M e n b e c o m e h a p p y if the dirty in appearance. 9. ly

T h e m a n passing urine with Those destined to be

l o u d n o i s e s h a l l suffer enjoy pleasures have / belly.

from p o v e r t y . M e n d e s t i n e d t o without noise. 10. A even bellies.

b e c o m e kings pass urine steadi-

Pot-bellied persons are penurious^ m a n destined poor has serpentine

L i n e s indicate the a g e of men. s t r a i g h t p a r a l l e l lines a r e s e e n , 11. years. 12-

A m a n i n w h o s e f o r e h e a d three

S h a l l b e h a p p y with c h i l d r e n a n d will live u p t o s i x t y A single line e x t e n d i n g u p t o the e a r s years. indicates a

T w o lines i n d i c a t e l i f e - e x p e c t a t i o n u p t o forty y e a r s . T h r e e lines e x t e n d i n g u p t o

s h o r t life, s a y u p t o t w e n t y 13. shall live 14.

the e a r s i n d i c a t e a life e x p e c t a t i o n u p t o a h u n d r e d y e a r s . A m a n h a v i n g t w o s u c h lines ( e x t e n d i n g u p t o e a r s ) upto If seventy years. If the t h r e e lines a r e p a r t l y sixty y e a r s .

d i s t i n c t a n d p a r t l y i n d i s t i n c t h e s h a l l live u p t o b e r e d u c e d from the p r e v i o u s . 15.

the n u m b e r o f lines d e c r e a s e s , twenty y e a r s s h a l l I f the lines a r e b r o k e n i n the a broad-edged spear

m i d d l e p r e m a t u r e d e a t h i s the r e s u l t . If the figure of a t r i d e n t or a p p e a r s o n the f o r e h e a d t h e m a n s h a l l b e e n d o w e d r e n a n d w e a l t h a n d s h a l l live u p t o h u n d r e d y e a r s . 16. middle years. 17. The T h e f i r s t l i n e from the t h u m b i s the l i n e o f k n o w l e d g e . line goes upto the r o o t ( b o t t o m ) o f the p a l m . u p t o the little f i n g e r , b r o k e n o r middle 18. I f the l i n e o f l o n g e v i t y c o m e s u p t o the c e n t r e o f the and index finger the m a n lives u p t o h u n d r e d finger with child-

B e y o n d t h a t i s the l i n e o f l o n g e v i t y . I f t h a t line e x t e n d s u n b r o k e n , he s h a l l live a h u n d r e d y e a r s .

1.64.9
19. 20. O R u d r a , the line o n t h e

205 p a l m indicates the longeThere is no doubt. o f life reaches

vity as also the enjoyment of pleasures.

B a s e d o n t h e little f i n g e r i f t h e l i n e

u p t o the m i d d l e finger the m a n s h a l l l i v e u p t o s i x t y y e a r s .

CHAPTER

SIXTYFOUR

Physiognomy Hari said: 1. 2. resemble chastity. 3. 4. T h e w o m a n w i t h unev<m hair a n d r o t u n d eyes shall shining like be unhappy everywhere a n d becomes widowed soon. A girl w i t h a f a c e l i k e t h e full m o o n a n d h a v i n g w i d e eyes and lips r e d the rising sun, 5. like t h e Bimba T h e g i r l w h o s e locks a r e c u r l y , f a c e c i r c u l a r i n s h a p e She whose red complexion is a golden and women whose hands for

a n d the navel curling to the right m a k e s the family flourish. lotus is one in thousand famous

fruit s h a l l a l w a y s b e h a p p y . If a w o m a n has m a n y linear marks few lines like that happiness i n life over her b o d y s h e poverty; red will suffer m u c h ; a linear m a r k s indicate slavery. 6. A r e a l wife is l i k e a m i n i s t e r for the p e r s o n a l a f f a i r s in affectionate o f her h u s b a n d ; a friend i n e x e c u t i n g his t a s k s ; indicate

a n d b l a c k lines d e n o t e

d e a l i n g s s h e i s l i k e his m o t h e r a n d i n his tesan to him. S u c h a wife is a u s p i c i o u s . 7. son. 8. 9. The woman having lines i n

b e d she is like a courher p a l m resembling a gives birth contain to a

g o a d , a circle

or a w h e e l m a r r i e s a

king and

If the sides of a w o m a n or her breasts

plenty

o f h a i r a n d i f her l i p s a r e h i g h t h e h u s b a n d d i e s s o o n . I f t h e lines o n t h e p a l m o f a w o m a n r e s e m b l e a fortb e c o m e a q u e e n even if wall or the entrance, she is destined to s h e is b o r n of a poor family.

206 10. a princess. 11. If a woman

Garuda

Purna

has brown hairs curling upwards over she is b o r n

her body, she is destined to b e c o m e a slave even if

I f t h e little f i n g e r a n d t h e t h u m b o f a w o m a n p l a c e d she is destined to be a widow

o n t h e g r o u n d d o n o t rest t h e r e , a n d a w o m a n of ill-repute. 12. 13. teeth

A w o m a n , w h o s h a k e s t h e g r o u n d a s s h e t r e a d s , kills S m o o t h oily eyes i n d i c a t e h a p p y pleasure of food; oily and m a r r i e d life ; indicates oily

h e r h u s b a n d q u i c k l y a n d lives like a mleccha w o m a n . denote 14. skin sexual

p l e a s u r e a n d o i l y foot d e n o t e s p o s s e s s i o n o f c o n v e y a n c e s . I f t h e feet a r e b e a u t i f u l r a i s e d up with c o p p e r resembling fish, g o a d c o l o u r e d n a i l s ; i f t h e soles h a v e t h e a n d lotus, wheel a n d ploughshare. 15. life. A n d they d o n o t p e r s p i r e , t h e w o m a n l e a d s a h a p p y T h e c a l v e s s h a l l b e free f r o m h a i r , t h e t h i g h s shall r e s e m b l e 16. tree, the T h e v a g i n a s h a l l b e b r o a d like t h e l e a f o f a n Avattha navel shall be deep curling to the right, the three b r e a s t s shall b e lines

t h e elephant's trunk.

c u r l s of hair curling to the right, the chest a n d free from hair. T h e s e a r e all a u s p i c i o u s signs.

CHAPTER

SEXTYFIVE

Physiognomy Hari said 1. : I shall now describe the auspicious

1

characteristics

of

m e n and women as narrated by S a m u d r a the past 2. a n d future without difficulty.

(the sage who origione can understand

n a l l y p r o p o u n d e d this) by knowing w h i c h

I f t h e feet r a r e l y p e r s p i r e , h a v e the soles a s soft a s t h e adjoin one another, nails are protrud-

inner surface of a lotus, the toes ing nerves,

1. A legendary

c o p p e r - c o l o u r e d , h a v e sufficient w a r m t h , a r e free from

p e r s o n a l i t y s a i d t o b e t h e o r i g i n a t o r o f smudrika s t r a

(palmistry).

u
1.65.14 3. T h e instep is 207 a r c h e d like t h e b a c k of a tortoise, t h e the heels are fine, the m a n is desfeet a r e flat a n d s p r e a d i n g like a ankles are concealed, a n d t i n e d to be a k i n g . If t h e nerves, 4. D r y , t h e n a i l s a r e g r e y i s h a n d the t o e s a r e d e t a c h e d have the a w a n d e r e r ; i f the t o o m u c h , t h e m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r . I f the feet r i d g e s lifted u p , the m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e feet a r e r e d d i s h b r o w n , 5. T h e m a n b r i n g s a b o u t s p l i t i n the f a m i l y ; i f t h e y a r e b r a h m i n . I f b o t h the c a l v e s the d a r t - l i k e the m a n m a y s l a y e v e n a 6. 7. winnowing fan, harsh of surface, uneven, have m a n y protruding

a r e o f e q u a l l e n g t h a n d h a v e soft s p a r s e l y g r o w n h a i r , T h e t h i g h s a r e like the trunk o f a n e l e p h a n t a n d If the c a l v e s a r e like those of a k n e e s a r e f l e s h y a n d e v e n , the m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e a k i n g . fox a n d t h e r e is o n l y a s i n g l e h a i r g r o w i n g from e a c h p o r e the m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r . I f t h e r e a r e t w o h a i r s g r o w i n g f r o m e a c h p o r e the m a n i s d e s t i n e d to be a k i n g or a g r e a t s c h o l a r a n d v e r y p r o s p e r o u s . 8. p o r e the 9. women; 10. If there a r e three o r m o r e hairs growing from e a c h and despised. m a n is destined to be I f the k n e e h a s if the knee poor, miserable

P e r s o n s w i t h c u r l y h a i r a r e likely t o d i e i n e x i l e . no flesh at all h e will b e l u c k y ; i f he is loved by t h e r e is a little of flesh a n d t h a t is d e p r e s s e d

i s d e f o r m e d , the m a n b e c o m e s p o o r a n d say that a m a n with a short p e n i s lives has no son m a n shall b e

if it is p l u m p a n d fleshy he will w i n a k i n g d o m . Great men l o n g a n d b e c o m e s r i c h ; the m a n with a s t o u t p e n i s a n d will b e d e v o i d o f w e a l t h . 11. I f the p e n i s i s slanting t o the left the d e v o i d o f sons a n d 12. wealthy; if it is a bit c u r v e d he shall h a v e

s o n s ; i f i t i s d e p r e s s e d b e l o w , h e will b e p o o r . I f the p e n i s i s s m a l l , the m a n will n o t b e g e t s o n s ; i f h a p p y ; i f the b u l b o f the it has protruding nerves he shall be 13.

p e n i s i s s t o u t , h e will b e b l e s s e d w i t h s o n s , e t c . If the s c r o t u m is w e l l - h i d d e n he b e c o m e s a k i n g ; if it wealth; a m a n with a short if the two girls; if is long a n d curved he is devoid of 14. A m a n with a single

p e n i s will b e s t r o n g a n d s p i r i t e d i n f i g h t . s c r o t u m is w e a k ; scrotums are unequal in size, h e will b e r u n n i n g after

208

Garuda

Purna

t h e s c r o t u m s a r e o f e q u a l size, h e shall b e a k i n g ; i f t h e s c r o t u m s h a n g l o o s e , h e will live h u n d r e d y e a r s . 15. If the scrotums are are rough the lifted u p the m a n shall lord; be longl i v e d ; i f they man becomes a if they a r e

g r e y the m a n i s p o o r ; i f they a r e d i r t y i n a p p e a r a n c e , t h e m a n enjoys h a p p i n e s s . 16. I f t h e u r i n e c o m e s o u t noisily a n d silently by turns, t h e m a n b e c o m e s p o o r ; i f the u r i n e c o m e s o u t e v e n l y , o r i n two. t h r e e , four, five or six s p u r t s 17. Or if the urine comes out curling to a single urine in the right, the m a n b e c o m e s a kingjlf the urine comes out in scattered drops, he is p o o r ; if it comes o u t in happiness. 18. Persons and passing a s i n g l e flow will e n j o y w o m e n , p e r s o n s h a v i n g h i g h , e q u a l a n d oily s c r o t u m will p o s s e s s good women 19. riches; persons with scrotum depressed in t h e m a n is destined the smell o f to be the m i d d l e will b e g e t d a u g h t e r s . I f the s e m e n i s v e r y d r y t h e semen poor a n d m i s e r a b l e ; if the i s f r a g r a n t like flowers, continous flow, it i n d i c a t e s

m a n b e c o m e s a k i n g ; if the semen has m a n will h a v e p l e n t y o f w e a l t h . 20. the If the semen has the smell the of meat the

honey the begets sexual

of fish the m a n begets m a n will enjoy

sons; if the semen has no smell semen has the smell

man

daughters; if

p l e a s u r e : if the semen smells of ichor the m a n former of 21. a man sacrifices.

becomes a per-

If the s e m e n emits a salty smell the m a n is destined coitus is short-lived; a man with stout

t o b e p o o r . A m a n w h o finishes c o i t u s q u i c k l y , enjoys l o n g e v i t y ; of prolonged buttocks is destined to be poor. 22. with a A m a n with fleshy buttocks is ever h a p p y ; a person l i o n ' s b u t t o c k s is d e s t i n e d to be a k i n g . S i m i l a r l y , if t h e

hips a r e leonine the m a n becomes a king; a m a n with monkeylike hips is d e s t i n e d to be p o o r . 23. Persons with serpentine, pan-like or pot-like bellies are destined to be poor. Persons 24. with b r o a d sides are rich a n d various

those with depressed sides reddish in hue a r e p o o r . Persons having arm-pits of e q u a l s i z e enjoy o b j e c t s o f life; t h o s e w i t h t o o depressed armpits are destined to

1.65.34
be poor; those of elevated arm-pits 25. Persons

209 b e c o m e k i n g s a n d those o f are destined to be are destined to miser-

unequal armpits are crooked in character. having fishlike bellies wealthy; those with large a n d capacious a b l e life. 26. I f the n a v e l i s w i t h i n a c u r l y w r i n k l e , the m a n will suffer m u c h ; i f t h e w r i n k l e i s 27. the m a n If the wrinkle is shall be c u r l i n g t o the left, t h e m a n will and spreads on either s i d e , the navel

b e h a p p y ; i f the n a v e l i s d e p r e s s e d the m a n will l e a d a

a c h i e v e s o m e t h i n g ; i f t o the r i g h t h e will b e i n t e l l i g e n t . long longlived; if it is a b o v e the ground,

m a n is destined to be wealthy; if it goes downwards, the m a n will p o s s e s s c o w s ; if it h a s the s h a p e of the he shall b e c o m e a k i n g . 28. with two A m a n w i t h a s i n g l e w r i n k l e lives for h u n d r e d y e a r s ; wrinkles enjoys prosperity; with three wrinkles he w r i n k l e s a r e s t r a i g h t he will h a v e illicit union p e r i c a r p of a lotus

b e c o m e s a k i n g or a p r e c e p t o r ; if the enjoys happiness. 29. I f the w r i n k l e s are awry he

w i t h w o m e n o f b a s e c h a r a c t e r . I f t h e sides a r e f l e s h y , soft a n d o f e q u a l s i z e w i t h c u r l y locks o f d e s t i n e d to be a k i n g . 30. wealth and 31. I f o t h e r w i s e , h e will b e a s l a v e t o others, d e v o i d o f h a p p i n e s s . I f the n i p p l e s If they are uneven are not protruding up, yellow in hue, they h a i r t u r n i n g r i g h t , the m a n i s

m e n b e c o m e lucky. or long or a r e d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r . I f the chest i s stout a n d f l e s h y , o f evert height and unmoving. 32. He is d e s t i n e d t o b e a k i n g ; i f full o f h a r d h a i r a n d to be base. I f b o t h the equal, s t o u t a n d f i r m , the m a n b e c o m e s and is doomed or protruding nerves, the m a n is destined s i d e s o f the chest a r e rich. 33. If of unequal size, he b e c o m e s poor a weapon. If up, the c l a v i c l e will to die by m e a n s of 34. is rugged

i n t e r - w o v e n b y b o n e s , the m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r . If it is raised the m a n enjoy life; if it is d e p r e s s e d the m a n b e c o m e s p o o r ; i f i t i s thick h e b e c o m e s rich. I f the n e c k i s thin a n d f l a t the m a n i s p o o r ; i f a n d n e r v e s p r o t r u d e , the m a n b e c o m e s h a p p y . the throat is dry

210 35. warrior; If a m a n is if he has buffalo-necked, neck of a he is deer, he

Gaiuda d e s t i n e d to masters

Purna be a

the

sacred

l i t e r a t u r e . A m a n w i t h a conch-like n e c k b e c o m e s a k i n g a n d he with a long neck becomes a glutton. 36. A back devoid o f h a i r a n d not stooping indicates auspiciousness; otherwise it is inauspicious. T h e a r m p i t s h a p e d like t h e l e a f o f t h e 37-38. a little, a n d and long people the Avattha ( H o l y f i g ) tree e m i t t i n g s w e s t s m e l l it indicates poverty. the knees and indicate covered P l u m p , curling royalty. In poor with hair. Good a n d h a v i n g h a i r like t h o s e o f a d e e r i s a n e x c e l l e n t s i g n . Otherwise well hands joined upto h a n d s a r e g o o d . W e l l - r o u n d e d thick

coming

a r e short

h a n d s resemble the trunk of an elephant. 39. 40. i f the Fingers having ventilators are auspicious. Those of an intelligent person a r e short; those of servants a r e flat. I f the f i n g e r s a r e s t o u t , the m a n i s b o u n d t o b e p o o r ; are very lean resembling is the man of is sure to be humble. a monkey are poor; those fingers

Persons with h a n d s 41. doomed 42. are noisy 43. the

w i t h h a n d s like t h o s e o f a tiger a r e s t r o n g . If the p a l m to be depressed the ancestral property is I f the wrists a r e well h i d d e n a n d destroyed.

well knit, e m i t t i n g sweet smell, t h e m a n i s d e s t i n e d t o b e , A k i n g ; p e r s o n s d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r h a v e wrists t h a t o n b e i n g twisted. I f they are Persons destined to be rich have (with flesh). n o t g o o d i n d i c a t i o n s . I f the l a c ( r e d ) , the m a n is to be an adulterer; if the s nails o f s t u n t e d g r o w t h , h e i s s u r e t o b e indit h e m a n i s b o u n d t o b e fond of form of a barley nails are pale

w r i s t s d e p r e s s e d a n d well c o v e r e d wrists a r e u n e q u a l they are

s t r e c h e d the m a n p a y s t a x e s a l w a y s ; i f

p a l m s a n d hands have the colour of the b o u n d to be a lord. 44. I f they a r e yellow, h e is sure

t h e y a r e r o u g h h e will b e p o o r . I f t h e n a i l s r e s e m b l e h u s k s , be c r o o k e d . 45. gent; With if the

m a n i s s u r e t o b e i m p o t e n t , i f t h e n a i l s a r e split, h e i s b o u n d t o

verbal disputes. 46. thumb, be If the will

I f t h e t h u m b h a s lines i n the marks

g r a i n a n d is copper-coloured he is destined to be a king. o f b a r l e y g r a i n a r e a t t h e r o o t o f the b e g e t s o n s ; i f t h e j o i n t s o f t h e f i n g e r s a r e well

T.65.55 apart h e will 47. a king. 48. in the thunderbolt 49. enjoy longevity a n d will

211 be fortunate; if the will b e rich. If three

fingers s t a n d

a p a r t h e will b e i n d i g e n t . together he

I f they a r e c l o s e

l i n e s s t a r t from t h e wrist a n d g o u p t o t h e p a l m h e will b e c o m e I f p i c t u r e s o f a y o k e o r a f i s h a r e f o r m e d b y t h e lines p a l m , t h e m a n will p e r f o r m s a c r i f i c e s ; l i n e s r e s e m b l i n g indicate wealth; those like the tail of a fish

indicate scholarship. L i n e s r e s e m b l i n g akha, u m b r e l l a , tent, elephant or lotus indicate royal 50. cattle; indicate 51. Agnihotra-} 52. glory; those resembling pot, g o a d , banner

or lotus stalk i n d i c a t e affluence. L i n e s r e s e m b l i n g r o p e indicate possession of cows a n d those like t h e Svastika i n d i c a t e royalty and lordship iron c l u b , b o w o r l a n c e indicate performance indi-

a n d lines i n t h e s h a p e o f a wheel, s w o r d royalty.

Lines in the s h a p e of a m o r t a r l i n e s in t h e f o r m

of sacrifices; those r e s e m b l i n g a l t a r i n d i c a t e the p e r f o r m a n c e of or t a n k , t e m p l e or a t r i a n g l e c a t e virtuousness. L i n e s a t t h e foot o f t h e t h u m b foretell h a p p i n e s s a n d ones indicate wives. One starting from b i r t h of sons, small 53. ken

the foot o f t h e little finger a n d g o i n g u p t o t h e i n d e x f i n g e r , Indicates longevity poverty. chin is for a h u n d r e d y e a r s ; i f i t i s b r o thin t h e m a n becomes i n the m i d d l e t h e m a n over-comes danger.2 H a v i n g m a n y If the chin is fleshy and

lines indicates 54. wealthy. 55. and

devoid of possessions. If the p l u m p the m a n b e c o m e s b e c o m e s a king. T h e lips Oily (smooth Sharp teeth of I f t h e lips a r e r e d t h e m a n And uneven,

of a k i n g r e s e m b l e t h e Bimba3 fruit. shining) adjoining teeth are

If t h e lips a r e split, r o u g h , auspicious.

the m a n b e c o m e s poor.

e q u a l size a r e g o o d ; tongue reddish in colour is auspicious.

1. p. 4. 2. 3. Variant : chinnay taruto bhayam. {GVDB p . 2 7 4 ) T h e s a m e as Coccinia indica, M a i n t e n a n c e of the s a c r e d fire a n d offering o b l a t i o n s to it. SSED

212 56. A long and fine

Garuda

Purna

t o n g u e is a l s o a u s p i c i o u s . A w h i t e I f the p a l a t e i s r o u g h a n d

p a l a t e indicates destruction of riches. 57-58. A round A face

d a r k i n c o l o u r a n d i f the m o u t h i s f i n e l y s h a p e d , I t i n d i c a t e s r o y a l t y ; the o p p o s i t e i n d i c a t e s m i s e r y . indicates p r o s p e r i t y ; if that it he is of a l a d y s h e will is a coward, sinner poverty, misfortune and great

b e g e t a s o n ; a l o n g face i n d i c a t e s sorrow. s q u a r e face indicates A depressed face smooth soft and a rogue. 59-60. face enjoy all

indicates with thickly

issuelessness; a short shining grown moustache is moustache

indicates miserliness. luxuries;

Persons

a u s p i c i o u s , if its t i p is n o t b r o k e n . t a c h e i s a thief. P e r s o n s b e like Kama1 61. luxuries; shaped If the misers e a r s ; ears Persons A man plump ears will (very l i b e r a l ) are have

A m a n with a reddish mous-

w i t h slightly r e d r o u g h m o u s t a c h e m a y b u t m a y h a v e t r a g i c sinful d e a t h . flat with a n d less f l e s h y h e will e n j o y all ears; k i n g s will h a v e s p e a r the hair indicate shortage of become kings or rich short

covered

s p a n o f life. 62. 63. well-formed a minister. 64. Good nose. 65. Flat nose indicates death and and weli misfortune; a long defined c u r v a t u r e a t straight nose with small nostrils the tip indicates royalty. 66. The nose bent towards the right indicates cruelty. A s u d d e n s p a s m of s n e e z e i n d i c a t e s s t r e n g t h ; if it is c o n t i n u a l it i n d i c a t e s d e l i g h t a n d i f r e s o n a n t i t i n d i c a t e s l o n g life. A with big ears with men; ears smooth, h a n g i n g down, fleshy a n d not firm indicate royalty. depressed c h e e k s enjoys all luxuries; cheeks i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e m a n will b e c o m e

A m a n w i t h n o s e like t h a t of a p a r r o t is h a p p y , a person is with a n a s a l e d g e l o o k i n g as if chiselled with unworthy women. A thief has a curved

m a n o f d r y n o s e lives l o n g . a n d d e e p n o s t r i l s will h a v e i n t e r c o u r s e luck indicated

by a l o n g n o s e .

1. Kunti

T h e well k n o w n c h a r a c t e r to

of the M a h b h r a t a . Indra, disguised

He was as a he is

born

to

before she was married

Pndu :

brhmana, known

b e g g e d for his a r m o u r w h i c h h e r e a d i l y g a v e i t t o h i m . as a g r e a t donor.

Hence

1.65.78
67. curved at If the eyes r e s e m b l e p e t a l s of a lotus a n d a r e a the corners the m e n will are

213
little

be h a p p y ; A sinner has green-eyed men

c a t - l i k e e y e s a n d a w i c k e d m a n h a s eyes t a w n y like h o n e y . 68. a r e sinful; 69. Squint-eyed persons valorous ruthless; persons h a v e oblique d i m eyes a n d c o m -

m a n d e r s o f a r m i e s h a v e eyes like t h o s e o f a n e l e p h a n t . L o r d l y p e r s o n s h a v e g r a v e eyes, m i n i s t e r s h a v e thick lotus; g o o d fortune f l e s h y e y e s ; s c h o l a r s h a v e eyes like t h e b l u e i s i n d i c a t e d b y d a r k eyes. 70. eyes Dark a pupils sinner, smooth and pupils protruding out a n d round indicate 7 1 . Oily uries.
1

persons skin

d e s t i n e d t o b e p o o r will h a v e vast enjoyment of luxPersons

pitiable eyes. indicates I f the n a v e l i s e l e v a t e d the m a n i s s h o r t - l i v e d .

having wide 72.

e l e v a t e d e y e b r o w s a r e h a p p y ; p e r s o n s with u n e v e n

eyebrows are indigent. L o n g u n a t t a c h e d eyebrows indicate wealth, beautiful c r e s c e n t - s h a p e d e y e b r o w s i n d i c a t e r i c h n e s s ; p e r s o n s with b r o k e n e y e - b r o w s a n d w i t h those d e p r e s s e d i n t h e m i d d l e , 73. Are devoted to unworthy women a n d b e c o m e devoid I f the f o r e h e a d i s h i g h , w i d e c o n c h l i k e poor and those with with crescent foreheads of children a n d wealth. and^rugged, 74. shaped wide The man becomes become foreheads become wealthy. Persons

like oystershells 75. Persons

preceptors; foreheads

those w i t h s i n e w y with Svastika-shaped foreheads hair on are the

f o r e h e a d s a r e sinful. with .high s i n e w s b e c o m e rich. 76. head) P e r s o n s with d e p r e s s e d foreheads covered (by

fond of cruel deeds a n d deserve imprisonment. Persons with are misers; high 77. Shrill cry foreheads indicate royalty. Tearless ""^ f\

g e n t l e cry w i t h o u t p i t e o u s tcfcs is a u s p i c i o u s . Untrembling mild laughter is excellent; c l o s e d i n d i c a t e s sin. 78. upto

1.

w i t h profuse p e r s p i r a t i o n i s i n a u s p i c i o u s . laughter with the eyes and the o n s e t o f

F r e q u e n t l a u g h t e r i n d i c a t e s defect lines along the forehead

madness. Three

indicate longevity

hundred years.
T h e second part is not very clear.

214 79. I f t h e r e a r e four lines, the m a n will

Garuda

Purna

b e c o m e a king fore-

a n d live u p t o ninety-five y e a r s .

If there is no line on the

h e a d , t h e m a n lives u p t o n i n e t y y e a r s . I f t h e the m a n will b e g u i l t y o f s o d o m y r " 80. If the lines reach the hair If there

lines_ are broken, the man

on the h e a d ,

lives u p t o e i g h t y y e a r s . 81.

a r e f i v e , six,

seven or more

l i n e s , t h e s p a n o f life i s f i f t y y e a r s . If there are curved lines, t h e m a n lives u p t o forty s p a n o f life i s t h i r t y y e a r s ; i f t h e lines go to the eyebrows the

y e a r s ; i f t h e l i n e s a r e c u r v e d t o w a r d s t h e left t h e s p a n o f life i s for t w e n t y y e a r s ; i f t h e l i n e s a r e s h o r t t h e m a n i s s h o r t - l i v e d . 82. If the h e a d is umbrella-shaped, the m a n becomes r i c h or a k i n g . 83. hairs, 84. N o t too thickly g r o w n with the ends, not snapped indicate royalty. Hairs having m a n y roots, uneven in length, A flat h e a d i n d i c a t e s f a t h e r ' s d e a t h ; a c i r c u l a r

head indicates richness. A m a n h a v i n g a p o t - l i k e h e a d t a k e s d e l i g h t i n sinful activities a n d is devoid of wealth. B l a c k s m o o t h slightly c u r l e d

with gross tips, tawny-coloured, 85. Thickly grown, bent down, dark-blue in colour, inWhatever m a y be the limb, if it is very rough,

dicate poverty.

sinewy a n d lacks in flesh, 86. It is a very i n a u s p i c i o u s s i g n ; destined to be otherwise it is a u s p i -

cious. Persons

kings have three which shall be

w i d e , g r a v e a n d l o n g ; f i v e w h i c h a r e v e r y f i n e ; six w h i c h s h a l l be h i g h ; f o u r w h i c h shall be short, 87. even. and grave. 88. for a F o r e h e a d , face a n d chestthese three shall be w i d e Eyes, sides, teeth, nose, m o u t h a n d b a c k of the man. F o u r which voice shall be red and seven which shall b e deep

Navel,

a n d understandingthese shall be

n e c k t h e s e six shall b e e l e v a t e d . 89. short. be red. Calves, neck, hand, penis lips and backthese and nailsthese four s h a l l b e four s h a l l

The

palate,

1.65.102 90. be short. 91. T h e c o r n e r s o f the e y e s , feet, t o n g u e T h e r e are f i v e which shall

215
a n d lips s h a l l

be fineteeth, knots the nipples, character-

of fingers, nail, hair a n d skin. Thefe s h a l l b e l o n g t h e s p a c e b e t w e e n I h a v e m e n t i o n e d the h a n d s , t e e t h , eyes a n d n o s e . istic signs of m e n . 92. nails are 93. shall red;

I shall now describe those of w o m e n . the toes are adjoining o n e a n o t h e r , the t i p s

T h e q u e e n ' s feet a r e s m o o t h a n d e v e n , t h e soles a n d

are r a i s e d ; he w h o marries her shall surely be a king. T h e heels s h a l l b e well h i d d e n a n d p l u m p . T h e soles they and shall rarely perspire, are signs h a v e the lustre o f l o t u s ; 94. not. Thunderbolt, lotus

s m o o t h a n d c o n t a i n t h e lines o f f i s h , g o a d o r b a n n e r . ploughsharethese to be a q u e e n ; indicate that a w o m a n is destined otherwise

T h e calves are 95. T h e joints

d e v o i d o f hair, s h a l l not be

well-rounded and devoid manifestly clear a n d the

of sinewsthese are auspicious. knees are even. 96. T h e thighs resemble the trunk of an elephant very

and are devoid of hair. T h e v a g i n a i s o f the s h a p e o f the f i g l e a f a n d i s wide. L o i n s , forehead a n d thigh shall be high a n d a r c h e d like the b a c k of a tortoise. 97-98. shall b e The clitoris shall b e hidden. T h e hips shall be big and heavy. A l l the a b o v e l i m b s s h a l l b e l a r g e . T h e n a v e l curling to the right. T h e m i d d l e portion breasts shall

fleshy, a n d

shall be b e d e c k e d by three circular wrinkles. T h e 99. T h e neck shall be firm,

be equally developed, devoid of hair and well-grown a n d firm. o v e r g r o w n w i t h h a i r soft a n d r e s e m b l i n g c o n c h . R e d lips a r e a u s p i c i o u s ; s o a l s o a c i r c u l a r f l e s h y p l u m p face, 100. others Teeth like t h e Kunda-ower (white) a n d a sweet v o i c e like t h a t o f a c u c k o o . S i m p l i c i t y and absence 101. trical And of stubbornness h e a r like t h a t of a s w a n . a nose beautiful in a p p e a r a n c e with s y m m e t i p a l l these a r e not b e The auspicious in women. the nose. They must shall not be high. very thick. curves 102. at the a n d c o n s i d e r a t i o n for

in the speech pleasant to

T h e eyes s h a l l b e like the b l u e l o t u s c l o s e t o T h e brows should r e s e m b l e the c r e s c e n t m o o n . forehead

216 It should 103. resemble the semi-circular m o o n

Garuda

Purna

and be devoid of

hairs. T h e e a r s s h a l l not b e f l e s h y . T h e y m u s t b e s m o o t h T h e h a i r shall b e glossy, d a r k - b l u e a n d soft head is auspicious for the a n d of equal size. 104. women.

a n d slightly curling. Symmetrical well-formed T h e following m a r k s s h o u l d b e p r e s e n t either i n e l e p h a n t , rivrksa ( t h e

p a l m or soleshorse, 105. 106.

Sacred fig tree), earring, altar,

sacrificial pole, arrow, barley grain, iron club. B a n n e r , Chowri1, Goad etc. garland, a mount, akha, u m b r e l l a , l o t u s , fish, Svastika, a g o o d c h a r i o t , W o m e n with these signs shall b e c o m e a n d wellconsorts of princes. a lotus. 107. ed T h e p a l m s shall n e i t h e r b e d e p r e s s e d n o r e l e v a t e d . bliss i n w o m e n . T h e l i n e middle finger or in the u p p e r p a r t o f the i n s t e p very h a p p y a n d even win t h e foot o f years. t h e little f i n g e r is a line starting from the L i n e a r m a r k s ( a s h e r e i n a f t e r m e n t i o n e d ) shall i n d i c a t e c o n t i n u matrimonial 108. a kingdom. 109. T h e line a r i s i n g from hundred shall m a k e her live u p t o stity in w o m e n . 110. the woman 111. evity ; T h e l i n e f r o m t h e foot o f t h e t h u m b , i f s h o r t , m a k e s short-lived; if long, blesses the w o m a n with sons; the w o m a n is mentioned; If there wrist a n d g o i n g u p t o t h e T h e wrists s h a l l b e w e l l - f o r m e d

h i d d e n ( b y f l e s h ) , t h e h a n d s s h a l l b e soft like the i n n e r p a r t o f

Or in the p a l m

i s a u s p i c i o u s . T h e h u s b a n d shall b e

b e t w e e n the i n d e x f i n g e r a n d t h e m i d d l e f i n g e r i t i n d i c a t e s c h a -

if faded the w o m a n shall be proudIf that line is broken in m a n y places is long a n d marks unbroken the of woman have been shortlived; if it contrary signs 112. finger a n d
1.

w o m a n enjoys long-

all auspicious If

are inauspicious. the p a l m is p l a c e d o n the g r o u n d a n d the little not touch

used

the ring finger do

the
as

ground,
a fly-flap

she is
or fan,

B u s h y tail of C m a r a

(Bos Grunniens)

a n d reckoned as one of the insignia of royalty.

SSED p . 2 0 6 .

1.65.121
surely a whore. If the thumb goes beyond the root

217 of the

index finger that too is inauspicious similarly. 113. If the calves are elevated or h a v e p r o t r u d i n g sinews

a n d a r e hairy a n d fleshy; if the belly resembles a pot. 114. A n d the p r i v a t e p a r t s are c u r v e d t o t h e left a n d a I f the n e c k i s s h o r t

b i t depressed the w o m a n b e c o m e s u n h a p p y .

it indicates poverty; if it is very l o n g d e s t r u c t i o n of the family. 115. there is no tawny in chastity. 116. If when she smiles two dimples are seen in the If it is very the eyes, s t o u t the w o m a n b e c o m e s eyesthese indicate very fierce, absence of

d o u b t a b o u t this. roving

S q u i n t in the eyes, d a r k blue or

c h e e k s , she i s

surely one adultress. If the forehead h a n g s d o w n

t h e w o m a n kills h e r b r o t h e r - i n - l a w . 117. and if the I f t h e b e l l y h a n g s d o w n she kills h e r f a t h e r - i n - l a w ; buttocks growth the hang down, she kills h e r h u s b a n d . is A of hair a b o v e the u p p e r lip inaus-

moustache-like p i c i o u s for 118.

husband.

H a i r y breasts are inauspicious a n d uneven ears too S h a r p a n d uneven teeth indicate misery.

a r e inauspicious. 119. long, she

If the~gum is d a r k b l u e , s h e is a thief, if t h e t e e t h a r e will b r i n g a b o u t the d e a t h o f h e r husband. If the

h a n d s r e s e m b l e t h o s e o f Rksasas, w o l v e s o r c r o w s , 120. woman If they a r e sinewy, u n e v e n a n d dry ( w r i n k l e d ) , the poor. An elevated upper lip indicates If shall

becomes These

q u a r r e l s o m e nature a n d harshness in speech. 121. there is mention defects a r e very great in ugly women. b e a u t y s o m e of these something defects c a n b e i g n o r e d . I have

mentioned the characteristics of m e n a n d w o m e n . N o w I informative.

218

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER SIXTYSrX
Astrology Hari said : 1. An i m a g e without characteristic marks is circular signs t h e r e o n . T h e n e x t o n e is Laksmi Nryana. Caturbhuja ( f o u r seventh and the better t h a n T h e first image

worshipping one with is Sudarana; 2. are

T h e i m a g e of Acyula h a s t h r e e Cakras; Pradyumna is and the Sakarsana. eighth. and Then

a r m e d ) i m a g e h a s four Cakras; the f i f t h , s i x t h a n d t h e Vsudeva, 3. twelfth. 4. Beyond that in the there i s Ananta. Purusottama

Navavyha

Datmaka. T h e e l e v e n t h is Aniruddha

Dvdatmaka is

T h e s e characteristics are the If these Sudaranas there Lord are of two

n u m b e r of lines 5. Where

Cakra in o r d e r . desires. is lagrma

d u l y w o r s h i p p e d t h e y g i v e all Dvravat ( V i s n u ) 6. Prayga, 7.

stone,

i s a l s o p r e s e n t . T h e c o e x i s t e n c e o f these Dvrak, kara. Narmad, Candrabhg3, Sarasvat, Naimisa, Puskara1,

is conducive to salvation. lagrma, Kuruksetra , Gag,

2

Gay, Vrnasi> Purusottama

a n d Mahkla* a r e t h e s a c r e d p l a c e s , O a k a r a , 8. cipation. 4. 9. 13. 9. Ps, 10. (Trana), 23. Virodhl, 6. 10. 16. 19. 24. T h a t r e m o v e all sins a n d y i e l d e n j o y m e n t 1. 5. Prabhava, Prajpati. 7. (Dhtu), 15. 17. Vyaya, rlmukhq, 11. Vidhu 21. 8. (Visu). (Svabhnu). Sarvajit, 22. 18. Druna Sarvadhri,. Bhva 12. (Bhava), Dhtr 14. Ivara, Bahudhnya^ Agiras, 2. Vibhava, 3. ukra and eman(Sukla),

Pramoda,

Pramthi,

Vikrama, 20.

Citrabhnu, Prthiva, Vikrta

Svarbhnu 25.

(Vikrti),

Khara,

1. A town about six miles to the north of Ajmer in R a j a s t h a n . It has a lake considered to be very ancient a n d sacred. It is a place of pilgrimage. 2. T h e site of the M a h b h r a t a - w a r . 3. Modern Chenab. 4. T h e temple of M a h k l a at Ujjayin (modern Ujjain in M a d h y a Pradesh).

1.66.22 11. 30. Vilamba, 40. 26. Nandana, 34. 27. Vijqya, 31. Sarvari, 28. Jaya, 29.

219 Manmatha, 32.

Durmukha 33. 12.

(Durmukhi), Vikra, 41.

Hemalamba 35. P/aM.

(Hemalambi),

3 6 . Subhakrt, 3 7 . Sobhana, 3 8 . Krodha, 3 9 . Vivvasu, Plavaga, 42. Kilaka, 47. 52. 43. Saumya, 48. 44. nandi 53. 59. 45. 46. 54. 56. Virodhakrt, Pandhri Durmati, Dundubhi, 60. (Paritapi), 51. 55. 57. Pigala, Sutnati These are calender. Pramdi, i /a 58. (Klayukti), Raktksa,

Parbhava, 13.

Sdhrana, 4 9 . Rksasa, Siddhrtha, 14. years

5 0 . jVa/a,

(Raudri). t h e n a m e s o f t h e sixtyW h e t h e r they a r e a u s p i (There

Rudhirodgri,

Krodhana, a n d

J^aja. to Hindu

according

c i o u s o r i n a u s p i c i o u s c a n b e i n f e r r e d from t h e i r n a m e s . are given in 15. success by 16. make are five to be brackets). s h a l l now d e s c r i b e t i m e t h e Pacasvara Mrtyu. horizontally in order. (five

a r e s o m e differences i n t h e t r a d i t i o n a l l y a c c e p t e d n a m e s . T h e y O Rudra, I the rise of With for t h e s a k e o f They are

vowels).

Az/', S j , Uds, Pid a n d

six lines d r a w n

a n d vertically, They are called

s q u a r e s of five r o w s . T h e vowels , I, , AI a n d AU written in five squares

Agnikosthakas. 17. 18. stars 19. The Tithis (days of the lunar fortnight) Moon, three in the order. The letters, t w o six

n u m b e r , Rj, Sj, Jupiter,

Uds, Pid a n d Mrtyu, M a r s , Venus, Saturn, Sun and in

Mercury,

f r o m Revati to Mrgairasall these a r e w r i t t e n in T h e n five stars are written each written with their first

square.

m o n t h s Caitra, e t c . a r e a l s o months in one square. 20. T h e time, 21. Orh Kfaum 22. chants

T h e Kal, Lii.ga w h a t e v e r s t a n d s fifth, it is his d e a t h . tithi, d a y o f t h e week, t h e s t a r a n d t h e m o n t h , S h a l l b e b e f o r e t h e rise o f the n a m e , o b e i s a n c e to Ksm Dyaga Siva, Sivmiksa The is the mystic mantra, O not otherwise.

H a r a , of this

Visagrahamati.

bija in t h e Padma t o Nrsirhha.

which en-

the three worlds belongs

220 23. leaf. The names o f Mrtyujaya (iva),

Garuda

Purna

Gana a n d Laksmi t h e Bhrj1 It the a r m .

s h a l l b e w r i t t e n w i t h Gorocan ( y e l l o w p i g m e n t ) o n T h i s shall be worn round the neck or on yields success.

CHAPTER Svarodaya Sta said : 1. 2.

SIXTYSEVEN or Pavana-vijaya

After h e a r i n g i t from H a r i , H a r a t o l d G a u r the k n o w T h e planets M a r s , S u n , E a r t h a n d the gods fire, a u r i airs a n d manifest through the pores on the

ledge of planets, etc. stationed in the body. a n d w a t e r g o d a n d Rhuall these p e r m e a t e t h e b o d y o f a m a n t h r o u g h the vital right side. 3. 4. Jupiter, Venus, Mercury and JVdi's ( n e r v e s ) through t h e JVdi Ida W h e n t h e Cra or m o v e m e n t is the M o o n a r e s t a t i o n e d in the m i d d l e of the left

a u s p i c i o u s actions shall be initiated s u c h as o c c u p y i n g a resort, m e d i t a t i o n , t r a d e , visit t o a k i n g , e t c . 5., 6. Svarodaya. 7-8. beneath the T h e JVdis or nerves functioning From the i n the b o d y are numerous and are of various forms. nerve-ganglion When And at t h e r i g h t JVdi f u n c t i o n s Sani ( S a t u r n ) , M a r s , that time inauspicious actions are started. a n d Rhu r e i g n s u p r e m e . F i n d i n g o u t t h e a u s p i c i o u s a n d the i n a u s p i c i o u s i s b a s e d o n t h e

navel seventy-two t h o u s a n d nerve-shoots c o m e out

a n d a r e c o i l e d i n t h e m i d d l e o f t h e u m b i l i c u s . T h e y c a r r y the very vital existence of m a n . 9. O f t h e m t h e o n e o n t h e left, the one on the right a n d t h e o n e i n the m i d d l e t h e s e t h r e e a r e i m p o r t a n t . T h e o n e
1. Betula attilis GVDB, p. 287.

1.67.21

221

i n the left i s p r e s i d e d o v e r b y t h e m o o n a n d t h e o n e i n t h e r i g h t resembles the sun. 10. world. 11. The nerve on the right the w i t h t h e e s s e n c e o f Rudra JVdis function death d r i e s u p the w h o l e w o r l d . 12. left the r i g h t . Mercury, 13. the Pigal 14. acts used. 15. 16. In cohabitation, battle Achievement a n d d i n n e r Pigal is beneficent. In auspicious actions, journeys, poison undertakings, o f p e a c e , s a l v a t i o n , e t c . Ida s h o u l d b e simultaneously A cautious followed b y k i n g s . 17. man shall 18-19. I f b o t h the n e r v e s f u n c t i o n Activities If both The m i d d l e o n e i s f i r e itself a n d i s a g r e a t a g e n t o f saves the whole d e s t r u c t i o n . T h e left o n e i s n e c t a r itself a n d

will result, a l l a c t i v i t i e s will b e d e s t r o y e d . involving going out a r e influenced by t h e the left nerve presided over by o n e a n d t h o s e i n v o l v i n g e n t r y a r e influenced b y t h e o n e i n W h e n the Ida or the m o o n a n d the sun is p e r m e a t e d by the V i t a l A i r Cruel or In deeds are d o n e w h e n the v i t a l a i r p e r m e a t e s

all a u s p i c i o u s a c t i v i t i e s a r e u n d e r t a k e n . the r i g h t n e r v e . I n j o u r n e y s , b i g u n d e r t a k i n g s , d i n n e r , c o i t u s , b a t t l e , e t c . Pigal i s fruitful. killing a n d o t h e r a c t i v i t i e s Pigal In

r e m o v a l of p o i s o n , e t c . Ida is p r e f e r a b l e . of ostracism, is to be

b o t h ruthless a n d gentle actions are avoided. It s h a l l be c o n s i d e r e d Visuva t h e e q u i n o x . remember In this. In gentle a n d auspicious activities e t c . t h e left n e r v e is always favoured. and minor about activities t o o auspicious and

i n u n d e r t a k i n g s o f profit a n d s u c c e s s i n life, shifting, I n w a r , etc., d i n n e r , killing a n d s e x u a l i n t e r c o u r s e w i t h w o m e n , the right nerve is g o o d . this the i s favoured. If one I n entries were to ask

i n a u s p i c i o u s a c t i o n s , profit a n d loss, success a n d f a i l u r e , life 20. T h e a n s w e r will n o t If the is enquirer no doubt b e c o r r e c t , i f t h e m i d d l e ndi i s asks when the leader is in the (achievement).

and death, predominant. 21.

cra of t h e left or t h e r i g h t n e r v e , There a b o u t t h e siddhi flow W h e n t h e nds Vaicchanda or Vmadeva in t h e b o d y ,

222 22. 23. The The siddhi is fruitless.

Garuda

Purna

If t h e iv ndi flows e i t h e r

i n t o t h e left o r i n t o t h e r i g h t , ruthless a c t i o n s a r e fulfilled i f t h e ndi i s terrific are neither g o o d nor b a d i f i t i s g e n t l e . I f the is c a l l e d understand stands side to is a n d the results svaravhini. 24-25. t h a t d e a t h will A y o g i n w h o is an e x p e r t myoga s h a l l take place then. If the enquirer

Hamsa ndi p r o c e e d s p a r t i a l l y t h r o u g h t h e t w o ndis it

t h e left a n d asks, t h e rise o f t h e w i n d i s from t h e left. I f t o t h e right, the rise of the w i n d i s from t h e right. T h e left excellent if the enquiry is frontal if the enquiry is from b e h i n d . 26. 27. is devoid 28. possible. 29. of the on a If the enquiry is on the sixth d a y or a prntithi If it is This can l u n a r f o r t n i g h t t h e f i r s t m a n will b e v i c t o r i o u s . rikt-tithi, 30. t h e s e c o n d m a n will b e v i c t o r i o u s . W h e n f r o m t h e left, i t i s c a l l e d V m ; w h e n f r o m the A of life its sustains influence can be itself by Jupiter. If any thing r i g h t , D a k s i n . V m i s a u s p i c i o u s a t left, D a k s i n a t r i g h t . it is called S v a r a . If good signs of in the. Prnand without three alternatives are a n d the right side is excellent

victory, etc. are a i m e d at, They achieved to exception. With respect other nds

be mentioned unhesitatingly. T h e w i n d o n p a r w i t h t h e m o v e m e n t o f t h e left n e r v e If it begins to to blow along the p a t h it brings a b o u t yields success in actions. 31. uneven 32. If it blows

to the right, which is u n e v e n , it b r i n g s a b o u t u n e v e n result. elsewhere t h e left, result. T h e n the warrior who is in the m i d d l e of the

battlefield, becomes victorious. I n the m o v e m e n t o f t h e w i n d t o t h e r i g h t i f i t results there is no d o u b t it c a n be traced to the in even results then m i d d l e of the nd. 33. If the vital air permeates Pigal, he shall be victoIf the movement t a k e n s o far No as is that rious in the war that is to be tranquilised. a s l o n g a s t h e rise o f t h e n d , i t s h a l l b e direction. 34. H e will n o t b e c o m p e t e n t t o g i v e . hesitation is

1.67.43 to be felt here. In the middle of a

223 battle, where the nd

flows

continuously, 35. That party shall be victorious. If it is void he can (movement) he has taken place can be pointed out as

point dead.

out defeat.

If the

cra

success can be known;

if it is extinct

36-37.

He who knows victory a n d defeat is a real scholar. His journey is always auspithe nd presided over

T o t h e r i g h t o r t o t h e left w h e r e v e r t h e n d m o v e s , s t e p p i n g i n t h a t d i r e c t i o n o n e o b t a i n s benefit. cious. b y t h e s u n a n d the m o o n f l o w s . 38. successful. 39. If the person therein enquires, he shall be surely A battle shall be fought when

Where the w i n d blows there success is sure, Even if Indra were to stand opposite. T h e ten

n d s M e s , e t c . a r e s i t u a t e d o n t h e left a n d r i g h t . 40. If they are situated on a Cara ( m o b i l e ) p a t h they p a t h they If it is

a r e a l s o C a r a . I f they a r e s i t u a t e d o n ' a S t h i r a (fixed) s q u e e z e d in, t h e n d t o o i s s q u e e z e d i n . 41. After h e a r i n g t h e w o r d s o f t h e enquirer,

a r e also S t h i r a . If it c o m e s out the n d too c o m e s out.

the

diviner

shall point o u t by m e a n s of the s h a p e of the bell.

O G a u r , the

f i v e e l e m e n t s t o o a r e s i t u a t e d e i t h e r t o the left o r t o t h e r i g h t . 42. T h e fire element is above; the water element is

b e l o w ; the w i n d element is sideways; the e a r t h element is to be k n q w n s t a t i o n e d i n the m i d d l e ; t h e e t h e r e l e m e n t i s e v e r y w h e r e and always. 43. is in If (the n d ) goes shall up, death is the result; if it is

b e l o w p e a c e ; if it is sidewaysthe scholar shall the middleit tion; if it goes everywhere there is salvation

avoid it; if it

be understood as a stunning situaalways.

224 CHAPTER On the test Sta said : 1. I shall now expound the process of SIXTYEIGHT of gemsDiamond

Garuda

Purna

testing g e m s . other g o d s .

T h e r e w a s a d e m o n Bala. 2. ed Bala

He conquered Indra a n d

T h e y could not reconquer him. U n d e r the pretext of choosing a b o o n the gods requestto be the animal at sacrifice, he and was he killed conceded as the powerful,

their request. T h o u g h v e r y sacrificial a n i m a l . 3-4. suffered limbs Since he

was bound and

b y his p l e d g e d good unto

words, he h a d For the his the gods

himself to be tied

to the sacrificial

column.

benefit o f t h e w o r l d b e c a m e seeds 5. 6-8. in the mountains became accruing deeds as he was p u r e

for d o i n g

of gems.

T h i s w a s d u e t o his m e r i t o r i o u s a m o n g gods, in their s e e d fell, yaksas, siddhas aerial chariots those p l a c e s

w i t h Sttvika v i r t u e s .

A g r e a t tussle took p l a c e When or they

a n d serpents over the seeds of g e m s . were speeding the seeds Wherever On the sky h e r e a n d t h e r e jungles. fell in the oceans, rivers,

the storehouses of gems. them imbibed the influence are the from

a c c o u n t o f their intrinsic of quelling obstacles poison, serpents a n d : Vajra (ruby) (Lapis Rudhira (coral).

merit some of

the power of demons, different Mani

sickness, a n d others were d e v o i d of 9-10. (diamond); Marakata Lazuli), (Blood 11. its m e r i t s then be These Mukt (pearl), (Topaz), Sphafika

any quality. kinds of g e m s Padmarga Vaidrya Pulaka, Vidruma (gems),

(Emerald), Pusparga red stone),

Indranlla

(sapphire) Karketana (crystal) (?) and

P e r s o n s w h o k n o w g e m s h a v e classified t h e m t h u s . First the s h a p e a n d the colour are to be tested; then a n d defects a r e to known; after technical b e u n d e r s t o o d ; its i n f l u e n c e m u s t with experts in gems w h o them the price shall be consultation literature on

have studied decided on. 12.

G e m s b o u g h t o r f i r s t u s e d i n a b a d lagna o r i n a u s p i -

c i o u s d a y b e c o m e d e f e c t i v e a n d lose e v e n t h e i r m e r i t s .

1 .68.20 13. 14. concerning of gems. 15. Experts have spoken of d i a m o n d as highly starts with a while detailed Collection or wearing of only O n l y those who h a v e studied them, and who

225 well-tested g e m s s h o u l d the technical in them literature can be quality influendescripabout

be undertaken by

a k i n g w h o wishes for p r o s p e r i t y . habitually deal

d e e m e d to be the proper persons to know the price a n d

tial, h e n c e o u r d e s c r i p t i o n a l s o tion of d i a m o n d . 16. Indra wielding

thunderbolt

moving

d r o p p e d little p a r t i c l e s o f b o n e s f r o m his w e a p o n . 17. are Kosala3, Diamond is found

1

These partiplaces. They Kaliga,

c l e s a c q u i r e d v a r i o u s s h a p e s i n t h e v a r i o u s p l a c e s a s t h e y fell. i n e i g h t different river Venv5 region a r e slightly : Himalayas, 18. have the blue Mtaga territory Saurs-tra, Paun<}.ra2,

Sauoira1 a n d t h e b a n k s of t h e

D i a m o n d s f o u n d i n t h e Himalayan lustre of the m o o n ; those

c o p p e r - c o l o u r e d ; those found on lotus a n d

t h e b a n k s o f t h e r i v e r Venvtt f r o m Sauvira l a n d r e s e m b l e in Saurstra a r e light

cloud; d i a m o n d s found

c o p p e r - c o l o u r e d ; t h o s e f r o m Kaliga h a v e t h e b r i l l i a n t c o l o u r o f g o l d ; d i a m o n d s from K o s a l a a r e d e e p y e l l o w i n c o l o u r ; d i a m o n d s from the 19. anywhere usual good sides a n d 20. P u n d r a territory are dark-blue and the diamonds presence if found in M t a g a land are not too d e e p yellow in colour. R e a l l y t h e d e i t i e s will g r a c e i t w i t h t h e i r in the world even if seen, which h a s a clear light which is quite defects, a bit of a d i a m o n d with very shade a n d the light, s y m m e t r i c a l in t h e

sharp edges can be features,

i s free f r o m t h e

such as scratches, patches, of various

d a r k s p o t s , c r o w s , foot a n d T r s a ( a t o m o f d u s t f o u n d i n a g e m ) . I d o l s o f g o d s a r e p r e p a r e d from d i a m o n d s different c o l o u r s c o l o u r s . F o r different c a s t e s

1. 2. 3. age. 4. 5. Vena The region South around India. modern Multan. in Central India, or E i t h e r the B n river, o r the W a i n g a g river A janapada in eastern

in diamonds a r e

India. Parganas. the capital in the R m y a n a around Ayodhy,

T h e region around T h e ancient region

modern Santal

river in

226 assigned. colours. 21. Green diamonds are assigned to yellow to Lord Diamonds are classified also

Garuda according to

Purna their white

Visnu;

diamonds to V a r u n a ; o n e s t o the M a r u t s . 22. Kumuda1 brown like s h i n i n g like 23. colour Brhmanas flower the and

diamonds to n d r a ; brown diaY a m a and copper-coloured naturally beautiful. like a k h a , shall u s e d i a m o n d s d i a m o n d s white

monds to Agni; blue diamonds shall use

All these colours a r e crystal; K s a t r i y a s a rabbit;

eyes of

V a i y a s shall use d i a m o n d s sword.

the green leaves of a Two colours

p l a n t a i n tree a n d the d r a s are specially assigned to the crimson or freshly c u t c o r a l a king can

s h a l l u s e d i a m o n d s r e f u l g e n t like t h e fresh s h a r p e n e d of diamonds k i n g s . T h e y a r e n o t for t h e g e n e r a l p u b l i c . O n e i s o f the J a v a f l o w e r ( C h i n a I n his capacity as the of any Rose) a n d t h e o t h e r y e l l o w like* t h e t u r m e r i c 24. wear good others. 25. different 26. it is The improper more use of colours baneful than the diamonds juice.

lord of all castes

colour as he pleases b u t not the i n d i a m o n d s b y the mixture merely of castes because

castes is

resulting from the i m p r o p e r pursuit of one another's avocation. A scholar shall not w e a r a d i a m o n d him in view of the p a t h assigned to chosen by him. A

diamond having good 27. ed A diamond by

qualities yields weal a n d w e a l t h ; otherwith even one o f its horns (angles) though

wise it becomes the source of sorrow. broken or withered, i n the h o u s e 28. withered m a r k s will 29. The scratched or shattered shall qualities. of which centre the apex is mutilated or resort to others is vitiated by dirty spots and not be retain-

p e o p l e w i s h i n g for p r o s p e r i t y e v e n

it m a y h a v e all other g o o d diamond by fire a n d the induce The

the goddess

of fortune to impressions

even if it happens to be the d i a m o n d of I n d r a . diamond that has if he of scratches in over a n y p a r t or is p a i n t e d with stripes of red destruction of a person even death.
1. Nymphaea alba.

will b r i n g a b o u t t h e

has attained mastery

1 .68.41 30. The qualities of a diamond springing from

227 the

p l a c e o f its o r i g i n 31. access. ed.

a r e a s follows.

I t m u s t h a v e six

elevated

t i p s , e i g h t e q u a l sides a n d t w e l v e s h a r p e d g e s . A perfect d i a m o n d with these features is not easy of I t h a s six f i n e tips, i t i s p u r e , t h e e d g e s a r e c l e a r a n d n o defects.
1

s h a r p . I t h a s f i n e c o l o u r . I t i s l i g h t . I t s sides a r e well s m o o t h It has 32. It sheds lustre all a r o u n d like the thunderbolt of Indra. i n b o d y , w e a r s a faultless diamond,

He who, pure

b r i g h t a n d s h a r p - e d g e d , s h a l l f l o u r i s h i n life, b l e s s e d w i t h w i f e , children, wealth, foodgrains and herds of cattle. 33. A l l sorts o f f e a r s a r i s i n g f r o m s e r p e n t s , imprecatory and who know the fires, p o i s o n , t i g e r s , thieves a n d 34. weighing Persons maledictory actions, the science of diamonds Its and

s o r c e r y o f the e n e m i e s s h a l l n o t h a r a s s h i m . g e m s s a y t h a t a m a n shall w e a r a twenty T a n d u l a s features a n d price are twofold. 35-36. las is two 1/13, taken T h e price of a diamond weighing as the s t a n d a r d . twelve T a n d u For further of o n e grains. W h e n the w e i g h t i s r e d u c e d b y in price is upto only gradually by d i a m o n d free from all flaws

(rice grains).

characteristic,

T a n d u l a s the 1/30, 37. 38. 1/80,

p r i c e i s r e d u c e d b y o n e third. the r e d u c t i o n and 1/100 are 1/1000

reduction in Tandula.

weight

a weight by rice

Diamonds

not weighed

E i g h t white mustard seeds constitute one T a n d u l a . I f a d i a m o n d p o s s e s s e s all other q u a l i t i e s a n d f l o a t s possession. visible or i n w a t e r , a m a n s h a l l w e a r t h a t a l o n e a l t h o u g h h e m a y h a v e all other precious gems in 39. 40. 41. If a d i a m o n d is v i t i a t e d by a s m a l l defect I f there are m a n y defects s m a l l or

i n v i s i b l e t o t h e e y e , o n e s h a l l g e t only o n e - t e n t h o f its p r i c e . great, not even seen is one h u n d r e d t h o f its p r i c e n e e d b e offered. A d i a m o n d , the defect o f w h i c h is clearly v a l u e d v e r y low even i f set i n a n o r n a m e n t o f g o l d .
1. JDadbici. As the legends record, it was fashioned out of the bones of the s a g e

228 42. A diamond may

Garuda

Pur ana

be flawless at the b e g i n n i n g ; b u t may acquire delects. A king not diamonds are

while setting in

an ornament it

shall n o t w e a r s u c h a n o r n a m e n t . D e f e c t i v e to be used even in ornaments. 43. If a w o m a n d e s i r e s sons,

she shall

n o t w e a r even a

flawless diamond. Otherwise she can wear s h o r t ones, e v e n d e v o i d o f g o o d q u a l i t i e s . 44-45. Pusparga

elongated, flat and

Experts prepare imitation d i a m o n d s by using iron, (topaz), Gomedaka, Vaidrya (Lapislazuli), glasses. T h e y must be metals

S p h a t i k a ( c r y s t a l ) a n d different k i n d s o f 46. 47. 48. can A diamond can scratch all

t e s t e d well b y m e a n s o f a l k a l i n e s o l u t i o n s a n d e m e r y - w h e e l , e t c . other gems a n d b u t it Cannot be scratched by other g e m s or m e t a l s . W e i g h t is-a c r i t e r i o n i n t h e a p p r a i s a l o f Vajra (diamond) and Kuruvinda similar or dissimilar materials, other g e m s ; but scholars say that in d i a m o n d s contrary is the c a s e . (cyprus rotundus) But Vajra alone scratch 49-50.

c a n s c r a t c h a n o t h e r V a j r a , n o t h i n g else. D i a m o n d s a n d p e a r l s set i n o r n a m e n t s d o n o t s h e d If laterally cut, some d i a m o n d s m a y emit lustre scintillating with flashes of good rain-bow children lustre u p w a r d s . 51. A

u p w a r d s b u t t h e n they d o n o t e m i t l u s t r e s i d e w a y s . diamond blesses the w e a r e r w i t h although the tip m a y 52. the vassal A king kings w e a l t h , food g r a i n , a n d b e m u t i l a t e d , o r the a

diamond may have

faded colour or m a y contain dots a n d scratches. wearing and d i a m o n d dazzling with lightning a s s e r t i n g his s w a y o v e r by means of his e n e m i e s f l a s h e s will s u r e l y enjoy t h e w h o l e e a r t h over-powering his exploits.

CHAPTER

SEXTYNINE

On the test of Gems pearls Sta said 1. : Pearls are found in lordly elephants, clouds, wild the b a m b o o s . Pearls in

b o a r s , shells, f i s h e s , c o b r a s ^ o y s t e r s a n d oysters a r e m o r e a b u n d a n t .

1.69.13
2. the other 3. cious. 4. those Of the eight varieties of from pearls as the experts experts.

229 O n l y these a r e v a l u e d as g e m s a n d only these a n d not ones can be bored through entirelysay the

Pearls found in b a m b o o s , elephants, whales, a n d wild lustre though r e p u t e d to be auspisay

boars are usually devoid of

obtained 5.

shells a n d t e m p l e s in the shells temple conch have the of

of elephants are the s a m e colour a as the slight yellow

poorest in quality. Pearls found from c e n t r a l p o r t i o n o f shells. a pala. Pearls 6. T h e y have big angles and weigh about elephants have rendered

yellowish colour without lustre. T h e well-known (of V i s n u ) b y its c l a s h w i t h r g a ( t h e b o w o f V i s n u ) g o o d breed are the sources of yellowish of lustre. 7. S m a l l light pearls are found in the mouths of the P t h n a fish that usually frequent the m i d d l e of the vast ocean. T h e y h a v e t h e s a m e c o l o u r a s their b a c k . 8. Pearls o b t a i n e d from the curved teeth of wild very r a r e boars are having the s a m e colour as 9. hail stone only in 10. their s o u r c e a r e and a n d elephants of pearls devoid

circular

p r i z e d like the D i v i n e B o a r ( V i s n u ) . Pearls found in the joints of b a m b o o s resembling the in colour places are very rare which noble since these b a m b o o s grow those virtuous m e n frequent a n d of c o b r a s a r e perfectly

n o t i n w i l d forests o r p u b l i c p l a c e s . Pearls found from the hoods r o u n d like f i s h a n d h a v e b r i l l i a n t c o l o u r frequently sharpened a n d polished. 11. Only meritorious persons will have access to the cobra-pearl. T h e n they 12-13. The man c a n get other g e m s of g r e a t brilliance, possessing cobra-pearl and should invite a n d l u s t r e like a s w o r d

wealth, k i n g d o m a n d grow brilliant. persons well-versed in s a c r e d rites top of perform R a k s v i d h n a

(Protection rites) during an auspicious hour a n d place it on the t h e m a n s i o n . T h e n t h e w h o l e sky will b e e n v e l o p e d b y clouds hanging low. S o u n d s o f t h u n d e r will be rainbearing

230 heard as resonant as the sound of will i l l u m i n a t e t h e q u a r t e r s . 14. He who has a cobra pearl in his drums. Flashes

Garuda

Parana

of lightning

treasury is never

h a r a s s e d b y s e r p e n t s , evil d e m o n s , evil a s s o c i a t i o n s . 15.

foul d i s e a s e s a n d defects o f origin rarely comes to lustre it

T h e P e a r l w i t h c l o u d a s its it a w a y from the

the earth. G o d s take

sky. B y t h e

emits all r o u n d it illuminates the quarters. No one c a n g a z e at its d a z z l i n g b r i l l i a n c e a s n o o n e c a n g a z e a t t h e d i s c o f the s u n . 16. and T h i s pearl outshines the brilliance of fire, m o o n , stars is equally b r i l l i a n t i n the d a y a s i n the n i g h t s u r r o u n d e d b y four gems is not an planets. It 17. oceans I am

enveloped by pitch darkness. s u r e t h a t the w h o l e e a r t h with waters overflowing s p a r k l i n g like

a d e q u a t e p r i c e for this p e a r l e v e n i f t h e e a r t h , t h e m o s t b e a u t i f u l of a l l w o r l d s , is filled with g o l d . 18. Even if an indigent man were to obtain it as a result o f his p r e v i o u s m e r i t s h e will enjoy u n r i v a l l e d l o r d s h i p a s l o n g a s t h e p e a r l r e m a i n s i n his p o s s e s s i o n . 19. It is c a p a b l e of bestowing g o o d fortune not only u p o n subjects as well. I t is the meritorious king b u t also u p o n the 20. S c a t t e r e d a l l r o u n d from

c a p a b l e o f d i s p e l l i n g evil t h o u s a n d s o f y o j a n a s a l l r o u n d . heaven, the rows of teeth c o l o u r like t h e quality, having of the great d e m o n B a l a shining 21. w i t h its p u r e of great

m i l k y w a y , fell i n t o t h e w a t e r s o f t h e o c e a n o f v a r i o u s c o l o u r s . T h e seed of the pure g e m t h e lustre of full m o o n , f o u n d a p l a c e in 22. Where the seeds of beautiful the oyster where other pearl fell, the water

seeds b o r n of other sources also were present. from t h e c l o u d s t o o fell 23. Pearls and both together e n t e r e d t h e oyster (1)

shell a n d w e r e c o n v e r t e d i n t o p e a r l s . f o u n d a t e i g h t different p l a c e s a r e c a l l e d Sairhhalika ( o f C e y l o n ) , ( 2 ) Pralaukika ( H e a v e n l y ) , (3) S a u r strika (of G u j a r a t ) , (4) T m r a p a r n a , ( 5 ) P r a a v a (of Persian g u l f ) , ( 6 ) K a u b e r a , ( 7 ) P n d y a h t a k a (ofthe P n d y a country in South I n d i a ) , and (8) H e m a k a . 24. In size, shape quality and l u s t r e , the oyster p e a r l s from V a r d h a n a , P r a s k a , P t l a a n d o t h e r w o r l d s a n d S i r h h a l a a r e n o t inferior t o a n y o t h e r p e a r l .

1.69.35
25. n the matter of pearls (from

231 oyster) the source shapes can be

need not be taken into consideration. An expert shall note t h e features a n d the found 26. 27. two fifths size. Pearls of a l l sizes and everywhere. A n o y s t e r p e a r l g r o u n d well o n the emery wheel c a n

be priced five t h o u s a n d three h u n d r e d silver pieces. A p e a r l w e i g h i n g h a l f a M s a k a 1 less s h a l l b e p r i c e d less ( 5 3 0 0 x 2 / 5 = 2 1 2 0 i.e. 3 1 8 0 s i l v e r p i e c e s ) . T h e

pearl weighing three M s a k a s is priced 2 0 0 0 silver pieces as the maximum. 28. price is If the pearl weighs three two a n d is a silver good) half M s a k a s , its pieces. A is pearl priced 800 one thousand hundred

w e i g h i n g t w o M s a k a s ( i f its q u a l i t y silver pieces. 29. A pearl weighing five a

M s a k a a n d a h a l f is p r i c e d silver p i e c e s . A p e a r l is- g r o u n d well and weighing has all

three h u n d r e d a n d twenty thus say the experts.

six G u j s 2 h a s the m a x i m u m p r i c e o f t w o h u n d r e d silver p i e c e s , If it merits, the price c a n be increased by a h u n d r e d a n d fifty silver pieces. 30. I f t h e r e a r e n o t less t h a n s i x t e e n p e a r l s i n a D h a r a n a E v e n a child will b e p a i d a ( t e n p a l a s ) it is called D r v i k a . 31

h u n d r e d a n d ten silver p i e c e s for it. I f t h e r e a r e n o t less t h a n t w e n t y p e a r l s i n a D h a r a n a it B h a v a k a . I t c a n fetch s e v e n t y n i n e (ten p a l a s ) experts call 32. ed ikya. 33.

s i l v e r p i e c e s i f t h e p e a r l s a r e n o t deficient i n q u a l i t y . If a D h a r a n a is c o m p l e t e with thirty pearls it is c a l l Its m a x i m u m Forty pearls price shall be forty. together weighing a D h a r a n a can be Its price is fourteen.

termed iktha. 34. Kpy. 35. Eighty

Its price is thirty. S i x t y p e a r l s together weighor ninety pearls in a D h a r a n a is c a l l e d a bowl well and cook with finely

ing a d h a r a n a can be termed Nikararsa. Its price is eleven and nine. Rub

G a t h e r together the pearls in a rice them

t h e m well i n the j u i c e o f L e m o n . c h o p p e d carrot.

N o w the pearls can be b o r e d quickly.

weight. precatorius Twelve used msakas m a k e for weighing one tola and

1. A m e a s u r e m e n t for 8 6 tolas m a k e o n e k i l o g r a m . 2. The fruits of Abrus

in ancient India.

232 36-37. clay. Make a

Garuda M a t s y a p u t a covering the

Purna

pearls with well

[A p u t a is baking anything in a crucible]. H e a t it

by m e a n s of the process V i t n a p a t t i ( covering the crucible, etc. with a c a n o p y ) . T h e n cook the pearls, in milk first, then in water a n d then in lime water. F i n a l l y cook then ful out rub them with a shine has clean cloth. Vydi1, begin to brilliantly. them in condensed milk, Now the pearls will the great s a g e of wondercleaning pearls gold do a n d experts in gems.

powers, 38.

mentioned

this p r o c e s s o f

of consideration

for t h e w o r l d

A w h i t e p e a r l s h i n i n g like g l a s s t o g e t h e r w i t h Experts

o n e h u n d r e d t h o f i t b y w e i g h t s h a l l b e p u t i n m e r c u r y for s o m e time before using it as an ornament. like t h i s . 39-40. put it in hot If t h e r e is a d o u b t to the a r t i f i c i a l i t y of a p e a r l , T h e n take it next d a y cover a whole night. T h e oil w i t h a p i n c h o f c o m m o n s a l t . in Simhala

o u t a n d s o a k i t i n w a t e r for

it with a dry cloth a n d r u b it with grains of p a d d y . If the colour does not fade the pearl is g e n u i n e not artificial. 41. 42. A white p e a r l of p r o p e r size s m o o t h a n d heavy, p u r e quality. want is If a p e a r l delights even a p e r s o n w h o does not size, if it sheds white the hole is of a n d clean, circular in shape and brilliant is of good t o b u y it, i f i t i s o f p r o p e r white a n d circular, if 43. and faults.

rays, if it

uniform width throughout commendable features as

we can say that it is of g o o d quality. If s u c h a fine p e a r l with d e s c r i b e d a b o v e i s i n o n e ' s p o s s e s s i o n h e will b e free f r o m a l l e v i l s

CHAPTER

SEVENTY

On the test of GemsRuby Sta said 1. : T a k i n g the b l o o d of the m i g h t y d e m o n B a l a , traversedt he which sky a n d

c o n t a i n e d seeds of excellent g e m s , the sun s h o n e b l u e like a s w o r d .

1. He is also reputed as a g r a m m a r i a n

somewhat

later than Pnin.

1.70.11 2. p r o u d of many river 3.

233 He was thwarted suddenly half way by R v a n a , K i n g who appeared like another Rhu, and was his e x p l o i t s s u c h a s t h e c o n q u e s t o f d e i t i e s in battles

of Lak,

times before. T h e r e u p o n the sun d r o p p e d the b l o o d in the excellent banks were overgrown with Areca-palms and whose

"whose d e e p p o o l s a r e c o n s t a n t l y a g i t a t e d b y the b e a u t i f u l t h i g h s of the Sirhhala maidens. 4. 5. T h e n c e f o r w a r d t h e river E v e r since, its b a n k s became famous are as Rvana Gag. pierced G a g 1 since i t a c q u i r e d the s a m e merits a s the divine g e m s d u r i n g n i g h t s a n d they a p p e a r a s t h o u g h t h e y a r e b y shafts o f g o l d , b l a z i n g 6. On its b a n k s resembling 7. flower, i n s i d e a s well a s o u t s i d e . and waters, rubies began to appear

strewn o v e r w i t h p r e c i o u s

those found in S a u g a n d h i k a , K u r u v i n d a , a n d S p h All of t h e m h a d g r e a t merits. Indragopa (glowworm), J a v a flower (China

tika territories. Guj,

S o m e of these rubies h a v e the colours of the B a n d h k a 2

R o s e ) blood, p o m e g r a n a t e seeds a n d the Kirhs'uka3 flower. All of them have a shining lustre. 8. S o m e of the rubies have the colour of vermillion, r e d centre has a lotus a n d Saffron; s o m e h a v e the colour o f L k s j u i c e ; althou g h the red colour is uniform throughout; their 9. s p e c i a l manifest brilliance; the rubies a r e self-luminous. S o m e of these rubies of the S p h a t i k a (crystal) variety, e n d o w e d w i t h all g o o d q u a l i t i e s , reflect a n d r e f r a c t t h e r a y s o f t h e sun i l l u m i n a t i n g all the s u r r o u n d i n g objects. 10. S o m e of these rubies have the o f t h e b r i l l i a n c e o f t h e fresh and Kantakri6 b l o w n red lotus h a v e a m i x t u r e of blue colour like that of K u s u m b h a 4 ; others 11.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

lustre o f A r u s k a r a 5

f l o w e r a n d still o t h e r s h a v e t h e c o l o u r o f H i g u l a

(Asafoetida).

S o m e of the rubies have the colour of the eyes of the

N o t identifiable. Pentapetes Butea Carthamus Semecarpus Solanum phoenicea. tinctorius. omacardium. monosperma.

xanthocarpum.

234 birds Cakora , C u c k o o 12.

1

Garuda or Srasa;
2

Purna of

others h a v e the

lustre

t h e K o k a n a d a ( R e d L o t u s ) i n full b l o o m . I n their influence, f i r m n e s s a n d weight S a u g a n d h i k a rubies are similar to crystalline rubies; but they have the colour of the fine red lotus with a slight bluish tinge. 13. T h e K u r u v i n d a j a variety of rubies a r e red no doubt,, akin to that of the crystalline variety. Their inflbut that redness is not

T h e y a r e dull h u e d a n d the lustre r e m a i n s within. uence too is not on p a r with that of the crystals. 14-15. In the beds

of Rvanaga:ig some Kuruvindaka

variety of rubies a r e p r o d u c e d which have the d e e p red hue of o t h e r v a r i e t i e s o f r u b i e s , b u t they h a v e c r y s t a l l i n e r a y s ; i n A n d h r a they a r e n o t usually f o u n d ; if at all s o m e of t h e m h a v e the r u b y c o l o u r they f e t c h o n l y a less p r i c e . 16. akin low. 17. colour, I n brief, t h e g o o d f e a t u r e s o f g e m s heaviness, smoothness, evenness, are profusion of transparency, iridisto Similarly, in the T u m b u r u 3 territory too, s o m e rubies the crystalline variety are found but are priced very

cence and greatness. 18. G e m s a r e not g o o d if they a r e s a n d y , cracked within, a n d stained, if they a r e lustreless, r o u g h a n d dull a l t h o u g h they m a y h a v e all the characteristic features of their family. 19. ance, If any one wears a g e m of m a n y flaws out of ignora n x i e t y , sickness, d e a t h , loss of wealth a n d t h e n grief, 20. ed for well. 21. T h e spurious ones alien to genuine rubies but akin to rprnaka. can be detected by one another are (1) K a l a a p u r o d b h a v a , ( 2 ) S i m h a l a , ( 3 ) T u m b u r u d e o t t h a , (4) M u k t a p n y a a n d ( 5 ) 22-25. husky aspect. T h e f i r s t variety o f K a l a a h a s the peculiarity o f

o t h e r evils t o r m e n t h i m . Inferior alien varieties of g e m s a r e usually substitutThe i n t e l l i g e n t s h a l l n o t e this the five genuine ones.

T h e second S i m h a l a variety

its d a r k n e s s . T h e t h i r d v a r i e t y o f T u m b u r u d e o t t h a h a s the t i n g e
1. 2. 3. T h e Greek, Partridge. The Indian the crane. Vindhya-region. GP., p. 158. Probably SSED, p. 200.

1.70.34
of copper colour. T h e sky a n d the r p r n a k a called upon to Muktapnya variety is type

235 has the tinge of t h e and brilliIf one is

devoid of lustre a

a n c e . T h e s e characteristics show that they are alien. distinguish between it has r u b y one shall note whether being rubbed it loses its

genuine and a spurious w i t h o i l ; w h e t h e r on-

the c o p p e r tinge or husky or whether on placing t w o the qualities.

a s p e c t ; whether it a p p e a r s to be s m e a r e d lustre;

fingers on the top it casts d a r k shade on either s i d e ; or whether on being tossed up a n d c a u g h t hold of retains all 26. 27. 28. ruby but 29. shall not all good an 30. brahmins. 31. Visnu) If the On doubt and O f t w o g e m s p u t t o test t h e o n e w i t h m o r e w e i g h t i s g e n u i n e . is not r e m o v e d , it shall be p u t on t h e sapphire no gem except diamond emery-wheel or scratched with a similar g e m a n d tested. ruby are and K u r u v i n d a can m a k e a scratch mark. There of many colour. spurious ones alien to the g e n u i n e Still here some are mentioned similar

o n l y t o i n d i c a t e their n a m e s a n d d i f f e r e n c e . A g e m belonging to an alien be worn points. alien along Even with a group devoid of virtue one endowed with of (the divine g e m genuine

with K a u s t u b h a

variety should not be a spurious alien

worn by a scholar. a number of nullify the gem can

E v e n o n e C n d l a 1 c a n a t t a c k a n d kill Similarly

potency of m a n y gems endowed with g o o d qualities. N o evil c a n e v e n t o u c h the w e a r e r o f a Padmarga of great potency even if he is o r e v e n i f h e errs h a b i t u a l l y . 32. He who is mentally and bodily pure and wears b y its g o o d Padmarga 33. whose crimson of a colour is heightened c a u g h t a m i d s t his d e a d l y e n e m i e s

q u a l i t i e s i s n e v e r s u l l i e d b y a n y s o r t o f evil. The price T a n d u l a of well-cut, well-polished a Msaka of purified P a d m a r g a Hence d i a m o n d is equal to that of of great potency. 34. A g e m is prized for its c o l o u r a n d b r i l l i a n c y . a n y defect i n t h e s e t w o q u a l i t i e s lowers t h e v a l u e .

1.

A low-caste person, a person doing wicked deeds.

236 CHAPTER SEVENTYONE

Garuda

Parana

On the test of GemsEmerald Sta said : 1. Vsuki 2. 3. 4. excellent the T a k i n g a w a y the the king bile of the c h i e f of demons, B a l a , a c r o s s the sky a s a c r o s s t h e sky

of Serpents like a

was speeding bridge

t h o u g h he was cutting it into two. He a p p e a r e d Then o f silver i l l u m i n e d b y t h e g e m o n his h e a d . Garuda began to attack the it Serpent-king by his wings as if eager to destroy heaven a n d earth. Suddenly the Serpent dropped Mnikya mountain, which is on the ridge of the rendered fragrant by

Nalik 5.

forest a n d w h e r e t h e T u r u s k a 1 trees o f g o o d o o z i n g after t h e fall c r o s s e d t h e shore of the ocean near

juice grew abundantly. T h e fallen b i l e i m m e d i a t e l y Mnikya and reached the mountain

R a m ( G o d d e s s L a k s m ) b e c a u s e o f its faith i n h e r a n d b e c a m e the source of M a r a k a t a ( E m e r a l d ) . 6. became nostrils. 7. Emeralds that got their irsa
2

G a r u d a caught unconscious. He

hold then

of s o m e of the falling bile b u t let out the line and stuff t h r o u g h his lustre from the the wings

tender neck of parrots,

flower, b a c k of the glow-worm,

grassy plain, moss, K a l h r a 3 flower, grass-blade a n d of G a r u d a are auspicious. 8. T h e place on the mountain where

t h e b i l e let l o o s e with

by the Serpent-chief all virtues. 9.

fell i s i n a c c e s s i b l e of M a r a k a t a

though endowed n e a r the

In the p l a c e

(i.e.

sea where

1. A

' S t o r a x is the T u r u s k a of Ayurveda, which is (L. Orientalis M i l l e r a n d from 188. 399. of inferior lebbeck quality of b a l s a m is found GVDB,p. GVDB,p.

a balsam L. an Indian

obtained Linn. species

f r o m f o r e i g n t r e e s o f Ligendamber similar sort excelsa 2. Attingia Naronha.'.

Styracijlua

Albizzia

3.

A v a r i e t y o f utpala.

1.71.22 it finally c a m e to) m a n y things grow. 10. cinal What cannot poison be cured from tbe

237 Whatever is grown there and medi-

i s efficacious i n s u b d u i n g p o i s o n a n d s i c k n e s s . by any mantras fangs of great herbsthe 11. cobrasis

quelled by that. W h a t e v e r g r o w s t h e r e free f r o m d e f e c t s things. that with has gold even is considered to be the holiest of holy 12-15. dark dust; shade changes

E x p e r t s i n g e m s a r e i n c l i n e d t o s a y t h a t t h e followa soft g l o w , that is highly complicated,

ing types of emeralds are of good potency : E m e r a l d green colour, emerald that h e w n i n different ways a n d appears to b e shifted shoots

is endowed with qualities of shape, heaviness a n d and a on it; e m e r a l d the dazling interior light

a l l o v e r it, sufficient s u n ' s r a y s fall natural its shade

diffusion o f of which becomes the v e r y

light w h e n

infused m a k i n g sight. 16-17. rays a p p e a r s the sheet

i t a p p e a r like

a green m e a d o w where lightning the m i n d at

flashes spread a n d

e m e r a l d that delights

T h e emerald within which a sheet of transparent to spread on account of the profusion of colour; tender as feathers to be a as of a great the is of the hue emerald of the is not

of rays of

peacock, pure, smooth and diffusion 18. lightthis preceding one.

t h i c k set a n d s e e m s

virtuous

T h e e m e r a l d o f v a r i e g a t e d h u e s , v e r y firm a n d r o u g h , (Bitumen) left

stained a n d sand-grained a n d encrusted with iljatu is- of i n f e r i o r q u a l i t y . 19. over The remnant of any never be gem worn

other than emerald nor bought by

after f i x t u r e s h a l l 20. 21.

those

w h o w i s h for w e l f a r e . T w o spurious emeralds Bhalltaki a n d Putrik have T h e P u t r i k s u b s t i t u t e loses its b r i l l i a n c e w h e n r u b b silken The cloth. G l a s s s u b s t i t u t e c a n b e d e t e c t e d b y its very close i m i t a t i o n of e m e r a l d the c o l o u r o f e m e r a l d b u t they a r e r e a l l y a l i e n t o i t . ed with a 22.

lightness alone. B h a l l t a k a is a blown over it. i n f e a t u r e s , q u a l i t i e s a n d c o l o u r b u t its c o l o u r f a d e s a n d c h a n g es when air is

238 23. species ornament. 24. Diamonds, not pearls rays a n d other upward gems when

Garuda of the not set

Purna alien in an

do

shoot up

S o m e of them do shoot upwards if kept Emerald devoid of flaws and

straight but with of

when held horizontally the rays disappear. 25-27. endowed p o t e n c y shall b e w o r n after s e t t i n g it in gold at the following recital

specified o c c a s i o n s : A t t h e t i m e o f b a t h , A c a m a n a , prayers, when charms give when guests; Tridosas 28. than 29. gifts o f c o w when s a c r i f i c i a l rites (wind, bile and mantras are are performed to and and gold;

i n v o k e d ; b y those who gods, manes or special honoured; when the

by those who practise austerities; is specially

the preceptor

phlegm) are upset; when poisoned fetches m o r e p r i c e depreciation in

a n d when engaged in war. An e m e r a l d endowed with virtues weight. case of defects, the Similarly, in a ruby of equal

v a l u e o f a n e m e r a l d i s m o r e t h a n thai o f r u b y .

CHAPTER SEVENTYTWO
On the test of GemsSapphire Sta said 1. full were Laval 2. plant : B o t h the eyes in o f t h e d e m o n B a l a r e s p l e n d e n t like t h e a place where the Sirhhala their maidens shoots a n d flowers of the creeper with the tender fingers the

b l o w n l o t u s fell (Phyllanthus The

busy culling the tender shoots.

Longifoluis) of

resembling tender Ketaka1 3. just There on

m a r s h y foreshore which waves

ocean hedged by either

from

side lash shines

brilliantly d u e to the a b u n d a n c e of S a p p h i r e s . the blue sapphire g e m s of bluish shades are found, lotus, ploughshare section, honey bee, as :the
1.

Pane?anus tectorius.

1.72.16 V i s n u ' s body, Siva's 4. S o m e have neck,

239 K a s y a f l o w e r a n d the f l o w e r s o f not w h i t e ) . t h e w a t e r s o f the c l e a r b l u e

G i r i k a r n i k 1 (those which are sea; o t h e r s

the colour of

r e s e m b l e a flock of p e a c o c k s ; s o m e h a v e t h e refulc o m i n g from b l u e j u i c e o f i n d i g o p l a n t ; a n d cuckoo. sapphire gems of great potency can be encrusted with clay,

gence of bubbles 5. 6.

s o m e h a v e the colour of the neck of intoxicated There many Defective

f o u n d ; t h e y a r e o f u n i f o r m size, c l e a r l u s t r e a n d f i n e c o l o u r . sapphires and are those Tockbits a n d g r a v e l s , t h o s e T r s a (tremulousness), 7. 8. 9. o u t any 10. 11. tion beat. 12. 13. ill-luck 14. 15. 16. shall b e Still, u n d e r no circumstances, should any gem be s u b j e c t e d t o t h e test o f f i r e s e e k i n g m o r e b r i l l i a n c y . W h i l e t h e test i s b e i n g c a r r i e d o u t s o m e n e w defects T h i s brings owner, t h e m a n w h o c o n d u c t s t h e test a n d t h e c o n d u c t it. genuine ones in in glass, etc. in in it, it if due t o t h e p r o c e s s o f b u r n i n g m a y e n t e r t h e g e m s . to the m a n who induced him to P o e t s well w i t h holes, those having the flaw of with traces o f

those impregnated

m i c a . S o m e a r e d e f e c t i v e i n their c o l o u r . versed in the sacred technical literature p r a i s e t h e g e n u i n e g e m s f o u n d there ( S i m h a l a ) . V i r t u e s r e s u l t i n g from w e a r i n g s a p p h i r e a r e t h e s a m e Three types of R u b i e s have been enumerated before as in the case of rubies. b a s e d o n their s o u r c e s . T h e s a m e a p p l i e s t o s a p p h i r e s a l s o withdifference. T h e modes of testing the genuineness of sapphire

a r e the s a m e as those in the case of R u b i e s . T h e s a p p h i r e s t a n d s t h e test o f f i r e o f a l o n g e r d u r a ruby. It can withstand a greater quantity of than the

S p u r i o u s s a p p h i r e s a r e a k i n t o the Heaviness and firmness increase

colour but actually alien are glass, m a r b l e , K a r a v r a a n d crystals. order. T h i s should be noted. If a s a p p h i r e preserved. So has a tinge of c o p p e r c o l o u r and also K a r a v r a U p a l a marble

they h a v e the c o p p e r tinge.

1. P r o b a b l y s y m p h o r e m a p o l y a n d r u m , GVDB, p. 138.

240 17. That sapphire its c e n t r e sapphire

Garuda

Purna

w h i c h h a s a b r i l l i a n t f l a s h like t h e is of great potency and that turns milk very r a r e . times It its

thunderbolt in 18. The

is the r e a l I n d r a n l l a . hundred w e i g h t entirely b l u e i s c a l l e d M a h n l a . T h i s i s b e c a u s e profusion of the c o l o u r . 19. T h e price o f a M s a o f r u b y i s the s a m e a s t h a t o f four M s s o f s a p p h i r e o f g r e a t v i r t u e . of the

CHAPTER On Sta said : 1. (Topaz), 2. T h e test the test

SEVENTYTHREE of GemsLapis Lazuli

of Vaidrya ( L a p i s L a z u l i ) and

and Pusparga

Karketana

Bhlsmaka was first expounded by r e s o n a n t like ( t h e final of the

B r a h m a a n d then r e p e a t e d b y V y s a . F r o m the loud shout of the d e m o n B a l a

2

the s h o u t o f the o c e a n a g i t a t e d a t the e n d o f a K a l p a 1 d i s s o l u t i o n after m a n y a d e l u g e ) produced. 3. near the 4. It is Not of many colours and the

V a i d r y a ( L a p i s Lazuli) was brilliance

different c o l o u r s i s p l e a s i n g a n d d e l i g h t f u l . far f r o m t h e lofty m o u n t a i n can be of of V i d r a a n d very found the m i n e of the demon, the frontiers o f K m a b h t i k a Raised aloft b y

the l a p i s l a z u l i g e m s . the l o u d s h o u t m i n e o f g r e a t v i r t u e s h a s v i r t u a l l y b e c o m e a n o r n a m e n t for t h e three worlds. 5. E m i t t i n g the f i n e c o l o u r s o f the c l o u d s o f r a i n y s e a s o n , g e m s shot off flames as it were in tune with the lapis lazuli

shrill cry o f the d e m o n .

1. 2. P {AITM), p. 2163. the find also end of a in refers the to R e f e r e n c e s ' t o s u c h a D e l u g e we T h e Bible

A c c o r d i n g to the P u r n a s , the universe is destroyed at

Kalpa, a n d a n e w c r e a t i o n s t a r t s . the story of the D e l u g e a n d

story of M a n u a n d Fish in the a t a p a t h a B r h m a n a . the N o a h ' s Ark.

1.73.19 6. 7. L a p i s lazuli has the colours of all The chief of t h e m is the blue that which h a s the

241 gems available on one resembling the

the earth, beginning from R u b y . neck of a peacock or colour of the leaf of the outer

b a m b o o . L a p i s lazuli gems that have

the colour of

feathers o f the C s a ( B l u e j a y ) b i r d a r e not a p p r o v e d o f b y the experts in the technical literature of g e m s . 8 A lapis lazuli g e m of c o m m e n d a b l e virtues brings g o o d l u c k t o its o w n e r ; i f i t h a s defects i t b r i n g s ill-luck. H e n c e , i t m u s t b e t e s t e d well ( b e f o r e b u y i n g a n d w e a r i n g ) . 9. colour. 10. A glass piece can be detected b y its inability to s c r a t c h ; a i u p l a b y its 11. that l i g h t w e i g h t ; a G i r i k c a b y its l a c k T h e r e a r e spurious g e m s resembling lapis lazuli, such i u p l a , a n d glass crystals affected by smoky as Girikca,

o f b r i l l i a n c e a n d a c r y s t a l b y its g r e a t b r i l l i a n c e . T h e price of two pal as of lapis lazuli is equal to of two there gold pieces in weight are many some can a n d of very of Sapphire 12. Although

c o m m e n d a b l e virtues. spurious imitations of a names can be indicated g e m of excellent 13. universal 14. inasmuch quality, here

f r o m w h i c h t h e v a r i e t i e s c a n b e inferred. An intelligent m a n characteristic T h e price as the e a s i l y s e e t h e difference. A is glossy surface, lightness in ornaments it with varies of alienness

a n d softness o f t o u c h . o f l a p i s l a z u l i set person purification a n d setting is instilling executed by an virtue or

expert or an 15.

incompetent

defect as the case m a y b e . T h e s e g e m s set c a r e f u l l y b y t h e j e w e l l e r , i f free f r o m outlive t h e p r e s e n t v a l u e a n d fetch e v e n six t i m e s w h i c h t h e g e m s fresh f r o m t h e m i n e o r i n current in other parts of the d e f e c t s , will their p r i c e . 16. world. 17-19. lent to According to M a n u a S u v a r n a weight is equivaM s a k a s . O n e seventh of it is called a Saj. sixteen T h e price t o w n s o n t h e s e a - c o a s t fetch i s n o t

242 A S a n a is of a Dharana]. has been four

Garuda

Purana

M s a s a n d a M s a k a is five K r s n a l a s . A tenth [According to others 10 p a l a s m a k e a process of arriving at the price of gems

P a l a is D h a r a n a T h u s the explained.

CHAPTER SEVENTYFOUR On the test of GemsTopaz Sta said 1. : F r o m the particles of the skin of demon Bala that Himalaya mountain Pusparga (Topaz)

fell o n t h e t o p o f t h e 2.

g e m s of great virtue have c o m e u p . A g e m o f this v a r i e t y , y e l l o w i s h g r e y i n c o l o u r , i s c a l l e d (Ruby). If it is crimson-yellow it is called Padmarga Kaurundaka. 3. A t r a n s p a r e n t v a r i e t y slightly r e d a n d y e l l o w i s c a l l e d glossy a n d comK s y a k a ; slightly b l u e a n d white in colour, m e n d a b l e is called S o m n a k a . 4. (Ruby) ; 5. T h a t which is of deep red colour is indeed P a d m a r g a if it is of deep blue colour, it is fixed like called Indranla that of V a i d r y a also similar

(Sapphire). T h e p r i c e o f this g e m i s ( L a p i s Lazuli) by experts in G e m s . b u t it blesses w o m e n with sons. T h e result is

CHAPTER SEVENTYFIVE On the test of GemsKarketana Sta said: 1. of lotuses. in the world
1.

T h e w i n d i n his d e l i g h t g a t h e r e d t o g e t h e r them amid Thereafter, K a r k e t a n a cropped up.

1

the

nails

o f the king o f d e m o n s B a l a a n d scattered

clusters

which is prized very m u c h

W h a t sort of g e m it m i g h t be is not clear.

1.76.1 2. T h e best variety of K a r k e t a n a has the copper tinge of the m o o n , a n d brings

243 colour

of b l o o d , the yellowish brilliance of honey.

burning fiery about evils are

T h e other variety of r o u g h surface bluish

white in colour is not a p p r o v e d of since it s u c h as sickness, etc. 3. Those Karketanas are very

auspicious which such as

glossy, p u r e , of uniform reddish hue, of yellowish tinge, o f d i v e r s e c o l o u r s a n d free f r o m d e f e c t s , snakelike scratches, etc. 4. dispels 5. mendable If, w h e n it i s set and in an o r n a m e n t of gold, it removes

heavy,

Trsa, cracks, sheds

brilliant rays as if heated in fire, K a r k e t a n a K a l i defects family a n d general happiness. Those who wear K a r k e t a n a virtues for the sake of of

sickness,

is conducive to longevity, flourishing auspicious and com-

embellishments

are highly

h o n o u r e d , rich, s u r r o u n d e d by m a n y kinsmen a n d a l w a y s enjoying all kinds of 6. Some happiness. gems of spurious K a r k e t a n a

they p r o s p e r untied of

distorted

a s p e c t a n d p a l e b l u e c o l o u r a n d affected b y p a l e r e d h u e a p p e a r t o h a v e the s h a p e o f the genuine b r i l l i a n c e a n d colourful 7. If K a r k e t a n a is effect. s c r u p u l o u s l y t e s t e d for its c o l o u r a n d T h e price is K a r k e t a n a though devoid

f e a t u r e s a n d f o u n d t o b e b r i g h t a n d b r i l l i a n t like t h e r i s i n g s u n , i t i s t o b e p r i c e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h its g r e a t n e s s . b a s e d on weight, as e x p o u n d e d by experts in Gem-literature.

CHAPTER

SEVENTYSIX

On the test of GemsBhismamani Sta said :

1. Bhsma. The S e m e n o f t h e d e m o n fell i n t h e n o r t h e r n r e g i o n b e c a m e the source o f the gems called o f the H i m a l a y a s which

244 2. B h l s m a stones, white white fruit like

Garuda

Purna

a k h a a n d lilies o r S y o fairly big-sized dia-

n k a 1 (the mond. 3. wealth. 4.

of the tree of that n a m e ) a r e lustrous.

T h e r e are s o m e B h s m a stones similar to a The m a n who wears a pure

B h s m a stone with reveit in gold acquires (the fabulous eightthe

r e n c e a n d faith r o u n d h i s n e c k after s e t t i n g W i l d leopards, wolves, arabhas

footed m o n s t e r s ) , very sight. 5-6. forms

elephants, lions,

tigers, f l y f r o m h i m a t

H e n e e d n o t fear a n y o n e .

H e c a n w a n d e r like a n for m a n y y e a r s . He

unfettered elephant.

W e a r i n g this s t o n e i n t h e r i n g i f o n e p e r will b e satisfied

Pitrtarpana the manes

P o i s o n s o f s n a k e s , b i r d s , m i c e a n d s c o r p i o n a r e ineffective. h a s n o fear f r o m f l o o d s , fire, e n e m i e s o r t h i e v e s . 7. of the 8. An intelligent m a n m u s t colour of moss or clouds, shall fix the shun

spurious B h s m a stones surface, lustreless

rough of

or yellowish in tinge, or faded a n d Scholars

dirty-coloured. price of Bhsma more s t o n e s after reason. If of

observing the p l a c e of origin a n d a c c o r d i n g to the t h e s t o n e c o m e s f r o m far, its p r i c e i s local origin.

than that of one

CHAPTER SEVENTYSEVEN
On the test of GemsPulaka Sta said: 1. T h e Serpents publicly worshipped the chief o f d e m o n s , rivers f l o w i n g i n t h e nor-

B a l a , i n a f a m o u s p l a c e a n d s c a t t e r e d his c l a w s o v e r v a r i o u s h o l y mountains, a n d other places a n d in thern region. 1. Oroxylum indicum.

1.78.3 2.

245 T h e s e f a m o u s P u l a k a g e m s o r i g i n a t e d from those nails T h e y h a v e the colours (collyrium), honey and

a n d claws in the territories : D r n a 1 ( E a s t e r n p a r t of m o d e r n M l v ) , Vgadava, Mekala2, Klaga. of Guja plantain 3. (a red-black berry), Ajana tree. P u l a k a s o f v a r i e g a t e d c o l o u r s o f shell, l o t u s , h o n e y b e e
3

lotus-stalk.

T h e y a r e b r i l l i a n t like t h e m u s k - d e e r , f i r e a n d t h e

a n d the A r k a

( S u n - p l a n t ) f l o w e r s free from s c r a t c h e s a n d lines They are conducive to increasdogs,

a r e very holy a n d auspicious. ing prosperity. 4.

P u l a k a stones carried here fierce

a n d there by crows,

donkeys, jackals and

v u l t u r e s i n their m o u t h s

wet with

blood and flesh bring about death and hence should be avoided. T h e p r i c e o f a perfect P u l a k a s t o n e a p a l a i n w e i g h t i s f i v e h u n d r e d silver pieces.

CHAPTER

SEVENTYEIGHT

On the test of GemsBloodstone Sta said : 1. Narmada. 2. From that did originate the g e m Blood-stone of v a r i o u s f o r m s a n d sizes, w i t h c o l o u r s like t h a t o f a g l o w w o r m , t h e b e a k of a parrot, etc, b u t of manifest uniform thickness throughout. 3. Indranla flash.
1. 2. 3. The The region around D h a s n a in Central India. region around Mount C. Mekala the source of the Narmada

T h e f i r e g o d carried the features

of the d e m o n of the

Bala river

a n d deposited the s a m e in the

low-lyingmarshes

T h e B l o o d - s t o n e w h i c h i s g r e y like t h e the same merits (sapphire). It is productive

m o o n in the as those of and

centre is of the purest type with

of prosperity

munificence, when boiled it a s s u m e s the colour of the lightning

river also called M e k a l a - s u t . Calotropis procera and gigantea. GVDB, p . 23.

246 CHAPTER SEVENTYNINE

Garuda

Purna

On the test of Gems Crystal Sta said 1. : B a l a r m a e x e r t e d h i m s e l f a n d s c a t t e r e d t h e fat o f t h e Vindhya and types the China and Nepal. (crystals) of different originated as lotus

d e m o n B a l a over the m o u n t a i n s K a v e r a a n d lands of Y a v a n a , 2. Sphatika

therefrom: A k a u d d h a ( a s clear a s the s k y ) , T a i l k h y a ( h a v i n g the brilliance 3. diately. of oil) Mrnlaakhadhavala of sins, like (white stalk a n d a k h a ) A gem a n d others of various colours. destructive Sphatika, does not

exist. C u t a n d p o l i s h e d well, i t will fetch a little t i d y s u m i m m e -

CHAPTER EIGHTY On the test of Gems Coral Sta said 1. : esa (the Serpent king) carried the entrails of the

d e m o n B a l a a n d d e p o s i t e d the s a m e i n K e r a l a a n d other p l a c e s ; there corals of g r e a t virtue a r e p r o d u c e d . 2. the blood foreign T h e most important of them is the of a hare, the Guj-berry or are there are lands where corals a b o u n d o n e c o l o u r e d like the China-rose. T h e Sunlaka, Devaka and crimson colour.

R o m a k a . 1 C o r a l s found

of deep

C o r a l s found elsewhere are not so i m p o r t a n t . T h e p r i c e of coral d e p e n d s u p o n t h e efficiency o f t h e a r t i s a n . 3. 4. A c o r a l o f p l e a s i n g c o l o u r , soft a n d Is productive of and glossy, possessing deep crimson colour, w e a l t h a n d food-grain in the world a n d sorrow. is necessary O a u n a k a , knowknowledge for t h e a n d d i s p e l s t h e fear o f p o i s o n ledge of crystals of gems.
I. Modern Rome.

corals

1.81.8
CHAPTER EIGHTYONE Sacred Sta said : 1-2. everywhere viz., sea). Places

247

I shall e n u m e r a t e the h o l y p l a c e s a n d s a c r e d rivers. but in three places it i s o f v e r y difficult a c c e s s ,

G a g is the holiest of the holy rivers. G a g is easy of a c c e s s in H a r i d v r a 1 ( a t the s o u r c e ) , P r a y g a ( a t the confluence P r a y g a is a very holy p l a c e 3. conducive of worldly enjoythere. dip therein) it dispels taken the

w i t h Y a m u n a ) a n d G a g s g a r a s a g a m a ( w h e r e i t falls i n t o t h e ments a n d salvation to those who die

By resorting to it ( b y t a k i n g a

s i n s ; t h o s e t o w h o m o b l a t i o n s a r e offered t h e r e e n j o y a l l d e s i r e s . V r n a s is the holy p l a c e where form of 4. place there. 5. pleasures 6. Dvrak and is a beautiful city. It affords is worldly salvation. T h e dispels all eastern sins. is a Sarasvat ambhala4 great holy holy. T h e it Vivea (Lord i v a ) . K u r u k s e t r a is a holy is conducive p l a c e . By acts of charity at this enjoyment and salvation. is installed Somantha to worldly L o r d Keava has

P r a b h s a 2 is a

very holy p l a c e . L o r d

s u r r o u n d i n g territories known as S a p t a s r a s v a t a a r e very holy. Kedra3 village is an place. For excellent holy p l a c e . 7. Nryana

salvation B a d a r i k r a m a is the most

suitable place. P u s k a r a a r e all

v e t a d v p a , city o f M y n a i m i s a a n d

great holy places. Ayodhy, Aryatrtha, C i t r a k t a 5 a n d G o m a t a r e all holy. 8. T h e holy place of V a i n y a k a , a n d Rmagiri-Arama*

1. 2. been 3. 4. 5. 6.

Spelt

Haradvra

now-a-days. Recently the S o m a n t h a temple has

Prabhsapattana in Gujrata. here. Kedrantha in Modern

re-built

the H i m a l a y a s .

Modern S a m b a l a in U t t a r a Pradesh. A town in the B a n d a district of U t t a r a Pradesh. T h e Ramtek-hill near N a g p u r in the M a h a r a s t r a S t a t e .

248 are sacred 9. most

2

Garuda places.
1

Purna

T h e city o f K c , the river T u g a -

bhadr, railam

a n d S e t u b a n d h a n a a r e holy places.

R m e v a r a is a great holy place, similarly K r t t i k e y a

i s a n excellent holy p l a c e . B h r g u t u g a , K m a t r t h a , a n d A m a r a k a n t a k a 3 are equally holy places. 10. Hari in 11. are great 12. 13. and of Lord places. M a h k l a ( L o r d i v a ) i s the deity i n U j j a i n ; ( L o r d the f o r m of rdhara is the deity in K u b j a k a 4 ;

K u b j m r a k a is a great holy p l a c e ; K l a s a r p i 5 yields all desires. M a h k e 6 , K v e r , C a n d r a b h g a l o n g with V i p a holy rivers. is Ekmra', a Brahmatrtha8, c i t y ; o n a is iva, be Devakotaka9 a great holy goddess sacred

a r e all g r e a t holy p l a c e s . Mathura beautiful river. J a m b s a r a s 1 0 i s a g r e a t h o l y p o o l ; Wherever the idols of S u n , Visnu are installed shall Ganea, considered

I n a l l these a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r s a c r e d p l a c e s , p e r f o r m a n c e austerities, become Worship, rddha and food oblations

h o l y d i p , g i v i n g o f gifts, r e c i t a l o f p r a y e r s , 14. lagrma Trthas

15

e v e r l a s t i n g in their efficacy. everything; Paupati's 15. Bhndra tions.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Modern Kanjeevaram
14

is a h o l y p l a c e y i e l d i n g

( L o r d S i v a ' s ) T r t h a 1 1 is a holy p l a c e . the of K o k m u k h a 1 2 , V r h a 1 3 , holy p l a c e s . Mahvisnu in are

Similarly, and

Svmitrtha

M o h a d a n d a 1 8 a n d M a d h u s d a n a in M a n d a r a 1 7 are holy installa-

in

South

India. river.

A s a c r e d hill n e a r K a r n a l , o n t h e b a n k o f K r s n . A place in M a d h y a Pradesh, the source of N a r m a d Modern Not Not Kannauja in Uttara Pradesh. N o t identifiable. identifiable. identifiable

N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable. Not Not Not Not identifiable. identifiable. identifiable. identifiable.

N o t identifiable N o t identifiable. N o t identifiable.

1.81.23 16.

249 K m a r p a 1 i s a holy p l a c e w h e r e g o d d e s s K m k h y

is the presiding deity. P u n d r a v a r d h a n a k a is a holy p l a c e where K r t t i k e y a is installed. 17. 18. accords 19. V i r a j a s 2 i s a g r e a t T i r t h a a s well a s n p u r u s o t t a m a . 3 Godvar boons. is a holy is river; Payosn is a river t h a t sins; M a h e n d r a i s a h o l y m o u n t a i n a n d K v e r i s a h o l y river. Vindhya holy mountain dispelling

N a r m a d a is an excellent holy river. G o k a r n a 4 i s a h o l y p l a c e ; s o i s t h e city o f M h i s m a t 5

6

a holy p l a c e ; K l a j a r a 20. Lord Visnu

is

a great T r t h a ;

ukratrtha7

is a

h o l y p l a c e t h a n w h i c h there i s n o o t h e r m o r e s a c r e d p l a c e . abides nearby, h e n c e t h e p l a c e affords s a l v a t i o n e v e n if a p e r s o n defiles it. 2 1 . Nanditrtha10 accords is b e y o n d that. 22. K r s n , Ven,
15

V i r a j a 8 is a h o l y p l a c e t h a t yielding fruits o f a

a c c o r d s everything; S v a r n k s a 9 is an excellent T r t h a . salvation c r o r e o f h o l y p l a c e s . N s i k y a 1 1 i s a holy p l a c e a n d G o v a r d h a n a 1 2 Bhmarath, Gandak13, Irvat14 are

h o l y rivers. B i n d u s a r a s V i s n u ' s feet f l o w s . 23. places;

is a sacred pool where water from L o r d

T h e m e d i t a t i o n on B r a h m a n is on a p a r with sacred

control of sense organs, subjugation of m i n d a n d purity

o f t h o u g h t h a v e a l s o o n a p a r w i t h these p l a c e s .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Modern Not

Assam.

identifiable. in the N o r t h - K a n a r a district of K a r n a t a k a . in north O n k a r M a n d h a t a north on the bank of N a r m a d a river. Mahes'vara, south of Indore in M a d h y a Pradesh.

M o d e r n Puri in Orissa. A place Identified

S o m e identify i t i n Not Not Not

T h e r e i s a hill a n d a fort o f this n a m e i n C e n t r a l I n d i a . identifiable. identifiable. identifiable. the same as the famous Nandigrma of the R m y a n a .

Probably

It is now known as Nandgaon, South of F y z a b a d in U t t a r a Pradesh. Modern Nsika in Maharastra. MostjDrobably some other Modern Modern Gandaka. Ravi. G o v a r d h a n a than the one near M a t h u r a .

N o t identifiable.

250 24. water of 25. He who takes a holy d i p i n the

Garuda

Parana-

T r t h a of M n a s a and the pure

t h a t h a s the e d d y o f

Jna

(pure

knowledge)

D h y n a (meditation)

that removes the dirt of R g a

(passion) a n d D v e s a (hatred) attains the s u p r e m e goal. T h e d e m a r c a t i o n o f p l a c e s p a r t i c u l a r l y h o l y o r otheris a holy p l a c e ; this is n o t . " He w h o identifies wise i s for o n l y those p e o p l e w h o d i f f e r e n t i a t e t h i n g s a n d p l a c e s saying " T h i s 26. e v e r y t h i n g w i t h B r a h m a n will n o t f i n d a p l a c e n o t h o l y . A l l rivers a n d a l l m o u n t a i n s a r e h o l y p l a c e s f r e q u e n t holy d i p , making gifts a n d these p l a c e s h a v e V i s n u ; T p is an great sacred ed by gods and others. T a k i n g a e n d l e s s benefit. 27. r r a g a 1 i s a holy p l a c e o f L o r d river. Territories excellent pious place. 28. t h e shrines
5

performance of S r d d h a and P i n d a d n a in

surrounding Godvar called

S a p t a g o d v a r a a r e holy p l a c e s a n d K o n a g i r i 2 i s a

T h e g r e a t river P r a n t f l o w i n g from S a h y d r i w i t h of Mahlaksm3, E k a v r a 4 , the lord of lords a n d

S u r e v a r , a r e t h e holiest o f holy. 29. H e w h o t a k e s a holy d i p i n G a g d v r a 6 , K u v a r t a 7 a n d K a n a k h a l a 8 , in the m o u n t a i n s of V i n d h y a a n d N l a p a r v a t a 9 ' is not born again. Sta said : 30. Hari, 31. attainment After h e a r i n g the After m e n t i o n i n g among Trthas d e t a i l s o f the T r t h a s from the T r t h a s he which spoke about Lord Gay

B r a h m a addressed Vysa, D a k s a a n d others. affords t o the devotee the

the foremost

o f B r a h m a l o k a for e v e r .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

T h e same as Shri-ranga-patanam Probably Not Not the temple

near in

Tirichinapalli in Tamilnadu.. in Orissa. KolhSpur in Maharastra.

Probably the place known as K o n r k a of Mahlaksm Goa. T h e temple of the G o d d e s s in identifiable. Haridvr. Saharanpur identifiable. Modern

Situated in Modern

District of U t t a r a

Pradesh.

Nilgiri.

1.82.11 CHAPTER EIGHTYTWO Greatness Brahma said 1. 2. 3-5. refuge in : of Gay

251

O V y s a , listen. I s h a l l n a r r a t e , in brief, t h e d e t a i l s of T h e r e was a d e m o n G a y a of great vitality. Devas, Lord scorched e x t r e m e l y b y his Once, he

the greatness of G a y . p e r f o r m e d a terrible p e n a n c e which scorched all living beings. austerity, took Visnu.

Lord Visnu said : "When my great body is felled, all of you iva shall be

experiencing, welfare w i t h i n . " T h e g o d s s a i d " S o b e i t . " T h e r e after, o n e d a y , h e c u l l e d lotuses for worship of from t h e Milk-ocean and brought them to K k a t a . T h e demon was delude d b y V i s n u ' s M y a n d i n s t e a d o f p r o c e e d i n g w i t h his w o r s h i p h e l a y d o w n a n d s l e p t . T h e n V i s n u killed h i m w i t h t h e m a c e . 6-7. with the Thenceforward, L o r d Visnu has been staying there mace lifted u p , r e a d y t o offer and salvation. Over the of that d e m o n , L o r d i v a , in the form V i s n u a n d B r a h m a too predeity d e m a r c a t e d the it would be a

purified m o r t a l remains of a liga (phallic sided there. boundaries holy p l a c e . 8. and

emblem)

L o r d V i s n u the p r i m o r d i a l of the place

and proclaimed that sacrifices,

A m a n who performs

rddha, Pindadna a n d the world

ceremonial 9.

b a t h s t h e r e will a t t a i n h e a v e n

of B r a h m a , never the hell. Understanding the holy c h a r a c t e r o f G a y , B r a h m a h i m s e l f p e r f o r m e d a sacrifice t h e r e a n d h o n o u r e d t h e b r a h m i n s who c a m e there as Rtviks. 10. The L o r d created a great stream of juice (of milk
1

a n d m i l k p r o d u c t s ) , p o n d s , e t c . a n d different t y p e s o f foodstuffs fruits, e t c . H e t h e n c r e a t e d t h e d i v i n e K m a d h e n u . 11. T h e land 15 kilometres all r o u n d the constituting the h o l y site o f G a y w a s g i v e n a s gift t o
1. T h e divine cow who

Brahmins.

fulfils a l l d e s i r e s .

252 12. 13. The T h e e a s y a c q u i s i t i o n o f the l a n d gift Y o u r l e a r n i n g will n o t riches flow with water and

Garuda

Purna

m a d e the brah-

m i n s c o m p l a c e n t . T h e n the b r a h m i n s were cursed. extend even to three generasuccessive milk. The t h i r d heir. mountains not tions. Y o u r will n o t s u r v i v e y o u r

r i v e r will 14.

will b e m e r e r o c k s ( n o t fruits a n d said : " T h o s e worlds and 15.

other edibles).

T h e cursed brahmins Brahma's abode. K n o w l e d g e o f the at G a y , death

pleaded a n d the lord relented

w h o p e r f o r m r d d h a h e r e , will a t t a i n holy I will c o n s i d e r m y s e l f w o r s h i p p e d supreme Brahman, performance and residence in

i f they w o r s h i p y o u . " of r d d h a 16. go unto this. 17. wife T h e f i v e g r e a t sins, v i z . with sinners the m u r d e r of a brahmin, preceptor's drinking wine, s t e a l i n g , illicit i n t e r c o u r s e w i t h t h e in a cowshed

K u r u k s e t r a t h e s e a r e t h e four w a y s o f a t t a i n i n g s a l v a t i o n . Holy o c e a n s , rivers, s a c r e d p o n d s , wells a n d e d d i e s T h e r e is no doubt about Gaytrtha for a h o l y d i p .

a n d association 18. Those attain It

are removed by performing not cremated duly, those

rddha at Gay. who die and are w h o are killed by a n i m a l s a n d dacoits, a n d those who die d u e to snake-bite them. 19. the i s difficult to explain in offering detail the greatness of at Gay benefits a c c r u i n g from food oblations salvation if G a y r d d h a is performed unto

e v e n in twenty crores of years.

CHAPTER

EIGHTYTHREE of Gay

Greatness Brahma said 1. : In the l a n d of K k a t a ,

G a y is

a great holy

place:

t h e forest o f R j a g r h a a n d t h e p l a c e s f r e q u e n t l y w a t e r e d b y t h e river a r e very holy.

1.83.14 2-3. the whole T o the east o f G a y i s the p l a c e and of this north it extends is a 15 Gayksetra manes place

253 Mundaprstha. In

west, s o u t h expanse to the

to 4 kilometres. kilometres. as grants from

The

T h e gift o f salvation. obligathe

oblations

satiates as well frees

E v e n a visit t o tion t o the kilometres 4. 5. 6. long. From By The

person

manes. T h e Gayairas (the head of G a y ) is three the mount Janrdana and the well known

m n a s a is Gayiras. It is called Phalgu-trtha. offering p i n d a t h e r e , lord of lords Visnu the m a n e s a r e freed. S i m p l y presides over G a y in the of three b y g o i n g t o G a y o n e i s freed o f m a n e ' s d e b t . form of M a n e s . 7. shrines 8. from deity) By visiting his shrine one at Gay i s freed

d e b t s (to g o d s , m a n e s , S e e i n g the

sages and guests). a n d visiting the Kedra of B r a h m a Prapitmaha a m a n b e c o m e s free one becomes (the free

main highway

of Rudra, Klevara and By visiting the shrine By seeing the

from the d e b t s to the m a n e s . all sins. 9. 10. shrines comes After primordial

o n e a t t a i n s r e g i o n free o f s i c k n e s s . kneeling devoutly before the lord G a d d h a r a , visiting silently the

M d h a v a a n d P u r u s o t t a m a , the m a n is not born again. O B r a h m i n S a g e ( V y s a ) ! By and Kanakrka of M a u n d i t y a free 11. Sandhy 12. 13. vara the noble, a m a n be-

from debts to the m a n e s . By worshipping B r a h m a up early in the morning if one performs

one attains B r a h m a ' s world. Getting a n d visits the s h r i n e o f G y a t r , o n e g e t s gods. shrine of Svitr in the m i d d a y , one of Sarasvat in one in the e v e n i n g By visiting the By visiting fruits top t h e fruit o f

visiting the shrines of all

g e t s t h e fruit o f a l l s a c r i f i c e s . the shrine one gets the on the 14. material By o f c h a r i t a b l e gifts. B y v i s i t i n g t h e s h r i n e o f of the lord mountain, Dharma b e c o m e s free f r o m Dharmranya the

debts to the m a n e s . visiting debts are wiped off. W h o i s n o t freed from b o n d a g e

by visiting the shrine of lord G r d h r e v a r a ?

254 15. enables goal. 16. By visiting the one's ancestors shrine to of Cow in

Garuda

Purna one

Dhenuvana

attain

B r a h m a l o k a . By visiting

lord Prabhsea in the

shrine P r a b h s a one attains the highest

B y v i s i t i n g t h e shrines o f K o t v a r a a n d A v a m e d h a debts are one wiped i s freed the lord freed off. B y v i s i t i n g t h e from the shrine of b o n d a g e of worldly

the material existence. 17.

Svargadvrevara

By visiting one one is

w i t h the m a c e visiting sin of the

in the shrine of the shrine murdering of a

Rmevara Brahmin. 18. tain

attains to heaven. By from

Brahmevara By

visiting t h e one

shrine of M a h c a n d in the attains all desires. By

mounthe

Mundaprstha

visiting

shrines o f P h a l g v a , P h a l g u c a n d , G a u r , M a g a l , 19. Similarly, by visiting and the shrines of

Gomaka Agrea, one be-

a n d l o r d G o p a t i o n e b e c o m e s free from d e b t s t o the m a n e s . Siddhea, Gayditya, c o m e s free from 20. 21. He Gaja Mrkandeyevara

d e b t s t o the m a n e s . holy p o n d of Phalgutrtha

A ceremonial b a t h in the

a n d a visit t o t h e s h r i n e o f G a d d h a r a , A r e t h e s e n o t sufficient for m e n o f m e r i t o r i o u s d e e d s ? ancestors rivers, upto the twentyfirst r e m o v e and lakes of the attain world m a k e s his 22. 23.

Brahmaloka. T h e holy oceans will b e c o m i n g t o P h a l g u t r t h a , o n c e every d a y . In the whole world, G a y is the holiest; in G a y , G a y i r a s is 24. the holiest spot a n d In gayiras the Phalgutrtha o f K a n a k a river i s N b h i t r t h a a n d i n

is the holiest since it constitutes the m o u t h of g o d s . To the north its m i d d l e i s t h e h o l y T r t h a c a l l e d B r a h m a s a d a s . A b a t h t h e r e in enables one to attain B r a h m a l o k a . 25. becomes 26. dha in After offering P i n d a ( f o o d - b a l l s ) etc. i n t h e well o n e free By from taking indebtedness the to the manes. in rddha at ancestors to Brahmaloka. ceremonial bath Harhsatrtha a A person who performs r d in G o m a k a takes

A k s a y a v a t a takes

m a n b e c o m e s free f r o m all sins.

Kotitrtha, Gayloka, Vaitaran and

ancestors u p t o the twenty first remove to the B r a h m a l o k a .

[.83.38 27. takes all 28. A person who performs r d d h a Somatrtha or in in

255 Brahmatrtha, Rmahrada

Rmatrtha,

Agneyatrtha,

ancestors to B r a h m a l o k a . A m a n who performs r d d h a in the U t t a r a - M n a s a ances-

i s not b o r n a g a i n ; a n d i n the D a k s i n a M n a s a takes his tors to the B r a h m a l o k a . 29. A m a n who performs T a r p a n a on the top A person who

of the hill performs

B h s m a m a k e s the m a n e s cross hell. 30. gelly loka. 31. Aindra, 32. A person who performs rddha A p e r s o n w h o after and cows, visits in taking

r d d h a i n G r d h r e v a r a b e c o m e s free f r o m d e b t s t o t h e m a n e s . his b a t h , gifts a w a y g i n of cow a n d performs seeds the shrine

D h e n u k r a n y a , takes

his ancestors to the B r a h m a rddha in the Trthas

Nara,

Vsava and

Vaisnava and

also i n M a h n a d Sandhy,

t a k e s his a n c e s t o r s t o t h e B r a h m a l o k a . A person who rddha performs ceremonial bath, Tarpana and i n the TthasGyatra, Svitra (and

S r a s v a t a takes his ancestors u p t o the h u n d r e d a n d f i r s t r e m o v e to the B r a h m a l o k a . 33. by With the m i n d Tarpana a b s o r b e d i n c o n t e m p l a t i n g his a n c e s to the m a n e s and gods he be will b e t o r s t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l p a s s t h r o u g h t h e cleft B r a h m a y o n i . T h e n performing 34. satiates 35. 36. today." 37. performing 38. A By taking the rddha person on ceremonial bath in a rock in Rmatrtha the and Prabhsa, manes freed f r o m t h e p a n g s o f b i r t h ( i . e . manes By forever. A h e will n o t who born again). rddha

By performing T a r p a n a in the T r t h a K k a j a g h he person performs of M a t a g a in D h a r m r a n y a r d d h a , etc. in attains heaven.

in the holy p o n d

performing

Dharmaypa and

K p a o n e b e c o m e s free f r o m d e b t s t o t h e m a n e s . He shall invoke g o d s by saying ' ' O G o d s ! ye be the I have performed rddha for m y ancestors witness u n t o t h i s .

though long departed can be m a d e liberated. who performs r d d h a in the holy T r t h a twentyfirst r e m o v e . S v a p u s t shall uplift h i s a n c e s t o r s u p t o t h e

A p e r s o n w h o p e r f o r m s r d d h a o n t h e hill M u n d a p r s t h a s h a l l l e a d his a n c e s t o r s t o t h e B r a h m a l o k a .

256 39.

Garuda

Purna

T h e r e i s n o s p o t i n G a y w h i c h i s n o t a holy T i r t h a . i n G a y k s e t r a , shall r e a p Brahmaloka. the P i n d a i n the h a n d o f i n thy h a n d . bless

A p e r s o n w h o offers P i n d a a n y w h e r e 40. 41. me." 42. It is certain The pilgrim shall place

e v e r l a s t i n g benefit a n d t a k e his a n c e s t o r s t o J a n r d a n a (the idol) saying

" O J a n r d a n a , I h a v e offered the P i n d a let

W h e n I go to the other world

everlasting liberation

t h a t h e will a t t a i n B r a h m a l o k a a l o n g

with his m a n e s . T h e o b l a t i o n s offered t o t h e m a n e s i n D h a r m a prstha, and Brahmasaras, in G a y and in 43. act of Aksayavata in G a y r s a shall be everlasting. Dharmranya, Dharmaprstha The and visiting Trthas,

Dhenukranya, 44. A n d performing Arghya to is to be the t h e m a n e s uplifts t w e n t y west of in the river M a y a the region of generations. B r a h m r a n y a 45-47. Mataga in rddha the

while in the east are B r a h m a s a d a s , N g d r i a n d B h a r a t r a m a . shall performed A r a m a of Bharata. Pnduil zone in the is T h e r e is the holy p l a c e t h e west situated. If one performs third d a y of the

called G a m p a k a v a n a to the south of G a y i r a a n d to of Mahnad. lunar fortnight 48. Trtya. who Heaven. 49. T o the north of K r a u c a p d a is There or r d d h a there in the benefit is s e c u r e d . T o the north o f V a i t a r a n T h e r e the sacred spot rddha there shall is of Nicir on the

sacred eddy of K a u i k everlasting the sacred pond called his a n c e s t o r s t o t h e the sacred pond

K r a u c a p d a is situated. O n e take

performs

N i c i r . E v e n a s i n g l e visit t o G a y a n d offering o f P i n d a o n c e i s rarely secured, then what of those who stay there permanently ? 50. lift his benefit If the pilgrim performs T a r p a n a i n M a h n a d for and upthe m a n e s a n d gods he family. If Sandhy performing is the performed same two for in the twelve Svitratrtha the years shall be of 51. acquired. 52. H e w h o s t a y s for fortnights (the bright a n d the shall a t t a i n e v e r l a s t i n g w o r l d s

1.83.64
d a r k ) i n G a y purifies his family u p t o t h e T h e r e i s n o d o u b t i n this. 53. 54. By seeing the seventh

257 generation.

three mountains M u n d a p r s t h a , A r a eclipse o c c u r s i n the m o n t h o f be offered i n G a y .

v i n d a a n d K r a u c a p d a , t h e p i l g r i m i s freed f r o m a l l sins. W h e n solar or lunar Makara (JanuaryFebruary) 55. seven A rddha in fruitful. person river who performs famous rddha where debts. the river By visitb e freed from m a t e r i a l Vil P i n d a shall

I t b e s t o w s r a r e m e r i t s a n d i s h i g h l y beneficent t o t h e p e o p l e . performed in M a h h r a d a (great-eddy) and in the cave of G r d h r a k t a is of Kauik, times 56. ing the A Mlaksetra

M h e v a r f l o w s shall holy o b t a i n s the 57. 58. be fruits

in the three worlds a m a n By performing r performs r d d h a in

o f A g n i s t o m a sacrifice. bath and

d d h a he shall go to heaven. A p e r s o n w h o takes S o m a p a d a shall d e r i v e t h e fruits o f V j a p e y a s a c r i f i c e . B y offering P i n d a s i n R a v i p d a t h e fallen s o u l s s h a l l The m a n e s consider desire for sons will g o themselves blessed with a uplifted. 59.

s o n i f h e g o e s t o G a y a n d offers food o b l a t i o n s . Fathers i n t h e i r fear o f falling i n t o to G a y a n d uplift u s " . excesHell thinking, " O n e of them sively j u b i l a n t . 60. o n e else 61. T h e y will think like this : " E i t h e r at some the son or s o m e t i m e o r other s h a l l offer u s w a t e r a t l e a s t b y t h e eterA person Pund-

O n s e e i n g t h e s o n w h o h a s r e a c h e d G a y the m a n e s a r e

wading through it in G a y k p a . " A pilgrim takes any one with that n a m e to shall a t t a i n the n a l B r a h m a n b y r e p e a t i n g w h i c h h e offers t h e P i n d a . w h o visits K o t i t r t h a arlka. 62. manes. 63. rddha, 64. T h e r e i s n o d o u b t i n this t h a t a p e r s o n w h o p e r f o r m s offers Pinda and makes a gift of a c o w uplifts his The river w h i c h i s r e n o w n e d i n t h e t h r e e w o r l d s a s in Gayksetra for t h e uplift of the Vaitaran has incarnated

Visnuloka called

ancestors to twenty one generations. I f a son g o e s to G a y sometime (after the d e a t h of

258

Garuda

Purna

h i s f a t h e r ) h e s h a l l feed t h e l o c a l b r a h m i n s w h o h a d b e e n a l l o t t e d that right b y B r a h m a . 65. 66. Their post is Brahmasadas. T h e s a m e is the post of S o m a p a s (drinkers o f S o m a j u i c e ) . T h e worship, r d d h a , e t c . shall be in the p l a c e assignIf they are honoured, honoured shall all the e d b y B r a h m a a n d t h e B r a h m i n s also shall b e those mentioned by B r a h m a . 67. according deities be along with the m a n e s . The to pilgrim straic shall propitiate the B r a h m i n s a t G a y injunctions by means of Havyas and for shedding The best p l a c e

K a v y a s (sacrificial 68.

foodstuffs).

the mortal body is G a y . T h e r e is no doubt in this t h a t h e w h o m a k e s t h e gift holy place, derives the of a bull in G a y k s e t r a , the unrivalled m e r i t of a h u n d r e d Agnistomas. 69. 70. whether 71. obtains bath An O intelligent Vysa, man c a n offer P i n d a u n t o h i m s e l f a s be offered t o all a t G a y , friends i n a c c o r d a n c e man u n t o others at G a y b u t without using gingelly seeds. Pindas shall cousins, ancestors kinsmen or

with Sstras. By taking the ceremonial bath at R m a t r t h a a the benefit of a gift o f h u n d r e d c o w s . By taking the

a t M a t a g a p o n d h e s h a l l g e t t h e benefit o f t h e gift o f a 72By taking the ceremonial b a t h at the confluence of Vasistha's

t h o u s a n d cows. N i c i r a m a n t a k e s his a n c e s t o r s t o B r a h m a l o k a ; a t h e r m i t a g e t h e benefit of V j a p e y a . 73. 74. on a par And by staying i n M a h k o for a y e a r h e g e t s t h e fruit o f A v a m e d h a ( H o r s e s a c r i f i c e ) . T h e r e is a holy river flowing from B r a h m a s a r a s which whole world. It is famous as A g n i d h r and is here derives the as fruit of Agniwith Kapil ( t h e divine cow that grants all b o o n s ) . i f o n e h a s fulfilled one gets sanctifies the

A person performing r d d h a all t a s k s . 75. By performing

s t o m a a n d b y t a k i n g b a t h h e r e o n e feels rddha in Having

Kumradhr

t h e fruit o f A v a m e d h a . h e will a t t a i n s a l v a t i o n .

reached L o r d

Subrahmanya

1.84.7 76. goes to

259
By taking the ceremonial b a t h in S o m a k u n d a a m a n the moon's world. A person giving Pindas in the

s a c r e d p o n d of Sariivarta shall be highly lucky. 77-78. off a l l his sins. ancestors. By A m a n offering Pindas i n P r e t a k u n d a shall w a s h Tirthas, Devaaccumulated T h o s e w h o offer bowing to lord P i n d a s in the Vasisthea all

n a d , L e l i h n a , M a t h a n a , J n u g a r t a k a a n d o t h e r s shall uplift a l l m a t e r i a l d e b t s shall b e l i q u i d a t e d .

CHAPTER

EIGHTYFOUR of Gay

Greatness Brahma said 1-2. :

I f a p e r s o n wishes t o p r o c e e d t o G a y , h e shall f i r s t straic injunctions. in only He shall

perform r d d h a according to to a n o t h e r v i l l a g e h e shall t a k e

t h e n d i s g u i s e h i m s e l f a n d g o r o u n d his v i l l a g e . T h e n p r o c e e d i n g w h a t i s left o v e r a f t e r D u r i n g his way rddha. of charity). 3-4. Gay E v e r y s t e p t h a t h e t a k e s after l e a v i n g his h o u s e t o w a r d s his a n c e s t o r s to ascend a step towards heaven. of tonsure a n d enables H e shall g o r o u n d that village a s well.

j o u r n e y t o G a y h e shall n e v e r t a k e P r a t i g r a h a ( m o n e y b y

W i t h r e g a r d t o other h o l y p l a c e s the i n j u n c t i o n and G a y i t d o e s not. 5-6. 7. acquired. rddha can be

f a s t i n g h o l d s g o o d ; b u t i n the c a s e o f K u r u k s e t r a , V i a l , V i r a j performed at G a y d u r i n g the d a y or night. A person performing r d d h a in V r n a s , o n a n a d a heaven. By going to U t t a r a m n a s a unrivalled achievement is performs r d d h a also a n d f r e q u e n t l y i n M a h n a d s h a l l t a k e his a n c e s t o r s t o T h e pilgrim who takes b a t h a n d

t h e r e shall a c q u i r e a l l his d e s i r e s m u n d a n e a n d d i v i n e a n d the m e a n s to achieve salvation.

260 8. fold d e b t s . 9-10. To the north After reaching the

Garuda D a k s i n a m n a s a he place he

Purna

s h a l l offer

P i n d a , e t c . silently.

At that

s h a l l w i p e off t h e t h r e e -

of M u n d a p r s t h a there is the holy by illustrious serpents pleas-

p l a c e n a m e d K a n a k h a l a famous in the three worlds, frequented by devas and sages a n d infested i n g t o t h e S i d d h a s a n d terrific t o the s i n n e r s , h o r r i b l e i n a p p e a r a n c e a n d p u t t i n g o u t their u n s p l i t t o n g u e s . 11. By taking b a t h there one goes to everlasting. h e a v e n ; the rdSun d h a performed there is this : 12-13. " O y e deities o f m a n e s , K a v y a v h a , A g n i s v t t a s , your protection I have to all come here to G a y all Barhisads, Somapas, S o m a , Y a m a and Aryaman, do come, you noble S i r s ; with desiring kinsmen 14. to offer Pindas offering of my ancestors a n d to After b o w i n g t o the

a n d p e r f o r m i n g P i n d a d n a a n d o t h e r h o l y r i t e s h e s h a l l s a y like

born in the family." After P i n d a s in Phalgutrtha he H e shall s h a l l visit from b e freed

lord P i t m a h a a n d then G a d d h a r a . indebtedness to the m a n e s . 15. By taking bath the devotee in

Phalgutrtha

and save

visiting lord himself, t e n first day.

Gaddhara 16.

shall immediately

g e n e r a t i o n s g o n e b e f o r e a n d ten g e n e r a t i o n s y e t t o c o m e . I h a v e mentioned the p r o g r a m m e for t h e to Dharmranya and he O n the second d a y h e shall g o 17. 18. 19. Ypa By visiting perform

P i n d a d n a , etc. in the sacred p o n d of M a t a g a . Dharmranya w i l l d e r i v e t h e fruit he will derive the of Vjapeya. In the holy T r t h a of Brahma fruit o f R j a s y a a n d A v a m e d h a . r d d h a a n d P i n d o d a k a i n the m i d d l e o f K p a a n d be done with the water of the well. What is shall 20. bath and 21.

offered t o t h e m a n e s s h a l l b e e n d l e s s . O n the third d a y h e shall g o t o perform Tarpana, rddha and Brahmasadas, Pindadna in take the

m i d d l e o f K p a ( w e l l ) a n d Y p a (Sacrificial s t a k e ) . T h e brahmins ordained by B r a h m a are By honouring and staying near shall Gopracra. serving t h e m the m a n e s

1.84.33
attain salvation. 22-23. etc. Then

261
After g o i n g r o u n d t h e s a c r i f i c i a l s t a k e h e s h a l l

d e r i v e t h e fruit o f V j a p e y a . O n the fourth d a y h e shall t a k e b a t h , p e r f o r m T a r temple of L o r d R u d r a Indu (Moon) O Vysa, he s h a l l offer P i n d a s i n P a c g n i (five p a n a a n d r d d h a i n G a y i r a i n the fires) and worship

the t h r e e g o d s S r y a , ( S u n )

a n d K r t t i k e y a . T h e r d d h a thus performed shall b e everlasting. 24-25. deities. The rddha may in be for n i n e d e i t i e s the or twelve

During

the A n v a s t a k

days (i. e.

ninth day of of At

t h e l u n a r fortnights

Pausa, M g h a and Phlguna months), the mother.

d u r i n g V r d d h i (i. e . i n t h e b r i g h t f o r t n i g h t s ) o r o n t h e d a y d e a t h s e p a r a t e r d d h a i s p e r f o r m e d h e r e for

other places the r d d h a has to be performed alongwith father's. 26. Pitmaha again. 27. three soil). 28. gods. A t G a y i r a , t h e b a l l s o f o b l a t i o n s h a l l b e o f t h e size o f a a m p a t r a ( the leaf o f a m t r e e ) . T h e n the m a n e s b e c o m e N o o n e need worry a b o u t this. 29. L o r d M a h d e v a o f g r e a t i n t e l l e c t h a s set foot o n t h e By performing even a small penance he By performing r d d h a in G a y i r a a m a n obtains the m a k i n g a gift o f a l a n d e n d o w e d w i t h t h e to water, and g o o d o f w e a l t h (fertility, n e a r n e s s s a m e as obtained by kinds By taking bath in Davamedha and touching the a n d visiting Lord feet o f R u d r a a m a n i s n o t b o r n

hill M u n d a p r s t h a . 30. Gayira. 31. and offer 32.

shall acquire great merit. T h o s e w h o a r e i n h e l l will g o t o h e a v e n a n d t h o s e i n l i b e r a t i o n i f h e n a m e s t h e m a n d offers P i n d a s i n bath in Gadlola He shall heaven attain

O n t h e f i f t h d a y h e shall t a k e his Pindas at the foot o f t h e

B a n y a n tree.

t h e r e b y e n a b l e t h e e n t i r e f a m i l y o f his a n c e s t o r s t o c r o s s h e l l . At the root of the B a n y a n tree even if a single b r a h a n d hot water it is as good as m i n i s fed w i t h v e g e t a b l e d i s h e s feeding a crore. 33. A t A k s a y a v a t a h e shall p e r f o r m r d d h a a n d s e e t h e

262 Primordial deity. 34. bull. 35.

Garuda

Purna

H e shall attain everlasting worlds a n d uplift

a hundred generations. M a n y s o n s a r e t o b e w i s h e d for. A t l e a s t o n e o f t h e m m a y g o t o G a y o r p e r f o r m A v a m e d h a o r m a k e a gift o f a d a r k A ghost once addressed a certain m e r c h a n t " P l e a s e my n a m e at Gayira. I shall be liberated

offer P i n d a s i n heaven." 36.

f r o m t h e s t a t e o f a g h o s t a n d t h e g i v e r o f t h e P i n d a s shall a t t a i n T h e m e r c h a n t o n h e a r i n g t h a t offered and thereafter offered t h e younger brothers. Vila the was offerer o f the with a son. I have There a prince in Pinda to the

chief of ghosts alongwith the 37. Pindas

s a m e t o his m a n e s

All of them were liberated a n d

was blessed "How

country of Vil n a m e d Vila. 38. can

He addressed sons ? "

the Brahmins. The prince red

T h e brahmins replied,

" B y offering P i n d a s i n G a y y o u will h a v e s o n s " . V i l a offered P i n d a s i n 39. and He saw in black in colour 40. father. 41. been Avci t h e sky three h u m a n

G a y a n d was blessed with sons. s h a p e s white, are you ? " . T h e white

and said " W h o

o n e from a m o n g t h e m loka due to

replied to Vila. I attained Indrathis r e d o n e i s m y S o m e sages h a d Pindas both deeds. My son,

" I a m the white o n e , your father. meritorious black one Both

He is a g r e a t sinner, a m u r d e r e r of a B r a h m i n . This is my grandfather. of them had killed by him. fallen i n t o t h e h e l l

( R a y l e s s ) . N o w that you 42.

h a v e offered t h e

of them have been liberated. N o w that we have been liberated, we are proceeding V i l a w h o w a s satisfied [The ruled the k i n g d o m (for "Let all the and the rite died in to H e a v e n . " 43-48. manes Udaka ofCd born, who salvation. Father, in our

s o m e time) a n d attained heaven. devotee shall r e p e a t t h u s ] . had who died in family who rites, been deprived of Pinda infancy without

(water) had Let

(ceremonial

c u t t i n g o f f o r e l o c k s ) , w h o h a d b e e n still

not been duly cremated and who had these

f l a m e s , b e satisfied w i t h t h e P i n d a s offered i n t h e E a r t h a n d a t t a i n P i n d a s deliver everlastingly all these : great grandfather, mother, paternal grandfather,

1 .85.10 grand mother, paternal father, m a t e r n a l g r a n d maternal great great-grand mother, mother maternal

263 grandgrand

father, m a t e r n a l g r e a t grandfather

maternal great-great maternal great

grandmother,

great g r a n d m o t h e r a n d other kinsmen.

CHAPTER

EIGHTYFIVE of Gay

Greatness Brahma said 1. (holy : taking bath

After

in Pretail, the

etc., with the nectar shall invoke the

water) 2.

of Varunatrtha

pilgrim

m a n e s w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g m a n t r a s a n d offer P i n d a s . " W i t h g i n g e l l y s e e d s a n d holy w a t e r , I i n v o k e g r a s s all I offer those this this this in our on this Darbha 3. 4. 5. 6. or others. 7. I offer this P i n d a weapon. to those who c o m m i t t e d suicide by means or poisoned to death or h a n g i n g themselves or by other killed with a n y 8. family w h o h a v e not a t t a i n e d

s a l v a t i o n after d e a t h . P i n d a t o uplift a l l t h o s e w h o d i e d i n m y P i n d a t o uplift a l l t h o s e i n m y m a t e r n a l Pinda to uplift a l l t h o s e w h o died in father's family a n d mother's family. I offer I offer g r a n d f a t h e r ' s family who h a v e not a t t a i n e d s a l v a t i o n . i n f a n c y w i t h o u t c u t t i n g t h e f i r s t t o o t h o r w h o w e r e still b o r n . T h i s P i n d a is assigned to those kinsmen clan) are whose n a m e s a n d G o t r a (spiritual forgotten whether i n m y g o t r a

I offer this P i n d a t o t h o s e w h o d i e d i n a n i n c i d e n t o f

a r s o n , o r w e r e k i l l e d b y lions o r t i g e r s o r s h a r p - t e e t h e d a n i m a l s or horned beasts. 9. 10. consigned I offer this I offer this Pinda Pinda to to those uplift who were cremated those who have or n o t , w h o were electrocuted or killed by dacoits. been t o the h e l l s R a u r a v a , A n d h a t m i s r a a n d K l a s t r a

after d e a t h .

264 11. death. 12. tured and 13. 14. Yama. 15. society 16. I offer this P i n d a to t h o s e become to region). I offer this P i n d a t o t h o s e who I offer this tormented I

Garuda

Purna

offer this P i n d a t o uplift t h o s e w h o h a v e b e e n c o n Asipatravana a n d K u m b h p k a after

f i n e d t o t h e t e r r i b l e hells

P i n d a to uplift t h o s e w h o a r e b e i n g tor(by Y a m a ) in the Pretaloka (Infernal

h a v e been b o r n as b e i n g tor-

beasts, birds, worms, reptiles or trees. I offer this P i n d a to uplift? those w h o a r e in innumerable ways at tured and tormented the bidding of

w h o m b i r t h in h u m a n

has

difficult o f a c c e s s d u e t o t h e i r a c t i o n s a n d

who a r e born a n d reborn in countless other species. Let a l l t h o s e b e s a t i a t e d with this offer o f P i n d a forwhether of mine they were kinsmen in be satiated in the forever state of ever whether kinsmen or not or my previous birth or not. 17. Ghosts. 18-20. L e t this P i n d a offered b y m e g o for e n d l e s s b e n e f i t u n t o all t h o s e w h o w e r e b o r n i n m y f a t h e r ' s f a m i l y , m o t h e r ' s f a m i l y o r t h o s e o f p r e c e p t o r ' s , father-in-law o r k i n s m e n o r o t h e r kinsmen who are dead, those who have been deprived of P i n d a d n a , t h o s e w h o h a d n o sons o r wives, t h o s e w h o h a d n o t p e r f o r m e d a n y rites, t h o s e w h o h a d b e e n b o r n b l i n d , t h o s e w h o w e r e l a m e , those 21-22. others bear Let who were deformed or those who died in the w o m b whether known to me or not. D e v a s b e a r witness, I have to let B r a h m a , and na and have perrites witness. come to G a y L e t a l l those a n c e s t o r s b y this offer o f P i n d a a n d those w h o a r e still

formed the obsequies. for m a n e s I h a v e c o m e 23. Aksayavata Kuruksetra. In Gay, o f all

O G a d d h a r a , for Gay.

p e r f o r m i n g the

B e m y witness t o d a y . I a m Brahmasaras Dharmranya, that of

now absolved of my three d e b t s . " the sanctity of M a h n a d , Gayiras, these Sarasvat, is holy spots, Prabhsa,

Dhenuprstha,

equal to

3.86.12 CHAPTER EIGHTYSIX Greatness of Gay brahm said 1-2. : The spot famous

265

as Pretail has three sections in

P r a b h s a , Pretakunda a n d G a y s u r a i r a s . T h i s rocky p r o m o n t o r y i s h e l d aloft b y is conducive friends 3. 4. Gaysura 5. ponds 6. Krauca 7. latent divine Aravinda all devas. H e n c e , here sages, kings a n d queens perform r d d h a T h e y have attained Brahmaloka too. rock at the place where t h e skull o f t h e d e m o n It is also presided as M u n d a p r s t h a . The o n that rock. to or kinsmen D h a r m a a n d is called Pretail because it their who b e c o m e ghosts. It is presided over by t h e p r o s p e r i t y ^ n d uplift o f t h o s e m e n ,

fell i s k n o w n At the

o v e r b y all d e v a s . foot o f t h e m o u n t a i n M u n d a p r s t h a t h e r e a r e etc. overgrown" and in A r a v i n d a forest partially hidden by Brahmasaras forest. The hill m a r k e d b y t h e feet o f a K r a u c a p d a which and others a r e bird (akin to The heron) is called deities

enables t h e p i l g r i m t o a t t a i n B r a h m a l o k a . primordial stone idols. idol Gaddhara in the 8-9. ingless and H e n c e , the rock is buried company saturated with u n d e r its heavy

presence. The of G a d d h a r a in the the beginn-

weight the h e a d of the d e m o n G a y a a n d gradually a n d endless devas lord H a r i other 10-11. (fish), Vmana

of M a h r u d r a

b e c a m e m a n i f e s t i n i t for t h e p r e s e r v a t i o n o f

v i r t u e a n d d e s t r u c t i o n o f evil. T h e L o r d V i s n u took t h e i n c a r n a t i o n s o f M a t s y a (boar) Nrhari Paraurma, for t h e (Man-lion), son of destruction of the powerful Rma K r m a (tortoise), V a r h a (Dwarf) Krsna, Buddha

Daaratha

and Kalki

demons a n d o g r e s . 12. because he The

In the s a m e way is

the manifest and u n m a n i called di (primordial)

fest f o r m o f t h e p r i m o r d i a l had been

Gaddhara.

deity G a d d h a r a

worshipped by lords B r a h m a n d others

-with P d y a , f r a g r a n t f l o w e r s i n t h e b e g i n n i n g .

266 13-18. He who, after v i s i t i n g other

Garuda the shrine of the gods, makes

Purna primor-

dial G a d d h a r a (food clothes, various offerings)

a l o n g with the of the

an

offer-

ing of Arghya, Pdya, fragrant flowers, incense, l a m p , N a i v e d y a h i g h e s t s o r t , different s o r t s o f g a r l a n d s , mirrors, get ornaments, Pinda and grains, longevity, the to wealth, crown, bell, chowries, foodstuffs, i s sure

h e a l t h , b l e s s i n g s o f s o n s a n d c h i l d r e n , all k i n d s o f r i c h e s , l e a r n ing, all desires, g o o d return from murder heaven a wife, e n j o y m e n t i n h e a v e n a n d after flourishing kingdom, nobility of birth, Those

Sttvika qualities, defeat of enemies in the battle, freedom from and bondage rddha who a n d f i n a l l y will a t t a i n l i b e r a t i o n . and who perform 19. and attain 20. ttamarja, cestors. 21. (Ganea) 22. sickness. brilliance. 23. By adoring Revanta the pilgrim obtains excellent horses; by worshipping I n d r a g r e a t riches a n d by G a u r g o o d fortune. 24. 25. desires. 26. affected 27. By worshipping the eight serpents o n e will n o t one be by serpent By bite; by worshipping Balabhadra Brahma shall B y worshipping learning, S a r a s v a t , L a k s m , r a n d By worshipping Ksetrapla o n e i s freed from evil G a r u d a one is extricated from n u m e r o u s obstacles. planets and by worshipping M u n d a p r s t h a one shall obtain all worshipping By bowing down to K a p a r d i n ( i v a ) , a n d Vighnea one By By is freed from all obstacles. suns one is one gets By worshipping f r o m all excellent offer P i n d a will g o t o B r a h m a l o k a Balabhadra and Subhadr

a l o n g with their a n c e s t o r s . Those worship shall a c q u i r e strength, welfare, knowledge, w e a l t h a n d children Purusottama. Offering the S u n of Pinda and to the m a n e s in front o f P u r u s o G a n e a yields B r a h m a l o k a t o the a n -

K r t t i k e y a he shall attain B r a h m a l o k a . w o r s h i p p i n g twelve worshipping freed an Vaivnara

attain Brahmaloka. worshipping one shall get strength a n d h e a l t h : b y w o r s h i p p i n g S u b h a d r one gets g o o d luck.

1.86.40 28. 29. it one Earth. 30. By touching idols of two V i d y d h a r a s Vidydhara.

267 By worshipping P u r u s o t t a m a one obtains all desires. men. By touching the idol of Narasirhha a n d worshipping victorious in battle. By worshipping V a r h a over the whole whoever o n e Boar) one acquires suzerainty

By worshipping N r y a n a one b e c o m e s lord of becomes

(the divine

may be, becomes a 31. 32. t o others 33. By

By worshipping the p r i m o r d ivaloka. delightful

ial G a d d h a r a o n e attains all desires. worshipping Somantha one obtains By bowing Rudrevara one is honoured in R u d r a l o k a . By bowing to R m e v a r a a m a n becomes like Lord R m a . By worshipping Brahmevara a n d in Brahmaloka. the g o d in ivaloka. m a n conquers

reciting prayers one becomes competent to be By worshipping K l e v a r a a of death; by

worshipping K e d r a one is honoured

B y w o r s h i p p i n g S i d d h e v a r a o n e s h a l l b e c o m e a S i d d h a a n d goto Brahmapura. 34. the By visiting the Primordial a Gaddhara m a n is a l o n g with uplift a primordial R u d r a 35-36. a n d others a b l e to

hundred generations a n d lead them to B r a h m a p u r a . By worshipping the p r i m o r d i a l G a d d h a r a a m a n acquire it; a shall acquire a realm the it a n d m a n desirous salvation; a and a m a n primordial a woman, a woman one gift o f of all if a p a s s i o n a t e m a n shall a c q u i r e desirous of D h a r m a (virtue) shall o f w e a l t h shall a c q u i r e w e a l t h ; love; m a n desirous 37. By of a k i n g d o m approaching a m a n desirous of salvation

shall a c q u i r e and

d e s i r o u s o f t r a n q u i l l i t y s h a l l a c q u i r e it. worshipping G a d d h a r a a w o m a n desirous d e s i r o u s o f blissful 38. By m a r r i e d life the of sons shall get s o n s ; shall a c q u i r e primordial

d e s i r o u s of a f l o u r i s h i n g f a m i l y s h a l l a t t a i n it. worshipping water. Gaypur is the most excellent entire and all excellent of world idols a r e Gaddhara obtains the B r a h m a l o k a even as by r d d h a , P i n d a d n a , f o o d a n d gift o f c o o l 39-40. Just as

T r t h a s in the world so also G a d d h a r a is the m o s t all s a c r e d idols. Gaddhara is seen virtually seen. Since the Gaddhara entire sacred is the spot

268 CHAPTER EIGHTYSEVEN The fourteen Hari said: 1. such as 2. 3. juice) 4. Manus. I shall e n u m e r a t e the fourteen uka. The Svyambhuva seven sages are Manu is Manus

Garuda

Purna

M a n u s a n d their the first

sons

a m o n g the

A g n d h r a a n d o t h e r s a r e his s o n s . M a r c i , Atri, Agiras, Pulastya, Soma

Pulaha, K r a t u a n d the brilliant Vasistha. T h e s e four a r e c a l l e d S o m a p y i n s ( d r i n k e r s o f : J a y a , Amita, uka Vmadeva who and Yma. The the foregoing twelve universe was

are collectively called D v d a a k a G a n a . enjoyed entire elected I n d r a ( d u r i n g this M a n v a n t a r a i . e . p e r i o d o f r e g i m e o f

M a n u a n d his d y n a s t y ) . T h e d e m o n B s k a l i w a s his e n e m y . H e w a s k i l l e d b y V i s n u w i t h his S u d a r a n a d i s c u s . 5-7. Brhadguna, seven sages The and were second Caitraka, rja, Manu was Svrocisa. Karnnta, strength Prna, H i s sons were Vidyuta, Ravi, Mandalevara, Vinata, great Stamba,

N a b h a of

and exploit. T h e Rsabha, Nicula, together

Dambholi and 8.

Arvavira.

The Tusitas

and Prvatas

constituted the D v d a a k a G a n a . V i p a c i t w a s elected as I n d r a of the d e v a s . His enemy was the d e m o n P u r u k r t s a r a w h o m L o r d M a d h u s d a n a killed i n the guise of an elephant. 9. The sons of the third Manu, Subala, A u t t a m a were : Aja uci, Deva, Devwere : Rathaujas, Parau, Vinta, 10. 11. ivas, Suketu, Sumitra,

v r d h a , M a h o t s h a a n d Ajita, O R u d r a . T h e s e v e n s a g e s d u r i n g his r e g i m e T h e Five D e v a g a n a s were and Pratardanas. Urdhvabhu, arana, Anagha, Muni, Sutapas and aku. Vaavarti, Svadhmans, with the seven sages Satyas 12. his e n e m y These

constituted the D v d a a k a G a n a . Svanti was was elected I n d r a during this r e g i m e a n d Visnu in his inthe d e m o n The sons Pralamba. Lord fourth

carnation as fish killed him. 13-16. were of the Manu named Tmasa :Jnujagha, Nirbhaya, Navakhyti, N a y a , Priyabhrtya,

1.87.31 Viviksipa, Havuskadhi, Prastalksa, The giant Krtabandhu and

269 Krta.

T h e seven sages were J y o t i r d h r , Dhrstakvya, Gaitra, C e t g n i , Hemaka, S u r g a and I n d r a a n d his Tortoise. 17-18. T h e sons o f t h e f i f t h M a n u Niramitra, Vedar, were R a i v a t a were M a h Pratyaga, Parah, Vedabhu, rdhvaAbhtarajas, D e v was elected I n d r a . the guise of a prna, Sdhaka, Vanabandhu, 19. T h e seven sages were enemy killed Svadhiya. was by the four H a r i s t o g e t h e r w i t h ibi was elected giant incarnation as Bhmaratha. This o t h e r s c o n s t i t u t e d t h e twentyfive D e v a t g a n a s . Bhmaratha was Lord

Visnu in His

uci, Drdhavrata and Keturga. bhu, Hiranyaroman, Parjanya, Satyanman and S v a d h m a n . 20-21. T h e four D e v a t g a n a s vamedhas, Vaikuntha and Amrta. teen in the G a n a . V i b h u of great The demon ntaatru Swan. 22-23. T h e sons o f t h e s i x t h M a n u G k s u s a w e r e : r u , atadyumna who performed penances, Svadhman, deities. They Pru of great strength, was T h e s e w e r e a l t o g e t h e r fourexploits Visnu in

killed by

S a t y a b h u , K r t i , Agnisnu, Atirtra, S u d y u m n a and N a r a . T h e seven sages w e r e : H a v i s m n , S u t a n u the glorious, Viraja, Abhimana, Sahisnu and Madhur. 24. 25. T h e r e were five g a n a s e a c h with eight Manojava was elected was Indra killed b y and were Aryas, Prastas, Bhvyas, Lekhas and Prthukas. his enemy w a s Visnu in the M a h k l a of long arms. g u i s e of a h o r s e . 26-28. were great aryti, T h e sons o f devotees Havisyanta, of the seventh were Nabhas, M a n u Vaivasvata who N b h a , Visti, Karsa, Nedistha, Visnu Pmu, : Iksvku, He Lord

Prsadhra and Sudyumna. 29. fortynine 30. 31.

T h e seven

sages were Atri, V a s i s t h a Vivmitra. There were

the dignified, J a m a d a g n i , K a y a p a , Gautama, Bharadvja and Maruts. T h e Adityas, V a s u s and S d h y a s together constituted The Rudras were eleven as in number, V a s u s were and Vivedevas were

the D v d a a k a G a n a . eight; the Avins are stipulated two

ten i n n u m b e r . T h e A n g i r a s were also ten a n d nine D e v a g a n a s .

270 32. Tejasvin was elected Indra.

Garuda Hiranyksa

Purna was his

enemy. T h i s d e m o n was killed by L o r d V i s n u in H i s incarnation a s the B o a r . 33. will I s h a l l n o w e n u m e r a t e t h e future M a n u s ( a n d Arvavra, their sons a n d f o l l o w e r s ) . T h e sons o f t h e e i g h t h M a n u n a m e d S v a r n i be Vijaya, 34. 35. 36. 37. for three 38. descendant s o n s will be salvation. Listen : to the names o f the sons of D a k s a s v a r n i of Varuna. He Dhrstiketu, seven will b e the n i n t h o f M a n u s . T h e Dptiketu, will Pacahasta, Nirkrti, Nirdeha, Satyavk, Krti, Varistha, Avatthm, K r p a , Vysa, Sutapas and Amrtbhas; Garistha, V c a and Sagati. T h e s e v e n s a g e s will b e : T h e c h i e f d e i t i e s will be Glava, Dptimn, Rsyarga and R m a . t h e i r g a n a s a r e twenty i n e a c h . V i r o c a n a ' s son B a l i will b e e l e c t e d I n d r a . After g i v i n g his r e a l m t o V i s n u steps, h e will forsake w h o will b e b e g g i n g and achieve his I n d r a - h o o d

Prthuravas, Brhaddyumna, Rcka, Brhata and G u n a . 39-40. Sabala, observing Vasu, their The sages be Medhtithi, Dyuti, three will b e strictly Jyotismn, duties. Havya and K a v y a . Vibhu, Marci The will b e t h e e n e m y o f g o d s . of the will sons of the tenth

a n d G a r b h a will

be elected I n d r a . Klakksa the n a m e s They

L o r d P a d m a n b h a will kill h i m . 41-42. Bhrirenya Listen to the virile, Manu, Dharmaputra. will b e Suksetra, Uttamaujas, enemies, will

atnka who

have no

Vrsasena, Jayadratha, Bhridyumna 43. 44. T h e seven sages will be

and

Suvarcas. nti

b e e l e c t e d I n d r a . H e will b e v a l o r o u s . :Apomrti, Havismn, Sukrta, Avyaya, L b h a g a , Apratima and S a u r a b h a . T h e h u n d r e d P r n a s will c o n s t i t u t e t h e D e v a t g a n a s . I shall tell y o u t h e n a m e s o f t h e Manu. They Puru, sons of i\udraB a l i will b e t h e e n e m y w h o m l o r d H a r i will kill w i t h his m a c e . 45-48. man, p u t r a the eleventh Devnka, will b e S a r v a t r a g a , S u a r -

Guru, Ksetravarna, Drdhesu, Ardraka Vihagamas (skywande-

a n d P u t r a k a . T h e s a g e s will b e H a v i s m n , H a v i s y a , V a r u n a , Viva, Vistara, V i s n u and Agnitejas. rers) K m a g a m a s (Going as they pleased) Nirmnarucis and

1.87.64
E k a i k a r u c i s will c o n s t i t u t e t h e G a n a s . Indra. kill h i m . 49-50. twelfth M a n u . Daagrva will be the V r s a will b e

271 elected as

e n e m y . T h e lord rrpin will

Listen to the n a m e s of the sons of D a k s a p u t r a , the T h e y will b e D e v a v n , Upadeva, Devarestha, Mitra-

V i d r a t h a , M i t r a v n , M i t r a d e v a , M i t r a b i n d u t h e virile, vha and Pravha. 51. 52. 53. The seven sages will

be Tapasvin, Sutapas, T a p o duties, noble Harita, Indra.

mrti, T a p o r a t i , Tapodhrti, T a p o d y u t i a n d T a p o d h a n a . Sutapas who will b e o b s e r v i n g t h e elected as R o h i t a , a n d S u r r i s constitute the g a n a s each consisting o f ten. R t a d h m a n will b e their T r a k a will 54-57. dharmarata, will be b e their e n e m y . L o r d H a r i a s s u m i n g the form o f a K n o w from me the n a m e s of the sons of be or Citrasena, steady, Vicitra, Dhrti, Sunetra and Ksetravrtti. the firm Raucya TapoAvyaya,

e u n u c h will kill h i m , O a k a r a . t h e t h i r t e e n t h M a n u . T h e y will Dharmapa

T h e seven sages The ganas Svakarmans will great of a the

Dhrtimn,

Nirpa, Nirutsuka, Nirmna, and will b e c o n s t i t u t e d b y a n d A m a r a s consisting be elected 58. peacock. 59. Grha, 60. 61. thas, sections. 62-64. Visnu though u c i will b e e l e c t e d Indra Lord demon. Mdhava will kill Svaromans, of enemy thirtythree

Tattvadarin. Svadharmans, will be

sections. D i v a s p a t i Istibha in

a n d the

him

the guise

Listen to They will

t h e n a m e s o f t h e s o n s o f B h a u t y a t h e fourbe : r u , Pravra, sages Gabhira, Dhrsta, Tarasvin, Tejasvin, Agnibhu,

teenth M a n u from m e . Abhimnin, The seven Jisnu, will Sarhkrandana,

and Durlabha. be :Agndhra, M g a d h a , uci, Ajita, M u k t a a n d u k r a . T h e s e f i v e constitute the g a n a s C k s u s a s , K a r m a n i s Bhrjins and Vcvrthas, each having seven Pavitras,

Indra.

His

enemy

will

be

t h e d e m o n M a h d a i t y a . L o r d H a r i will H i m s e l f kill h i m .

Lord

s i n g l e b y H i m s e l f will a s s u m e t h e f o r m a s V y s a

272 a n d write the constitute vistara, the Purnas six and propagate them.

Garuda Eighteen

Purna lores-

Agas,

the four V e d a s , M i m m s , Ayurveda,

Nyya-

Purnas,

Dharmastras,

Arthastra,

Dhanurveda and Gandharva (musicology).

CHAPTER

EIGHTYEIGHT

Story of Ruci Sta said : 1. Brahma L o r d H a r i n a r r a t e d the M a n v a n t a r a s and others. The sage to Lord iva,

Mrkandeya Listen to that.

narrated to

K r a u c u k i t h e h y m n o f the M a n e s . Mrkandeya 2. ment said : elderly

Formerly, Ruci, an world, was well-nigh the sage

sage,

free

from whom

attachMy in

t o the

d e v o i d o f e g o t i s m a n d for

(Ignorance) 3.

p u t t o rest, w a s r o a m i n g a b o u t

the world here a n d there. Seeing not nursing the sacrificial fires, not not in fulfilling the duties satisfied w i t h of a life) a n d staying in a permanent rama abode, (stage

(householder's)

s i n g l e m e a l ( a n y w h e r e ) , his a n c e s t o r s a d d r e s s e d h i m . The been Manes said 4-5. since it manes, higher 6. deities; entered is the : Son, wherefore has the holy it is a wedlock not into by y o u ? Of course b i n d i n g fetter deities, the the by

"Dear

b r i d g e that unites H e a v e n suppliants

and earth. Hence, a shall attain

householder performing d u e a n d deserving hospitality to sages and worlds. By repeating S v h , the by repeating Svadh he householder propitiates without meat,

propitiates the manes,

gifts o f f o o d h e p r o p i t i a t e s s e r v a n t s a n d g u e s t s .

1.88.18 7. after d a y . 8. O mortal Sage ! Y o u t o o h a v e fallen i n t o t o all l i v i n g

273 a bondage beings d a y

by incurring debts to gods, to us a n d

Without begetting sons, without performing T a r p a n a s

t o t h e m a n e s a n d w i t h o u t s h a v i n g off y o u r h e a d ( i n S a n n y s a ) h o w c a n y o u w i s h for h e a v e n ? 9. O s o n , k n o w t h a t o n l y p a i n will b e f a l l you and that too by y o u r unjustifiable a c t . o r suffer p a i n i n t h e n e x t b i r t h . Ruci said : 10. 11. there W e d l o c k is c o n d u c i v e to g r e a t e r distress, sin o r fall. H e n c e I d i d not m a r r y sire. O n e is held in suspense by a m o m e n t a r y consultation; to b e n o w a y o u t for s a l v a t i o n ; t h i s will b e t h e multifarious A the seems 12-13. I f y o u die, either y o u g o t o hell

r e s u l t if I e n t e r i n t o m a t r i m o n y . T h e soul which is tarnished by the to be washed on acts of innumerable births has by the water of

k n o w l e d g e of r e a l i t y w i t h a full c u r b feeling

the sense-organs.

s o u l free f r o m t h e ties o f w e d l o c k m a y still b e t a i n t e d w i t h of " m y - n e s s " a n obsession of possession. b e t t e r a n d e a s i e r t o w a s h i t off b y t h e w a t e r o f l e a r n i n g . The Manes said 14. of its :

Yet it is

" D e a r son, n o d o u b t , the soul h a s the sense-organs.

to be scrubbed Yet the p a t h actions of duties There (enlike will

impurities by curbing 15-16.

you h a v e chosen as the r e m e d y is not the s u i t a b l e o n e . D i s p e l l i n g t h e effects o f g o o d a n d b a d the the previous b i r t h s b y m e a n s o f five s a c r i f i c e s ( P a c a - y a j a s ) one is not fettered by that action transgressing merit the s a m e .

a u s t e r i t i e s a n d c h a r i t a b l e gifts a n d p e r f o r m i n g j o i n e d by sacred circles) the one 17. actio.is 18. is resulting Dear from never be any obstacle. son, sin, o r

accumulated when

by previous the souls

wasted It is

away

steadily

one experiences off their

fruits t h e r e o f w h e t h e r p l e a s u r e a n d s a v e t h e m from b o n d a g e .

or sorrow. I f they protect themselves with

thus that intelligent m e n w a s h

discretion they a r e not sullied by the taint of sin.

274 Ruci said

Garuda

Purna

r^~iWT N o b l e sires ! T h e p a t h s o f a c t i v i t i e s a r e in t n ^ V e d a s a s tKe^equel of ignorance. enjoin the s a m e on me ? The Manes said 20. there is 21. : that everything is cause is the cause

condemned do you

Still, wherefore

It is wrong to say no doubt that

the r e s u l t

of But of

i g n o r a n c e a n d actions constitute the action learning ( o r true k n o w l e d g e ) .

of the s a m e . of extension

T h e g o o d n e v e r i n v i t e t r o u b l e b y n o t d o i n g t h e rites A s e l f - r e s t r a i n t c o u p l e d w i t h it is con-

m a n d a t o r i l y enjoined. 22.

d u c i v e t o s a l v a t i o n , o t h e r w i s e i t l e a d s t o fall. W h a t you consider to be the excellent way out with am washing off" (is w r o n g ) ; you will be the attitude "O I 23. poisons 24. her.

b u r n t b y t h e sins o f d e r e l i c t i o n o f d u t y . E v e n the illusion, like p o i s o n ( w h i c h nullifies o t h e r as a m e a n s for the a n d helps) is conducive to g o o d ;

p e r f o r m a n c e o f d u t i e s i t i s n o t fettering t h o u g h c a p a b l e o f it. H e n c e , d e a r s o n , f i n d o u t a s u i t a b l e girl a n d your life b e i n v a i n without the marry of L e t not assurance

a t t a i n i n g t h e o t h e r w o r l d a n d its b e n e f i t . Ruci said : 25. marriage. The Manes said 26. : appreciate You our advice, render our our the is certain. noble should O sires, I a m now an old man. W h o will go provide in for me w i t h a wife ? It is difficult for a p o o r w r e t c h to

O son, If you do not

d e g r a d a t i o n a n d y o u r fall advice into practice. 27. After

s a y i n g this, O

sage

(Kraucuki), out by the the

m a n e s s u d d e n l y v a n i s h e d like even as R u c i stood gazing at 28.

lamps blown them.

wind, entire

Thus Mrkandeya narrated to Kraucuki

e p i s o d e o f R u c i i n v o l v i n g his c o n v e r s a t i o n w i t h the m a n e s .

1.89.11 CHAPTER EIGHTYNINE

275

Story of Ruci Sta said 1-2. : When requested by K r a u c u k i M r k a n d e y a continuthe brahmin The and can my

e d t h e story : R u c i b e c a m e w o r r i e d a n d a n x i o u s o n h e a r i n g t h e l a s t u t t e r a n c e o f the M a n e s . I n his s e a r c h for a wife -sage w a n d e r e d o v e r the w o r l d . excited and began to ruminate. 3. " O w h a t shall I How do ? W h e r e shall I go ? H o w uplift m y s e l f a n d "O 1 s e c u r e a wife ? 4. 5. is it p o s s i b l e to utterance of the manes kindled him. H e c o u l d n o t g e t a n y girl. He became agitated

ancestors quickly ? " T h u s ruminating he thought of an idea. He s t a y e d in a forest for I shall a dispropitiate B r a h m t h e l o t u s - b o r n g o d b y m e a n s o f p e n a n c e ! " a long time leading With c i p l i n e d life a n d p r o p i t i a t i n g ( B r a h m ) . 6. the sage 7. the desire." Thereupon refuge the s a g e b o w e d d o w n a n d told universe Brahm ultimate o f the what he was desirous of B r a h m the p a t r i a r c h o f and said"I am a concentrated

m i n d h e p e r f o r m e d d i v i n e a u s t e r i t i e s for full o n e h u n d r e d y e a r s . worlds revealed himself to Let me hear what you pleased.

d o i n g at the bidding of the m a n e s . Brahm said 8-9. rites, : Y o u shall b e a P r a j p a t i ( a p r o g e n i t o r o f c h i l d r e n ) . begetting children and performing sacred

O B r a h m i n , after

y o u s h a l l a c h i e v e the d e s i r e d r e s u l t s . H e n c e , g o a h e a d i n 10. With duly desire in your will mind worship the manes

y o u r a t t e m p t t o s e c u r e a wife a s a d v i s e d b y the m a n e s . who being propitiated, bestow u p o n y o u what you propitiated provide

d e s i r e . W o n ' t they, y o u r g r a n d f a t h e r s when y o u w i t h a wife a n d sons ? -Mrkandeya said 11. After :

hearing the words of B r a h m born of the un-

276

Garuda

Purna

m a n i f e s t , the s a g e R u c i p e r f o r m e d T a r p a n a u n t o t h e m a n e s o n the sacred b a n k s of a 12. and devotion following Ruci said : 13. reside * T b o w u n t o t h e m a n e s with d e v o t i o n t h e m a n e s w h o a m i d s t t h e deities a n d w h o a r e propitiated by the deities 14. sages in 15. propitiate offerings. 16. devotion by 17. I I bow the bow unto the manes in who are worshipped with identiby Guhyakas1 unto the heaven who desire an are I bow u n t o the m a n e s who the heaven desirous of are propitiated by salvation the by With the river. he t h o u g h t o f the m a n e s w i t h p u r e his manes shoulders with by means due the of the and stooping adored reverence

concentrated mind brahmin

verses in prayer.

d u r i n g r d d h a s , with m a n t r a s ending with ' S v a d h . ' devotion a n d

r d d h a performed mentally with great devotion. I b o w u n t o the m a n e s w h o m t h e S i d d h a s during rddhas by means of in heaven divine unrivalled

cal prosperity that is the utmost possible. m a n e s who worshipped m e n in the world 18. as I during rddhas the m a n e s of w i t h p e r f e c t faith a n d who

b e s t o w full n o u r i s h m e n t o f t h e d e s i r e d w o r l d . bow unto who are worshipped by the (State of being a b r a h m i n s i n t h e w o r l d for t h e a c q u i s i t i o n o f t h e o b j e c t o f d e s i r e they a r e 19. the bestowers unto the Prjpatya who are Progenitor). I bow manes propitiated by the dwellers in the forest w h o e x e r c i s e full c o n t r o l o v e r t h e i r d i e t

a n d w h o h a v e d i s p e l l e d their sins b y p e n a n c e , i n their r d d h a s w i t h a r t i c l e s p r o d u c e d i n t h e forest. 20. I bow unto the manes who are propitiated by S a m d h i s (mystic trances) by b r a h m i n s of g r e a t self discipline, r i g h t e o u s a c t i v i t i e s a n d self-control o v e r t h e senses. 21. ions)
1.

I bow u n t o the m a n e s r d d h a s with

w h o m the

great kings propi-

tiate during

every kind of K a v y a s (food oblat-

a s t h e y a r e t h e b e s t o w e r s o f fruits o f b o t h t h e w o r l d s .
A t t e n d a n t s o f K u b e r a a n d g u a r d s o f his t r e a s u r y .

1.89.32
22. I bow unto the manes who are worshipped

277 by

V a i y a s d e v o t e d t o their s p e c i a l f u n c t i o n s a n d w h o i n c e n s e , foodstuffs a n d w a t e r for t h e w o r s h i p . 23. as devotion. 24. diet I bow unto the manes who have by are I bow unto and

use flowers, the world with great

the m a n e s famous throughout by even dras

Suklins

worshipped

n e c t a r for their the d e m o n s worshipped who in

a n d who 25. I

are propitiated unto the

in Ptla who

h a v e f o r s a k e n their bow Rastala 26. during I

haughtiness and pride. manes r d d h a s by the the manes N g a s desirous of attaining who are offerings. duly propitiated

c h e r i s h e d wishes, b y m e a n s o f offerings n o t l e a v i n g a n y t h i n g . bow unto there itself ( i n R a s t a l a ) by S a r p a s w i t h r i c h e s , m a n t r a s a n d a l l food 27. I bow unto the (Serpents) fully e q u i p p e d

m a n e s directly who reside either in

heaven or on the E a r t h or in Ether worthy of being worshipped e v e n b y R k s a s a s . L e t t h e m a c c e p t w h a t i s offered b y m e . 28. I bow u n t o the m a n e s w h o retain their reality a n d worship in in heaven their u n s u l l i e d the Svadhwho are w h o s t a y i n their a e r i a l chariots in airy u n e m b o d i e d forms a n d

w h o m the Y o g v a r a s ( g r e a t yogins) 29. in case I bow unto the manes

m i n d s the m a n e s who cause the removal of all p a i n s . dieted e m b o d i e d ones, who are c a p a b l e of bestowing all wishes the devotee has the manes any be charished propitiated desire a n d with the even c o m p e t e n t to bestow salvation if the devotee has no special desire. 30. who desire 31. d i s c of the Let Tarpana greater ceremony. T h e manes the lordship Those bestow the desired objects devahood or u p o n those

of deities, in the

things or elephants, horses, gems or g r e a t m a n s i o n s . who stay a white rays of the m o o n , or in the for e v e r shall be sun or in aerial chariot

p r o p i t i a t e d b y this. 32.

L e t t h o s e m a n e s b e n o u r i s h e d b y t h e food and water in

oblations, water and fragrance. M a y the m a n e s b e p r o p i t i a t e d b y food manes who are s a c r e d rite the are satiated when the H a v i s is

o f f e r e d i n the fire, w h o t a k e i n f o o d b y s t a y i n g i n t h e b o d i e s o f the b r a h m i n s a n d who d e l i g h t e d b y t h e offerings o f P i n d a .

278 33. are

Garuda

Purna

B y this s a c r e d r i t e d e l i g h t e d m a y t h e m a n e s b e w h o be pleased by gods and by great sages with the flesh of the R h i n o divine origin with Kla and pleasing ka (Black

sought to

ceros, the black gingelly seeds, of appearance, vegetable). 34. manes these me. 35. Let L e t those K a v y a s fragrant

(food offerings)

which delight the prepared by

worthy of my flowers,

respect, be present, water and

i n their e n t i r e t y , i n

f o o d offerings

this s a c r e d r i t e offer s a t i s f a c t i o n t o the d i f f e r e n t 7th, 8 t h a n d 9 t h

m a n e s who receive worship daily, who are to be worshipped at the e n d of every m o n t h , or on A s t a k s (the d a y s of the lunar 36-37. cial occasions of prosperity or victory. S o m e m a n e s white like the m o o n o r the K u n d a flower are to be worshipped by b r a h m i n s ; the manes coloured fortnight), or at the end of a y e a r or on spe-

like t h e fire a n d t h e S u n a r e t o b e w o r s h i p p e d b y t h e K s a t r i y a s ; the m a n e s of golden hue a r e to be worshipped by the V a i y a s a n d the manes c o l o u r e d like L e t these the indigo are to be worshipped be delighted and satiated by foodstuffs as well m a n e s always. with this r i t e t h e offered for who auspiciously them. worthy of by the d r a s . m y offerings 38. as by A g n i h o m a . Let manes who manes

of flowers, incense, w a t e r a n d I b o w unto those be of the those m a n e s after g i v i n g the delighted

partake

Kavyas,

their satiation 39. worship let t h e m 40. Let

p r e c e d e n c e to the deities a n d I bow unto m a n e s of the deities

when delighted create prosperity. primordial all evil even by remove Indra, be

satisfied w i t h

this s a c r e d rite a n d

spirits, b a d

g h o s t s , g o b l i n s o f fierce viz. Agnisvttas,

t y p e a n d m i s e r i e s o f the p e o p l e .

I bow unto them.

L e t t h e different t y p e s o f m a n e s ,

B a r h i s a d s , j y a p a s a n d S o m a p a s b e p r o p i t i a t e d b y this r d d h a . I h a v e offered T a r p a n a u n t o t h e m . 41. L e t the groups of m a n e s Agnisvttas, protect the e a s t e r n s i d e ; let t h e m a n e s , B a r h i s a d s , p r o t e c t the s o u t h e r n s i d e ; A j y a p a s west a n d S o m a p a s the north. 42. L e t t h e m a n e s a c c o r d m e p r o t e c t i o n f r o m evil spirits, ghosts, geni, goblins, all r o u n d .

1.89.57 43-48. entire offered. Bhtidas, Kalynas, sinless The Let is the t h i r t y o n e sets be of manes by whom with what I

279 the have

universe

pervaded

satisfied

T h e sets

a r e a s follows and Bhtis.

: T h e n i n e sets a r e t h e s e : The six sets are are these : :Varas,

Vivas, Vivabhuks, Ardhyas, D h a r m a s , Dhanyas, u b h n a n a s Bhtikrts K a l y a d a s , K a r t r s , K a l y a s , K a l y a t a r r a y a s and the The sins s e v e n sets are these

Kalyathetus. sets

Varenyas, V a r a d a s , Tustidas, Pustidas, Vivaptrs, and Dhtrs. five dispelling :Mahns, Mahtmans, Mahitas, Mahimvns Sukhadas, Dhanadas." Mrkandeya said 49. As : he (Ruci) was repeating into view this p r a y e r , suddenly a high light c a m e spreading and Mahbalas. T h e four sets a r e :

column of brilliant o v e r t h e sky. 50.

On seeing that column

o f brilliant light e n v e l o p i n g

t h e w o r l d , R u c i k n e l t o n t h e g r o u n d a n d s a n g this h y m n . Ruci said : 51. ed, I offer m y s a l u t a t i o n s t o t h e m a n e s w h o a r e w o r s h i p p with divine who bestow disembodied, of brilliant splendour, endowed 52. gods, I offer and offer my salutations are the Mrca my to the manes

vision a n d e n g a g e d in meditation. cherished desires a n d who Daksa 53. I leaders of I n d r a a n d other to the manes who are the

a n d o f the s e v e n s a g e s a n d o t h e r s .

salutations

l e a d e r s o f M a n u a n d o t h e r s , t h e s u n a n d the m o o n . H e ( M a n u ) uplifted even the m a n e s ? 54. 55. 56. worlds. 57. worlds. W i t h p a l m s j o i n e d t o g e t h e r I offer m y W i t h j o i n e d p a l m s I offer I make o b e i s a n c e t o the salutations to Kayapa t h e m a n e s o f s t a r s , p l a n e t s , w i n d , f i r e , sky, h e a v e n a n d E a r t h . salutations unto seven P r a j p a t i , S o m a , V a r u n a a n d all Y o g e v a r a s . g a n a s in the s e v e n self-originated a n d of m a n e s the called I offer s a l u t a t i o n s t o B r a h m a n t h e I offer s a l u t a t i o n s to the and

e n d o w e d with yogic vision. groups the Somdhras, Yogamrtidharas, moon father o f

280 58.

Garuda

Purna

I m a k e obeisance to the m a n e s who have a s s u m e d the as well. T h e universe is permeated by obeisance to

form of fire a n d others them. 59-60.

fire a n d the m o o n a n d it is meet that I m a k e my

T h o s e w h o a r e in the C o s m i c fire, those w h o h a v e those who have assumed the

a s s u m e d t h e f o r m s o f the m o o n , s u n a n d f i r e , t h o s e w h o h a v e a s s u m ed the form of the U n i v e r s e a n d Yogins and manes. form of B r a h m a n obeisance, obeisance, obeisance unto all those I h a v e purified my m i n d . L e t manes, whose diet is S v a d h , be delighted." Mrkanieya 61. i n g the 62. lished with 63. said : those excellent sages,

T h u s glorified b y h i m ( R u c i ) quarters. He saw them standing in and then with

the m a n e s , c a m e out of that brilliant c o l u m n of light illuminatfront s m e a r e d a n d embel-

flowers Kneeling

a n d f r a g r a n t u n g u e n t s offered b y h i m . palms joined in reverence like this with respect " O b e i s a n c e to y o u " C h o o s e your

the devout R u c i said 64. boon".

all, obeisance to you a l l . " T h e delighted m a n e s said t o the s a g e , R u c i with stooping shoulders said :

Ruci said : 65. " B r a h m has entrusted me with the task of initiating I w i s h for a wife s a t i s f a c t o r y t h e c r e a t i o n of a n e w set of p e o p l e .

in every respect, divine in origin a n d c a p a b l e of c o n c e i v i n g . " The manes said: 66. 67. 68. over the 69. of people. "O noble sage, presently, here itself a very comely H e will b e be endow-

m a i d e n s h a l l b e y o u r wife.

Y o u will b e g e t o f h e r a s o n t o o . after h i m . who will

O R u c i , h e will b e r e n o w n e d a s R a u c y a . M a n y s o n s will b e b o r n t o h i m world. Y o u will b e c o m e a P r a j p a t i When your power wanes and

the founder of a M a n v a n t a r a n a m e d ed with strength a n d valour.

T h e y will b e n o b l e s o u l s r e i g n i n g c r e a t e four s o r t s

y o u will a c h i e v e t h e f i n a l

g o a l , well v e r s e d i n D h a r m a t h a t y o u a r e .

1.89.83 70-71. gift W e will b e p l e a s e d w i t h t h e m a n w h o W e will in interest meditation,

281 will a d o r e the longevity,

u s w i t h d e v o t i o n w i t h this h y m n . of sons, enjoyments, wealth health,

bestow on him

a n d a flourishing family. If any o n e recites

H e n c e , we are to be for t h e s e . shall be

a d o r e d w i t h this h y m n for ever b y t h o s e w h o w i s h 72-73.

this h y m n t h a t d e l i g h t s u s i n Then, undoubt(not pre-

r d d h a s i n front o f e x c e l l e n t B r a h m i n s t a k i n g f o o d w e p r e s e n t t h e r e d e l i g h t e d b y h e a r i n g this h y m n . 74-76. E v e n if a r d d h a were to be e d l y t h e r d d h a s h a l l b e e v e r l a s t i n g i n benefits. Arotriya

sided over by a V e d i c S c h o l a r ) , even if it be defective, or performed with the m o n e y a c q u i r e d by illegal m e a n s , even if the m a t e r i a l s used are unworthy of r d d h a , if it is performed untimely, if it is performed in an unworthy place, if it is performed breaking the rules a n d canons, if it is performed without faith or if the sons performing it are haughty 77. 78-79. (in spite of all t h e r d d h a s h a l l b e delightful t o u s i f this h y m n i s r e c i t e d . O u r s a t i s f a c t i o n will last for t w e l v e y e a r s i f i n a r d T h i s h y m n will d e l i g h t u s for t w e l v e y e a r s i f t h e (early winter) a n d for satisgive us d h a this h y m n p l e a s i n g t o u s i s r e c i t e d . r d d h a is in the season twentyfour y e a r s i n iira (spring and s u m m e r ) . 80. recited. 81. for fifteen 82. this hymn 83. performed. H e n c e y o u , O f o r t u n a t e o n e , shall time of r d d h a , in r e c i t e tins h y m n of brahmins elevating us, at the taking food t h e r e . " front I f this h y m n i s r e a d b y m e n a t t h e t i m e o f years. W e will g r a c e w i t h o u r p r e s e n c e t h a t h o u s e i n w h i c h is written and preserved, whenever rddha is rddha lasting i n t h e s e a s o n o f a r a d ( a u t u m n ) i t will g i v e u s d e l i g h t O R u c i ! even if the r d d h a is i n c o m p l e t e our satisendless if in the rainy season this hymn is f a c t i o n will be of H e m a n t a perthese defects)

( l a t e w i n t e r ) . I t will

f a c t i o n for s i x t e e n y e a r s i f t h e r e c i t a t i o n i s i n V a s a n t a o r G r s m a

282 CHAPTER NINETY Story of Ruci Mrkandeya said 1. 2. tial words. 3. 4. The noble soul P u s k a r a , son :

Garuda

Purna

T h e n f r o m t h e m i d d l e o f t h e river r o s e u p M a n o r a m i L Making obeisance to R u c i again a n d again the celesaddressed Ruci the n o b l e soul in sweet of V a r u n a , begot Your son will a be-

( a comely m a i d e n ) . T h e celestial d a m s e l P r a m l o c was nearby.. damsel Pramloc

beautiful girl d u e to my

favour.

A c c e p t this b e a u t i f u l girl for wife. :

b o r n o f h e r w h o will b e c o m e a M a n u o f g r e a t i n t e l l e c t . Mrkandeya said 5. R u c i a c c e p t e d t h e offer b y s a y i n g " s o b e it" and it:

w a s a s i t w e r e h e lifted u p a w o m a n o f g o o d b o d y a n d m i n d o u t o f t h e river. 6. 7. On the The banks of that river the noble sage He took the became h a n d of the girl duly. son o f R u c i was born o f that lady. famous as R a u c y a as narrated by me before.

CHAPTER

NINETYONE of Hari

Worship Sta said : 1. Hari. 2. Sages Svyambhuva They became Hari who

M a n u a n d others meditated on rituals, worship, g o o d organs, mind,

devoted to regular is

conduct, meditation, prayer a n d recital of names. devoid of body, sense intellect, vital breath, ego. fiery essence. ( H a r i ) who is devoid of Ether a n d

1.91.17 3. 4. ened, F r e e from water a n d

283 its a t t r i b u t e s , free f r o m E a r t h , the enlightthe sentient,

d e v o i d of all living beings. T h e presiding deity of all living beings, the lord, the extensive, the controller, 5. all

presiding deity of everything, the unsullied. F r e e from attachment, the g r e a t lord, worshipped by brilliant, free from S a t t v a quality, devoid of deities, the 6. etc. 7. F r e e from V s a n s ( i m p r e s s i o n s a n d evil p r o p e n s i t i e s ) t h e p u r e , free f r o m a l l defects d e v o i d o f thirst, free f r o m s o r r o w and delusion. 8. 9. the Free from o l d age and death, the steady, devoid of delusions, having no birth, having no D e v o i d of all supreme 10. quil l o r d , free f r o m dissolution.

T a m a s quality. F r e e from R a j a s ; aloof from three qualities, d e v o i d of all colours, d e v o i d of K a r t r t v a (the state of b e i n g the doer)

c o n d u c t o f life, t h e t r u e , t h e u n t a i n t e d , the states of wakefulness, d r e a m ,

sound slumber, form, lord 11-12.

devoid of names. deity of the states of wakefulness, of t r a n of gods, stationed in wakefulness, the everlastby all, the embodied, t h e s u b t l e , still

Presiding

ing, free f r o m c a u s e s a n d effects. Observed subtler, e n d o w e d with the vision of knowledge, knowing t h r o u g h t h e e a r s , t h e blissful i n f o r m , free f r o m t h e t h r e e c o s m i c f o r m s o f Viva, T a i j a s a a n d Prja, the 13. fourth i m p e r i s h a b l e entity.

Protector of all, destroyer of all, h a v i n g the form of of intellect,

the s o u l o f all l i v i n g b e i n g s , free f r o m the a t t r i b u t e s d e v o i d o f s u p p o r t identical with i v a a n d H a r i . 14. Vednta

F r e e from disintegration, known a n d realised t h r o u g h ( m e t a p h y s i c s ) , of the Devoid of primary form of Vedas, the supreme

living b e i n g , the auspicious b e y o n d the sense o r g a n s . 15-16. Touch, 17. attributes of Sound, Taste, the beginningless, C o l o u r essence, C o l o u r a n d Smell, O Mahdeva, a m a n of

the B r a h m a n , the end of the hole I am the B r a h m a n . controlled sense-organs thus b e c o m e s identical shall m e d i t a t e t h u s . with B r a h m a n . He who meditates

284 18. O V r s a d h v a j a , thus

Garuda

Purna

I have e x p o u n d e d the meditation

o f t h e s u p r e m e g o d , w h a t else s h a l l I e x p o u n d t o y o u n o w ?

CHAPTER

NINETYTWO

QjP CU

Meditation on Vitfju^s^ Rudra said 1. : O the bearer of akha,

Cakra and Gad, his task.

please

e x p o u n d a g a i n the process of meditation of Visnu, a knowledge w h e r e o f m a k e s a m a n h a p p y i n h a v i n g fulfilled Hari said : 2. I shall e x p o u n d t h e m e d i t a t i o n o n H a r i t h a t s u p p r e s s e s of M y . one on the O H a r a , t h e m e d i t a t i o n i s o f two unembodied has already been

the ""machinations 3-4. w h o seek the The

kinds, one on the e m b o d i e d a n d the other on the u n e m b o d i e d . e x p l a i n e d . I s h a l l e x p o u n d t h e o n e o n the salvation flower a crore of suns, the victorious, uniformly Kunda 5. and gentle akha. E n d o w e d with the discus resembling a t h o u s a n d suns, of shooting with the flames, priceless the tranquil, of auspiwith e m b o d i e d . By those r e f u l g e n t like white as large resplendent,

H a r i has to be meditated as cow's milk, endowed

with the

f i e r c e w i t h a series 6. t h e lotus. 7. even Wearing Equipped

c i o u s f a c e , h a v i n g t h e m a c e i n his h a n d . crown brilliant gems, having weapons, the the omnipresent, garland of wild the shining, holding flowers, the pure, of

shoulders, 8. 9.

having golden

ornaments,

good garments, of

p u r e body, having good ears, stationed

in the lotus.

Of golden body having g o o d necklaces, good bracelets, Having the mark rvatsa a n d the g e m Kaustubha,

the armlet, e q u i p p e d with the g a r l a n d of wild flowers. L a k s m ' s eyes fixed on him, e q u i p p e d with the qualities such

as A n i m , the originator a n d the destroyer.

1.92.19 10. Worthy of meditation of the of grass. the pure, sages, the

285 deities a n d

the asuras, extremely beautiful, stationed in the hearts of living b e i n g s from B r a h m a t o a b l a d e 11. blessing 12. auspicious, 13. being great lord. 14. paste, Having all ornaments, smeared with sweet sandal accompanied 15. Water. 16. be V s u d e v a , t h e sole m e d i t a t o r o f t h e u n i v e r s e , s h o u l d upon by those who seek salvation "I am meditated 17-18. final goal. Seeking by all D e v a s , the doer of what is p l e a s a n t benefit of all worlds, the lord of all, The e t e r n a l , the all, N r y a n a imperishable, the lord

t h e g r e a t G o d w i t h his e a r r i n g s s h a p e d

like t h e M a k a r a f i s h s h i n i n g p r o f u s e l y . Destroyer of all harassments, worthy of worship, the destroyer of the wicked, the i m m a n e n t soul of all, a n d shining nails, worthy of

o m n i f o r m e d , o m n i p r e s e n t , d e s t r o y e r o f evil i n f l u e n c e o f p l a n e t s . H a v i n g beautiful rings, refuge, a p p r o a c h e d as t h e p l e a s i n g , o f g e n t l e form, t h e

to the gods. the conceiver of all, stationed in the sphere of the S u n , Fire, a n d

V s u d e v a " , thus s h a l l t h e s o u l b e m e d i t a t e d u p o n H a r i . T h o s e w h o m e d i t a t e like this o n V i s n u a t t a i n t h e F o r m e r l y , the sage Visnu, Yjavalkya meditated on the a t t a i n e d the p o s i t i o n o f the l a w O a k a r a , lord of gods,

supreme lord of gods

g i v e r a n d f i n a l l y the s u p r e m e r e g i o n . you also contemplate over V i s n u . 19. Those

w h o r e c i t e this V i s n u d h y n a a t t a i n the f i n a l

goal, viz., liberation

286 CHAPTER NINETYTHREE

Teachings Mahe.ivara 1. said O : the destroyer of Kein, of Tjavalkya
1

Garuda

Purna

Hari,

how was

virtue

x p o u n d e d by

Yjavalkya

formerly. Please explain

to me as

t h e facts a r e , O M d h a v a . Hari said 2. different : After m a k i n g o b e i s a n c e t o Y j a v a l k y a w h o w a s s t a y sages a s k e d him a b o u t the various duties of due meditation on Visnu the sage of castes. With

i n g in M i t h i l , the

c o n t r o l l e d senses e x p o u n d e d t h e s a m e t o t h e m . Tjavalkya 3-6.

said The

: virtue e x p o u n d e d hereafter is current in that Vedas

c o u n t r y w h e r e t h e b l a c k d e e r r o a m a b o u t fearlessly. T h e

in addition to Purnas, N y y a , MImrhs, D h a r m a s t r a , etc. a r e t h e b a s i c l o r e for a l l k i n d s o f l e a r n i n g a n d v i r t u e . T h e y a r e fourteen in number. Yama ,

3

T h e expounders of law are : M a n u , V i s n u 2 ,

4

Agiras ,

Vasistha ,

Daksa,

Sarhvarta,

ttapa6,

1.

A famous personality in I n d i a n Literature. He His name is closely connected the

He is with the is

said

to be a s a g e in the

present in the court of K i n g J a n a k a of Mithil. Mahbhrata. S o m e hold that the V j a s a n e y i S a m h i t of after his s u r n a m e V j a s a n e y a . his n a m e . T h i s S m r t i seems to be later

is also mentioned

ukla-Yajurveda. is known is widely also k n o w n after but

ukla Yajurveda Manusmrti.

The Yjavalkya-Smrti than

acknowledged as a Code of Hindu L a w . Law Courts. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Author Author Author

T h e interpretation of the M i t k s a r accepted by Indian

c o m m e n t a r y by Vijnevara on mis Smrti, is generally of Visnu-Dharma-Stra. of Y a m a - s m r t i . of the Vasistha-dharma-stra.

Author of A g i r a s a - s m r t i or Brhad-agirasa-smrti. Author of several smrti-works, K a r m a - v i p k a , etc.

1.93.11 Parara1,
8

287 Apastamba 2 ,
7

Uanas3, akha ,
8

Vysa4,
9

Ktyyana5,
10

Brhaspati , Gautama , A l l these 7. virtue. 8. A c t i n g in ever e n g a g e d of law. Whatever expounders

Likhita , Hrta

, a n d Atri11. become

in meditation or

of Visnu have

material

wealth is

given at the proper conducive to

t i m e a n d p l a c e with d u e faith to the deserving is a w a y pleasing to self-study

others, control of m i n d , Vedas, realisation of

non-violence, 9. three. duties. 10. The

charity,

of the

A t m a n b y m e a n s of Y o g a a l l t h e s e a r e D h a r m a s . Scholars in Whatever V e d i c lore e n u m e r a t e four a n d s o m e s a y are engaged in the that m a y b e those w h o

worship of d e v a s a n d h a v e realised the soul m a i n t a i n their o w n four c a s t e s are Brahmins, Ksatriyas, Vaiyas T h e rites

a n d d r a s . T h e f i r s t three are Dvijas ( T w i c e b o r n ) . ed with m a n t r a s . 11.

from N i s e k a (sprinkling) to the cremation ground are performT h e G a r b h d h n a 1 2 r i t e ( c o n c e p t i o n ) i s after t h e m e n s -

t r u a t i o n ; P u r h s a v a n a 1 3 rite before the t h r o b b i n g of the child in the w o m b ; S m a n t a 1 4 in the sixth or eighth m o n t h . T h e P r a s a v a (delivery) and J t a k a r m a 1 5 (birth) and

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Kautilya. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Author Author Author Author And

of Parara-smrti. of Apastamba-dharma-stra. of Auanasa-dharmastra of Vysa-siddhnta. quoted as the author of a Smrti. Mentioned by

V a r i o u s references to him a r e found in Sanskrit Literature. profusely

Author Author

of Gautama-dharma-stra. of akha-smrti. Also mentioned in the Mahbhrata. T h e cothe brother of a k h a . before its 600 A.D. in Manu-smrti.

According to the M a h b h r a t a , An oft-quoted author, who

author of a k h a Likhita smrti. flourished Also about Author of Atreya-dharma-stra. hold different views mentioned time.

Authorities

T h e a i m is to beget a m a l e child. Literally means parting (the child's) hair. T h i s rite is performed to ensure the child's welfare.

288 12-13. Nmakarana (naming) rites

Garuda the

Purna eleventh

day. Niskrama1 and Cdkarana3

(coming out of the h o u s e ) in the fourth month. (ceremonial cutting of the forelock) as per

T h e A n n a p r a n a 2 (feeding with solid food) in the sixth m o n t h p r a c t i c e in the family. T h u s the sin of seed a n d conception is reciting the mantras.

nullified. T o g i r l s t h e s e rites a r e p e r f o r m e d

without

m a n t r a s ) but m a r r i a g e is performed by reciting the

CHAPTER NINETYFOUR
Teachings Tjavalkya said 1. : be of Yjavalkya

T h e sacred t h r e a d investiture of a b r a h m i n shall

performed in the eighth year from conception or nativity; t h a t of a K s a t r i y a in the eleventh year a n d that of V a i y a in the twelfth y e a r o r family. 2. After duly investing the disciple with the holy t h r e a d the preceptor shall teach him the V e d a s a l o n g vyhrti. He shall duly instruct h i m in good behaviour. 3. is during 4. He shall p a s s urine a n d e v a c u a t e his b o w e l s with t h e midday and sacred his r i g h t e a r f a c i n g t h e n o r t h i f i t dawn, night. with e a r t h purificatory facing with the M a h according to some, as is the convention in the

the rules of hygiene a n d

sacred thread turned round

t h e d a y o r i n the S a n d h y s i.e.

dusk or facing the south if it is d u r i n g the r i t e s shall h o l d t h e p e n i s a n d s t a n d u p 5-7. ceremony A twice-born H e shall shall sit on

T h e b r a h m i n or others strictly a d h e r i n g to the and wash it the

a n d w a t e r till t h e b a d s m e l l a n d s t i c k i n e s s a r e r e m o v e d . perform a clean thus. ground

1. In this rite , the child is taken out of the house for the first time. 2. In this rite the child is fed for the first time.with solid food. 3. In this rite, for the first time the child's hair is cut, but cd (a tuft of hair) is left on the head; hence the name cdkarapa.

1.94.17.
north or with shall east a n d the perform U p a s p a r a (ceremonial water) the of the between finger, his roots and the of tip little the B r h m a t r t h a ( p u r e touch thumb

289 touching) knees. He

index finger, He

a n d the shall twice. 8.

h a n d respectively called U n m r j a n a ( w i p i n g off) T h e water

Prajpatitrtha, perform He

Pitrtrtha, Acamana

Brahmatrtha and Daivatrtha. thrice a n d

shall touch m o u t h , etc. ritualistically. the

s h a l l b e u n d i s t u r b e d a n d free f r o m b u b b l e s . T h e b r a h m i n shall be p u r e if reaches A the palate. water reaches the shall b e c o m e heart; the K s a t r i y a if it it reaches 9. the throat a n d the V a i y a if

woman and a dra

pure if the water touches the inner parts once. B a t h , M r j a n a m with the divine mantras, P r n y m a , G y a t r j a p a shall be S r y o p a s t h n a (worship of the s u n ) a n d performed every day. 10. G y a t r s h o u l d a l w a y s b e r e c i t e d w i t h its i r a s ( h e a d ) a n d with the V y h r t i prefixed. 11-12 constitute Prnyma with the P r a n a v a i s for t h r e e t i m e s (for e v e r y u n i t o f j a p a ) . T h e purity of P r n y m a is in the three R k s that the mantra and shall its be deity. In the evening the d o w n till t h e r i s e o f s t a r s . I n recited standing facing t h e both in the morning a n d

Svitr shall be recited squatting the m o r n i n g the G y a t r i east till 13. etc. He 14. so. the sun rises.

Thereafter

e v e n i n g s a c r i f i c i a l rites i n f i r e s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d . T h e n elders shall b e bowed t o saying " a s a u a h a m , " shall then with H e shall recite great concentration and faith apdo

p r o a c h t h e p r e c e p t o r for t h e s t u d y o f V e d a s . the V e d a s when called upon to H e shall give the preceptor whatever h e h a s a n d serve h i m 15. worn. 16. 17. T h e s a c r e d staff, d e e r s k i n , t h r e a d a n d g i r d l e s h a l l b e In the morning, After p e r f o r m i n g midday the and the evening the a l m s

with m i n d , b o d y a n d speech activities. F o r s u s t e n a n c e let h i m b e g a l m s o f w o r t h y b r a h m i n s .

shall b e sought from b r a h m i n s , K s a t r i y a s a n d d r a s . rites i n f i i e h e sh^ll t a k e h i s never find fault with the food food with the permission of the p r e c e p t o r , d u l y t a k i n g in w a t e r in the ritualistic way. served. He shall

290 18.

Garuda

Purna

A s t u d e n t o b s e r v i n g B r a h m a c a r y a shall t a k e v a r i e t i e s

o f food i f t h e r e i s n o risk. A t t h e t i m e o f a r d d h a , a b r a h m i n c a n e a t a s h e p l e a s e s b u t w i t h o u t p r e j u d i c e t o his V r a t a . 19. etc. He is called a teaches him Veda. 20. of sacred 21. He is A c r y a who thread. He who initiates him teaches a with the investiture portion of Vedas is p r e c e p t o r w h o m a k e s h i m d o all rites a n d H e s h a l l a v o i d w i n e a n d m e a t a n d s t e a m c o o k e d food,

U p d h y y a . T h e p e r f o r m e r o f sacrifice i s c a l l e d R t v i k . All these p e o p l e are to be h o n o u r e d duly. O n e ' s own m o t h e r is superior to all these. F o r each V e d a , the duration of s t u d y i s for f i v e o r t w e l v e y e a r s . 22-23. S o m e hold that investiture twentytwo not the with for study shall c o n t i n u e till full c o m p r e h e n s i o n . T h e K e n t a ( c u t t i n g off h a i r ) i s a t s i x t e e n . T h e t i m e l i m i t for t h e y e a r s for b r a h m i n s , for V a i y a s . If it is the sacred t h r e a d is sixteen Ksatriyas during and this twentyfour they period

performed

b e c o m e deprived o f all virtues. T h e persons w h o b e c o m e d e g r a d ed by non-observance of Svitr 24. are called Vrtyas. Sacrifices a r e to be performed without including the V r t y a s . T h e first three castes are first birth from called Dvijas (twice born) m o t h e r they a r e b o r n a g a i n b e c a u s e after t h e

w i t h t h e s a c r e d g i r d l e g i r t i n g r o u n d their b o d y . 25. Vedas alone are a n d sacred rites. 26-27. The i n d i s p e n s a b l e for s a c r i f i c e s , p e n a n c e s the highest salvation. the deities with Every and he shall propitiate T h e y are conducive to twice-born shall manes With with ghee

honey a n d milk a n d the atharvgiras mantras. 28-29. Purnas.

honey a n d ghee. and holy water

d a y , t h e t w i c e b o r n shall r e c i t e t h e r k m a n t r a s , y a j u s , s m a n p r o p i t i a t e the m a n e s a n d t h e d e i t i e s .

T h e r e c i t e r s shall n o t d e c r y t h e V e d i c p a s s a g e s o r T h o s e who r e a d a n d study the V e d a s a n d epics every

d a y according to capacity and propitiate the deities a n d m a n e s s h a l l b e b l e s s e d w i t h a l l d e s i r e d o b j e c t s w h e n t h e y a r e satisfied. 30. thereof. T h e r e g u l a r s t u d y o f different p o r t i o n s i n the V e d a s s h a l l b l e s s h i m w i t h t h e fruits the fruits o f gifts o f l a n d T h e twice-born will reap d e a l i n g w i t h t h e d i v e r s e sacrifices a n d penances by study alone.

1.95.6. 31-32. T h e Naisthika (life-long)

291 B r a h m a c r i n shall r e -

m a i n b y t h e s i d e o f t h e p r e c e p t o r o r i n his a b s e n c e , o f his s o n , w i f e o r t h e s a c r i f i c i a l f i r e . H e s h a l l c o n t r o l his s e n s e o r g a n s a n d l e a d a p u r e life f i n a l l y a t t a i n i n g B r a h m a l o k a n e v e r t o b e b o r n again.

CHAPTER Teachings Tjavalkya 1-3. said :

NINETYFIVE of Yjavalkya

O s a g e s , listen t o the v a r i o u s

duties

of the

house-

h o l d e r . After g i v i n g fees t o the p r e c e p t o r a n d t a k i n g t h e r i t u a l i s t i c b a t h w i t h his p e r m i s s i o n a n d c o n c l u d i n g his s t u d e n t s t a g e h e s h a l l m a r r y a girl e n d o w e d w i t h g o o d c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . S h e r s i , l i n e a g e o r G o t r a , b e y o n d the f i f t h r e m o v e o n side, and 4. the seventh remove on must the father's to asapinda (unrelated). A brahmin bridegroom belong the r e p u t e d relation, a with a S c h o l a r s o r their o w n of a b r a h m i n ' s
1

shall b e a

virgin, y o u n g e r in a g e , not sickly, h a v i n g brothers not of the s a m e the mother's and hence

ninety families of g r e a t V e d i c scholar without defects. 5. a son). 6. I do not approve

marriage

d r a girl, for v i r t u a l l y h e i s b o r n a g a i n o f h e r ( w h e n h e b e g e t s A b r a h m i n c a n m a r r y a girl b e l o n g i n g t o a n y o f t h e

f i r s t t h r e e c a s t e s ; a k s a t r i y a c a n m a r r y a girl b e l o n g i n g t o t w o
1. G e n e r a l l y the H i n d u s t r a c e their d e s c e n t to a c o m m o n T h e p r o m i n e n t gotras Roth interprets the "Gotra o c c u r s s e v e r a l t i m e s i n t h e male ancestor. but they account explain In Gotra, the or with 'cowstall*, to the as

S u c h a descent is called gotra. multiplied later on. of the mythic exploits of Indra.

were eight R g v e d a in word

while G e l d n e r thinks that 'herd' is m e a n t . "family' or

T h e latter sense seems

best the e m p l o y m e n t which the term shows in the later literature as d e n o t i n g the 'clan', a n d which is found in the C h n d o g y a Upanisad. within a G r h y a S u t r a s stress is agnates and cognates." laid on the prohibition of m a r r i a g e (VINS, p . 2 3 5 - 6 ) .

w i t h a Sabinda o f t h e m o t h e r o f t h e b r i d e g r o o m t h a t i s t o s a y , r o u g h l y ,

292 castes 7. Brahma and a vaiya only one, a dra girl

Garuda

Purna be

shall never

married by any of these. T h e r e are m a n y types type is that that girl in which o f m a r r i a g e s a m o n g t h e m ; the the bridegroom is invited on

a n d a girl b e d e c k e d A son born of either side. 8. The Daiva

a c c o r d i n g to c a p a c i t y is given in m a r r i a g e . sanctifies twentyone generations

type

of marriage is as the

that

in which the A son born If two cows

R t v i k in a sacrifice is c h o s e n of that wedlock sanctifies

bridegroom.

fourteen generations.

a r e t a k e n a l o n g w i t h the b r i d e t h e t y p e o f m a r r i a g e i s r s a , t h e son b o r n o f t h a t w e d l o c k sanctifies six g e n e r a t i o n s . 9. love) A m a r r i a g e in which the advice, " b o t h of you A son born of that wedlock carry six on your sacred duties together" is given, is called S a k m a (with marriage. 10. sanctifies g e n e r a t i o n s i n c l u d i n g himself. In the Asura form of marriage, money is taken; in i s t a k e n f o r c i b l y after is duped and t h e G n d h a r v a m a r r i a g e , m u t u a l l o v e a n d c o n s e n t i s t h e criter i o n ; i n t h e R k s a s a m a r r i a g e , the b r i d e a fight a n d married. 11. T h e f i r s t four t y p e s o f m a r r i a g e a r e r e c o m m e n d e d for a n d t h e R k s a s a t y p e for k i n g s ; the dras. a b r a h m i n girl, t h e h a n d s a r e b r i d e g r o o m ; the vaiya brother, a kinsman or case incurs b r a h m i n s ; the G n d h a r v a 12. in the P a i c a m a r r i a g e , the girl

A s u r a t y p e for v a i y a s a n d t h e d e s p i c a b l e l a s t t y p e for t h e If a b r a h m i n marries

c l a s p e d together; if a ksatriya girl, she c a t c h e s hold of an arrow the other end of which is girl h o l d s a g o a d . 13. T h e father, t h e grandfather, the mother gives away 14. the sin the girl in m a r r i a g e ; the latter in in m a r r i a g e , h e l d b y the

the former is not a v a i l a b l e . A father not giving a d a u g h t e r If no of Bhrnahaty (murder of the foetus) at every men-

strual period. 15. sullied

o n e g i v e s h e r a w a y i n m a r r i a g e , t h e girl m a r r i a g e only o n c e ; a person punished like a thief; i f a n u n A fallen g i r l , be punished.

i s a t liberty t o c h o o s e h e r o w n l o v e r . A girl c a n b e g i v e n i n should be is forsaken w h o a b d u c t s a girl girl

he s h o u l d

should be forsaken at o n c e .

1.95.28. 16-17. have If he

293
F o r p r o d u c i n g a son a n d a heir in the family the of the s a m e clan can T h e son with an issueless w i d o w till she conceives.

brother-in-law or a cousin or a person intercourse touches her 18. to wear 19.

after that h e b e c o m e s d e g r a d e d . adultery shall a

b o r n thus is the legitimate son of the deceased h u s b a n d . A wife f o u n d g u i l t y o f dirty The garments, shall moon god has be c o m p e l l e d single morsel with purity; be given only blessed

daily, shall b e rebuked a n d forced t o lie o n the b a r e g r o u n d . women G a n d h a r v a h a s blessed them with sweet speech. F i r e is a l w a y s pure a n d women are always pure. 20. guilty If a woman great sins subjects herself to abortion, except in she b e c o m e s the to murder of the foetus a n d the t h e c a s e o f a d u l t e r y a n d for p u r p o s e s o f e x p i a t i o n , of two 21. m u r d e r of her husband. addicted wine, suffering from i n c u r a b l e A wife o f s w e e t sages, great sin Otherwise, discord or O

A wife

diseases or inimically inclined c a n be forsaken. speech should be maintained. will result. 22-23. If there is no

dispute between the If the

h u s b a n d a n d wife, v i r t u e , l o v e a n d w e a l t h f l o u r i s h t h e r e . wife survives the h u s b a n d b u t r e m a i n s ed in the world. If After death she goddess U m . 24-26. behests becomes

u n m a r r i e d , she is praisdelighted with

a m a n divorces a chaste virtuous w o m a n he is to carry out the subsequent to the for w o m e n . T h e (full m o o n -

shall give her a third of her o r n a m e n t s b a c k . T h e highest duty of a w o m a n husband. restrain Sixteen nights of her

m o n t h l y m e n s t r u a l f l o w a r e the nights o f rut h u s b a n d shall and can on the himself during

the p a r v a n on

new m o o n days) when the stars m a g h a n d M l a r e a s c e n d a n t first f o u r n i g h t s . with Thereafter, even nights, he will be a b l e to is in a have intercourse her. Thereby, he

beget a healthy son of auspicious traits. b e r i n g that lust in w o m e n is terrible. 27-28. women are The to husband should protected

If the w o m a n

m o o d t o r e c e i v e h i m o n a n y n i g h t h e s h o u l d satisfy h e r r e m e m b e l o y a l t o h i s wife. S i n c e the h u s b a n d , his brothers, her with o r n a m e n t s ,

be well

father, m o t h e r or k i n s m e n s h o u l d h o n o u r

r a i m e n t s a n d foodstuffs. T h e wife s h o u l d b e a b l e t o m a i n t a i n t h e

294 household with a m o d i c u m skilful, lavishly. 29-31. and She should by pay respects their to feet. pleased with

Garuda

Purna

of requisite things. S h e should be and reluctant to spend

the m i n i m u m

her mother-in-law A woman whose body,

father-in-law

touching

husband is away house. D u r i n g

shall f o r s a k e s p o r t s , d e c o r a t i o n o f t h e

a t t e n d i n g festivities, b o i s t e r o u s l a u g h t e r , visits t o o t h e r p e o p l e ' s childhood the father shall protect the girl; d u r i n g a n d d u r i n g old a g e the son. Whether shall n o t s t a y o u t s i d e her youth the h u s b a n d shall do so during day or during night, a

If these a r e not a v a i l a b l e , kinsmen shall protect her. woman her house without her h u s b a n d . 32-33. religious good rites conduct Only the not she the senior wife i s e n t i t l e d t o t a k e j u n i o r ones. be If the cremated

part in

wife h a d b e e n o f for the preserva-

should

duly by the husband

w i t h A g n i h o t r a rites. tion o f A g n i h o t r a .

He can remarry duly A woman

w h o h a d been dutiful shall e a r n

g o o d n a m e h e r e a n d r e p a i r t o h e a v e n after d e a t h .

CHAPTER Teachings Tjavalkya said 1 -5. duties I : shall enumerate

NINETYS1X of Tjavalkya

the

mixed

castes a n d also the

of the

householders. +

A b r a h m i n father a n d a k s a t r i y a Similarly > > > > > > > > Ambastha Nisda, Parvata Mhisya Mleccha Karana Sta Vaidehaka C n d l a (Lowliest of all)

mother beget a Mrdhbhisikta. B r a h m i n father Vaiy mother Vaiy dr udr + dr + Vaiya Vaiya dra father + + + Ksatriya

K s a t r i y a father +

+ Brahmin

1.96.16.
Vaiya Father dra dra 6-7. ,, + + Ksatriya Mother > ,, ,, ,, ,, father a n d Magadha

295

> Ksattr > Ayogava > Rathakra unprivileged ones whether lower c a s t e m o t h e r ) or

-+- V a i y -4- K a r a n

Mhisya

These mixed castes are

A n u l o m a j a (higher caste P r a t i l o m a j a (higher caste original caste in the A householder 8-9. All

m o t h e r a n d lower caste f a t h e r ) . O n if the duty has underthe duty is the s a m e . rites a c c o r d i n g to

a c c o u n t o f t h e i n t r i n s i c loftiness, they will h a v e t h e r i g h t s o f t h e i r seventh generation g o n e c h a n g e or in the fifth generation if shall p e r f o r m rites shall laid

everyday the in the

the S m r t i s in the fire first lighted on the o c c a s i o n of m a r r i a g e . down V e d a s , except that of in the marital fire. c h a r i t a b l e gifts, toilet and also be performed he

After answering the calls of washing the m o r n i n g . 10.

nature a n d observing the requisite should perform S a n d h y in

the teeth

After t h e f i r e sacrifice h e s h o u l d r e c i t e t h e S r y a

m a n t r a s w i t h d u e faith. He should understand the m e a n i n g of V e d i c p a s s a g e s a n d the various s t r a s . H e should g o t o the temple o f G o d for t h e a c q u i s i t i o n a n d p r e s e r v a t i o n o f his d e s i r e d o b j e c t s . 11-13. After t a k i n g gods and bath he should perform Tarpana a n d w o r s h i p the t h e full r e s u l t shall b e and duly the m a n e s . According to capacity In order to achieve spiritual V i d y T h e great

he shall read V e d a s , P u r n a s a n d Itihsas. of J a p a s and Yajas Oblations, practised.

(sacrifice)

S v a d h h o m a , study of V e d a s

reception of guests performed. 14. For the

should be duly observed.

s a c r i f i c e s for g h o s t s , m a n e s , B r a h m a n a n d h u m a n b e i n g s shall b e C n d l a s a n d crows, cooked ground. Cooked rice should rice should be

strewn on 15-16. day. All shall homa

b e offered w i t h every

w a t e r every d a y t o the m a n e s a n d h u m a n beings. Vedic shall duly study shall be invariably pursued Food be fed n o t b e c o o k e d for o n e ' s o w n u s e e x c l u s i v e l y . people, and pregnant women, invalids, girls thereafter g u e s t s s h o u l d b e fed. T h e n With Prngnihe should take of a few g r a i n s )

children, elderly

t h e c o u p l e s h o u l d p a r t a k e o f w h a t i s left o v e r . (ritualistic taking in h i s m e a l w i t h o u t f i n d i n g f a u l t w i t h t h e food

served.

296 17. part of

Garuda

Purna

O n l y after f e e d i n g the b o y s s h o u l d h e t a k e i n m o d e the meal and the later one should be t a k e n after

r a t e q u a n t i t i e s w h o l e s o m e food after d u e d i g e s t i o n . T h e e a r l i e r drinking water. 18. place. T h e food s h o u l d b e t a k e n i n r e l i s h i n g l y i n a c o v e r e d be given a c c o r d i n g to capacity to the

Charity should

g u e s t s a n d t o p e o p l e o f all c a s t e s . 19. guest is No not such thought shall be entertained as "This

worthy of bowing t o " , " T h i s is the s a m e as that guests. E v e n by reducing other expenses,

o n e " with regard to

a l m s should b e given t o m e n d i c a n t s a n d persons o f g o o d rites. 20-21. fed t h e r e b y Whoever once in happens a year. after to and come should (those be fed. A

great bull should be consecrated ritualistic ablutions

a V e d i c scholar shall be who perform k i n g s , friends, these shall

Sntakas in

sacrifices) preceptors, All wayfarers

b o y s e l i g i b l e for m a r r i a g e , p e r s o n s be honoured a n d respected.

anguishall

are guests. A ro-

triya is a person w h o h a s m a s t e r e d the V e d a s . 22. honoured These if a two (the guest a n d V e d i c S c h o l a r ) should be to attain Brahmaloka. A

householder wishes

h o u s e h o l d e r s h a l l n e v e r y e a r n for a n o t h e r m a n ' s food u n l e s s invited a n d unless it is w h a t is not censurable. 23. fully He shall a v o i d t h e m i s u s e o f s p e e c h , h a n d s a n d feet the guest a n d the V e d i c S c h o l a r are

a n d over-eating. satiated he the village. 24-25.

When

shall a c c o m p a n y t h e m u p t o t h e b o u n d a r y o f

T h e remaining

p a r t o f t h e d a y h e shall s p e n d i n

t h e c o m p a n y o f g o o d m e n , friends a n d r e l a t i o n s . After p e r f o r m i n g the e v e n i n g p r a y e r , offering o f g h e e i n t h e f i r e , e t c . , h e s h o u l d take food. muhrta Consulting (before the learned A he should decide what is should be honoured t o b e d o n e for his o w n p r o g r e s s . H e m u s t g e t u p i n the B r a h m a sunrise). brahmin w i t h m o n e y , gifts, e t c . 26-27. To the aged, grief-stricken and burden-bearers

h e s h o u l d b e a s u p p o r t l e a d i n g the w a y . T h e c o m m o n d u t i e s o f

1 .96.35 the twice-born, the brahmins, vaiyas and ksatriyas

297 a r e sacrifice,

s t u d y o f tfie V e d a s , c h a r i t y , e t c . T h e a d d i t i o n a l d u t i e s o f a b r a h m i n a r e a c c e p t a n c e o f fees, p r e s i d i n g o v e r sacrifices a n d t e a c h i n g of the V e d a s . T h e special 28. twice-born. 29. vation stealing, patience, 30. duties of a ksatriya are the adminisare tration of k i n g d o m a n d the protection of the p e o p l e . Usury, agriculture, trading and cattle-breeding the duties of a v a i y a . T h e duties of a d r a a r e service of the to the

A twice-born shall never neglect sacrifice. T h e c o m m o n qualities constitute of c a s t e s for t h e p r e s e r truthfulness, nonnon-violence,

of virtue

purity, control

sense-organs, control of the m i n d , equality and lasting for (roguery). in stock

straightforwardness, liberal-mindedness, Those who Those have who food-grains

activities devoid of crookedness or deceit

m o r e t h a n t h r e e y e a r s c a n p e r f o r m t h e S o m a sacrifice a n d d r i n k the S o m a juice. 31. fice as rites have in stock food-grains lasting for a y e a r s h a l l p e r f o r m t h e well a s p r e l i m i n a r y rites of S o m a sacrifice. Grahanesti and Cturmsya1

E v e r y year, h e shall p e r f o r m the rites o f S o m a S a c r i Paupratyayana, rites a r e not

carefully. 32. If these possible, the twice-born shall No sacrifice If shall b e pert h e full c o m the sacrifice of the Vaivnar.

perform plement fruitful. 33.

f o r m e d with deficiency in the m a t e r i a l s u s e d . materials

a r e d u l y u s e d , the sacrifice b e c o m e s

If a sacrifice is p e r f o r m e d utilising the m o n e y b e g g e d s a c r i f i c e b e c o m e s a c r o w or a v u l t u r e . sustaining himself by days' g l e a n i n g rice grains He s u p p l y . H e i s still better t h a n the one with a d a y ' s supply. p o t , full of g r a i n w h o is himself

o f a d r a , . t h e sacrificer b e c o m e s a C n d a l a - A p e r s o n p i l f e r i n g a r t i c l e s g a t h e r e d for a 34. A person

h a s a b e t t e r s p i r i t u a l life in turn is better b e t t e r t h a n o n e with 35. a

than one with three

t h a n one with a g r a n a r y u n d e r his c o m m a n d . A b r a h m i n n e v e r c r a v e s for w e a l t h t h a t w o u l d i n t e r the Vedas. He s h o u l d not seek it fere w i t h h i s d a i l y s t u d y o f

1. each.

Name

of the

three

sacrifices,

viz.,

Vaivadeva,

Varwfapraghsa of four

and

kamedha, p e r f o r m e d i n (CSX, p. 422).

the beginning of the three seasons

months

298 from a n y a n d every p l a c e . he c a n seek m o n e y should A not from earn clan. He 36. cloth.

Garuda

Purna

If he is terribly harassed by hunger a k i n g , his p u p i l o r a p e r s o n o f his. by resorting to haughtiness, h y p o should nails preferably wear a white-

crisy or cunning. householder Hair, moustache and 37. always be shall be kept always clean. He should While going holy staff a n d

H e s h o u l d n o t t a k e f o o d u n l e s s s u p e r v i s e d b y his wife. He should never speak unpleasant words. humble with the sacred thread on. hold in the

r o u n d the idols in a t e m p l e he should water pot. 38. He should never pass

urine

riverbeds, shady

groves, ashes, cowsheds, running water, 39.

facing fire, sun, m o o n ,

cows, water, w o m e n a n d brahmins, or at the evening hours. He should never g a z e at fire, sun, a n u d e w o m a n , a w o m a n e n g a g e d i n the s e x u a l act, wine, faeces, etc. H e should n e v e r s l e e p with his h e a d t o t h e w e s t . 40. faeces or 41. nor H e s h o u l d n e v e r s p i t i n w a t e r nor p o u r b l o o d , u r i n e , poison He be in water. F e e t should not be shown to fire off his person. he cupped palms He should not share the b e d So also

for w a r m i n g , n o r s h o u l d p e j u m p a c r o s s f i r e . should not drink water a sleeping should waken up

g a m b l e with dishonest gamblers nor should w i t h a sick 42. person. All adverse activities

should be eschewed.

the s m o k e from a 43.

funeral

pyre, river b i n k s , the b u r n i n g hair a suckling cow, never enter a

a n d h u s k a n d its a s h e s .

H e s h o u l d n e v e r sit o n a b r o k e n j a r . He should never accept ^ e e s

He should never pull

place except by the proper door. 44-45. study day and The annual rites)

from a miserly king decrying scriptures. U p k a r m a rite ( R e v i s i n g o f V e d i c should or on b e p e r f o r m e d o n t h e full on H a s t a asterism or fifth Rohini asterism in the The expiatory

m o o n d a y in the m o n t h of r v a n a , of the bright of P a u s a rite fortnight, or month Utsarga 46. on Astak

(7th, 8th or 9th) days.

should be

duly performed

outside near a place

where there is natural water. ( T h e r e a r e thirty seven A n a d h y y a d a y s ( H o l i d a y s for V e d i c S t u d y ) w h e n any one of t h e s e a disciple, a p r e c e p -

1.96.55
tor, a k i n s m a n or a the R t v i k dies three days are

299 Anadhyya, a Vedic

s o a l s o after 47. there is 48. sons) or

U p k a r m a a n d U t s a r g a rites, w h e n

scholar of one's own b r a n c h of V e d a dies. At the S a n d h y hours, when thunder rumbles, when an earthquake, eighth, fall of a c o m e t or a meteor, V e d i c and fifteenth days o f the

recital should be stopped and A r a n y a k a portion is read. The fourteenth days, lunar half m o n t h , the eclipse 49. pig When any the j u n c t i o n s of R t u s ( s e a dog, snake, cat

a n d after t a k i n g a m e a l o r a c c e p t i n g f e e s i n a r d d h a , animalfrog, mungoose, the teacher and walks between the pupil, when the

o w l falls o r f l i e s u p 50. braying patients is asses,

( A n a d h y y a for the d a y ) . children or g r o a n i n g sick Where there is ground

W h e n the s o u n d o f t h e b a r k i n g d o g s , h o w l i n g j a c k a l s , h o o t i n g owls, c r y i n g (Vedic or a heard Study is s t o p p e d ) . d r a nearby or place, when

excreta, d e a d body 51. is in thunder In an

cremation

or a fallen sinner ( c e s s a t i o n of V e d i c s t u d y ) . unclean lightning, of the the on the highway, when there the m a n is having the h a n d there is a sandstorm sun blazes), and

still w e t after t a k i n g m e a l s , i n the m i d d l e o f t w o w a t e r y p l a c e s , the middle 52. when dust night quarters or when burn (Anadhyya). When is (when the the raised d u r i n g snowfall, w h e n preceptor is

r u n n i n g , w h e n t h e r e i s foul s m e l l o f s o m e t h i n g " v e r y i m p o r t a n t p e r s o n " visits t h e h o u s e , 53. yas When mounting a of V e d i c is mule, for the camel,

rotting, when a cart, elephant, for not not the be be

h o r s e , b o a t , t r e e o r a hill. or cessation 54. performed. treaded on. treaded on. 55. Brahmins What /nonce.

T h e s e a r e t h e thirty s e v e n A n a d h y Study by special reasons V e d a s should shadow be shall

prohibited or

T h e preceptor's Another m a n ' s

king's

wife s h o u l d n o t

transgressed.

B l o o d , faeces, u r i n e , s p i t o r v o m i t e d m a t t e r , e t c . s h o u l d n o t b e Serpents, Ksatriyas and the Atman

s h o u l d n e v e r b e s l i g h t e d . L e a v i n g s o f food p a r t a k e n , e x c r e t a , e t c . s h o u l d b e k e p t far e v e n f r o m t h e e x t r e m i t y o f t h e foot..

r.f

(is

oo""*

300 56. No one 57. them. The should

Garuda

Purna be a to

acts enjoined b y V e d a s a n d S m r t i s should N o o n e s h o u l d b e hit i n v u l n e r a b l e censured or beaten. Only a son be and

performed in faith.

parts.

disciple can be beaten. All v i r t u e s s h o u l d b e p r a c t i s e d ; n o t h i n g A householder should never have verbal 58. b a t h in 59. ings W i t h o u t offering t h e f i v e p i n d a s h e another man's p o n d o r well. contrary disputes shall not with take taken

his m o t h e r , f a t h e r or a g u e s t . A b a t h is better personal fire

i n a river, f o u n t a i n s a n d n a t u r a l p u d d l e s a n d e d d i e s . T h e use of another man's bed and be avoided. Unless belongfood should be and should t h e r e i s d a n g e r t o life,

offered by a m i s e r , e n e m y or a m a n w i t h o u t s a c r e d b e refused. 60-64. eaten : a practising Food a offered b y a these people

should person,

never a

bamboo-worker, usury,

calumniated low c l a s s

person

person a c t i n g as priest of prostitutes t o the

their f l o c k , p h y s i c i a n s fessional stagers of plays,

people, eunuchs, profood, village Meat

c r u e l , f i e r c e , fallen V r t y a s , h a u g h t y husbands, etc.

p e o p l e , p e r s o n s p a r t a k i n g o f o t h e r p e o p l e ' s l e a v i n g s after persons who misuse s a c r e d texts, henpecked priests, wicked kings, washermen, ungrateful, backbiters, wine-merchants, bards,

h a n g s m e f , liars^

goldsmiths,

should not be taken without consecration. F o o d m i x e d with hair or g e r m s should not be taken. ed o v e r by course, a sinner, or touched kneaded F o o d cooked more by a woman in h e r be t h a n twelve monthlyavoided. by : h o u r s b e f o r e , p a r t a k e n b y a n o t h e r , sniffed a t b y a d o g , sprinklsqueezed by others should Similarly, food

Insufficient food s h o u l d a l s o b e a v o i d e d [ o r o f food s h o u l d a l s o b e a v o i d e d ] . 65. Among dras,

unlimited quantity sniffed a t food

a cow or a bird or t r a m p l e d by a n y o n e should be avoided. these persons can serve Dsas1, Goplas2, Kulamitras, 66. Food cooked a day Ardhasrins, N p i t a 3 a n d one before c a n be taken i f i t has

who h a s d e d i c a t e d h i m s e l f to the task.

1. 2. 3.

Perhaps A A barber.

fisherman.

cowherd.

1.97.3 b e e n s e a s o n e d w i t h oil o r g h e e . fried i n o i l o r g h e e . 67. mare) M i l k of a camel, a single-hoofed animal

301 N o food p r e p a r e d w i t h w h e a t day unless it is

o r b a r l e y s h o u l d b e t a k e n after t h e l a p s e o f a

( s u c h as parrots

and

that of women should be avoided. Dtyha Srasas, (gallinule),

T h e flesh of and

carnivorous animals, birds, should be avoided. 68-71. Sarhyvas, (Jay) and 72. and as takes m e a t one does not 73. If After eating

single-hoofed a n i m a l ' s Krsaras, (fried. Appas, askulis

f l e s h , s w a n s , c r a n e s , storks,

swallows, unconsecrated

Pyasas [all puddings], other birds, eating fish,

m a c a r o n i s ) 1 the f l e s h o f K u r a r a J l a p d a , K h a j a r t a , C s a red-footed and onion animals, the m a n s h o u l d a t o n e for the sin b y f a s t i n g t h r e e d a y s . By garlic o n e b e c o m e s sinful If one manes in r d d h a atonement one after should perform G n d r y a n a .

worshipping deities a n d

a c q u i r e sin. o n e kills a n i m a l s o t h e r w i s e ( a n d e a t s their f l e s h ) Eschewing flesh a devotee attains

h e will fall i n t o hell a n d r e m a i n t h e r e for a s m a n y d a y s a s t h e r e are hairs on that animal. G o d H a r i after d u e p r a y e r .

CHAPTER Teachings Yjavalkya said 1. : Sirs, I

NINETYSEVEN of Yjavalkya

O good

shall

now e x p o u n d

the p r o c e s s of akha, with hot by

cleaning articles. Articles water. 2-3. horn The

s u c h a s g o l d , silver,

pearls,

r o p e s , l e a t h e r ( ? ) s e a t s ( w o o d e n ) a n d vessels a r e c l e a n e d purification by paring of sacrificial that of ladles sacrificial a is by vessel

water; that of grains by mere sprinkling; articles and scrubbing.

1.

that of

wooden and m i x t u r e of

W o o l l e n or silken stuff is purified by

A wag-tail.

302 fresh c o w ' s urine and hot water.

Garuda Articles received as A by

Purna alms mud hair, over

b e c o m e p u r e w h e n t h e m e n d i c a n t sees his wife's f a c e . p o t b e c o m e s p u r e by keeping it over fire. 4. it. I f f o o d i s defiled b y a c o w sniffing a t i t or f l i e s o r w o r m s i t c a n b e purified b y s p r i n k l i n g h o l y 5. Vessels m a d e

ashes

T h e g r o u n d i s purified b y s w e e p i n g o r s c r u b b i n g . of brass, lead a n d copper are cleaned I r o n a n d b e l l m e t e l vessels A vessel by not known to be be are water.

by acid solution or t a m a r i n d water. are cleaned by ashes and impure is pure. 6. removed. 7. or If a vessel is

contaminated

faeces i t s h a l l

c l e a n e d b y c l a y a n d w a t e r till the b a d s m e l l a n d stickiness N a t u r a l w a t e r g l a d l y d r u n k b y cows i s p u r e . A p i e c e of flesh d r o p p e d d o w n by a animal is naturally pure. dog, a

candla rays, are

a carnivorous

T h e sun's these

fire, the s h a d o w of a g o a t or a cow, t h e g r o u n d a l l naturally pure. 8-10. sleep, one

T h e f o a m a n d froth o f h o r s e s a n d g o a t s a r e After b a t h or a d r i n k , a street, a n d

pure,

t h e i r d u n g is a l s o p u r e . should

after s n e e z i n g ,

t a k i n g food, t r a v e r s i n g shedding tears Acamana stay in he the

c h a n g i n g clothes if he does not Gods of

perform A c a m a n a twice. should

After s n e e z i n g , s p i t t i n g ,

sleeping, perform Tire, etc.

or c h a n g i n g clothes, right ear of a b r a h m i n .

t o u c h his r i g h t e a r .

CHAPTER Teachings Tjavalkya 1-2. Please said I : shall

NINETYEIGHT of Tjuavalkya

now expound sirs

t h e p r o c e s s o f m a k i n g gifts. Brahmins are are is regularly deserving observe rituals person as he

listen, O

noble

of e x c e l l e n t rites.

s u p e r i o r t o others a n d t h o s e w h o still b e t t e r . T h e p e r s o n w h o h a s to them. Know him to be the

realised B r a h m a n

is superior

1.98.13 endowed with penance. be given 3. to deserving

303
C o w s , plots of land, g o l d , etc. should p e r s o n s after d u l y h o n o u r i n g t h e m . a person devoid of By taking it he d e g r a d e s the giver as persons is to

A gift s h o u l d n e v e r be t a k e n by

learning a n d austerity. w e l l a s himself. 4.

E v e r y d a y , gifts s h o u l d b e g i v e n t o d e s e r v i n g festive o r special occasions; reverence and

particularly on one's ability. 5. silver, 6. and each bell-metal 7. A

when request according

m a d e , a gift s h o u l d b e g i v e n w i t h milch cow

w i t h its h o r n s c a s e d i n g o l d ,

hoofs i n vessel

should be given a l o n g with clothes, E a c h horn is to be cased in o f t h e hoofs i n vessel s h o u l d seven a

a bell-metal

a n d sufficient m o n e y . pala weight of g o l d ; of silver; the T h e details It should be that be of pala weights weight.

be fifty palas in

of the c a l f a r e as m e n t i o n e d before. T h e calf m a y be a bull or a cow-calf. g i v e n w i t h a g o l d o r silver v e s s e l . T h e calf should

t h e c o w i t s e l f a n d free f r o m s i c k n e s s . 8. The g i v e r r e m a i n s i n h e a v e n for a s many years as

t h e r e a r e h a i r s o n the b o d y o f t h a t c o w . 9. Earth. 10. A c o w i n the a c t o f d e l i v e r y

If the cow with two on feet

is tawny, a n d the

i t e n a b l e s his s e v e n g e n e r a t i o n s t o cross hell. f a c e o f t h e c a l f p r o t r u d i n g f r o m the v a g i n a is a par with whether be

A p e r s o n w h o g i v e s a c o w free from s i c k n e s s without the feet of the articles, weary

yielding milk or not, with or honoured in heaven. 11. nursing The a sick massaging person, of

should

of a

wayfarer, of taken

worship

g o d , w a s h i n g t h e feet

brahmins, a n d s c r u b b i n g the place where b r a h m i n s h a v e f o o d a l l t h e s e a r e o n a p a r w i t h t h e gift o f a c o w . 12. heaven. 13. By giving a brahmin what he desires one

attains

By giving grounds, lamps, food, By giving house,-grains,

raiments and butter necklace, one is trees,

one attains prosperity. umbrella, carts, butter, cool water, b e d , a n d unguents, in heaven. honoured

304 14. T h e giver of the Vedas (in

Garuda Manuscript)

Purna attains Those

the r e g i o n o f B r a h m a

not accessible

even to the g o d s .

who t r a n s c r i b e t h e V e d a s with m e a n i n g s , y a j a s t r a s , D h a r m a stras, on p a y m e n t , also, a t t a i n the region of B r a h m a . 15. the tories) Since God has created the universe with texts with bhsyas Vedas as basis, collection 16. 17. 18. He who of V e d i c (comrnen-

s h o u l d b e d o n e w i t h effort. transcribes Itihsas1 (Epics) or Purnas or V e d i c text or

m a k e s a gift of t h e m , A t t a i n s m e r i t e q u a l t o t h a t o f gifting A twice-born shall never listen to e v e n t w i c e t h e fruit. m a t e r i a l i s t i c disc o u r s e s , false a r g u m e n t s , s p e e c h e s i n p r a k r i t 2 o r f o r e i g n 3 t o n g u e s , since these d e g r a d e h i m . 19. attains A deserving person the world of the w h o d e s i s t s f r o m a c c e p t i n g gifts A n offering o f K u a g i v e r o f gifts.

grass, water, vegetables, milk a n d fragrant u n g u e n t s shall never b e refused. 20. from For the of propitiation of gods or guests or the manes accepted even an impotent deeds except a prostitute, whatever one gets without solicitation should be a man evil p e r s o n , a fallen m a n o r a n e n e m y .

CHAPTER

NINETYNINE

Teachings

of Tjavalkya

Yjavalkya said :
1-2. I shall e x p o u n d r d d h a , the performance of which d a y s ( 7 t h , 8th, 9th days i n r e m o v e s s i n s . T h e o p p o r t u n e t i m e for r d d h a i s a n y o f the following : T h e New moon day, Astak Pausa, 1. 2. 3. M g h a and Phlguna) any special prosperous occasion T h e term is especially applied to the M a h b h r a t a . CDHM, p. 128. Prkrtas generally m e a n t the regional dialects. T h e reference is perhaps to the foreign l a n g u a g e s .

1.99.14 of windfall, when one the Pretapaksa ( d a r k half of B h d r a p a d a ) h a s sufficient w e a l t h , w h e n the V y a t i p t a in the (thirteenth d a y

305
the two are (when the sun transits to Capricorn a n d cancer) deserving brahmins (deviation of planets),

Sakrnti days

a v a i l a b l e , the equinoxes, Gajacchy rddha. 3-5. young man, varnika, a law, The a

dark half combined with

M a g h s t a r ) , s o l a r e c l i p s e , l u n a r e c l i p s e , a n d a d e s i r e t o perform brahmins good uncle, constituting the deities o f r d d h a

s h o u l d be from a m o n g these. A G r e a t r o t r i y a ( V e d i c S c h o l a r ) astrologer, a m a n of T r i m a d h u s , a T r i s a s i s t e r ' s s o n , R t v i k , s o n - i n - l a w , p r e c e p t o r , father-ina T r i n c i k e t a , d a u g h t e r ' s son, a disciple, the persons devoted to their m o t h e r s A sickly

maternal

relatives, kinsmen, B r a h m i n s scrupulously observing rituals, Pacgni Brahmacrins and a n d fathers. 6-7. T h e following should not be entertained. p e r s o n , a p e r s o n deficient i n l i m b s o r

having additional appento convennot

d a g e s , a o n e - e y e d m a n , s o n of a w i d o w after r e m a r r i a g e , a fallen s i n n e r like A v a k r n a a n d t h o s e w h o d o n o t c o n f o r m tions, a n d an a-Vaisnava (non-believer in V i s n u ) . T h e s e are mins) 8. shall On be the

w o r t h y o f b e i n g i n v i t e d for r d d h a . T h e y ( t h e d e s e r v i n g b r a h invited the d a y before when they shall observe day of rddha e a r l y i n t h e m o r n i n g they provide seats, on shall be celibacy. s h o u l d p e r f o r m A c a m a n a a n d sit i n their r e s p e c t i v e s e a t s c a l l e d D a i v a a n d Pitrya. t h e g r o u n d itself. 9. In the D a i v a (divine) seats two brahmins seated facing east. b r a h m i n s shall b e 10. the same The but In the Pitrya seats seated facing north. maternal grandfathers also is be the s a m e as in V a i v a d e v a will ( o f the manes) three If it is not possible to

a r r a n g e m e n t for the m a n t r a s be

r d d h a . Water should g r a s s for s e a t s . 11.

g i v e n for w a s h i n g h a n d s a n d K u a and Anuj (permission)

AvhanaInvocation

with the R k m a n t r a s 12-14. in a mantra peculiar way)

of Vivedevas shall be he s h o u l d strew should

performed. With the With the

I n t h e vessel t i e d w i t h P a v i t r a ( K u a g r a s s t w i s t e d barley grains. be sprinkled.

Sanno Devi, w a t e r

306 m a n t r a Yavosi b a r l e y g r a i n s s h a l l b e s t r e w n . Y divy t h e y s h o u l d b e g i v e n water, Pavitra shall offerings sprinkled be made in the right the of

Garuda W i t h the

Purna mantra

h a n d s . Similarly, scents, t o left a n d w a t e r s h a l l b e number the of K u a blades the housepurpose Arghya and make pro-

a n d incense should b e given. T o the m a n e s the from Twice

anticlockwise.

shall then be given. Pitrs ( m a n e s ) Uiantas tv. W i t h the p e r m i s s i o n holder should repeat the

shall be invoked with the Rk brahmins yantu nah. T h e

mantra

of barley grains c a n be served with gingelly seeds. other things shall be performed as before. 15. mise to After the giving Arghya he should duly b r a h m i n s . With the m a n t r a Pitrbhyah

sthnam asi

he should b e n d the vessel. 16-20. and with {as reciting Vyhrti permission He should hold the c o o k e d food soaked in b u t t e r the and to mantra it in Rks Agnau fire. They karisye etc. he arid shall then take say obtain the and place He shall should r e c i t e Gyatri1 Yathsukham silently. food

Madhu vt,

convenient anger.

you).

W h a t e v e r food a n d without 21-23. Till

H a v i s y a they require the brahmins (are you smah are fully we

shall b e served t h e m

fully s a t i a t e d h e s h a l l b e He shall ask the The brahThe satiated. he satiated?) are fully

reciting holy m a n t r a s a n d the previous j a p a s . b r a h m i n s Trpth mins shall rice cooked left stha over r e p l y : Trpth

should

be strewn on the g r o u n d slowly. seeds shall face the

After t a k i n g c o o k e d r i c e w i t h , g i n g e l l y their food. 24.

s o u t h a n d offer P i n d a s n e a r t h e p l a c e w h e r e the b r a h m i n s t o o k T o m a t e r n a l grandfathers also the s a m e p r o c e d u r e after t h a t . should be mentioned. T h e n s h a l l b e offered t o t h e that T h e n Svasti ( h a i l t h e e ) gives A c a m a n a

t h e A k s a y y a U d a k a ( e v e r fruitful w a t e r ) b r a h m i n s a l o n g with t h e fee 25. the When when the the h e s h a l l p r o c e e d for S v a d h k r a . brahmins brahmins permit Pitrbhyah repeat

a c c o r d i n g t o c a p a c i t y . After by saying

Vcyatm unto

( l e t it be r e c i t e d ) he shall say manes) water on t h e g r o u n d .

1. R V . 1.90.6.

Svadh

(svadh

it he should sprinkle

1.99.38
26-27. devas be He shall and say offer Vive devh priyantm (Let

307 all

pleased)

water. " M a y those who give us Let us

flourish. L e t Vedas bid them 28. The before

flourish.

L e t n o t faith f o r s a k e u s .

h a v e m u c h t o g i v e . " T h u s addressed b y the b r a h m i n s h e should farewell w i t h sweet w o r d s a n d s a l u t a t i o n . While bidding farewell he s h o u l d the promise recite had Vje Vje. ptra in which been invoked

Arghya should 29. 30.

be placed in proper position a n d the brahmins going round in Pradaksin night. and prayer he

should be formally dismissed. After .should p a r t a k e o f the l e a v i n g s o f P i t r s a l o n g w i t h his wife. He shall r e m a i n celibate that Nndl The rites i n addition form no of the At the cerem o n y of attaining prosperity but with 31. t h e rites a s w e l l a s fee a r e s i m i l a r P i n d a s will b e m i x e d a ( c u c u m b e r ) fruits. r d d h a p e r f o r m e d for a s s i g n e d for (invocation) Daiva. Only

with barley grains a n d K a r k a n d h u 1 Ekoddista has single m a n e 32. ana i n view seat

Pavitra is used.

O n e dish is p r e p a r e d . a n d AgnkarUpatisfhatm Abhithey with when

It is devoid o f A v h a n a

( p l a c i n g the H a v i s y a i n f i r e ) . T h e r e a l s o the p r o c e d u r e i s I n t h e p l a c e o f e v e r fruitful be delighted) is also water said approach) is u s e d a t t h e t i m e o f farewell.

anticlockwise. ( m a y you ramyatm

(may you In

r e p l y Abhirath smah 33-34.

(we a r e d e l i g h t e d ) . Sapindkarana ceremony four'vessels F o r A r g h y a the beginitems are deceased should

scents, water a n d gingelly seeds shall be used. n i n g with T e samn, e t c . s h a l l b e r e c i t e d . as in the previous. 35. 36. T h e Ekoddista can be performed Cooked rice with

Pitrptra is kept covered with Pretaptra. T w o m a n t r a s T h e other for the

women also. b e offered a t 37-38.

I f S a p i n d k a r a n a i s p e r f o r m e d , a y e a r after d e a t h , water pot ( s o d a k u m b h a ) the end In of the year. T h e Pindas can be given the first m o n t h let soaked

to cows, g o a t s or

b r a h m i n s o r d e p o s i t e d i n fire o r w a t e r . that annual S r d d h a in

b i m offer H a v i s y n n a (rice c o o k e d w i t h v e g e t a b l e s a n d

1.

Zizyphus nummularia.

308 in g h e e ) , in the

Garuda

Purna

second m o n t h milk p u d d i n g a n d in the succRuru, boar or rabbit. T h e grandfathers

e e d i n g m o n t h h e s h o u l d offer f i s h , o r t h e f l e s h o f d e e r , g o a t s , b i r d , R a m , Prsata, Ena, shall be satisfied In month. 39-42. arrow day. t h e r a i n y m o n t h o n the t h i r t e e n t h d a y w h e n is performed from the first to the fourteenth there i s M a g h s t a r a l s o , i f a n y o n e d i e s b e i n g w o u n d e d b y a n rddha He will o b t a i n d a u g h t e r s , gold, children, valour, fields, metallic with this offer w i t h i n c r e a s i n g relish every

strength

p r o s p e r i t y , e x c e l l e n t s o n s , h e a l t h , f a m e , f r e e d o m from

sorrow, s a l v a t i o n , w e a l t h , l e a r n i n g , f l u e n c y o f s p e e c h , w e a l t h , c a t t l e horses, i f h e d u l y p e r f o r m s t h e r d d h a . 43-45. give to him Similarly, when the l o n g life, progeny, m a n e s of a

b r h m a n a or a heaven or

twice b o r n a r e gratified u n d e r t h e s t a r s K r t t i k t o B h a r a n i they wealth, learning, salvation or kingdom on earth.

CHAPTER Teachings Tjavalkya 1 -3. person said : listen

ONE HUNDRED of Tjavalkya

Please

and

understand

the

symptoms dreams

of a as

harassed by V i n y a k a

( L o r d of impediments and obsand sees h e a d l e s s t r u n k s

t a c l e s ] . T h e V i c t i m suffers from h a l l u c i n a t i o n s a n d i f h e o r she p l u n g e s i n t o d e e p w a t e r s and less shaven he heads. All becomes morose T h e king is not

e n t e r p r i s e s b e i n g i m p e d e d a n d fruitand exhausted without any a p p a r e n t restored to his k i n g d o m , the virgin not get

reason.

does not get

a husband, a n d the pregnant w o m a n does

a son. T h e a t o n e m e n t a n d r e m e d y is thus : On an auspicious d a y he should be b a t h e d duly. White m u s t a r d seeds a n d sandal paste should be ground together a n d k n e a d e d with ghee. All medicinal herbs a n d fragrant essences should be m i x e d a n d the admixture smeared over the patient's h e a d . 4-5. stivcana The patient is s e a t e d o n a n a u s p i c i o u s soft l e a t h e r requested to recite S v a the same shape and Clay, R o c a n of cushion red in colour. mantras. Brahmins are

F o u r pitchers

colour a r e f i l l e d with water from the s a m e pool.

1.100.17 (yellow p i g m e n t ) , sandal paste, The brahmins you. then flow May

309 a n d G u g g u l u ( g u m resin) a r e recite thus : " T h e thousandwhich the sages drank deep is (purificatory) (moon) the P v a m n

respectively put into them. 6-9. eyed, being the the head, ever." 10. be held 11. After the ablution, K u a grass soaked in g h e e shall head, and in m u s t a r d oil b e p o u r e d i n t o h i s the public road invoked by r o u n d his With fire the hundred-currented poured the to the over

h y m n s sanctify y o u . sun, seven sages your

Let God Varuna

the king S o m a

planet J u p i t e r , the g o d I n d r a , the wind g o d a n d resuscitate the y o u r lost s p l e n d o u r . t h e line and the of parting L e t ill l u c k hair, the locks of hair, ears,

sticking

forehead,

e y e s b e d i s p e l l e d for

e a r s a n d o v e r his f o r e h e a d d r o p b y d r o p . ignited evil bound. ( w h e r e four r o a d s m e e t ) K u a Various kinds of cooked ground. Svh mantras, 12-14. spirits o f K s m n d a 1 a n d R j a p u t r a

shall b e m e a s u r e d a n d

In the C a t u s p a t h a

grass shall be s p r e a d on the of three kinds, sweets shall prays be to the 15. form curd,

a n d u n c o o k e d food, flowers of various colours, sweet scents, wine milk p u d d i n g , cooked food, ghee, j a g g e r y on the ground. T h e preceptor then placed

g o d d e s s A m b i k a n d offers t h e f o o d offering w i t h grass and m u s t a r d seeds he shall perrites a n d p r a y t o A m b i k

joined palms. With D r v "Svastyayana" 16. me good 17. (Bon-voyage)

for t h e b i r t h o f s o n s . " G i v e me beauty. luck. G i v e me Give me fame, O G o d d e s s , give me wealth. G i v e m e all sons, give

desired objects." H e shall delight the preceptor shall brahmins with be white cloth a n d unguents. T h e given a p a i r of cloths. T h e

planets are then to be worshipped.

1.

Gucurbita pepo.

310 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED of

Garuda AND ONE

Purna

Teachings Tjavalkya 1. said :

Tjavalkya

A p e r s o n d e s i r o u s of w e a l t h a n d s p l e n d o u r , for p e a c e a n d

or a

per-

son wishing

tranquillity or a person affected by

the m a l i g n a n t a s p e c t o f the p l a n e t s s h a l l p e r f o r m t h e P l a n e t a r y Sacrifice ( G r a h a y g a ) . T h e s e a r e the planets a s e n u m e r a t e d b y learned men. 2. 3. by The Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, Saturn, R h u and Ketu. T h e malignant aspect is countermanded copper, bellmetal, their respectively wearing 4. 5. persons crystal, the red s a n d a l w o o d , respective colours to be red,

g o l d , silver, i r o n , l e a d a n d bell m e t a l o n t h e i r b o d i e s . O sages, know By shall the be white, red, yellow, yellow, w h i t e b l a c k , b l a c k a n d b l a c k . articles asked be f a v o u r i t e t o t h e p l a n e t s t h e affected to given p e r f o r m H o m a after d u e a b l u t i o n . a s gifts t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e c l o t h e s

G o l d pieces should and flowers. 6.

L i b a t i o n s with s w e e t s m e l l i n g s u b s t a n c e s , i n c e n s e a n d m a n t r a s for t h e

g u m resin s h a l l b e offered w i t h their r e s p e c t i v e p r i n c i p a l as well as s u b o r d i n a t e deities. 7-8. in order. Mantra krsnena1 Imam dev2 Agnir mrdh3 Udbuddhyasva* Brhaspate paridiye5 The Homa shall b e

performed reciting these R k s Planet Sun Moon Mars Mercury Jupiter

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

RV. V S K RV. RV.

1.35.2. 11.3.2. 8.44.16. 10.103.4

V S . 15.54.

1.101.12 Annt parisruto rasam1 anno devi2 Kay nacitr* Keturii krnvai 9. Sacrificial Venus Saturn Rhu Ketu

311

twigs shall be soaked in honey, ghee a n d

c u r d a n d offered i n t h e f i r e . T h e t w i g s for t h e d i f f e r e n t p l a n e t s s h a l l b e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g trees a s i n t h e p r e v i o u s o r d e r : A r k a , Pala, Drv

7

Khadira

Apmrga5,

Pippala,

Udumbara, am8,

and K u a grass. N a i v e d y a a n d D a k s i n t o b e offered a s b e l o w . Naivedya treacle rice milk p u d d i n g Havisya sastika-rice in milk rice with c u r d havis pies meat mixed Pulao Daksin cow akha bull gold cloth horse black cow iron goat the kings r e a p the

10-12. Planet 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. fruits Sun

Moon Mars Mercury Jupiter Venus Saturn Rhu Ketu

P l a n e t s a r e to be worshipped by all; E v e n of their w o r s h i p .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

VS. RV. Ibid.

19.75. 4.31.1. 1.6.3. aspera.

10.9.4.

Achyranthes Cynodon

Prospis apicigera. dactylon.

312

Garuda CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED of AND TWO

Purna

Teachings Tjavalkya 1. said :

Tjavalkya

O sages, I

shall e x p o u n d T h e person

the V n a p r a s t h a ( R e t i r e d If he goes alone fosters t h e s a c r e d is patient, as also the m a n e s , He shall grow He should not

life i n H e r m i t a g e ) .

w h o w i s h e s t o t a k e t o i t shall

g o t o t h e forest e i t h e r a l o n e o r w i t h his wife. h e l e a v e s his wife t o t h e c a r e o f h i s s o n . 2. honours 3. trolled. 4. meditate. living A V n a p r a s t h a observes celibacy, and sacred the baths who gratify keep even fire fire, exercises control over m i n d brahmins guests. shall shall shall He He He deities and

sense-organs,

servants. a day.

l o n g h a i r , b e a r d a n d m o u s t a c h e s . H e s h a l l b e p e r f e c t l y self-contake three continue accept m o n e y charities. V e d i c studies. H e shall regularly in what is beneficent to all his p e r s o n a l n e e d s o n c e o r He shall be He shall engaged attend to

beings. 5-6.

twice a month. H e shall l i e o n t h e b a r e g r o u n d . H e s h a l l d o everyIn s u m m e r the he shall in rainy season he He with thing without worrying over the results. stand in the midst of five fires a n d s h a l l lie o n t h e b a r e g r o u n d .

In the winter he shall wear wet He shall be contented

clothes. D u r i n g the d a y h e shall perform Y o g i c Exercises. shall not b e a n g r y with a n y o n e . himself.

CHAPTER

ONE HUNDRED of

AND

THREE

Teachings Tjuavalkya 1-2. perform said : After At

Tjavalkya

I s h a l l m e n t i o n t h e d u t i e s of m e n d i c a n t s . O N o b l e returning the end f r o m the forest h e s h a l l f i r s t and then the o f t h e rites h e s h a l l a s s i m i l a t e the sacrifice Sarva-Veda-Pradaksin

Sirs, know them. Prjpatya Vrata.

1.104.3 t h e f i e r y s p l e n d o u r i n himself. living beings and be tranquil. the water 3. roaming 4. a single yogic pot He shall wish good for

313 all and He

B e a r i n g t h r e e staffs a n d h o l d i n g

he shall resort to the v i l l a g e seeking a l m s he shall c o n t i n u e seeking a l m s .

d i s c a r d a l l p h y s i c a l ' l a b o u r for r e m u n e r a t i o n . Without erring about in the should not be seen in the evening a l o n g with other village, or he m a y without b e i n g ever a m b i t i o u s . He should b e c o m e a P a r a m a h a m s a (great saint) with staff a n d self c o n t r o l . and When sheds the he finally achieves the mortal body h e will mendicants

do simple journeys

accomplishment 5. By a regular fond

attain immortality. practice of g u e s t s , of yogic a exercises a n d taking who performs food i n s m a l l q u a n t i t i e s h e will h a v e t h e g r e a t a c h i e v e m e n t . A donor, a person householder r d d h a a n d knower ( J n i n ) becomes liberated.

CHAPTER

ONE Teachings

HUNDRED of

AND F O U R

Tjavalkya

Tjavalkya 1.

said

: B r a h m i n first falls i n t o h e l l . is born as a d o g , a mule,

A person who murders a

W h e n his sin h a s a l l b u t v a n i s h e d h e to become 2. worm black dumb. person who blade and of becomes a steals

a camel, etc., and finally when he is born as a m a n he is b o u n d The gold becomes a germ and a one with

and a teeth 3.

grass.

T h e p e r s o n w h o s l e e p s w i t h his tuberculosis or a leper. patient or T h e s e b a d results

p r e c e p t o r ' s wife s h a l l befall cannot eat

swollen nails who

the c h i l d r e n at all.

o f the m u r d e r e r . steals food g r a i n b e c o m e s o n e w h o steals the musical who notes steals A person who

T h e person

A person

and instruments becomes a

dumb man.

money has a surplus a p p e n d a g e of limbs. A back-biter b e c o m e s o n e w h o s e nostrils b e g i n t o rot a n d putrefy.

314 4. same. 5-6. O n e w h o p u r c h a s e s a girl, b e c o m e s A person who steals

Garuda

Parana

oil b e c o m e s o n e w h o d r i n k s t h e a d e m o n in the becomes a a

forest; w h o steals a g e m , b e c o m e s a b a s e - b o r n ; w h o steals vegetables, b e c o m e s a p e a c o c k ; strew; goat; of g r a i n s , a of water, a crow; 7-9. putrid or A he thief of pearl-necklace a monkey; r a t ; of fruit, of m e a t , of a n i m a l s ,

an eagle; of cloth, a leper; is

and of salt^ a jragged one. malicious person is becomes one whose mouth poor, or b o r n devoid of g o o d traits, base

m a n . Persons with g o o d conduct are born wealthy a n d endowed with food grains.

>
CHAPTER

fAf
ONE HUNDRED Teachings of AND FIVE

Tjavalkya

Tjavalkya 1. enjoined 2.

said

: fails to do w h a t he is

A person is d e g r a d e d when he to do and does what is

forbidden a n d also by not

c u r b i n g his s e n s e o r g a n s . H e n c e expiatory acts have to be performed with great c a r e for p u r i f i c a t i o n . T h e r e b y his c o n s c i e n c e b e c o m e s c l e a r a n d the w o r l d h e a t t a i n s b e c o m e s p u r e . 3-6. atonement o f sins. T h e whole whereby his world sins becomes happy are dispelled. if he performs who never Those

d o a t o n e m e n t a n d r e p e n t fall i n t o h e l l , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e g r a v i t y T h e n a m e s o f different hells a r e : T m i s r a , L o h a a k u (agitated b y putrefying Pka, a gold, a Sajvana, Nadpatha, Mahstealer of (Iron bolted), Ptigandha Samkula smell), Hamsbha, Lohitoda, nilaya, murderer of b r a h m i n s , a

K k o l a m , A n d h a t m i s r a , Avcl a n d K u m b h a wine-drinker, a

defiler o f p r e c e p t o r ' s b e d a n d 7-8. valent Decrying Vedas

a person who associates with any a n d despising preceptors are equia b r a h m i n in gravity. T a k i n g

o f t h e s e t h e s e a n d s i m i l a r s i n n e r s fall i n t o h e l l . t o t h e sin of m u r d e r i n g

1.105.20

315

f o o d p r o h i b i t e d , l o w a n d b a s e a c t s , a n d d r i n k i n g t h e h o n e y off t h e lips o f a m a i d e n i n h e r m o n t h l y c o u r s e a r e a l l a k i n t o d r i n k i n g of wine. 9. Stealing of a horse is on a par with stealing of gold. Coitus with a friend's to wife, a v i r g i n , a w o m a n of a birth to defiling of p r e c e p t o r ' s wife. mother's h e r sister, daughter

low c a s t e , a w o m a n o f t h e s a m e c l a n o r o n e w h o g a v e oneself-all these a r e sins a k i n

10-12. I l l e g i t i m a t e i n t i m a c y w i t h f a t h e r ' s sister, sister, aunt, one's o w n sister, a n d wife cut mother's and one's co-wife, own preceptor's m a n ' s penis daughter should be

all these, a r e on a p a r with defiling p r e c e p t o r ' s b e d . T h e g u i l t y off a n d he should be killed. T h e in w o m a n too s h a l l b e k i l l e d i f she h a d b e e n a w i l l i n g p a r t n e r the illegal intercourse. 13-20. T h e r e a r e m a n y U p a p t a k a s ( m i n o r sins a n d t u r p i non p a y m e n t of debts, not m a i n t a i n i n g s a c r e d when the elder of salt, bachelor, l e a r n i n g from a s e r v a n t , t e a c h i n g a Usury, sale

t u d e s ) . T h e y are : s l a u g h t e r i n g of a cow, stealing a b r a h m i n ' s p e r s o n a l effects, fires, trading, b r o t h e r is still a the younger brother's m a r r y i n g of Parivedana,

boss, adultery, a b e t m e n t

killing of a good d r a , V a i y a or K s a t r i y a , infamous livelihood, m i s a p p r o p r i a t i o n of a deposit, b r e a k i n g of a vow, sale of m e e t , s a l e o f a cow, post of the a b a n d o n m e n t of presiding priest father, m o t h e r or a friend, s a l e in a sacrifice to a m a n guilty of to such a man, crookedof tanks a n d parks, selling of daughter's ornaments, giving the daughter

Parivedana, giving one's

n e s s , c a u s i n g b r e a k i n t h e v o w o f o t h e r s , selfish v e n t u r e s , c o h a bitation with a wine-drinking w o m a n , forsaking of one's study of Vedas, sacred fires, son, and kinsmen, perusal of illegal a n d the process alms of atonement. over his A. unholy literature, selling of are U p a p t a k a s . brahmin-slayer loudly roam proclaim about for Now shall his hold guilt, o n e s e l f o r o n e ' s o w n wife, a l l t h e s e a broken for skull head, He

know

beg the

for s u s t e n a n c e a n d he shall perform

twelve

y e a r s t a k i n g o n l y v e r y little f o o d . alternative the respective

will t h u s b e p u r i f i e d . O r i n

s o m e s a c r i f i c e o r G r a h a H o m a with a brahmin can be atoned for.

mantras

" S o m e b h y a h S v h , " ' ' L o b h a v n , " e t c . T h u s a l s o a sin o f s l a y i n g

316

Garuda 21-22. If

Purna

a b r a h m i n or a c o w w a s k i l l e d for the s a k e of much times pray cruelty, the murderer shall read r e s i d i n g in a forest in a h o l y a t m o s to Goddess Sarasvat a n d deposit a I f o n e kills a K s a t r i y a or

brahmin, Or

without three he shall

Vedasarhhit phere.

p o t of coins in the river S a r a s v a t . form t h e Vrata killed. Vrata

a V a i y a i n t h e a c t o f p e r f o r m i n g a sacrifice, h e t o o shall pere x p i a t o r y rites of a b r a h m i n - s l a y e r . The man guilty engaged of abortion to the in Savana slayer for shall p e r f o r m the caste of the child the the is the victim of an wine is 23-25. If a twice.

"Traynisdana" according brahmin the The murder would-be rite

attempted

should perform cow's urine.

expiatory

drinking

d r i n k i n g of red hot wine, m a n does the not die expiatory rite of a

ghee water a n d

I f the

b y d r i n k i n g the h o t l i q u i d h e s h a l l p e r f o r m b r a h m i n - s l a y e r w e a r i n g b a r k s o f trees B u t h e m u s t h a v e all should similarly faeces a n d c o w ' s

a n d m a t t e d hair, he now becomes pure. b r a h m i n i c a l rites a l l o v e r a g a i n . 26. perform urine. 27. it the enough pure. 28-29. bed, If a m a n rapes A brahmin woman rite by

drinking wine semen, fallen

expiatory

drinking

Otherwise, she A

becomes

from h u s b a n d ' s world

(Patiloka)

and is born as a vulture, pig or bitch. b r a h m i n stealing gold pure. weight Or to should h a n d over a pestle he should give himself. the king I f t h e k i n g strikes h i m w i t h He thus becomes her own

t o t h e k i n g p r o c l a i m i n g his g u i l t . brahmin becomes gold equal in

a w o m a n sleeping in

his penis 30. The

a n d s c r o t u m s h o u l d b e c u t off a n d wicked defiler o f the

thrown in

t h e south west q u a r t e r . preceptor's bed should o r the C n d r y a n a perform the 31. lie down A in Prjpatya1 Krcchra slayer Vrata2

V r a t a o r s h o u l d r e a d V e d a S a r h h i t for t h r e e m o n t h s . o f c o w s h a l l r e m a i n c e l i b a t e for a m o n t h , t h e c o w s h e d for t h e n i g h t a n d d u r i n g t h e d a y h e

1. 2.

An e x p i a t i o n of four p e r i o d s of three d a y s . Bodily mortification.

1.105.41 should serve the cow following it

317
like a s h a d o w a n d finally by Gndryana He shall be p u r e . for a l l U p a p t a k a s is

m a k e a gift o f it. 32. Vrata.

Expiation

O r h e s h o u l d live o n m i l k a l o n e for a m o n t h o r p e r f o r m The killer of a K s a t r i y a s h o u l d m a k e a gift o f o n e Or he should perform the expiatory three years. A s l a y e r of a d r a s h o u l d cows. A perform the expiatory rite a frog or a n y

P a r k a ( T w e l v e d a y s ' fast) rite. 33. bull or 34. a t h o u s a n d cows. T h e slayer

rite of a b r a h m i n - s l a y e r for

of a V a i y a s h o u l d p e r f o r m it for a y e a r

or m a k e a gift of a h u n d r e d c o w s . slayer of an 35. u n d e f i l e d w o m a n shall

p e r f o r m t h e rite for six m o n t h s or m a k e a gift of t e n of a s l a y e r of a d r a . A s l a y e r of a c a t , m u n g o o s e , a l l i g a t o r ,

o t h e r a n i m a l s h a l l d r i n k o n l y m i l k for t h r e e d a y s a n d p e r f o r m Krcchra Vrata. 36. years given. old. A slayer of an e l e p h a n t and If a s h o u l d a t o n e for it by m a k i n g a gift of five b l u e b u l l s a c a l f white in c o l o u r a n d t w o

m u l e g o a t o r s h e e p i s killed a b u l l s h o u l d b e

If a K r a u c a b i r d is killed a three year old bull should

be given. 37-38. macrin vows. F o r the 39. to For felling a and cutting d o w n trees, hedges a n d A Brahbreaker of become the

c r e e p e r s t h e e x p i a t i o n is t h e r e c i t a l of a h u n d r e d R k s . embracing sin o f w o m a n will I f h e t o u c h e s a n ass

he should recite a N a i r r t a m a n t r a .

t a k i n g w i n e a n d m e a t the rites o f K r c c h r a e s a preceptor

shall b e p e r f o r m e d . I f t h e d i s c i p l e d i e s r u n n i n g a n e r r a n d the s h o u l d p e r f o r m the K r c c h r a rite. I f t h e the i n t e r e s t s 40. c r a v e forgiveness. b y g i v i n g food 41. if a person exile for a self-control. disciple acts, contrary

o f the p r e c e p t o r , h e s h o u l d p r o p i t i a t e h i m a n d H e will b e free from sin. is w o u n d e d h e shall b e t a k e n c a r e o f If a brahmin dies

If the enemy

a n d affectionate t r e a t m e n t . a

w h e n b e i n g t r e a t e d there i s n o sin. After c o m m i t t i n g month without m a j o r sin or a m i n o r t u r p i t u d e should expiate by r e m a i n i n g in begging anyone and exercising utters falsehood he

318 42. er brother elder

Garuda

Purna

W i t h o u t t h e formal s a n c t i o n o f t h e e l d e r s , i f a y o u n g indulges in sexual i n t e r c o u r s e w i t h the wife o f t h e

b r o t h e r h e s h a l l p e r f o r m C n d r y a n a . T o e x p i a t e for t h e a w o m a n in her menses he should drink sin of accepting a life and gift from an

sin o f c o h a b i t i n g with 43.

g h e e a t the e n d o f t h r e e d a y s ' fast. T o e x p i a t e for t h e a u n d e s e r v i n g p e r s o n , he s h o u l d s t a y in drinking milk, leading mantra. 44. is celibate a c o w s h e d for a m o n t h chanting Gyatr

H e s h o u l d b e free f r o m t h e sin. F o r the sin o f n o t s h e l t e r i n g a p e r s o n s e e k i n g r e f u g e If a V r t y a in sacrifice b o t h shall e x p i a t e b y p e r f o r m i n g the

t h e a t o n e m e n t i s r e a d i n g the V e d a s u p t o c a p a c i t y . employed 45. cart he K r c c h r a rite thrice. do Prnyma thrice. If a

If a m a n is forced to travel in a m u l e cart or a c a m e l should m a n indulges in w i t h his wife d u r i n g the d a y , h e s h a l l b a t h e rude a or using brahmin

sexual intercourse 46. in an

n a k e d t o a t o n e for t h e sin. O s a g e s , t h e sin r e s u l t i n g froih b e i n g shall a b u s i v e l a n g u a g e to the preceptor or argument For is the a n d o b s e r v i n g fast for a d a y . 47. expiation Atikrcchra. time, place, 48. sins in 49. sin o f b r a n d i s h i n g a staff a t a b r a h m i n the for t h e sin o f b e a t i n g , the a t o n e m e n t i s atonement is m e n t i o n e d the facts of Krcchra; Whenever age, by defeating

b e w i p e d off b y c r a v i n g his i n d u l g e n c e

s t r e n g t h a n d the g r a v i t y o f t h e s i n s h o u l d b e

t a k e n i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n b e f o r e d e c i d i n g the w a y o f e x p i a t i o n . Wilful a b o r t i o n a n d h a t r e d o f the h u s b a n d a r e g r e a t women without any expiation. H e n c e , she the shall b e shall if it

s h u n n e d from a d i s t a n c e . If the guilt has b e c o m e public by a the expiation be done as prescribed 50. A slayer of p r e c e p t o r , i n p u b l i c view-

i s n o t p u b l i c i s e d t h e V r a t a s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d secretly. b r a h m i n shall g i v e a m i l c h c o w after m a n t r a standf a s t i n g for t h r e e d a y s . 51-52. And he shall repeat A g h a m a r s a n a i n g i n w a t e r . H e shall s t a n d "Somebhyah Svh" for i n w a t e r for a d a y , o n l y b r e a t h i n g A drinker of

( i . e . w i t h o u t t a k i n g food) a n d p e r f o r m i n g h o m a w i t h the m a n t r a forty t i m e s u s i n g g h e e . w i n e o r a s t e a l e r o f g o l d shall r e m a i n s t a n d i n g i n w a t e r r e c i t i n g

1.105.63 "Rudra" days. 53. reciting 54. 55. A denier of preceptor's bed shall be mantras and shall afterwards perform homa for

319 with three

ghee with the

" K s m n d a " m a n t r a a n d o b s e r v e fast

expiated by

Sahasrairs1

mantra.

T o e x p i a t e for a n y sin c o m m i t t e d , o n e s h a l l p e r f o r m By unwittingly swallowing faeces, semen be and wine

P r n y m a a hundred times. a b r a h m i n incurs impurity, which shall 56. in w i p e d off b y f a s t i n g inadvertently

for t h e d a y a n d d r i n k i n g w a t e r i n t h e e v e n i n g w i t h O k r a . O B r a h m i n s , t h e d e s t r u c t i o n o f all s i n s All sin sins should be dispelled c o m m i t t e d is possible when S a n d h y the d a y . 57. No recited eleven times. defiles a brahmin regularly studying V e d a s a n d p e r f o r m i n g the five sacrifices. times. 58. patience, 59. fasting, purity. 60. ghee, these a n d Krcchra. 61. tituting 62. S i x d a y s ' fast after t a k i n g i n o n e o f t h e a r t i c l e s c o n s the Sntapana and Krcchra for the seventh (lotus) day. O B r a h m i n s , the P a c a g a v y a consists of cow's urine for and dung. The expiator should is called fast the n e x t day. This milk, curd, swallow The Yamas (restraints) are :Celibacy, mercy, meditation, truthfulness, contentment, mental control. are bathing, silence, of sense organs, auspreceptor, and physical (Suppressions) study, control nonviolence, E x c e p t i n g the s i n o f s l a y i n g p r a y e r s a r e offered t h r i c e if R u d r a m a n t r a is

a b r a h m i n all sins a r e r e m o v e d by reciting G y a t r , a t h o u s a n d

n o n stealing, sweetness, a n d The Niyamas sacrifices Vedic

terity, n o n - f u r i o u s n e s s , d e v o t i o n t o t h e

Sntapana

This is called M a h s n t a p a n a . T h e leaves of U d u m b a r a , Rjva Bilva and water from K u a G r a s s e a c h of these is taken once every d a y . This is Parnakrcchra. 63. cchra.
1. RV. 10.90.1.

Boiled

milk, water,

curdeither This

of these is t a k e n

e v e r y d a y a n d f a s t i n g for the n i g h t .

is the holy T a p t a k r -

320 64j 65. Prjpatya. 65. 67. One Any unsolicited morsel of the

Garuda

Purna

o n e n i g h t , a n d fast for t h e times is called

n e x t T h i s is called Pdakrcchra. above practised three only a If one takes palmcupful of water along

with the previous, it is called Atikrcchra. K r c c h r a a n d A t i k r c c h r a a l t e r n a t i v e l y for t w e n t y o n e One morsel of Pinyka (oil cake), whey, and d a y s a n d fast for t w e l v e d a y s T h i s i s c a l l e d P a r k a . p o w d e r e d b a r l e y i s t a k e n o n e d a y a n d f a s t i n g for t h e n e x t T h i s is called K r c c h r a s m a . 68. ras T h e rite for f i f t e e n d a y s w h e n e a c h o n e o f t h e K r c c h above is practised for three days, is called mentioned 69. the In

Tulpurusa. the bright half of the day two morsels In the are lunar m o n t h on the first T h u s the n u m b e r is d a y , a m o r s e l of food of the s i z e of a p e a c o c k ' s e g g is t a k e n ; on second taken. increased upto ally reduced. 70. fifteen. d a r k h a l f the n u m b e r i s g r a d u in two hund-

This is called C n d r y a n a .

Another type of C n d r y a n a is taking

r e d a n d forty m o r s e l s o f food i n t h e c o u r s e o f a m o n t h w i t h o u t a n y s t i p u l a t i o n o n the n u m b e r for a n y d a y . 71. T h i s P i n d a C n d r y a n a i s t o b e p e r f o r m e d after T r i s (plunging In sins into water for t h r e e t i m e s ) . Gyatr avanasnna 72-73. virtue attain

m a n t r a shall be repeated over the p i n d a s . k n o w n .or who unknown there is purification practise Krcchra by C n d r y a n a . Those p r a c t i s e this o n l y for t h e s a k e o f T h o s e who

to Candraloka.

similarly attain great prosperity.

CHAPTER

ONE HUNDRED of Tjavalkya

AND

SIX

Teachings Tjavalkya said 1. :

O noble Sirs, maintaining V r a t a s , I shall now describe I f a c h i l d w h o h a s n o t c o m p l e t e d its t w o

the P r e t a u c a , i . e . t h e o b s e q u i e s a n d the i m p u r i t y s u b s e q u e n t t o the d e a t h of persons.

1.106.10 y e a r s dies, the U d a k a rites 2. corpse is simply buried (not cremated).

321 No

(offering of water, etc.)

in that case.

T h e c o r p s e shall b e b o r n e u p t o the c r e m a t i o n g r o u n d If the d e a d m a n is an Ahitgni the the (person regularly cremation. the m a n t r a preceptor

by kinsmen reciting Y a m a s k t a . F o r ordinary m e n ordinary fire m a y be used. 3. form m a i n t a i n i n g s a c r e d f i r e s ) t h e s a m e s h a l l b e u s e d for Kinsmen upto facing Udakakriy 4. and friends, south and reciting

seventh or tenth d e g r e e shall per-

apa nah oucadagham1, e t c .

T h e U d a k a k r i y for m a t e r n a l o w n wife sons, is also the s a m e . (all sister's father-in-law grandfather, In the one's case of sons,

being brahmins) the

water is sprinkled once p r o c l a i m i n g the a n d his G o t r a b u t otherwise 5. No water-offering (persons sons, V r t y a s 6. had

n a m e of the d e a d m a n

r e m a i n i n g silent. i s m a d e t o t h e h e r e t i c s , sinful p e r sacred thread,

not duly invested with to need drinking A of

etc. B r a h m a c r i n s , a n d wives without fidelity. Those addicted suicide of wine a n d those w h o committed not be h o n o u r e d with the water d e a d m a n shall not be I n d e e d , the existence of all

offering or o b s e r v a t i o n b e w a i l e d after t h e 7-8. At the All

Aauca.

water-offering. are

living beings in the world is never p e r m a n e n t . rites of the be to be performed u p t o the utmost extthey shall p r o c e e d h o m e w a r d . leaves of the N i m b a 2 tree on a rock ent of one's ability. door ( M a r g o s a ) shall Thereafter, strewn.

stallion, torn

T h e y s h a l l s t e p slowly

f i r s t a n d perform A c a m a n a a n d touch f i r e , water, white m u s t a r d seeds before 9. house. re any Those who have themselves by formal these rites touched the the corpse forma]

cowdung and must purify

entering the house formally. and final They entry into the

T h o s e w h o h a d m e r e l y w i t n e s s e d t h e rites d o n o t r e q u i purificatory rites. a r e p u r e at the close

o f t h e r i t e s . O t h e r s b e c o m e p u r e after b a t h . T h e y s h o u l d r e m a i n c e l i b a t e for 10. T h e y shall

1. 2. RV.

the next three d a y s . should food be no cooking of food in the h o u s e . They take
1.97.1.

There

bought

or received from others.

A z a d i r a c h t a indica.

322 shall sleep 11. on Milk the ground away

Garuda from one another. be kept in a

Purna To the

d e p a r t e d s o u l a r i c e - b a l l ( p i n d a ) i s g i v e n for t h r e e d a y s . a n d water should mud pot out in the open. be performed. 12. no forelocks) If a rite is child dies before cutting its first t o o t h t h e r e is i m p u r i t y ; if a before c h i l d d i e s b e f o r e the t o n s u r e ( c u t t i n g o f t h e the sacred thread investiture, the i m p u l a s t s for t e n d a y s . lasts for three S a c r i f i c i a l rites e n j o i n e d b y t h e V e d a s s h o u l d a l s o

p e r f o r m e d , t h e i m p u r i t y i s for a n i g h t o n l y ; i f

a child dies 13. rity pure. 14. four i s for

r i t y i s for t h r e e d a y s ; t h e r e a f t e r t h e i m p u r i t y I n brief, t h e i m p u r i t y d u e If two children die not the mother alone. to death o r ten d a y s .

two years old, the i m p u impurities d u e to birth becomes

I f two

a n d d e a t h o v e r l a p , a t the c l o s e o f t h e l a t t e r , e v e r y o n e

T h e i m p u r i t y d u e t o d e a t h h a s t o b e o b s e r v e d b y the ten If a days, twelve d a y s , f i f t e e n d a y s a n d thirty

c a s t e s for 15-16.

d a y s respectively. girl d i e s before being given in m a r r i a g e or s o n n o t o n e ' s o w n b u t o f t h e wife others, all or on if an unpopular a son, a p r e c e p t o r , a disciple, person c o n t i n u i n g V e d i c studies, an uncle, a V e d i c Scholar, a who has 17. had intercourse is no with

k i n g d i e s , t h e i m p u r i t y is for a d a y o n l y . There impurity at the d e a t h d u e to to suicide king's orders, a t t a c k of a cow or a in secret, or d u e to poison. 18-20. O n t h e d e a t h o f a sacrificer, a p e r s o n donors and those who no impurity. In the case performing realised Vratas, Brahmacrins, B r a h m a n there is at the time of time, agents have b r a h m i n or d u e

of those who die

o f c h a r i t y , m a r r i a g e , sacrifice, b a t t l e , c i v i c c o m m n o i m p u r i t y a t all. L a p s e wind, m i n d , knowledge in fire, lump of clay,

otion or any other calamity there is rites

austerities, recital of prayers, repentence, fastingall these a r e for p u r i f i c a t i o n . In cases Charity purifies a p e r s o n c o m m i t t i n g a a n u n w o r t h y a c t a n d t h e c u r r e n t itself purifies t h e river. 21-23. of e m e r g e n c y a b r a h m i n shall p u r s u e or a vaiya's ksatriya's duties ( t a k i n g p a r t in wars) nal creepers, curd, milk, ghee, activities.

B u t t h e s e a r t i c l e s h e s h a l l n o t sell : F r u i t s , s o m a , silk, m e d i c i water, gingelly seeds, c o o k e d

3.107.3 rice, m e r c u r y , a c i d s a n d alkalis, honey, lac, requisites cloth, stone, utensils flowers, d e e r - s k i n , silk, mentioned grains. 24. b e sold. 25. A b r a h m i n oppressed by great poverty shall salt, m e a t , can be oil c a k e s , sold along roots

323 of homas,

vegetables, clay, leather shoes, a n d perfumes. If

i t i s for the p u r p o s e o f r e l i g i o u s o b s e r v a n c e s , s o m e o f t h e a r t i c l e s above with gingelly seeds a n d

E v e n i n d i r e necessity a b r a h m i n s h o u l d n o t sell s a l t , should never

etc. He should rather pursue cultivation. Horses

fast for

t h r e e d a y s ( a n d a p p r o a c h t h e k i n g for h e l p ) . T h e k i n g o n s e e ing the b r a h m i n devoid of a m e a n s of s u p p o r t shall provide h i m with one.

CHAPTER

ONE H U N D R E D AND SEVEN Teachings of Parara

Sta said 1. there is 2.

: P a r a r a 1 n a r r a t e d to V y s a the various duties of the i n life. A t t h e e n d o f every K a l p a the unborn g o d dissolution a n d rutis ( V e d a s ) , a new creation. But

different c a s t e s a n d s t a g e s d o e s not perish.

S m r t i s a n d t h e c o n d u c t o f the g o o d

n o t r e p u g n a n t t o t h e V e d a s ( a r e t o b e followed b y a l l ) . A t f i r s t B r a h m r e m e m b e r e d the V e d a s ( a n d j t a u g h t M a n u a n d o t h e r s ) . M a n u a n d o t h e r s p r o p a g a t e d D h a r m a t h r o u g h their S m r t i s . 3. In the K a l i age charity is the main virtue. Other v i r t u e s a r e likely t o f o r s a k e t h e d o e r . S i n f u l d e e d s a r e p e r p e t r a t e d o n l y i n the K a l i a g e . A curse uttered b e a r s fruit in a year.

1. He is

P a r a r a is known as the author of s o m e of

hymns

in

the

Rgveda. of Vysa.

also said to have taught Visnu Purria. According to the Krsna

statement

the M a h b h r a t a , he is known as the father

Dvaipyana

H i s writings o n D h a r m a a r e often q u o t e d i n H i n d u law-texts.

324 4. every By strictly a d h e r i n g obtains

Garuda t o t h e p e r f o r m a n c e o f six They homas, worship will

Purna rites

day m a n

everything. of mantras,

aretaking bath, of gods be rare

sandhy prayers, recital a n d hospitality to guests. 5. t h e n (in Brahmins the K a l i

o b s e r v i n g all army

rites p r o p e r l y rare. A

a g e ) ; s a g e s will b e

k s a t r i y a shall earths B u s i n e s s and

conquer the

enemie's

and protect the

transactions a n d agriculture shall be the 6. By eating

duties of vaiyas

devotion to the twice-born that of the d r a s . f o r b i d d e n food, b y s t e a l i n g , a n d b y a p p r o a a m a n becomes d e g r a d e d . A twicebullocks in ching unworthy born engaged in ploughing, 7. U p t o m i d d a y one shall be e n g a g e d in shall r e l i g i o u s rites be treated with clarified A s u c h a s b a t h i n g , y o g i c rites a n d t h e n contempt. 8. A b r a h m i n shall n o t sell shall in become agriculture shall gingelly seeds a n d butter. He man engaged sinful i f s n y a j a i s p e r f o r m e d . feed b r a h m i n s . T h e f i v e women

cultivation shall not e m p l o y tired

sacrifices s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d . T h e c r u e l

not be sullied if he gives a gods and in agri-

sixth of the p r o d u c e to the king, one-twentieth to the one-thirty third to the b r a h m i n s . 9. A ksatriya, a vaiya a n d a pure brahmin pure dra shall in ten engaged be culture shall be considered a mentioned before. A 10. maintained thief if he does not

give the t a x

cleansed of the in

impurity of d e a t h in three d a y s . A ksatriya becomes a b r a h m i n shall days, a vaiya rites twelve days a n d a d r a in a ksatriya in twelve days. 1 1 . A v a i y a s h a l l b e p u r e i n fifteen d a y s a n d a in common. 12. observe I n the inpurity. event of birth a n d d e a t h such kinsmen shall If the kinsmen are removed to the fourth if t h e y a r e o f t h e fifth days; dra in a m o n t h . S o m e kinsmen living separately h a v e a single rice-ball month. If proper become p u r e in are not

ten d a y s a n d a

d e g r e e t h e i m p u r i t y l a s t s for t e n 13.

r e m o v e t h e i m p u r i t y i s for six d a y s . I f they a r e r e m o v e d t o t h e s i x t h d e g r e e t h e i m p u r i t y i s for four d a y s ; i f t h e y a r e o f t h e s e v e n t h r e m o v e t h e i m p u r i t y

1.107.24 i s for t h r e e d a y s . 14-15. No If a person dies in a cremation, no foreign land or if

325 an

ascetic dies, there is no impurity. offering of rice-ball a n d no still offering o f w a t e r for c h i l d r e n d y i n g b e f o r e c u t t i n g t e e t h o r m a n y d a y s a s the n u m b e r o f m o n t h s o f p r e g n a n c y . 16. I f the c h i l d d i e s b e f o r e the n a m i n g ceremony, there rite o f first cutting of the i s n o i m p u r i t y ; i f i t d i e s b e f o r e the

b o r n . I n r e g a r d t o still-birth a n d a b o r t i o n t h e i m p u r i t y i s for a s

f o r e l o c k , the i m p u r i t y i s for o n e d a y a n d n i g h t ; i f h e d i e s b e f o r e the holy rite of investiture with the s a c r e d t h r e a d , the i m p u r i t y i s for t h r e e d a y s , b e y o n d t h a t t h e i m p u r i t y i s for t e n d a y s o n l y . 17. Abortion usually and still occurs within four months and miscarriage births i n the f i f t h a n d sixth months. N o s t r i c t l y c e l i b a c y rites i n Vedic

impurity in case 18.

these a r e observed craftsmen,

f i r e a n d a b s t e n t i o n f r o m evil a s s o c i a t i o n . Artisans, physicians, servants, a s c h o l a r m a i n t a i n i n g h o l y fire, the k i n g a l l t h e s e a r e o f i m m e d i a t e purity ( i . e . no i m p u r i t y is observed on their d e a t h ) . 19. after ten 20. After t h e days and birth of a child the mother b e c o m e s p u r e T h e impurity the father b y taking b a t h .

d u e to birth is r e m o v e d by touching water. I n t h e rites the o f m a r r i a g e , festivals a n d sacrifices, i n o f d e a t h o r b i r t h , a l l further r i t e s already undertaken. If a n y o n e dies in a terrupted by 21. the impurity dies with the

shall be given up except what had been If a child cease carrying impurities 22. By the former. day.

within the period of impurity, b o t h

c o w s h e d t h e i m p u r i t y is o n l y for a corpse i m p u r i t y i n c u r r e d i s v e r y little a n d by P r n y m a . 23. m a n who 24. successive If the d e a d

of an unknown person the that is a v e r y little i s r e m o v e d d r a , the impurity case the death is The

man

is for t h r e e n i g h t s . No purificatory rite is necessary in poison, h a n g i n g killed by touches a person a cow d u e to self-immolation, or insect bite.

or bitten by an undegraded wife

insect b e c o m e s p u r e by m e a n s of krcchravrata. If a p e r s o n forsakes an births and suffer undefiled in the p r i m e of her y o u t h he shall be b o r n as a w o m a n in seven widowhood over a n d over a g a i n .

326 25. cide. If a m a n does not

Garuda

Purna

c o h a b i t w i t h h i s wife after t h e incur t h e sin o f infantiintercourse or Unworthy women for a rice-ball

fourth d a y from m e n s t r u a t i o n he shall d u r i n g those days shall be t h o u g h they perform V r a t a s water-offerings. 26. The born have as no

A w o m a n not allowing her h u s b a n d to have a sow. right

s o n l e g i t i m a t e l y b o r n o r after N i y o g a 1 i n o n e ' s offer a r i c e - b a l l to t h e l e g a l father. him too shall perform

wife t h r o u g h a n o t h e r , s h a l l Krcchra Krcchra. 27. Atikrcchra i s dwarfish, dumb, 28. The man and t h e girl who

A p e r s o n c o m m i t t i n g t h e m i n o r sin o f P a r i v e d a n a 2 s h a l l p e r f o r m marries

who gives

his d a u g h t e r

in a Parivedana

marriage and

t h e p r i e s t w h o officiates i n t h e s a m e s h a l l p e r f o r m If the elder brother d e a f or idiotic, blind,

and C n d r y a n a respectively. hunch-backed, stammerer,

P a r i v e d a n a i s n o offence a t a l l . If the h u s b a n d is untraceable, d e a d , or has renounc-

ed the world or is impotent or d e g r a d e d i n these cases of emergency a w o m a n can remarry. 29. person. 30. reciting tained If a person i s bit b y a d o g h e s h a l l b e c o m e p u r e b y A brahmin killed by fire. a cndla If he has mainGyatr sacrificial mantra. fires A wife who dies as in the c o m p a n y of her h u s b a n d shall r e m a i n in h e a v e n m a n y years as there a r e hairs on his

or others shall be c r e m a t e d with ordinary

his c o r p s e s h a l l b e b a t h e d i n m i l k a n d

c r e m a t e d with those sacred fires with m a n t r a s . 31-35. I f a m a n d i e s i n a foreign l a n d t h e o b s e q u i e s a r e of a h u m a n b o d y . A a m twig is penis should be, the A r a n i w o o d is sides, a t h r e d o n e a s follows : O n a d e e r s k i n six h u n d r e d P a l a twigs a r e s p r e a d m a k i n g the contours p l a c e d in the spot where

p l a c e d in the spot of scrotum; a p o t is p l a c e d at the right h a n d a n d a s a c r i f i c i a l p i t c h e r at t h e left; m o r t a r at t h e shing rod at the back, the sacrificial s l a b a t the t h i g h s , r i c e

1.

T h i s term is used to denote the legally p e r m i t t e d obtain a son with a male other

intercourse of her

married w o m a n to 2.

than

husband,

generally her brother-in-law i.e. her h u s b a n d ' s y o u n g e r brother. T h e a c t o f o n e ' s m a r r y i n g b e f o r e o n e ' s e l d e r b r o t h e r . CSL, p . 4 4 5 .

1.108.4

327

g r a i n s , g h e e a n d g i n g e l l y s e e d s i n t h e m o u t h , t h e vessel o f h o l y w a t e r a t t h e e a r s a n d t h e vessel for g h e e a t t h e e y e s ; s m a l l b i t s o f g o l d s h a l l b e d r o p p e d i n t o the e a r s , eyes, m o u t h a n d nostrils. A n effigy and of the man made of kua grass is p l a c e d over this m a n t r a Asau svargya of an A g n i the requisites burnt. T h e A h u t i i s offered w i t h t h e

lokya svh slowly o n c e . S i n c e a l l 36. night. 37. The killer of A person

h o t r a a r e u s e d h e will s u r e l y a t t a i n B r a h m a l o k a . w h o kills S w a n s , S r a s a s , K r a u c a s , G a k in a day a n d r a v k a s , hens, p e a c o c k s a n d sheep b e c o m e s p u r e

any bird becomes pure in a day a n d shall o b s e r v e fast for a d a y the rite o f K r c c h r a shall be

n i g h t . After k i l l i n g q u a d r u p e d s o n e a n d night a n d perform J a p a . 38. After is killing a dra, p e r f o r m e d ; if a If a ksatriya

vaiya is killed atikrcchra shall be

performed. twenty

k i l l e d C a n d r y a n a shall b e p e r f o r m e d

t i m e s a n d if a b r a h m i n is k i l l e d it is p e r f o r m e d

thirty t i m e s .

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

EIGHT

Brhaspati-niti-Sra Sta said 1. : Now for I shall explain the essence of Polity b a s e d on It is holy a n d

Economics 2. always 3. should 4. foolish

the

benefit o f k i n g s a n d o t h e r s . h e a v e n l y bliss, e t c .

conducive to longevity, associate with

A person wishing good

for s u c c e s s a n d a c h i e v e m e n t s h o u l d m e n : never with the w i c k e d ; it is

g o o d n e i t h e r for this n o r for t h e o t h e r w o r l d . O n e should always avoid arguments with m e a n - m i n d avoid Even disciple, enmity a with friends a n d to i n t i m a c y with p e r s o n s e d b a s e p e o p l e a n d s h u n e v e n the v e r y s i g h t o f t h e w i c k e d . H e serving the enemy. scholar comes by supporting a g r i e f by t r y i n g to a d v i s e a a n d by keeping w i c k e d 'wife

the c o m p a n y of wicked m e n .

328 5. One should keep aloof from a

Garuda brahmin

Purna foolishly in-

p u e r i l e , a k s a t r i y a a v e r s e to fighting, a v a i y a s l u g g i s h a n d active and a ctive study. 6.

d r a h o t - h e a d e d a n d vain d u e to complete, defe-

A l l i a n c e w i t h an e n e m y or e s t r a n g e m e n t w i t h a friend A true s c h o l a r b i d e s h i s c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f c a u s e s a n d effects. all living beings to m a t u r e , time brings when people are asleep, people. Even

should be indulged in at p r o p e r time. t i m e after a c a r e f u l 7. the dissolution 8. T i m e allows of all

t i m e i s w a t c h f u l a n d a w a k e , i t i s difficult t o t r a n s g r e s s t i m e . T h e semen virile flows out at p r o p e r time a n d develops w o m b . It is time that causes creation a n d it is I t h a s twot h a t effects t h e d i s s o l u t i o n . incomprehensible. a p p a r e n t gross preceptor movement at one place and Brhaspati expounded omniscience the and peralso and itself in the time again 9.

T h e passage of time is

fold functions, a n 10. The

a subtle invisible m o v e m e n t at another. divine essence of polity to g o d I n d r a which g o t him heavenly glory 11. formed great. 12. A person never c o m e s to grief if he associates with scholars and contracts good people, 13. conducts discourses with by after k i l l i n g t h e a s u r a s . etc. should be They should kings and brahmins. T h e worship of gods, brahmins, saintly

p e r f o r m t h e horse-sacrifice t o w i p e off their sins b o t h s m a l l

intimate friendship with persons d e v o i d of g r e e d . Illicit contact with or g a y revelries in the c o m p a n y o r resio f a n o t h e r m a n ' s wife, d e s i r e for a n o t h e r m a n ' s 14. kinsman beneficial. 15. He is a k i n s m a n who works to our benefit; he is the is a friend where r e a l father w h o n u r t u r e s a n d n o u r i s h e s u s ; h e is available. 16. He is the true servant who is loyal a n d obedient; it r e a l wife who is the real seed that g e r m i n a t e s well; s h e i s the the b o d y is wealth

dence in another m a n ' s house shall never be p u r s u e d . A w e l l - i n t e n t i o n e d e n e m y is a c t u a l l y a k i n s m a n a n d a a c t i n g a g a i n s t one's interests is an enemy. Sickness in inimical a n d a herb in the forest i s friendly and

confidence c a n be p l a c e d ; it is the native l a n d where sustenance

1.108.28

329

s p e a k s p l e a s a n t l y a n d h e i s the r e a l s o n w h o lives t o the f a m i l y tradition. 17. 18. speaks H i s life i s perfect w h o h a s v i r t u e s a n d g o o d q u a l i t i e s ; A t r u e wife m a n a g e s pleasant words, the h o u s e h o l d affairs skilfully, dedicates h e r s e l f t o her these is no applies fruitless,, i n d e e d , is the life of a m a n d e v o i d of t h e s e t w o . sweet solely has

husband and is loyally devoted to him. 19-21. qualities is no T h e man who less than good wife a wife her endowed with of heaven. He daily bath, Indra t h e lord takes

ordinary m a n . T h e

s w e e t s c e n t s to her b o d y , s p e a k s sweetly, is satisfied w i t h l i m i t e d q u a n t i t y o f f o o d , i s not g a r r u l o u s , h a s a l w a y s a u s p i c i o u s t h i n g s a r o u n d her, i s v e r y s c r u p u l o u s her love to her husband to his by surrender herself in virtuous after activities, exhibits to the every action the a n d is pleased four d a y s o f

dalliance

m e n s t r u a l f l o w . S h e e n h a n c e s the g o o d l u c k o f e v e r y o n e . 22-23. What we call old a g e is not so dispiriting as a

wife d e v o i d o f g o o d q u a l i t i e s a n d p o s s e s s i n g all b a d t r a i t s u g l y eyed, slovenly, q u a r r e l s o m e , argumentative, visiting other p e o ple's house frequently, d e p e n d i n g on other in actions a n d devoid of shame. 24. A wife w h o a p p r e c i a t e s good qualities, devoted to h e r h u s b a n d , a n d satisfied w i t h the m i n i m u m i n the real b e l o v e d . 25. his h o u s e . 26. F o r s a k e the c o n t a c t with wicked people, resort to I t i s d e a t h i n d e e d i f o n e h a s a w i c k e d wife, a servant who answers back rogue as a friend, a a n d s e r p e n t s infesting everything is people's help, evil

the a s s e m b l y 27. ferocious neck,

of the g o o d ;

do meritorious

acts d a y a n d night in appearance, round to the spit fire never be

and r e m e m b e r the unstability of everything. A woman devoid of love, horrible houses r u d d y eyes, and terrific by nature, more having other than a serpent appearing cities should

tigerlike in

desirous of visiting approached. 28. Devotion

i n the s o n ,

good

deed in

the u n g r a t e f u l , but

c o l d n e s s i n the f i r e m a y

occur sometime

by God's g r a c e ;

love in a p r o s t i t u t e is never c o m e a c r o s s .

330 29. cured age ? with Who can all be complacent and of treatment

Garuda

Purna

c a r e f r e e i f s e r p e n t s incannot be i s ever and if death

fest t h e h o u s e w h e r e v e r w e c a s t o u r appliances ready to pounce on

eyes, i f s i c k n e s s

the b o d y at every a g e

from infancy to old

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

NINE

Br has pa t i-niti-sra Sta said 1. : M o n e y s h o u l d b e s a v e d for e m e r g e n c y ; wife s h o u l d b e p r e s e r v e d a s s e t s a n d wife. oneself to save the family; a village; a village should

protected b y s p e n d i n g h o a r d e d wealth a n d one's o w n self s h o u l d b e s a v e d e v e n a t t h e risk o f 2. be One should family should sacrifice

b e sacrificed t o s a v e t h e t h e safety o f t h e

s a c r i f i c e d for 3.

land a n d the l a n d should be better than that in a house of

sacrificed to save o n e ' s soul. T h e r e s i d e n c e i n hell i s evil conduct. 4. with the 5. The other. B y t h e f o r m e r , o n e ' s sins a r e w a s h e d a w a y w h e r e intelligent m a n f i x e s o n e foot firmly a n d m o v e s the new p l a c e well, the old

as there is no r e d e m p t i o n from the latter. Without testing

p l a c e of resort should not be a b a n d o n e d . O n e should unhesitatingly a b a n d o n a conduct, a c o u n t r y infestof deceptive in the avail is e d w i t h m e n o f evil disposition. 6. t h a t is What purpose can be served by t h e riches Of w h a t Of what hands of a miser ? Of what avail to m e n can that knowledge be value is a residence of harassing environ-

m e n t , a k i n g o f m i s e r l y t e m p e r a m e n t , a n d a friend

tarnished by a

roguish disposition ?

b e a u t y bereft o f g o o d q u a l i t i e s a n d v a l o u r ? 7. a person

friend w h o t u r n s his f a c e a w a y a t t h e t i m e o f m i s f o r t u n e ? M a n y p e r s o n s u n k n o w n t o h i m b e f o r e will flock r o u n d occupying a high post as his friends and assistants.

1.109.15 T i m e b e i n g a d v e r s e , i f h e loses his w e a l t h a n d i s his p o s t e v e n his k i n s m e n b e c o m e his e n e m i e s . 8. wise in of wealth A friend c a n be found t h e test out if he is genuine of valour

331 dismissed from or other-

times of d a n g e r ; puts fidelity

is the battlefield;

t h e test o f p u r i t y o f a m a n i s his c o n d u c t i n i s o l a t e d p l a c e s . L o s s o f t h e wife t o a test a n d f a m i n e p r o v i d e s a m a n is fond of entertaining a an o p p o r t u n i t y 9. t o test w h e t h e r

guest or otherwise. B i r d s l e a v e off t h e tree w h e n t h e f i u i t s a r e e x h a u s t e d ; quits the to the lake when it king is dried u p ; the courtesan honeybees m a n w h o h a s n o m o n e y i n his p o c k e t s ; m i n i s t e r s w h o h a s lost his t h r o n e ; the S r a s a

turns out the bid good-bye t h e forest otherwise ? 10. One

never touch the flower that is faded a n d withered; the deer flee consumed by fireSo, it is evident that people take delight in things that delight them. W h o takes interest in others

should propitiate a greedy m a n by giving him man by reverence with as he pleases a n d joined palms; the scholar by

m o n e y ; a praiseworthy

a fool b y a l l o w i n g h i m t o d o a c l e a r s t a t e m e n t of f a c t s . 11. something 12.

Devas, good people to eat The or drink and

a n d brahmins are pleased with the learned scholars by d u e

genuine good

n a t u r e ; t h e o r d i n a r y v u l g a r p e o p l e b y a n offer o f

honour and fitting rewards. noblest c a n be won over by humility a n d subthe v u l g a r with s m a l l gifts mission; the strength a n d 13. An rogue valour. intelligent and man must penetrate deep him over into the to his of every one's inclination heart a n d speak a n d act bea n d win with a threat;

a n d concessions and m e n of equal status by exhibiting an equal

innermost recesses f i t t i n g his n a t u r e side. 14. mals, Implicit

trust in

rivers, c l a w e d

beasts, horned ani-

armed men,.women 15.

a n d scions of royal families is never

to be encouraged. M e n o f s e n s e will n e v e r d i s c l o s e loss o f w e a l t h , m e n a c t i o n s i n the house, deception ( o f which a n d disrespect. tal a n g u i s h , illicit

they h a d been the victim)

332 16. the from The following base and are the

Garuda activities that a long

Purna

bring about separation love shown another

destruction

of chastity

and good conduct wicked people, and

in w o m e n :

Association with to them (by man's house. 17. distressed fortune ? 18. eries in W h o is his Which by

the husband, too m u c h of consideration a n d t h e w o u l d - b e defiler)

residence in

family

is d e v o i d W h o is

of

defects ? oppressed

W h o is

not

sickness ?

not

by vices a n d

calamities ?

W h o enjoys c o n t i n u o u s b l e s s i n g s o f t h e g o d d e s s o f the m a n in the is wide not world who ripped does not misby

become haughty on attaining wealth ? life ? Whose mind

W h o has

escaped

asunder

m a i d e n s ? W h o h a s b e e n a f a v o u r i t e of k i n g s for e v e r ? that suppliant who has won honour a n d respect ? fortunate 19. fellow w h o h a s He who has fallen i n t o t h e wily n e t s of t h e w i c k e d ? no friends, relatives or

W h o is

it that h a s r e m a i n e d out of sight of the g o d of D e a t h ? W h o is W h o is that e s c a p e d u n s c a t h e d after h a v i n g o n c e kinsmen to

a d v i s e h i m a n d h e w h o h a s n o i n t r i n s i c i n t e l l e c t i n h i m s e l f suffers certainly. H o w c a n a wise m a n p u r s u e t h a t activity which does not fully p r o d u c e any but which 20. honours 21. death. 22. T h e w e a l t h t h a t a m a n a c q u i r e s b y p u t t i n g i n exerhis o w n life i s divided among t h e m s e l v e s b y his O n l y t h e sin t h a t h e c o m m i t s i n h i s tions risking One him t a n g i b l e result even when c o m p l e t e d successnecessarily should o r loves ushers in great sorrow where w h e n left no one and

incomplete ? leave him; off t h a t where land there is no kinsman,

w h e r e t h e r e a r e n o a m e n i t i e s for h i g h e r l e a r n i n g . Earn that wealth to which there is no d a n g e r from l e a v e y o u e v e n after y o u r kings or robbers a n d which does not

s u c c e s s o r s after his d e a t h . 23. cked by 24.

eagerness to earn remains his exclusive property. A m a s s e d a n d deposited wealth of the miser is ransao t h e r s f r e q u e n t l y like t h a t o f t h e Beggars r o a m i n g the streets, mouse and is condun a k e d , grief-stricken,

cive to sorrow.

1.109.35

333

r o u g h a n d a r m e d with broken bowls point out to the world that t h e fruits t h e n o n - c h a r i t a b l e p e r s o n s r e a p a r e like t h e s e . 25. giving. O misers ! the teach beggars you that who this request is the you saying " P l e a s e g i v e " really 26. hundreds result of not

D o n o t b e c o m e like t h e m . A miser's hoarded wealth o f sacrifices ( i . e . for is not b e i n g e m p l o y e d in it b e i n g g o o d p u r p o s e s ) nor is

given in charity to the 27.

deserving; but in the end, it is utilised

in the houses of robbers or p u t in the king's treasury. T h e wealth of the miser d o e s not go u n t o the deities, unto the robbers or riches a c q u i r e d brahmins, relatives or to himself but it goes k i n g s o r i s c o n s u m e d b y fire. 28. with great 29. Let those riches be not thinethe d e a l o f toil, by transgressing the curbs of virtue or of p r a c eating a b l o w to the for a death false

b y f a l l i n g a t t h e feet o f t h e e n e m y . A blow of destruction to learning is absence tice; wearing rags is a blow unto the goddess of wealth; after d i g e s t i o n is a b l o w to s i c k n e s s ; a n d c r a f t i n e s s is the enemy. 30. sentence; friend; A lying fitting on a p u n i s h m e n t to is the best separate the thief is being reserved punishment

b e d is a p u n i s h m e n t

for w o m e n ,

a n d n o n i n v i t a t i o n i n s a c r i f i c e i s a p u n i s h m e n t for b r a h m i n s . 31. W i c k e d p e r s o n s , a r t i s a n s , s l a v e s , defiled o n e s , d r u m s softened b y b e i n g b e a t e n ; chem blTeTrands of kinsmen adversity; mishap can they d o n o t deserve the ability of servants be known by their and women are gentle handling. 32. can be By sending our b e k n o w n ; sincerity understood 33. man; The

behaviour during

the g e n u i n e friendship c a n occurs a n d the fidelity o f

when some diet of a

t h e wife i s k n o w n w h e n o n e ' s f o r t u n e d w i n d l e s . w o m a n is twice as m u c h as that of a e n e r g y i s six times a n d amorousman. s l e e p b y s l e e p i n g i t off; s h r e w d n e s s four t i m e s , 34. to It

ness is eight times as m u c h as that of a is impossible to o v e r c o m e a woman overpower 35.

by loving her; to smother a flame by

a d d i n g fuel a n d t o q u e n c h t h i r s t b y d r i n k i n g w i n e . A delicious fatty m e a t diet, p l e a s i n g dress, g l o w i n g

L<

i'ury

334

Garuda

Purna

wine, fragrant scented pastes, a n d sweet smelling flowers kindle passion in women. 36. a man It can be said with her heart certainty that even during the On seeing period of celibacy the g o d of love is busily pleasing to wet with profuse secretion. 37. O a u n a k a , i t i s t r u e , definitely t r u e that the vaginal p a s s a g e of a w o m a n begins to secrete profusely on seeing a well dressed m a n whether a brother or a son. 38. Rivers and women are of similar n a t u r e in their T h e rivers e r o d e and the w o m a n women sufficient satiety woman by is love of freedom to choose 39. The their own course. the banks active.

the v a g i n a of a w o m a n b e c o m e s

t h e b a n k s a n d t h e w o m e n u n d e r m i n e their o w n f a m i l i e s . river u n d e r m i n e s c a u s e s t h e fall o f t h e f a m i l y . 40. supply living A blazing fire T h e course of rivers a n d be satiated be with

is wayward a n d cannot be checked. cannot o f fuel; the ocean he can never smites) a n d filled t o

rivers flowing into i t ; the g o d of d e a t h is never beings ( w h o m 41. good It is never satiated with m a n . impossible to be men of

s a t i a t e d by the

a passionate

satiated with the c o m p a n y of conversation, and

men, 42.

friends,

delightful

p l e a s u r e s , s o n s , life a n d b o o n s . A king is n e v e r g r a t i f i e d with s e a is his a m b i t i o u s a c t i v i t y of a m a s s i n g flow of and water wealth; a never gratified with a perennial layman's eye is satiated with

into it; a scholar is never s a t i a t e d with the talks by him; no

speeches given 43.

the glimpses of the king that he gets. T h e y m a i n t a i n t h e m s e l v e s b y w h a t they e a r n b y d o i n g t h e i r d u t i e s ; t h e y a r e d e v o t e d t o t h e s a c r e d s c r i p t u r e s ; they a r e fond of their own wives; they h a v e s u b j u g a t e d the u n r e a s o n a b l e wanderings g u e s t s ; they 44. well of the sense-organs; attain salvation at wife i s after they a r e d e l i g h t e d i n s e r v i n g their very d o o r s ; they a r e the your heart, if if y o u live she is attractive, own house

excellent a m o n g m e n . If the b e d e c k e d a n d delightful, in your

it is heaven

indeed which can be obtained only by g o o d d e e d s

performed in previous birth.

.109.53 45. r o u n d by W o m e n a r e i n c o r r i g i b l e ; they c a n m a k i n g a gift, or offering

335 never be brought

r e s p e c t , or a s t r a i g h t for-

ward dealing, or tened with a codes. 46. Learning, 47. good

r e p e a t e d service. T h e y can neither be threa-

w e a p o n nor asked to be quiet by citing scriptural

F i v e t h i n g s s h o u l d b e p u r s u e d slowly a n d c a u t i o u s l y . r i c h e s , a s c e n d i n g the m o u n t a i n , Worship to amorous approach

to women, and assimilation of virtuous conduct. gods is of p e r m a n e n t benefit; a present beneficent r e s u l t a n d a g o o d durto a b r a h m i n l e a v e s a p e r m a n e n t b l e s s i n g b e h i n d ; a t h o r o u g h l y learning has an everlasting 48. ing and b o s o m friend is a p e r m a n e n t a s s e t . T h o s e who have not a c q u i r e d enough learning youth t o the are to be s t u d e n t s h i p a n d those w h o h a v e n o t sufficient w e a l t h d u r i n g 49. man A person devoted s e c u r e d a d e c e n t wife p i t i e d for e v e r .

T h e y are no better than beasts, b u t h a v e a h u m a n form. scriptural codes shall not regular study. A to go a long way worry over the m e a l . He must ponder over a prepared unmindful wasted

seeking knowledge must be 50. T h o s e who and those had been who had

with the s p e e d o f G a r u d a . of studies during wealth during the lotuses i n studentship youth in their like

p u r s u i t o f lust fall into a m i s e r a b l e p l i g h t d u r i n g o l d b u r n i n g within never stable and Still

a g e s l i g h t e d b y others a n d the winter season. 51. are wide something Arguments are different

irrefutable; V e d a s theme of

a n d v a r i e d ; there is no from o t h e r s .

sage who has not mentioned the c e n t r a l

v i r t u e is h i d d e n in a c a v e , as it w e r e . H e n c e , the p a t h t r a v e r s e d by great m e n should be taken as the correct one. 52. T h e inner workings of a m a n ' s mind should be inmovements, eyes a n d a beast. in

ferred f r o m his facial r e f l e x e s , b e h a v i o u r , g e s t u r e s , s p e e c h a n d the lips. 53. infers A spoken word not is understood stated. by contractions and distortions

o f his even is

H o r s e s a n d e l e p h a n t s c a r r y o u t the o r d e r s g i v e n . B u t a s c h o l a r what is expressly Intellect fruitful being able to comprehend other's gestures.

336 54. going Raurava;

Garuda Deprived of wealth one should go on a from truth one failing cannot but fall though in the has no initial a t t e m p t other

Parana

pilgrimage; the hell in the Y o g i c but go

astray

into

p r a c t i c e o n e s h a l l c o n t i n u e t o b e strictly t r u t h f u l ; a k i n g diveste d o f his r o y a l ahunting. splendour alternative

CHAPTER ONE

HUNDRED

AND

TEN

Brhaspati-niti-sra Sta said 1. : If a p e r s o n f o r s a k e s t h i n g s of s u r e r e s u l t s in his p u r -

suit o f t h i n g s o f u n c e r t a i n r e s u l t s h e loses b o t h t h e c e r t a i n a s well a s t h e u n c e r t a i n . 2. of a No thrilling pleasure is the sword in of no small felt b y a m a n bereft of the mechanism of speech t h o u g h h e m a y b e l e a r n e d a s i n the c a s e his h a n d o r o f a b l i n d m a n penance to possess virility both and

coward holding 3. It is

w e d d e d to a b e a u t i f u l wife. t h e fruit and \ ability to perh a v e the i n v a r i life; a g o o d wife offsprings a n d a girl of noble delicious foodstuffs good appetite; sexual

h e a l t h y a s well a s to g i v e it to o t h e r s . 4. form Agnihotra; a b l e results must

h a n d s o m e wives, e x t e n s i v e w e a l t h a n d d e s i r e

T h e a i m of the study of V e d a s is the everything auspicious should and purposeful and good marry sexual pleasure of g o o d conduct

yield perfect 5. An

w e a l t h i s for b o t h c h a r i t y a n d p e r s o n a l e n j o y m e n t . intelligent m a n should family hips. 6. Of what avail is the wealth which brings disaster in its w a k e ? W h o will d a r e to r e m o v e the crest-jewel of a s e r p e n t e m b e d d e d in its h o o d ? 7. B u t t e r for sacrificial p u r p o s e s c a n b e t a k e n e v e n f r o m wicked persons; a wise saying uttered by even a the family of though not very beautiful; h e s h a l l n o t m a r r y a girl o f and have developed

low descent

though she m a y be beautiful

1.110.18
child shall be listened to; gold can be taken even

337 from the

h e a p o f r u b b i s h a n d a j e w e l o f a girl c a n b e b r o u g h t e v e n from a mean family. 8. learning and qualities. 9. devoid Friendship of poison w i t h a k i n g is an a impossibility; a serpent cannot remain i s u n h e a r d of; servant household Nectar can be m a y be m a y be received t a k e n from even a poison-infested good person spot; gold taken even from a h e a p of rubbish;

e v e n from a

mean-minded

a girl o f l o w p a r e n t a g e

can be wedded if she has g o o d

p u r e i f t o o m a n y w o m e n f l o c k there t o g e t h e r . 10. A devoted s h o u l d be e n g a g e d in h o u s e h o l d duties; a son should be e n g a g e d in study; an enemy should be e m p l o y e d i n a c t s o f v i c e a n d a friend i n v i r t u o u s a c t s . 11. 12. Servants and ornaments should be put in proper p l a c e s ; a crest-jewel worn on t h e foot will n e v e r s h i n e . C r e s t - j e w e l , o c e a n , f i r e , bell, the v a s t e x p a n s e o f the kingthese have to be at the head; it is firmament a n d a 13.

w r o n g t o k e e p t h e m a t the foot. A m a n o f stuff will h a v e a c c e s s t o o n e o f the t w o g o a l s like a b u n c h o f f l o w e r s . E i t h e r h e i s a t the h e a d o f e v e r y o n e or he f a d e s in a forest. 14. If a fine j e w e l w o r t h y of b e i n g set in a fine e a r r i n g It is is w o r n on the foot it will n o t t a k e 15. a w a y the b r i l l i a n c e .

o n l y the w e a r e r w h o will b e criticised b y others. G r e a t i s the difference b e t w e e n a n y t w o elephants, iron, w o o d , members of stone, cloth, e a c h o f these :horses, women, m e n a n d water. 16. It is impossible to deprive a c o u r a g e o u s m a n o f his Even not s h o o t cut from g o o d qualities though he m a y be tortured a n d tormented. if it is s u p p r e s s e d by a r o g u e t h e flame of a fire d o e s downwards. 17. an Ahorse of g o o d breed does not brook a the w h i p ; a lion c a n n o t b e a r t o h e a r the t r u m p e t i n g elephant. 18. position. A true hero does n o t c o o l l y listen t o b o a s t s o f his e n e m y . None shall deign t o s e r v e the w i c k e d o r or the b a s e e v e n if u n f o r t u n a t e l y d e p r i v e d of w e a l t h fallen from a h i g h sound of the l o u d

E v e n though oppressed by

h u n g e r the lion d o e s n o t

338 s t o o p t o g r a z e the g r a s s . hot blood of elephants. 19. He who tries t o cultivate again the

Garuda

Purna

I t i s satisfied o n l y w h e n i t d r i n k s t h e friendship of d e a t h like neglected fact like lapse of

o n e w h o h a s o n c e d e c e i v e d h i m r e a l l y seeks his o w n the she-mule that conceives. 20. or treated some time 21. enemy T h e children of an enemy shall never be w i t h indifference b y s a n e m e n i n sweet very words. they If a m a y be dangerous After and the

spite of the terrible

t h a t they m a y b e s p e a k i n g vessels o f p o i s o n .

t h o r n p r i c k s t h e foot, a n o t h e r t h o r n i s h e l d i n which the former one is r e m o v e d . off b y a n o t h e r worry about.a Similarly, an e n e m y w h o s e h e l p for man who constantly t h e trees

t h e h a n d with

should be wiped None need

the nonce can be secured by an act of gratification. 22. h a r a s s e s h i m . S u c h p e o p l e will fall off t h e m s e l v e s like on the banks of rivers. 23. W h e n fate i s a d v e r s e , d i s a s t r o u s h a r m f u l t h i n g s m a y s e e m t o b e a u s p i c i o u s a n d v i c e v e r s a . T h i s a t t i t u d e s h a l l eventually bring destruction too. 24. thoughts 25. If the befitting fate i s the favourable, matter on naturally, occur good to fruitful hand everyone not be taking

everywhere. Unnecessary bashfulness a n d reserve need felt i n m o n e t a r y t r a n s a c t i o n s , a c q u i s i t i o n o f k n o w l e d g e , f o o d a n d d e a l i n g s (with the wife i n t h e b e d c h a m b e r ) . 26. live, physician. 27. E v e n a d a y ' s stay shall be avoided in places where m e a n s o f l i v e l i h o o d , fear o f law, s e n s e o f a n d liberal-mindedness are not available. 28. place O n e shall not think of are not staying permanently in a where these 29. anywhere. O five available : A n astrologer, a is not the m o n o p o l y of any omniscient being shame, courteousness N o n e shall stay in a Vedic place where these five do not king, river and a viz : r i c h men, scholar,

V e d i c scholar, a king, a river a n d a saint. a u n a k a , knowledge o n e . All d o n o t k n o w e v e r y t h i n g ; t h e r e i s n o

1.111.8 30. I n this w o r l d we cannot find an A man can be omniscient considered the

339 man base,

nor a person

u t t e r l y foolish.

m i d d l i n g , or highly intelligent in k n o w l e d g e he possesses.

a c c o r d a n c e with

type of

CHAPTER

ONE HUNDRED Brhaspati1 s nltisra

AND ELEVEN

Sta said : 1. following 2. I should now m e n t i o n the the servants. A carefully. H e s h o u l d p r o t e c t the k i n g d o m w i t h d e v o t i o n t o t r u t h should righteously rule over the earth after characteristic king should features of

t h e king as well as

e x a m i n e the

a n d virtue. He

conquering the enemy. 3 . A f l o r i s t c o l l e c t s f l o w e r after f l o w e r b u t d o e s n o t u p r o o t the plant. T h e 4. king should also do likewise b u t n o t like t h e m a k e r of c h a r c o a l who b u r n s the entire tree in t h e forest. T h o s e w h o m i l k the c o w a n d drink milk do not do so n o t defile t h e k i n g d o e s n o t c u t off its king who shall a v o i d injury t o with care if it is turned sour. So also the king should 5. The man who wants cow's milk

d o m of the enemy which is expected to be enjoyed. u d d e r s . H e draws the milk n o w a n t s to tap the resources of the same. 6. H e n c e , the king should rule over the the earth fame, longevity, rewill to be doubt. Similarly, the a kingdom

a n d exertion. In that case the earth, 7. The king of well

n o w n a n d strength shall all be truly his. controlled eager to sense-organs a b l e t o p r o t e c t t h e s u b j e c t s o n l y i f his r u l e i s r i g h t e o u s a n d i f h e worships L o r d Visnu and is and brahmins. 8. After a c q u i r i n g prosperity which is not p e r m a n e n t it to virtue. All is essential that a king should turn his attention render service cows

r i c h e s will p e r i s h i n a m o m e n t b u t n o t t h e w e a l t h o f t h e s o u l .

340 9.

Garuda

Purna

I n d e e d , it is p l e a s i n g to gratify the lust. It is true t h a t But life i s as fickle as the roving

riches are highly pleasant. 10

glances of a winsome m a i d e n . T h r e a t e n i n g u s like t h e t i g r e s s , o l d a g e i s w a i t i n g for us. D i s e a s e s like e n e m i e s crop up all over the an attack on

b o d y . L i f e f l o w s o u t like w a t e r f r o m a b r o k e n p o t . S t i l l n o o n e in the world d o e s ever think of r e d e e m i n g the soul. 11. O M e n ! do service u n t c others. Do what will be beneficent, l a t e r o n . W h y d o y o u r e j o i c e n o w , w i t h o u t a n y s u s picion whatsoever, along with the see what is i n - s t o r e for y o u ) ? an end bevy of beautiful eyes commit in a damsels, (to smitten by the arrows of C u p i d , with your Do not refuge water like brahmins a n d L o r d V i s n u as your life i s s l o w l y c o m i n g t o 12. very slow

sins. T a k i n g pot. In the wife

begin worship. Y o u r

g u i s e o f d e a t h a g r e a t s p i r i t will p o u n c e u p o n y o u . He is a wise m a n who regards as a another man's a s his m o t h e r , a n o t h e r m a n ' s w e a l t h living b e i n g s like himself. 13. I t i s for this t h a t b r a h m i n s w i s h their words their kings to heeded be and rich, that in all their rites never slighted. 14. over. 15. by the T h e king in whose realm is the sound of Om uttered brahmins 16. Even resonant, flourishes. Getting whatever he I t i s for this t h a t k i n g s b o a r d w e a l t h t h a t after servthey shall give unto the brahmins w h a t i s left ing themselves should be l u m p of c l a y a n d all

wants he is never t o r m e n t e d by sickness. the a p p a r e n t l y incompetent sages can gather T h e n why has m a n y cannot a king who friends. H e who has riches a n d 17. articles of daily use. He who has riches

protects his subjects like his c h i l d r e n ? riches h a s m a n y 18. kins. P e o p l e c o n s i d e r h i m w h o h a s r i c h e s fit relatives abandon a man wealth they c o m e

to be called a M a n a n d a Scholar. Friends, sons, wives a n d devoid of wealth. When he none other. 19. T h e k i n g w h o h a s d i s c a r d e d the Sacred C o d e is no r e g a i n s his lost

b a c k to h i m . H e n c e , wealth a l o n e is a m a n ' s kith a n d kin a n d

1.111.29 better than a blind m a n . A blind 20. sons, man m a y well see

341 through whose are not

spies b u t not so a m a n devoid of sacred codes. T h e kingdom of that king is indeed unstable ministers, priests and sense-organs always asleep. a c q u i r e d the valuable support of the the earth of scripservants, 21. three

active a n d alert but sons, 22.

He who has

servants a n d kins has actually conquered the injunctions

g i r d l e d b y t h e four o c e a n s a l o n g w i t h t h e k i n g s . T h e king who transgresses tures a n d the dictates of reason perishes here in forfeits t h e r i g h t t o H e a v e n . 23. A king surrounded by calamities should not lose and heart. He should maintain equanimity both 24. C o u r a g e o u s souls never become in happiness this w o r l d a n d

s o r r o w a n d s h o u l d n e v e r lose e n l i g h t e n e d d e l i g h t o f t h e s o u l . grief-stricken when gobbled m i s h a p s occur. D o e s not the m o o n up by R h u ? 25. body. Do wealth. Fie, Fie upon not grieve men w h o y e a r n for t h e p l e a s u r e s o f thinness the sons of of body or loss of Pndu1 and their over the rise a g a i n t h o u g h

I t i s well k n o w n t h a t

wife suffered p o v e r t y for s o m e t i m e b u t c a m e u n s c a t h e d t h r o u g h i t a n d w e r e h a p p y for e v e r . 26. A king should maintain teams of courtesans should give and suffip a t r o n i z e their arts o f m u s i c a n d d a n c e . H e 27.

cient protection to the science of archery a n d E c o n o m i c s too. T h e king w h o b e c o m e s a n g r y with his servants withthe p o i s o n vomited by a o u t sufficient c a u s e a c t u a l l y t a k e s i n black serpent. 28. A king should avoid fickleness a n d false u t t e r a n c e s Scholars a n d his p e r towards all m e n a n d especially to V e d i c sonal attendants. 29. P r o u d o f his s e r v a n t s a n d k i n s m e n , i f a k i n g r e m a i n s begins sports and dalliance he is sure to be complacent and

outwitted by the enemy.

1. sons a r e Sahadeva.

T h e son of Vicitra-Vrya a n d the brother of D h r t a r s t r a . known as PndavasYudhisfhira, Bhima, Arjuna,

His five and

Nakula

342 30. I t i s d e s p i c a b l e o n his p a r t t o fret

Garuda

Purna

a n d fume without

faults i n o t h e r s . 31. pleasures. 32.

He who punishes servants unjustifiably b e c o m e s abandon sensuous enjoyments and

a victim of the enemie's attack. A king should S u c h people b e c o m e easy targets of enemies who are Enterprise, adventurousness, courage, intellect,

always on the alert. prowess a n d v a l o u r h e w h o possesses suspicious awe even by D e v a s . 33. W h e r e r e s u l t s a r e n o t r e m a r k a b l e e v e n after e n e r g e t i c adverse fate. Still m a n should put up exertion it is d u e to an t h e s e six is viewed with

e n d e a v o u r a n d t a k e r e s o r t t o fruitful a c t i v i t i e s .

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWELVE Brhaspati''s Sta said : 1. Servants are of various typesthe excellent, the nitisra

m i d d l i n g a n d the 2. I

base. T h e y should be

employed

befittingly

in the three types of j o b s . s h a l l n a r r a t e t h e m o d e o f test for for different jobs servants a n d the by authoqualities necessary rities o n t h e m . 3. J u s t as g o l d is tested in the four w a y s b y rubbing on the touchstone, cutting, beating and melting, 4. so also a servant as narrated

i s t e s t e d b y his a p p e a r a n c e , c o n d u c t , p a r e n t a g e a n d a c t i v i t i e s . A m a n of n o b l e family, e n d o w e d with g o o d c h a r a c t e r a n d virtuous, appointed as handsome and pleasantof the t h e officer-in-charge value, a n d q u a l i t i e s , truthful mannered should be Treasury. 5. He who c a n a p p r a i s e the s h a p e a n d size, ( o f soldiers gold, gems, etc.) should be a p p o i n t e d as the chief jeweller. A

m a n w h o c a n u n d e r s t a n d strength a n d weakness o f the should be a p p o i n t e d as the C o m m a n d e r - i n - C h i e f .

1.112.17 6.

343 T h e chief of watch a n d ward should be a mind-reader gesture, is strong, comely be intelligent, with sense-

w h o c a n u n d e r s t a n d e a c h a n d every 7.

t o l o o k a t , u n e r r i n g a n d c o m p e t e n t t o strike a t i m e l y b l o w . T h e chief secretary to the king s h o u l d s h r e w d , truthful clever in conversation 8. 9. in speech,

o r g a n s u n d e r his c o n t r o l , a n d a c q u a i n t e d w i t h a l l s t r a s . T h e chief Ambassador should be intelligent, sensible, , versed in a r e a d e r of others' m i n d s , ruthless a n d blunt in s p e a k i n g facts. T h e officer-in-charge v i r t u e s h o u l d b e w e l l e q u i p p e d with the qualities S m r t i texts, a s c h o l a r o f g r e a t e r u d i t i o n , w i t h g o o d c o n t r o l o v e r his sense-organs a n d 10. skilful, ' of heroism, and valour a n d other good qualities. T h e H e a d Cook should be a served in and a similar acquainted with m a n w h o s e father capacity. He stras. He be grandfather had truthful 11. should be should be

clean in person a n d c a p a b l e of hard work. T h e R o y a l physician shall well-versed in Ayurv e d a 1 with enough practical experience. He should have all the qualities of a decent m a n a n d look comely in a p p e a r a n c e . 12. T h e R o y a l Priest should be a g r e a t scholar in V e d a s a n d their a n c i l l a r i e s . H e s h o u l d b e o b s e r v i n g J a p a s a n d H o m a s . H e should readily bless everyone. 13. once be 14. ces Whether dismissed. T h e m o u t h s of a wicked m a n a n d a serpent a r e sourthey are double-tongued, causing pain, he happens behe is a writer, or a r e c i t e r , an a c c o u n t a n t or a chief executive, if any one is found to be lazy, he should at

of distresssince 15.

r u t h l e s s a n d terrific. A wicked m a n should be avoided even if to be a s c h o l a r . 16. Is n o t a s e r p e n t terrific t h o u g h its h e a d is

d e c k e d with a precious g e m ? W h o is n o t a f r a i d of the w i c k e d ? W h o is furious w i t h o u t p r o v o c a t i o n ? I t i s t h e w i c k e d f r o m w h o s e m o u t h the p o i s o n o f a g r e a t s e r p e n t i n the f o r m o f u n b e a r a b l e w o r d s f l o w s o u t c o n tinuously. 17. vie I f a s a l a r i e d s e r v a n t o f the k i n g b e c o m e s s o r i c h a s t o equal competency, who k n o w s his inner with him, is of

1. T h e ancient Indian medical science p r o p a g a t e d and practised by C a r a k a , S u r u t a , V g b h a t a a n d o t h e r s i s still r e c o g n i z e d b y I n d i a n G o v e r n m e n t a n d put to use by the people in I n d i a .

344 secrets a n d v u l n e r a b l e points, up a puts him to death. 18. Those servants are not

Garuda who is very industrious a n d

Purna puts

c l a i m t o h a l f o f his k i n g d o m t h e r e i s n o h a r m i f the k i n g to be retained who were at

f i r s t v a l o r o u s , slow a n d g e n t l e o f s p e e c h , truthful a n d self-controlled b u t later on proved to be otherwise. 19. S e r v a n t s o f this t y p e a r e very r a r e s e r v a n t s w h o a r e sleep n o t l a z y , w h o a r e satisfied, w h o c a n b e easily r o u s e d from a n d who are courageous. 20. any one A s e r v a n t suffering from a l l these b a d p o i n t s or from of them should be summarily dismisseddevoid of hauof all

in emergency, who have the equanimity in happiness a n d sorrow

p a t i e n c e , d i s h o n e s t , c r u e l - t e m p e r e d , s p e a k i n g ill o f o t h e r s , ghty, gluttonous, roguish, greedy 21. 22. his types a n d then try t o inefficient a n d c o w a r d l y . T h e k i n g shall k e e p i n his fort s t r o n g w e a p o n s c o n q u e r his e n e m i e s .

I f h e i s n o t w e l l - e q u i p p e d h e s h o u l d m a k e p e a c e With is

e n e m y for a p e r i o d of six m o n t h s or a y e a r a n d w h e n he 23.

well e q u i p p e d h e shall a t t a c k the e n e m y . If a k i n g e n g a g e s foolish p e r s o n s in v a r i o u s offices the b e i g n o m i n y , loss o f w e a l t h a n d hell after d e a t h . W h a t e v e r the k i n g d o e s h i m s e l f o r w h a t e v e r his s e r v a n t s or sinful a c t s , the k i n g has to r e a p the fruits and capable results will 24.

do meritorious 25. men

thereof. H e will f l o u r i s h o r fall a s the c a s e m a y b e . H e n c e , a k i n g s h o u l d e m p l o y intelligent i n offices o f v i r t u e o r w e a l t h for t h e welfare o f c o w s a n d

b r a h m i n s in the S t a t e .

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

THIRTEEN

Brhaspati's Sla said 1. :

nitsra

O n e s h o u l d e m p l o y only the c a p a b l e s e r v a n t a n d All g o o d q u a l i t i e s c a n be found in a

not

t h e inefficient.

scholar

a n d a l l faults in a fool.

1.113.12 2.

345 O n e s h o u l d a l w a y s sit i n the c o m p a n y o f the g o o d a n d D i s c u s s i o n s a n d friendship s h o u l d e v e r b e a prison one should a s s o c i a t e o n l y w i t h the

associate with them. 3. Even in

with the g o o d a n d not with the w i c k e d . l e a r n e d , the h u m b l e , t h e v i r t u o u s a n d the truthful. O u t s i d e , h e s h o u l d n e v e r a s s o c i a t e w i t h the w i c k e d . 4. wealthy. tasks. 5. the fall L i k e t h e h o n e y b e e that s u c k s h o n e y b u t d o e s not c a u s e o f the flower the king should t a k e r e v e n u e from the something for T h e cowherd leaves C o m p l e t i n g all works left unfinished h e He should make shall become it a point to complete un-finished

r e a l m w i t h o u t h a r m i n g it. the c a l f a n d m i l k s the rest. 6. 7. 8.

S i m i l a r l y , the k i n g s h o u l d m i l k t h e

e a r t h b u t l e a v e p l e n t y for the c a l v e s i. e. the s u b j e c t s . J u s t a s the h o n e y b e e c o l l e c t s h o n e y from a n u m b e r o f The anthill, h o n e y , the m o o n i n the b r i g h t h a l f a n d v e r y little flowers so the k i n g s h a l l g a t h e r w e a l t h t a k i n g a little from e a c h . a l m s w a x little b y little. S e e i n g t h a t c o l l y r i u m a n d ink, u s e d t h o u g h every d a y , b e c o m e one's time. or self-study. 9. A vicious a n d in a lustful m a n s h a l l find h u n d r e d s o f o b s c o n t r o l his five senses he He who is engaged in free f r o m p a s s i o n c a n K n o w l e d g e b y further family by g o o d tacles even can practise forest; b u t if he c a n e x h a u s t e d after s o m e t i m e , a n d t h a t the a n t b e careful i n n o t w a s t i n g of charity

hill f l o u r i s h e s d a y b y d a y , o n e s h o u l d

O n e s h o u l d e n g a g e o n e s e l f i n activities

p e n a n c e e v e n i n his h o u s e . and he who is

activities not censurable 10. conduct. 11. out

m a k e his h o u s e a h e r m i t a g e . V i r t u e is protected by truth. a pot by acquisition; frequent cleaning a n d a

I t i s b e t t e r t o s t a y i n the forest o f V i n d h y a , t o d i e with-

p a r t a k i n g of f o o d ; it is b e t t e r to s l e e p in a s p o t infested by

s e r p e n t s or to l e a p i n t o a w e l l ; it is better to p l u n g e i n t o a whirlpool or a dangerous water current, than to say " P l e a s e g i v e " or b e g for a s u m o f m o n e y from o n e ' s o w n k i n d r e d . 12. perish. Riches dwindle when fortune dwindles a n d not by never e n j o y m e n t ; i f m e r i t h a d b e e n a c q u i r e d b e f o r e , riches will

346 13.

Garuda

Purna

K n o w l e d g e is an o r n a m e n t to a b r a h m i n ; a k i n g is t h e sky; a

b e a u t i f i e r o f the w o r l d ; the m o o n i s a n o r n a m e n t o f t h e g o o d conduct is an o r n a m e n t to every one. 14.

B h m a , Arjuna a n d others were born as princes,

they

w e r e p l e a s i n g a n d d e l i g h t f u l like t h e m o o n ; they w e r e v a l o r o u s , truthful, b r i l l i a n t like the s u n a n d w e r e k i n d l y p r o t e c t e d b y L o r d Krsna. E v e n they w e r e s u b j e c t e d t o a b j e c t m i s e r y b y t h e y h a d t o b e g for alms.; if the fate inis f l u e n c e o f evil p l a n e t s ; tosses e v e r y o n e a b o u t . 15. like O b e i s a n c e t o K a r m a w h i c h forces o f ten incarnations; by alms with which Brahm to work cast coma t the a p o t t e r i n the b o w l s o f c o s m o s b y w h i c h a skull i n Visnu was R u d r a was

adverse who is c a p a b l e of what ? T h e current of previous actions

into distress

p e l l e d t o b e g for 16. The

his h a n d a n d

behest of which the sun goes

r o u n d a n d r o u n d i n the sky. Bali, the receiver L o r d V i s n u and that too in the

donor was K i n g

himself, t h e gift c o n s i s t e d o f w h o l e E a r t h bondage. sest t h e e . 17.

presence of learned brahmins. W h a t did he get in return ? Only O F a t e ! obeisance to T h e e w h o workest as it pleaT h e m o t h e r i s G o d d e s s L a k s m herself; t h e father i s

L o r d V i s n u ; still i f t h e s o n ( c u p i d ) 18. whatever now. 19.

were to be of crooked m i n d , previous actions;

w h o is to be p u n i s h e d for the s a m e ? M a n enjoys o n l y t h e fruits o f his he h a s d o n e i n the previous b i r t h s h a s its r e a c t i o n s sorrow too

T h e h a p p i n e s s i s e n j o i n e d b y oneself, the

i s e n j o i n e d b y oneself; e v e n the w o m b s e l e c t e d b y h i m i s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h the a c t i o n o f the p r e v i o u s b i r t h . 20. into lap. 21. whose E v e n R v a n a perished a t the h a n d s o f T i m e . R v a n a
1

A m a n c a n n e v e r forsake t h e a c t i o n d o n e b y h i m far sky, he or deep into the sea or his m o t h e r o n h i g h o n the m o u n t a i n ; her h e a d o r k e p t i n her is held by

the

whether

fortress w a s t h e m o u n t a i n T r i k t a , the m o a t t h e very Uanas.

situated.

o c e a n ; s o l d i e r s R k s a s a s ; the a c t i o n o f t h e h i g h e s t o r d e r ; a n d the S s t r a p r o p o u n d e d b y
1.

T h e m o u n t a i n on which the city of L a k w a s

1.113.33 22. hour 23. Everything happens in the age, sky, time, or day, deep

347 night, in the

or m o m e n t as is ordained beforehand; not otherwise. Whether p e o p l e go up in the

n e t h e r w o r l d ; w h e t h e r t h e y t r a v e r s e a l l q u a r t e r s , t h e y will n o t g e t what is not given by K a r m a . 24. T h e learning o f by-gone-days, the m o n e y m a d e over beforethese run a h e a d of a perat speed. a s gift a n d the a c t i o n s d o n e son who walks 25.

Actions alone are of consequence. S e e J n a k ( S t ) , by

whose m a r r i a g e was celebrated when the stars a n d planets were a s c e n d a n t a n d the-lagna (i.e. auspicious h o u r ) was decided s a g e V a s i s t h a himself, h a d t o u n d e r g o m i s e r i e s . 26. Auspicious signs, characteristic clash; marks are of no avail when K a r m a c o m e s into for R m a w h o h a d s t o u t lot. rites

m u s c u l a r c a l v e s , L a k s m a n a w h o w a s a s swift a s s o u n d a n d S t w h o h a d t h i c k l y g r o w n g l o s s y h a i r a l l t h e s e h a d t o suffer a 27-28. ward off t h e Neither the son with P i n d a - d n a a n d other adverse influence of K a r m a . In n o r t h e f a t h e r w i t h v a r i o u s rites for t h e w e l f a r e o f t h e

son c a n

the physical

b o d i e s b o r n a s a r e s u l t o f K a r m a , different k i n d s o f illness p h y s i c a l o r m e n t a l fall i n q u i c k s u c c e s s i o n like t h e b y a skilful a r c h e r . 29. shafts d i s c h a r g e d obH e n c e , a courageous m a n should view

jects in the light of s t r a i c injunctions a n d not otherwise. I n e v e r y b i r t h , a m a n r e a p s t h e fruits of his previous or merits a n d demerits in the respective ages of infancy, youth old a g e at which the actions h a d been performed. 30. J u s t as a g a l e blows a b o a t , the K a r m a d r a g s a m a n the place where destined to get. a g a i n s t h i s w i s h e v e n f r o m foreign c o u n t r i e s t o h e h a s t o r e a p t h e fruits. 31. Even a wail or 32. its hole; 33. A god m a n necessarily gets what he is i n c a p a b l e o f s t o p p i n g it. is H e n c e , I do not beT h e line o f fate c a n -

am not surprised at the events. When chased, but A

not be erased. a s e r p e n t e s c a p e s i n t o a w e l l ; a n eleit c a n be tethered) ; a m o u s e to p h a n t to the trunk (to which all these ? well-assimilated knowledge never d i m i n i s h e s ; it

who c a n fly from K a r m a which is quicker t h a n

348
i n c r e a s e s on b e i n g 34. remember the w o r l d . i m p a r t e d to

Garuola

Purana

o t h e r s like the w a t e r in a well become stable; they riches,

which increases when water is d r a w n out. Riches acquired this and seek virtuously virtue. f l o u r i s h still m o r e w i t h v i r t u e . H e n c e , w h e n y o u a i m a t You

thus b e c o m e g r e a t i n

3 5 . N o n e b e c o m e s m i s e r a b l e if, s e e k i n g v i r t u e , h e u n d e r g o e s the s a m e h a r d s h i p s a s a p o o r l a y m a n d o e s s e e k i n g food. 36. Of all purities, purity of food is excellent. If a m a n incurs impurity by taking unwholesome food, he cannot be c l e a n s e d with c l a y o r w a t e r o r a n y o t h e r s u b s t a n c e o f c l e a n l i ness. 37. mind, There are five cleansing of sense-organs, maintains agents-truthfulness, s y m p a t h y with pure

suppression 38. He who

all l i v i n g

b e i n g s a n d w a t e r t h e f i f t h o f t h e series. truthfulness a n d p u r i t y f i n d s a n to even Horseeasy access to heaven. sacrifice. 39. A m a n habitually wicked thoughts his in deeds, with his conscic a n n o t b e c l e a n s e d with a a n d feet c l e a n , his m i n d learning penance and e n c e b e n u m b e d with evil 40. under He who keeps Truthfulness is superior

t h o u s a n d l u m p s of clay or a hundred pots of water. hands acquires perfect 41. control, and

f a m e r e a p s t h e fruit o f p i l g r i m a g e . T h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f a s a i n t l y m a n a r e : h e i s not does not become angry when at the outset on hearing elated much when honoured, he 42. No one feels satisfied

slighted, he does not speak harsh words in anger. wholesome advice at the proper time intelligent a n d sweet-voiced. 43. ed by manliness. 44. it W h a t m e n a r e not d e s t i n e d t o g e t c a n n o t b e s e c u r through m a n t r a s , strength, valour, intellect o r W h a t is there to l a m e n t o v e r ? I have secured s o m e t h i n g u n s o l i c i t e d . W h e n I sent W h a t is there them from a poor m a n though

b a c k , i t w e n t a w a y from w h e r e i t h a d c o m e . 45.

to l a m e n t o v e r ? D u r i n g n i g h t s b i r d s f l o c k t o g e t h e r o n a t r e e for rest.

1.113.58 In the mornings to l a m e n t o v e r ? 46. there. All h a v e the same destination. they g o t o different q u a r t e r s .

349 W h a t is there

All are proceeding

If one a m o n g them goes 47.

m o r e quickly what is there to

lament over ? O a u n a k a , the living beings arise from the u n m a n i in the unmanifest. they remain manifest. of death What is there to l a m e n t fest; a t t h e i r d e a t h t h e y d i s s o l v e t h e m s e l v e s In between 48. over ? If the time has not been reached no one If prick he the same has slight with the tip of dies even if pierced with a h u n d r e d arrows. arrived he does not survive even a a K u a grass. 49. A m a n gets only those things whether misery is destined to g e t ; (at the behest he goes only to those places where he has to go of K a r m a ) and he has to get. 50. shout and transgress or later]. 51. nor A m a n gets things from K a r m a only. W h y should he cry ? E v e n their Neither if prodded, flowers and fruits d o n o t stipulated time [ t h e y do not c o m e out earlier conduct, nor the As in meets parentage, nor neither the learning

or p l e a s u r e he gets only what

So is the case with K a r m a of the previous birth. neither qualities purity of seed

knowledge,

fructifies i n m a n . 52. A man

the c a s e of trees, g o o d d e e d s a c q u i r e d with death where there is a slayer or Goaded by Karma a m a n goes,

b y a u s t e r i t i e s fructify

in m e n .

riches where there is plenty. to the respective places. 53-56. midst doer. Enjoy Just your as a

calf can fool

recognize ! Why certainly

its m o t h e r in the should you feel

of a t h o u s a n d cows, What you do or bad.

the previous K a r m a a p p r o a c h e s t h e n o w will follow y o u h e r e -

merits, O

aggrieved ? 57.

after whether g o o d

T h e vicious a n d the

m e a n observe other's faults, b e T h e y see can After they but pretend not find happiness, considera-

t h e y s o little a s t h e m u s t a r d s e e d s . 58. O Brahmin ! Nowhere

t o s e e t h e i r o w n f a u l t s a s b i g a s B i l v a fruits. w h o a r e d e f i l e d b y lust a n d h a t r e d . careful

tion I see that there is p l e a s u r e where there is enlightened bliss.

350 59. Attachment is a cause

Garuda

Purna

of misery; since apprehen-

s i o n follows i n t h e w a k e o f a t t a c h m e n t . If, t h e r e f o r e , a t t a c h m e n t is eschewed one should be happy. 60. 61. T h e b o d y i s t h e b a s e for m i s e r y a n d h a p p i n e s s . Pleasure and pain c a n b e defined misery, briefly. whatever Life Whatrema n d body are born together. ever goes in the possession of others is ains in one's own possession is pleasure. 62. life. 63. What has still passed far off. has g o n e for e v e r ; i f a n y t h i n g i s to h a p p e n it is i s n o t afflicted He who minds the present alone After p l e a s u r e c o m e s t h e Pleasure and pain p a i n a n d after p a i n c o m e s whirl like wheels in h u m a n the pleasure.

by sorrow.

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND F O U R T E E N

Brhaspati's Sta said 1. nature. 2. in : None is friend or enemy to any other person by instructions

F r i e n d s h i p a n d e n m i t y a r i s e from s p e c i a l c a u s e s . T h e two s y l l a b l e s " M i t r a m " ( F r i e n d ) signify s o l a c e from fear a n d preservation of love a n d freedom

sorrow, 3. 4. 5.

confidence.

B y w h o m h a s this j e w e l b e e n c r e a t e d ? letters " H a r i " he has in mothers, avoid the

I f a n y o n e s a y s for o n c e the t w o Men If y o u three, One cannot have as

e v e r y t h i n g m a d e r e a d y for his j o u r n e y t o s a l v a t i o n . m u c h confidence w i v e s , b r o t h e r s o r s o n s a s i n a friend o f k i n d r e d n a t u r e . w i s h for a gambling not prolonged friendship, monetary same seat following 6. with him, sit in an the transactions with one's

w i t h h i m a n d s e e i n g h i s wife i n h i s a b s e n c e . should and m o t h e r , sister of lust). What daughter in an isolated place. T h e power-

ful s e n s e - o r g a n s c a n d r a g e v e n

erudite m a n (into the mire

of c o m m o n men ?

1.114.15
7. to God

351
of love c o m p e l s persons to turn their attention as provide risks, d e a t h , death]. hailstorm of at the s p e e d o f the r a c i n g h o r s e the p e r s o n and punishments a n d [i.e. People do n o t love their wives but run

such spots

not to one's own ? 8. It

after other w o m e n risking even

is easier to g a u g e the velocity of the

the time of the final dissolution, who d o e s not love. 9.

a n d the d e p t h of the g r e a t o c e a n t h a n the heart

O a u n a k a , if there is no opportune m o m e n t , if there make overtures women

is no privacy a n d if there is no one to shall preserve chastity. 10. 11. S h e serves one

m a n b u t c h e r i s h e s l o v e for a n o t h e r . some misconduct yet

I n t h e a b s e n c e o f m a n a w o m a n c a n v e r y well b e c h a s t e . A mother moved by passion m a y commit sons may disapprove of the d e e d s . T h o u g h the 12.

they shall not worry m u c h a b o u t them. T h e b o d y of a courtesan is prized in the world ; the the neck torn by the b o d y that is held at stake always with

hoofs o f d e b a u c h e s a n d h e n c e a l w a y s a g i t a t e d a n d a n x i o u s . H e r s l e e p i s d e p e n d e n t o n o t h e r s ' c o n v e n i e n c e ; s h e h a s t o follow t h e wishes of others 13. and without a show of sorrow she has to laugh a n d sport always. F i r e , w a t e r , w o m e n , fools, s e r p e n t s a n d R o y a l h o u s e be resorted to by o t h e r s a l w a y s , y e t they holdsthese are to 14.

t a k e a w a y o n e ' s life a l l o f a s u d d e n . W h a t i s t h e r e t o w o n d e r a t , i f a b r a h m i n well v e r s e d and administration becomes a errs from chastity ? W h a t in g r a m m a r b e c o m e s a g r e a t scholar ? W h a t is there to w o n d e r at if a king well versed in polity virtuous king ? W h a t is there to endowed with beauty times. 15. Do not allow others to see your vulnerable points; its limbs worlds or there is b u t n o t e o t h e r s c a r e f u l l y like a t o r t o i s e safe in its shell. 16. Women may be confined to the round. nether m a y b e - i m p r i s o n e d w i t h h i g h w a l l s all n o m o v i n g g l o s s y tuft o f h a i r w h o can Still if t h a t k e e p s all and wonder at if a y o u n g w o m a n

charms

is there to w o n d e r at if a poor m a n b e g i n s to c o m m i t sins s o m e -

see t h e m ? [ U s i n g h e r

J o n g t r e s s e s s h e will e s c a p e f r o m t h e s e p l a c e s ] .

352 17. knowing 18.

Garuda

Purna

O n e ' s o w n k i n s m a n p u r s u i n g the s a m e a c t i v i t i e s a n d his v u l n e r a b l e He is the points is the who fiercest foe. E v e n an

enemy standing outside cannot injure so m u c h . real scholar pleases children with sweets, t h e g o o d p e o p l e with h u m i l i t y , t h e w o m e n w i t h w e a l t h , the d e i t i e s w i t h p e n a n c e , a n d p e o p l e for their w e l f a r e . 19. T h e y are not wise who try t o w i n sins, to o v e r a friend b y attain wealth by secure a lady's a n d defective m a n w h o will a man with can deception, to secure virtue love t h r o u g h harshness. 20. Even a pure action m a y It is only the I do n o t be defiled w h e n t h e r o o t i s c u t off. 21. O brahmin, senseless that through

harassing others, to learn with pleasure, a n d to

c u t off a t r e e l a d e n w i t h fruits in o r d e r to s e c u r e t h e fruits. believe necessary things c a n b e c o m e a saint even if a w o m a n d r i n k i n g w i n e be c h a s t e as w e l l ? 22. One shall not place trust in a person n o t trustlater if Sttvika his w o r t h y . E v e n friends a r e n o t t o b e t r u s t e d . S o m e h e i s a n g r y t h e friend m a y p u b l i c i s e his s e c r e t s . 23. A general confidence in all living beings is saintly man is b u t the m a i n characteristic of a feelings a secret for ever. 24. intellect. 25. night A n i n t e l l i g e n t m a n s h a l l a v o i d t h e s e six : O l d w o m e n (for s e x u a l p u r p o s e s ) , fresh w i n e , d r y m e a t , c a r r o t , c u r d i n t h e a n d sleep d u r i n g the d a y . 26. To a poor m a n a party to an old m a n a of guests is poison w o m a n in knowledge is (involvthe p r i m e of her poison; eating Whatever action is d o n e it follows t h e d o e r . off y o u r c o u r a g e Whatand ever m a y b e y o u r a c t i o n , d o n o t l e a v e to keep time h e tries. H o w

ing e x p e n s e s ) ;

y o u t h i s p o i s o n ; a n ill a s s i m i l a t e d before digestion is poison. 27. To a m a n of undaunted

spirit honour is pleasing

overthrow of administration is m a n a c h a r i t a b l e gift i s 28. Excessive The six

pleasing to the vile; to a poor

pleasing a n d a w o m a n in the p r i m e of reasons for sickness in hard men are : food-

her youth is pleasing to a y o u n g m a n . main drinking of water; eating indigestible

1.114.37

353

stuffs; w a s t a g e o f s e m e n virile ; h o l d i n g u p o f faeces a n d u r i n e (not e v a c u a t i n g t h e m i m m e d i a t e l y ) ; s l e e p keeping awake at night. 29. in sexual E a r l y m o r n i n g r a y s o f the sun, and excessive indulgence t h e c o n s t a n t sight o f t h e s e r e d u c e the l o n g immediately : early morning intercourse in i n t e r c o u r s e , the s m o k e c o l u m n rising from the c r e m a menses-all d u r i n g the d a y a n d

tion g r o u n d , w a r m i n g o f t h e p a l m s , the f a c e o f a w o m a n i n her evity o f a m a n . 30.

T h e following six t a k e a w a y o n e ' s life w o m e n (if c o h a b i t e d w i t h ) , the

d r y m e a t , old the morning. 31.

sun, very sour curd, sleeping a n d having sexual T h e s e six things instil

m o r e v i t a l i t y i n t o the cohabitation diet, hot

human with a and

o r g a n i s m : Fresh melted butter, g r a p e s , w o m a n i n the p r i m e o f h e r y o u t h , a m i l k the s h a d e of a s p r e a d i n g t r e e . 32.

water

T h e w a t e r i n a well, the s h a d e o f a b a n y a n tree a n d b r e a s t s of a y o u n g - w o m a n t h e s e three a r e

the w e l l - r o u n d e d 33.

w a r m in winter a n d cool in summer. T h e three i n s t a n t a n e o u s l y i n v i g o r a t i n g t h i n g s a r e : a oil bath and a w h o l e s o m e food. The three things are : a hazardous journey, young woman,

instantaneously debilitating s e x u a l i n t e r c o u r s e a n d fever. 34.

D r y m e a t w a t e r e d d o w n w i t h m i l k s h a l l not b e t a k e n If taken, an imme-

i n the c o m p a n y o f wife, friends o r the k i n g . d i a t e s e p a r a t i o n from t h e m i s i n e v i t a b l e . 35. too much, 36.

G o d d e s s o f w e a l t h forsakes a m a n h a b i t u a l l y w e a r i n g teeth, e a t i n g sleeping at the g r o u n d habitually speaking harsh frequently, words and

dirty clothes, allowing dirt to a c c u m u l a t e on the sunrise a n d sunset, even if he h a p p e n s to be V i s n u . Gutting of grass

writing on

with the toes,

chafing of the

feet, n e g l e c t

of the cleaning of

t e e t h , w e a r i n g d i r t y c l o t h e s , k e e p i n g the h a i r r o u g h , s l e e p i n g a t d a w n a n d dusk, lying d o w n naked, eating a n d l a u g h i n g excessively, d r u m m i n g on one's own limbs or 37. on the seatthese m a y d e s t r o y t h e affluence o f e v e n L o r d V i s n u . T h e s e six b r i n g b a c k o n e ' s w e a l t h l o n g lost : k e e p i n g k e e p i n g t h e feet spotlessly p u r e , the h e a d c l e a n e d a n d w a s h e d ,

k e e p i n g the c o m p a n y o f e x c e l l e n t w o m e n , t a k i n g food i n l i m i t e d

Garuda

Purna

q u a n t i t i e s , l y i n g o n t h e b e d w i t h o u t s t r i p p i n g , a n d s e x u a l interc o u r s e e x c l u d i n g t h e festival n i g h t s . 38. 39. l a m p , the 40. I l l l u c k a n d m i s f o r t u n e c a n b e w a r d e d off Ill luck frequently resides shadow of the cot, the in the b a c k by weari n g a flower on the h e a d a n d especially the white one. s h a d o w of a and the shadow of a seat

water u s e d b y w a s h e r m e n . T h e rays of the early a funeral morning sun, the intercourse column of an old s m o k e rising from pyre, with

woman, very s o u r c u r d a n d t h e d u s t f r o m a b r o o m s h o u l d n o t b e r e s o r t e d t o b y t h o s e w h o w i s h for l o n g e v i t y . 41. T h e dust of elephants, horses, chariots, grains and sheep is the dust cows is auspicious. T h a t from ass, inauspicious. 42. from the 43. 44. T h e dust of cows, the limbs of one's own dust of grains and sonthese are very holy, they the dust the camel, goat and

d e s t r o y e v e n t h e g r e a t sins. T h e dust of a goat, the dust of an ass T h e wind blowing from the nails, the these from the and f r o m a b r o o m t h e s e a r e u n h o l y a n d c o n d u c i v e t o g r e a t sin. winnowing basket, from the broom merits water dripping from the dripping acquired. 45. min O n e shall never walk between two b r a h m i n s , a n d wife, will the have two a braha n d fire, a husband 46. etc. ? 47. Do not trust the incredulous ; do not p l a c e too m u c h lurking d a n peace of c o n f i d e n c e e v e n in t h e t r u s t - w o r t h y ; t h e r e is a g e r i n reposing t r u s t ; i t m a y u p r o o t o n e . 48. He who remains complacent after m a k i n g with t h e enemy h a s actually g o n e to sleep a t o p the tree, he will w a k e u p after h i s fall. 49. O n e s h o u l d n e v e r b e t o o soft n o r t o o c r u e l i n a c t i o n . the ruthless with T h e soft w o u l d b e c r u s h e d w i t h t h e soft a n d the ruthless. What wise m a n m a s t e r s , two horses in women, from water destroy cloth a n d previously

p o t u s e d for b a t h i n g , t h e d u s t hairall

a n d the water

a n d two bulls. confidence Icings, f i r e s , s e r p e n t s , s t u d i e s , enemy, worldly enjoyment,

1.114.62
50.

355 O n e s h o u l d n e v e r b e t o o s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d n o r t o o soft. crooked trees like t h e go remain

S t r a i g h t t r e e s a r e c u t i n a forest a n d the as they were. 51. trees. Meritorious persons bow down

fruit-laden they

D r y trees a n d fools w o u l d r a t h e r b r e a k t h a n b e n d a t a l l . 52. Miseries come unsolicited ; cat pounces upon they its a w a y as a s the prey, m a n b u t not seeking so in

come. J u s t 53. 54.

things shall pounce on happiness. R i c h e s g o b e f o r e a n d after t h e n o b l e A counsel i n six ears (discussed four

the case of ignoble. Y o u can do as you please. a m o n g three perears is kept for s o n s ) is leaked out i m m e d i a t e l y ; that in s o m e t i m e b u t the o n e i n t w o e a r s by Brahma. 55. Of what avail i s the cow which neither yields the milk nor b e c o m e s pregnant ? Of what p u r p o s e n e i t h e r v i r t u o u s nor s c h o l a r l y . 56. endowed 57. 58.' not ed The with whole family i s lit up by a single g o o d son like t h e sky by a single ones learning, intelligence a n d valour is rendered fragrant is a son w h o is

cannot be understood even

with the moon. T h e whole forest t r e e i n full b l o o m l i k e t h e f a m i l y b y a v i r t u o u s s o n . O n e g o o d son alone is preferable to a hundred d e v o i d of g o o d qualities. T h e m o o n alone dispels darkness a n d the stars in their t h o u s a n d s . 59. for T h e s o n s h o u l d b e f o n d l e d for f i v e y e a r s next ten years ; when he reaches and thrashthe sixteenth the

y e a r he should be treated like a friend. 60. Y o u c a n n o t find an e n e m y like a sonon b e i n g b o r n from one [when a than to her son is b o r n to t h e son husband] ; t h e s o n t a k e s a w a y o n e ' s wife m o t h e r ' s attention is m o r e while growing dies 61. In up he takes the world

away wealth some men are

and if by chance he like t i g e r s w i t h t h e step is the only

h e t a k e s a w a y the life o f t h e f a t h e r t o o . d e e r w i t h the m o u t h o f a t i g e r . every

m o u t h o f a d e e r a n d s o m e like way. 62.

I n o r d e r t o k n o w t h e m fully d i s t r u s t a t T h e r e is only o n e fault in

men of forbearance a n d

356
patience. powerless. 63. permitted 64. All enjoyments are been transitory. better) that If T h e r e is no second fault. People

Garuda take him this

Purna to be is

alone

(it w o u l d h a v e

the

inclinations

o f t h e skilful b e u n a f f e c t e d t o w a r d s t h e i r f r i e n d s . O a u n a k a ! w h e n the father passes away, the eldest He should maintain everyone brothers being and b r o t h e r t a k e s his p l a c e . a father unto them. . 65. give them 66. father. The collection of a number of even insignificant of blades of bind uses even the t h i n g s m a y b e terrific i n t h e i r effect. grass twisted into a rope an elephant. 67. T h e m a n who robs some one though he hell. m o n e y t o m a k e a c h a r i t a b l e gift g o e s t o 68. temple 69. disrespect. S a g e s h a v e p r e s c r i b e d e x p i a t o r y r i t e s for t h e a drinker and of wine, a do a thief a n d a slayer of a b r a h m i n , 70. Gods b r e a k e r of of the his wife Families property, are faced of T h e fruit o f t h e of A number H e s h a l l b e i m p a r t i a l t o his the same pleasures as younger they received from their

m a y be strong enough to

meritorious deed goes to the original owner of wealth. w i t h fall b y t h e d e s t r u c t i o n brahmins and showing looting them

v o w s ; b u t t h e r e i s n o a t o n e m e n t for a n u n g r a t e f u l w r e t c h . manes not accept oblations his m e a n - m i n d e d fellow w h o keeps w o m a n o f low c a s t e a s

c o n c u b i n e , w h o i s a s l a v e t o his wife a n d w h o a l l o w s to enjoy the c o m p a n y of a p a r a m o u r in his o w n house. 71. crooked 72. A n u n g r a t e f u l fellow, a p e r s o n o f a grouse four for nature these are the real ignoble

qualities, a m a n of the

a person who nurses

a long time and

Cndlas and

fifth is one born as such. E v e n a n i n s i g n i f i c a n t e n e m y o f evil i n t e n t i o n s s h o u l d E v e n a tiny spark in the o f fire, if n o t not be neglected carelessly. 73.

p u t out i m m e d i a t e l y c o n s u m e s the entire world. He who is quiet a n d tranquil boisterous age tranquil. Who o f b l o o m i n g y o u t h d e s e r v e s t h e c r e d i t for b e i n g forces a r e spent o u t ?

d o e s n o t b e c o m e n a t u r a l l y q u i e t a n d t r a n q u i l w h e n a l l his v i t a l

1.115.5 74. haughty 75. O f o r e m o s t a m o n g b r a h m i n s , r i c h e s , like t h e D o not b e vital is thinking " T h i s is m i n e . " T h e b o d y t h a t i s d e p e n d e n t o n the too. If the mind

357 public

thoroughfare are c o m m o n to everyone.

elated a n d secretions

is dependent on the m i n d ed always. If the

disarranged

the vital secretions a r e destroyed. H e n c e , m i n d shall be preservm i n d is in perfect order the vital secretions function properly.

W *i i

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

FIFTEEN

Brhaspati's Sta Said :

1.

nitisra

O n e s h o u l d k e e p o n e s e l f far a w a y f r o m a

false wife, a a defiled For,

deceitful friend, a t y r a n n o u s king, a d i s o b e d i e n t d a u g h t e r a n d a turbulent territory. 2. virtue sojourn,

sen,

A l a s , life i n t h e K a l i a g e i s t r o u b l e s o m e i n d e e d . has taken truth is in exile in

t o renunciation, p e n a n c e h a s started its l o n g a foreign land, earth has b e c o m e brahmins have Blessed become greedy,

barren, people are fradulent; are raised 3. their to high position.

m e n a n T h x o r i o u s , women are fickle a n d wayward and base m e n indeed are they w h o ar dead. B l e s s e d a r e t h e y w h o d o n o t w i t n e s s the d e s t r u c t i o n o f l a n d s , the sexual d a l l i a n c e of their f a m i l y , r u i n o f their

wives with other m e n a n d the i n f a m o u s i n d u l g e n c e of their sons in vice. 4. can one None feel a c a n be delighted with thrilling r a p t u r e in their vicious sons; how in a d e c e p t i v e friend the c o m p a n y of a disloyal

wife ? T h e r e 5.

is no q u e s t i o n of c o n f i d i n g

a n d n o _ j 3 e a c e f u l life i s p o s s i b l e i n a t r o u b l e - i n f e s t e d l a n d . F o o a i S o l e d out by others, m o n e y r o b b e d from others, another a man's residence bed, sexual in another dalliance with another m a n ' s h o u s e will s t r i p defiling of

m a n ' s wife a n d

e v e n I n d r a o f his g l o r y .

358 6.

Garuda

Purna

S i n s p r e a d s from m a n t o m a n slowly b y c o n v e r s a t i o n ,

m u t u a l touch, frequent association, taking food together, sitting together, lying together, a n d travelling together. 7. W o m e n p e r i s h d u e t o their b e a u t y , p e n a n c e d u e t o fury, taking the way d u e to an u n d u e length a n d pious b r a h m i n by d r a ' s food. 8. By sitting together, sharing the s a m e bed, t a k i n g food t o g e t h e r , a n d j u m b l i n g u p t h e rowr s i n i s t r a n s m i t t e d f r o m m a n t o m a n like w a t e r f r o m p o t t o p o t . 9. fondled. 10. A long way is old a g e to m e n ; water clothes. is old a g e to m o u n t a i n s ; abstention from sexual m e n a n d sunlight is old a g e to 11. intercourse is old age to woT h e r e a r e m a n y d e f e c t s i n f o n d l i n g a n d m a n y benefits in thrashing. H e n c e , a disciple a n d the son are to be thrashed, not

B a s e m e n d e s i r e strife, t h e m i d d l i n g d e s i r e r e c o n c i l i a greatest asset.

tion a n d the noble desire high h o n o u r . Verily, honour is p r i z e d by the great as the 12. of what avail 13. H o n o u r is at the root of w e a l t h ; if h o n o u r is secured i s w e a l t h ; i f o n e h a s lost h o n o u r a n d d i g n i t y , o f m e a n d e s i r e for r i c h e s ; t h e m i d d l and the excellent d e s i r e for

what a v a i l is wealth or longevity ? T h e b a s e a n d the i n g d e s i r e for r i c h e s 14. share. In the and honour forest, t h e

honour. Verily, h o n o u r is an asset of the g r e a t . lions do not b e n d their e a r s (in s u p p l i c a t i o n ) ; even w h e n they a r e h u n g r y they do not look to a M e n of noble birth never stoop to 15. valour. 16. cant, speech. 17. F i v e incongruent things that we meet in in a the world are :the poverty of the benevolent, the opulence of the miser, disobedience son, c o m p u l s i o n to serve a wicked m a n a n d death of persons e n g a g e d in helping others. an No great task can be achieved by any ot these : A n impoverished debaucher, a H e l a n o f a girl b i t t e r i n erring m e r c h a n t ; a highly p r o u d servant, an easy going mendiThe lion i s neither a n o i n t e d comes to it meanness, even when nor consecrated. The they a r e d e p r i v e d of their wealth. lordship of animals naturally as it has inherent

1.115.24 18. discharged, 19. four wife, are cold 20. ship of the 21. There are five things

359 which burn without fire :

S e p a r a t i o n from w i f e ; i n s u l t from k i n s , b a l a n c e o f d e b t yet t o b e service to a low a n d b a s e m a s t e r a n d desertion of agitate the sharp mind a friends i n p o v e r t y . A m o n g the t h o u s a n d worries that very severenay, they by are the edges of

s w o r d : I n s u l t a t the h a n d s o f a low b o m p e r s o n , t h e s t a r v i n g reception the beloved, and harassment from brothers. T h e five uproot all miseries : A n obedient son, a g o o d a n d a l o v i n g wife s u r r e n d e r i n g herself. T h e deer, the elephant, the moth, the h o n e y b e e a n d
1

r e m u n e r a t i v e knowledge, freedom from sickness, the c o m p a n i o n -

t h e f i s h t h e s e f i v e a r e d e s t r o y e d d u e t o a d d i c t i o n t o their f i v e sense-organs. 22. F i v e types o f b r a h r n i n s , t h o u g h a s l e a r n e d a s Brhashau-

p a t i a r e n e v e r h o n o u r e d :the i m p a t i e n t , the h a r s h , ghty, the ill-clad a n d the uninvited. 23

the

T h e s e five a r e clearly defined a n d decided even w h e n

a c h i l d is b o r n : I t s s p a n of life, its a c t i v i t i e s in l a t e r life, i t s character, learning a n d the time of death. 24. H e l p r e n d e r e d t o t h o s e w h o suffer w h e n imminent drowning in spiritual climbing a are very m o u n t a i n , from commendable.
1. Victim Sense-Organ

water, attack of cows fall

a n d b u l l s , s e i z u r e b y the w i c k e d a n d a

Object Listens to sweet music and gets-

Dear

Ears

caught by the hunter. Elephant Sense of touch It is phants. moth Eyes It is attracted by the colour of caught through she-ele-

the flame a n d is burnt. Attracted honeybee Fish Nose Sense of taste by the fragrance of c a u g h t within. It nibbles at the bait and gets lotus it gets

caught. E v e n one of the sense-organs is destructive. H o w is it possible that m a n w h o u s e s a l l t h e f i v e will e s c a p e d e s t r u c t i o n ?

360
25. These five are

Garuda

Purna

never stable or long-standing :the

shadow of clouds, pleasant attitude of a wicked m a n ; intimacy w i t h a n o t h e r m a n ' s wife, y o u t h a n d r i c h e s . 26. Life is unstable in the world, youth a n d riches a r e u n s t a b l e , sons a n d wives a r e u n s t a b l e ; but virtue, f a m e a n d renown are permanent. 27. E v e n a life for a h u n d r e d y e a r s is t o o short. H a l f t h a t T h e remaining half is rendered years. H a l f of rendered in the period is taken up by nights. 28. It is too

fruitless b y sickness, s o r r o w , o l d a g e a n d e x e r t i o n s . I t i s s a i d t h a t m a n ' s s p a n o f life i s a h u n d r e d short. H a l f of that period is spent as nights.

the .remaining half is spent in infancy a n d childhood or grieving o v e r the s e p a r a t i o n or d e a t h of kinsmen or in service to the king. water. 29. earth. in air. 30. sleeping 31. If our activities while walking or standing, waking or are not for the service of fellow b e i n g s they a r e n o t T h e remaining period is as fickle as the waves traverse

O f w h a t a v a i l i s the s e n s e o f p r e s t i g e a n d d i g n i t y ? D a y s a n d n i g h t s i n the g a r b o f old a g e D e a t h s w a l l o w s t h e living b e i n g s like t h e s e r p e n t t a k i n g

different f r o m b e a s t i a l a c t i o n s . W h a t is t h e difference b e t w e e n a b e a s t a n d a b e a s t in not; who enters into endless and h u m a n form w i t h a n i n t e l l e c t d e v o i d o f d i s c r i m i n a t i o n b e t w e e n w h a t is wholesome a n d what is a r g u m e n t s with p e o p l e in r e g a r d to the V e d i c expositions, w h o r e m a i n s fully satisfied i f h e c a n f i l l his b e l l y . 32. H e w h o h a s n o t e a r n e d s p o t l e s s r e p u t a t i o n for v a l o u r , mother. perfect knowEven a a u s t e r i t y , c h a r i t y , l e a r n i n g o r a c q u i s i t i o n o f w e a l t h i s b u t a n exc r e m e n t o f his 33. A g o o d life e v e n for a m o m e n t is c o n s i d e r e d a perfect

life by those w h o k n o w t h e same-if it is full of c r o w lives a l o n g life a n d p a r t a k e s o f o b l a t i o n s . 34. honour? Of what avail is that life d e v o i d

ledge, valour a n d fame a n d m e n a r e not disrespected.

of wealth whether

and he

O f w h a t u s e i s t h a t friend w h o h e s i t a t e s E v e n a crow

is to be friendly or not ? be g r i e f - s t r i c k e n . oblations.

O y e , a d o p t the r i t e of a l i o n , do n o t lives a l o n g life a n d p a r t a k e s of

1.115.47 35. If a m a n does not s y m p a t h i s e with a n d Even a render

361 help for a

t o himself, his p r e c e p t o r , his s e r v a n t s , t h e p o o r p u b l i c f r i e n d s , of w h a t p u r p o s e is his life ? l o n g time p a r t a k i n g the oblations. 36. and love. 37. c r o w lives

a n d his

D a y s c o m e a n d go to a m a n devoid of virtue, wealth A l t h o u g h h e m a y b r e a t h e , h i s life i s like t h a t o f t h e S u c c e s s i s for h i m w h o h a s a n independent means of others. Those who physia though own

bellows of the blacksmith. s u b s t a n c e a n d n o t for h i m w h o d e p e n d s o n cally alive. 38. Contemptible wretches fulfil their wants; small. clouds, sur-

d e p e n d on others are no better t h a n d e a d even

m o u s e ' s handful is j u s t e n o u g h to fill it; a c o n t e m p t i b l e wretch t h o u g h d i s s a t i s f i e d will b e c o n t e n t e d w i t h s o m e t h i n g 39. face of the 40. T h e s e six a r e like b u b b l e s : t h e s h a d o w o f

fire m a d e with dry grass, service to the b a s e , water on the n e r s o f the w i c k e d .

r o a d , the love of a prostitute a n d the p l e a s a n t m a n T h e world cannot be pleased by a person who creates Life is rooted in h o n o u r ; if h o n o u r

a c a r a v a n with words. 41

is slighted how c a n one derive p l e a s u r e ? A k i n g is t h e s u p p o r t for t h e w e a k ; c r y i n g c o n s t i t u t e s t h e s t r e n g t h o f t h e c h i l d ; t h e s t r e n g t h o f a fool lies i n s i l e n c e a n d t h a t of a thief is falsehood. 42. him. 43. As a person g o e s a h e a d d e v o t i n g his m i n d a n d attento him tion to the welfare of others, everyone b e c o m e s attached and h e b e c o m e s p o p u l a r . 44. 45. 46. A p e r s o n perishes d u e to the t h r e e g r e e d , g r a v e error H e n c e , these shall b e a v o i d e d . D a n g e r is to be d r e a d e d as long as it does not befall. Balance of debt undischarged, avoided. action by goodness and violence by remnant of fire not Hence, a n d implicit confidence. As a m a n p r o c e e d s a h e a d with his s t u d y of stras to his intellect b e c o m e s sharper a n d perfect k n o w l e d g e a p p e a l s

T h e m o m e n t i t occurs fear shall b e eschewed. put out a n d sickness partially cured these remnants shall be 47. R e p a y good increase steadily.

362 violence. wickedness. 48.

Garuda

Purna

I d o n o t f i n d a n y fault, i f a w i c k e d m a n i s m e t w i t h A friend w h o s p e a k s s w e e t w o r d s i n o u r p r e s e n c e a n d avoided. Avoid an

spoils our work behind o u r b a c k should be e n e m y u s i n g foul m e a n s . 49. with dust. 50. well. 51. which

E v e n a g o o d m a n p e r i s h e s b y his a s s o c i a t i o n w i t h t h e

w i c k e d . E v e n a c l e a r w a t e r i s r e n d e r e d m u d d y b y its m i x i n g u p He whose wealth is d e d i c a t e d to the b r a h m i n s enjoys F o o d t a k e n in, after b r a h m i n s h a v e b e e n fed, i s t h e

H e n c e , a b r a h m i n shall be h o n o u r e d by all m e a n s .

real food; he is intelligent who c o m m i t s no sin; that is friendship manifests itself behind 52. virtue our b a c k ; that is the real s a c r e d rite which is performed without ostentation. virtue; that is not

T h a t is no assembly where the a g e d are not present; b a c k e d by truth; that is no truth which is

they a r e not the a g e d who do not expound which is not 53. mixed with deception.

T h e b e s t a m o n g m e n i s the b r a h m i n ; t h e b e s t a m o n g organs is the h e a d

luminaries is the s u n ; the best a m o n g the 54. real

a n d the best a m o n g the sacred rites is the truth. T h a t is auspicious where m i n d is delighted; that is a is the is s h a r e d a n d enjoyed with o n e ' s o w n kith r e a l life w h i c h d o e s n o t i n v o l v e s e r v i c e a n d s l a v e r y ; t h a t earning which

a n d k i n a n d t h a t i s t h e r e a l t h u n d e r w h i c h i s m a d e i n t h e battlein the presence of the enemy. 55. happy S h e is the real w o m a n who has no vanity; He is really vain desires; He is the real friend in who has shunned

w h o m confidence c a n be placed a n d he is the real m a n who has controlled his o r g a n s of sense. 56. extinct; esteem. 57. No attempt should be m a d e t o trace the origin o f Such rivers, A g n i h o t r a worshippers a n d the family o f B h a r a t a . a n a t t e m p t i s b o u n d t o fail. 58. Rivers e n d with the sea of salt-water; s e x u a l interends course ends with the treachery of the w o m a n ; back-biting One should cast off h o n o u r a n d l o v e w h e r e l o v e i s O n l y that is praiseworthy the core of which is held in

1 .115.67 with the news being m a d e p u b l i c a n d wealth comes with misery. 59. The prosperity of a to

363 an end

kingdom comes to an end with c o n d u c t o f life comes to

the curse of a b r a h m i n ; the spiritual power of a brahmin comes t o a n e n d w i t h his s i n ; a l l d e c e n c y i n ed if women 60. rule. hoarded things end in wastage, rising in power come to an life c o m e s an end if residence is taken near cowsheds; the family is ruin-

All

c o m e s t o a n e n d i n d o w n f a l l ; all c o n t a c t s a n d i n t i m a c i e s to an end in separation and disintegration; end with 61. death. If one wishes the return of the guest he shall He can be

not be followed colourlea-

f o l l o w e d v e r y far a t t h e t i m e o f farewell. ful l e a v e s . 62. der

u p t o a p o n d o r well o r a t r e e with p l e n t y o f s h a d e a n d

O n e shall not reside in a l a n d where there is no where the the

o r w h e r e there a r e m a n y l e a d e r s o r 63. T h e father p r o t e c t s h e r i n

leadership husband

is v e s t e d in a w o m a n or in a c h i l d . childhood; in youth a n d the son in old a g e . to stay independently. 64. A barren w o m a n shall be a b a n d o n e d in the eighth y e a r be to a w o m a n who gives birth only a f t e r m a r r i a g e ; a w o m a n w h o s e c h i l d r e n d i e i n i n f a n c y shall a b a n d o n e d in the ninth y e a r ; A w o m a n is not to be allowed

daughters shall be a b a n d o n e d in the eleventh y e a r ; a n d a w o m a n who speaks u n p l e a s a n t words shall be a b a n d o n e d 65. lords. immediately. T h r e e p e r s o n s b e y o n d the p a l e o f m o n e y stick t o t h e i r

O n e w h o is not in want; one who is afraid of m e n ; one 66. An intelligent m a n m u s t keep a l o o f from these :the horse, the elephant i n its rut, cows i n their f i r s t friends water.

w h o is afraid of servants. exhausted 67. or

p a r t u r i t i o n , a n d frogs o u t s i d e kinsmen; those

T h o s e w h o a r e m a d after m o n e y d o n o t h a v e

w h o a r e lustful a n d l e c h e r o u s k n o w n o f e a r

or s h a m e ; those who a r e worried with anxious thoughts have no pleasure or sleep a n d those who are oppressed by hunger do not w a n t e v e n s a l t or w a r m t h in the food. x

364
68.

Garuda
H o w can these have peaceful s l e e p ? t h e

Purna
the

poor,

s l a v e , t h e m a n f o n d o f a n o t h e r m a n ' s wife a n d t h e w a n t s t o r o b a n o t h e r m a n o f his 69. and Blissfully s l e e p s free who is 70. strong from sickness. wealth.

wretch

who repay

the m a n who has no debts to He who

is not yet m a r r i e d ,

t a k e s his f o o d l e i s u r e l y . T h e h e i g h t o f a lotus i s i n p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e q u a n t i t y a servant becomes p r o u d if and Varuna (water) his m a s t e r i s the lotus of water in the p o n d ; 71. T h e sun

a n d influential. befriend putrefy office

" W h e n i t s t a n d s firm i n its p l a c e ; t h e y m a k e it f a d e a n d if it is u p r o o t e d . 72. T h o s e w h o h a d b e e n friends o f a m a n i n h i g h office. water but b e c o m e enemies w h e n he steps down from the d e l i g h t f u l l y c a u s e s t h e b l o o m o f the l o t u s i n 73. Things in their

T h e sun when it

is plucked a n d p u t on the g r o u n d the sun dries it u p . p r o p e r p l a c e s a n d p e r s o n s i n their A w a y from their original places nor m e n shine or r e s p e c t i v e offices a r e h o n o u r e d . receive consideration. 74. of speech indicates 75. Manners and behaviour indicate p a r e n t a g e ; manner and accent indicates the native place; flutter the up|f diet affection a n d the A physical build indicates

neither hair nor the nails, neither the teeth

a c c u s t o m e d to. d o w n p o u r i n the o c e a n i s u n n e c e s s a r y ; f e e d i n g a n over-fed a n d s a t i a t e d m a n i s s u p e r f l u o u s ; a c h a r i t y m a d e o v e r t o a n a f f l u e n t m a n i s u n n e c e s s a r y a n d the m e r i t o r i o u s a c t i o n s o f a b a s e m a n a r e futile. 76. E v e n a p e r s o n w h o i s far off i s a s g o o d a s n e a r i f he at h a s a p l a c e i n the h e a r t ; i f c a s t o u t o f t h e h e a r t a m a n c l o s e h a n d i s n o b e t t e r t h a n o n e far off. 77. the signs 78. Contortions in the face, low sunk husky voice, perspiusually seen at the t i m e of d e a t h a n d in r e g a r d to a the person of the b e g g a r or the ration all over the b o d y a n d a frightened a p p e a r a n c e t h e s e a r e m a n out to beg. T h e life o f a w o r m i n t h a t o f o n e b l o w n b y t h e w i n d o v e r his h e a d i s b e t t e r t h a n life o f b e g g a r himself.

1.116.4 79. T h e lord of the world V i s n u himself when he

365 begg-

e d suffered d i m u n i t i o n o f s t a t u r e . W h o i s t h e r e s u p e r i o r t o h i m w h o c a n b e a s u p p l i a n t a n d y e t n o t suffer d i s r e s p e c t . 80. The parents by than enemies. whom children cranes are not educated a r e no better 81. T h e uneducated can never shine amidst swans. it is a well p r o popular; it is

i n a n a s s e m b l y o f t h e l e a r n e d like Learning

gives b e a u t y to the u g l y ; dispels the

tected asset; it makes m a n a saint; it makes him revered of the revered; it a deity; better than a beast. 82-83. Inside the house there are many even kings h o n o u r it; a

sorrow of k i n s m e n ; it is

m a n devoid of learning is no things which

c a n be taken away by others b u t not learning. p o u n d e d the essence of polity to a u n a k a , as rites. Lord iva heard this. h e a r d it from V y s a .

L o r d V i s n u exwell a s a l l s a c r e d we

V y s a h e a r d from i v a a n d

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND S I X T E E N

Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. Lord thing. : I shall

(Vralas)

O Vysa,

e x p o u n d t h e s a c r e d rites by w h i c h and which bestow everyday of month or

Visnu should

be propitiated

Lord Visnu can be worshipped in any 2. The d e v o t e e fasts fruits. completely

the l u n a r fortnight or the at night or victory mere

week or when any star is ascendant. or takes a single m e a l birth of a son, he shall m a k e on the f i r s t With a d e s i r e for t h e of a kingdom

in battle

and acquisition and

c h a r i t a b l e gifts o f c a s h o r f o o d g r a i n s . 3-4. ed on Vaivnara Kubera worshipped d a y of the lunar fortnight bestow wealth. If B r a h m a is worshippthe first d a y of the wealth and mares. on the worshipped l u n a r f o r t n i g h t after Yama, Nryana a full fast h e and goddess The bestows Laksm

second d a y bestow wealth.

366

Garuda

Purna be

t h r e e d e i t i e s G a u r , V i g h n e a (Ganea) a n d a k a r a -worshipped o n t h e t h i r d d a y . 5. Lord C a t u r v y h a (Visnu) w o r s h i p p e d worshipped on the sixth on

should

the fourth

d a y , L o r d V i s n u w orshipped o n the f i f t h d a y , L o r d K r t t i k e y a and Lord Sun on the 6. day. The day, and Bhskara1 on the Moon eighth shall seventh d a y a l l these bestow wealth. Goddess D u r g shall be worshipped the eight Y a m a and the seven M o t h e r s a n d quarters worshipped

o n the ninth ed on the 7. and

d a y bestow wealth.

be worshipped on the tenth d a y a n d the sages shall be worshippeleventh day. Lord H a r i shall be worshipped o n t h e twelfth d a y on t h e fourworshipped on the week, S u n The shall thirteenth d a y ; Mahevara2 (Manes) the days of Yogas

C u p i d on the

teenth d a y a n d B r a h m a n d the Pitrs the fifteenth day bestow wealth. 8. presiding bestow The presiding of the deities of stars a n d a n d others, shall b e w o r s h i p p e d deities everything.

o n the

new m o o n day. worshipped

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

SEVENTEEN

Sacred Rites Brahm said : 1-2. thirteenth a n d tooth In the m o n t h day of the

(Vratas)

of M r g a r s a half, which

(Oct-Nov.) is called

on the Anaga

bright of

T r a y o d a , L o r d i v a s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d w i t h D h a t t r a 3 flowers pick twigs the tree M a l l i k , 4 w i t h the N a i v e d y a should b e worshipped with the B i l v a ( f o o d offering) o f h o n e y s a y i n g t h a t i t i s for t h e C u p i d . I n t h e month Pausa, Yogevara f l o w e r s ; the K a d a m b a 5 t w i g i s t h e t o o t h p i c k ; s a n d a l p a s t e a n d
1. 3. 4. 5. T h e sun. Perhaps the s a m e as dhattradatura, GVDB, p. 214.

2 . Siva.
Jasminum sambac. Anthccephalus indicus

1.117.9 Naivedya be given. 3. should be In the month of M g h a worshipped of askuli (rice d o u g h fried i n g h e e o r oil)

367 should

(Dec-Jan.) Lord Natevara1 flowers and necklace of Naivedya, O

with K u n d a

pearls. T h e tooth

pick is of P l a k s a tree a n d the

s a g e , i s fried p a n c a k e . 4. should I n the m o n t h o f P h l g u n a ( J a n - F e b . ) L o r d V r e v a r a 2 be worshipped with Marvaka3 vegetables flowers. and rice The gruel. of sugar candy,

N a i v e d y a consists

T h e tooth pick i s o f m a n g o 4 tree. 5. shall be i f n o fast In the month of Caitra (Feb-Mar.)

6

Lord

Surpa5 and

worshipped.

Flowers of K a r p r a T h e tooth

p l a n t shall be taken V a t a tree or oil). Lord

is undertaken.

pick is of

N a i v e d y a i s a s k u l ( r i c e d o u g h fried i n g h e e 6-8. a m b h u is the rpa. In the month of Vaikha

(Mar-April)

worshipped

with A o k a 7 flowers a n d

Modakas and the tooth

Naivedya of

cooked rice

w i t h j a g g e r y i s offered t o M a h offered a n d (Apr-May) of Bilva be is of

J t p h a l a ( n u t m e g ) too should be

pick i s o f U d u m b a r a tree. Lavaga twigs. Aguru 9. with the

9

In the m o n t h of J y e s t h a

P r a d y u m n a should be worshipped ( c l o v e ) offered. the m o n t h of with In

with C a m p a k a 3 flowers a n d U m - B h a d r a should The tooth pick

T h e tooth pick should be flowers.

A s d h a lord

worshipped tree.

Apmrga10

In the m o n t h of r v a n a ( J u n e - J u l y ) L o r d trident i n his hand should be

ambhu with

worshipped

1. S i v a . 2. i v a . 3. P e r h a p s the s a m e as P h a n i j j h a k a O c i m u m basilcum. But identity is not certain. (GVDB, p. 2 6 6 ) . 4. M a n g i f e r a i n d i c a . 5. i v a . 6. Either C i n n a m o m u m c a m p h o r a or D. a r o m a t i c a , GVDB, p. 8 2 . 7. S a r a c a indica. 8. M i c h e l i a c h a m p a k a . 9. S y z y g i u m a r o m a t i c u m . 1 0 . Achyranthes aspera .

368 Karavra1 flowers. Fragrant 10-12. (cake) is the In pastes a n d seat

Garuda

Purna

a r e offered. T h e lord

N a i v e d y a is ghee, etc. a n d the tooth pick is of K a r a v r a tree. the month of B h d r a p a d a ( J u l y - A u g . ) In the m o n t h of A v i n a S a d y o j t a 2 should b e worshipped with B a k u l a 3 f l o w e r s . P p a k a naivedya. (Aug-Sep.) the g a n d h a r v a lord M a d a n a j a a n d I n d r a , the lord of the deities s h o u l d b e w o r s h i p p e d i n w a t e r i n a g o l d p o t , w i t h t h e offerings ofModaka. T h e tooth pick i s o f K h a d i r a 3 tree ( c a t e c h u ) . I n should the m o n t h o f K r t t i k a ( S e p - O c t . ) R u d r a should b e worshipped. T h e tooth pick should be of B a d a r i 4 tree. T h e devotee either fast o r take one tenth of the usual food. the y e a r h e s h o u l d w o r s h i p i v a w i t h l o t u s e s offering vegetables as naivedya. 13. shipped 14. or again be 15. He should L o r d Anaga accompanied by on a golden throne. He R a t i s h o u l d b e worand rice grains Gingelly seeds At the end of milk a n d

s h o u l d b e offered i n t h e fire t e n t h o u s a n d t i m e s . should keep a w a k e in the night in instruments. I n the vessels, morning cloth, singing songs should playing on worship

performed. Bed, He should

umbrella and shoes devotion. for all

should be given to brahmins. feed c o w s a n d This is the b r a h m i n s with concluding be delighted. rite

V r a t a s . T h e fruit o f a l l t h e s e V r a t a s i s p r o s p e r i t y , h e a l t h , a n d g o o d fortune.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Nerium indicum. iva. Mimusops elengi. Zizyphus jujuba.

1.119.4 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTEEN

369

Sacred Rites Brahm said 1-2. :

(Vratas)

I shall e x p o u n d A k h a n d a - D v d a - V r a t a that yields devotee s h o u l d fast O n the on the eleventh day he to done day

s a l v a t i o n : q u e l l i n g o f all evils. I n t h e b r i g h t h a l f o f the m o n t h o f M r g a r s a the taking vessels in only Pacagavya. twelfth grains have should

worship L o r d V i s n u . a n d say : 3-5.

F o r four c o n s e c u t i v e m o n t h s h e s h a l l g i v e a brahmin in seven

c o n t a i n i n g the f i v e k i n d s o f food "Whatever, O n o b l e sir, I

p r e v i o u s b i r t h s s h a l l , b y y o u r g r a c e , b e u n s e v e r e d . J u s t a s the e n t i r e u n i v e r s e i s o n e c o m p l e t e w h o l e , let a l l the v r a t a s p e r f o r m ed by me a n d i n the butter. be one whole. from four Y o u are Purusottama he should give Vrata himself." vessels would g i v e vessels In of the four m o n t h s Caitra of flour obtain

months from r v a n a he shall

T h e d e v o t e e w h o p e r f o r m s this

g o o d wife, sons a n d a t t a i n h e a v e n after d e a t h .

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND NINETEEN

Sacred Rites Brahm said 1-2. :

(Vratas)

I should now expound A g a s t y r g h y a

V r a t a which

yields worldly enjoyment a n d salvation. T h r e e d a y s before the transit of the S u n to K a n y r i ( V i r g o ) , an i m a g e of the sage s h o u l d b e m a d e w i t h K a 1 f l o w e r s i n a vessel a n d A r g h y a shall b e offered after d u l y w o r s h i p p i n g it. T h e d e v o t e e s h o u l d k e e p a w a k e in the night. 3 -4. The worship should be with curd, rice grains, types of f l o w e r s a n d fruits t o o . T h e p o t s h o u l d b e p a i n t e d i n f i v e c o l o u r s . I t m a y b e o f g o l d o r silver.
1. Saccharum Spontaneum

It should contain

seven

370 grains. It should be smeared with curd and

Garuda sandal

Pu. na paste.

While giving 5. and

" A r g h y a " the m a n t r a " A g a s t y a h K h a n a m n a h " worshipping, the devotee should say : "O

e t c . shall be recited. While s a g e A g a s t y a ! obeisance unto thee. V a r u n a . T h o u art 6. dras and the K a f l o w e r . " women should and juice. T h e u s e o n l y this devotee m a n t r a for give the By d o i n g offering g r a i n s , fruits so shall T h o u art the son of M i t r a

b o r n o f F i r e a n d W i n d . T h o u a r t like

vessel t o a b r a h m i n w i t h d a k s i n s a n d feed b r a h m i n s . for s e v e n y e a r s h e will g e t e v e r y t h i n g h e w a n t s .

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTY Sacred Brahma said 1-2. yields good Mrgarsa, He in : I shall on the now expound and Rambh-Trty-Vrata sons. In the month that of Rites (Vratas)

fortune,

wealth third d a y

i n t h e b r i g h t half, t h e d e v o t e e The with

s h o u l d w o r s h i p G a u r w i t h t h e l e a v e s o f B i l v a after d u l y f a s t i n g . should wash the m o n t h 3-4. He should T h e tooth M g h a , the ed. h i s h a n d s w i t h -water f r o m K u a g r a s s . he should worship Girisut1 toothpick should b e o f the K a d a m b a twig. of P a u s a In the s a m e way

Maruvakaflowers. He should take in only the leaves of K a r p r a plant. offer K r a r a s pick should (balls be of of gingelly seeds twig. in with the treacle). Kalhra month of Mallik I n the m o n t h o f

devotee should

worship S u b h a d r be be Gtlmaya ? worshipped. him active. In

flowers. He should take only butter. T h e tooth pick should Gomat shall b e o f K u n d a twigs. Phlguna, should

M a n d a k a s h o u l d b e offerThe tooth pick

H e s h o u l d offer

askuls and take

only j u s t a little food to k e e p

1.

P r v a t i , the d a u g h t e r of H i m a l a y a .

1.120.11 5. Curd.

371 I n t h e m o n t h o f C a i t r a , t h e d e v o t e e s h o u l d t a k e only "Vilks should be The worshipped tooth with Madanaka Kraras. pick shall be of T a g a r a

f l o w e r s offering ed

twig. In the m o n t h of V a i k h a , r m u k h should be worshippwith K a r n i k r a 6. ed flowers. T h e t o o t h p i c k i s o f A o k a twigs a n d the devotee should take only A o k a leaves. In the m o n t h of J y e s t h a , N r y a n should be worshippflowers. Sugar candy should be offered. He only clove. In the m o n t h of s d h a , M d h a v take only gingelly seeds. leaves. The with lotus

should take in 7. worship offer

should be worshipped. T h e devotee should be should performed with Bilva He should

milk p u d d i n g

a n d V a t a k a s (fried

p i e s ) . T h e tooth pick G o d d e s s r should a n d m i l k offeretc.

shall b e either U d u m b a r a twigs o r T a g a r . be worshipped in rvana. 8. should 9. T h e tooth pick

should be of Mallik

ings should be m a d e .

I n the

month of Bhdrapada, U t t a m Offerings a r e j a g g e r y ,

be w o r s h i p p e d with lotuses.

T h e devotee should take in r g a d a (aloe w o o d ) . In the m o n t h of Avina, the goddess R j a p u t r should with J a p the month flowers ( C h i n a r o s e ) , the d e v o t e e goddess Padmaj He shall take only rice. He should I n the get be worshipped 10. should be couples. 11. given In

t a k i n g only J r a k a in the night. T h e N a i v e d y a is K r a r a . of K r t t i k a , the Jt flowers. worshipped with

Pacagavya.

A t the e n d o f t h e y e a r , h e s h o u l d w o r s h i p B r a h m i n

He himself should take butter and cooked with cloth, umbrella, etc. gold, etc.

After w o r s h i p p i n g U m m a h e v a r a j a g g e r y s h o u l d b e

along

k e e p a w a k e the whole of the night e n g a g e d in singing. morning he should give cows, T h e devotee everything.

would

372 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED

Garuda

Purna

AND TWENTYONE

Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. rites c a n :

(Vratas)

I shall now mention the C t u r m s y a be taken either on T h e devotee

Yratas

These

the eleventh d a y or on F u l l m o o n should pray thus at

day, in the m o n t h of s d h a . the outset. 2-3. If you

" O K e a v a , I h a v e taken u p this V r a t a before you. be completed without hindrances. the s a m e , rite if I die before completing take up the Vrata,

are pleased may, it

H a v i n g t a k e n u p this 4. One should

O Lord, m a y it be treated as completed through your g r a c e . " A r c a n a , J a p a , etc after p r a y i n g a t t h e o u t s e t l i k e this. 5. He who takes T h e sins o f t h o s e w h o e v e n and worships Visnu

desire to perform L o r d H a r i ' s V r a t a perish entirely. his b a t h d a i l y continuously 6. and continue 7. The his By for four months taking a single abstain from worship perform m e a l every d a y

a t t a i n s t h e r e g i o n o f V i s n u , free f r o m i m p u r i t i e s . devotee should and perform study the taking wine, m e a t He should rite. the K r c c h r a oil b a t h of Hari.

of Vedas and a night

H e will a t t a i n t h e r e g i o n o f f a s t i n g for moving about in aerial car. 8. A devotee He who

V i s n u a n d b e c o m e V i s n u himself. the devotee becomes a deity B y f a s t i n g for t h r e e n i g h t s o r t a k performs Cndryana attains the

i n g o n l y a s i x t h o f his u s u a l d i e t h e a t t a i n s v e t a d v p a . region of H a r i . He who performs unsolicited. 9. should who performs a n d becomes H a r i Himself. The avoid devotee should sustain himself on grain flour, barley, a l m s , milk, curd, g h e e , cow's urine a n d P a c a g a v y a ; he vegetables, r o o t s , fruits a n d j u i c e . H e will t h u s attain Visnu. Prjpatya attains salvation

Parkavrata

attains Visnuloka

1.123.1 C H A P T E R ONE H U N D R E D AND TWENTYTWO Sacred Brahm said 1. fast for 2. on the Avina. 3-4. He s h o u l d f i r s t p r a y like this : " F r o m : now mention the Vrata Msopavsa by an ascetic Rites (Vratas)

373

I shall a month

that This i n his

l a s t s for a m o n t h a n d i s t h e m o s t e x c e l l e n t o f a l l V r a t a s . should be undertaken inaugurate bright half V n a p r a s t h a s t a g e o f life o r b y a n e l d e r l y l a d y . T h e devotee should eleventh day in the

t h e fast for a m o n t h of the month of

this d a y

onwards O V i s n u , I s h a l l w o r s h i p T h e e for t h i r t y d a y s w i t h o u t t a k i n g f o o d till U t t h n a D v d a i " if I were to die and Krttika." 5-7. worship in T a k i n g three Hari with sweet baths every day, scents. He the devotee refrain shall from should in the m i d s t (the d a y o f rising u p ) i n the Vrata twelfths of A v i n a m o n t h o f K r t t i k a . M a y n o t t h e r e b e a n y sin o f c u t t i n g o f the b r i g h t

t a k i n g oil b a t h a n d n o t s m e a r the precincts of Parana form the worship on then do the

his b o d y with s w e e t scents withT h e fasting devotee shall perd a y , feed the If in brahmins and the course of

the temple. the twelfth

(taking of food). milk.

V r a t a h e falls u n c o n s c i o u s h e c a n d r i n k m i l k . T h i s V r a t a i s n o t spoiled by drinking salvation. H e will e n j o y w o r l d l y p l e a s u r e s a n d

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYTHREE Sacred Brahm said 1. take a 2. T h e devotee whole month. He should take milk, vegetables and fruits o r take : should worship Visnu d a y in the after bathing. live on He should alms for a Rites (Vratas)

I shall mention some V r a t a s in the m o n t h of K r t t i k a . single m e a l a n i g h t or

374 fast. F r e e d from 3. his sin he should attain

Garuda everyone

Purna of his

desires and attain H a r i . Hari's Vrata further a n d is always excellent. In the the In D a k s i n y a n a it excellence is i n the month of i s still m o r e e x c e l l e n t . heightened 4. K r t t i k a i s b e t t e r still. H e n c e , this e x c e l l e n t V r a t a should be he should be performed on three baths. w o r s h i p p e d w i t h barleybe silent. and T h e idol water and t h e e l e v e n t h d a y i n t h e b r i g h t half. H e s h a l l t a k e L o r d H a r i , and the m a n e s grains. 5. should While be worshipping with should bathed butter Pacagavya of V r a t a , the recite ' O m times a n d Svh he Cturmsya the

Bhsmapacaka

smeared with camphor. 6-7. is sweet D u r i n g the f i v e d a y s rice porridge. He devotee should The Naivedya obeisance this shall to with same b u r n i n c e n s e sticks w i t h g h e e - s m e a r e d G u g g u l u . should with of the V s u d e v a ' one hundred eight-syllabled 8-10. Hari's worship a n d eight

mantra ending the first d a y with Bilva

perform

H o m a with butter, rice g r a i n s a n d gingelly seeds. On V r a t a he should worship second day on the third he should d a y the water feet w i t h lotus flowers; on the leaves;

the knees

navel with scents; from Bilva leaves head with

on the fourth d a y the shoulders with a n d on the fifth d a y

he should worship the of Pacagavya

M l a t f l o w e r s . D u r i n g these d a y s h e should sleep T h e five constituents

only on the b a r e g r o u n d . second d a y Moon) 11. halves

should be taken in order on each d a y thus:first d a y c o w d u n g ; urine, third d a y milk, fourth d a y c u r d a n d o n the O n the n i g h t o f the f i f t e e n t h d a y ( F u l l conclude. H e w h o p e r f o r m s this V r a t a (eleventh day) in all both sins salvation. observed. It removes f i f t h d a y all f i v e o n e s . the V r a t a s h a l l attains to worldly

pleasures and shall be

Fasting on Ekda days

o f the m o n t h

a n d w a r d s off h e l l n a y i t e n a b l e s o n e t o a t t a i n V i s n u l o k a a n d gives everything desired. 12-13. phases sunset Parana of the a n d the For authentic fasts, t h e eleventh and twelfth The m o o n should cover thirteenth phase t h e full d a y should be from s u n r i s e t o

at sunrise.

should be

o n the twelfth d a y . T h i s

V r a t a c a n be per-

1.124.5

375

f
formed even when there is impurity due to birth or death. If the eleventh phase phase and part by 14. mixed O sage, covers the whole d a y from sunrise to sunset the eleventh phase, d e m o n s p e r m e a t e that. if the Full moon or N e w m o o n phase is

L o r d H a r i is present. If part of the d a y is covered by the tenth F a s t s shall not be u n d e r t a k e n then. with either the 15. Similarly, fourteenth or fast c a n phase t h e f i r s t p h a s e , fast s h a l l when the third

be undertaken. be undertaken f o u r t h , f i f t h o r the s i x t h the course of the day. gets mixed with e a c h other in

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYFOUR Sacred Brahm said 1. story desires. : now mention with the Gaur was the "ivartri-Vrata', that yields a n d the one Rites (Vratas)

I shall Goddess

connected

same

everything

t o l d this V r a t a

by iva when she

a s k e d h i m a b o u t it. vara said 2. : The fourteenth phase of the m o o n in the dark half

b e t w e e n the m o n t h s o f M g h a a n d P h l g u n a i s t h e d a y f i x e d for this V r a t a . a n d worship 3. Lord days. 4. 5. ed T h e d e v o t e e shall k e e p a w a k e for t h e whole night pleasures L o r d R u d r a . He should attain worldly should be worshipped in Keava the lord is worshipped

and salvation. Lord iva I f after fast, Once the c o m p a n y of on Dvda Cupid just as Lord is worshipped

h e will e n a b l e t h e of Nisdas

d e v o t e e to cross the Hell. Sundara S e n a k a , the sinful k i n g w e n t a h u n t i n g i n t o a forest a l o n g w i t h his d o g s . He was unable to b a g any g a m e . He b e c a m e exhausta n d thirst. H e took rest i n a bower on the d u e to hunger

376

Garuda lake on a m o u n t a i n , but c o u l d not g e t

Purna even a

b a n k s of t h e 6.

wink of sleep. I n his a t t e m p t to b a l a n c e himself on the tree he w a s not aware h e let of the fall a few l e a v e s from t h e t r e e on a L i g a ( t h e o f i v a ) a t t h e foot same. 7-8. r e t r i e v e it. s o m e water, all t h e A n a r r o w fell f r o m his q u i v e r . H e j u m p e d d o w n t o In his a s e a r c h for the it. arrow he crawled up to the Thus To w a s h himself of the dust he b r o u g h t on the liga t o o . of the tree b u t phallic emblem

liga and touched

few d r o p s o f w h i c h fell touching the liga

i t e m s in a w o r s h i p b a t h i n g , worshipping with leaves, and keeping awakehad a n d h a d his f o o d died he was

prostration and 9. brought 10. him.

been performed unconsciously. In the m o r n i n g he b y his wife. Then returned home time After s o m e when he with them

d r a g g e d by the soldiers of Y a m a with a noose. m y followers f o u g h t and released T h u s purified a l o n g 11. worship. everlasting 12-13. Thus, He who benefit. "O even w i t h his faithful knowing performs dog of that day he he got the worship fruits o f derive on iva

became one of my attendants ( G a n a s ) . without knowingly will

T h e devotee thus :

shall first worship awake on the

the t h i r t e e n t h d a y a n d p r a y God, I

shall keep

Caturda

n i g h t . T h e w o r s h i p , c h a r i t a b l e gift, p e n a n c e a n d H o m a s h a l l b e performed a c c o r d i n g to my ability. next day. 14. ceptor and 15. rice a n d 16. a n d at O a m b h u after f a s t i n g for food o n l y the the whole of C a t u r d a (fourteenth) I shall take sures a n d salvation." After b a t h i n g t h e l i g a w i t h P a c a g a v y a a n d w a t e r , of worship, the devotee should worship Lord iva approach his p r e a g a i n with the mantra " O m

O L o r d , b e m y refuge a n d a c c o r d m e worldly plea-

a t the c l o s e

o b e i s a n c e , o b e i s a n c e t o i v a " a n d offer s c e n t s . T h e n he should perform other grains as well as H o m a with g i n g e l l y s e e d s , After P r n h u t i stories. he butter.

s h o u l d l i s t e n t o songs o f p r a y e r a n d m y t h o l o g i c a l T h e worship should again be a n d fourth the end of third Ymas.

performed at midnight T h e concluding

1.125.5 rites should 17-19. rites be performed in the morning with

377 the

Mlamantra. " O L o r d , w i t h y o u r f a v o u r I h a v e c o n c l u d e d the O l o r d of t h e u n i v e r s e , forgive m e . Hara, the merit that I derived O lord today Lord, unhindered.

of the three worlds, O d u e to the L o r d with be pleased. "Thy thy g r a c e

n a i v e d y a offering t o t h e the V r a t a has R e t u r n to T h y region.

lord R u d r a is i m m e n s e . O been concluded. O I h a v e b e c o m e purified by

h o l y s i g h t . " T h e d e v o t e e s h o u l d feed b r a h m i n s s t a b l e i n 20-21. "O Lord o f gods, lord o f goblins, the blesser o f shall c o n c l u d e years the final rites. attain If

their c o n t e m p l a t i o n a n d g i v e c l o t h e s , u m b r e l l a , e t c , t o t h e m . the w o r l d , w h a t I h a v e offered o u t o f faith b e d e l i g h t f u l l y r e c e i v ed by T h e e " , the s a y i n g this h e this for devotee does 22-23. keeping twelve he will region. in twelve m o n t h s by hereafter. glory,

f o r t u n e , c h i l d r e n , r e a l m a s well a s S i v a ' s T h i s rite can be performed awake at night.

H e s h o u l d feed t w e l v e b r a h m i n s a n d H e will a t t a i n h e a v e n

m a k e gift o f l a m p s t o t h e m .

C H A P T E R ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYFIVE Sacred Brahm said 1. days. : Ekdai Rites (Vratas)

M n d h t r b e c a m e an e m p e r o r by fasting on day. fasted days on a day when the

I n b o t h halves o f the m o n t h none shall t a k e 2. Gndhr such Where

anything on tenth a n d

the eleventh

eleventh phases of the m o o n were m i x e d . H e r h u n d r e d sons perished. H e n c e 3-4. are on there is s h a l l b e a v o i d e d for f a s t i n g p u r p o s e s . eleventh p h a s e s of the m o o n Hari is present there. When the tenth a n d a b o u t the

s e p a r a t e full d a y s , L o r d any doubt

mixture of Daam and Ekda the m i x t u r e of Ekda a n d shall b e h a d o n T r a y o d a are mixed,

t h e fast s h a l l b e u n d e r t a k e n w h e r e Dvda is 5. present a n d ( t h e thirteenth d a y ) . Where

the P a r a n a

Ekda, Dvda and Trayoda

t h a t is a very a u s p i c i o u s o c c a s i o n .

378 6. O Brahmin, t h u s fast c a n

Garuda

Purna

be u n d e r t a k e n when there a n d D v d a or mixture

i s full E k d a , of the three 7.

or mixture of E k d a

b u t never on the d a y

when there is mixture of the fast o n t w o Ekda

tenth with the eleventh d a y . King Rukmgada awake during the undertook night days, kept listening to Purnas and O t h e r s too-

worshipping G a d d h a r a .

He attained

Salvation.

have attained salvation by undertaking Ekda V r a t a .

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYSIX Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. I : shall now explain a m e a n s of w o r s h i p yields worldly by which (Vratas)

people attain 2. Dhtr Gag, 3. The shall

salvation and usual

which

enjoyment and other shall

a n d salvation together. mystical diagram shall So be drawn also at be p l a c e d at the and entrance. shall b e Vidhtr,

Yamuna

Mahnad

placed

entrances. Dvrar, D a n d a , Pracanda (the and Vstupurusa middle tortoise) virtue, and b e p l a c e d a t other entrances. I n the (the supporting power), K r m a 4-6. Avairgya In the corners the the A d h r a a k t i Ananta

( L o r d V i s n u ' s serpent b e d ) should be worshipped. earth, i.e. knowledge, Ajna, four) renunciation, prosperity, the four Adharma,

and Anaivarya

(opposite

of the

foregoing

K a n d a n l a (the

inner stalk) lotus, the petals,

Sattva, Rajas,

T a m a s , the spheres sun, etc., V i m a l a a n d other aktis, D u r g , the attendants, Sarasvat and K s e t r a p l a should be worshipped. T h e seats 7-8. worshipped. pons, r, should be worshipped a n d t h e n the idol, V s u d e v a Nryana should be a n d B a l a a n d S m a r a should b e worshipped. Aniruddha and Pusti, Mahtm T h e limbs, hearts, etc., a k h a G a r u d a , the a n d other wea-

preceptor a n d the p r e c e p t o r ' s

1.127.8 preceptor should be worshipped.

379 I n the q u a r t e r s I n d r a a n d (serpent)

o t h e r s (fire, e t c . ) s h o u l d b e 9-10. like t h i s Worship The for

worshipped. T h e N g a

should be worshipped below and B r a h m above. worship of Visvaksena is once duly, has no in the north-east. He who worships in the world. is also T h e a b o v e worship is n a r r a t e d in the V e d a s . even of Pundarka, Brahm and

re-birth

Gaddhara

necessary.

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYSEVEN Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. : undertook fast for a d a y on the eleventh d a y (Vratas)

Bhma

of the bright half 2. free from 3. After

of the m o n t h of M g h a , when there was the wonderful Vrata he b e c a m e

star H a s t a too present. p e r f o r m i n g this the indebtedness to the M a n e s . E v e n w h e n the H a s t a star fast u n d e r t a k e n is so This Bhmadvda

i s v e r y f a m o u s a n d m a k e s the m e r i t o f e v e r y o n e f l o u r i s h . is not conjoined with t h e powerful as to remove the EkdaT, the

sin of slaying a b r a h m i n . 4-8. A bad

I t r e m o v e s a l l g r e a t sins like t h e b a d wife d e s t r o y s his impurity, T r u t h ; the

king destroying his o w n r e a l m . s o n d e s t r o y s his f a m i l y ; a b a d destroys evil; a b a d rddha; untruths her h u s b a n d ; virtue lack o f faith destroys minister destroys destroy

king; ignorance destroys

knowledge, purity destroys

h e a t d e s t r o y s the effect o f s n o w ; h o a r d e d w e a l t h d e s t r o y s i l l n e s s , b o a s t i n g destroys the merit of c h a r i t y ; haughtiness destroys the power of p e n a n c e ; much of walking troys absence of education spoils a boy; too destroys cattle; anger destroys absence of desire a n d mental peace,

absence of m e a n s to ignorance and t h e fruit. T h i s 9-11.

increase it spoils w e a l t h ; knowledge desa t t a c h m e n t spoils the deswine, i s r e c o m m e n d e d for brahmin,

auspicious V r a t a sins

truction of all sins. The of slaying a drinking

380
stealing age to Neither gold, s i m u l t a n e o u s l y c a n n o t b e w i p e d off e v e n i f o n e P u s k a r a three Naimisa, t i m e s ( b u t this Kuruksetra, Prabhsa

Garuda

Purna

illicit i n t e r c o u r s e w i t h p r e c e p t o r ' s wife a c q u i r e d makes pilgrimoff). nor other Klind, h o l y rivers, V r a t a wipes them

Y a m u n a , Gag, Sarasvat

nor a n y o f the

c a n e q u a l this E k d a . N o r c h a r i t a b l e gifts n o r j a p a , n o r h o m a n o r a n y o t h e r s a c r e d r i t e c a n e q u a l this E k d a . 12. whole V r a t a the If on one p a n the merit of m a k i n g a gift of the world is placed 13-14. grain seeds a n d on the o t h e r p a n t h e m e r i t o f this incarnation o f the All be

l a t t e r a l o n e will b e f o u n d e x c e l l e n t . A golden i m a g e of should be placed the B o a r in it

L o r d s h o u l d b e p l a c e d i n a c o p p e r vessel o v e r a n o t h e r v e s s e l . a n d the vessel shall

covered with a white cloth. With g o l d (for D a k s i n ) l a m p , etc. the worship should be performed duly. 15-17. W i t h the m a n t r a s s p e c i f i e d t h e Mantra Obeisance to Varha Obeisance to Krodkrti Obeisance to Gabhraghosa Obeisance to rvatsadhrin Obeisance to Sahasrairas Obeisance to Sarvevara Obeisance to Sarvtman Obeisance to Prabhava Obeisance to atamaykha After w o r s h i p p i n g d u l y , t h e d e v o t e e s h a l l the night. 18. He should listen t o In the the Purnas illustrating the greatness of the lord. 19. Cloth m o r n i n g gifts s h o u l d b e g i v e n t o gold should be given to respective limbs should be worshipped duly : Limbs t w o feet hip navel chest arms neck face forehead hair keep awake during

brahmins and beggars of auspicious nature. bordered with b r a h m i n s . M e a l s at the completion of the V r a t a should then be h a d b u t not u p t o satiety. 20. be fasting debts. on E v e n i f t h e d e v o t e e d o e s this o n l y o n c e h e will s u c k l e d a t the b r e a s t s o f a days the mother. Ekda not By born again to be

d e v o t e e i s freed f r o m t h e t h r e e

H e will g e t e v e r y t h i n g h e d e s i r e s b y this V r a t a .

1.128.12 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED Sacred Brahma said 1. thing. vation 2. A O : Vysa Vrata I shall mention the rules governing all Rites AND (Vratas) TWENTYEIGHT

V r a t a s b y w h i c h L o r d H a r i will b e p l e a s e d a n d of N i y a m a s (restraints) mentioned in

b e s t o w everythe scriptures.

should be performed together with the obser-

A V r a t a is a f o r m of p e n a n c e . Y a m a s (self-restraints) a l o n g with N i y a m a s ( E x t e r n a l He should take three He should h a v e restraints) should be equally observed. p e r f e c t c o n t r o l o n his s e n s e - o r g a n s . 3. persons. 4. merit. 5. from grains 6. lar things) He should not speak to women, dras and degraded H e s h o u l d m a k e offering i n t o f i r e o f f i v e s a c r e d arti-

b a t h s e v e r y d a y a n d lie o n t h e b a r e g r o u n d .

cles t o t h e e x t e n t o f his m o n e t a r y c a p a c i t y . K r c c h r a t y p e o f V r a t a s s h o u l d b e p e r f o r m e d for m e r e If the devotee wants preservation of w e a l t h the V r a t a should be performed twice. P e r s o n s o b s e r v i n g fasts s h o u l d n o t d r i n k w a t e r o u t During grain, other Vratas he should black Masr Dla, Bengal grain, of and abstain ( a n d simi-

a bell-metal vessel. taking of

K o r a d s a k a variety ; he Wearing flower garlands,

should avoid ornaments washing

vegetables, and gaudy

h o n e y a n d o t h e r ' s food. clothes, smearing of scented unguents, a p p l y i n g C o l l y r i u m s p o i l t h e fast. 7. take Before starting V r a t a he the should w a s h his the teeth a n d of in P a c a g a v y a in morning. Constant drinking the teeth a n d

water, c h e w i n g betel leaves, sleeping d u r i n g a n d s e x u a l intercourse spoil a V r a t a . 8-9. control over

day, gambling

I n all V r a t a s t e n v i r t u o u s p r a c t i c e s s h o u l d b e followtruthfulness, sympathy, charity, of gods, purity the sense-organs, fire, worship sacrificial seeing Vrata urine the the is

ed, viz:forbearance, offering into the 10-12. stars. When a Pacagavya

contentment and non-stealing. means taking a food after performs Brahmakrcchra

Night-meal person

is c o n s t i t u t e d t h u s : O n e

pala of C o w ' s

382 taken and consecrated by the thumb and consecrated pala of palas of etc; one 13 k i n d l i n g of rites, milk pala consecrated of K u a Gyatr, by by water the

Garuda

Purna

C o w d u n g o f h a l f the size o f mantra G a n d h a 1 etc; etc; One seven

ghee consecrated by the m a n t r a " T e j o s i " 2

the m a n t r a " A p y y a s v a " 3 e t c ; consecrated the e.g. by the mantra

three p a l a s o f c u r d c o n s e c r a t e d b y the m a n t r a " D a d h i k r v n o " 4 " D e v a s y a " 5 etc. During M a l a m s a or performed intercalary month many Agnydhna (the first idols, sacrifices, sacred thread, thirty of a Saura a u s p i c i o u s rites a r e not the sacrificial ceremony, Svana

fire) ; i n s t a l l a t i o n of investiture with the

charities, V r a t a s , V e d i c rites, V r s o t s a r g a tonsure 14-17. m a r r i a g e s a n d crowning of kings. calculation

( s e t t i n g free o f a b u l l )

of month Saura

consists of calculation days.

d a y s from one N e w m o o n to the next. etc.

another.

m o n t h i s b a s e d o n t h e t r a n s i t o f the s u n from o n e z o d i a c s i g n t o A s t e l l a r m o n t h c o n s i s t s o f t w e n t y seven celebration of marriages. phases m o n t h i s t a k e n for t h e F o r sacrifices of the m o o n eighth Tithis

S v a n a c a l c u l a t i o n is followed. T w o

on the s a m e d a y are very auspicious such a s s e c o n d a n d third; t h i r d a n d fourth a n d f o u r t h a n d f i f t h ; s i x t h a n d s e v e n t h , and n i n t h ; eleventh a n d twelfth; fourteenth the f i r s t . T h e after a n d the N e w m o o n with 18. conjunction of a n d t h e full m o o n

o t h e r t h a n t h e s e i s v e r y frightful d e s t r o y i n g a l l p r e v i o u s m e r i t s . When a w o m a n starting a V r a t a physical menstruates, she c a n the V r a t a need not be 19. s t o p p e d ; all activities

continue but charity, etc. shall be performed anger, greed or 20. If mistakes, the is devotee should incapacity

through proxies. o b s e r v e fast t o illness allowed for the to

If there i s a cessation of a V r a t a in the m i d d l e due to

three days a n d completely tonsure the head. there physical due d e v o t e e s h o u l d a s k his son t o c o n t i n u e drink
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

the V r a t a . can be

If a b r a h m i n

becomes unconscious during the V r a t a , he water.

RVKh. AV. RV. 5.87.9.

7.89.4. 1.91.16.

R V . 4.39.6. V S . 1.24.

1.129.11 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND TWENTYNINE Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. : the Vratas for P r a t i p a d (Vratas)

383

I shall m e n t i o n

and other

days, O Vysa. b r o w n cow. 2. with

This is called ikhivrata. He

should take one

m e a l o n the f i r s t d a y .

A t t h e c l o s e , h e s h o u l d m a k e a gift o f a

H e would attain V a i v n a r a region.

T h i s c a n be performed in the b e g i n n i n g of C a i t r a too all

d u e w o r s h i p o f B r a h m a , d u e offerings o f f r a g r a n t f l o w e r s ,

g a r l a n d s a n d h o m a s into the f i r e . T h e devotee shall attain desires. 3. wearing 4-6. shall on god. soaked be A person desirous of b e a u t y shall perform the bright half of the flower

the V r a t a

on the eighth d a y of endowed with

Krttika month

g a r l a n d s a n d offering f l o w e r s , e t c . H e shall b e beauty. the fruits clothes and

L o r d r d h a r a w i t h r s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d o n gifted to

t h i r d d a y i n the d a r k h a l f o f r v a n a . B e d , " O b e i s a n c e to rdhara a n d r. T h e naivedya in butter) offered shall

B r a h m i n s . W h e n g i v i n g b e d h e shall p r a y In the beginning be Havisya of Caitra

the t h i r d d a y t h e d e v o t e e shall w o r s h i p U m , i v a a n d f i r e (cooked rice along with M a d a n a k a . H e s h a l l r e a p the first to At say-

fruit a s m e n t i o n e d b y U m t o m e . 7-8. the the third end A three d a y s abstention from salt from the shall attain all d a y i n the b e g i n n i n g o f P h l g u n a i s a bliss y i e l d i n g Gaurloka. requisites, of the V r a t a he shall duly worship a b r a h m i n couple

e x c e l l e n t V r a t a a n d the d e v o t e e

a n d m a k e a gift of a b e d a n d a h o u s e w i t h 9-10. T h e twelve manifestations iv and Nryan of

ing, " O B h a v n i ( G o d d e s s P r v a t ) b e p l e a s e d " . the g o d d e s s , v i z : be the worshipped said day Gaur, Kl, U m , Bhadr, Durg, K n t i , Sarasvat, M a g a l , Vaisnav, Laksm, either on shall t w e l v e s u c c e s s i v e d a y s from t h e t h i r d d a y o f M r g a H e shall in

r s a m o n t h o r i n t w e l v e s u c c e s s i v e m o n t h s from n e v e r suffer from s e p a r a t i o n from his b e l o v e d . 11. the

( t a k i n g t h e t h i r d d a y i n e v e r y m o n t h for t h e V r a t a ) .

T h e d e v o t e e shall o b s e r v e fast o n the f o u r t h d a y

bright half of the m o n t h of M g h a

a n d t a k e u p the V r a t a .

384

Garuda

Purna-

H e s h a l l gift a w a y g i n g e l l y s e e d s t o a b r a h m i n a n d shall d r i n k only gingelly water. 12-14. The T h e V r a t a is concluded in two years. He is "Orh Gah Svh". The will n o t b e h i n d e r e d b y o b s t a c l e s i n his life. Mlamantra N y s a m a n t r a for t h e h e a r t i s G l a u m G l m . T h e n y s a m a n t r a s for h e a d a n d tuft a r e " G r h G r h G m a n d H r r h H r m H r m " the nysa "Gaum" and kya for and Varman "Gom". is "Gm" Hence "Gom" are and with for the etc. we the eye vhana, etc. T h e oblation mantras is with realise bent

Visarjana

(mystical Gandholkah

dismissal) Puspolko o n the

"Agaccholkya "Gyatr". 15. the

Dhpakolkakah Dpolthumb

Maholkya".

The Nysa

T h e G y a t r m a n t r a runs thus deity,

:"Om,

huge-eared 16.

w e m e d i t a t e u p o n t h e d e i t y with to the

t r u n k . M a y t h e d e i t y with t h e tusk g o a d u s G i n g e l l y s e e d s shall b e c o n s i g n e d

(on our path) ". sacrificial to

f i r e i n t h e H o m a . A l l his a t t e n d a n t G a n a s s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d r " S v h unto the G a n a a n d to the lord of G a n a s . Obeisance Ksmndaka. 17. Obeisance to Amogholka, obeisance Om to E k a d a n t a to the and obeisance to Tripurntakarpin". 18. (mystical Svh signs) unto are obeisance The Vrata usual is

d e i t y w i t h d a r k tusks a n d terrific f a c e , t h e l o r d Padmadamstra. fruit o f this

of battles. Mudrs

shown. T h e devotee then dances, laughs The Saubhgya half of

a n d claps his h a n d s . (good fortune). 19.

B e g i n n i n g with the fourth d a y in the bright

M r g a r s a this w o r s h i p o f G a r f a s s h a l l b e c o n t i n u e d for a y e a r . T h e devotee shall be blessed with g o o d learning, wealth, longevity a n d sons. 20. also On a M o n d a y when the fourth p h a s e of the m o o n is Ganas c a n b e w o r s h i p p e d after d u e fast w i t h t h e T h e d e v o t e e s h a l l a t t a i n h e a v e n withfourth candies, present, fame,

usual j a p a s a n d homas. out obstacles. 21. day in Laddukas 22.

G o d V i g h n e v a r a shall b e w o r s h i p p e d o n the the bright (sweet I f the half of any month with sugar

b a l l s o f fried f l o u r d o u g h ) a n d s w e e t m e a t s . worship is done with Madana flowers he

He shall attain everything he desires a n d g o o d fortune.

. 129.32

385

will b e b l e s s e d w i t h s o n s . T h e C a t u r t h i s a l s o c a l l e d " M a d a n a Caturth'r. 23-24. obstacles idol with 25-26. tunda (Bent With the mantras " O m obeisance to G a n a p a t i , " All t h e G a n a s shall be worshipped in any m o n t h H e w h o w o r s h i p s V i n y a k a i n his goal of the good, heaven, (worthy of

with h o m a s a n d j a p a s . H e s h a l l a t t a i n e v e r y t h i n g h e d e s i r e s . A l l will b e d e s t r o y e d . these n a m e s a t t a i n s the

happiness a n d final salvation. T h e n a m e s a r e twelve : G a n a p j y a group), Ekadantin Tryambaka Lambodara Trunk), t h e w o r s h i p o f the (blue-necked), (smoke-coloured) devotee shall 27-29. (single-tusked), Vakra(Three-eyed), Nlagrva Vikata (the

(large-bellied),

t e r r i f i c ) , V i g h n a r j a k a the r e m o v e r o f o b s t a c l e s ) , D h m r a v a r n a B l a c a n d r a ( p l e a s i n g a s the c r e s c e n t m o o n ) The Vinyaka, Ganapati and Hastimukha (Elephant-faced). a t t a i n everything he desires. The serpent gods Vsuki, Taksaka, Kliya, the and

Manibhadraka, Airvata, Dhrtarstra, Karkotaka and Dhanaj a y a s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d after b a t h i n g the idols i n G h e e o n fifth d a y i n a n y o f t h e m o n t h s Krttika. The devotee shall a n d h e a v e n l y bliss. 30-31. Kambala, T h e serpents A n a n t a , Vsuki, akha, Padma, diffeKarkotaka, Nga, Dhrtarstra, akhaka, Kliya, Sravana, Avina, Bhdra

b e blessed w i t h l o n g e v i t y , h e a l t h

T a k s a k a a n d P i g a l a shall b e w o r s h i p p e d i n o r d e r i n t h e m e n t i o n e d b e f o r e shall b e w o r s h i p p e d . H e will a t t a i n a n d heavenly bliss. 32. pictures On the fifth d a y in the bright of the serpents half of r v a n a Milk is

r e n t m o n t h s . O r i n the b r i g h t h a l f o f B h d r a t h e e i g h t s e r p e n t s salvation the and

s h a l l b e p a i n t e d o n either s i d e o f t h e T h e y shall b e woi s h i p p e d . T h i s rite r e m o v e s fear. This f r e e d o m from all p o i s o n s . called

m a i n door of the house. T h e s e r p e n t s shall b e s t o w Dastoddharanapacam.

b u t t e r c o n s t i t u t e the N a i v e d y a .

386 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED (Vratas) AND

Garuda THIRTY

Purna

Sacred Rites Brahm said 1-2. :

Similarly, G o d K r t t i k e y a is to be w o r s h i p p e d in the The ceremonial bath, charitable gift

month of Bhdrapada. brahmins the

e t c . i n this V r a t a i s o f e v e r l a s t i n g b e n e f i t . O n t h e s e v e n t h d a y , h a v e t o b e fed a n d g o d s u n i s t o b e w o r s h i p p e d with mantra"Svh day with unto Khakkolka. Thou shall art The Parana attain following

i m m o r t a l , let T h y c o n t a c t b e p l e a s i n g for e v e r . " is on the eighth heaven. T h u s Marcasaptam is explained. 3-4. prayer pepper. T h e devotee

O n the s e v e n t h d a y o f t h e l u n a r m o n t h the d e v o t e e the sun-god. by himself With shall the be

s h a l l t a k e his b a t h a n d d u l y w o r s h i p brahmins.

" M a y t h e s u n - g o d b e p l e a s e d , h e s h a l l g i v e fruits t o t h e T h e fruits offered a n d t a k e n While offering the prayer

dates, coconuts or p o m e g r a n a t e s .

he shall think ' ' M a y all my desires be fulfilled". Thus Phalasaptam is explained: 5-6. After w o r s h i p p i n g o n e ' s o w n f a v o u r i t e d e i t y o n the d a y h e s h a l l feed b r a h m i n s w i t h m i l k p u d d T h e word O d a n a connotes all If chewed, sucked or licked ( l a m b a t i v e s ) . o f w e a l t h , sons, e t c . S a p t a m (seventh) M n d s o f foodstuffs the devotee

ings a n d shall drink a n y milk. is desirous

h e shall r e m a i n B r a h m i n s shall be

A n o d a n a ( n o t taking any of the foodstuffs). g i v e n d u e D a k s i n s a s well. Thus Anodanasaptam is explained. 7-8. Vijaya The devotee Vrata desirous

of victory but sun

shall

perform or

Saptam

taking

nothing of the

air,

the devotee (Arka) who abjures sexual

desirous of love shall eat leaves o b s e r v e fast. wheat, pulses, vessels, stony barley, the

plant

It yields everything he Sastika

desires. He

variety of rice,

bell m e t a l

vessels, w h e a t f l o u r , h o n e y , w i n e ,

meat,

i n t e r c o u r s e , oil b a t h , a p p l y i n g c o l l y r i u m a n d

gingelly seeds on

S a p t a m ( s e v e n t h ) d a y s i s t o b e c o n s i d e r e d a s h a v i n g fasted for s e v e n S a p t a m s (as e x p l a i n e d i n this a n d t h e n e x t c h a p t e r ) .

T.I 3 1 . 9 C H A P T E R ONE H U N D R E D AND THIRTYONE Sacred Rites Brahma said 1-2. : On the A s t a m (eighth) d a y in the bright and (Vratas)

387

half of as and shall

the m o n t h o f B h d r a p a d a , the goddesses D r v a n d f l o w e r s reciting the m a n t r a " O b e i s a n c e iva. O D r v , thou art of i m m o r t a l b i r t h . " taken by the n o t c o o k e d i n fire, shall b e attain everything he desires. T h u s Drvstam is explained: 3. seventh births. 4. The devotee shall observe fast and O n the e i g h t h Lord of Hari the phase day is in to the be dark half

Gaur

w e l l a s G a n e a a n d i v a a r e t o b e w o r s h i p p e d w i t h fruits, g r a i n s to a m b h u He O n l y r a w food,

devotee.

mingled Even

with if the three

R o h i n i star

worshipped.

m o o n r e m a i n s in the earlier p a r t of the T h i s V r a t a d i s p e l s t h e sin o f pray Tithi

day, there is no objection.

thus (lunar

"Obeisance day)

obeisance t o G o v i n d a , the lord o f Y o g a a n d Y o g a the

itself." T h e P a r a n a i s t o b e h a d when b o t h a n d the star c o m e to a close. 5. fices, the T h e m a n t r a for outcome of is

ceremonial bath is t h i s " O b e i s a n c e , sacrisacrifices, n a y t h e s a c r i f i c e itself." T h e as follows : " O b e i s a n c e , obeisance

o b e i s a n c e u n t o G o v i n d a t h e g o d o f sacrifices, t h e l o r d o f m a n t r a for w o r s h i p

u n t o G o v i n d a , the g o d of the universe, the lord of the universe, nay the universe itself" 6. The mantra for laying the deity to sleep i s " o b e i sance, o b e i s a n c e to G o v i n d a , the o u t c o m e of all, the g o d of all, the m o u n t a i n , the A l l . " T h e lord is to be w o r s h i p p e d on the b a r e ground. 7. shell S o a l s o the s t a r R o h i n i a c c o m p a n i e d b y t h e m o o n . T h e devotee shall take the holy with flowers, water in the conch fruits a n d s a n d a l p a s t e , kneel o n t h e the milky ocean, originating

along 8.

g r o u n d a n d give A r g h y a t o the m o o n . O m o o n G o d ! b o r n of from the 9. e y e s o f s a g e A t r i , b e p l e a s e d t o a c c e p t this A r g h y a o f S i m i l a r A r g h y a offerings shall be made to goddess

mine along with T h y consort Rohin.

388 r, Y a o d , fruits. 10-16. Nanda, Vasudeva and Bala,

Garuda Purnawith offerings of

T h e following n a m e s of the lord shall be (the dwarf) (slayer auri, of the

repeatVaikundemon of

ed : A n a g h a (sinless) V m a n a tha, P u r u s o t t a m a (consort Madhu) eyed), Varha Nrsirhha of Laksm) (the

(best o f m a n ) , V a s u d e v a , H r s k e a , M d h a v a Madhusdana (the divine B o a r ) , P u n d a r k k s a , (the lotusmanlion), Daityasdana Padmanbha, (Deathless (the cause Trilokea (destroyer Keava, Garudadhvaja, deity) Aparjita unithe

demons), Dmodara, (the verse) nance undefeated), and

Govinda, Acyuta, Ananta Deva Sargasthityantakranam dissolution) nor death), Visnu,

Adhoksaja, J a g a d b j a (the seed of the Andinidhana Nryana, (having (lord neither

of creation, susteof the three yellow

beginning worlds), akha

Trivikrama cakra

Caturbhu

(four-armed), (wearing

gaddhara,

Ptmbaradhara

garments) Divya (thedivine) Vanamlvibhsita (bedeckedwith the g a r l a n d s of wild flowers), r v a t s k a (having the natural (the support unto the After r e p e a t i n g t h e s e m a r k o n the chest n a m e d r v a t s a ) , J a g a d d h m a , of the u n i v e r s e ) , rpati, r d h a r a , H a r i . names the devotee shall pray

thus:Obeisance

deity in the form of B r a h m a n w h o m V a s u d e v a begot of Devak for t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e e n t i r e e a r t h . 17. existence. 18-21. art reputed to O L o r d of lords H a r i , save me O Lord ! Hari, Visnu, persons most in the thou who of of the saviour of even wicked the from the ocean ocean of of O d e s t r o y e r o f a l l sins, s a v e m e f r o m t h e O L o r d o f r , son o f D e v a k I , be O lord, I am

miseries a n d sorrow,

remember T h e e but once. rksa (lotus-eyed), protector. sance, I am

wicked ocean the

a l l w i c k e d p e r s o n s , s a v e m e f r o m the o c e a n o f s o r r o w . O P u s k a deeply immersed i g n o r a n c e . O G o d of gods, save m e . S a v e thee there is no other O b e i s a n c e u n t o the self-born V a s u d e v a , the whole Krsna, beneObeiand factor of cows a n d b r a h m i n s a n d obeisance to universe. fame,

G o v i n d a . L e t there b e p e a c e . ' L e t

t h e r e b e w e l f a r e . L e t m e b e the p o s s e s s o r o f w e a l t h , a vast realm.

1.132.9 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND THIRTYTWO Sacred Rites Brahma 1. said: The devotee shall (Vratas)

389

perform V r a t a on the eighth d a y When the V r a t a has been perT h i s is c a l l e d in the more

t a k i n g f o o d o n l y i n the n i g h t .

f o r m e d for a y e a r he s h a l l m a k e a gift of a c o w . 2. bright

S a d g a t i v r a t a a n d the d e v o t e e a t t a i n s t h e s t a t u s o f I n d r a . T h e s a m e V r a t a performed on the eighth d a y half is a hundred thousand times of the month of P a u s a is called M a h r u d r a v r a t a .

T h e fruit o f t h a t V r a t a 3. If Astam

fruitful, i f i t i s d e d i c a t e d u n t o m e . (eighth d a y in either half) and Wednesday c o i n c i d e , t h e V r a t a i s t o b e p e r f o r m e d . S u c h v o t a r i e s will n e v e r lose their riches as in the story. 4. have T h e d e v o t e e s h a l l a s p i r e for s a l v a t i o n a l o n e . H e m u s t devotion a n d full f a i t h . O n l y eight handfuls of shall be perfect

g r a i n s s h a l l b e u s e d for f o o d b y ' h i m a n d t h e h a n d f u l s with the t h u m b a n d the index finger stretched out. 5.

T h e f o o d i s t a k e n o n the l e a v e s o f a m a n g o t r e e m a d e The Kalambik water is (a tamarind taken

into a cup a n d covered with K u a grass. kind of green vegetable) cooked in alonsr desires. 6. In a pond or a river Budha

w i t h the f o o d . T h e fruit o f s u c h a V r a t a i s w h a t e v e r o n e (Mercury) the shall be

w o r s h i p p e d with the five u s u a l forms of p r o p i t i a t i o n or of worship. devotee 7. D a k s i n in accordance with capacity shall b e g i v e n .

articles of the

A K a r k a r ( w a t e r j a r with small holes

i n the b o t t o m )

full o f r i c e g r a i n s s h a l l a l s o b e g i v e n a s gift.

T h e mystic lotus symbol, etc. shall be used. T h e Bja T h e Agas

m a n t r a i s B u m B u d h y a S v h . T h e g o d shall b e c o n t e m p l a t e d as a r m e d with arrows a n d b o w and dark in colour. ( l i m b s ) are in the m i d d l e . 8. narrated 9. named T h e performer by scholars. shall There hear was the story of Budhstam a certain famous brahmin They had a virtuous son

n a m e d V r a i n t h e city o f P t a l i p u t r a . H i s wife w a s Kauika and Rambh. a daughter named Vijay. They had a

bullock n a m e d D h a n a p l a .

390 10.

Garuda

Purna

On a s u m m e r d a y the boy K a u i k a took the bullock by thieves forcibly. a n d wandercame there of Vijay and who so in

to the river G a g a n d b e g a n to p l a y with the cow-herds there. T h e bullock was stolen e d t h r o u g h t h e forest. 12. lotus 1 1 . T h e gi'ief-stricken b o y left t h e r i v e r b a n k T h e daughter t o fetch w a t e r a c c o m p a n i e d h e r b r o t h e r . T h e p o o r b o y b e c a m e thirsty came to search stalks 13. a l a k e w h e r e h e w a s s u r p r i s e d t o see t h e

r e m n a n t s of the articles of worship used by celestial damsels. He a p p r o a c h e d the divine damsels a n d begged them They this directed We for him shall the ''Practise Vrata. for f o o d for h i m s e l f a n d his h u n g r y sister. to perform the V r a t a saying give you f o o d . " 14. sake T h e c h i l d r e n p e r f o r m e d t h e V r a t a , the b o y two to o f r e c o v e r i n g t h e lost b u l l o c k D h a n a p l a a n d t h e girl for mangoleaf them by

securing a suitable h u s b a n d . T h e children took cupfuls of food given by the d a m s e l s . 15. 16. to him. now lady. loudly. 17. A s i s usual, the girl said

T h e children saw the bullock returned Vra on h a d been seeing grief-stricken. his I daughter give my

the thieves a n d r e a c h e d h o m e b y dusk T h e children bowed The ?" father he out the was blooming into a young mused of her Vrata. Vrata T h e y spent the night in sound sleep. " T o w h o m shall daughter

worried

"To Yama" performed

s o r r o w , b u t r e a l l y o n a c c o u n t o f t h e g o o d effects o f h e r T h e parents passed away and a g a i n for t h e s a k e o f k i n g d o m . 18. Kauika

As a result of the V r a t a . K a u i k a b e c a m e the king of Y a m a told

A y o d h y a n d g a v e h i s sister i n m a r r i a g e t o Y a m a . 19. noose There

V i j a y " B e the lady of my house in my own city." in Y a m a ' s city she saw her m o t h e r b o u n d by The grief-stricken Vijay remembered mother and tortured. 20-21. Vrata.

that the V r a t a h a d the potentiality of yielding salvation. S h e herself performed the V r a t a a n d the due attained salvation to the meritorious potentialities of the

S h e went to heaven a n d s t a y e d there h a p p i l y .

1.133.11
CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. : on with AND (Vratas)

391 THIRTYTHREE

T h o s e w h o c h e w e i g h t b u d s o f the A o k a tree of Caitra by sorrow.

the the

e i g h t h d a y i n t h e b r i g h t h a l f o f the m o n t h s t a r P u n a r v a s u will n e v e r b e t o r m e n t e d 2. O Aoka, favourite

of G o d i v a , blossoming in the am.

m o n t h o f C a i t r a , I a m c h e w i n g T h e e , grief-stricken t h a t I B e p l e a s e d t o m a k e m e free f r o m s o r r o w . Thus Aokstam is explained: 3. bright If the eighth a n d ninth Phases half of the bath moon and in

the

of the m o n t h of Avina coincide with U t t a r s d h a Ceremonial charity only

star it is called M a h n a v a m . 4. Navam, 5. ( Sasth)

o n t h a t d a y h a v e e v e r l a s t i n g benefits. E v e n if there is no overlapping of still Durg Astam, but can be worshipped. This is a great V r a t a e n e m y shall start sixth day rites O

o f e x c e l l e n t m e r i t p e r f o r m e d b y ever! a k a r a a n d o t h e r s . A k i n g d e s i r o u s o f o v e r t h r o w i n g his and Homa on the itself the V r a t a with J a p a previous

a n d s h a l l feed a v i r g i n e v e r y d a y . T h e V r a t a i s Of course, the concluding

then called Aycitdi V r a t a . are only on the N a v a m day. 6. are to 7.

In the worship the m a n t r a is " O b e i s a n c e to T h e e , All t h e be

D u r g , D u r g the protectress S v h . " vowel "A" The rites

nine goddesses

w o r s h i p p e d like this with t h e n a m e s e n d i n g i n l o n g o f N y s a i n t h e h e a r t , e t c . a r e w i t h t h e six Vasat, Hum, Vausat and the d e v o t e e Phat, and the t h u m b worship

words N a m a h , and ending 8.

Svh,

a l o n g w i t h the N y s a s o n t h e f i n g e r s b e g i n n i n g w i t h with t h e little finger goddess iv. O n the A s t a m itself n i n e w o o d e n h u t s

shall

(for nine g o d the golden

desses) or a single w o o d e n house is built in or silver i m a g e of the g o d d e s s is installed. 9-11. Durg has

which

I n s t e a d of idols, a t r i d e n t , a s w o r d , a b o o k , a c l o t h be used as the a object bow, a of worship. banner, a eighteen h a n d s . I n t h e n i n e left h a n d s s h e h o l d s a threat,

or a mystic d i a g r a m c a n

skull, a c l u b , a b e l l , a m i r r o r , a

392
drum goad, and a noose.

Garuda

Purna

I n the n i n e r i g h t h a n d s s h e h o l d s a a k t i spear, a thunderbolt, hands are a. s w o r d , a The

( J a v e l i n ) an i r o n c l u b , a remaining 12. rp and 13. colour, grey. left l e g goddesses have The eight

an arrow, a discus a n d a a l k (a tubelike d a r t ) . sixteen

without a l k and : Ugracand, Canda-

Damaru (drum). other goddesses Pracand, Gandogr, Candanyik, Cand, Candavat, Aticandik. T h e ninth g o d d e s s a n d U g r a c a n d are in the m i d d l e T h e others are in order of pigment yellow and rosy, dark, blue, smoke-coloured, white,

a n d are of fiery colour.

T h e y stand in the ldha pose (right knee a d v a n c e d a n d retracted). T h e M a h i s a (buffalo) demon is being hit by hold the of trying to catch 14.

s w o r d a n d his f i s t i s i n a n a t t i t u d e o f t h e tresses. 15. l e m too

After r e c i t i n g the t e n - s y l l a b l e d m a n t r a " O b e i s a n c e T h e g o d d e s s c a n b e w o r s h i p p e d o n the p h a l l i c emb-

t o M a h i s s u r a m a r d i n " the t r i d e n t s h a l l b e w o r s h i p p e d . a n d the sandals in water also. T h e s e must be a varies h a l l be be sacriduly

g a t e d Pj o n the A s t a m d a y a n d lasting also. 16-18. performed. ed to west, to A well g r o w n buffalo of five y e a r s T h e b l o o d c o m i n g out of the in the south-west, t o the north-east and f i c e d a t t h e close o f t h e n i g h t . Ptan A l l rites o f K l l m u s t

buffalo s h a l l b e offerto Vidrik in the

P p a r k s a s i n the n o r t h -

C a n d i k in

south-east.

CHAPTER ONE H U N D R E D AND T H I R T Y F O U R Sacred Brahm said 1. Hum : M a h k a u i k a m a n t r a w h i c h i s v e r y efficacious obeisance to Mahkauika, Tulva Orh Pulla is beHum Pulla Rites (Vratas)

ing m e n t i o n e d " O m Prasphura

Lala Lala Kulva Kulva Culva Culva Khalla

Khalla Mulva Mulva Gulva Gulva Tulva

1.135.2

393

Dhulva Dhulva Dhuma Dhuma Dhama D h a m a Mraya Mraya Dhaka Aveaya Dhaka Orh Vijpaya Om Vijpaya Vidraya Praya to Vidraya Aveaya Tata A Kampa Kampa Kampaya Kampaya Hrim Hrim Om with Tata Mada M a d a Hrm be given to Nirrti. 2. rice. T h e r e a f t e r , the k i n g shall of Indra with take flour gives his c e r e m o n i a l dough it to bath and make an image Vikha. 3-4. Vrh, Kl, I n the n i g h t , P j o f t h e m o t h e r s s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d . are :Brahmn, Cmund, Mhe, Candik, Kaumr, Jayant, Vaisnav, Magal, Dhtr. Mhendr, T h e mothers and beaten Skanda and Hum Praya obeisance

Ham Vam Vam Mahkauika

Hum

Nairrta.

consecrated o b l a t i o n i n s p i r e d

m a n t r a shall

H e then s e v e r s i t i n t o t w o a n d

Bhadrakli, 5.

Kaplin, Durg, Siv, K s a m and

S v h , S v a d h and obeisance unto T h e e . T h e goddess shall be b a t h e d in milk, etc. T h e devotee w i t h s m a l l gifts. B a n n e r s , v e h i c l e s , festoons, g a r m e n t s s h a l l b e the used iu Mahnavam shall propitiate Virgins, young women, Brahmins a n d P s a n d a s (heretics) 6.

the c e r e m o n i a l processions. T h i s worship on

d a y shall bless the devotee with victory a n d flourishing r e a l m .

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND THIRTYFIVE Sacred Rites Brahma said 1. brahmins. times. T h u s Vranavam is Brahma said 2. the g o d d e s s : the ninth day in the bright half of Caitra The shall b e worshipped with D a m a n a flowers. On explained. : bright half of Avina the ( Vratas)

On the ninth d a y in the

devotee shall take a single morsel a n d worship the

goddess a n d

H e shall r e p e a t t h e B j a m a n t r a a h u n d r e d t h o u s a n d

394 devotee fortune. shall He be shall blessed never with longevity,

Garuda health and

Purna good

b e v a n q u i s h e d b y his e n e m i e s .

Thus D a m a n a n a v a m is explained. Visnu said 3. : On the tenth d a y o f every m o n t h t h e d e v o t e e t a k e s At t h e end the

o n l y a s i n g l e m o r s e l a n d p e r f o r m s V r a t a for a y e a r presiding

o f t h e y e a r h e m a k e s a gift o f t e n c o w s a n d g o l d i m a g e s o f l o r d s h i p o f the w h o l e c o s m o s . T h u s Digdaam is explained. Brahm said 4. formed. sons. Pulaha, 5. : be

d e i t i e s o f t h e q u a r t e r s . H e shall e v e n t u a l l y a t t a i n the

W o r s h i p o f t h e s a g e s w i t h all m a t e r i a l s shall T h e devotee shall b e c o m e wealthy The Kratu, sages are Marci, Vasistha, Atri, Bhrgu and

perwith

blessed

After d e a t h h e s h a l l b e h o n o u r e d i n t h e R s i l o k a . Agiras, and Pulastya, garlands Pracetas, Nrada. The

w o r s h i p i s c a r r i e d o u t i n t h e b e g i n n i n g o f C a i t r a with of D a m a n a flowers. 6-7. Ekda.

T h u s has been e x p l a i n e d the A o k s t a m ; the Vrathe D i g d a a m and the (Rsi)

navam, the D a m a n a n a v a m ,

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED Riles

AND

THIRTYSIX

Sacred Brahm said 1. : the

(Vratas)

I shall e x p l a i n

rvana

Dvdai If the

Vrata

which and Hari

yields worldly enjoyments a n d salvation. 2. 3. morsel T h a t Tithi is called Vijay. If in the the d e v o t e e fasts,

eleventh Lord

twelfth p h a s e s o f the m o o n c o i n c i d e w i t h t h e s t a r r a v a n a , Worship of o n this d a y i s o f e v e r l a s t i n g benefit. t a k e s a l m s , t a k e s only a single d a y o r foodstuff i n t h e n i g h t w h e n n o t solicited

b y h i m h e d o e s n o t v i o l a t e t h e r u l e s o f the D v d a V r a t a .

1.136.12. 4. metal T h e devotee shall avoid on that day meat, honey, greed, day, sleep during the the use

395 of bell

vessels,

idle talk, exercise, s e x u a l application half of day of collyrium, the month of

intercourse, 5.

f l o u r , e t c . g r o u n d a t the g r i n d s t o n e a n d M a s r a d l a . T h e twelfth d a y i n t h e b r i g h t with Bhdrapada W e d n e s d a y a n d the star S r a v a n a coinciding

i s c a l l e d M a h a t D v d a . A fast o n this 6. of white 7-9. worshipped.

with ceremonial the deity also are

b a t h i n the c o n f l u e n c e o f t w o r i v e r s y i e l d s i m m e n s e b e n e f i t . G e m s shall b e p u t i n g o l d e n w a t e r p o t a n d cloths. An umbrella and a pair V m a n a shall be worshipped. T h e i m a g e is covered with a p a i r of sandals a c c o m p a n y the s a m e . W i t h the m a n t r a s specified t h e r e s p e c t i v e l i m b s

Om obeisance to Vsudevathe head O m o b e i s a n c e t o r d h a r a t h e face O m obeisance t o K r s n a t h e neck O m o b e i s a n c e t o r p a t i t h e chest Om obeisance to Sarvstradhrinthe arms O m obeisance t o V y p a k a t h e belly O m o b e i s a n c e t o K e a v a t h e lower s t o m a c h O m obeisance t o T r a i l o k y a p a t i t h e penis. Om obeisance to S a r v a p a t i t h e calves. O m o b e i s a n c e t o S a r v t m a n t h e feet T h e n a i v e d y a t o b e offered i s b u t t e r a n d m i l k p u d d i n g . 10. H e s h a l l m a k e gifts o f w a t e r p o t s , s w e e t awake at night. After O bath, meats, etc. and He shall keep 11. comforts." 12. T h e devotee shall give water pots to The brahmins Vrata can sayalso i n g ' ' M a y the g o d o f g o d s b e p l e a s e d " . everything he desires. camana

w o r s h i p b y offerings o f flowers h e shall p r a y a s f o l l o w s : "Obeisance unto Thee Govinda, bless B u d h a called me with all S r a v a n a , b e p l e a s e d t o d e s t r o y a l l sins a n d

b e p e r f o r m e d o n t h e b a n k s o f a river. T h e d e v o t e e s h a l l a c q u i r e

396 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED Sacred Rites Brahma said : 1. bestows T h e worship of the favourite G o d Kmadevatrayoda with on AND

Garuda

Purna

THIRTYSEVEN

(Vratas)

the

thirteenth etc.

day called

Madana

flowers,

s e x u a l p l e a s u r e , f r e e d o m f r o m s o r r o w a n d all d u e res-

pect from everyone. T h u s M a d a n a t r a y o d a i is explained. 2. whole The devotee s h a l l o b s e r v e fast o n t h e f o u r t e e n t h d a y for a iva. He shall enjoy all worldly in the bright half a n d on the eighth d a y in the d a r k half year and worship pleasures. T h u s Caturdayastam V r a t a is explained. 3. In the m o n t h of K r t t i k a the devotee excellent shall observe house. He fast for t h r e e d a y s a n d m a k e a gift o f a n s h a l l a t t a i n t h e r e g i o n o f the s u n . T h i s ed Dhmavrata. 4. in the O n t h e new m o o n d a y i f o n e offers l i b a t i o n s o f w a t e r If one worships in shall attain water everynames of the days of the week ( w i t h their presiding night, one t o the M a n e s i t h a s i m m e n s e benefit. d e i t i e s ) t a k i n g f o o d o n l y i n the thing. T h u s Vravratas have been explained. 5. name T h e d e v o t e e s h a l l w o r s h i p well L o r d Acyuta in the o f t h e t w e l v e s t a r s i n t h e t w e l v e m o n t h s (in a c c o r d a n c e 6. K e a v a is worshipped in the one month or of M r g a r s a . month of

excellent V r a t a is call-

with the n a m e ) . T h i s w o r s h i p can. b e t h e offered w i t h b u t t e r . 7. The inaugural in the

K r t t i k a . F o r t h e four m o n t h s o f t h e C a t u r m s a p e r i o d h o m a i s Naivedya is K r s a r a (gingelly seeds The r o u n d e d into balls with t r e a c l e ) . T h e n a i v e d y a in A s d h a , etc. is milk p u d d i n g . on this. The bath is in The remnant of naivedya (the constitutes b r a h m i n s t o o a r e t o b e fed g a v y a water. 8. f o o d o f the d e v o t e e . Before Visarjana ceremonial dismissal) Jaganntha all is usual materials can be used as Naivedya. When Paca-

the n i g h t

1.137.19 formally 9. take discharged All devotees that becomes during the

397 N i r m l y a ( r e m n a n t of the Paftcartra be (five for nights) a year O

offerings) . n a i v e d y a . T h u s the P j s h a l l 10. rish. continued

with special rites. T h e p r a y e r " O b e i s a n c e , obeisance the P u n y a art beyond unto Thee, A c y u t a , let t h e sins b e d e s t r o y e d ; let 11. O Acyuta, just as Thou (merit) flou-

L e t prosperity be everlasting. L e t my family flourish. the greatest,

B r a h m a n t h e S u p r e m e , O d e s t r o y e r of sins, O the u n k n o w a b l e , m a k e m y desire too u n d e g r a d e d ; m a k e m y actions u n d e g r a d e d . 12. knowable O Acyuta, O nanda, O Govinda, O of everlasting benefit. performed Make for it !" I f this V r a t a i s seven years the Purusottama, so O, Unlet m y d e s i r e b e 13-14.

devotee obtains longevity, prosperity a n d the goal of the g o o d . O b s e r v i n g fast o n t h e e l e v e n t h , e i g h t h , f o u r t e e n t h days for a R a v i ( s u n ) i n the o r d e r , the d e v o t e e regions. 15. attains taking and seventh year a n d worshipping Visnu, Durg, a m b h u , and their food respective received

He becomes p u r e a n d gets everything he desires. By taking a single morsel, by

u n s o l i c i t e d a t n i g h t , b y f a s t i n g o r b y t a k i n g only v e g e t a b l e s a l l d e i t i e s c a n b e w o r s h i p p e d i n all t h e T i t h i s . attain worldly pleasures a n d salvation. 16-19. worshipped the sun on on the K u b e r a , A g n i a n d t h e t w o Avin g o d s a r e t o b e on the first day. Durg r a n d Y a m a o n the s e c o n d ; a n d M o t h e r s o n the e i g h t h ; K u b e r a o n the tenth; the MaheT h e devotee shall

P r v a t a n d r o n t h e f i f t h ; N g a s a n d K r t t i k e y a o n the sixth, the seventh; the Taksaka vara on Ninth; Indra and

s a g e s o n t h e e l e v e n t h ; H a r i o n t h e twelfth; K a m a a n d thirteenth; B r a h m on manes on New M o o n and Full moon.

the fourteenth a n d the

398

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER ONE H U N D R E D AND THIRTYEIGHT The Solar Dynasty Hari said I. : I shall d e s c r i b e the l i n e a g e o f k i n g s a n d their e x p l o i t s .

F r o m t h e lotus c o m i n g o u t o f t h e n a v e l o f V i s n u a r o s e B r a h m a . F r o m B r a h m a ' s thumb rose D a k s a . 2-3. D a k s a ' s d a u g h t e r w a s A d i t i . A d i t i ' s son w a s V i v a s v n . was Manu. M a n u had nine s o n s Iksvku, Narisyanta, Nbhga, Dista V i v a s v n ' s son and aaka. 4. M a n u had a daughter Il of whom Budha (Mercury) three begot three sons: R a j a s , R u d r a a n d P u r r a v a s . sonsUtkala, Vinata and Gaya. 5. slaughter. 6. 7. Manu's His son P r s a d h r a b e c a m e descendant Karsa a d r a d u e t o cowKsatriya and H i s son w a s became a I l was trans-

aryti, Mrga, Dhrsta Prsadhra,

f o r m e d into a m a n n a m e d S u d y u m n a . S u d y u m n a b e g o t

a line of K s a t r i y a kings called K i r s a s s p r a n g from h i m . D i s t a ' s son N b h g a b e c a m e a . V a i y a . B h a n a n d a n a a n d B h a n a n d a n a ' s son was Vatsaprti. T w o other sons w e r e P m u a n d K h a n i t r a . T h e l a t t e r K s u p a ' s son was V i m a V i b h t i w a s his son. b e c a m e a k i n g a n d his s o n w a s K s u p a . a n d his s o n w a s V i v i m a . 8. 9. 10. mn. II. Budha. Ailavil. 12. 13. T r n a b i n d u begot of A l a m b u s a son named Vila; Srjaya was his his son w a s H e m a c a n d r a ; h i s son w a s C h a n d r a k a . D h m r v a w a s t h e son o f C a n d r a a n d born of D h m r v a . son w a s K r v a . 14. S o m a d a t t a w a s the s o n o f K r v a a n d h i s son was S a h a d e v a w a s t h e son o f S r j a y a a n d Vegavn was Dhundhumn's s o n a n d his son w a s and a daughter B u d h a h a d a son n a m e d T r n a b i n d u V i v i m a ' s son was K h a n n e t r a . V i b h t i ' s s o n w a s K a r a n d h a m a a n d his son w a s A v i k s i t a . M a r u t t a w a s his son a n d h e b e g o t N a r i s y a n t a . Rjavardhana's son was Sudhrti and Nariswas y a n t a ' s son w a s T a m a s a n d his s o n w a s R j a v a r d h a n a . Nara S u d h r t i ' s s o n . N a r a ' s son w a s K e v a l a w h o s e s o n w a s D h u n d h u -

1.138.29 J a n a m e j a y a whose son was S u m a n t r i . 15. aryti (Manu's son) These had a a son kings

399 are known Sukany who had daughdescensons son

a s V a i l a k a s ( b e c a u s e V i l w a s their c i t y ) . daughter Ananta who married the sage C y a v a n a , a n d a son n a m e d R e v a t a . ter R e v a t . 16. 17. was D h r s t a (another son of M a n u ) Nbhga (another son of h a d a line of Manu) dants who b e c a m e Vaiyas. h a d two N e d i s t a a n d A m b a r s a . A m b a r s a h a d a son V i r p a w h o s e Prsadava. 18. deva. 19. Iksvku ( a n o t h e r son of M a n u ) h a d three sons V i k u Vikuksi b e c a m e known as a d a beHis son Rathnara was a great devotee of V a s u -

R e v a t a h a d a son R a i v a t a a n d a

ksi, N i m i a n d D a n d a k a . c a u s e he a t e a rabbit. 20. 21. rta's son. 22. 23. Haryava. Hitva. 24. va. kutsa. married. Harita. 26. dasyu. 25.

a d a ' s son w a s P u r a j a y a

a n d his s o n w a s

Kakut-

s t h a . H i s s o n w a s A n e n a s . P r t h u w a s t h e son o f A n e n a s . V i v a r t a was the son o f P r t h u a n d r d r a was VivaH i s son was Y u v a n v a . H i s son was r v a s t a . B r h a d a v a w a s his s o n a n d his son was Kuvalva.

His son D r d h v a b e c a m e famous a s D h u n d h u m r a . H e h a d three sons n a m e d C a n d r v a , K a p i l v a a n d Nikumbha w a s t h e son of H a r y a v a and his son YuvanPuruwas

H i t v a ' s son w a s P j v a a n d his son w a s

M n d h t w a s his s o n w h o s e s o n w a s B i n d u m a h y a . H e h a d three sons M u c u k u n d a , A m b a r s a a n d He had fifty daughteis was whom the s a g e and his Yuvanva A m b a r s a ' s son Saubhari son

P u r u k u t s a b e g o t o f h i s wife

N a r m a d a the son T r a s -

A n a r a n y a w a s his s o n a n d h e b e g o t H a r y a v a . 27-28. H i s son was V a s u m a n a s whose son was T r i d h a n v . Haricandra. R o h i t v a w a s the son- o f

T r a y y r u n a w a s his s o n w h o s e s o n S a t y a r a t a b e c a m e f a m o u s a s Triaku who begot Hariscandra. 29. H a r i t a w a s his s o n . H i s s o n was C a c u and C a c a ' s

400 son was 30. 31. 32. son. 33. 34. was Suds. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. and son Vijaya. The Rum was born of Vijaya

Garuda

Purnawas son

and Vrka

his s o n . successor a n d son of V r k a was B h u whose was S a g a r a . S a g a r a b e g o t o f his f i r s t wife S u m a t i sixty the s e c o n d wife t h e o n l y s o n thousand sons a n d o f K e i n Asamajasa.

A r h u m n the s c h o l a r w a s h i s s o n a n d D i l p a w a s his r u t a w a s B h a g r a t h a ' s son a n d N b h g a w a s his s o n . S i n d h u d v p a . w a s his s o n . and Rtuparna A y u t y u was the son of S i n d h u d v p a

H i s son was B h a g l r a t h a who brought G a g to the earth.

His son was A m b a r s a a n d his s o n .

S a r v a k m a w a s R t u p a r n a ' s s o n a n d his s o n w a s who begot H i s son

S u d s ' s son b e c a m e famous as M i t r a s a h a

o f his wife D a m a y a n t t h e son K a l m s a p d a . H i s son was A v a k a whose son was M l a k a . His son was w a s the king D a a r a t h a whose son was Ailavila. V i v a s a h a whose son was K h a t v g a . son was Aja. H i s son was D r g h a b h u whose

A j a ' s son w a s D a a r a t h a w h o h a d four s o n s t h e v a l i a n t Rama's sons were K u a a n d L a v a . B h a r a t a ' s sons Citrgada. Kua's

Rraa, L a k s m a n a Bharata and atrughna. were T r k s a a n d Puskara. Candraketu. 40. 41. S a t r u g h n a ' s sons were S u b h u a n d r a s e n a . Nala was the w a s A t i t h i a n d his s o n w a s N i s a d h a . son o f N i s a d h a a n d N a b h a s w a s the P u n d a r k a w a s t h e s o n o f N a b h a s a n d his s o n w a s Ruru L a k s m a n a ' s sons were

son o f N a l a . Ksemadhanv. 42. 43. Vuktha 44. son. of was 45.

H i s son w a s D e v n k a w h o s e s o n w a s A h n a k a .

w a s his s o n w h o s e son w a s P r i y t r a . D a l a w a s t h e s o n o f P r i y t r a a n d his s o n w a s C h h a l a . was t h e son o f C h h a l a a n d his s o n , was Vajranbha.

G a n a w a s his s o n . U s i t v a was the son of G a n a a n d V i v a s a h a was his H i s son w a s P u s p a k a . Sudarana was born A g n i v a r n a whose s o n H i r a n y a n b h a w a s his s o n .

D h r u v a s a n d h i w a s his s o n a n d S u d a r a n a ' s son w a s

Dhruvasandhi. Padmavarna.

1.138.60
46. 47. Suketu. 48. 49. H i s son 50. 51. rom. 52. mn. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. was St. H e r brother was K u a d h v a j a . H i s son was H i s son was g h r a whose son was M a r u . U d v a s u ' s son was N a n d i v a r d h a n a whose

401 Prasuruta son was

w a s t h e s o n o f M a r u a n d his s o n w a s U d v a s u . H i s son was D e v a r t a whose son was B r h a d u k t h a . B r h a d u k t h a begot M a h v i r y a whose son was S u d h r t i . begot Haryava. H a r y a v a ' s son w a s M a r u w h o s e s o n w a s P r a t n d h a k a . w a s K r t i whose son was D e v a m d h a . His son was V i b u d h a w h o s e son his s o n a n d was Mahdhrti. was Hrasva-

H i s son w a s D h r s t a k e t u w h o

K r t i r t a w a s his s o n a n d his s o n w a s M a h r o m . Svarnarom was his s o n S r a d h v a j a w a s t h e s o n o f H r a s v a r o m a n d his d a u g h t e r Bhnu-

a t a d y u m n a w a s his s o n w h o s e son w a s u c i . U r j a n m w a s u c i ' s son a n d S a n a d v j a w a s his s o n . K u l a j i t w a s his s o n w h o s e s o n w a s A d h i n e m i k a . Siiprva. his son. Srjaya was born of him and K s e m r i was son w a s R m a r a t h a . born of Rmaratha and Upaguru his s o n w a s Suvarcas. Satyaratha was His

K u l i was b o r n o f S a n a d v j a a n d K u l i ' s son was A n a j a n a . s o n w a s r u t y u a n d his s o n w a s A n e n a s w a s his s o n w h o s e w a s his s o n .

H i s son was U p a g u p t a whose son was S v g a t a .

S v a n a r a was born of him and

H i s son was S u p r v a a n d Suruta was S u p r v a ' s son. J a y a w a s b o r n o f S u r u t a a n d V i j a y a w a s his s o n . H i s Rta. V t a h a v y a w a s his s o n a n d D h r t i w a s b o r n o f V t a t o b e d e v o t e d to> son w a s R t a a n d S u n a y a w a s the son o f 59-60. havya. rent Yoga.

B a h u l v a w a s his s o n a n d k r t i w a s his s o n . T w o diffe-

lines s t a r t e d f r o m J a n a k a w h o w e r e s a i d

402

Garuda

Purna

CHAPTER ONE H U N D R E D AND THIRTYNINE The Lunar Hari said 1. : I h a v e n a r r a t e d the n a m e s of to the n a m e s was of kings of B r a h m a n d the kings of the sage Atri the solar race. race. was Lord of born lunar Dynasty

N o w listen him. 2. 3.

N r y a n a ' s son

S o m a the m o o n - g o d T r bore the

was born

of Atri. T h e beloved

o f B r h a s p a t i n a m e d T r b e c a m e his wife. moon-god the son B u d h a ( M e r c u r y ) . the celestial d a m s e l Ayu, D h l m n B u d h a ' s son w a s and Amvasu. 4. H i s son 5. 6. A m v a s u ' s son was B h m a a n d was Sumantu was Jahnu's son his s o n w a s K c a n a . and Apajpaka was Suhotra and J a h n u was Suhotr's son. H i s son was B a l k v a whose son was K u a . was born of K u v a and given in Vivmitra was Purravas who begot of

r v a six s o n s r u t t m a k a , Vi.vvasu, a t y u ,

S u m a n t u ' s son.

H e h a d four s o n s K u v a , K u a n b h a , A m r t a r a y a

and Vasu. Gdhi G d h i ' s son. 7.

His daughter Satyavat was

m a r r i a g e to the

b r a h m i n s a g e R c k a w h o s e son w a s J a m a d a g n i , f a t h e r o f R m a (Paraurma). 8-9. V i v m i t r a h a d m a n y sons D e v a r t a , M a d h u c c h a n Purravas begot who N a h u s a who had four d a s , etc. A y u son o f

sons-Anenas, R a j i , R a m b h a k a a n d K s a t r a v r d d h a . T h e last o n e , K s a t r a v r d d h a ' s son, was S u h o t r a 10. -whose s o n 11. H i s son 12. 13-. enemies). His son was Rtadhvaja whose son was Alarka. Sannati was born of him. H i s son was S u n t a . His son was b e c a m e a king. He h a d begot Drghatamas K e t u m n was three s o n s K y a , K a a n d G r t s a m a d a . aunaka. Kya was a Dhanvahtari His son was great physician.

born of him. B h m a r a t h a whose son was D i v o d s a . Pratardana became famous as atrujit (Conqueror of

S a t y a k e t u w a s b o r n o f S u n t a a n d his s o n w a s V i b h u .

H i s son w a s S u v i b h u w h o s e son w a s S u k u m r a k a .

1.139.31 14. 15. Indra. 16. Ksatravrddha (son of N a h u s a ) had another Dhrstaketu was born of him and his^son

403

was

V t i h o t r a whose son was B h a r g a .

H i s son was B h a r g a b h m i . killed b y son

All these d e s c e n d a n t s of K y a were great devotees of

V i s n u . R a j i h a d f i v e h u n d r e d sons, a l l o f w h o m w e r e

n a m e d Pratiksatra whose son was w h o s e son w a s K r t a . 17. 18. Vrsaghna was born of

S a j a y a . H i s son was, V i j a y a Krta and his son was

S a h a d e v a whose son was A d n a . Sakrti was born

His son was J a y a t s e n a .

of J a y a t s e n a and K s a t r a d h a r m a s follows: gave birth to Y a d u a n d

w a s his s o n . N a h u s a h a d f i v e m o r e s o n s Y a t i , Y a y t i , S a r h y t i , A y t i a n d K r t i . Y a y t i ' s sons w e r e 19. His first wife D e v a y n Turvasu. His 20. s e c o n d wife

armisth, daughter of Vrsaparv,

bore h i m three s o n s D r u h y u , Anu a n d Pru. Y a d u h a d three sonsSahasrajit, K r o s t a m a n a s , a n d Sahasrajit had son was a son atajit who h a d two and Dharma was R a g h u . T h e eldest 21-23. was K u n t i . 24. 25. Haya's

sons : H a y a a n d H a i h a y a . Anaranya H a i h a y a ' s s o n . H e h a d a son named D h a r m a n e t r a w h o s e son

H i s son S h a j i w a s the father o f M a h i s m n w h o s e D h a n a k a w a s his s o n . H e h a d four s o n s K r t a v r y a , Arjuna was born along with of four Krtavrya and rasena was

s o n was B h a d r a r e n y a . H i s son was D u r d a m a . K r t g n i , K r t a k a r m a a n d K r t a u j a , all of w h o m were strong. born of him 26. brothersJayadhvaja, Madhu, of Jayadhvaja and Bharata and the Vrsni race

r a a n d V r s a n a . A l l t h e s e f i v e w e r e d e v o t e d t o s a c r e d rites. Tlajagha was born w a s his s o n . 27. 28. M a d h u was V r s a n a ' s son

f l o u r i s h e d after h i m . Ahi was born of K r o s t u a a b i n d u was born and Uaku w a s the son o f a n d he h a d two and the n o b l e - s o u l e d A h i . C i t r a r a t h a w a s his s o n . of Citraratha

w i v e s . T h e f i r s t wife b o r e h i m o n e h u n d r e d t h o u s a n d s o n s t h e s e c o n d wife a m i l l i o n s o n s : T h e y w e r e P r t h u k r t i , e t c . 29. Prthukrti had three

sons ; P r t h u j a y a , P r t h u d n a Prthuravas h a d a son n a m e d

and Prthuravas. T h e

last o n e

T a m a s w h o s e son w a s U a n a s .

404 30-31. and Hari. 32. Caidya. 33. 34. 35. 36. was Anu. 37. Satvaruta. 38. 39. 40. Vrsni's son. 41. 42. w a s the aibeyas. 43. Vrsni, vaphalka and of Citraka were His son was had Puruhotra these sons son whose son His son was K u n t i whose son

Garuda

Purna

H i s son's n a m e was i t a g u whose son r R u k m a Prthurukma, J y m a g h a , Plita J y m a g h a begot of o f his wife a i b y a s o n had whose a son B a b h r u son was king

kavaca had five sonsRukma, Of these named Vidarbha. whose son was

H i s sons w e r e K r a t h a a n d K a u i k a . Vidarbha) Rci

R o m a p d a (son

Dhrti. Kauika begot

was Vrsni.

H i s son

w a s N i v r t i a n d h e h a d D a r h a for his s o n . V y o m w a s his Madhuratha Devaksatra son a n d his J m t a was a n d his he his s o n . V i k r t i son w a s a k u n i . begot Devaksatra w a s b o r n o f h i m a n d h a d B h m a r a t h a for h i s s o n . was son K a r a m b h i w a s a k u n i ' s s o n a n d his s o n w a s D e v a m a t a . w a s his son and whose son was M a d h u . M a d h u ' s son was K u r u v a r h a whose son Amu begot

S t t v a t a w h o b e c a m e a k i n g w a s his s o n . Sttvata sonsBhajina, Bhajamna, Ayutjit, was

Andhaka, Mahbhoja, Vrsni, Divya and Devvrdha. Bhajamna's Mahbhoja's Anamitra ibi's son wereNimi, was Bhoja and Vrsni, atajit, Sahasrjit, B a b h r u , D e v a a n d Brhaspati. Sumitraka H e h a d three s o n s S v a d h j i t , A n a m i t r a a n d ini. h a d two was sons: Nighna and ibi. Nighna whose son was to Styaki. Yugantara you about in the

h a d two sons: Satrjit a n d P r a s e n a . Satyaka I have S a j a y a w a s his son a n d K u l i w a s b o r n son of K u l i . Thus of Sajaya. narrated

born

family of A n a m i t r a . B o r n 44. 45. Upamadgu was

v a p h a l k a i n his wife G n d i n , A k r r a a n d his s o n w a s (a

Akrra was a great devotee of V i s n u . the son o f D e v a d y o t a . Akrra h a d two other s o n s D e v a v n a n d U p a d e v a . Citra h a d two sons: Prthu and Viprthu. A n d h a k a son of S t v a t a ) h a d a son uci. w e r e t h e sons o f B h a j a m n a . Kukura and Kambalabarhisa

1.139.63 46. maka. who K u k u r a ' s son was D h r s t a whose son was

405 Kpotaro-

H i s s o n w a s V i l o m w h o s e son w a s T u m b u r u . 47-49. had a D u n d u b h i w a s his s o n a n d his s o n w a s P u n a r v a s u daughter the huk a n d a son Ahuka. Sahadev, Devaka and Suraksit, sons o f A h u k a . D e v a k a Upadev, h a d seven d a u g h -

U g r a s e n a were t e r s Devak,

Vrkadev,

rdev, and ntidev. A l l o f them married V a s u d e v a . S a h a d e v g a v e birth to D e v a and A n p a d e v a . 50. 51. Ugrasena had many sonsKamsa, Sunm, his son Vata a n d others. B h a j a m n a ' s son was V i d r a t h a whose son was r a . a m i n w a s t h e son o f r a a n d Hrdika had was his son was Pratik s a t r a w h o w a s father o f S v a y a m b h o j a . 52-55. Mris dhidev. sthira, he whose son was K r t a v a r m . in r a ' s sons were D e v a , atadhanus and Devamdhus; and

ten s o n s : V a s u d e v a a n d o t h e r s a s w e l l a s f i v e was adopted Prtha, as daughter by K u n t i who gave and N a k u l a and S a h a d e v a were

d a u g h t e r s P r t h , rutadev, rutakrti, rutaravas a n d R j Prth her in m a r r i a g e to P n d u . Bhma, and Kunti.gave birth to K a r n a , Yudhi-

t h e sons o f M d r t h r o u g h divine c o n t a c t with D h a r m a , Anila, Indra and 56. dev. others. 57. 58. Vinda and Anuvinda (i.e. were born of had Rjdhidev. m a n y other r u t a r a v a s bore a son iupla of D a m a g h o s a . Anakadundubhi Devak Vasudeva) wives besides 59. 60. 61. was Krsna. 62. a n d others m e n t i o n e d before, v i z : P a u Rohin gave birth to B a l a b h a d r a . the Avinidevas. D a n t a v a k t r a the bore indefatigable was born of rutaand K a i k a y a five sons: Antardhna

rutakrti

rav, Rohin a n d M a d i r .

Balabhadra begot of Revat atha, Niatha, Ulmuka, Krtimn, Her Of Susena, son Udrya, Bhadrasena, Rjudsa and the eighth Rukmin, of

S r a n a a n d o t h e r s . D e y a k g a v e b i r t h t o six s o n s : a n d B h a d r a d e v a a n d all o f t h e m w e r e killed b y K a m s a . seventh these the was Sariikarsana excellent H e h a d sixteen thousand wives. most ones were and Jmbavat. Each

S a t y a b h m , L a k s m a n , Gruhsin very vast.

these wives g a v e birth to eight sons a n d the family thus b e c a m e

406 63. cipal Pradyumna, Crudesna Pradyumna begot of and

Garuda

Purana

S m b a were the printhe powerful the son

ones. 64.

of K a k u d m i n I his wife was

son A n i r u d d h a . Aniruddha begot Subhadr V a j r a who b e c a m e a king. was C r u . 65. was an 66. In the line of Turvasu (son o f D e v a y n ) V a h n i was Bharga. His son illustrious m e m b e r whose M a r u t a w a s the son Pratibhu his s o n a n d his s o n

B h n u h a d a son K a r a n d h a m a by n a m e . s o n o f K a r a n d h a m a . N o w listen t o the lineage of 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. ratha. 76. D r u h y u . H i s son S e t u b e g o t A r a d d h a whose son his s o n w a s D u r g a m a

was G n d h r a and D h a r m a was born of G n d h r a . D h r t a was D h a r m a ' s son a n d w h o s e s o n w a s P r a c e t a s . N o w listen t o A n u ' s l i n e a g e . A n u ' s son was S a b h n a r a whose son was K l a j a y a . J a n a m e j a y a w a s his son whose was son w a s M a h l a . Vrsadarbha. AnoH i s s o n S r j a y a h a d P u r a j a y a for his s o n . H i s son was M a h m a n a s better known as U n a r a . i b i w a s his s o n w h o s e son t h e r s o n o f M a h m a n a s n a m e d T i t i k s u h a d a son R u s a d r a t h a . H i s son was H e m a whose son was S u t a p a s who b e g o t Andhra, and Paundra the ( a l o n g with the three m e n H i s son was DiviBali whose sons were Aga, V a g a and K a l i g a . t i o n e d b e f o r e ) w e r e B a l i ' s sons. Agapla was son of A g a . r a t h a whose son was D h a r m a r a t h a . R o m a p d a w a s t h e son C a m p ' s son w a s Brhanmanas was o f D h a r m a r a t h a a n d his s o n w a s G a t u r a g a . H i s son P r t h u l k s a h a d C a m p for his son. H a r y a g a whose son was B h a d r a the son of Brhadbhnu and his Dhrti. son H i s son B r h a t k a r m b e g o t B r h a d b h n u .

s o n w a s J a y a d r a t h a . V i j a y a w a s his s o n a n d his s o n w a s of Dhrtavrata. 77-78. his s o n . His son was

D h r t a v r a t a was the son of D h r t i a n d S a t y a d h a r m was the

A d h i r a t h a who a d o p t e d K a m a as son o f K a m a . N o w , listen t o t h e

Vrsasena

was the

lineage of Puru.

1.140.15 CHAPTER O N E HUNDRED AND F O R T Y Genealogy Hari said : 1. 2. 3. Janamejaya was the son of Puru and of the Pauravas

407

a n d his s o n w a s his son Sariijti

N a m a s y u w h o s e s o n w a s A b h a y a d a a n d his s o n w a s S u d y u . B a h u g a t i was the son of S u d y u h a d a son Vatsajti by n a m e who begot R a u d r v a R a u d r v a had sixsonsRteyu, Sthandileyu, K a k s e y u , a n d his son was Pratiratha married son of akuntal begot Manyu Krteyu, Jaleyu and Santateyu. 4 . R a t i n r a w a s R t e y u ' s son whose son M e d h t i t h i begot Ainila. 5. 6. 7. 8. His son Dusmanta (Dusyanta) son was Manyu whose father a n d begot B h a r a t a whose son was Vitatha. Vitatha's Nara ini. S a k r t i w h o s e son w a s G a r g a . G a r g a ' s son A m a n y u was t h e Trayyruni was born h a d a n o t h e r s o n n a m e d M a h v r y a w h o s e son w a s U r u k s a y a . of Uruksaya. Another son of Manyu named Vyhaksatra 9. h a d a son S u h o t r a who h a d three

sonsHastin, Ajamdha and Dvimdha. H a s t i n h a d the son P u r u m d h a . A j a m d h a ' s eldest s o n whose son Medhtithi a n d other descendants beBr/hadisu a n d his s o n was K a n v a 10. was

c a m e brahmins known as K n v y a n a s . A n o t h e r son o f A j a m d h a w a s His son Brhaddhanus. 11. 12. 13. was B r h a t k a r m a n whose son w a s whose of son Senajit b e g o t R u c i and his son w a s

Jayadratha. V i v a j i t w a s his s o n Pra was the was son r v a w h o s e son w a s P r t h u s e n a . Prthusena son who D v p a whose son was S a m a r a . Prthu h a d a son n a m e d Sukrti. Vibhrja Sukrti's wife h a d a son n a m e d A v a h a w h o b e g o t o f his son w a s Visvaksena. 14. 15. D v i m d h a ' s son was Y a v n a r a whose son was Dhrtim n w h o s e s o n S a t y a d h r t i w a s t h e father o f D r d h a n e m i . D r d h a n e m i ' s son was S u p r v a who was the lather of S a n n a t i whose son K r t a begot U g r y u d h a . K r t i a son B r a h m a d a t t a whose

408 16. ajaya 17. nti. 18. H i s son P u r u w a s father of Arka K s e m y a was his son of Vidratha. begot son of Nalin nti a Ajamdha whose son

Garuda

Purna

S u d h r a b e g o t Purson n a m e d N l a w h o

father

b e c a m e a king.

Nla's

was

who w a s father of Suwho begot Har-

y a v a w h o s e son w a s M u k u l a . 19-20. M u k u l a king of Pcla had five sonsYavnara, w h o s e son Brhadbhnu, K a m p i l l a , Srjaya and S a r a d v n a great devotee of V i s n u w h o begot of A h a l y D i v o d s a the second, was a t n a n d a whose son was S a t y a d h r t i . 21. celestial thman. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. Divodsa's H i s son son was Mitrayu whose son C y a v a n a b e g o t S u d s father o f S a u d s a . was Sahadeva who begot Somaka who had t w o s o n s J a n t u a n d P r s a t a the g r e a t . P r s a t a ' s son was D r u p a d a whose son D h r s t a d y u m n a A j a m d h a h a d another son R k s a . was Sarhvarana who begot Suhotra whose K u r u who h a d had H i s son begot Dhrstaketu. Satyadhrti's semen damsel took shape coming out on seeing U r v a the of a son K r p a and a daughter

K r p who m a r r i e d D r o n a and g a v e birth to the excellent Avat-

threesons S u d h a n u s , Parksit a n d J a h n u . Sudhanus begot Vasu's son C y a v a n a three sons: K r t a k a , U p a r i c a r a a n d V a s u . sons were B r h a d r a t h a , P r a t y a g r a , of them Brhadratha Satya and o t h e r s . T h e eldest of R s a b h a . 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. H i s s o n w a s P u s p a v n , father o f S a t y a h i t a w h o b e g o t Brhadratha had another son named Jarsandha S u d h a n v father o f J a h n u . w h o s e son S a h a d e v a b e g o t S o m p i father o f r u t a v n . H e h a d m a n y sons B h m a s e n a , U g r a s e n a , r u t a s e n a , His son Vidratha begot Srvabhauma father o f A p a r j i t a , J a n a m e j a y a . etc. J a h n u ' s son was S u r a t h a . J a y a s e n a whose son was A v a d h t a . H i s son A y u t y u begot A k r o d h a n a , father of Atithi whose son was R k s a . b e g o t K u g r a father

1.141.8 33. H i s son

409 B h m a s e n a b e g o t D i l i p a , father o f P r a t p a Vhlika were the brothers of D e v p i . Bhsma and

whose son was D e v p i . 34-35. Vhlka begot antanu four sons Somadatta, Bhri, Bhriravas a n d virtuous

l a . a n t a n u b e g o t o f G a g the 36-37. lik. Pndu Vysa and

most

of S a t y a v a t two sons: C i t r g a d a a n d Vicitravrya. Vicitravrya h a d two wives : A m b i k a n d A m b begot o f their of Ambik Dhrtarstra and of Amblik maid servant V i d u r a . Gndhr bore sons : D u r y o d h a n a a n d o t h e r s w h i l e Draupad and begot of Srutakrti, atnka

Dhrtarstra 38.

one hundred five

P n d u h a d f i v e sons. The brothers married her respectively Prativindhya, r u t a s o m a , and rutakarman. 39-41. these sons T h e ladies Y a u d h e y , H i d i m b , S u b h a d r (sister the P n d a v a brothers Abhimanyu respectivelyDevaka, Parksit Ghatotkaca, o f K r s n a ) , Vijay a n d R e n u m a t b o r e ( w h o was quick manyu's

of movement) Suhotra and Niramitra. Abhiw h o s e son was J a n a m e j a y a . N o w

son was

listen t o t h e n a m e s o f t h e future k i n g s .

CHAPTER

ONE

HUNDRED

AND

FORTYONE

Genealogy of the Pauravas and others Hari said 1. : T h e future k i n g s will b e Adhisomaka, these in order: atnka,

Avamedhadatta, Citraratha. 2-4. Nrpajaya, Tigma, Dandapni, thereafter. 5-8. be The

Krsna, Aniruddha, Usna, and will be:) uciratha, Hari,

( T h e o t h e r k i n g s i n the line Priplava, Sunaya,

Vrsnimn, Susena, Suntha, Nrcaksu, Brhadratha, atnka,

Mukhbna, Medhv, Udna, Ahnara,

Medhv, Nrpajaya, Sudna,

Nimittaka, future

Ksemaka and line of kings

a line o f d r a kings,

i n t h e I k s v k u r a c e will Srya, Sahadeva,

:Brhadbala,

Uruksaya,

Vatsavyha,

410 Brhadava, Bhnuratha, Pratcya, Prattaka,

Garuda

Purna

Manudeva, Sunathe virtuous and

ksatra, K i n n a r a , Antariksaka, Suparna, Krtajit, dana, Bhula, 9-11. Senajit, Ksudraka, Samitra,

Brhadbhrja, Krtajaya, Dhanajaya, Sajaya, kya, SuddhoKudava S u m i t r a . N o w listen t o t h e k i n g s o f M a g a d h a . J a r s a n d h a , S a h a d e v a , S o m p i , rutaravas, Ayumarula, Drdhaseand Isujaya. tyu, Niramitra, Svaksatra, B a h u k a r m a k a , rutajaya, Senajit, Bhri, uci, K s e m y a , Suvrata, D h a r m a , naka, S u m a t i , S u b a l a , Nita, Asatyajit, 12. Thereafter all the kings Vivajit

T h e s e k i n g s will b e t h e d e s c e n d a n t s o f B r h a d r a t h a . will b e d r a s o f evil a n d impious deeds. of heaven, etc. 13-14. the T h e r e are three Naimittik different i.e. the types of dissolution of dissolution world1) conditional N r y a n a the i m p e r i s h a b l e L o r d is the creator

2 ) P r k r t i k a (the n a t u r a l o r c o s m i c d i s s o l u t i o n ) a n d 3 ) t y a n t i k a o r t h e f i n a l a n d a b s o l u t e d i s s o l u t i o n . T h e E a r t h will d i s s o l v e into water. the T h e w a t e r will d i s s o l v e i n t o T e j a s ego ( H e a t ) . T h e heat will d i s s o l v e i n t o t h e Air, t h e A i r i n t o E t h e r a n d t h e E t h e r i n t o Cosmic o r A h a k r a , the c o s m i c e g o i n t o t h e c o s m i c I n t e l l e c t , t h e c o s m i c I n t e l l e c t i n t o J v a (the C o s m i c S e l f ) w h i c h will d i s s o l v e into A v y a k t a w h i c h will d i s s o l v e i n t o the A t m a n . 15-16. yana are avoid and T h e Atman is Nara which the the S u p r e m e L o r d V i s n u , N r All the other things destroyed. Hence have been is Imperishable. kings

p e r i s h a b l e . All Sin. O n e

s h a l l a l w a y s b e v i r t u o u s s o t h a t b y c a s t i n g off

sins o n e c o u l d a t t a i n H a r i .

CHAPTER ONE H U N D R E D AND FORTYTWO Greatness Brahm 1. said : of Sil

F o r t h e d e s t r u c t i o n o f t h e i m p i o u s w a y o f l i v i n g o f theprotection of the Vedic Religion, L o r d Hari

d e m o n s a n d the

i n c a r n a t e d i n t h e w o r l d a n d s a v e d t h e p i o u s lines o f kings.

1.142.16 2-3. The lord incarnated in the form of Fish,

411 etc.

T a k i n g the form of others. T a k i n g the

Fish he form

fought with the d e m o n H a y a g r v a lifted t h e m o u n t a i n

i n b a t t l e , k i l l e d h i m , r e d e e m e d the V e d a s a n d s a v e d M a n u a n d of a Tortoise he M a n d a r a o n his b a c k for the benefit o f a l l . 4-5. At the time of c h u r n i n g the milky o c e a n , he took the h o l d i n g t h e vessel t a u g h t the science sub-divisions to from t h e o c e a n . H e with its form of the first p h y s i c i a n D h a n v a n t a r i a n d full o f N e c t a r r o s e u p of medicine Suruta. nectar. 6. 7. I n c a r n a t i n g as a B o a r he killed H i r a n y k s a , extricated Incarnating as Nrsirhha ( m a n l i o n ) preserved the the he killed the t h e E a r t h f r o m his c l u t c h e s a n d s a v e d t h e d e i t i e s . demon Hiranyakaipu and its p r i n c i p l e s . 8. seven 9. land to Then Hari incarnated as freed t h e son of Jamadagni, Paraurma by name and (twentyone) times. The Lord Kayapa. then killed Krttavrya and a gifted a w a y After p e r f o r m i n g sacrifice t h e p o w e r f u l E a r t h of K s a t r i y a s thrice Vedic religion a n d and health eightfold

H a r i t o o k t h e form

of a lady a n d m a d e devas drink

lord m a d e a p e r m a n e n t stay on the m o u n t a i n M a h e n d r a . 10-11. of Desirous of incarnating as R m a , the suppressor h e d i v i d e d h i m s e l f i n t o four a n d D a a r a t h a ' s viz. Rma, to Bharata, Laksmana and the wicked,

four s o n s w e r e b o r n , atrughna. 12. serve the

R a m a ' s wife w a s J n a k . To do a good turn his s t e p - m o t h e r to a n d to preD a n d a k a forest

truthfulness o f his father h e c a m e

passing through m g a v e r a and Citrakta. 13-15. demons K h a r a , with his brother H e c h o p p e d off the n o s e o f r p a n a k h , killed t h e D s a n a , and R v a n a who abducted St along ( K u m b h a k a r n a ) . After in the kingdom i n s t a l l i n g his other of L a k he returned to

brother Vibhsana

A y o d h y i n the celestial c a r P u s p a k a a c c o m p a n i e d b y S u g r v a , H a n u m n a n d o t h e r s a n d his 16. He ruled over the c h a s t e wife S t o f g r e a t f i d e l i t y . kingdom, protected subjects, a n d other (horse sacrifice)

saved devas, performed A v a m e d h a

sacrifices a n d preserved righteousness.

412 17-18.

Garuia

Purna

R m a lived h a p p i l y with his l o y a l wife. A l t h o u g h S h e never a thought of anyone except

she stayed in the premises of R v a n a she never went over to h i m in mind, speech or action. Rma. 19. lived a ed him She was as good Anasy. I s h a l l tell y o u a b o u t the g r e a t n e s s o f S t b y n a r r a t i n g there t h e g r e a t n e s s o f c h a s t i t y . O n c e , i n t h e city o f P r a t i s t h n a , 20. In spite of like a god. chaste w o m a n as the celebrated

b r a h m i n n a m e d K a u s ' i k a w h o suffered f r o m l e p r o s y . his l o a t h s o m e d i s e a s e his wife w o r s h i p p Even when rebuked by him she never

ceased to venerate him. 21-22. tute's house, O r d e r e d by her h u s b a n d she took h i m to a prostitaking with her plenty of money. The sage

M n d a v y a w h o h a d b e e n i m p a l e d on b e i n g suspected as a thief unjustifiably a n d who was pining in darkness was inadvertently kicked by the b r a h m i n K a u i k a who was seated on his wife's with the die at shoulders. 23. sunrise." 24. night. 25. afraid. Many years went b y like this. T h e g o d s became T h e y w e n t t o B r a h m for h e l p . B r a h m t o l d t h e m . T h e splendour of asceticism I f the s u n is being subdued by not rise the for loss O n h e a r i n g t h a t , the wife o f K a u i k a s a i d , " T h e s u n S i n c e t h e s u n d i d n o t rise t h e r e w a s p e r p e t u a l will n e v e r r i s e . " M n d a v y a b e c a m e furious o n b e i n g k i c k e d tossed me with his foot foot a n d s a i d , " H e w h o shall

26-28.

this s p l e n d o u r o f c h a s t i t y , s i n c e t h e g r e a t n e s s o f t h e c h a s t e l a d y prevents the sun from rising. is yours as well as does men's. Hence, go to the chaste p r o p i t i a t e her wife o f making and

Atri, A n a s y , the holy w o m a n and the sun r i s e . " e n t r e a t e d her. 29.

T h e g o d s went to the chaste lady A n a s y

M a k i n g t h e s u n rise she r e s u s c i t a t e d K a u i k a t o o . I t

is said that S t was superior to even A n a s y in chastity.

1.143.12

413

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND F O R T Y T H R E E The Brahm said 1. : Story of Rma

N o w , I shall n a r r a t e R m y a n a on being

(Rama's

story) which

m i t i g a t e s sins 2. son.

h e a r d . B r a h m w a s b o r n o f the l o t u s of Sun Marci; Sun and Iksvku son was was born of

f r o m t h e n a v e l o f V i s n u a n d M a r c i w a s his s o n . Kayapa was born of K a y a p a ; M a n u was born 3. 4. Raghu's son was Manu's mighty the son

T h e k i n g R a g h u w a s a scion of this family. Aja whose w a s the

D a a r a t h a . H e h a d four v a l i a n t s o n s . R m a was born of Kausaly. Bharata was o f K a i k e y . T h e two brothers, L a k s m a n a , a n d a t r u g h n a were born of Sumitr. 5. mother. 6. married 7. Rma was devotedly attached to his father and H e learned the use o f m a n y m i r a c u l o u s T h e powerful R m a killed St. Laksmana married rmil. Bharata married Subhu sacrifice weapons from sacrificial he

V i v m i t r a . T h e n h e killed the ogress T d a k . at the altar of Vivmitra, Visiting the holy of J a n a k a ,

M n d a v a n d atrughna married rutakrti, b o t h of w h o m were the daughters of K u a d h v a j a . 8. Rma and his brothers returned to A y o d h y a c c o m T h e n B h a r a t a a n d a t r u g h n a went to away, the king that wanted t o g i v e his that to stay in p a n i e d b y their parents. 9. While

the former's uncle Y u d h j i t . they were k i n g d o m t o R m a , the best o f his for h e r s o n a n d a l s o d e s i r e d the forest for f o u r t e e n y e a r s . 10. F o r t h e benefit of-his father grass a n d went to Rma f o r s o o k his k i n g rgaverapura accomthrough Prayga sons. K a i k e y wanted R m a should go

d o m like a b l a d e of 11.

panied by Laksmana and St. Abandoning the chariot he passed reaching the m o u n t a i n Citrakta. 12. After the obsequies of U n a b l e to bear the pangs of his father, B h a r a t a accom-

separation from R m a the king D a a r a t h a passed away.

Garuda p a n i e d b y the 13-14. Bharata a r m e d forces c a m e t o Rma

Purna

and said"Please

c o m e b a c k to A y o d h y to rule over kingdom, n o b l e b r o t h e r d e a r . " B u t R m a d i d n o t like t h e i d e a . A s a s y m b o l for B h a r a t a his sandals. Thus dismissed, himself in Rama's kingdom stationing ruling kingdom he g a v e protected

N a n d i g r m a a n d never entering Ayodhy. a n d went over to Atri's hermitage. 15-16. came to

R m a left C i t r a k t a

After p a y i n g d u e r e s p e c t s t o S u t k s n a a n d A g a s t y a t h e m . R m a c u t off h e r e a r s she induced her brothers a n d nose. InTriiras

h e w e n t t o D a n d a k a forest. T h e r e the o g r e s s n a m e d r p a n a k h devour imically disposed 17. 18. Khara,

and D s a n a who c a m e over there. By means of his a r r o w s R m a s e n t t h e m t o Y a m a ' s a b o d e a l o n g with the fourteen t h o u s a n d R k s a s a soldiers. I n d u c e d b y t h e o g r e s s , R v a n a a s s u m e d the f o r m o f preceded deer an anchorite in order to a b d u c t S l t a n d c a m e there by M r c a in the guise of a deer. 19. while R e q u e s t e d by S t , R m a went out to b e g the b u t killed M r c a w h o c r i e d o u t " A l a s ! dying. 20. W h e n St asked h i m to go, L a k s m a n a too went out St Alas L a k s m a n a "

a n d on seeing h i m R a m a said, ' ' T h i s is only a deceptive trick of the ogress ! Surely S t has b e e n a b d u c t e d . " 21. 22. Getting He kept a suitable in opportunity Aoka Rvana abducted ( H e r e i n the S t a n d went b a c k t o L a k striking J a t y u o n the way. St the grove. f o r e s t ) R m a r e t u r n e d t o t h e h u t o n l y t o see i t e m p t y . 23-25. Grief-stricken R m a sought S t directed by him here a n d there. went southwards a he He cremated J a t y u and as a n d m a d e alliance with hooked point he cut m a d e Sugrva the 26. 27-28.

Sugrva. With a single arrow, with monkeys in Kiskindh h u g e like and while

off s e v e n

h u g e trees a n d killed Bali. H e

Lord of

himself remained in R s y a m k a . S u g r v a sent b r a w n y m o n k e y s mountains East came see in search of St to all quarters. T h o s e who went to West, N o r t h went to back. Those who South in search of St roamed in could not

forests, m o u n t a i n s , i s l a n d s a n d o n river b a n k s b u t her. H e n c e , they d e c i d e d on self-immolation.

1.143.46 29. words,

415 O n k n o w i n g the w h e r e a b o u t s o f S t f r o m S a m p t i ' s the elephantine monkey, leapt two across the kilogrove, thousand sitting hundred

Hanumn

a b o d e of sharks (the ocean) one metres wide. 30-31. There he saw St

in the A o k a

r e b u k e d by the ogresses, tormented by the d e m o n king R v a n a with the importunities about Rma. 32. He " B e my wife" a n d engrossed in thoughts her the signet ring and consoled gave

S t b y telling her a b o u t the welfare o f R m a . " I a m the m e s s e n g e r o f R m a , be grief-stricken. O noble daughter of Mithil, do not G i v e me a token that could

be recognised by R m a . " 3 3 . O n h e a r i n g t h a t , S t g a v e h e r crest-jewel t o H a n u m n s a y i n g " P l e a s e tell 34. him everything in Hanumn such a manner and as to set m a k e R m a take m e away quickly." " S o shall I " , said immediately a b o u t u p r o o t i n g the v a r i o u s trees i n t h e b e a u t i f u l g a r d e n n e a r by. After k i l l i n g P r i n c e A k s a a n d o t h e r d e m o n s let t h e m b i n d h i m . 35. B o u n d by Indrajit's m i r a c u l o u s w e a p o n s he was led " I a m H a n u m n the mesSurrender St to h i m . " monkey with his blazing feasting tail burnt the his t o R v a n a o n seeing w h o m h e said, senger of R m a . 36. tail. he voluntarily

O n h e a r i n g this, t h e i n f u r i a t e d d e m o n set f i r e t o his

T h e powerful 37.

city o f L a k . After b u r n i n g the city a n d himself and friends o n t h e d e l i c i o u s fruits o f M a d h u v a n a , t h e m o n k e y c a m e back to R m a , saying " m y L o r d , St has been f o u n d . " 38. He then handed over the crest-jewel Hanumn, to Rma. and Accompanied by L a k s m a n a , Sugrva, others, R m a m a r c h e d t o L a k . 39. V i b h s a n a , the younger brother of R v a n a , sought refuge in R m a who readily crowned him as the king of L a k in anticipation. 40. R m a g o t the b r i d g e c o n s t r u c t e d t h r o u g h N a l a a n d Suvela from the summit of c r o s s e d the s e a t o t h e m o u n t a i n Agada

w h i c h h e s u r v e y e d the city o f L a k . 4 1 - 4 6 . T h e l e a d e r s o f the m o n k e y h o s t w e r e N l a , A g a d a , Nala, Dhmra, Dhmrksa, Vrendra, J m b a v n , Mainda,

416

Garuda and many by the others. They attacked leaders were and and

Purna

Dvivida

demolished Laksmana The

the various

parts

o f the city o f L a k . R m a monkey like m o u n t a i n s o f Mahodara,

accompanied leaders among

fought w i t h t h e R k collyrium. Dhmrksa, Atikya, AkamIndrajit, killed Kumbha-

sasas of huge bodies dark the Devntaka, Narntaka, pana, karna. Rvana. 47. returned to Puspaka. 48-49. R m a ruled

demons

Vidyujjihva,

Mahprva,

Mahbala, Kumbha, Nikumbha, Matta, Makarksa, P r a h a s t a , V r a , U n m a t t a a n d the p o w e r f u l Rma killed them all. L a k s m a n a killed off his After c h o p p i n g

son o f R v a n a .

hands R m a

After S t h a d p r o v e d h e r c h a s t i t y b y p a s s i n g t h r o u g h all of them the city of Ayodhy over the rites i n the and in the celestial chariot

the blazing p y r e she was a c c e p t e d b y R m a a n d

kingdom

protecting the horse sacri-

s u b j e c t s like his o w n c h i l d r e n . fices, P i n d a d n a and other 50-51. Rma ruled

He performed ten

Gayrsa and charitable for eleven thousand presided were worshipped. of the R k -

gifts t o o . H e c r o w n e d his sons K u a a n d L a v a i n t h e k i n g d o m . kingdom years. a t r u g h n a killed the d e m o n L a v a n a . over d r a m a t u r g y . Agastya other sages Bharata

T h e y told R m a a b o u t the origin a n d antecedents Heaven.

s a s a s . F i n a l l y , w i t h all t h e p e o p l e o f A y o d h y R m a a s c e n d e d

CHAPTER O N E HUNDRED AND F O R T Y F O U R Incarnation Brahma said 1-2. greatness is : I shall n a r r a t e t h e story of V i s n u w h e r e r k r s n a ' s explicit. of evil. Vsudeva begot of Devak Vsudeva of Krsna

( L o r d K r s n a ) a n d B a l a , for t h e p r e s e r v a t i o n o f v i r t u e a n d the annihilation K r s n a sucked the b r e a s t s of the ogress P t a n a n d killed her.

1.145.1 3. The akata (Cart)

417 d e m o n was upset, a n d the twin

A r j u n a trees w e r e u p r o o t e d , t h e s e r p e n t K l i y a w a s h u m i l i a t e d a n d t h e d e m o n D h e n u k a ( C o w ) w a s t h r o w n off. 4-5. and he was and burden T h e mountain G o v a r d h a n a was honoured by promised Indra. were H e freed protection lifted u p b y K r s n a the Earth o f its The

for A r j u n a a n d o t h e r s . demon

d e m o n s A r i s t a a n d others 6-7. Karhsa was

killed; the

Kein was

slain a n d t h e c o w h e r d s w e r e b l e s s e d a n d d e l i g h t e d . T h e wrestlers C n r a a n d M u s t i k a w e r e killed a n d thrown off his c o u c h a n d killed. L o r d H a r i h a d T h e i r sons a n d g r a n d s o n s w e r e son Pradyumna who killed

e i g h t p r i n c i p a l wives R u k m i n I , S a t y a b h m a n d o t h e r s , b e s i d e s sixteen thousand other women. hundreds of thousands 8 He begot of R u k m i n i a in number. husband of

a m b a r a . H i s son w a s A n i r u d d h a w h o b e c a m e the U s , the d a u g h t e r o f B n a . 9. wherein 10. tial tree 11. Lord city

( I n t h e c o n t e x t o f A n i r u d d h a ' s love-affairs w i t h U s ) Hari" and Bna Lord a k a r a ensued thousand hands hands. N a r a k a t o o w a s killed brought on earth. The a n d t h e celesasuras^ Bala, when in the the was of were c h o p p e d off, l e a v i n g

a great battle between L o r d h i m w i t h o n l y two Prijta

By the L o r d ,

i u p l a a n d the m o n k e y D v i v i d a w e r e killed b y h i m . A n i r u d d h a ' s son w a s V a j r a w h o passed away. and set He made b e c a m e king Hari of S n d p a n i his p r e c e p t o r of protecting

a n d r e u n i t e d h i m with his s o n . Mathur deities.

He installed U g r a s e n a

a b o u t the task

CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND FORTYFIVE The Brahm said 1. Fighting I for : s h a l l n a r r a t e briefly t h e story o f t h e M a h b h r a t a . the sake of Pndavas and others Lord / Krsna Story of the Mahbhrata

r e l i e v e d t h e E a r t h of its b u r d e n .

418 2. Visnu. Atri. rva. 3-4. His son was Ayu. In his line Brahma Atri was born o f the lotus Soma his s o n . He from begot

Garuda

Purna of

the n a v e l was

was B r a h m a ' s son.

(moon)

born of

Budha (Mercury) was

Purravas of

the kings Y a y t i , born of qualities T h e first

B h a r a t a , K u r u a n d a n t a n u were b o r n .

Bhsma was

a n t a n u a n d G a g . H e w a s e n d o w e d with all g o o d 5. 6-8. o f the k i n g Ambik a n t a n u h a d t w o sons o f his wife S a t y a v a t . by a

a n d he b e c a m e a master of the P u r n a called B r a h m a v a i v a r t a . s o n G i t r g a d a w a s killed of G a n d h a r v a of the s a m e n a m e . Vysa begot of

T h e other son Vicitravrya married the two d a u g h t e r s K . When he passed away his wife D h r t a r s t r a a n d of A m b l i k the son P n d u great prowess, the chief of

a n d a n o t h e r son V i d u r a o f t h e m a i d - s e r v a n t . D h r t a r s t r a b e g o t of G n d h r one h u n d r e d sons of whom was Duryodhana. Pndu his wives K u n t a n d M d r . 9 . v T h e f i v e sons w e r e : Y u d h i s j h i r a , Nakula and Sahadeva. 10. struggle frightened Pndavas. 11-12. After setting f i r e t o the h o u s e o f l a c , t h e P n d a v a s guise of brahmins a n d stayed s a v e d t h e m s e l v e s b y their s h r e w d i n t e l l i g e n c e . T h e p u r e - h e a r t e d noble-souled P n d a v a s took the the d e m o n B a k a . 13. valour hand. 14. With the permission of D r o n a and Bhsma, Dhrtarstra brought them b a c k a n d gave them half the k i n g d o m with the c a p i t a l at I n d r a p r a s t h a , the excellent city. 15. T h e y built a fine Assembly Hall and performed the sacrifice R j a s y a after d u e p e r f o r m a n c e o f s a c r e d r i t e s . A r j u n a m a r r i e d S u b h a d r , the sister o f V a s u d e v a a t D v r a k a n d K r s n a b e c a m e his lifelong friend. T h e y h e a r d o f t h e S v a y a m v a r a ( v o l u n t a r y self-choice territory. Prowess a n d the condition for m a r r y i n g h e r they w o n her of h u s b a n d ) of D r a u p a d in the P c l a being i n the h o u s e o f a b r a h m i n i n t h e v i l l a g e o f E k a c a k r a n d killed ensued and between nervous D u e t o the w o r k i n g o f F a t e a n the Kauravas Duryodhana Bhmasena, Arjuna, enmity to and mutual The the All of them were very valiant. and Pndavas. began harass w a s b l e s s e d w i t h f i v e sons i n

1.145.28 16. From Agni (fire-god) he got the divine

419 chariot

N a n d i g h o s a , the b o w o f g r e a t r e n o w n i n the t h r e e w o r l d s n a m e d G n d v a , inexhaustible supply of arrows and a coat of mail that could not be pierced 17. dava. 18. H e d e f e a t e d m a n y k i n g s i n his c a m p a i g n o f c o n q u e s t He gave gladly a m a s t e r of all these statesmana n d won precious gems a n d jewels. t o h i s b r o t h e r , the n o b l e Y u d h i s t h i r a , ship. 19. U n f o r t u n a t e l y the r i g h t e o u s Yudhisthira along with h i s b r o t h e r s w a s d e f e a t e d i n a deceitful f r a u d u l e n t g a m e o f d i c e by the wicked D u r y o d h a n a . 20. The wicked Duryodhana akuni. followed the counsel thereafter the of Karna, Dusana 21-22. sage and sages. In For the one and The Pndavas T h a t bow through. h e l d i n his h a n d , w i t h K r s n a for his h e l p

B l b h a t s u ( A r j u n a ) p r o p i t i a t e d t h e f i r e g o d i n t h e forest o f K h n -

u n d e r w e n t g r e a t h a r d s h i p s for t w e l v e y e a r s i n t h e forests they were

forest.

a c c o m p a n i e d by

D h a u m y a , their wife D r a u p a d , a n d m a n y o t h e r b r a h m i n s y e a r they stayed i n t h e city o f V i r a t a i n T h e y saved a herd of cows a n d thus being recognised c l a i m to their k i n g d o m . o f their full s h a r e t h e y w a n t e d o n l y wanted only H e n c e , they fought (great divisions) the of In the absence

disguise. 23.

they p u t forward their

half the kingdom a n d if that were not given they five villages. T h e y did not get any of these. a b a t t l e in K u r u k s e t r a with their vast hosts. 24. 25. chief of 26. They In had seven Aksauhins Bhsma was a r m i e s a n d the K a u r a v a s h a d eleven the beginning Duryodhana's army. Aksauhins.

commander-into

A terrific b a t t l e n o t inferior e n s u e d thereafter.

the battle of gods a n d demons

A t t h e h e a d o f the a r m y o f P n d a v a s w a s i k h a n d i n . I t w e n t o n thus for ten d a y s . was pierced with h u n d r e d s of arrows by awaited UttarH e performed

I n the battle, w e a p o n s were m e t with w e a p o n s a n d arrows were split with arrows. 27-28. ikhandin and taught Bhsma

Arjuna a n d thrown down. H e many religious precepts.

y a n a (for his f i n a l d e a t h ) . H e m e d i t a t e d o n L o r d G a d d h a r a . M r Yudhisthira T a r p a n a for t h e m a n e s . F i n a l l y , h e m e r g e d h i m s e l f i n the pufll

420 Bliss o f S u p r e m e G o d freed o f a l l sins. 29. 30. T h e b a t t l e c o n t i n u e d for f i v e d a y s

Garuda

Purna

between of

Drona arrows,

a n d D h r s t a d y u m n a i n a g r e a t terrific m a n n e r . M a n y kings perished in that Vast ocean After s i n k i n g i n the o c e a n o f s o r r o w , D r o n a f i n a l l y p a s s e d a w a y and attained heaven. 31. Then Karna took u p the leadership, and fought A r j u n a . After t w o d a y s ' b a t t l e h e s a n k i n t h e o c e a n arrows a n d attained the S o l a r region. 32. 33. T h e n a l y a fought w i t h Y u d h i s t h i r a b u t b y m i d d a y T h e powerful D u r y o d h a n a He was killed by s e i z e d his c l u b a n d rushh e w a s killed b y a r r o w s b l a z i n g like f i r e . ed at B h m a as terrible as G o d of death. 34-35. mace. the powerful B h m a w i t h his killed hundAvatthm, t h e son o f D r o n a , i n f u r i a t e d b y the d e a t h of Arjuna's

o f his father w e n t t o the battle-field a t n i g h t a n d sons o f D r a u p a d . 36. (a

reds o f s l e e p i n g s o l d i e r s . H e killed D h r s t a d y u m n a a s well a s t h e When D r a u p a d began to bewail, Arjuna caught hold a n d severed his crest-jewel with a n A i s i k s t r a a n d the son of [He being a brahmin

of A v a t t h m

grass blade a r r o w ) .

p r e c e p t o r w a s n o t killed b y A r j u n a . T h e s e v e r a n c e o f the crestjewel was symbolical 37-38. of widows Yudhisthira a of slaughter]. the h u n d r e d s On being consoled by Bhma, kingdom and performed of Ydavas i n the H e c o n s o l e d Y u d h i s t h i r a a s well a s plunged in misery. took

b a t h , p e r f o r m e d T a r p a n a t o the pitrs, d e v a s H e r u l e d over the the

and grandfathers. 39. On

horse sacrifice w i t h d u e gifts. hearing destruction

civil w a r d u e t o the f i g h t with t h r e s h i n g r o d s , the k i n g r e p e a t e d o n e t h o u s a n d n a m e s o f V i s n u , c r o w n e d P a r k s i t i n the k i n g d o m a n d a s c e n d e d H e a v e n i n the c o m p a n y o f his b r o t h e r s . 40-43. demons, to wicked. In i n g the m i l k gods. A m a n Vsudeva protect the ocean he will i n c a r n a t e to wipe as B u d d h a at the t i m e to to delude kill the gods, off evil, a n d

twentieth M a n v a n t a r a

of churntaught and

incarnated as Dhanvantari and story o f the

S u r u t a , s o n o f V i v m i t r a , the w h o l e o f A y u r v e d a , t o e n l i v e n w h o h e a r s the Mahbhrata the i n c a r n a t i o n s o f V i s n u shall a t t a i n H e a v e n .

1.146.8 CHAPTER ONE HUNDRED AND FORTYSIX Description Dhanvantari 1. others. 2. The words Roga, Ppm, Jvara, Vydhi, O said: of Diseases

421

S u r u t a , 1 I shall n o w m e n t i o n t h e p a t h o l o g y of a l l the sages Atreya and Vikra, are all

d i s e a s e s c o r r e c t l y a s n a r r a t e d before b y

D u s t a m , Amaya, Y a k s m , Ataka, synonyms (meaning sickness). 3. The

Gada and Bdh consists of five

diagnosis of diseases

essential

c a t e g o r i e s , i.e. N i d n a (Pathology) Prvarpas (Preliminary stages) Rpas (Indications) U p a a y a (amelioration) S a m p r p t i (Localisation a n d cure) 4. N i d n a o r P a t h o l o g y is m e n t i o n e d b y t h e s e words (cause), Hetu Utthna ( R e a s o n ) , Ayatana Krana is (exciting that factor). as wellNimitta (Pathology), It is

Pratyaya (belief), 5. about 6.

from this t h a t P r v a r p a ( p r e l i m i n a r y s t a g e ) T h e preliminary t o set stage

i s inferred. sickness

wherein the

in b u t not excited by all D o s a s exhibits Uncertain

symptoms. W h e n t h e s a m e m a n i f e s t s itself i n v a r i o u s i n d i c a t i o n s i t Other words trait), synonymous with C i h n a (sign) and (manifestation), L i g a is called R p a (Indications). (symptom), Laksana Akrti ( s h a p e ) . 7-8. its causes, T h e alleviative or employment of medicines, diet a n d antagonistic to the disease or such antidotes, is called is Stmya (identity).
He work is 100; is the was CDHM

this a r e S a m s t h n a ( f i x a t i o n ) , V y a j a n a (characteristic

general conduct of the patient U p a a y a (Amelioration).

1. Author and compiler of

c a p a b l e of producing

Another term
the famous

Suruta-Samhit. century. There (CSL p.

earliest writer to deal with surgery. translation p. 3 1 2 ) .

He is later than C a r a k a . His Vullers.

translated in A r a b i c before the end of the eighth by Hepler a n d o n e in G e r m a n by

a Latin

422

Garuda

Purna or

T h e o p p o s i t e o f this i s c a l l e d A n u p a a y a ( n o n a m e l i o r a t i o n ) Vydhi-Astmya 9. being sation The D o s a s , the and 10. tance, three cure. ( n o n - i d e n t i t y w i t h the s i c k n e s s ) . by the Pitta2 r e m o v a l o f sickness

e r a d i c a t i o n o f the a n d K a p h a 3 not

principles of V y u 1 , Other

i n their n o r m a l p r o p o r t i o n )

is called S a m p r p t i (localithe change

terms are Y t i a n d Agati. t i m e o f the d a y , varieties. or suspense) preponderance their i m p o r -

S i c k n e s s a n d its p a t h o l o g y differ d u e t o varieties.

o f s e a s o n s , force o f their a t t a c k , and the n u m b e r of 11. which or

A s for e x a m p l e , n o w w e

a r e g o i n g t o s a y t h a t fevers a r e o f eight

What is mentioned as Vikalpa ( d o u b t

differentiates o n e d i s e a s e from a n o t h e r i s

deficiency o f t h e m o r b i d p r i n c i p l e s o f v y u , p i t t a a n d k a p h a . various diseases or dependence of t h e different p r i n c i p l e s o n the

I m p o r t a n c e a s the d i f f e r e n t i a t i n g c h a r a c t e r i n means independence 12. i n a c t i n g a s e x c i t i n g factors o f sickness.

Differentiation d u e to potency is to be based

full c o m p l e m e n t o f t h e v a r i o u s e x c i t i n g f a c t o r s . season, next. 13. Thus t h e m e a n i n g o f the the word or the period that lapses

Differentiation

d u e to the time factor is the various units of time as night, day, between one meal a n d the Nidna has been

e x p l a i n e d briefly n o w . say, in brief, therefore o f the 14. diet

I t will b e e x p l a i n e d i n d e t a i l

later on. To

c a u s e of all illnesses is t h e u p s e t t i n g dosas is resorting (i.e. to in

e q u i l i b r i u m of the three D o s a s . T h e c a u s e o f the u p s e t o f the

A h i t a ( u n w h o l e s o m e ) things w h i c h a r e o f t h r e e t y p e s m e d i c a t i o n and c o n d u c t ) as mentioned before. 15-16. The Vyii (the

p r i n c i p l e c o n n e c t e d with n e r v e It is

forces, v i t a l a i r s , e t c . ) b e c o m e s u p s e t u s u a l l y i n s u m m e r , t o w a r d s the c l o s e o f the n i g h t o r the d a y o r a t the e n d o f a m e a l . also c a u s e d by gluttonous eating or taking in bitter, sour, astringent, hot a n d c o a r s e p a r c h i f y i n g a r t i c l e s o f food. R u n n i n g , lifting up heavy objects, keeping awake at night too long, loud shouting, s u d d e n o n s l a u g h t , s h o c k o f fear a n d s o r r o w , a n x i o u s b r o o d ing, e x e r c i s e s a n d e x c i t e d s e x u a l i n t e r c o u r s e a l s o c a u s e the u p s e t of the V y u 17. principle. The principle o f P i t t a m ( i . e . b i l e c a u s i n g defective the season of a u t u m n , midday

metabolism) is usually upset in

1.146.24

423

or m i d n i g h t or in the course of digestion or acidification of food t a k e n in. an upset. 18-19. T a k i n g i n a r t i c l e s o f f o o d t o o hot, p u n g e n t s o u r , a n d G e t t i n g angry m a y also cause the u p s e t o f Pitta. T h e principle of K a p h a or lesm (i.e. phlegm upset in belching c r e a t i n g a b u r n i n g s e n s a t i o n in t h e b o d y is a l s o a c a u s e for s u c h

controlling secretions or excretory process) usually gets the forenoon, early parts of the nights, in the a n d i m m e d i a t e l y after greasy, taking food when vomiting,

season of spring

e t c . a c c o m p a n i e s it. F o o d s t u f f s sweet, s o u r , t o o s a l t i s h , oily a n d very heavy, (indigestible), too cold a n d fluid a n d s o u p Other causes are sleeping d u r i n g the like i n n a t u r e t o o c a u s e t h e u p s e t o f K a p h a . sedentary habits, day and 20. ous sleeplessness, indigestion, eructation. T h e S a n n i p t a or a c o m b i n a t i o n of these d e r a n g e d and green,

h u m o u r s takes p l a c e d u e to various causes. T a k i n g in a miscellanea s s o r t m e n t o f food, i r r e g u l a r a n d i n c o m p a t i b l e m e a l s , 21. S t a l e beverages a n d wine, dry vegetables and indigestion cause S a n n i p t a . raw radish, etc., asafoetida, oilcakes, putrefying or dry m e a t a l l these c a u s e a j u m b l e d u p s e t o f four h u m o u r s . 22. S u d d e n c h a n g e o f diet i n d u c i n g t h e u p s e t o f a l l h u m the seven (i.e. the Dhtus viz., secretions, o u r s , e x p o s u r e t o a g u s t o f w i n d from front affecting vital elements of the b o d y cause Sannipta. 23-24. I f the food i s ill c o o k e d o r s p o i l e d i n v a r i o u s w a y s , i n d i s c r i m i n a t e l y , i f the various treatill directed, if sinful d e e d s a r e i f b i l e - p r o d u c i n g stuffs a r e e a t e n m e n t is untimely a n d tion of deranged

b l o o d , f l e s h , fat, b o n e s , m a r r o w s a n d s e m e n ) a n d o t h e r d i s o r d e r s

c o m m i t t e d , if the stars a r e m a l i g n a n t , a s a n n i p t a or c o m b i n a h u m o u r s results. I n t h e c a s e o f w o m a n p o s t not properly remedied with chemical may in cause the this. blood Various parturition disorders

S o m e t i m e s t a k i n g i n o f A p h r o d i s i a c s a l s o u p s e t s this. illnesses result t h e r e f r o m changes b a s e d o n t h e n a t u r e o f the d i s e a s e .